Quattro Pro 9 Manual

Quattro Pro 9

Copyright ©1999 COREL CORPORATION and COREL CORPORATION LIMITED. All rights reserved. For more complete copyright information please refer to the About section in the Help menu of the software.

Table of contents Chapter 1

Welcome to Quattro Pro 9 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1 2 8 14

. . . . . . . . . . . Displaying, arranging, resizing, and hiding windows . Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components . Customizing menus . . . . . . . . Customizing keyboards . . . . . . . Customizing toolbars and dialog boxes . . . . Saving your workspace . . . . . . . Saving and closing notebooks . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 23 24 31 34 39 45 48 49 51 59 60 65 69 71 74 76 77

Using Quattro Pro documentation What’s new in Quattro Pro 9? . Where did it go? . . . . .

. . .

. . . .

. . .

. . .

.

.

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

Chapter 2

Getting started

Chapter 3

Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro

. Opening and saving Microsoft Excel workbooks . . . . Working with Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

83 84 86

Chapter 4

Working with project templates

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

89 90 92 95

. . . . . Working with Quattro Pro Experts . . Working with toolbars. . . . . Working with the Application Bar . . Navigating in spreadsheets and notebooks Selecting cells, rows, and columns . . Adding and deleting cells, rows, and columns Adding, deleting, and moving spreadsheets Naming spreadsheets . . . . . Specifying Quattro Pro settings . . . Changing your view of the notebook . .

. Creating projects using templates . . Working with project template categories . Using the PerfectExpert panel . . .

. . . .

. . . .

Table of contents

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

i

Chapter 5

Creating a spreadsheet

. Creating and opening a notebook Working with data . . .

. . .

. . . . . . Working with labels and special characters . . Working with numbers . . . . . Working with dates and times . . . . Automatically entering data . . . . Deleting values and labels . . . . . Restricting and annotating cell data . . Creating simple equations . . . . . Using math tools to calculate rows and columns Using QuickSum and Calc-As-You-Go . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

97 97 99 99 103 104 107 114 114 116 118 121

Chapter 6

Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions Working with formulas . . . . . . Working with the Formula Composer . . . Moving and copying formulas and referenced cells. Working with spreadsheet functions. . . . Working with arrays . . . . . . . Tracing and editing errors in formulas and functions Setting cell addresses. . . . . . . Naming cells . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

123 124 131 136 139 144 147 150 153

Chapter 7

Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

159 159 166 169 174 183 187 191 193 195 207 211

ii

. Editing spreadsheet data . . . . . . Editing grouped data. . . . . . . Copying and moving data . . . . . . Formatting cells and applying styles . . . Working with fills, patterns, and borders . . Aligning data . . . . . . . . Working with numeric formats . . . . . Working with date, time, and currency formats . Working with custom formats . . . . . Sizing rows and columns . . . . . . Working with page breaks. . . . . . Table of contents

Creating headers, footers, and margins .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

213

Chapter 8

Organizing and manipulating data

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

217 217 221 224 227

Chapter 9

Analyzing data

. . . . . . . . . Using statistical analysis tools . . . . . . . Using frequency distribution tables . . . . . . Using regression analysis . . . . . . . . Using matrix operations . . . . . . . . Using the Scenario tool . . . . . . . . Using What-If tables . . . . . . . . . Using goal seeking with the Solve For tool . . . . Finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

235 235 240 242 244 245 252 254 254

Sorting data . . Filtering data . . Consolidating data . Working with outlines

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

Chapter 10 Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

259 261 264 265 268 272 276

Chapter 11 Using databases .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

281 282 287 292 295 297 302

Chapter 12 Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

305 306 308

Creating Cross Tab Reports . . . . . Creating Cross Tab Reports using OLAP data sources Formatting Cross Tab Reports . . . . . Formatting Cross Tab Report fields . . . . Formatting OLAP Cross Tab Reports and report fields Manipulating Cross Tab Reports . . . . . . . . Creating notebook databases . . . Preparing notebook database search queries Querying notebook databases . . . Querying external databases . . . Importing data from external databases . Using Database Desktop . . . . Choosing a charting tool . Selecting chart data . .

. .

. .

. .

. . . . . . . . .

. .

Table of contents

iii

Working with line and area charts . . . Working with bar charts . . . . . Working with pie, doughnut, and column charts Working with specialty charts . . . . Working with XY charts . . . . . Working with High-Low charts . . . . Working with radar charts . . . . . Working with variance charts . . . . Working with surface charts . . . . Working with combination charts . . . Working with bullet charts . . . . Working with analytical charts. . . . Working with Aggregate charts . . . . Working with Moving Average charts . . . Working with Linear Fit charts . . . . Working with Exponential Fit charts . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing relationships and creating tables from analytical charts . Working with 3-D charts . . . . . . . . Changing the chart type . . . . . . . . Editing charts . . . . . . . . . . Editing x and y axes . . . . . . . . . Changing x-axis properties . . . . . . . . Changing y-axis properties . . . . . . . . Customizing legends and titles . . . . . . . Adding graphics to charts . . . . . . . . Changing colors and fill of chart objects . . . . . Managing charts . . . . . . . . . Sharing Quattro Pro charts . . . . . . .

Chapter 13 Adding graphics to spreadsheets Creating graphics . . . . Managing and sharing graphics . Working with Clipart. . . . Designing borders, lines, and shapes Making text into graphics. . .

iv

. . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

Table of contents

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312 317 322 327 328 330 334 336 338 340 341 345 345 348 349 351 353 356 359 362 365 366 371 375 379 382 384 386

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

393 393 399 403 404 409

. . . Creating text box graphics . . . Editing and customizing graphics .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

409 410 414

. . . . Setting up map data . . . . . . . . Creating, sizing, and moving maps . . . . . Representing data using colors, patterns, and overlays . Displaying map data by color or pattern . . . . Displaying region and static overlays on maps . . . Working with city and location overlays . . . . Moving and resizing legends, titles, and objects . . Editing maps . . . . . . . . . Editing map legends . . . . . . . . Saving and copying maps . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

421 422 424 427 428 429 431 435 437 442 446

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

449 449 453 454 458 461 467 469

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

471 471 472 473 482 487

. . Working with Quattro Pro macros . Working with PerfectScript . . . Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with Quattro Pro .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

489 490 492 501 504

Creating TextArt

.

. . .

. . .

. . .

Chapter 14 Adding maps to spreadsheets

Chapter 15 Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro

. Creating slide shows . . . . . . . Previewing slide shows and changing the view . Using master slides . . . . . . . Using slide transitions . . . . . . Editing and formatting slides . . . . . Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps . Playing slide shows . . . . . . .

Chapter 16 Printing

. . . . Setting up a printer . . Previewing a print job . Customizing print settings. Printing selected print areas Printing to a file . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . Choosing a macro creation tool

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

Chapter 17 Using macros

Table of contents

v

Working in Developer mode . Creating macro applications .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. . Recording macros using absolute and relative cell addresses . Attaching macros to other notebooks . . . . . Attaching macros to buttons . . . . . . Attaching macros to toolbars . . . . . . Playing macros . . . . . . . . . Playing Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . Playing PerfectScript macros . . . . . . Playing keystroke macros . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . Playing macros attached to buttons, notebooks, and startup macros . Debugging macros . . . . . . . . . Debugging Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . . Debugging PerfectScript macros . . . . . . . Customizing application settings using macros . . .

Chapter 18 Using OLE automation with OLE objects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

519 521 521 523 524 528 529 529 530 531 531 534 534 539 542

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

545 546 554

. . Working with controls on the spreadsheet . . . Customizing and managing controls on the spreadsheet

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

571 572 575

Chapter 20 Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

579 580 585 599 599 612 617 617 619 626 630 633 637

Using Quattro Pro with Lotus Notes Using OLE automation . . .

. .

. .

. .

Chapter 19 Creating controls on the spreadsheet

Developing a dialog box . . Adding dialog controls . . Assigning control properties .

. . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning properties to individual controls . . . . Assigning other properties . . . . . . . Attaching actions to dialog controls. . . . . Connecting controls . . . . . . . . Linking controls . . . . . . . . Using macros to display the dialog box on a spreadsheet Working with child controls . . . . . . Creating Help and tips for controls . . . . . Editing dialog boxes . . . . . . . .

vi

. . .

Table of contents

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. Editing and moving dialog controls .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

637 641

. . . File-handling options. . . . . . Opening, saving, and customizing file formats Importing, inserting, and combining files . Importing text files . . . . . . Inserting a file into a notebook . . . . Combining files using Paste Special . . . Linking and embedding objects . . . Importing and exporting graphic formats . Creating notebook links . . . . . Using Version Control. . . . . . Sending a notebook by email . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

651 652 653 661 661 668 669 672 680 682 691 695

Chapter 22 Using Workgroups and password protection

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

697 697 701 702 703

Chapter 23 Working with the Internet

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

709 709 715 718 724

Editing and managing dialog boxes

. .

Chapter 21 Managing files and data .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . . .

. Publishing spreadsheet data in HTML Using XML with Quattro Pro . . Working with Web queries . . Working with Web links . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

Using Workgroups .

. Comparing notebooks . Reviewing notebooks . . Using password protection

. . . .

Table of contents

vii

WELCOME TO QUATTRO PRO 9

1

Quattro Pro lets you create professional spreadsheet-based documents to help you manage data. It provides all the tools you need to produce tables, financial forms, lists, databases, charts, reports, or any other type of data-oriented document. With Quattro Pro, you can create a notebook that contains a single spreadsheet or an entire project, complete with spreadsheets, reports, charts, and a slide show presentation. A notebook is saved as a single file that you can publish to paper, electronic media, and the World Wide Web. Quattro Pro does not limit you to a spreadsheet presentation. You can present your spreadsheet data in charts, or present only relevant information in dynamic Cross Tab Reports, which continually reflect the current state of the data they summarize. Once you enter data, you can edit the format and structure of your notebooks at any time.

About Corel Corporation Corel Corporation is recognized internationally as an award-winning developer and marketer of productivity applications, graphics, and Internet software. We pride ourselves in delivering high-quality products by actively seeking your input. We use this feedback and respond quickly to you, the users of Corel products worldwide. Corel ships its products through a network of more than 160 distributors in 70 countries worldwide. Corel is traded on the Toronto Stock Exchange (symbol: COS) and the NASDAQ National Market System (symbol: COSFF).

Welcome to Quattro Pro 9

1

For more information about Corel and its products, browse to our World Wide Web site at www.corel.com.

Using Quattro Pro documentation Quattro Pro includes online and paper documentation to help you learn and use the application efficiently. The Quattro Pro 9 documentation set Online Help

Online Help lets you quickly retrieve all the information you need. Help appears in a separate window on your screen. For quick access, you can keep the Help window displayed on top of the application window.

Context-sensitive Help

Context-sensitive Help displays information relevant to the task you are currently performing. Context-sensitive Help provides help for menu commands, toolbar buttons, dialog boxes, and dialog box controls. You access context-sensitive Help by clicking the What’s This? button, then clicking the item you want information about.

QuickTips

The QuickTips feature provides information about menu items and toolbar buttons. QuickTips are displayed in a balloon when you position the cursor over a menu item or toolbar button.

User Guide

If you use Quattro Pro as part of WordPerfect Office 2000, you can refer to the Quattro Pro section of the WordPerfect Office 2000 User Guide for help.

Corel Reference Center

If you use Quattro Pro as part of WordPerfect Office 2000, you can find additional help in the Quattro Pro book in the Corel Reference Center.

We want your feedback If you have any comments or suggestions about Quattro Pro documentation, you can email them to [email protected] or mail them to the address listed below. Unfortunately, we won’t be able to respond to your messages individually. Quattro Pro Product Manager Corel Corporation 1600 Carling Avenue Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1Z 8R7 Fax: (613) 728-9790

Documentation conventions Before you start using Quattro Pro, it’s important to understand the conventions used in the documentation.

2

Quattro Pro 9: Chapter 1

Mouse conventions The following are conventions related to using the mouse: When you see this...

Do this...

Click File, New

Click the File menu with the mouse, and click New in the menu

Click Insert, Graphics, Clipart

Click the Insert menu, click Graphics, and click Clipart in the submenu that appears

Enable a check box

Click the check box to place a check mark or an “X” inside the box

Disable a check box

Click the check box to remove the check mark or “X”

Select text

Click and drag to highlight text

Click an object

Click anywhere on an object

Click a slide

Click anywhere on a slide

Right-click, and click Paste

Click the right mouse button, and click Paste in the submenu that appears

Keyboard conventions The following are conventions related to keyboard actions: When you see this...

Do this...

Press ENTER

Press the Enter key

Press CTRL + SHIFT

Press the Control key and the Shift key at the same time

Using online Help You can access online Help in four ways: use the Contents page to select a topic. use the Index page to search for a topic. use the Find page to search for specific words and phrases in Help topics. ask the PerfectExpert to search for topics based on a question you enter in your own words. use the Corel Knowledge Base to search for information on the Corel home page. The Showcase Quattro Pro page, located in Contents, illustrates many tasks you can do. Click in the illustrations for specific help about a task.


3

To access Help topics 1 Click Help, Help Topics. 2 Click one of the following tabs: Contents — to browse through topics by category Index — to see a list of index entries. Type the first few letters of the subject about which you want information Find — to search for a specific word or phrase in the online Help. All topics containing the word you type are listed. Type more than one word to narrow the search Ask The PerfectExpert — to search for help in your own words Corel Knowledge Base—to search for information on the Corel home page on the Internet To keep the Help window on top of the application you’re working on, open a Help topic, then click Options, Keep Help On Top, On Top.

Accessing context-sensitive Help You can access context-sensitive Help from the menus, dialog boxes, and toolbars in Quattro Pro. The most common ways to access context-sensitive Help are as follows: To get help on...

Do this...

Menus and toolbar buttons

Position your cursor over the menu item or toolbar button for QuickTip information.

Dialog boxes

Click the Help button in the dialog box. Press F1.

Dialog box controls

Click the What’s This? button in a dialog box, and click the dialog control for which you want help. Right-click the control, and click What’s This? Right-click the control.

Printing Help topics You can print specific online Help topics or entire sections of online Help.

4


To...

Do this...

Print an entire section

On the Contents page, choose the section to print, and click the Print button in the Help dialog box.

Print a selected topic

Click the Print button at the top of the Help window. Right-click the window and click Print Topic.

Using the Corel Reference Center The Corel Reference Center contains online manuals for WordPerfect Office 2000 in Adobe Acrobat Portable Digital File (.PDF) format. You can search the manuals to quickly find the information you need.

To access the Corel Reference Center from Quattro Pro 1 Click Help, Help Topics. 2 Click the Contents tab. 3 Double-click Reference Information. 4 Double-click View Manuals. 5 Double-click Go to the Reference Center.

To access the Corel Reference Center from Windows 1 Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar. 2 Click Programs, WordPerfect Office 2000, Setup & Notes, Corel Reference Center. You can find the Corel Reference Center (refcntr.exe) in the folder COREL\SHARED\REFCNTR on the WordPerfect Office 2000 CD-ROM. If you did not install the Corel Reference Center when you installed WordPerfect Office 2000, you can do so by performing a custom install.

Asking the PerfectExpert Quattro Pro 9 comes with several built-in experts that are ready to help you with any task. The PerfectExpert is a Help panel that appears on your desktop and includes the best features of QuickTasks, templates, and Coaches, combined with information from online Help and the power of a natural language interface.


5

Ask the PerfectExpert is another expert Help tool. Using this tool, you can type questions about tasks you want to perform and Ask the PerfectExpert searches through all the Help files included in WordPerfect Office 2000, listing topics that best match your question.

To use Ask the PerfectExpert 1 Click Help, Ask the PerfectExpert. 2 Type your question. 3 Click the topic that matches your task, then click Display.

Viewing program and system information Quattro Pro provides easy access to information about the program, license information, and your system. Program information consists of the application name, version number, serial number, and user name. This information doesn’t change. You’ll find it particularly useful if you ever need help from Corel Technical Support Services. System information consists of details about any of the following categories: system, display, printing, Corel .EXE and .DLL files, and system .DLL files. For example, you can see how much memory you have on the drive to which you want to save a file. You can save any system information in a text file called SYSINFO.TXT.

To view product and license information 1 Click Help, About Quattro Pro. 2 Click one of the following buttons: Copyright License

To edit the serial number and PIN 1 Click Help, About Quattro Pro. 2 Click the Edit Serial/PIN button. 3 Type the serial number in the Serial Number box. 4 Type the personal identification number in the PIN box.

To view program and system information 1 Click Help, About Quattro Pro.

6


The About Quattro Pro dialog box displays the version number and registration information for your software. 2 Click the System Info button to view system information. 3 Choose a category from the Choose A Category list box. Click the Save button to store system information for printing. System information is saved as SYSINFO.TXT. A message box tells you where the file is saved.

Visiting the Corel Web Site The Corel Web Site provides helpful information about Quattro Pro on the World Wide Web. You can use the Corel Web site to get information about projects and templates, Web queries, and macros. You can also get information about technical support, helpful tips and tricks, learning and certification, and service bureaus. If you have a browser and a connection to the Internet through a service provider or your network, you can go to the Quattro Pro product index, which contains links to: Frequently Asked Questions and their answers Technical Information Documents, support newsgroups, and help by email Information about Corel products Downloadable upgrades and replacement software

To go to the Corel Web Site Click Help, Corel Web Site.

To get more information about Quattro Pro from the Corel Web site Click...

To get information about...

File, New From Project

Projects and templates

Tools, Macros Online

Macros

Tools, Internet, Web Queries Online

Web queries


7

To get general information from the Corel Web site Click Help, Corel On The Web...

To get information about...

Technical Support

Technical support

Tips And Tricks

Tips and Tricks

Learning And Certification

Learning and Certification

Approved Service Bureaus

Service bureaus

What’s new in Quattro Pro 9? Quattro Pro 9 has new and enhanced features to help you create and present your spreadsheet information, including increased compatibility with other spreadsheet applications and increased summarization and report capabilities. Enhancements and new features have been added to the following list of features: notebook features file features desktop customization and navigation features formula and spreadsheet function features formatting features Internet capabilities database, analysis and summarization features macro features

More notebook features Quattro Pro now offers larger notebooks and has added workgroup functionality. For information about how to use workgroups, see “Using Workgroups” on page 697.

Larger notebooks The new file format for version 9 increases notebook capacity to approximately 1,000,000 rows x 18,000 columns x 18,000 sheets. The new format gives Quattro Pro greater capacity for converting Microsoft Excel notebooks without truncating data.

8


Workgroups feature Quattro Pro lets you distribute a notebook to users in a workgroup so that they can read and edit a project. Multiple users can open and edit the same notebook simultaneously. Changes by others are added to a cell change history when the notebook is saved. Sharing a notebook lets you perform tasks much more quickly. The notebook review process, similar to WordPerfect’s document review feature, lets you review individual changes and accept or reject them as required. Notebook comparing allows you to compare different notebooks to examine trends. For example, you could compare a notebook that records the sales of a particular wine during 1988 with a notebook recording sales for 1998.

More file features Quattro Pro 9 has increased file compatibility with Microsoft Excel, allowing users to open and edit Microsoft Excel documents in Quattro Pro. Quattro Pro has adopted a new file format, but remains compatible with previous versions of Quattro Pro. For more information about opening files in other file formats, see “Opening, saving, and customizing file formats” on page 653.

Smaller file sizes A new process for saving files creates smaller files, reducing the amount of disk space needed for storage. Improvements with the new file format allows version 9 to decrease the saved file size. Large amounts of data can be saved while using less disk space.

User defined size You can specify the size of the spreadsheet to make the end of the scroll bars more useful and ensure data is not written outside of the desired range. For more information, see “Changing the size of your notebook” on page 660.

Native Microsoft Excel formats The version 9 file format contains all of the object records found in Microsoft Excel 97, increasing file compatibility with Microsoft Excel. Information that cannot be used in Quattro Pro 9 can be stored in the file format and later converted back to Microsoft Excel. For more information, see “Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro” on page 83.


9

More desktop customization and navigation features Quattro Pro has increased its customization capabilities, allowing you to customize your desktop to best suit the tasks you are performing. Quattro Pro has also increased the navigation features to make creating and navigating spreadsheet data easier. For more information about customizing your desktop and navigating, see “Getting started” on page 19.

Customize toolbars, menus and shortcut keys Underlying changes to the application give you the ability to customize the menu structure and shortcut keys in addition to the toolbars.

Compatibility settings The compatibility settings for version 9 have been expanded and reorganized in their own settings panel. To ensure file compatibility with Microsoft Excel 97, Lotus 1-2-3, and previous versions of Quattro Pro, presets for notebook size and other options have been added. In addition, you can customize the settings for individual use. For more information, see “Using compatibility settings” on page 55.

Page Breaks View A new view lets you view data in a draft mode that shows the location of page breaks. This feature is consistent with the page break preview option found in Microsoft Excel 97. New view manual options let you view comments and formulas in place. In addition, comment boxes can be moved by clicking and dragging the comment to a new location. Comments and formulas can be printed in place. For more information, see “Changing your view of the notebook” on page 59.

Corel RealTime Preview With Corel RealTime Preview, you can preview changes to your cell data’s font type, size, color, and background color while you scroll through these options. For information about Corel RealTime Preview, see “Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components” on page 65.

Enhanced Go To To help you navigate through large amounts of data, the Go To dialog has been revised to provide additional options for finding data. You can find a cell or range of cells, comments, formulas, values, labels, comments, named cells, and many additional options. For more information, see “Using Go To” on page 37.

10


Browse By You can quickly navigate to different parts of the document using a browsing mechanism similar to WordPerfect. For more information, see “Using Browse By” on page 38.

More formula and spreadsheet function features Quattro Pro has added formula and function calculation features to make calculating data easier. For more information about how to calculate formulas and spreadsheet functions, see “Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123.

Natural language processing and Auto-Total Inserting a total label above or next to tabular data will insert totals automatically for the rows or columns. Natural language processing provides an easier method to create formulas based on data labels and provides additional compatibility with similar features found in Microsoft Excel 97.

QuickFunctions Frequently used functions have been added to the toolbar for easy access. This feature enhances the Quick Total toolbar button.

Formula markers Cells containing formulas are marked with a small blue triangle in the lower-left corner of the cell so you can see at a glance which cells contain formulas. Placing the mouse over a formula cell displays a QuickTip showing the formula.

Function Tip-As-You-Type feature Functions used in creating formulas can be difficult to use when several values need to be passed to the function. Seldom used or complex functions often require you to look up the function in online Help to find the values to provide to the function and the proper order in which to specify them. The Function Tip-As-You-Type feature provides a QuickTip for each value requested by the function. Using QuickTips reduces the amount of time spent setting up formulas.

More formatting features Quattro Pro offers more conditional formatting, more font and cell attributes, as well as more options for changing borders, patterns, and color fills. For


11

more information about formatting your data, see “Editing and formatting a spreadsheet” on page 159.

Enhanced Cut, Copy, and Paste, and additional borders and fills Users can now use Paste Special to paste specific attributes of a selection, such as the cell height, and apply numeric operations to the selection, such as multiply the selection by four. Additional borders and fills provide file compatibility with Microsoft Excel 97.

Custom numeric formatting The Custom Numeric Formatting dialog has been modified to provide additional options for custom numeric formats. These options include font attributes, cell attributes, conditional formatting, and many others.

Persistent SpeedFormat Persistent SpeedFormat, an enhanced SpeedFormat feature, lets you automatically apply all of the formatting you applied to a spreadsheet to any rows or columns that you add.

Auto row height Double-clicking the row indicator resizes the row to its default height. This feature is similar to auto column resizing.

Euro character and WordPerfect characters Quattro Pro has added the Euro currency symbol to replace the European currency formats. The WordPerfect characters dialog has been added to version 9 to allow easier insertion of WordPerfect characters into a cell.

QuickColumns QuickColumns has been enhanced to provide more intuitive parsing of delimited files. Interface design gives a better notebook look and feel. Additional options to provide data breaks and custom delimiter settings have been added.

More Internet capabilities Quattro Pro has expanded its Internet publishing capabilities to include both HTML and XML. Quattro Pro has also included Web queries and QuickLinks to make linking and importing Internet data easier. For more information about electronic publishing, see “Working with the Internet” on page 709.

12


XML/HTML features The new Publish to HTML/XML Expert lets you publish your notebook as an HTML document for use on the Internet. This Expert lets you add headers, titles, and frames to the files you want to publish. You can also convert charts to graphics, preserve existing XML fields, and apply new XML tags to the contents of your notebook. The HTML Import/Export feature retains both Web and Quattro Pro formatting.

Web queries With the Web Query tool, you can access the World Wide Web from your spreadsheet. You can use this feature to run Web queries and import data from an Internet or intranet location. Using the Web Query tool, you can link your spreadsheet to a Web site and instruct Quattro Pro to update the link at specific intervals.

QuickLinks Quattro Pro recognizes common Internet link formats (www, mailto, ftp) when you type them into a cell, and automatically converts them to links.

Drag and drop from Netscape browsers Users can drag and drop Internet content from a Netscape browser into Quattro Pro 9 as a link. You can specify the links be updated “on open” or at specific intervals.

More database, analysis and summarization features Quattro Pro has added Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) technology and Cross Tab Reports to its feature set. These new features provide more database access, analysis, and summarization capabilities. For more information about using Cross Tab reports and OLAP technology, see “Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports” on page 259.

OLAP-compliant databases You can create simple databases in Quattro Pro or access external databases located on your computer or elsewhere on the network. With OLAP technology, you can view, sort, and analyze data created in OLAP-compliant databases such as Paradox or Microsoft Access.

Cross Tab Reports feature Using the Dynamic Cross Tab Reports feature, you can summarize large amounts of data as a cross-tabulated table called a Cross Tab Report. This


13

feature lets you retabulate dynamic reports. This interactive report setup lets you drill down or navigate through data details in successive layers, giving you a multidimensional view of the summarized data.

OLAP technology Quattro Pro now lets you use OLAP technology to create reports that statically or dynamically display changes to data in your spreadsheets and databases. A static report provides a snapshot of data at a specific point in time. A dynamic report is linked to source data in the spreadsheets and databases.

More macro features Enhanced macro features increase the ease with which you can create macros in your notebooks. For more information about creating macros, see “Using macros” on page 489. For more information about the macro creation tools available, see “Choosing a macro creation tool” on page 490.

Forms The forms feature lets you create custom forms by adding controls to the notebook spreadsheet previously found only in the Dialog designer. For more information about using forms, see “Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls” on page 579.

Form controls This feature was in earlier versions of Quattro Pro and has been reintroduced for version 9. The Forms dialog provides easy methods for adding, deleting, viewing, and editing records in Quattro Pro.

Where did it go? Quattro Pro has a new look. Menus are simplified and commands regrouped. Some terms have been replaced with more understandable terms. To simplify menus, some Quattro Pro commands have been moved to new menus in this version. Keep in mind that menus change depending on the active window. For example, when you insert a chart, the menus change to reflect the commands available when working in a chart. The following list identifies the menus that changed from version 8. Choose a menu to view its changes. File menu

14


Edit menu View menu Insert menu Tools menu Help menu

File menu changes Substantial changes have been made to the File menu. For example, you can now publish files to XML/HTML from the File menu. All the menu options listed below are found in the File menu. The File, Send To options are dependent on the software you have installed on your computer. For information about sending files to other users, see “Sending a notebook by email” on page 695. For more information about publishing files to HTML, see “Working with the Internet” on page 709. Quattro Pro 8

Quattro Pro 9

(new in 9)

File, New from Project

File, Version Control, Update Current

File, Version Control, Save Current

File, Send To, Envoy

(removed and replaced by HTML feature)

File, Send To, Corel Barista

(removed and replaced by XML/HTML feature)

(new in 9)

File, Publish to Internet

Edit menu changes Many pasting and embedding options have been added to the Edit menu to make importing data easier. All the menu options listed below are found in the Edit menu. For more information about importing and pasting data, see “Managing files and data” on page 651. Quattro Pro 8

Quattro Pro 9

(new in 9)

Edit, Redo

Edit, Paste Special

Edit, Paste Special (more options available)

(new in 9)

Edit, Object

Edit, Go To

Edit, Go To (more options available)

(new in 9)

Edit, Find Page Break


15

View menu changes Many options have been added to the View menu to increase the accessibility of certain features. You can now display comments and formulas on the spreadsheet. For more information about changing your view of the notebook, see “Changing your view of the notebook” on page 59. All the menu options listed below are found in the View menu list. Quattro Pro 8

Quattro Pro 9

(new in 9)

View, Page Breaks

(new in 9)

View, Property Bar

(new in 9)

View, Application Bar

(new in 9)

View, Comments

(new in 9)

View, Formulas

Insert menu changes The Insert menu has new options available for additional form controls. For more information on using form controls, see “Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls” on page 579.

16

Quattro Pro 8

Quattro Pro 9

(new in 9)

Insert, Symbol

Insert, Polyline

Insert, Polyline/Polygon

Insert, Polygon

Insert, Polyline/Polygon

Insert, Freehand Polyline

(removed)

Insert, Freehand Polygon

(removed)

Insert, QuickButton

Insert, Form Control, Button

(new in 9)

Insert, Form Control, Button Check Box

(new in 9)

Insert, Form Control, Radio Button

(new in 9)

Insert, Form Control, Group Box

(new in 9)

Insert, Form Control, List Box

(new in 9)

Insert, Form Control, Combo Box

(new in 9)

Insert, Form Control, Label

(new in 9)

Insert, Form Control, Scroll Bar

(new in 9)

Insert, Form Control, Spin Control


(new in 9)

Insert, Form Control, Edit Box

(new in 9)

Insert, XML Tag

(new in 9)

Insert, Delete All

Insert, Hyperlink

(moved to Tools, HyperLink)

Tools menu changes The Cross Tabs feature has been expanded on the Tools menu. The new WorkGroup feature is also available from this menu. For information on creating Cross Tab Reports, see “Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports” on page 259. For information about managing workgroups, see “Using Workgroups” on page 697. Quattro Pro 8

Quattro Pro 9

(new in 9)

Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor

(new in 9)

Tools, Macro, Edit

Tools, Data tools, Cross Tabs

Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Report Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Options Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Field Options Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Hide Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Show Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Refresh Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Copy Static Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Expand Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Remove Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Drill Down Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Rollup Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Remove Element

Tools, Data Tools, Combine Files

(Functionality incorporated into Edit, Paste Special)

Tools, Data Tools, Extract to File

(Functionality incorporated into Edit, Cut and Edit, Paste)

(new in 9)

Tools, WorkGroup, Review Notebook

(new in 9)

Tools, WorkGroup, Compare Notebook

(new in 9)

Tools, WorkGroup, Sharing


17

(new in 9)

Tools, WorkGroup, Users

(new in 9)

Tools, Internet, Run Web Query

(new in 9)

Tools, Internet, Create Web Query

(new in 9)

Tools, Internet, Edit Web Link

(new in 9)

Tools, Internet, Publish to HTML

(new in 9)

Tools, Customize

Help menu changes The Help menu has one new addition, Microsoft Excel Help. This menu option opens the Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro online Help.

18

Quattro Pro 8

Quattro Pro 9

(new in 9)

Microsoft Excel Help


GETTING STARTED

2

Before beginning your project, you should become familiar with the Quattro Pro concepts and desktop components that will help you create spreadsheet-based documents.

The basics Toolbars give you quick access to the tools you need to create a spreadsheet. On the spreadsheet itself, you can move through cells, select cells, columns, and rows, add and delete items, and more. Once you have finished working with Quattro Pro, you can save and close the application.

Choosing how your workspace looks Throughout the creation of a notebook, you can apply settings to Quattro Pro or to any object you’re working with. Application settings control how Quattro Pro works; property settings control how Quattro Pro looks. You can use compatibility settings to have Quattro Pro adopt particular characteristics from another application. For example, Quattro Pro can display a Microsoft Excel menu. International settings let you customize language, punctuation, and date and time formats. You can decide how your workspace looks. You can lock titles, split windows, hide screen elements, and determine the size of both your spreadsheet and notebook.

Getting started

19

Customizing command tools Toolbars, menus, keyboards, and even dialog boxes can be customized to suit your needs.

Working in a notebook Notebooks, spreadsheets, and their associated elements are the core of the Quattro Pro application. Notebooks provide a way to organize many spreadsheets in the same file. Each Quattro Pro spreadsheet consists of approximately 1,000,000 rows and 18,000 columns. There are 18,000 spreadsheets in a notebook. Because a notebook is so large, you can convert files from applications like Microsoft Excel without truncating data. Each spreadsheet is a grid made up of columns and rows that form cells. You can move through spreadsheets in a notebook by clicking the tab located at the bottom of each spreadsheet. If the tab is not in view, use the tab scroll buttons. Individual spreadsheets are denoted by a tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet.

The last tab is the Objects sheet; it contains icons rather than grid lines. The icons can be charts, slide shows, or dialog boxes you have created.

Using notebooks efficiently To work more efficiently gather logically related data in the same notebook and save it as one file format only the part of the notebook containing data break up large spreadsheets into separate spreadsheets place similarly formatted spreadsheets together in the same notebook For example, say you have quarterly figures on four separate spreadsheets. You could group these at the beginning of the notebook, then rename the tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet Qtr 1, Qtr 2, etc., You could then refer to these sheets when you create other sheets, such as a cost analysis, merchandise plan, or budget. Saving this information under one notebook name ensures nothing gets lost. In addition, if the first four quarterly spreadsheets are the same size, you could format them at the same time.

20


Getting around spreadsheets Sometimes it is difficult to see the whole picture in a spreadsheet. Unlike a word processor, which assumes the size of a printed page, a spreadsheet is vast and can encompass many printed pages. To help you get around, Quattro Pro offers controls and techniques that can help you see the whole picture and keep you from getting lost.

Components of a notebook This following information describes the concepts you need to become familiar with to create Quattro Pro spreadsheets.

Spreadsheets A spreadsheet is an electronic ledger. It contains columns and rows in which you enter, arrange, calculate, and analyze data. In a spreadsheet, you can arrange and categorize data, perform simple math operations, and apply complex formulas. Once you enter your data in a spreadsheet, you can create a chart, add maps and graphics, or produce a report. The spreadsheet you see when you open Quattro Pro is one of thousands available in each notebook.

Objects sheet The last sheet of every notebook is the Objects sheet. The Objects sheet displays an icon for every chart and slide show in the notebook. This sheet also displays icons for custom dialog boxes you build. You can copy, rename, and print items in the Objects sheet. The Objects sheet Property Bar has buttons for creating and playing slide shows and for building custom dialog boxes.

Project templates Project templates let you create a new notebook based on a predesigned project. Many of the Quattro Pro project templates provide a basic format and structure for common spreadsheets and data entry forms. You can also create your own project templates.

Values A value is a number, date, formula, or the result of a formula. Quattro Pro automatically determines whether data is a value or a label. As you type your data in a cell, the READY indicator on the Application Bar changes to LABEL or VALUE, depending on the type of data you enter.

Getting started

21

Labels Labels contain alphanumeric data, such as titles, phone numbers, or addresses. Quattro Pro interprets and formats labels differently than it does values. Values are calculable while labels are not.

Formulas Formulas are mathematical equations. Formulas usually refer to numbers in other cells in order to calculate a value, such as the difference between the values in two cells or the total of values in a column. You can use mathematical functions and numbers in formulas.

Spreadsheet functions Spreadsheet functions are built-in formulas that automate many of the calculations you perform in a spreadsheet. For example, @AMAINT is a spreadsheet function that calculates the accumulated interest paid on a loan after a specified number of payments. All spreadsheet functions are preceded by an @ sign.

Macros Macros are computer scripts that automate complex or repetitive command sequences. A macro is a sequence of commands that Quattro Pro runs automatically. Macros can perform keystrokes, mouse actions, and menu commands. You can use macros to automate tasks (such as printing a standard report), enter frequently used labels with a keystroke, or build complete applications to simplify Quattro Pro tasks for other users.

22


Working with Quattro Pro Experts Quattro Pro Experts guide you step by step through many spreadsheet tasks. Use the Experts to complete tasks quickly and simply. Analysis Expert — helps you make many analysis calculations, such as advanced regression, correlation, covariance, exponential smoothing, F-test, moving average, sampling, T-test, and Z-test. Budget Expert — guides you in creating five different budget templates for both home and business use. Chart Expert — builds a chart from the data you specify. Consolidate Expert — lets you combine cells using statistical operators (SUM, AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, VARS). Then you can sort the combined data. Database Expert — lets you easily import data from a database, such as a Paradox or Quicken database. It also creates Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) queries on the fly, without having to use a separate application. Map Expert — builds a map from selected cells of data. Scenario Expert — lets you create and display groups of scenarios (data conditions and results) based on models in your notebook. Slide Show Expert — lets you create slide shows that contain bullet charts (slides with bulleted lists). What-If Expert — lets you create tables that show the effect of changing one or two variable cells referenced in a formula.

Using Experts A PerfectExpert can help you quickly perform Quattro Pro tasks.

To use an Expert from the toolbar 1 Right-click the toolbar, then click Experts And Numeric Tools to display all the Expert icons. 2 Point to an Expert icon to see what it will do, then click the Expert you want. 3 Follow the instructions in each Expert panel, clicking Next to move to the next step.

Getting started

23

You can move the mouse over a button to see a description of the Expert.

To use an Expert from a menu 1 For an Expert listed in the following table, follow the menu path to use the Expert. 2 Follow the instructions in each Expert panel, clicking Next to move to the next step. To use

Click

Analysis

Tools, Numeric Tools, Analysis

Budget

Tools, Numeric Tools, Budget

Chart

Insert, Chart

Consolidate

Tools, Consolidate, New

Database

Insert, External Data, Expert

Map

Insert, Graphics, Map

Scenario

Tools, Scenario, New

Slide Show

Tools, Slide Show, New

What-If

Tools, Numeric Tools, What-If, Expert

Working with toolbars Toolbars let you access features you use frequently. Quattro Pro comes with nine predefined toolbars, Property Bars, and an Application Bar. You can create your own toolbars, move or hide toolbars, edit toolbars and toolbar buttons, and add buttons that launch macros. Quattro Pro Property Bars give you access to tools when you need them. For example, when you click in a chart, a chart Property Bar appears. When you are editing in a cell, a different Property Bar appears. To see what each Property Bar does, point to the buttons displayed on it and read the QuickTips. The following standard toolbars come with Quattro Pro: Notebook — provides tools for entering and editing data Selection Formatting — provides tools for manipulating data in cells or changing the look of data Data Manipulation — provides tools for working with notebook cells and selections

24


Chart and Drawing Tools — provides tools for drawing or inserting objects in a chart window, and for arranging objects on a layer on top of the notebook Outlining Tools — provides tools for grouping data in collapsible and expandable sets of information Auditing Tools — provides tools for tracing dependent cells, precedents, and even errors in large, complex notebooks Review — provides tools for reviewing shared notebooks Experts and Numeric Tools — provides tools for quickly creating maps, charts, and budgets, and for performing computations Cross Tabs Report — provides tools for manipulating cross tab reports Visual Basic — launches the Visual Basic Editor and Visual Basic Design Mode

Creating toolbars You can create your own toolbars from a wide assortment of toolbar buttons. Quattro Pro creates a personal toolbar to which you can drag or copy toolbar buttons. You can also create a separator to categorize buttons. You can have as many toolbars on the screen as memory and screen area allow. Quattro Pro provides descriptions of each button in the form of QuickTips.

To create a toolbar 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Click the New button. 3 Type a name for the toolbar. 4 Click the Customize button. 5 In the Command list, double-click the folder that contains the command control you want to add, then click the command. The control icon assigned to the command by default is highlighted with a gray border. If no control is highlighted, click any of the available icons. 6 Drag the control icon from the Buttons box to the toolbar.

Getting started

25

To quickly create a toolbar, right-click a toolbar, click Customize, then drag an icon to any non-toolbar space. A toolbar is created with a default name. To rename your toolbar, see “Editing a toolbar” on page 27.

To add a separator between buttons 1 Choose the button to the right of the location where you want to place the separator. 2 Drag the mouse slowly over the button until the pointer changes to an arrow. 3 Release the mouse.

To see a description of a button Move the mouse pointer over the button. If you exit Quattro Pro, your toolbar is displayed when you restart Quattro Pro. When you create or edit a toolbar, the information is stored in a toolbar file in the main Quattro Pro folder. Toolbar files have the extension .CFG. Other users can then copy these toolbar files and use them. However, if a user copies a toolbar, they will lose any changes made to the original toolbar.

Displaying, hiding and moving a toolbar You can display toolbars horizontally or vertically around the Quattro Pro window, or display a floating toolbar within the spreadsheet window. You can hide any toolbar you don’t want displayed. You can reposition a toolbar by dragging it to the top, bottom, left, or right edge of the application window. If you drag the toolbar away from all edges of the application window, it becomes a floating toolbar.

To display or hide a toolbar 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Do one of the following: Enable the check box for any toolbar you want to display. Disable the check box for any toolbar you want to hide.

26


To move a toolbar 1 Point to any of the following locations: an empty area of the toolbar the title bar on a floating toolbar the two vertical gray lines at the beginning of a toolbar 2 Drag the toolbar to a new position. To have a toolbar title display on a floating toolbar, click View, Toolbars, then click the Options button. Enable the Show Titles on Floating Toolbars check box.

Right-clicking on any toolbar displays a list of toolbars.

Editing a toolbar You can rename or delete a toolbar you have created. Although you can edit standard toolbars, you cannot rename or delete them. If you make changes you no longer want, you can reset the toolbar to its default settings.

To rename a toolbar 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Double-click the toolbar that you want to rename. 3 Type the new name.

To delete a toolbar 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Choose the toolbar to delete, then click the Delete button.

To reset a standard toolbar to its default settings 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Select the toolbar to reset. 3 Click the Reset button. Any controls, property settings, and link commands that had been changed are restored to their original state. Getting started

27

To change the shape of a floating toolbar Drag the edges of the toolbar. You can right-click any toolbar and click Toolbars to display the Toolbars menu.

Editing toolbar buttons You can drag buttons from other toolbars, copy buttons, or delete buttons. If a button is dimmed, the button does not function in that window. For example, buttons for customizing charts will not work when a notebook window is active.

To view the available toolbar buttons 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Click the Customize button. 3 In the Categories box located on the left, click the category for the type of button you want. Available buttons appear on the right. To...

Do the following...

Copy a toolbar button

Hold down CTRL + ALT and drag the button to another toolbar.

Move a toolbar button

Hold down ALT and drag a button to a new position or toolbar.

Delete a toolbar button

Hold down ALT and drag the button off the toolbar.

To resize toolbar buttons 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Click the Options button. 3 Change the Button and Border settings. If you can’t find the button that you’re looking for, the toolbars, Property Bar, or Application Bar may not be displayed. Click View, Toolbars, then select a toolbar. If the button still does not appear, it may be on a different toolbar than the ones currently displayed. To display all toolbars, click View Toolbars, then select all of the toolbars.

28


Editing the graphic or text of a toolbar button You can change the graphic or text of a toolbar button, or have Quattro Pro display text under all toolbar buttons.

To display either a graphic or text on a toolbar button 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Right-click a button on the toolbar, then click Properties. 3 In the Button Properties dialog box, do one of the following: To show text instead of an icon, enable the Show Text button. To display an icon on the button, enable the Show Image button. While in Customize mode, you can also right-click a toolbar button and toggle between text and graphic.

To change the text of a toolbar button 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in the previous procedure. 2 Enable the Show Text button. 3 In the Show Text text box, type the text you want displayed.

To change the graphic of a toolbar button 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in the “To display either a graphic or text on a toolbar button” procedure. 2 Enable the Show Image button. 3 Consider the following options: To display colors, click colors from the color palette and apply it to the button image. To display a shadow effect, click the Shadow box and apply it to the button image. To display highlights, click the Highlight box and apply highlights to the button image. To revert to the default background color, click the Face button and apply the color to the button image. To use the text color, click the Text button and apply the color to the button image. Getting started

29

To restore the default button Click the Restore Defaults button.

To display text under all toolbar buttons 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Click the Options button. 3 Enable the Text Below Image button in the Default Button Appearance box.

Adding specialized buttons to your toolbar Quattro Pro lets you create a button that will launch a Windows application or document. You can also create a button that executes either a Quattro Pro or PerfectScript macro. For more information about Quattro Pro and PerfectScript macros, see “Choosing a macro creation tool” on page 490.

To add a button that launches a Windows application or document 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Toolbars tab. 3 Click the Commands button, and choose New Program. 4 In the Target list box, choose the file or application for which you want to create a button. 5 In the Parameters list box, specify any command line options. 6 In the Working Folder list box, specify the working directory. Leave the Working Folder list box blank if you want to use the Quattro Pro startup folder. 7 In the Command Name text box, type the name of the button. 8 In the QuickTip box, type the QuickTip that accompanies the button. 9 Choose an icon for the new button from the Icon list box, then drag the button from the Button box to the toolbar.

To add a button that plays a macro 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Toolbars tab. 3 Click the Commands button, and choose New Macros.

30


4 Do one of the following: Click Quattro Pro Macro and type the macro commands in Enter Macro Click PerfectScript Macro and specify the macro file (.WCM). 5 Choose an icon for the macro from the Icon list box, then drag the button from the Button box to the toolbar. For more information about macros and toolbar buttons, see “Attaching macros to toolbars” on page 528.

Working with the Application Bar The Application Bar is usually located at the bottom of the Quattro Pro desktop. However, you can move it so that it displays at the top of your screen. The Application Bar displays mode and status indicators. For example, if you press CAPS LOCK, the Application Bar lets you know that the CAPS LOCK key is on. If you are recording a macro, the Application Bar displays the message that macro recording is in progress. The Application Bar also displays specific features such as QuickCell.

QuickCell With QuickCell, you can view a selected cell on the Application Bar to see its updated value as you change other cells elsewhere in the spreadsheet.

Mode and status indicators Different mode and status indicators appear on the Application Bar. These provide information about the current state of Quattro Pro. The following are some of the indicators that appear: One or more formulas need to be recalculated. (Press F9 to recalculate the notebook.) A formula contains a circular reference. (It refers to itself or to another formula that refers back to it.) CAPS LOCK is on. NUM LOCK is on.

Getting started

31

Macro recording is in progress. You pressed INS and are in Typeover mode. Anything you type will overwrite existing data. (To return to Insert mode, press INS again.) BKGD

Calculations are done in the background.

COPY

You are using the Drag and Drop feature to copy cells. (Press CTRL while dragging cells with the mouse.)

END

The END key is on. Any arrow keys you press move the insertion point to the end of an area in the notebook instead of scrolling.

EDIT

You are in Edit mode. Press F2 to activate Edit mode.

EXT

You are extending a selection with SHIFT + F7. When you finish, choose a option that operates on cells.

FIND

Quattro Pro is searching for entries that match the conditions you specified with the Query option.

FRMT

You are editing a format line during a Parse operation.

INPUT

Input is confined to selected cells with the {RestrictInput.Option macro command. (Press ESC or ENTER with no data in the input line to return to Ready mode.)

LABEL

The entry you are making is text (a label).

MACRO

A macro is executing.

MOVE

You are using the Drag and Drop feature to move cells.

POINT

The notebook is in Point mode, letting you specify a cell or cells, or view cell names with F3.

PREVIEW

You are previewing your printed notebook.

READY

Quattro Pro is ready for you to enter data or choose an option.

VALUE

The entry you are making is a number or formula.

Customizing the Application Bar The Application Bar holds information pertaining to the current states and modes of the program. You can choose which of these items display. Any toolbar button or control can be placed on the Application Bar. You can also format the Application Bar by specifying its position and height.

To change what the Application Bar displays 1 Right-click the Application Bar, then click Customize.

32


2 In the Command list box, double-click View, then click Application Bar. 3 Do one of the following: To add a field of status information, drag the field from the Buttons area of the Customize Settings dialog box over the Application Bar. To remove a field of status information, drag it from the Application Bar onto the document window. If the Application Bar is not displayed, click View, Toolbars, and enable the Application Bar check box. To add space between two fields, drag the rightmost field slightly farther to the right. You can also move the fields without opening the Customize dialog box by holding down ALT as you drag.

To change the height of the Application Bar 1 Right-click the Application Bar, then click Size. 2 Click One Line or Two Lines, depending on how high you want the Application Bar to be. You can also change the height of the Application Bar by dragging the top or bottom border.

To move the Application Bar to the top or bottom of the window 1 Right-click the Application Bar, then click Position. 2 Click Top or Bottom.

To reset the Application Bar to its original display Right-click Application Bar, then click Reset Application Bar.

Hiding or displaying QuickCell on the Application Bar With QuickCell, you can drag the contents of any cell from the spreadsheet to the Application Bar where it displays even if that cell has scrolled out of view. QuickCell is useful for watching a formula cell as it updates. This is particularly helpful if you are working in another notebook or on another sheet.

Getting started

33

To use QuickCell 1 Click a cell that you want to keep in view even when you scroll. 2 Click the QuickCell button on the Application Bar.

To hide QuickCell 1 Right-click the Application Bar, then click Customize. 2 Drag the QuickCell button from the Application Bar to the document window.

To display QuickCell again 1 Right-click the Application Bar, then click Customize. 2 In the Command list box, double-click View, then click Application Bar. Application bar buttons appear on the right. 3 Drag the QuickCell button to the Application Bar. You cannot use QuickCell between files. For more information on using QuickCell to view formulas as they update, see “Viewing key cells from the Application Bar” on page 118.

Navigating in spreadsheets and notebooks You move through a spreadsheet or notebook with the mouse, keyboard, or by voice using Dragon NaturallySpeaking. For information about using voice commands to navigate a spreadsheet, see Navigating a notebook using voice commands in the Quattro Pro online Help. The Control Menu lets you quickly perform tasks such as minimizing, maximizing, and closing windows. Keyboard shortcuts let you move through a spreadsheet by using keystroke combinations. You can set more specific parameters for navigation by using the Go To or Browse By commands.

Go To To help you navigate through large amounts of data, the Go To dialog provides options for finding a cell or range of cells, comments, formulas, values, labels, named cells, and many additional options.

34


The Go To command is useful for quickly moving to named cells, moving to distant parts of a notebook, or selecting noncontiguous selections in different parts of a notebook. You can also use Go To to extend the selection or to find the original source of an error in a formula (that is, cells containing NA or ERR values).

Browse By Another quick way to navigate your notebook is to use Browse By. When you right-click the Browse By button in the lower-right corner of the spreadsheet, the submenu lists the types of data — values or labels — you can locate.

Navigating spreadsheet rows and columns You can navigate in columns and rows in your spreadsheet using arrow keys, the ENTER key, and the TAB key.

To move down columns when entering data Press ENTER or press the DOWN ARROW.

To move up columns when entering data Press the UP ARROW.

To move across rows when entering data Do one of the following: Press the LEFT and RIGHT ARROW keys. Press TAB to move right and SHIFT + TAB to move left.

Navigating through notebooks You can quickly navigate to the Objects sheet, the last sheet in the notebook. Although your notebook is too large to view all at once, the tabs representing the different spreadsheets are visible at the bottom on the Quattro Pro window. You can use these tabs to reach other spreadsheets in the notebook.

To go to the Objects sheet 1 Click the QuickTab button at the bottom left of the notebook window. To return to the current spreadsheet from the Objects sheet, click the QuickTab button.

Getting started

35

To go to a different spreadsheet Click the appropriate spreadsheet tab.

Using the Control Menu The Control Menu is common to all Windows applications. Use this menu to perform such tasks as maximizing or closing a window. The commands available from the Control Menu include the following: Restore — returns a window to its previous size and position Move — moves a window Size — changes window size Minimize — reduces a window to an icon Maximize — expands a window to fill the screen Close — closes a window Next — switches to the next window in the series of open windows

To display the Control Menu Click the icon in the upper-left corner of a window.

Using keyboard shortcuts A quick way to navigate and edit a notebook is by using keyboard shortcuts.

To access menus using the keyboard 1 Hold down ALT and type the underlined letter for the menu you want to open. 2 Use the arrow keys to move from menu to menu, and from option to option, then press ENTER to choose a highlighted option.

To choose options in a dialog box using the keyboard To...

Do the following...

Select options

Hold down ALT and type the underlined letter for the option you want.

Move from option to option

Press TAB.

Enable/disable buttons and check boxes Press the SPACEBAR. Select text boxes

36

Press TAB, then type information into them.


Select pop-up lists

Press TAB, then press the SPACEBAR to open them.

Select buttons

Press TAB, then press ENTER to activate them.

For a list of keyboard shortcuts, see Keyboard Shortcuts in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online help.

Using Go To Use Go To to quickly find a cell address, a named cell or spreadsheet, a cell type, or the most recent cell edits. You can also use Go To to extend the selection.

To go to a cell or selection of cells 1 Click Edit, Go To. 2 Do one of the following: To go to a specific cell address, type the address in the Reference box. If the cell is on another spreadsheet, include the spreadsheet name. For instance, to move to cell Z36 on spreadsheet D, type D:Z36. If the cell is in another notebook, add the notebook prefix, for example, [Budget]D:Z36. To go to a named cell, choose the cell or group name from the Names box. To go to a named spreadsheet in the current notebook, choose the spreadsheet in the Sheets box. To go to the most recently edited cells, select a cell location from the Last Edited box. Use CTRL or SHIFT to select multiple cells. To go to a cell type in order to format it, choose a cell type from the Other box. For example, say you have several data tables on the same notebook spreadsheet, and you want all the headings and labels to look the same. To format them all at the same time, select Cell Data-Label, click OK, then choose format options. All labels are selected, so they can be formatted at the same time.

To extend selections with Go To 1 Move to the upper-left corner of the cells. 2 Click Edit, Go To.

Getting started

37

3 Specify the lower-right corner of the block of cells you want to include. 4 Hold down SHIFT, then click OK.

To find the original error in a formula using Go To 1 Select a cell containing NA or ERR. 2 Click Edit, Go To. The original source of the error appears in the Reference edit field. 3 Click OK to select that cell and display its contents in the input line.

Using Browse By Browse By searches your spreadsheet and highlights all instances of the type of data you are searching for. Browse By can find the following items: Values Blanks Labels Formula — Time/Date Formula — Numbers Formula — Text Formula — Logical Formula — Error Immediate Precedents All Precedents Immediate Dependents All Dependents Current Region Locked Cells Unlocked Cells Current Array

38


To use Browse By to locate specific data 1 Right-click the Browse By button in the lower-right corner of the spreadsheet. 2 Choose the type of data you want to locate.

Selecting cells, rows, and columns You can select cells individually or in rows, columns, blocks, or 3-D blocks. When you select a cell, a black-bordered rectangle appears to indicate the active cell. This rectangle is called the selector. A block of cells on consecutive spreadsheets is called a 3-D block. For example, if cell G20 on the first 12 spreadsheets on a notebook represents the total monthly sales for a particular wine, you can select cell G20 from all 12 spreadsheets at once to find total wine sales for the year.

Using the selector You can set the selector to move across the row when you press ENTER.

To set the selector to move when you press ENTER 1 Click Tools, Settings, General. 2 Disable the Compatible Keys check box. 3 Enable the Move Cell Selector/Enter Key check box. 4 From the list box, choose Down, Up, Left, or Right depending on the direction you want the selector to move when you press ENTER.

Selecting cells To enter data, manipulate data, format cells, or make other changes to cells, first select the cell or cells to be changed. When you select cells, the active cell within the selection contains the selector, while the rest of the selected cells are highlighted. The cell address displays in the upper-left corner of the Quattro pro desktop beside the input line. This box also displays a list of all named cells. To select...

Do this...

A cell

Click the cell.

Noncontiguous cells

Hold down CTRL while you select cells.

Getting started

39

A block of cells

Drag across the cells (click a corner cell, keep holding down the mouse button and move the pointer to the opposite corner). You can also click one corner, hold down SHIFT, then click the opposite corner.

An entire row or column

Click the row number or column heading.

An entire spreadsheet

Click Edit, Select All.

A cell or cells on another spreadsheet Click the spreadsheet tab, then select the cell or cells. To quickly select all the cells in the current spreadsheet, click the rectangle in the upper-left corner of the spreadsheet between the row and column headings.

Selecting noncontiguous cells You can write formulas that refer to various selections in different locations (noncontiguous cells), or you can act on these selections with commands.

To point to noncontiguous selections 1 Select the first group of cells. 2 Hold down CTRL, then select additional cells. When every selection you want to refer to or act on is highlighted, complete the formula or command. To type references to noncontiguous selections in a formula, separate each selection with a comma, as shown in this example: A2..A5,B7,D5..E12. Most commands can work on noncontiguous selections.

Selecting 3-D blocks A 3-D selection is a group of cells selected on more than one spreadsheet. For example, A2..B5 on sheets A through D is a 3-D selection. You can also select 3-D blocks of data by typing a reference to the block. For example, A..D:A2..B5 refers to cells A2 to B5 on sheets A, B, C, and D. When the same sheets are grouped under the same name, for example, Receipts, the same 3-D reference looks like this: Receipts:A2..B5.

40


Another way to type a reference to a 3-D selection is to treat it as a cube. Type the spreadsheet and cell coordinates of the cube’s front upper-left corner, followed by two periods, then the spreadsheet and cell’s coordinates of the cube’s back, lower-right corner. For instance, to refer to the same cells as in the previous example, type A:A2..D:B5. The 3-D syntax shown in both examples above is correct, but, by default, all references you point to or type are converted to the first method. If you prefer the second method, you can make it the default method.

To select a 3-D block of cells 1 Select the cells on the first spreadsheet. 2 Hold down SHIFT while you click the tab for the last spreadsheet in the series. A black line appears under the tabs. The same cells are now selected on all the sheets where the black line appears. 3 Complete the formula that refers to this selection or choose the command to act on it. The cells remain selected only until you click elsewhere in the notebook.

To type a reference to a 3-D block Include the spreadsheet references first, followed by the cell coordinates.

To change the 3-D spreadsheet range syntax 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the Compatibility tab. 3 In the 3-D Syntax section, click one of the following two options: A..B:A1..B2 — expresses spreadsheet references first, followed by a colon and the cell coordinates. This syntax makes group references more concise. A:A1..B:B2 — refers to each corner of the 3-D selection with the spreadsheet reference included. When you click a new cell, all existing 3-D references in formulas in open notebooks switch to the new syntax.

Getting started

41

Selecting cells from dialog boxes When you need to enter cell references in dialog boxes, it is usually easier to select the cells rather than type the entire cell address.

To select cells from a dialog box 1 Click the Pointer button. 2 Select the cells that you want to appear in the Edit field of the dialog box. 3 Click the Maximize button in the title of the dialog box. You can also select cells from dialog boxes by double-clicking the contents of the Edit field or by pressing UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, or F2. You can also enter the selected cells in the Edit field by pressing F2. To restore the previous entry in the Edit field, press ESC.

Selecting data with SpeedSelect SpeedSelect lets you quickly select an entire block of cells. Use the SpeedSelect buttons to quickly move to each corner of the block.

To select data with SpeedSelect 1 Select one cell within the block. 2 Right-click a toolbar, then click Data Manipulation. 3 Click the Select Table button. The corners of the block of cells appear, and all the cells are selected.

To move to a corner of the block 1 Select one cell within the block. 2 Right-click a toolbar, then click Data Manipulation.

42


3 Click one of the navigation tools: Top Left of Table button Top Right of Table button Bottom Left of Table button Bottom Right of Table button The selector moves in the direction of the arrow to a corner of the block.

Selecting rows, columns, and spreadsheets You can select entire rows, columns, and spreadsheets. You can also select multiple spreadsheets.

To select a row or column Select the row or column heading.

To select a spreadsheet Click the spreadsheet tab.

To select multiple spreadsheets 1 Click the first spreadsheet tab. 2 Hold down SHIFT while you click the last spreadsheet tab you want included in the selection. A black line appears under the tabs.

Keeping key cells, rows, and columns in view You can lock specific rows and columns of a spreadsheet so that their titles remain on-screen as you scroll. When you lock titles, a blue line divides the locked area and the notebook data.

Getting started

43

Locking column or row titles provides a reference point for the data you are scrolling through.

To lock titles 1 Scroll the spreadsheet so the column or row you want as a title appears in the upper-left corner of the window. 2 Do one of the following: To display row titles, select the cell in column A that is below the last row you want displayed. To display column titles, select the cell in row 1 that is to the right of the last column you want displayed. To display both row and column titles, select the top-left cell of the portion you want to remain scrollable. 3 Click View, Locked Titles. A blue line divides the locked area and the notebook data.

To repeat row or column titles on each spreadsheet of a printed notebook 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 Do one of the following: To lock a row title, type the location of the row title in the Left Heading box. To lock a column title, type the location of the column title in the Top Heading box. You can also point to a row or column title to select it. Click the Pointer button located to the right of the Top Heading or Left Heading text box, point to the title, then click the Maximize button in the title of the dialog box.

To unlock titles Click View, Locked Titles.

44


You cannot move titles after they are locked. As with hidden and widened columns, locked titles affect the active pane only. If the window is divided into two panes, locked titles are retained after you close the second pane only if you have created them in the top or left pane.

Adding and deleting cells, rows, and columns You can insert cells, rows, or columns anywhere in a spreadsheet. You can also insert partial rows and columns. When you insert an item, existing data is pushed down, to the right, or to the back of the notebook to make room for the new item. You can also insert items from another file into a spreadsheet. If the insertion pushes a named cell area or cell reference beyond the limit of a spreadsheet, an error message appears. You can also insert multiple spreadsheets by specifying a 3-D selection. You can delete all or part of columns and rows. Deleting space is different from erasing (or clearing) data using Edit, Clear or the DELETE key. Deleting with Edit, Delete makes remaining rows or columns move to take up the deleted space. When you delete space that is within the boundaries of a named area or cells referenced by a formula, all references adjust to exclude the deleted space. However, if one of the deleted cells is a coordinate cell that defines a named area, the area becomes invalid and any formulas or names referencing the area display ERR. Any formulas that reference a cell within a deleted column, row, or spreadsheet also display ERR.

Inserting cells, rows, and columns Inserting rows and columns, partial rows and columns, and blocks of cells allows you to add new data to a spreadsheet without affecting the current data.

To insert cells 1 Select cells in the location where you want to insert the new cells. Make sure the upper-left corner of the cells you select contains the first cell entry you want shifted right, down, or back. The cells you select should be the same size as the amount of space you want to insert. Getting started

45

2 Click Insert, Cells. 3 Enable the Partial button in the Span section. 4 Do one of the following: To have the selected entries shift down and out of the way, enable the Rows button in the Dimension section. To have the selected entries shift to the right, enable the Columns button in the Dimension section. To have the selected entries shift to the next spreadsheet, enable the Sheets button in the Dimension section.

To insert rows 1 Select the row heading just below where you want the row inserted. 2 Click Insert, Row.

To insert multiple rows 1 Select as many row headings as the number of rows you want to insert. 2 Click Insert, Row.

To insert columns 1 Select the column heading just below where you want the column inserted. 2 Click Insert, Column.

To insert multiple columns Select as many column headings as the number of columns you want to insert. When you insert a row or column within the boundaries of a named area or a cell referenced by a formula, the cell references expand to include the new row or column.

Deleting cells, rows, and columns When data is no longer useful, you can easily delete cells, rows, columns, or multiple rows and columns.

46


To delete cells 1 Select the cells you want to delete. 2 Click Edit, Delete. 3 Click Partial from the Span list. 4 From the Dimension list, click one of the following: Rows — shifts entries up into the selected cells Columns — shifts entries left Sheets — shifts entries from the next spreadsheet

To delete rows or columns of data 1 Select the row or column heading. 2 Click Edit, Delete.

To delete multiple rows or columns or data 1 Select row or column headings for the row or column you want to delete. 2 Click Edit, Delete.

Preventing rows and columns from being added to a spreadsheet You can prevent other users from adding rows and columns to a spreadsheet by entering data in the last cell of the spreadsheet. Since this cell can’t be pushed down or to the right, no extra cells can be added to the spreadsheet.

To restrict the addition of rows and columns 1 Press END, then press DOWN ARROW. 2 Press END, then press the RIGHT ARROW. The cursor is at the last cell in the spreadsheet (ZZZ1,000,000 if you are using the default spreadsheet size). 3 In this cell, type any label or value. 4 Press HOME to get back to the first cell in the spreadsheet. When you try to add a row or column, an Out of Boundary message displays.

Getting started

47

Adding, deleting, and moving spreadsheets You can add or delete single or multiple spreadsheets to or from your notebook. Move sheets within a notebook or between notebooks to reorder them. Similar to the Drag and Drop feature used with cells, you can use the mouse to directly manipulate the spreadsheets. Just drag the spreadsheet tab to another location. When you move a spreadsheet into or out of grouped spreadsheets while Group mode is on (the blue line appears under the tabs), only the spreadsheet moves, and the group expands or shrinks accordingly. When you move the first or last spreadsheet in a group, the group expands to include all new sheets enclosed by the moved spreadsheet. For more information about Group mode, see “Editing grouped data” on page 166. When you drag a spreadsheet that is part of a selected 3-D selection (the black line appears under the tabs), all sheets in the 3-D selection move together.

Adding and deleting spreadsheets You can add or delete entire spreadsheets to or from your notebook.

To insert a blank spreadsheet 1 Click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to follow the new spreadsheet. 2 Click Insert, Sheet.

To insert multiple spreadsheets 1 Click Insert, Cells. 2 Enable the Sheets button in the Dimension section. 3 Enable the Entire button in the Span section. 4 Type a 3-D selection in the Cells field. For example, to insert three sheets before spreadsheet B, enter B:A3..D:A3 (it does not matter which cell you reference). You can also insert multiple spreadsheets by selecting the first spreadsheet tab you want to follow the new spreadsheet, then holding down SHIFT while you click the last spreadsheet tab you want. A black line appears under the tabs.

48


To delete a spreadsheet 1 Click a spreadsheet tab. 2 Click Edit, Select All. 3 Click Edit, Delete Sheet(s).

To delete multiple spreadsheets 1 Click the first spreadsheet tab. 2 Hold down SHIFT while you click the last spreadsheet tab you want. A black line appears under the tabs. 3 Click Edit, Delete.

Moving spreadsheets You can move spreadsheets within a notebook.

To move spreadsheets 1 Click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to move. 2 Drag the spreadsheet in any direction until the tab separates from the spreadsheet and a sheet icon appears. 3 Drag right or left along the row of other tabs, moving the sheet icon. 4 Release the mouse button when the sheet icon is just before the tab where you want to place the moved spreadsheet. The moved spreadsheet drops into place. You can also move sheets by clicking Edit, Move Sheets, then specifying the sheets to move. For example, in the Move Sheets box, type A..C to move sheets A through C.

To copy the spreadsheet, hold down CTRL when dragging the spreadsheet.

Naming spreadsheets Each spreadsheet in a notebook has a tab at the bottom. These tabs display the name of the spreadsheet. Spreadsheets are initially named with letters of the alphabet in sequence, from A to Z, continuing from AA to AZ, up to ZZZ. Getting started

49

You can assign a descriptive name to a sheet. You can use up to 64 characters — letters and numbers — in the name, as well as these special characters: ~‘!%_|\‘? You can change the spreadsheet name to reflect the naming conventions used by other applications such as Microsoft Excel, or you can name the spreadsheets to describe the type of data that resides in it. However, there are certain characters that may exist in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet name that will not be recognized by Quattro Pro. For more information, see “Opening and saving a Microsoft Excel workbook” on page 84. Here are some guidelines: You can use blank spaces within a name (not at the beginning), but you cannot use a name previously assigned to a group in the same notebook. When you rename a spreadsheet, formulas that refer to the renamed spreadsheet adjust to use the new name. The Objects sheet (the last sheet in the notebook) cannot be renamed.

Naming a spreadsheet To name a spreadsheet 1 Double-click a notebook tab. 2 Type a name. 3 Press ENTER.

To rename a spreadsheet 1 Click Format, Sheet. 2 Click the Name tab. 3 Type a descriptive name, using letters, numbers, and any of these characters: ~ ‘ ! % _ | \ ‘ ?. To reassign the original name to a spreadsheet, click the Reset button.

To rename a spreadsheet with Microsoft Excel conventions 1 Click Settings, Tools.

50


2 Click the Compatibility tab. 3 Enable the Display as Numbers check box. To change spreadsheet tabs back to letters, disable the Display as Numbers check box.

Specifying Quattro Pro settings Quattro Pro settings let you decide how Quattro Pro should look and work. For example, you can determine what appears when Quattro Pro opens, choose colors for particular cells, or set the menu bar to display as a Microsoft Excel menu bar.

Application settings Application settings affect the overall functioning of Quattro Pro. Changes you make to these settings remain in effect until you change them again, even after you exit and restart Quattro Pro.

Property settings Property settings allow you to see at a glance all changes that can be made to individual items in the notebook. There are properties available for cells (block) spreadsheets notebooks charts in windows, and their elements, such as bars, axes, or text boxes graphics dialog boxes you create and their elements, such as radio buttons and edit fields the Quattro Pro application itself You can change additional properties for the current item. The Property tab name turns blue when you change its setting.

Getting started

51

File Property settings You can view statistical information about a Quattro Pro notebook. This includes the filename, directory path, date it was created, date it was last saved and by whom, and the revision number. The notebook summary feature lets you record information, such as a file’s title, subject, author, and keywords. You can also record comments pertaining to the file. Summary information is useful when searching for a file using QuickFinder. If you publish a notebook to the Internet, the summary information is transferred to the corresponding fields in your Web document. The keywords you define as summary information automatically serve as Internet links.

Compatibility settings You can create or edit notebooks in a format compatible with other programs by selecting Quattro Pro 9, Quattro Pro 8, Microsoft Excel 97, Lotus 1-2-3 or custom settings. Depending on the program type you select, some or all of the following options are affected: default file type (or file extension), menu bar, 3-D syntax, notebook size, and spreadsheet tab display. Any changes you make to the settings on the Compatibility tab become the program’s default settings. When you change any of the options in this tab that are incompatible with Microsoft Excel or Quattro Pro file types, the program will automatically default to custom settings. For more information about Microsoft Excel 97 and Quattro Pro, see “Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro” on page 83. Select the settings that best suit your needs. If you are a Microsoft Excel 97 user, you can change the compatibility options to Microsoft Excel 97 or leave them as Quattro Pro 9, since it is completely compatible with Microsoft Excel. If you are a Quattro Pro 9 user who shares files with Microsoft Excel 97 users, change only the default file type. If you work with QP8, and you do not need more than 8000 rows per notebook, select Quattro Pro 8 as your default. If you need more than 64,000 rows, change the compatibility options to Custom.

International settings International settings determine the appearance of currency, punctuation, dates, times, and the default language. These settings affect the appearance of values and how you enter arguments in spreadsheet functions. The initial defaults are standard for the United States. If you are using Quattro Pro in another country, or are doing business with another country, you can change these settings. The Windows default setting uses the regional settings in the Windows Control Panel. See your Windows documentation for details.

52


Lotus International Character Set (LICS) characters are identical to the standard ANSI set except for the range 128 through 255, which is usually used for international and graphics characters. For more information about LICS characters, see your Lotus 1-2-3 documentation. When you save the notebook, these characters are converted back to the LICS equivalents. The date and time formats you choose under the International tab of the Settings dialog box do not determine how dates and times are displayed in Quattro Pro. Rather, they determine the long and short international format options for date and time that are available as appearance settings. You can set the actual appearance of dates in the Active Cells dialog box. For more information, see “Working with date, time, and currency formats” on page 193. The language option allows you to have your interface display in the language you select from a list of languages. You must have another language version installed to be able to change the interface language.

Using application settings Use application settings to affect the overall functioning of Quattro Pro. You can determine what screen elements are hidden, what appears on the Application Bar, what appears on the screen when Quattro Pro opens, and more. Application settings control the following components of Quattro Pro: Display Settings — show or hide portions of the Quattro Pro window. International Settings — control the appearance of currency, punctuation, dates, times, international characters, and negative values. These options affect the appearance of values, how the date and time on the Application Bar appear, how you enter arguments in spreadsheet functions, and how certain international characters appear. Macro and Menu Settings — control what is displayed on the screen when macros are running. You can also specify a macro to run when a notebook is opened. File Options Settings — include information that is used every time you start Quattro Pro General Settings — enable Undo, determine key behavior, and set Drag and Drop delay time Compatibility Settings — let you change your workspace to the conventions used by another application such as Microsoft Excel. You can also determine the size of your notebook or switch between 3-D syntax schemes.

Getting started

53

To access the Application Settings dialog box 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the appropriate tab, then set properties as required. You can also change application settings by right-clicking the title bar and clicking Application Properties.

Using property settings You access property settings from the Menu Bar. In Developer mode, you can turn off access to property settings.

To change the properties of an item You can change the properties of an item by clicking the following menu items: Menu item

Properties

Format, Selection

Active cells properties

Format, Sheet

Active sheet properties

Format, Notebook

Active notebook properties

To quickly set properties for most spreadsheet items 1 Right-click an item, such as a chart or cell. 2 Choose the Properties option from the submenu. 3 Set the properties for the item. You can turn off the access to property settings. For more information, see “Limiting access to property settings from Developer mode” on page 520. To enable these items after you disable them, click CTRL + M from the main screen.

Setting file properties You can see statistical information about a notebook, including the filename, directory path, date it was created, date it was last saved and by whom, and the revision number.

54


The summary tool lets you record summary information about a notebook, such as the title, subject, author, and keywords. You can even record comments. Summary information is useful for file searches.

To see statistics about the notebook 1 Click File, Properties. 2 Click the Statistics tab.

To record summary information about a notebook 1 Click File, Properties. 2 Click the Summary tab. 3 Record the appropriate information in any of the following text boxes: Title Subject Author Keywords Comments You can also access the Statistics and Summary tabs by clicking Format, Notebook.

Using compatibility settings You can choose settings to make Quattro Pro compatible with other applications and with your particular spreadsheet requirements. For information about making Quattro Pro compatible with Microsoft Excel 97, see “Using Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro” on page 86.

To change compatibility options 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the Compatibility tab. 3 Choose a format from the Compatibility Options list.

To change the default file type 1 Click Tools, Settings.

Getting started

55

2 Click the Compatibility tab. 3 Choose the file extension from the Default File Type list. Enable the Require CTRL + SHIFT + ENTER To Generate The @ARRAY Function check box to adopt the keystroke method Microsoft Excel 97 uses when calculating arrays.

To change the default Menu Bar 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the Compatibility tab. 3 Choose the menu you want from the Menu Bar list. Any changes you make in the Compatibility tab will become the default settings for Quattro Pro.

You can also right-click the menu bar to select a different menu.

To increase or decrease the notebook size 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the Compatibility tab. 3 Type the number of sheets you want in the Sheet text box. (Do not exceed 18,278.) 4 Type the number of columns you want in the Columns text box. (Do not exceed 18,278.) 5 Type the number of row you want in the Rows text box. (Do not exceed 1,000,000.) You can also set the syntax for 3-D blocks from the Compatibility tab. For more information, see “Selecting 3-D blocks” on page 40.

56


Using international settings You can change international settings for currency, punctuation, and language from within Quattro Pro. By default, commas are used as thousands separators and argument separators. A period is used as a decimal separator. Regardless of the punctuation setting, semicolons are always accepted as argument separators. You can also change number, data, and time formats in individual cells. For more information, see “Working with date, time, and currency formats” on page 193.

To change the currency symbol 1 Click Tools, Settings, International. 2 Enable the Currency button. 3 Enable the Quattro Pro button, then click the country whose currency symbol you want to use. 4 Do one of the following: To precede negative values with a minus sign, enable the Signed button. To enclose negative values in parentheses, enable the Parens button. When you change the currency symbol, it becomes the default currency. To show multiple currencies in one notebook, change the currency of individual cells with Format, Selection, Numeric Format, Currency. This lets you use multiple currencies in one notebook. For more information, see “Changing the numeric format of cells” on page 191. Quattro Pro has added the Euro to the available currency formats. You can view the Euro currency symbol if you are using Microsoft Windows 98 or if your system has a Euro compliant font installed.

To change punctuation settings 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the International tab. 3 Enable the Punctuation button, then click an option. The options show the punctuation marks used to mark thousands and the decimal place, followed by the punctuation mark used to separate

Getting started

57

arguments in spreadsheet functions and macros (a1,a2). The last four options specify that a blank space separates thousands in numbers.

To change the available date formats 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the International tab. 3 Enable the Date Format button, then click a format. This date format does not determine how dates appear. Rather, it determines the international date formats given as options for date appearance. To set the actual appearance of dates, click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab. When you enable the Date button, the formats appear as two choices (Long Date Intl. and Short Date Intl.) . The long format is also used as the international clock setting. The short format is in parentheses. For more information, see “Formatting dates” on page 194. By default, dates display in long form as MM/DD/YY (for example, 06/18/92) and in short form as MM/DD (for example, 06/18).

To change available time formats 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the International tab. 3 Enable the Time Format button, then click a format. This time format does not determine how times appear. Rather, it determines the international time formats given as options for time display. To set the actual appearance of times, click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab and enable the Time button. The formats appear as two choices (Long Time Intl. and Short Time Intl.)The long format is the international clock setting. The short format is in parentheses. For more information, see “Formatting times” on page 194.

By default, times are displayed in long form as HH:MM:SS (for example, 09:32:30) and in short form as HH:MM (for example, 09:32).

58


To convert LICS characters 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the International tab. 3 Enable the LICS check box.

To change the default language 1 Click Tools, Settings, International. 2 Enable the Language button, then do one of the following: To specify the default language of all suite applications, click the Suite Default button. To specify a different language for only Quattro Pro, click Quattro Pro, then specify a language from the list box.

Changing your view of the notebook You can change how you view your notebook without changing the notebook itself. For example, you can use Draft View when quickly entering data, or you can use Page View when you want to change margins and see how information will fit on a printed page. You can also use Zoom to make the notebook display larger or smaller. There are many different ways you can change the view of your notebook. The view you choose depends on what you want to do with your spreadsheet. For example, you may want to look at two different parts of the spreadsheet in the same window, add page breaks, or edit headers and footers. You can work with your notebook in several view modes. Changing the view mode itself does not affect the actual formatting of the notebook.

Draft View Draft View does not display some document elements such as footers, page breaks, and margins, although they may exist in the notebook. Because not all features display, working in Draft View is often faster than working in Page View.

Page View Page View displays your notebook pages the way they will look when printed. Page View displays elements such as fonts and appearance features, headers, footers, footnotes, page breaks, and margins. Page View offers more WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) editing, such as dragging

Getting started

59

margins and page breaks. You can also get to the Page Setup dialog by double-clicking or right-clicking in a margin.

Page Breaks View Page Breaks View displays soft and hard page breaks. You can use this view to edit these page breaks.

Objects View Choosing Objects View displays the Objects sheet, the last sheet in the notebook. You can view your charts, maps, and slide shows from this sheet.

Viewing formulas and comments You can display all formulas in the cells rather than the results of those formulas. You can display cell comments and move or copy them to another location.

Displaying, arranging, resizing, and hiding windows A Quattro Pro window displays a Quattro Pro file, or a file imported into Quattro Pro. While working in Quattro Pro, you can have several windows open. For example, suppose you are working with four different notebooks, each dealing with a quarterly report. You can display all four at once. You can change a window view in several ways. Changing views is useful when you want to consider your spreadsheet data in a new light, or if you want to perform formatting tasks such as adding headers, footers, and page breaks. For more information about views, see “Changing your view of the notebook” on page 59. You can create new views of the same spreadsheet, or rearrange, resize or hide windows.

Selecting windows and views You can select which window(s) you want open, and how you want to view the data in those windows.

To select a window Do one of the following: Click any part of the window. On the Application Bar, click the button that displays the window’s name.

60


Choose the file’s name from the list in the bottom section of the Window menu on the Menu Bar. A check mark appears next to the name of the active window. Press CTRL + F6 to move to the next document window. If that window is beneath other windows, it moves to the top. The window with the highlighted title bar is active.

You can toggle back and forth between Quattro Pro and a non-document window, such as the Spell Checker, by pressing ALT + F6.

To select a different view 1 Click View. 2 Click one of the following views: Draft Page Page Breaks Objects The view that is currently selected when you exit Quattro Pro — Draft View, Page View, or Page Breaks View — is the view that will appear when you open Quattro Pro again.

You can drag graphics or charts while in Draft View or Page View. To see multiple pages while in Page View, click View, Zoom, then choose 50 percent (%) or less. To change margins while in Page View, drag a blue margin line to set the current margin for a column or row of pages.

Displaying formulas and comments in spreadsheets You can display actual formulas instead of formula results. You can also have Quattro Pro automatically display spreadsheet comments. Once a comment is displayed, you can move or copy it to a new cell. Getting started

61

To display formulas instead of formula results Click View, Formulas.

To display spreadsheet comments Click View, Comments.

Displaying new views of a notebook You can create any number of views. When you create a new view of a notebook window, the duplicate window appears full size in front of other open windows, with cell A1 selected on the first spreadsheet. The view title is comprised of the name of the notebook followed by a colon (:) and the number of the view; for example, Notebk1.QPW:2. You can create any number of views.

To display a new view of a notebook window Click Window, New View. When you change border or gridline properties, the change does not display in duplicate views. When you lock titles, split panes, or zoom data, the change does not display in duplicate views.

To view different areas of open windows, resize them to see a part of each. Scroll windows or select different sheets as desired. To remove an extra view, click the Close Window button at the top-right corner of the window. If you click File, Close, all views are closed because all views of the notebook are saved as the same file.

Splitting a notebook window into two panes To view different parts of the same notebook, you can duplicate the window or split the window into two panes. Panes can be split vertically or horizontally. When you navigate split windows, both panes scroll together. You can change the settings to make each pane scroll independently; this allows you to view one part of the notebook in one pane while you scroll to another part in the other pane. You can also resize the panes.

62


Splitting a notebook window into panes lets you view different parts of the same notebook at the same time.

If window panes are synchronized, you can scroll both of them at once to compare the data in rows or columns. Vertically split panes scroll together vertically, and horizontally split panes scroll together horizontally. The active pane is the one containing the selector. If you unsynchronize the panes, you can scroll the panes independently to display different parts of the notebook.

To split a window into two panes 1 Move the mouse pointer to the lower-right corner of the window over the pane splitter. The pointer changes to a black double-arrow. Depending on where you position the mouse pointer, the double-arrow points horizontally or vertically. 2 Do one of the following: To create horizontal panes, drag the vertical double-arrow upward. Release the mouse button where you want to split the panes. To create vertical panes, drag the horizontal double-arrow to the left. Release the mouse button where you want to split the panes. You can also split a window into panes using View, Split Window. The window is split at the position of the selector or, when there is not enough room to split the window at the current position, the window is split in half.

To close the second pane 1 Click View, Split Window. 2 Enable the Clear button.

Getting started

63

To close the second pane with the mouse 1 Point to the pane splitter between the first and second pane. The pointer turns into a double-arrow. 2 Drag the double-arrow back to the top or bottom edge of the window (for horizontal panes) or to the left or right edge (for vertical panes). Any column width changes, locked titles, or columns that were hidden or revealed in the top or left pane remain in effect.

To synchronize panes 1 Click View, Split Window. 2 Enable the Synchronized check box.

To unsynchronize panes 1 Click View, Split Window (before or after splitting the window). 2 Disable the Synchronized check box.

To resize panes 1 Move the mouse pointer over the pane splitter at the lower right of the left or top pane until the double arrow appears. 2 Drag to the new position where you would like the first pane to end. When you resize panes, the following property changes in one pane do not affect the appearance of the other pane: border or gridline properties, locked titles, row height, column width, default column width, or Reveal/Hide properties.

Arranging and hiding windows There are several methods of rearranging windows on your desktop. You can also hide windows.

To arrange windows Do one of the following:

64


To show all windows on-screen at the same time, click Window, Tile Top to Bottom or click Window, Tile Side by Side, as appropriate. When possible, the windows are all given equal room on the screen. To rearrange all open windows in overlapping layers, click Window, Cascade. The top line of each window is revealed to show the name of the notebook, chart, or dialog box it contains. To place icons for minimized windows in a neat row along the bottom of the screen, click Window, Arrange Icons.

To hide a window Click the window, then click Window, Hide.

To show a hidden window 1 Click Window, Show. 2 Choose the name of the window to show.

Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components Zoom lets you see an entire printed page or focus in on the detail of a few cells. You can set Zoom for an entire notebook or for individual sheets. The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer. Zooming affects only the display, not the printed output. You can hide scroll bars, tabs, and graphics. You may want to hide parts of the screen in just one notebook, for example, when you are creating a special presentation notebook or form. Displaying only the outlines of graphics (such as charts, Clipart, and shapes) allows you to scroll and print faster. You can also hide parts of the screen in all future notebooks by setting display options. For information about hiding a toolbar, see “Displaying, hiding, and moving a toolbar” on page 26. You can also hide borders and grid lines on a spreadsheet. These options are useful when creating a form. Quattro Pro offers many special features that you can display or hide. For example, if you want to be advised that a particular cell contains a formula or comment, you can have Quattro Pro flag that cell. You can decide whether you want QuickTips or shortcut keys to display. You can disable the scroll indicator box that tells you your location as you scroll. You can also hide the input line if you don’t want it to appear on a spreadsheet. At the bottom of the File menu, Quattro Pro keeps a record of the most recently edited files. You can choose whether you want to display or hide this list. Getting started

65

Corel RealTime Preview Corel RealTime Preview lets you watch how the selected cell data changes as you point to font types, sizes, colors, background colors, and borders. You can display or hide Corel RealTime Preview.

Zooming in and out To enlarge a particular section of your notebook, or decrease its size so you can see how an entire printed page will look, you can zoom in or out. You can also use the Zoom to Fit button to automatically fill the screen with the current selection.

To zoom in and out 1 Click View, Zoom. 2 Enable the button that corresponds to the zoom percentage you want. 3 In the Apply To section, enable the Notebook button. The Zoom setting does not affect printed output. Click File, Page Setup, Print Scaling to scale printed documents. If you select one cell and choose Selection, Quattro Pro finds the boundaries of the data, then zooms only that cell. To restore the screen to its normal display, choose 100%.

To zoom data to fit on screen 1 Select the cells (or just one cells). 2 Right-click a toolbar and click Data Manipulation. 3 Click the Zoom To Fit button. If you selected just one cell, Quattro Pro uses SpeedSelect to find the boundaries of the data, then zooms it. To restore the screen to its normal display, click View, Zoom, and choose 100%. You can customize your toolbar to display Zoom setting buttons. For more information about copying toolbar buttons, see “Editing toolbar buttons” on page 28.

66


Hiding scroll bars, spreadsheet tabs, and objects You can hide elements of your desktop from view.

To hide notebook scroll bars, spreadsheet tabs, and objects 1 Click Format, Notebook, Display. 2 To hide scroll bars or tabs, disable any of the following check boxes: Vertical Scroll Bar Horizontal Scroll Bar Sheet Tabs 3 To hide objects, disable one of the following buttons: Show All Show Outline Hide

To hide parts of the screen 1 Click Tools, Settings, Display. 2 Disable the appropriate check box.

To hide borders on a spreadsheet 1 Click Format, Sheet. 2 Click the Display tab. 3 Disable one or both of the following check boxes: Row Borders (numbers) Column Borders (letters)

To hide grid lines on a spreadsheet 1 Click Format, Sheet. 2 Click the Display tab. 3 In the Gridlines section, disable one or both of the following check boxes: Horizontal Vertical

Getting started

67

To reveal a hidden feature 1 Follow steps 1and 2 in the previous procedure. 2 In the Gridlines section, enable one or both of the following check boxes: Horizontal Vertical The Gridlines setting affects only on-screen display. Gridlines do not appear on the printout. Use the Line Drawing cell property to produce printed grids.

You can also right-click the spreadsheet tab, then select Sheet Properties to hide rows, columns, or grid lines.

Displaying special Quattro Pro features You can choose to display or hide many Quattro Pro features.

To access the Display Settings dialog box 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the Display tab. To show...

Enable the following check box

The input line

Show Input Line

Formula markers

Show Formula Markers

The file history

Show File History

The scroll indicator box

Show Scroll Indicators

Shortcut keys with menu items

Show Shortcut Keys

Comment markers

Show Comment Marker

QuickTips

Show QuickTips

Corel RealTime Preview

Corel RealTime Preview

To hide these features, simply disable the corresponding check boxes.

68


Customizing menus You can customize both the Menu Bar and the submenus that appear when you right-click on the screen. You can add menu items to existing menus, or add new menus to the Menu Bar. You can change the order of the menus and menu items to give you quick, easy access to the functions you use frequently.

Customizing a menu You can customize the current menu by adding, deleting, and rearranging menu items. You can also create a new menu.

To customize a menu 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Menu tab. 3 Choose the command you want from the Commands list. Each command appears under the appropriate menu name. 4 Select the Main Menu category or submenu to which you want to add the command. 5 Select where you want the command to appear in the menu structure. The new command appears after the one selected. 6 Click the Add button. 7 Continue customizing the menu by adding options and separators, removing options and separators, and rearranging menu items. 8 Consider the following options: To rearrange menu items, select the item you want to move, then click the Move Up or Move Down button. To delete an item from the menu, select the item, then click the Remove button. To begin a completely new menu, click the Add Menu button. To return the selected menu to its original display, click the Reset button. To rename a menu or menu item, click the item, then click again and type a new name.

Getting started

69

To create a separator between commands, see “Creating toolbars” on page 25. When you customize menus, keep in mind that the Help topics referring to those menus do not change. You can add a submenu to an existing menu by first double-clicking the existing menu. When you restore the original menu, you will lose any changes you have made to the menu. You can also rename a menu or item by right-clicking it and clicking Rename.

You can add Microsoft Excel menu items to your customized menus.

Changing the access key on a menu An access key is the underlined letter in a command that executes that command. Pressing an access key is used in lieu of mouse-clicking.

To change the access key on a menu 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Menu tab. 3 In the Menu box, choose the menu or menu command for which you want to redefine an access key. 4 Double-click to open a menu or submenu. 5 Click the command’s name tag, and insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as an access key. 6 Remove all unnecessary ampersands. Make sure the letter you choose as an access key is unique to the menu or submenu in which you place it.

70


Customizing keyboards You can change the built-in keyboard assignments for accessing menu items. You can create several sets of keyboard assignments to use for different types of projects, saving and opening sets as they are needed.

System keys The following keys or key combinations are system keys and are not valid as access keys: F1 ALT + F6 ALT + TAB ALT + ESC CTRL + ESC CTRL + / (‘/’ on the numeric keypad is valid) Other people can customize their environment to match yours by copying your .SCK files. However, when a .SCK file is copied, any changes to the original environment are lost.

Assigning a shortcut key to a menu item You can create shortcut keys to execute Quattro Pro commands. Quattro Pro provides a list of current shortcut keys. You can print the list or export it to a text file.

To assign a shortcut key to a menu item 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Keyboard tab. 3 From the Table list box, choose the type of Quattro Pro object for which you want to customize the toolbar. 4 Select the command you want to access from the keyboard from the Commands list. Each command appears under the appropriate menu name. 5 Place the insertion point in the Press New Shortcut Key box, then press your new shortcut key for the selected command.

Getting started

71

6 Click the Assign button. The new shortcut key appears in the Current Shortcut Keys list box. 7 Consider the following options: To save your changes as a new keyboard file, click Save As. To select a different keyboard file (.SCK) to customize and use, click the Load button. To remove a shortcut key, select the command option, choose the shortcut key from the Current Shortcut Keys list box, then click the Delete button. To return the keyboard layout to its original settings, click the Reset button. To see a list of all available shortcut keys, click the View All button.

To print a list of shortcut keys 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Keyboard tab. 3 Click the View All button. 4 Click the Print button.

To export a list of shortcut keys to a text file 1 Follow steps 1-3 in the above procedure. 2 Click the Export to CSV button. 3 Type a name in the File Name text box. You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keys in succession. To automatically resolve keystroke conflicts, enable the Navigate To Conflict On Assign check box.

Working with customized keyboard assignments When you customize your keyboard, you can save the configuration. This file can be opened or restored.

72


To open a set of customized keyboard assignments 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Keyboard tab. 3 Click the Load button. 4 Choose the Shortcut Key file (.SCK) you want to load.

To save a set of customized keyboard assignments 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Keyboard tab. 3 Click the Save As button. 4 Choose the Shortcut Key file (.SCK) in which you want to save your assignments.

To restore all keyboard assignments to their original settings 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Keyboard tab. 3 Click the Reset button. The keyboard configuration you choose is saved to the file listed below the Current Shortcut Keys list box.

Removing an access key from a menu item You remove an access key from a command when, for example, you want to use it elsewhere.

To remove an access key from a menu item 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Keyboard tab. 3 In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to customize. 4 Click the command.

Getting started

73

5 In the Current Shortcut Keys box, select the key combination you want to remove. 6 Click the Delete button.

Customizing toolbars and dialog boxes You can customize a toolbar or Property Bar to display the buttons you want, and in the order you want them. Because of the enhanced toolbar functionality in Quattro Pro 9, you cannot use toolbars that you created in earlier versions of Quattro Pro. These toolbars must be created. However, you can copy toolbars that other people have created in Quattro Pro 9. Just copy their .CFG files to your programs folder. Remember that when a .CFG file is copied, any changes to the original configuration are lost. You can determine how dialog boxes appear. Dialog boxes can be simple and match Windows file management dialogs. On the other hand, you can choose enhanced dialog boxes that let you view file contents, save or rename files, or see what is on your computer and network. You can also change network connections, change file or folder properties, and create file or folder shortcuts. The dialog box settings you choose affects dialog boxes in Open, Save, Insert File, Play or Record Macro, and Save As dialog boxes.

Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars to make them more pertinent to your spreadsheet needs.

To customize a toolbar 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Toolbars tab. 3 To change a Property Bar, select it from the Property Bars list. The Property Bar in the application window updates to match your selection. 4 Select the command you want to add from the Commands list. Each command appears under the appropriate menu name. 5 Drag buttons from the dialog box to any toolbar or Property Bar on your screen. 6 Consider the following options:

74


To customize a toolbar that is not currently displayed, click Toolbars, then select the toolbar you want to customize. To rearrange buttons, click and drag them to different locations. To return a toolbar to its original display, click Toolbars, select the toolbar, then click the Reset button. To delete buttons, drag them off the toolbar or Property Bar until an X appears. To see descriptions of each button, move the mouse over the button until a QuickTip appears.

Customizing a title bar For a more descriptive title bar, you can display the full pathname. To display a different title in the title bar, start Quattro Pro in Developer mode.

To show full folder paths in title bars 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the File Options tab. 3 Click Enable Full Path Titles.

To display a different title in the title bar 1 Start Quattro Pro in Developer mode with /d parameter. (For example, C:\PROGRAM FILES\COREL\WORDPERFECT OFFICE 2000\QPW.EXE /d). 2 Click Tools, Settings, Title. 3 Type the new title. For more information about Developer mode, see “Working in Developer mode” on page 519.

Customizing dialog boxes You can customize dialog boxes. For example, you can have Quattro Pro display a simple dialog box with basic commands, or one with extra functionality, such as a menu bar. Enhanced file management capabilities are available in file management dialog boxes such as File, Save and File, Open.

Getting started

75

To specify simple or enhanced file dialogs 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the File Options tab. 3 Do one of the following: To use simpler Windows dialog boxes that display only basic commands, disable the Use Enhanced File Dialogs check box. To add more functionality to file management dialogs, enable the Use Enhanced File Dialogs. You can also create your own dialog boxes. For more information, see “Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls” on page 579.

Saving your workspace The arrangement of windows on-screen is called a workspace. It includes the position and size of all notebook windows and the names of the files contained in each window. The positions of chart and dialog windows are not saved as part of a workspace. After you have created a workspace that best suits your needs, you can save this configuration. When you want to use this customized workspace again, you can restore it.

Saving a workspace When you customize your workspace by rearranging the desktop components, you can then save the workspace and use it with future projects.

To save a workspace 1 Click File, Workspace, Save. 2 Type a filename. Do not include a filename extension; the .WBS extension is automatically added for workspace files.

76


Saving a workspace does not save the contents of the files within it. Use File, Save or Save As to save files. Also, if you use File, Save As, you must click File, Workspace, Save afterward so that Quattro Pro can open the correct file the next time you try to open the workspace.

To restore a workspace 1 Click File, Workspace, Restore. 2 Choose the .WBS file you want. Quattro Pro overlays existing windows with the windows stored in the workspace file, then opens the appropriate file for each. Quattro Pro always opens the latest saved version of files when you open a workspace. If you leave the workspace and save a file included in the workspace, Quattro Pro opens the updated version of the file the next time you click File, Workspace, Restore.

Saving and closing notebooks Each notebook is saved as its own file. The default filename for the first notebook is NOTEBK1.QPW. The first time you save a notebook, you can accept this default filename or rename the file.

Saving part of notebook You can extract part of a notebook and save it as a separate file, leaving the original file intact. This is similar to copying the data, but allows you to also copy values or formulas, and to save the notebook’s cell names and charts along with specified cells.

Closing notebooks Before you close a Quattro Pro notebook, you should close all open spreadsheet windows. When you close a notebook, you are prompted to save any unsaved changes.

Saving a notebook When saving a notebook for the first time, you have the option of accepting the default name or providing a new name for the file. You also have the option of applying a password to the notebook. For information about setting passwords, see “Using password protection” on page 703. Getting started

77

When you first open Quattro Pro, the default folder appears when you open or save a file. If you open or save a file in another folder, that folder becomes the default folder until you restart Quattro Pro. For more information on the default folder, see “File-handling options” on page 652.

To save a notebook 1 Click File, Save. 2 Type a filename.

To save a file with a new filename 1 Click File, Save As. 2 From the Save In list box, choose the drive where you want to save the file. 3 Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type the filename in the File Name box.

To save the file with a password 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in the above procedure. 2 Enable the Password Protect check box. 3 Type the password. 4 Type the password again for verification. To save the file with a password after you have saved it previously, click File, Save As, then select Password Protect.

To specify a default filename extension 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the File Options tab. 3 Enter one to three letters in the File Extension box. The default filename extension is .QPW.

78


It is useful to specify a different extension if you usually save or open files in a format other than .QPW. For example, if you work mostly with Microsoft Excel files, it would be helpful to specify .XLS as the default extension.

To specify a new default folder 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the File Options tab. 3 In the Default Folder list box, specify the new default folder, for example, c:\myfiles.

Backing up files If you exit Quattro Pro without saving your document, or if a power or network failure occurs, you will lose your work unless you have selected the Document Backup option. If you exit Quattro Pro unexpectedly with Timed Backup activated, you are prompted to recover any open files the next time you start Quattro Pro.

To back up your notebooks automatically 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the File Options tab. 3 Enable the Timed Backup Every check box. 4 In the Minutes box, set a time interval from 1 to 59 minutes.

Saving part of a notebook When you save part of a notebook, it is extracted and saved in a separate file, leaving the original file intact. You can choose to copy values or formulas, and the notebook’s cell names and charts are saved along with the specified cells. You can choose to save formula cells just as they are, or you can choose to save their resulting values. When you open a file saved with the Formulas option, formulas adjust to reflect their new positions, even if they are absolute. If a formula refers to cells outside the selection being saved, its results may be inaccurate. In this case, it is best to use the Values option. You can also extract data to a different file format. When doing this, you should set up the extracted cells in a way that makes sense to the program. For example, when extracting data to a Paradox file format, the cells should Getting started

79

list related data in columns (which are interpreted as fields), and should contain column headings (which are interpreted as field names). If you include the filename extension used by a different program, the file is saved in the appropriate file format. For example, to create a tab-delimited text file, use the extension .TXT and set the File Type to Text (.TXT).

To extract part of a notebook 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, Extract to File. 2 In the Cell(s) edit field, type the cell name or coordinates to be saved. You can specify noncontiguous selections by separating the selections with commas. 3 Do one of the following: To save the cells exactly as they are, enable the Formulas button. To save the resulting values instead of the original formulas, enable the Values button. 4 Enter the filename you want. 5 To password protect the file, type a password. The extracted data begins at cell A1, regardless of its position in the original file. If the selection includes hidden rows or columns, the hidden rows or columns are saved in the new file, and remain hidden when you open the file. Some cell names and charts saved in the extracted file may not be meaningful if they refer to cells that were not also extracted. You can delete them, reassign them, or ignore them.

Closing a notebook When you close a file, you remove the notebook and all its associated information from the desktop. Always save your file before closing to keep any changes you have made.

To close a notebook without saving Click File, Close. If the notebook has unsaved changes, a dialog box appears prompting you to save your changes. Click No.

80


To exit Quattro Pro Click File, Exit. If you have not changed any open files since the last time you saved them, the files close. If you have changed any files, you are prompted to save your work. You can also exit Quattro Pro and save all notebooks by right-clicking the Quattro Pro button on the taskbar and clicking Close.

Getting started

81

MOVING BETWEEN MICROSOFT EXCEL AND QUATTRO PRO

3

You can convert Microsoft Excel workbooks to Quattro Pro notebooks with truncating data. When you finish working on a file, you can save it in a Microsoft Excel, Quattro Pro, or other file format. In Quattro Pro, you can open files in the following Microsoft Excel file formats: Microsoft Excel 97 Microsoft Excel v7 Microsoft Excel v5 Microsoft Excel v3 You can save files in the following Microsoft Excel file formats: Microsoft Excel 97 Microsoft Excel v7 Microsoft Excel v5 Quattro Pro translates most Microsoft Excel formats, navigational tools, print options, formulas, and spreadsheet functions. Occasionally, some information in a workbook cannot be imported or may not be displayed in the same way after the conversion process. For a list of conversion considerations, see


83

Conversion notes for Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help. You can also use Microsoft Excel menus and tab names when working with a notebook. Quattro Pro can also open and save other file formats. For more information, see “Opening, saving, and customizing file formats” on page 653. Quattro Pro does not support Microsoft Excel macros.

Opening and saving Microsoft Excel workbooks You can open Microsoft Excel workbooks in Quattro Pro. When you open a Microsoft Excel workbook, Quattro Pro reads the Microsoft Excel file into memory. If you change the data, you can save the changes as a .QPW (v7, v8, v9) file so that you do not lose formulas or features not supported by Microsoft Excel. Microsoft Excel workbooks that contain custom spreadsheet names may not open in Quattro Pro if characters used in the names are not recognized by Quattro Pro. In this event, Quattro Pro displays a message warning you about the invalid spreadsheet name. You can change the spreadsheet name to make it compatible with Quattro Pro. For a list of valid Quattro Pro characters, see “Naming a spreadsheet” on page 50.

Opening and saving a Microsoft Excel workbook You can open a Microsoft Excel workbook in Quattro Pro. Quattro Pro reads Microsoft Excel version 3, 5, 7, and 97 workbook files. If you try to open a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains custom spreadsheet names that use characters not recognized by Quattro Pro, you are advised to change the spreadsheet names. For a list of valid Quattro Pro characters, see “Naming a spreadsheet” on page 50.

To open a Microsoft Excel workbook in Quattro Pro 1 Click File, Open. 2 Choose the drive where the workbook file is stored from the Look In list box. 3

Double-click the folder in which the workbook file is stored.

4 Double-click the filename.

84


To save a Microsoft Excel workbook as a Quattro Pro notebook 1 Click File, Save As. 2 Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list box. 3 Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 If you want to change the file’s name, type the filename in the File Name box. By default, the file is given a .QPW extension.

To address the problem of invalid Quattro Pro characters in spreadsheet names 1 Observe the invalid spreadsheet name displayed in the Invalid Name text box. 2 Consider the following options: To have Quattro Pro change the spreadsheet name to include only valid Quattro Pro characters, enable the Fix Invalid Spreadsheet Name button. The new name appears in the New Name text box. You can make further changes to the name if you use valid Quattro Pro characters. To keep the original spreadsheet name, enable the Do Not Fix Invalid Spreadsheet Name button. If you enable the Do Not Fix Invalid Spreadsheet Name button and try to use the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet name, you cannot initiate formulas and macros because Quattro Pro does not recognize the invalid characters used in the spreadsheet name. If you enable the Fix Invalid Spreadsheet Name button but have used the original spreadsheet name in cell references, remember to search for these references and replace them with the new name.

Saving a Quattro Pro notebook as a Microsoft Excel file You can save a Quattro Pro notebook file as a Microsoft Excel file. However, some file format features unique to Quattro Pro may be lost. For more information, see Conversion notes for Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.


85

To save a Quattro Pro notebook as a Microsoft Excel file 1 Click File, Save As. 2 Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list box. 3 Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type the filename in the File Name box. 5 Choose a Microsoft Excel file format (Microsoft Excel 97 or Microsoft Excel v5/v7). When you open a Microsoft Excel workbook in Quattro Pro, edit the workbook, then click File, Save, the workbook file is saved as an .XLS file. When you click File, Save As, the file defaults to a .QPW file.

Working with Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro If you are switching to Quattro Pro from Microsoft Excel 97, you can use Microsoft Excel 97 menus in Quattro Pro. This lets you work in a familiar environment until you are accustomed to the Quattro Pro menu structure. You can change spreadsheet tabs in a Quattro Pro notebook to the Microsoft Excel 97 spreadsheet naming convention. This helps preserve the integrity of formulas that have explicitly referenced spreadsheet names when you open Microsoft Excel files.

Using Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro You can use Microsoft Excel menus and tabs while working in Quattro Pro.

To use Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the Compatibility tab. 3 Click Microsoft Excel 97 in the Compatibility Options list box.

To switch to a Microsoft Excel 97 menu 1 Right-click anywhere on the Menu Bar. 2 Click Microsoft Excel Menu.

86


To switch to Microsoft Excel naming conventions for spreadsheet tabs 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the Display tab. 3 Enable the Display as Numbers check box. If you try to open a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains custom spreadsheet names created with characters not recognized by Quattro Pro, a warning message appears. For more information, see “Opening and saving Microsoft Excel workbooks” on page 84.


87

WORKING WITH PROJECT TEMPLATES

4

A template helps you start a notebook. A project template provides a basic format and structure for spreadsheets and data entry forms commonly used in business and at home. You can also create your own project templates.

PerfectExpert project templates WordPerfect Office 2000 templates are divided into categories that are based on WordPerfect Office 2000 applications. All of the available PerfectExpert project templates appear in a dialog box.

PerfectExpert panel When you open a project, a panel appears on the left side of the document window. You can use the options on the PerfectExpert panel to complete the document, spreadsheet, or slide show you are working on. For more information about the PerfectExpert panel, see, “Using the PerfectExpert panel” on page 95.


89

Creating projects using templates A project is a notebook template you can use to create a new notebook. Many of the Quattro Pro project templates provide a basic format and structure for common spreadsheets and data entry forms. A project template provides a basic format for spreadsheet projects and data entry forms.

PerfectExpert and templates If you created templates in a previous version of WordPerfect or Quattro Pro, you can copy the templates into the CUSTOM QP TEMPLATES folder in C:\PROGRAM FILES\COREL\WORDPERFECT OFFICE 2000\TEMPLATE. The templates appear when you click File, New From Project.

Choosing a project template Quattro Pro provides more than 130 project templates to help you create home and business projects.

To create a notebook based on a project 1 Click File, New From Project. 2 Choose a category from the Categories list box. 3 Choose a project from the Projects list box. A description of the project appears below the Projects list box. 4 Click the Create button. The PerfectExpert will help you create your project.

90


To close the PerfectExpert panel, click the Close Window button in the upper-right corner.

Displaying a list of previously used projects You can view a list of all the projects you’ve worked on.

To display a list of previously used projects 1 Click File, New From Project. 2 Click the Work On tab. 3 Double-click the project. You can open any of these projects from the Work On dialog box.

Displaying project templates when Quattro Pro opens You can have Quattro Pro display project templates each time you open the application.

To display project templates when Quattro Pro opens 1 Click File, New From Project. 2 Click the Options button, then click Show This Dialog At Startup.

Changing a project description You can change the name and description of a project.

To change a project description 1 Click File, New From Project. 2 From the Categories list box, choose a category. 3 Choose a project from the Projects list box. A description of the project appears below the Projects list box. 4 Click the Options button, then click Project Properties. 5 In the Modify A Project dialog box, do one or both of the following:


91

To change the name of the project, type a new name in the Display Name box. To change the description of the project, type a new description in the Description box.

Creating a list of favorite project templates If you plan to use a project template often, you can add it to the Favorites list.

To add a project to the Favorites list 1 Click File, New From Project. 2 From the Categories list box, choose a category. 3 Choose the project you want to add to the Favorites list. 4 Click the Copy To Favorites button. You can display items in the Favorites folder by clicking File, New From Project, then choosing the Favorites category from the list box.

Working with project template categories Project template categories are typically based on WordPerfect Office 2000 applications. Quattro Pro also lists the available project templates for each category. You can create new categories, and rename or delete existing categories. You can also add, copy, or move project templates to categories.

Creating, renaming, and deleting template categories You can create and rename new categories. You can also delete existing ones.

To create a category 1 Click File, New From Project. 2 Click the Options button, then click Create Category. 3 In the Create A Category box, type a name for the new category. If you want the category to appear near the top of the list, begin the name with a bracket ([) or asterisk (*).

92


To rename a category 1 Choose the category from the Categories list box. 2 Click the Options button, then click Rename Category. 3 Type a new name in the Rename Category box.

To delete a category 1 Choose the category from the Categories list box. 2 Click the Options button, then click Remove Category. Deleting a category does not delete project templates from the hard drive. If you delete a category that contains project templates not stored in another category, Quattro Pro creates a new category, “[Deleted Projects],” that contains these project templates.

Adding, moving, and copying project templates to categories You can add new project templates to categories, or move or copy existing project templates to different categories. For information about creating your own template, see “Creating your own project template” on page 94. Predefined project files, such as the memo, agenda, and budget project templates included with WordPerfect Office 2000, have a .AST or .ASX extension. They are stored in the C:\PROGRAM FILES\COREL\WORDPERFECT OFFICE 2000\TEMPLATE folder. To obtain additional predefined project templates, check the Corel Web page at www.corel.com. When you add a document, spreadsheet, or slide show to the project template list, you can use that file as a template on which to base similar documents, spreadsheets, or slide shows.

To add an existing project to a category 1 Click File, New From Project. 2 From the Categories list box, choose the category where you want the new project to appear. 3 Click the Options button, then click Add Project. 4 Enable the I Want To Add An Existing Project button to add an existing project. 5 Click the Next button. Working with project templates

93

6 Type the filename or browse for the file. 7 Click Finish.

To add a new document or executable file to a category 1 Follow steps 1-3 in the previous procedure. 2 Enable the I Want To Add Another Document button. 3 Click the Next button. 4 Specify the name and description of the document. 5 Type the filename or browse for the file. The new project is added to the Quattro Pro Custom Templates category. When you open a document you added to a project templates category, it opens in its own application.

To move or copy a project to a different category 1 Click File, New From Project. 2 From the Categories list box, choose the category that contains the project you want to copy or move. 3 From the Projects list box, choose a project. 4 Click the Options button, then click Copy Project or Move Project. 5 Choose the category where you want to place the project.

Creating your own project template You can create your own custom Quattro Pro template. For information about adding your project templates to a project category, see “Adding, moving, and copying project templates to categories” on page 93.

To create a project template 1 From the Categories list box, choose Custom QP Templates. 2 From the Projects list box, choose Template. 3 Click the Create button. A blank project template opens.

94


4 Click the Instructions tab. Follow the guidelines for building a template.

Using the PerfectExpert panel When you open a Quattro Pro project, a notebook opens. On the left side of the notebook is the PerfectExpert panel. The buttons on this panel help you manage your project. The PerfectExpert prompts you as you enter data. The buttons are as follows: Turn Highlight On/Off — enables or disables yellow highlighted areas on the project that designate areas where the user can enter data Insert Sample Data — places sample data in the project to guide you when you enter data Remove Sample Data — deletes all sample data Save A Version — saves a version of the document so that you can compare results with different versions Open A Version — retrieves a version of the document so that you can compare results with the current version Print Preview — lets you view your document before you print it Print — prints the document Save — lets you name and save the file


95

CREATING A SPREADSHEET

5

You can create spreadsheet-based documents from templates or a blank notebook. Once you have created a spreadsheet, you can enter data and add comments to your cell content. You can also calculate total rows and columns of numbers. You can perform simple calculations using automatic calculation tools or perform complex calculations using formulas and spreadsheet functions. For more information about using formulas and functions see, “Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123.

Creating and opening a notebook Quattro Pro contains spreadsheets in a notebook file. When you start a new spreadsheet in Quattro Pro, you must first create a notebook. You can create a new notebook from a list of project templates or from the default template. The default template is a notebook containing empty spreadsheets. You can also open an existing notebook or customize how Quattro Pro opens. Project templates prompt you for data, and then format and calculate it automatically. When you create a blank notebook, you must format the data yourself and perform your own calculations. For information about using project templates, see “Working with project templates” on page 89.

Creating a new notebook You can create a notebook from a project template or from the default template. Project templates prompt you for input, determine the format, and perform most calculations for you. The default template allows you to perform all the calculations and formatting yourself. Creating a spreadsheet

97

To create a notebook using a project template 1 Click File, New From Project. 2 Select Quattro Pro 9 from the Categories list box. 3 Choose a project from the Projects list box. 4 Click the Create button. 5 Click the appropriate buttons on the PerfectExpert panel.

To create a notebook using the default template Click File, New.

Opening an existing notebook You can open any existing Quattro Pro notebook available on your computer. You can also open other file formats within Quattro Pro. For information about opening other file formats, see “Managing files and data” on page 651.

To open an existing notebook 1 Click File, Open. 2 Choose a file from the Filename list box. 3 Click Open. Version 9 Quattro Pro files use the .QPW .extension. Earlier versions use .WB3, .WB2, or .WB1 extensions.

Customizing Quattro Pro start options You can customize Quattro Pro start options, for example, you can automatically open a specific notebook every time you launch Quattro Pro. By default, Quattro Pro opens with the Quattro Pro splash screen and then proceeds to the first spreadsheet in a blank notebook. For a complete list of custom start options, see Startup switches for Quattro Pro in the Quattro Pro online Help.

To start Quattro Pro with custom options 1 Click Start, Run on the Windows Taskbar.

98


2 Type the QPW path followed by a space, then type the startup option. For example, C:\COREL\SUITE9\PROGRAMS\QPW MYFILE.QPW starts Quattro Pro and opens MYFILE.QPW.

Working with data Quattro Pro recognizes two types of data in a cell: labels and values. A label contains alphanumeric characters such as titles and phone numbers. All values are calculable data. You can enter labels and values in your spreadsheet by selecting the cell and typing the data. Quattro Pro determines the type of data by the characters you type. After you type data into the cell, Quattro Pro displays whether the data is a label or a value in the Application Bar. By default, labels are always left-aligned. The format of values depends on the type of value, the number format you choose, and the default settings. There are three types of values: You can enter labels and values into a cell.

numbers dates and times formulas Some characters act as both values and labels, depending on the context. For example, a minus sign (-) before a number indicates a negative number while a minus sign (-) between two numbers indicates subtraction. You must follow the rules outlined in this section when entering your data to ensure Quattro Pro classifies the data correctly. If you enter values or labels incorrectly, it affects formatting and any calculations you may perform.

Working with labels and special characters A label can be only text, text with numbers, or numbers seen as text. For example, 145 Howard Street, an address, and 202-555-1212, a phone number, are labels, so they are not calculated as formulas. A label can begin with any letter, punctuation mark, or symbol, except the following characters:


99

Character

Description

/

forward slash

+

plus

-

minus

$

dollar sign

(

open parenthesis

@

at sign

#

number sign

.

period

=

equals

If you type one of the characters listed above, Quattro Pro treats the information as a formula or value. (This includes the currency symbol from your default language setting.) If you want the information to be a label, you must first type a quotation mark. For example, to enter (Before Taxes), type: “(Before Taxes). Quattro Pro does not calculate labels. All labels are left-aligned within the cell. Labels that exceed the width of cells overlap adjacent cells if the adjacent cells are empty. If adjacent cells are not empty, overlapping information appears truncated. You can view the entire cell contents in the input line, wrap the text to the next line within the cell, or adjust the size of the rows and columns to show the entire label. Quattro Pro interprets text as labels.

You can also change the alignment of the cell content and force Quattro Pro to read values as labels by entering any one of the following label characters before the value: ‘ “ ^. For more information about formatting, see ”Editing and formatting a spreadsheet" on page 159.

Entering labels Although only the portion of the label that fits in the column is displayed, Quattro Pro stores all the text. The characters you type in the cell appear in

100


the input line above the column letters. When you select a cell containing a label that exceeds the width of the cell, the entire label appears.

To enter a label 1 Click a cell. 2 Type alphanumeric characters. 3 Press ENTER.

To enter several lines of a label in a cell 1 Click a cell. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Alignment tab. 4 Enable the Wrap Text check box. 5 Click OK. 6 Type the first line of text. 7 Press ALT+SHIFT+ENTER to move to the next line. To turn a value into a label... Do the following... Left-aligned

Type ‘ before the value

Right-aligned

Type “ before the value

Centered

Type ^ before the value

If you make a mistake while entering data or want to undo an action, click Edit, Undo.

Entering special characters and symbols Use symbols to access characters that are not on your keyboard, such as icons, phonetic characters, and characters in other languages. You can insert these characters in any cell.

101


You can enter symbols and special characters into a cell.

To enter special characters and symbols 1 Double-click a cell, then click Insert, Symbol. 2 Select a character set, then select a character. 3 Click one of the following: Insert — to insert the character and leave the dialog box open Insert, Close — to insert the character and close the dialog box You can also click the WP Characters button on the Property Bar to access symbols.

To repeat characters in a cell Type a backslash character (\) followed by the character you want to repeat in the cell. For example, to fill a cell with hyphens, type \-.

To repeat a series of characters in a pattern 1 Type a backslash character (\). 2 Type the first set of characters to be repeated after the backslash, such as \abc. If you want a label to begin with a backslash, but you do not want to repeat the characters after it, precede the backslash with an alignment character. You can align data by preceding the data with an alignment character.

102


Working with numbers A value is a number, formula, date or time. Characters that do not fit into a cell appear in exponential format.

Numbers can only consist of the following: numerals (0 to 9) minus sign (-) for negative numbers plus sign (+) for positive numbers currency symbols, for example $ one decimal point a trailing % an E for scientific notation When entering numbers, remember the following rules: Use a minus sign (-), not parentheses, to indicate a negative number. However, if you change the numeric format to currency or comma, negative numbers appear in parentheses. Do not include spaces in the entry. If a number does not fit into a cell, it is displayed in exponential format. Use numeric characters, not letters, to represent 1 and 0. For example, do not substitute a lowercase l (“el”) for 1 (one) or an uppercase O (“oh”) for 0 (zero).

Entering numbers You can enter numbers in a spreadsheet in the same way that you enter labels. The numbers you type appear in the input line as you type them. When you press ENTER, the word Value appears in the Application Bar identifying the data type of the cell.


103

To enter numbers 1 Click the cell. 2 Type the entry. The characters you type appear in the cell and on the input line above the column letters. 3 Press ENTER.

To enter fractions 1 Click a cell. 2 Type the number as a decimal. 3 Click Format, Selection. 4 Click the Numeric Format tab. 5 Enable the Fraction button. 6 Selection a type from the Fractions list.

Working with dates and times You can enter a date or time in many formats, such as 04-04-98, 04/04/98, and 01:42:30 PM. Quattro Pro stores all dates as serial integers so that it can calculate dates as values. The minimum serial integer is -109,571, which equals January 1, 1600; the maximum is 474,816, which equals December 31, 3199. The serial number appears in the input line when you select the cell. Serial numbers let you use date or time values in formulas. For example, subtracting 10/1/92 from 10/8/92 results in 7. Time is represented as decimal fractions, between 0.000 (for 00:00:00) and 0.99999 (for 23:59:59). Mixed numbers indicate the date and time: 2.5 represents January 1, 1900 at 12:00 noon. You can enter dates and times into a cell. Quattro interprets dates and times as serial numbers

104


If your notebook includes many dates, you may want to force specific cells to accept only dates and times. This is particularly useful when you create notebooks that others will use. For information about restricting cell data, see “Restricting and annotating cell data” on page 114.

Applying formats to dates and times While Quattro Pro reads dates and times as values, it applies specific formatting and calculation criteria to them depending on the date and time criteria you set as your defaults. When you type a date, the cell formatting automatically switches to the date format you typed. You can enter dates and times in any default date and time format. Format

Example

DD-MMM-YYYY

28-Apr-1999

DD-MMM-YY

11-Nov-99

DD-MMM

11-Nov

MMM-YY

Nov-99

M/DD/YY

5/15/99

MM/DD/YY

05/16/99

MM/DD

05/16

DD/M, assumes the current year

15/5

DD/MM, assumes the current year

15/05

DD-MMM, assumes the current year

04-Mar

MMM-YY, assumes the first day of the month

Mar-99

MMM-YYYY, assumes first day of the month

Apr-1999

HH:MM:SS AM/PM

04:10:45 AM

HH:MM AM/PM

10:45 AM

The long international time format is ordinarily HH:MM:SS (13:42:30). The short international time format is ordinarily HH:MM (13:42). International date and time formats are set using Tools, Settings, International Settings. If you change the settings, you must conform to the new settings when you enter dates or times in an international format.


105

Once you enter a date or time, you can change to another date or time format. For more information about setting numeric formats, see “Editing and formatting spreadsheets.”

Entering years in two digits If you enter a year using two digits, Quattro Pro assumes the century based on the following year ranges: Type the year

Quattro Pro assumes

30-99

1930-1999

00-29

2000-2029

For example, the date 4/26/99 is interpreted as 4/26/1999. The date 2/2/25 is interpreted as 2/2/2025. To override the year assumption, enter all four digits for the year, for example, 4/26/1927.

Entering dates prior to 1900 If you enter a negative serial date value (for example, for a date before December 30, 1899) and reformat it as a date, you should set your system to the four-digit Windows default setting, then select either the Short Date International (11/15/1899) or Long Date International (Wednesday, November 15, 1899) date format in Format, Selection to properly display century information for the date. Other standard and user-defined four-digit display options do not display the century information properly for negative serial date numbers.

About the Year 2000 Quattro Pro has always stored dates entered into a cell (except when entered as a label) as a unique date/time serial number, or integer date value. Therefore, Quattro Pro has always provided for date storage which includes the century information. For the transition to the year 2000, it is best to enter all dates (in both numeric and label formats) in a four-digit year, or “explicit century” year format (such as mm/dd/yyyy).

Entering dates and times Dates are right-aligned by default. You can enter a date value in any of the formats listed in “Applying formats to dates and times” on page 105. You can

106


also use the @DATE function to return the date and time serial number for a specified date, for example, @DATE(97,8,22) = 35664.

To enter a date or time 1 Click a cell. 2 Type the date or time according to one of the available date formats. 3 Press ENTER.

To enter the current date 1 Click a cell. 2 Click Insert, Date.

To enter a date using the spreadsheet Date function 1 Click a cell. 2 Click the Spreadsheet Function button on the toolbar. 3 Select Date from the Function Category 4 Select the DATE function from the Function list. 5 Enter the date (year, month, and day) between the parentheses. 6 Press ENTER.

Automatically entering data You can fill cells with numbers, a combination of letters and numbers, or specific types of labels, such as days of the week or months of the year. Based on the entries in one or more cells, you can quickly fill cells with a sequence of data by using one of the following data-filling tools: QuickType QuickFill Fill Series You can automate data entry by using either QuickType to continue a pattern or QuickFill to enter a predefined series. QuickType lets you automatically repeat labels and functions. The QuickFill button is used to fill cells according to one or more seed values or series list. You can use QuickFill with a seed value or on empty cells. You can also use QuickFill to name sheet tabs and you can create custom series to use with QuickFill. The Fill Series option is used to specify rules for filling the selected cells. You can use numbers, dates, times, or formulas.


107

Data-filling labels using QuickType The QuickType feature lets you automatically repeat labels and functions. QuickType remembers the data you’ve inserted in a column and, once it recognizes the initial letters or sequence you are typing, automatically inserts the data. As you type a function, the likeliest function is displayed.

To have text filled in for you 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the General tab. 3 Select QuickType, then click OK. 4 Type text in a cell.

Data-filling values using seed values The QuickFill tool saves you time by automatically filling a selection of cells that you start with a seed value. When filling a selection of cells, you can have one seed value or many. The blank cells to be filled must be contiguous with the seed value(s), extending down the column or across the row to the right. You can fill a 3-D or noncontiguous selection, but each sheet or selection must have its own seed value or values for its own filled sequence. You can extend in two directions at once by selecting cells with seed values next to the upper-left cell. The types of entries you can use as QuickFill seed values, along with the resulting sequence, are as follows:

108

Seed value(s)

Continued sequence

1st

2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th. . .

Qtr 1

Qtr 2, Qtr 3, Qtr 4, Qtr 1. . .

1st Quarter

2nd Quarter, 3rd Quarter. . .

Jan

Feb, Mar. . .

January

February, March. . .

Mon

Tue, Wed, Thu. . .

Monday

Tuesday, Wednesday. . .

Week 1

Week 2, Week 3. . .

P1, P2, Total

P3, P4, Total, P5, P6, Total. . .

Jan 89, Feb 89

Mar 89, Apr 89. . .

100 Days

101 Days, 102 Days, 103 Days. . .

100 Days, 200 Days

300 Days, 400 Days, 500 Days. . . Quattro Pro 9: Chapter 5

1, 3, 5

7, 9, 11, 13. . .

1, 3, 6

8.333333, 10.83333, 13.33333. . .

04/05/92

04/06/92, 04/07/92. . .

The last example shows the seed value formatted as a date.

To use QuickFill with a seed value 1 Enter a seed value in a cell. 2 Select the seed value cell and the blank cells you want to fill. 3 Right-click the selection then click QuickFill.

To fill a selection of cells using QuickFill 1 Select a block or blocks of cells. 2 Type the first value or first few values of the series (for example, January or 10, 20, or 1st Quarter). 3 Drag across the cells you want to fill, including the original cells. 4 Right-click the selection then click QuickFill.

Using QuickFill to enter data in cells and sheet tabs You can data-fill cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically. All tabs are filled until the series is complete. To use only part of the series, modify the series and save it under another name, then use the new series to fill the tabs.

To use QuickFill on empty cells 1 Select the cells. 2 Click the QuickFill button. 3 Choose a series from the Series Name list. A list of its elements appears in the Series Element box. 4 Enable one of the following fill options: Columns — fills to the bottom of the first column of cells, then continues at the top of the second column Rows — fills the first row of cells, then the second. This procedure is similar to using Edit Fill, Fill Series


109

To use QuickFill on sheet tabs 1 Select an empty cell. 2 Click the QuickFill button. 3 Choose a list series from the Series Name list. A list of its elements appears in the Series Element field. 4 Enable the Tabs option to fill the sheet tabs.

Creating QuickFill series You can create your own sequences of values and labels to enter with QuickFill.

To create a new QuickFill formula series 1 Select an empty cell. 2 Click the QuickFill button. 3 Click the Create button. 4 Type a descriptive name in the Series Name box. 5 Enable the Formula button in the Series Type group. 6 Type the first number in the series into the Seed Value box. This value is used as a constant in the formula. A string seed value is evaluated as zero. 7 Type the formula in the Formula box. Use the Seed, Previous, and Iteration buttons to insert the seed value, previous value, and iteration number into the formula. For example, the following formula produces a series that starts with 5 and increases by 5 (5, 10, 15, 20, and so on): #SEED#+(5*#ITER#).

To create a new QuickFill list series 1 Select an empty cell. 2 Click the QuickFill button. 3 Click the Create button. 4 Type a descriptive name in the Series Name box. 5 Enable the List button in the Series Type group. Enable the Repeating check box if you want the series to start again when every element has been entered once.

110


6 Type the first element of the list in the Value box, then click the Add button to add the element to the list. 7 Type the remaining elements as you entered the first. To insert an element above an existing element, highlight the existing element, type the new element in the Value field, then click the Insert button.

Modifying, renaming and deleting a QuickFill series You can modify, rename, or remove a QuickFill series from the series list.

To change a QuickFill series 1 Select an empty cell. 2

Click the QuickFill button.

3 Select the series to change. 4 Click the Modify button. 5 Change the series options. If you selected a list series, change the Series Elements Options. If you selected a formula series, change the Formula Definition Options. For help on the options, click in the title bar, then click the option.

To add elements from a list in the notebook 1 Select an empty cell. 2 Click the QuickFill button. 3 Click Extract and specify the cells that contain the new series elements. 4 Enable the Override Existing Values check box to replace any existing elements with those in the notebook.

To rename a QuickFill series 1 Click Edit, Fill, Define QuickFill. 2 Select the series, then click Rename. 3 Type the new name.


111

You can also perform any of the procedures listed above using Edit, Fill, Define QuickFill.

To delete a QuickFill series 1 Select an empty cell. 2 Click the QuickFill button. 3 Select the series to delete. 4 Click Delete, then click Yes.

Setting up a fill series for numbers and formulas You can use the Fill Series option to create your own custom number and formula series.

To fill cells with a sequence of numbers or formulas 1 Select the cells to fill. If you select a group of noncontiguous blocks of cells, Quattro Pro fills the cells in the order selected. 2 Click Edit, Fill, Fill Series. 3 Type a number or a formula in the Start Value box for the first cell. 4 Type a step value. This is the constant value to add (or multiply or use as an exponent) with the Start value or the previous value. If you want the values to decrease, enter a negative number and a stop value that is lower than the start value. The step value can also be a formula. 5 Type a stop value (the default stop value is 8191). 6 Choose one of the following options: Column — fills down the columns, starting with the left-most column Row — fills across rows, starting with the top row 7 Choose one of the following number or formula series from the Series section that you would like to govern the fill: Linear (addition) — adds the step value to the previous value (defined at first to be the start value)

112


Growth (multiplication) — multiplies the step value by the previous value Power (exponentiation) — uses the step value as the exponent of the previous value

Setting up a fill series for dates and times You can use the Fill Series option to create your own custom date series. To fill dates and times, you must know the date serial number. For more information about date serial numbers, see “Working with dates and times” on page 104.

To fill cells with a sequence of dates or times 1 Select the cells to fill. If you select noncontiguous blocks of cells, Quattro Pro fills cells in the order selected. 2 Click Edit, Fill, Fill Series. 3 Type a date or time serial number in the start value box for the first cell. To find the serial number of the date you want to start the series, enter a date in a cell on the spreadsheet using one of the recognized date formats, press ENTER, click on the cell, then view the serial number in the input line. 4 Type a Step value. This is the constant value to add (or multiply or use as an exponent) with the start value or the previous value. If you want the values to decrease, enter a negative number and a stop value that is lower than the start value. The step value can also be a formula. 5 Type a stop value (the default stop value is 8191). 6 Choose one of the following options: Column — fills down the columns, starting with the left-most column Row — fills across rows, starting with the top row 7 Choose one of the following date or time series from the Series section that you would like to govern the fill Year — increments the series by year Month — increments the series by month Week — increments the series by a 7-day week Weekday — increments the series by week days only Creating a spreadsheet

113

Day — increments the series by day Hour — increments the series by hour Minute — increments the series by minute Second — increments the series by second

Deleting values and labels When deleting values and labels, you can choose to delete only part of the cell contents, the entire cell contents, or the contents and the formatting. You can always restore the deleted data using the Undo feature. The Undo feature only works on the last deletion you performed.

Deleting data You can delete any data in a spreadsheet.

To cancel changes before you press ENTER Press ESC.

To delete cell contents Click the cell and type new data or press DEL.

To delete cell contents and formatting Select the cells, right-click the cells, then click Clear.

To delete part of the cell contents Double-click the cell, click in the cell to place the insertion point, then press BACKSPACE or DEL.

To restore an accidental deletion Click Edit, Undo.

Restricting and annotating cell data You can set restrictions on a cell to make Quattro Pro read the cell data as a specific data type, regardless of what the data is. You can also add comments to cells. By default, comments do not print with the document, but you can set up your page view to show and print comments on the spreadsheet.

114


You can annotate your cell data with cell comments.

For information about setting page view options, see “Changing your view of the notebook” on page 59.

Restricting data You can set restrictions if you want Quattro Pro to interpret numeric or formula data as a label or date. For example, Quattro Pro reads a phone number as a formula unless you specify that the phone number is to be read as a label only, or you type a label character before the phone number. For more information about label characters, see “Working with labels and special characters” on page 99.

To restrict cells 1 Select the cells to restrict. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Constraints tab. 4 Enable one of the following buttons General — accepts both labels and dates Labels Only — accepts only labels Dates Only — accepts only dates

Adding and editing cell comments Quattro Pro lets you add comments to cells. Cells with an attached comment have a red triangle in the upper-right corner. The comments appear in a bubble when you place the pointer over the cell. You can view cell comments directly on the spreadsheet and print these comments by setting your page view to view comments on the page.

To insert a cell comment 1 Click a cell.


115

2 Click Insert, Comment. 3 Type the comment, and click outside the comment bubble. You can also add a non-bubble comment inside a cell by typing a semicolon (;) after a formula or value, then typing the comment. You can see the text after the semicolon on the input line when you click the cell.

To read a cell comment Point to a cell that has a small red triangle in its upper-right corner.

To view cell comments on the spreadsheet Click View, Comments.

To edit or delete a cell comment 1 Right-click a cell that contains a comment. 2 Click one of the following Delete Comment — deletes a cell comment Edit Comment — edits a cell comment

To restore a comment Click Edit, Undo.

To change comment attributes Right-click inside the comment bubble, then click Cell, Comment, Properties.

To move a comment Click the cell containing the comment you want to edit, then drag the comment triangle icon to another cell.

Creating simple equations You can perform mathematical operations such as 1+1 directly in a cell. Quattro Pro interprets these equations as formulas and adds a blue triangle to the bottom-left corner of the cell. Quattro Pro also totals values for you using the Auto-Total feature, and understands the key word, total, as a calculation command.

116


You can calculate cell data.

Typing a simple equation into a cell When you type a forward slash ( / ) symbol, Quattro Pro might assume you are typing a date. For example, 4/4 might be interpreted as the date 4/4/97. To divide a number that might be interpreted as a date, type +, then type the formula (for example, +4/12).

To do simple math in cells 1 Type the numbers and math operators in the cell. For example, type 4500+450. Do not include commas in numbers. 2 Press ENTER. To see the formula, click the cell and look in the input line.

Using Auto-Total to create formulas The natural language processing feature understands the word “total” as a calculation command. You can total rows and columns using the label “total.” The auto-total feature is not case sensitive and is language-dependent.

To create a formula using labels 1 Enter values in rows and columns 2 Do any of the following: Type the word “total” (no quotation marks) in the first blank cell one row after the column of cells and one column to the left of the cells to be totaled. Type the word “total” (no quotation marks) in the first blank cell immediately above and to the right of the of the column to be totaled.


117

Selecting mathematical tasks from the toolbar Frequently used functions are displayed on the toolbar. For more information about a math task, point to the task and read the QuickTip.

To do math from the toolbar 1 Enter values across a row or down a column. 2 Click the blank cell to the right of or below the values. 3 Click a math task on the Toolbar. The math task button, located to the right of the Composer button. The button icon varies dependThe result displays in the cell.

Viewing key cells from the Application Bar Use the QuickCell feature to keep a cell in view even when you scroll to another part of the spreadsheet. This feature is particularly helpful when you want to view a formula cell while you make changes to the spreadsheet. For more information about turning QuickCell on and off, see “Hiding or displaying QuickCell on the Application Bar” on page 33.

To use QuickCell 1 Click a cell that you want to keep in view even when you scroll. 2 Click the QuickCell button on the Application Bar. You cannot use QuickCell between files.

Using math tools to calculate rows and columns You can calculate data in rows and columns using the PerfectExpert Simple Math toolbar. You can select the Quick Math option to perform calculations on a single row or column of data, use the More Quick Math option to calculate individual cells, or use the 2-column Quick Math option to perform calculations on two rows or columns.

Using Quick Math to calculate a single row or column Quick Math inserts a formula for you when you want to do math on a single row or column of figures. For example, you can add a column, find the average of a list of figures, or find the middle value.

118


The Quick Math feature automatically enters a formula into a cell to calculate a single row or column of values.

To do math on a single row or column 1 Click Help, PerfectExpert, Do Simple Math, Quick Math. 2 Click the selection arrow, then drag to select the cells to select a row or column for Quick Math. 3 Click the Maximize button on the Quick Math title bar to restore the dialog. 4 Select a math operation from the Do Math drop-down list. 5 Click the selection arrow to select an answer cell, then click the cell where you want to display the answer. 6 Click the Maximize button on the Quick Math title bar, then click OK to enter the formula.

Using More Quick Math to calculate each item in a row or column More Quick Math inserts formulas for you when you want to do math on each item in a row or column. For example, you could find 60% of each item in a retail price list to arrive at a wholesale price. The More Quick Math feature automatically enters formulas into cells.

To do math on each item in a row or column 1 Click Help, PerfectExpert, Do Simple Math, More Quick Math. 2 Click the selection arrow, then drag to select the cells to select a row or column. Creating a spreadsheet

119

3 Click the Maximize button on the More Quick Math title bar to restore the dialog. 4 Select a math operation from the Do Math list box, then specify an amount if needed. 5 Click the selection arrow to select an answer location, then drag to select a row or column. The answer row or column must be the same size as the list of cells. 6 Click the Maximize button on the More Quick Math title bar, then click OK to enter the formula.

Using 2-Column Quick Math to calculate two rows or columns 2-Column Quick Math inserts formulas when you want to do math between rows or columns, such as multiply each item in one column with each item in another column. For example, you could multiply a quantity column by the unit price column to find the total cost (5 units x $5.00 each = $25.00). The 2-Column Quick Math feature automatically inserts formulas to calculate rows and columns.

To do math between rows or columns 1 Click Help, PerfectExpert, Do Simple Math, 2-Column Quick Math. 2 Click the selection arrow, then drag to select the cells to select the first row or column. 3 Click the Maximize button on the 2-Column Quick Math title bar to restore the dialog. 4 Repeat steps one and two for the second row or column. 5 Select a math operation from the Do Math list box, then specify an amount, if needed. 6 Click the selection arrow to select an answer location, then drag to select a row or column. The answer row or column must be the same size as the list of figures. 7 Click the Maximize button on the 2-Column Quick Math title bar, then click OK to enter the formulas.

120


You can type cell references in the appropriate text boxes to specify rows, columns, and answer cells. To work faster, select the first row or column before clicking 2-Column Quick Math.

Using QuickSum and Calc-As-You-Go Quattro Pro includes QuickSum, a way to quickly total columns and rows of numbers. The QuickSum button on the toolbar uses @SUM to add the values of selected cells. Calc-As-You-Go lets you quickly evaluate a selection of cells. Select the cells, and Quattro Pro displays the sum, average, count, maximum value, and minimum value for those cells at the bottom-right corner of the screen on the Application Bar.

Performing calculations using QuickSum QuickSum lets you total numbers in a row or column instantly. You can use the QuickSum button to total a single row or column, multiple rows or columns, or a 3-D selection. The row or column cannot contain blank cells; QuickSum only adds values. Any labels in the selected cells are treated as zero values. You can total several cells in a column by selecting the data plus one blank cell below. For example, to total the values in the cells A1..A3, select A1..A4. The total appears in cell A4. The entries added depend on what you select before clicking QuickSum: To total...

Select the following cells...

Several cells across a row

Select the cells plus one blank cell to the right

Many columns

Select the cells and a blank row below

Many rows

Select the cells and a blank column to the right

Rows and columns and create a grand total

Select the cells with a blank column to the right and a blank row below

Cells on multiple sheets onto a blank sheet

Select cells on each sheet and the same cells on an extra blank sheet

Rows and columns on multiple sheets

Select the cells with a blank row and column around the data on each sheet

You can also use QuickSum without selecting the data you are totaling. This is useful for totaling many cells of data. Select the blank cells where you want the totals displayed (the blank cells must be adjacent to the data), then click


121

QuickSum. Quattro Pro guesses which cells you want totaled by the number of cells above (if you selected cells in a row), to the left (if you selected cells in a column), or on previous sheets (if you selected 3-D cells). After clicking QuickSum, check each @SUM formula to make sure it actually refers to the appropriate cells.

To total numbers using QuickSum 1 Select the data to total plus a blank cell at the bottom of a column of numbers, or to the right of a row of numbers. 2 Click the QuickSum button.

To total all cells on multiple spreadsheets 1 Select the 3-D cells you want to calculate. 2 Select the same cells on a blank spreadsheet. 3 Click the QuickSum button. You can only select a single row or column when totaling 3-D cells on a separate spreadsheet. Totaling a 3-D selection of multiple rows and columns requires you select blank cells to place the totals in.

Displaying running calculations using Calc-As-You-Go The Calc-As-You-Go feature displays several different running totals for the cells you select. The sum, average, count, maximum value, and minimum value for the cells you select appear on the Application Bar at the bottom of the screen. You can disable this feature from Tools, Settings. The Calc-As-You-Go feature displays

To display running calculations using Calc-As-You-Go Select the cells to perform calculations on. The totals appear on the Application Bar at the bottom of the screen.

To disable the Calc-As-You-Go feature 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the General tab. 3 Disable the Calc-As-You-Go check box.

122


WORKING WITH FORMULAS AND SPREADSHEET FUNCTIONS

6

Formulas are mathematical equations that calculate a final value, such as the difference between the values in two cells or the total of values in a column. Some formulas can also return string values; these formulas are called text formulas. The resulting string value calculated from this type of formula is called a label. Quattro Pro automatically right-aligns all formulas and left- or right-aligns the results depending on the type of result. Most formulas combine values and operators to calculate a single value. For example, you could create the formula, 4 + 4 = 8. You can also use cell addresses and names in formulas. After you enter a formula, its result appears in the cell. When cell addresses and names are used in a formula, the formula uses whatever value is currently in the cell. As the contents of cells change, formulas automatically update the result. For example, the formula A5 + 4 refers to a cell address and a number. The formula calculates the value located in cell A5 and updates the formula result each time the cell’s content changed. Once you enter a formula, it disappears and is replaced by the resulting value. You can view the formula in the input line. Formula cells are tagged with a small blue triangle in the lower-left corner of the cell.

Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions

123

You can enter formulas into cells to calculate data.

When you need complex formulas, you can plug data into built-in spreadsheet functions. Spreadsheet functions are a set of standard formulas used to simplify complex calculations. There are more than 500 spreadsheet functions, which are standard formulas. For example, @AVG(B1..B24) and @STDS (B1..B24) calculate average and standard deviation. Quattro Pro provides spreadsheet functions for more complex calculations.

All spreadsheet functions are prefaced with the @ sign. When typing a spreadsheet function, you can omit the @ if it is not the first item in the formula. When entering values in a function, you can use the Function Tip-As-You-Type feature, which displays a tip on what type of value you need to type into the function next. You can set your page view to show the formula rather than the end value. You can also use the Array function to create an entire matrix of values with one formula. Once you have created formulas, you can trace any errors that occur using the Auditing tool. You can trace precedent cells to see all the cells that influence a particular cell or trace dependent cells to see which cells are influenced by a particular cell. When performing calculations, you can set the formulas to calculate using absolute cell addresses, relative cell addresses, or cell names. The cell address determines what data the formula will calculate. You can watch a formula cell as it updates by dragging the cell to the QuickCell area of the Application Bar. For more information about QuickCell, see “Viewing key cells from the Application Bar” on page 118.

Working with formulas When you create a formula, you can choose from several values including, cell addresses and cell names, as well as operators such as +, -, *, /, and ^.

124


For example, +A10 + 3980 is a valid formula. Often, formulas contain several operators. +C5 - D12 + F24 * 0.123 You can create a formula using any of the following arguments: Argument

Example

Numbers

1948, -84, 43.23, 121/2

Cell coordinates

B12, G29..G31, B:A3..D6, or [NOTEBK2]A:A1

Cell names

EXPENSES which may reference D5..D10

Spreadsheet functions

@SUM(B1..B24)

Text set off by double quotation marks “PROFIT” or “Dear Mr.” When typing cell coordinates in a formula, you can use one period instead of two. For example, F4..F11 and F4.F11 indicate the same cells. However, you must enter two periods in coordinates when a period is the argument separator in Tools, Settings, International, Punctuation. The result of a formula depends on the order in which the arithmetic operations are performed. Each operator has precedence and the formula performs the operations in order of precedence. Operations with equal precedence are performed from left to right. For example, multiplication has higher precedence than addition, therefore +5 + 1 * 3 equals 8, not 18. The following table lists the operators and the precedence assigned to each. Operators with the highest precedence (7) are performed first. Operator

Precedence

Parentheses ( )

7

Exponents (^)

7

Negative, positive (-, +)

6

Multiplication, division (*, /)

5

Subtraction, addition (-, +)

4

Greater than or equal (>=)

3

Less than or equal (<=)

3

Less than, greater than (>, <)

3

Equal, not equal (=, <>)

3

Logical NOT (#NOT#)

1

Logical AND (#AND#)

1


125

Logical OR (#OR#)

1

Text operator (&)

1

You can override operator precedence using parentheses. Enclose in parentheses the portion of a formula you want to calculate first. When parentheses are nested inside other parentheses, the innermost part is calculated first. Example 1

Example 2

+4 * 2 + 3 = 11

+4 * (2 + 3) = 20

(4 * 2) + (3 + 5) * 4 = 40

((4 * 2) + (3 + 5)) * 4 = 64

Creating a formula When you create a formula, it must start with one of the following characters: Character

Result

.

establishes the following data as a value

+

establishes the following data as a positive value

-

establishes the following data as a negative value

()

establishes the following data as a formula and calculates anything contained by the parentheses first

@

establishes the following data as a function

#

establishes the following data as a logical equation

$

establishes the following data as a currency value

=

establishes the following data as a value

The most common character used to create basic formulas is the + sign. The following procedures apply when you to create a standard formula starting with a positive operand.

To enter a math formula 1. Type + in a blank cell. 2. Type the formula. 3 Press ENTER to calculate the formula.

To insert a cell address in a formula 1. Type + in the cell where you want to insert a cell address in a formula.

126


2. Click the cell that contains the data you want to put in the formula. 3 Click in the formula cell to the right of the +.

To insert a cell name in a formula 1. Type + in the cell where you want to insert a cell address in a formula. 2. Type the cell name. Make sure the insertion point is to the right of an operator or open parenthesis in the formula.

To insert an absolute cell address in a formula 1. Type + in the cell where you want to enter a formula. 2 Type $ before the cell address(es) you want to make absolute. You can use noncontiguous selections in a formula by selecting the first cells, then holding down CTRL while selecting additional selections. Do not include commas in numbers; for example, type 4500 instead of 4,500. After you enter the formula, you can format numbers with commas by changing the Normal setting on the Property Bar to Comma or Comma0. You can include spaces between operators and values, but the spaces are deleted when you press ENTER.

Creating text formulas and true or false formulas Text formulas are any formulas that have a textual result. Text formulas can also be created using string spreadsheet functions or an @IF function that results in a text string. In text formulas, you can use & (the concatenation operator), which appends text strings to each other text enclosed in double quotation marks (for example, “PROFIT” or “Dear Mr.”) cell references that contain labels Logical formulas are true or false statements that concern values. For example, +C3<10 displays either 1 or 0.

To create a text formula 1. Type + in a blank cell.


127

2. Type the formula; use & to combine text strings. For example, +C4&" Review" enters the text in cell C4, a space, then the word Review. 3 Press ENTER. If you want a space between strings, type it within the quotation marks.

To create a formula that evaluates to true or false 1. Click a blank cell, then type the formula using one of the logical operators. For example, +C3<10. < > <= >= <> = #NOT# #AND# #OR# 2. Press ENTER. If the statement is true, a 1 displays in the cell. If the statement is false, a 0 displays.

Viewing and converting formulas to values When creating a formula, you can choose to see the results before you press ENTER. This allows you to see whether the formula will produce the end value you want. The end value appears in the cell and the input line, replacing the formula. For more information about viewing formulas, see “Displaying formulas and comments in spreadsheets” on page 61.

To view formulas on the spreadsheet Click View, Formulas.

To view formula results as you enter data Press F9.

To display error sources in cells 1 Click Format, Notebook. 2. Click the Recalc Settings tab. 3 In the Advanced section, enable the Audit Errors check box.

128


When you enable Audit Errors, each problem cell displays the sheet and cell reference where the problem started. The notebook name is included if the cell is in another notebook.

If necessary, click the QuickFit button to adjust the width of columns that contain asterisks (******).

To convert formulas to values 1. Select the cells. 2. Click Edit, Convert to Values. 3. Specify the destination cells in the To box: To replace the formulas in the cells with their values, specify the same selection of cells for the destination cells. To copy the values of the formulas to another part of the notebook, specify the top left cell to which you want to copy the values.

Recalculating formulas You can set Quattro Pro to update calculations at specified intervals. By default, formulas are calculated when you enter them, and recalculated each time you change the data. If a notebook contains many complex formulas, you may want to delay recalculation to save time. The recommended mode is either Background or Automatic. Both ensure that your data is accurate.

To set when formulas recalculate 1. Click Format, Notebook. 2. Click the Recalc Settings tab. 3. Enable one of the following buttons: Automatic — recalculates formulas automatically, but pauses until recalculation is finished. Use Automatic if you have complex formulas that Background mode does not handle fast enough.


129

Manual — recalculates the formulas you enter or edit, but does not recalculate the entire notebook until you press F9. This setting is useful for large notebooks with many calculations. Background — recalculates formulas between keystrokes; this is the default setting. It does not interrupt your work and recalculates automatically. Quattro Pro always finishes recalculating before saving, extracting, or printing the notebook.

To recalculate formulas in Manual mode Press F9 or click the calculator located in the Application Bar to recalculate all formulas.

To recalculate a single cell in Manual mode 1. Select the cell. 2 Press F2, then press ENTER. Floating charts do not adjust automatically. When in Manual mode, a calculator appears on the Application Bar only when a formula needs to be recalculated. If you need to adjust crucial cells in large notebooks that take a long time to recalculate, you can temporarily work in Manual mode.

Setting recalculation order and iterations You can set the order in which formulas recalculate and the number of iterations they can recalculate. The Column-wise and Row-wise recalculation orders are provided for special purposes, such as for a series of formulas that create circular references to solve a problem or attain a goal. If you are not solving this type of problem, select the Natural recalculation order. Before constructing elaborate formulas requiring limited iterations, check whether the Optimizer or Solve For analysis tools can provide alternative solutions. For information about using the Optimizer and Solve For analysis tools, see “Analyzing data” on page 235.

To change the recalculation order 1. Click Format, Notebook. 2. Click the Recalc Settings tab. 3. Enable one of the following buttons:

130


Natural — calculates cells in dependency order. Formulas without dependencies are calculated first, followed by formulas that depend on them. Column-wise — starts recalculation in cell A1 of the first sheet and proceeds down column A, ignoring formulas in other columns. When column A is finished, recalculation continues in B1, and down column B. This continues to the end of the sheet (column ZZZ), and on to the last sheet in the notebook. Row-wise — starts recalculation in cell A1, but proceeds by row, starting at 1 and continuing through to row 1,000,000, to the last sheet. If you specify Column-wise or Row-wise, you should set the number of iterations to at least two. Otherwise, the notebook may be inaccurate.

To change the number of recalculation iterations 1. Click Format, Notebook. 2. Click the Recalc Settings tab. 3 Type any number up to 255 in the # of Iterations box. If the notebook has a formula with a circular reference, its cell address appears on the Recalc Settings tab to the right of the # of Iterations box. Elaborate formulas are sometimes deliberately constructed to contain circular references, because the formulas require multiple evaluations to attain an acceptable degree of accuracy. If the notebook contains no circular references and the recalculation order is set to Natural, the iteration count is ignored.

Working with the Formula Composer The Formula Composer is a tool for creating, editing, and debugging formulas. You can use the Formula Composer to build a formula from scratch or to edit a formula. The Formula Composer dialog box provides the following views of a formula: Standard View — displays all three panes (Outline, Spreadsheet Function Description, and Argument) when a function is selected Argument View — displays the Outline and Argument panes Outline View — displays only the Outline pane Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions

131

Depending on the view setting you choose, you can see up to three panes that provide information about the formula you are creating. Formula Composer Dialog.

Outline pane In the Outline pane, you can examine the structure of a formula, edit parts of the formula, and trace cell references and cell names. The Outline pane of the Formula Composer works like Windows Explorer; it shows the hierarchy of the formula you have created. You can expand or collapse parts of the formula in the Outline pane to focus on the part of the formula you want. Folder icons to the left of the formula outline indicate whether expressions are expanded or collapsed. Expressions that cannot be expanded, such as values, have a node (a small yellow circle) to their left. The outline can consist of several levels, with each level containing a different expression. By default, the Outline pane shows one expanded level of the outline.

Spreadsheet Function Description pane The Spreadsheet Function Description pane provides a brief description of the spreadsheet function you have selected in the Outline pane. When you type a spreadsheet function (for example, @SUM) in the Expression edit field of the Formula Composer, the Spreadsheet Function Description pane appears to the right of the dialog box when you are in Standard View.

Argument pane The Argument pane appears to the right of the dialog box (under the Spreadsheet Function Description pane, in Standard View), and provides entry fields for the spreadsheet function arguments. Parentheses around an argument indicate an optional argument. When you enter a value for an optional argument, you must also enter values for all preceding optional arguments. For a short description of each spreadsheet function argument, click to the left of the argument.

132


Changing Formula Composer views When you select part of the formula outline, the Expression edit box changes to show the expression you selected. If the selected expression is a spreadsheet function, the right side of the dialog box displays the Spreadsheet Function Description and Argument panes in Standard or Argument View. If an expression is incomplete or syntactically incorrect (for example, a spreadsheet function might be missing an argument), a red question mark icon appears to the left of the outline. This icon alerts you when something is wrong with part of a formula.

To switch Formula Composer views Click one of the View buttons located on the Formula Composer Toolbar: Standard View — displays all three panes (Spreadsheet Function Description, Outline, and Argument) Argument View — displays the Outline and Argument panes Outline View — displays only the Outline pane

To expand a formula in an outline 1. Select the formula. 2 Click the Expand button.

To collapse the current expression of the outline Click the Collapse button.

To expand or collapse part of a formula outline 1. Select part of the formula outline. 2. Press ENTER or double-click the outline. 3. Click one of the following buttons: Expand Collapse You can also double-click an expression to expand or collapse it.


133

Creating a formula using the Formula Composer The Formula Composer Toolbar has three buttons that help you enter each argument of a formula: Function button — nests a spreadsheet function in the formula Name button — inserts a cell name in the formula Pointer button — inserts a cell or cell reference The Function, Name, and Pointer buttons are also used to enter spreadsheet function arguments in the Arguments pane. When you click the Pointer button, the Formula Composer dialog box shrinks to show only its title bar until you make a selection. If an expression is incomplete or syntactically incorrect (for example, a spreadsheet function might be missing an argument), a red question mark icon alerts you to the error in the outline. Expressions that cannot be expanded, such as values, have a small yellow circle to their left.

To create a formula in the Formula Composer 1. Select a blank cell. 2. Click the Formula Composer button. 3. Create the formula using one or more of these methods: Click the Function button to choose a function from the list. Click an expression in the outline on the left. Double-click folders to expand or collapse part of the outline. When you select part of the outline, it appears in the Expression box.

To clear the Expression edit field Press CTRL + BACKSPACE.

Inserting and nesting functions and cells You can insert functions into formulas and nest spreadsheet functions in other spreadsheet functions. When you nest spreadsheet functions, the Spreadsheet Function Description pane displays the selected spreadsheet function from the formula outline. For example, the following spreadsheet function formula contains a nested @AVG spreadsheet function: @ROUND(@AVG(C14..F24),2)

134


To insert a spreadsheet function in a formula 1. Click the Function button. 2 Select a spreadsheet function from several categories.

To insert a cell name in a formula 1. Click the Name button. 2 Select a name.

To insert a cell or cell reference 1. Click the Pointer button. 2 Select the cells to include in the formula. When you click the Pointer button, the Formula Composer dialog box shrinks to show only its title bar until you make a selection.

Editing Formula Composer Expressions An expression is any isolated part of the formula that you choose in the formula outline. You can create or revise formulas, or parts of a formula, directly in the Expression box. If an expression is incomplete or syntactically incorrect (for example, a spreadsheet function might be missing an argument), a red question mark icon alerts you to the error in the outline. Expressions that cannot be expanded, such as values, have a small yellow circle to their left. Click the What’s This? button located next to the function or argument for more information.

To edit a formula in the Formula Composer 1. Select a cell that contains a formula. 2. Click the Formula Composer button. 3. Edit the formula in the Expression box using one of the following methods: To edit the entire formula, select the first expression in the outline on the left. To edit part of the formula, select another expression in the outline.


135

Formula Composer Keys The following list describes the shortcut keys that are available when you work in the Formula Outline pane of the Formula Composer. Key(s)

Description

CTRL + +

Expands the outline one level

CTRL + *

Expands the whole outline for the formula

CTRL + -

Collapses the current branch of the outline

CTRL + F

Goes to a referenced cell in the formula

CTRL + B

Returns to the previous cell containing a formula that references the current cell

CTRL + E

Converts the current expression to a value

CTRL + O

Replaces the current expression with a spreadsheet function

CTRL + P

Switches to Pointer to specify a cell reference by pointing to a cell (or cells) on a notebook sheet

CTRL + N

Replaces the current expression with a cell name

Moving and copying formulas and referenced cells Formula references change in a logical manner when you move cells that contain formulas or cells referenced by formulas. When moving formulas and referenced cells, you should be aware of the following rules: If you move a formula without moving the cells it references, the references remain intact, regardless of whether they are absolute or relative. If you move a formula and the cells it references at the same time, the references do adjust. For example, if A2 contains +A1+1, and you move only A2 to B1, the formula still reads +A1+1. But if you move A1 and A2 at the same time, the formula reads +B1+1. If you move a formula to another notebook without moving the cells it references, the two notebooks link so that the formula still references the cells in the original notebook. If you move the formula back to the first notebook, the links are removed. If you move a cell without moving formulas that refer to it, formulas update to refer to the new location, even if you specified the reference as absolute. For example, if you move the contents of cell B4 to B6 in sheet A, any formula referencing B4 to reference B6 is revised. If you move A:B4 into A:B6 of a notebook named TAX, the formula’s reference changes to [TAX]A:B6.

136


If you move a cell from within an area without moving formulas that refer to the cells, formulas still refer to the same cells and no longer refer to the moved cell. However, if you move one of the coordinate cells (the upper-left and lower-right cells), the references to the cells expand or contract to reflect the new location. For example, if you define BILLS as B1..B7, then move cell B7 to B12, BILLS changes to B1..B12. If you move a coordinate (corner) cell into another notebook, references to the cells are not adjusted. If you move an entire named or referenced selection of cells, the cell name or the reference in affected formulas is updated. If you move data into a coordinate cell of a referenced area or into a single referenced cell, the formula containing the reference becomes invalid. References in formulas to the single cell or selection of cells are replaced with ERR, and cells that contain those formulas display ERR. If you name a selection of cells, the coordinates in the cell names list appear as ERR.

Moving a formula or reference cell You can move formulas to any spreadsheet location in your notebook. When you move a formula, the formula readjusts to calculate the cells relative to its new location. If you want the formula to calculate the cells it referenced before the move, you must set the formula to calculate absolute cell addresses. For information about setting cell addresses, see “Setting cell addresses” on page 150.

To move a formula 1. Select the formula you want to move. 2. Click Edit, Cut. 3. Select the cell where you want to paste the formula. 4 Click Edit, Paste.

To move a formula by dragging 1. Select the cell you want to move. 2. Move the cursor to the edge of the cell until the pointer turns into a four-headed arrow. 3 Drag the formula to the new location.

To undo a move operation Click Edit, Undo immediately after the move.


137

Copying formulas You can copy formulas by cutting and pasting them into new locations, or by dragging them across your spreadsheet. When you copy data by dragging and dropping the cells, the formulas adjust to correspond with their new positions. When you copy formulas with Edit, Copy, and Paste, the formulas adjust to the new location if it includes values to use in the formula. For example, you can enter +C1+C2 in cell C3. Then, if D1 and D2 contain values, when you copy the formula to cell D3, the formula adjusts to +D1+D2. When you copy a formula, it adjusts to correspond to its new position.

However, if you copy the formula to D3, and D1 and D2 are empty, the Cell Reference Checker alerts you that the formula is using an empty cell. You can keep the adjusted formula (even though you have not yet entered data to add, subtract, and so on) or use the original formula. You can also view additional information about the formula. The adjusted formula now calculates the data in cells D1 and D2.

When copying formulas, you may specify absolute references in the original formula. This keeps it if from adjusting to new addresses when you copy it. When you copy a formula and paste it in a cell, the cell address automatically changes in the formula to reflect the cell’s new location. All formulas calculate based on a relative address unless you specify otherwise. You can also make a formula calculate absolute cell addresses.

138


For more information about setting cell addresses, see “Setting cell addresses” on page 150.

To copy a formula 1. Click the cell that contains the formula you want to copy. 2. Click Edit, Copy. 3. Click the cell where you want to paste the formula. 4. Click Edit, Paste. 5. Click one of the following buttons: Close — keeps the adjusted formula Fix It — uses the original formula Click Detail for additional information.

To copy a formula by dragging it 1. Select the cell you want to copy. 2. Move the cursor to the edge of the cell until the pointer turns into a four-headed arrow. 3 Hold down CTRL and drag the formula to the new location.

To have help when copying formulas 1. Click Tools, Settings. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Enable the Cell Reference Checker check box in the Options section. When you copy a formula that contains cell addresses, the Cell Reference Checker shows you how the formula will appear in the new location.

Working with spreadsheet functions Instead of composing formulas, you can use spreadsheet functions. Spreadsheet functions are a set of standard built-in formulas used to simplify complex calculations. Quattro Pro has more than 500 built-in formulas (spreadsheet functions). These spreadsheet functions cover a range of calculations, including database, financial, engineering, and statistical calculations. Some common spreadsheet functions are @SUM and @AVG, which add or average the cell values you reference. Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions

139

For example, @SUM(A1..A4,B1) is equivalent to +A1+A2+A3+A4+B1 @AVG(A5..A8) finds the average of the values in A5 through A8 @ROUND(A9,2) rounds the value in A9 to two decimal places @ROUND(@AVG(A5..A8),3) rounds the average of the values in A5 through A8 to three decimal places If you type a spreadsheet function in a cell, its arguments appear on the Application Bar at the bottom of the screen. Arguments are the data used in the calculation. All spreadsheet functions begin with the @ sign. When typing a spreadsheet function, you can omit the @ if it is not the first item in the formula. When entering values in a function, you can use the Function Tip-As-You-Type feature, which displays a tip on the next type of value you need to type in the function. You can set Page View to show the formula rather than the end value. You can also use the Array function to create an entire matrix of values with one formula. You can select individual functions from a function list or build a formula that contains functions. You can also nest spreadsheet functions. Nesting involves placing one function in another. For example, the formula @ROUND(@AVG(C14..F24),2) finds the average of the data in a cell range and rounds the average to two decimal places. It is more difficult to debug complex formulas, however, so you may want to break them into smaller formulas that reference a final formula. The Quattro Pro spreadsheet function reference guide is available in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Syntax rules for entering spreadsheet functions Spreadsheet functions contain the name of the spreadsheet function (such as @SUM or @AVG) arguments (the values, cells, or text strings to be operated on) commas that separate multiple arguments parentheses around the arguments These components, called the function syntax, and the order in which they are used are called the language rules. Each spreadsheet function has its own particular syntax. For example, @RECEIVED returns the redemption value

140


(the amount received after maturity) of a discount security. Calendar is an optional argument. @RECEIVED(Settle, Maturity, Investment, Discount, ) The syntax of a spreadsheet function formula must meet the following rules: There must be a leading at sign (@), plus sign (+), or equal sign (=) at the beginning of the formula. You can enter the @function in either uppercase or lowercase letters. When there are multiple arguments, separate them with a semicolon or the argument separator specified in Tools, Settings, International, Punctuation. Enter arguments in the specified order. Optional arguments appear within angle brackets, <>. If you specify an optional argument, you must also specify all preceding optional arguments. Do not add a space between @ and the function name.

Entering arguments in functions Arguments refer to the information required by a spreadsheet function. Most spreadsheet functions need at least one argument. There are three types of argument: numeric values cell values string values Some spreadsheet functions accept a combination or choice of types for a single argument. For example, @SUM accepts cells in combination with numeric values; @SUM(B10..C25,50) totals numeric entries in cells B10..C25 plus 50. You can separate arguments with a semicolon or you can separate arguments with the setting in Tools, Settings, International, Punctuation. In the example above, a comma (a possible Punctuation setting) separates arguments. If the message “Not enough arguments” appears when you enter a spreadsheet function, use a semicolon between arguments.

Entering numeric spreadsheet function arguments A numeric value can be used as a spreadsheet function argument in any of these forms:


141

an actual value, @SIN(1.571) the coordinates of a cell containing a numeric value, @SIN(B5) the name of a cell name containing a single numeric value, @INT(TOTAL) a formula resulting in a numeric value, @INT(B4*10) another @function resulting in a numeric value, @INT(@PI) a combination of these, @ABS(@INT(C4)+35-TOTAL)

Entering cell spreadsheet function arguments Cells can be used as a spreadsheet function argument in a number of ways: the coordinates of cells, @SUM(A1..B3) the address of a single cell, @SUM(B3) a cell name, @SUM(JANUARY) You can use a combination of these in a list, for example, @SUM(JANUARY,C15..D25,F10).

Entering string spreadsheet function arguments A string value can be used as a spreadsheet function argument in the following ways: an actual string, in double quotes, @PROPER(“ACME Company”) the address of a cell containing a label, @PROPER(G13) the name of a single cell containing a label, @PROPER(COMPANY NAME) a formula resulting in a string, @LOWER(+MONTH&"Sales") another spreadsheet function resulting in a string, @LENGTH(@PROPER(“ACME Industries”))

Working with date functions Date functions that require an integer date value as the Date argument accept a valid date string, such as ‘12/31/1991’ or ‘31-Dec-1997’. The date functions @DATE, @LWKDAY, @MDAYS, @NWKDAY, and @YDAYS accept a standard year, such as 2001, in addition to the original year arguments of 0 (1900) and 199 (2099). For example

142


@DATE (40,12,31) and @DATE (1940,12,31) both return 14976 (31-Dec-1940) @DATE (140,12,31) and @DATE (2040,12,31) both return 51501 (31-Dec-2040) If you use arguments for date functions, Quattro Pro assumes the century based on the following year ranges: Argument

Year range

00 - 99

1900 - 1999

100 - 199

2000 - 2099

Entering functions in a cell You can type spreadsheet functions in a cell. As you type a function, the most likely function and its syntax appear at the bottom right of the screen. Enclose arguments in parentheses. The result of the formula displays in the cell. If the result is a numeric value, it becomes a value entry. If the result is a string, it becomes a label entry. In a formula, the left parenthesis is red until you type the right parenthesis. Then, they both turn green. To identify a missing parenthesis or bracket, double-click the cell, then move the insertion point through the formula. When you reach an unmatched parenthesis or bracket, the character turns red. In a formula, a parenthesis or square bracket is red until you type the closing parenthesis or bracket, then, they both turn green. When you type spreadsheet functions in a cell, it is important to use the proper syntax. For example @FUNCTION(Argument1, Argument2,...)

To see a list of spreadsheet functions 1 Click Insert, Function. 2 Scroll through the available functions.

To see Help for a function Type any spreadsheet function in the cell, then press F1.

To create a formula using a spreadsheet function 1 Click a blank cell. 2 Click Insert, Function. 3 Choose a function, then click the Next button.


143

4 In the Formula Composer dialog box, complete your formula in the Expression text box. The Outline pane on the left shows a breakdown of your formula.

To enter a spreadsheet function in a cell 1 Select the cell. 2 Click Insert, Function. 3 Choose a category, then click a spreadsheet function from the list. 4 Click the Next button. 5 Enter the values, cell references, or text string as the arguments. Optional arguments appear within angle brackets (<>). To point to cells to include in the formula, click the Pointer button. If the Pointer button is dimmed, move the insertion point after an operator or a left parenthesis. To add noncontiguous selections, click the Pointer button to select the first cells, then hold down CTRL while selecting additional selections. To include a cell name, click the Name button, then select the cell name. To nest another spreadsheet function, click the Function button, then select the spreadsheet function.

Working with arrays The spreadsheet function ARRAY and other features help you use data arrays, which are selections of data you work with as a group. Instead of entering several formulas, you can work with arrays and enter just one formula. Working with arrays also saves computer memory, although it can lengthen recalculation times. Array formulas can contain block arrays or array constants. A block array is a selection of rows and columns. With block arrays, you can type one formula that enters results in many cells. An array constant is a group of numbers used as an argument in a formula that can produce one or many results.

144


Using block arrays in formulas The array B2..D3 contains data in three columns and two rows that can be worked with independently, or as one selection.

To total columns, you could enter @SUM(B2..B3) in B4, then copy it to C4 and D4. To take advantage of the array, however, you could select B4 then type an array formula: @ARRAY(B2..D2+B3..D3). The spreadsheet ARRAY(B2..D2+B3..D3) contains the same information as three @SUM formulas. The array directs Quattro Pro to add the values in each column and show the results in the formula cell and the two cells to the right. The number of columns and rows in the output array depend on the dimensions of the arrays in the array formula. You can use any mathematical or logical operator in an array formula: +, -, *, /, ^, =, <>, <=, >=, <, >, #AND#, #OR#, and &. As with other formulas, calculations are performed according to operator precedence: multiplication and division first, then addition and subtraction. To change the calculation order, use parentheses.

Formula syntax To create a formula using block arrays, type a selection followed by an operator, followed by the next selection or value. For example, @ARRAY(B2..D2-B3..D3) @ARRAY(B2..D2*5) The operator indicates the operation to perform on matching cells of each block or the relationship between them. For example, - (minus) means “subtract each cell of the second block from the equivalent cell of the first block.” When the second formula above is calculated, it expands the 5 to a 1 X 3 array to match the first array. So, it calculates B2*5, C2*5, and D2*5, then enters three formulas. When you are working with rows, array results appear in the ARRAY formula cell. For columns, the results appear beside the ARRAY formula cell. You can mix columns and rows. Block arrays can be contiguous or noncontiguous, but they must be 2-D. You can enter more than two row or column blocks and use multiple operators. For example, the formula @ARRAY(B2..B4+C2..C4*D2..D4)


145

means “multiply C2 by D2 and add B2, multiply C3 by D3 and add B3, then multiply C4 by D4 and add B4.” You can use cell names instead of references to specify arrays. If you later change the selection identified by the cell name, all ARRAY formulas containing the cell name automatically change to the new selection. For example, you can make EXPENSES in the array @ARRAY(EXPENSES*5), the selection C2..E4. You can also type +B2..D2+B3..D3 in any of the above examples, to add ARRAY spreadsheet function and parentheses.

Using array constants in formulas An array constant is a group of numbers used as an argument in a formula. You can use an array constant to provide values for a formula instead of typing the values in a notebook. The numbers in the array are enclosed in braces { } and separated by semicolons. For example, an array is used in the formula @SUM({3;4;5}*5). The formula expands to @SUM({3;4;5}*{5;5;5}) as it is calculated. The formula calculates 3 * 5 + 4 * 5 +5 * 5, and displays 60 as the total. You can specify different rows in an array constant. To do this, separate rows with the pipe symbol (|). The values shown are indicated by the array constant {1;2;3;4|5;6;7;8}.

The array constant {5;6;7;8} specifies values in the second row above. The array constant {3|7} specifies values in the third column.

Working with arrays as functions and macro arguments You can use block arrays and array constants as arguments for spreadsheet functions other than ARRAY. Any spreadsheet function that accepts block arguments can handle array operations, although different types of spreadsheet functions handle them differently. @ABS, @SQRT and many other spreadsheet functions normally take one argument, which is a single value or an expression that results in a single value, not a block. If you enter a block or array constant for these spreadsheet functions, the spreadsheet function statement is converted into an argument for ARRAY, and a value displays for each row or column of the array.

146


Statistical functions @SUM, @AVG, and other statistical spreadsheet functions always return a single value, no matter how large an array you specify. For example, @SUM(C4..C8*D4..D8) means “multiply each value in C4..C8 by the equivalent value in D4..D8 and add the results.”

Database functions The database functions, such as @DSUM, take three arguments: a database block, the column to operate on, and a search criteria block. The first and third arguments must be blocks, not array constants. The second argument can be an array. In this case, the spreadsheet function is calculated once for each value in the array.

Index, Lookup, and related functions Using arrays as arguments for index, lookup, and related spreadsheet functions can be convenient when writing and debugging macros. For example, @ARRAY(@CELLPOINTER(A1..A16)) returns a whole column of information about E1 when you select that cell and press F9 to recalculate. Cells A1 through 16 contain @CELLPOINTER target attributes. While the previous formula refers to an attribute list in the notebook, you can also enter attributes as an array constant, for example, {“contents”;"type";"prefix"}.

Tracing and editing errors in formulas and functions You can edit formulas and trace errors. To edit a formula, select the cell and type the change. To trace an error, use the Auditing tool. Auditing visually shows data used in formulas. If you are looking at a formula cell, the Auditing tool can show all cells that provide data to that formula. It can also show all formulas that use the data from a particular cell. Auditing is particularly useful for fixing errors.

Tips for solving errors The following tips cover some common causes of errors: If ERR displays instead of formula results, the formula contains an erroneous calculation, such as divide by zero. ERR also displays when data is missing or a cell address is incorrect. If a function displays ERR, it may contain an unmatched parenthesis. To identify a missing parenthesis or bracket, double-click the cell, then move the insertion point through the formula. When you reach an unmatched parenthesis or bracket, the character turns red.


147

If NA appears in a cell, some of the necessary information is not available, such as when a formula is linked to another source and the notebook has not been updated. If the Circular Cell Reference button appears on the Application Bar at the bottom of the screen, a circular-cell reference appears in the notebook. For example, placing the formula +A1+A2 in cell A1 produces a circular-cell reference. This formula is never updated because it relies on itself for its results. If a cell does not calculate a formula, Quattro Pro may be interpreting the formula as a label. For example, Quattro Pro recognizes phone numbers and dates and does not try to calculate them. When you enter a formula that might be interpreted as a phone number or a date, type + before the formula. For example, the following would be interpreted as formulas: +202-555-3670 +12/12/94

Tracing precedent cells The Trace Precedents option of the Auditing tool lets you view all cells that provide data to or influence a formula cell. The Trace Precedents option outlines all first-level precedent cells in blue. A first-level precedent cell is a cell that provides data directly to the formula being traced. Once you have identified the first-level cells, you can apply the Trace Precedents option to them to find the cells that influence them, then repeat the process until you find the cell causing the error.

To trace a formula through a notebook 1 Click a formula cell. 2 Click Tools, Auditing, Trace Precedents. 3 Click Tools, Auditing, Show Auditing Toolbar to display the Auditing toolbar. 4 Click the Trace Precedents button to display the next (second) level of precedents. 5 Continue to click the Trace Precedents button until no more precedents display.

To trace formula cell references 1 Click a cell that contains a formula. 2 Click the Formula Composer button.

148


3 Click the cell reference in the outline. 4 Click the Follow Formula button on the Formula Composer Toolbar to examine a cell’s relationship with other cells on the spreadsheet. 5 Click the Back button to return to the Formula Composer standard display. If the Follow Formula button and the Back button are dimmed, select the cell reference in the outline.

To see all cells that provide data to a formula 1 Click the formula cell, then click Tools, Auditing, Trace Precedents to display the first-level precedents. 2 Click Tools, Auditing, Show Auditing Toolbar. 3 Click the Trace Precedents button to display the next (second) level of precedents. Continue to click the Trace Precedents button until no more precedents display.

To remove all arrows Click the Remove All Arrows button. Double-click a formula cell to outline all cells that provide data to the formula in blue. Point to each button on the Auditing Toolbar to see the button’s QuickTip information.

Tracing dependent cells The Trace Dependents option of the Auditing tool lets you perform a trace in the reverse order. When you apply the Trace Dependents option to a cell, you see all formulas that use the data from the selected cell. You can repeat the process to trace all the formula cells that are dependent on those formulas, and so on.

To trace cell dependents in a notebook 1 Click a cell. 2 Click Tools, Auditing, Trace Dependents.


149

3 Click the Trace Dependentsbutton to see whether the formula cells are used by other formulas. 4 Repeat step 3 until no more dependents appear.

To see all formulas that use the data from a particular cell 1 Click the cell. 2 Click Tools, Auditing, Trace Dependents. 3 Click Tools, Auditing, Show Auditing Toolbar. 4 Click the Trace Dependents button to see whether the formula cells are used by other formulas. 5 Repeat step 4 until no more dependents appear.

To remove all arrows Click the Remove All Arrows button. Point to each button on the Auditing Toolbar to see the button’s QuickTip information.

Setting cell addresses When you create formulas or perform certain tasks, you need to refer to other cells by their cell address. This address is the intersection of the column letter and the row number, such as A15 or B6. When referring to a cell on a different spreadsheet, first specify the name of the spreadsheet, for example, C:A15. You can also specify a block of cells in this way by creating a cell address range, such as A5..D16. When you reference data in formulas, functions, or macros you can refer to the cell by relative cell address absolute cell address cell name By default, cell formulas calculate relative cell addresses.

Relative cell address When you set a relative cell address, the formula calculates the cells relative to its current location in the spreadsheet. When a cell that contains a formula

150


changes its cell address, the formula calculates the address relative to its new location. For example, if you create a formula in cell A3 to add cells A1 and A2, and then move the formula to cell D3, the formula adjusts to add cells D1 and D2.

Absolute cell address When you set an absolute cell address in a formula, the formula always references the same cells regardless of their location on the spreadsheet. For example, if you create a formula in cell A3 to add cells A1 and A2, and then move the formula to cell D3 on the same spreadsheet, the formula still calculates cells A1 and A2. You can set an absolute address in two ways, by setting the cells properties or entering a dollar sign before the portion of the cell address you want to make absolute. For example $A$1 makes both coordinates of address A1 absolute $A1 locks the address into column A, but lets the row coordinate change A$1 locks the address into row 1, but lets the column coordinate change $A:A$1 locks the address into sheet A and row 1, but lets the column coordinate change

Cell names You can set a formula to calculate a cell name. This means the formula calculates the values associated with a name, rather than an address. The formula calculates the data associated with the cell name regardless of the location of the data. For more information about naming a cell see “Naming cells” on page 153.

Typing cell addresses An easy way to enter cell references in formulas is to point to them. Make sure the insertion point is after an operator character, then click the cell you want to include in the formula. You can also point to cells by dragging them or using keyboard commands. To point to noncontiguous selections, select the first group of cells, hold down CTRL, then select additional cells. When every selection you want to refer to or act up on is highlighted, complete the formula or command. For more information about operators, see “Working with formulas” on page 124. You can also type the cell address directly into the formula cell. Depending on the cell selection you want to name, you must type the selection in a specific way.


151

To specify

Type

Range of cells

Address of top-left cell, followed by one or two periods and the address of the bottom right cell C3..D6 (refers to cells C3, D3, C4, D4, C5, D5, C6, and D6) F4.F11 (refers to cells F4 to F11)

Cells on another sheet

Sheet name and a colon, then the cell reference B:B4

Cell in a different notebook

Filename in brackets, the sheet name, then the cell reference [SALES]C:B5

Named cells

Name EXPENSES

Cells in different places

Separate each selection with a comma A2..A5,B7,D5..E12

3-D selection

The sheet references first, followed by the cell coordinates A..D:A2..B5 (refers to cells on sheets A, B, C, and D)

You can enter the addresses of any two cells in opposite corners in any order. The coordinates are rewritten to list the top-left cell followed by the bottom-right cell. If you rename a sheet, you can use the new name on its tab in the cell reference or the sheet letter. Also, if you group sheets, you can refer to them by their group name instead of by their individual sheet names.

Specifying absolute and relative addresses You can specify absolute references in a formula. An absolute cell reference always refers to the original cell address, regardless of where you copy the formula. To prevent a cell reference from adjusting when you copy a formula, make the reference absolute by entering dollar signs ($) before the column and row coordinates. When copying between sheets, you can also make sheet references absolute. Include a dollar sign before the sheet name. If you omit the sheet reference in a formula, it adjusts to refer to the current sheet, wherever it is copied. For example, if you enter +$A$1+$A$2 in cell A3, it is interpreted as “Add the values in cells A1 and A2.” When you copy this formula to cell B4, the cells in the formula remain as A1 and A2. In Edit mode, press F4 when a cell address is highlighted in the input line to make a cell absolute. Press F4 repeatedly to cycle through the eight absolute combinations.

152


Press F4

Cell reference

starting reference

B6

1x

$A:$B$6

2x

$A:B$6

3x

$A:$B6

4x

$A:B6

5x

$B$6

6x

B$6

7x

$B6

Naming cells Instead of referring to a single cell or cells by their coordinates, such as B10 or C15..F21, you can assign a specific name. This has several advantages: If you move the contents of named cells, the names are still associated with the same data, regardless of the new coordinates. Referencing names in a formula makes the formula easier to understand. For example, +PRICE - COST is more intuitive than B15 - D8. Using names increases accuracy. If you mistype a name, Quattro Pro alerts you to the error. If you mistype coordinates, you operate on the wrong cells. When you link to another notebook, you do not need to open the other notebook to find the coordinates. Consider the following formula, which calculates a monthly mortgage payment: @PMT(B3,B4/B6,B5*B6) Here is the same formula using named cells: @PMT(PRICE,INTEREST/MONTHS,TERM*MONTHS) Before you use Insert, Name, Cells, check the labels you plan to use. If there are duplicate labels or labels that duplicate existing names, the previous assignments are overwritten. Quattro Pro lists existing names in the list box on the left side of the toolbar directly above the spreadsheet window. You can also make a table of named cells to see a list of existing names.

Guidelines for naming cells Keep the following guidelines in mind when naming selections of cells:


153

Names can be up to 63 characters long. Use any keyboard characters (A to Z, 0 to 9, spaces, punctuation marks, and some special characters such as %). Accented characters such as Â and Ä are also allowed if they are available on your keyboard. If you use any of these characters in a name, you cannot enter the name a formula. Uppercase and lowercase letters are equivalent, for example, INCOME is the same as income. Names always appear in uppercase letters in formulas. Names can define overlapping areas. For example, the following names are acceptable: HOTEL

B3..B7

TRANS

C3..C7

MEALS

D3..D7

TOTAL

B3..D7

Naming a cell Naming a cell is easier than remembering the cell’s coordinates. It also increases accuracy because the data in the named cell is attached to the name and won’t change if the cell is moved to a new location. When you select a named cell, the name displays in the upper-left corner of the Quattro Pro desktop beside the input line. This box also displays a list of cell names.

To name a cell 1 Select the cell. 2 Click Insert, Name, Cells. 3 Type a name in the Name text box. Remember to type a name that does not appear on the list of existing names to the left. 4 Click the Add button.

To change the cells assigned to a name 1 Click Insert, Name, Cells. 2 Choose the name from the list.

154


3 Enter the new coordinates in the Cell(s) box. 4 Click the Add button.

To change a name Delete the existing name, then assign a new name to the cells. By default, when you copy and paste formulas containing cell names, the cell names in the new location use absolute cell referencing. To force Quattro Pro to use relative cell referencing, precede the cell name with a tilde (~). For example, AGE would be an absolute cell reference and ~AGE would be a relative cell reference. If you copy cells and alter the contents of the upper-left or lower-right cells of a named area, the name becomes invalid. Formulas referencing the named area display ERR to indicate the formulas no longer reference the data they did before. Deleting either of the two coordinates of a selection of cells also makes any reference to that named area display ERR.

Naming selections using adjacent labels You can name cells using adjacent labels. Quattro Pro lets you specify that the cell immediately to the right or left, or above or below a label should adopt that label as its name.

To name selections using an adjacent label 1 Select the label as a cell name. 2 Click Insert, Name, Cells. 3 Click the Labels button. 4 Indicate the position of the cell you want to name in relation to the selected label. For example, if the cell you are naming is below the label, click Down. Each label in the specified cells (up to 64 characters) is used as a name for the adjacent cell. The numeric values in the cells are ignored; you can use only labels as names.


155

Later changes to the labels do not affect the cell names. If there are leading or trailing spaces in a label, they are included in the name. For example, a name that appears as “INCOME” may have been entered as “INCOME.”

You can also use Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query, Field Names to assign names to the cells in the first row of a database.

Naming selections automatically When you name selections automatically, the label in each row or column is applied to all selected cells in that row or column. The label in each row or column is applied to all selected cells in that row or column. If you checked more than one Location check box, a set of names is created for each set of labels. For example, if you select A1..C4 in the next figure and check the first two check boxes in the Generate Cell Names dialog box, five names are created: Jan., B2..B4; Feb., C2..C4; Housing, B2..C2; Utilities, B3..C3; and Food, B4..C4.

If you check Name Cells at Intersections, each cell has an additional name created by combining the two sets of labels. Each name can have up to 64 characters. The following is a table of cell names for this example:

156

Cell

Name

B2

JAN._HOUSING

B3

JAN._UTILITIES

B4

JAN._FOOD

C2

FEB._HOUSING

C3

FEB._UTILITIES

C4

FEB._FOOD


To name selections automatically 1 Click Insert, Name, Cells. 2 Click the Generate button. 3 Type the cells to name, including label cells in the Cells box. 4 Check any of the following naming options: Under Top Row Right of Leftmost Column Above Bottom Row Left of rightmost Column You can check more than one, depending on whether the labels are in the top row, the leftmost column, the bottom row, or the rightmost column. 5 Consider the following option: To name individual cells, check at least two of the location boxes, then check Name Cells At Intersections. Each label in the specified cells (up to 64 characters) is used as a name for the adjacent cell. Numeric values in the selection are ignored; you can use only labels as names. Later changes to the labels themselves do not affect the cell names. If there are leading or trailing spaces in a label, they are included in the name. For example, a name that appears as “INCOME” may have been entered as “INCOME ” (with a space at the end).

Creating a table of named cells You can create a table that lists all of the named cells in the notebook. In a two-column table of cell names, the first column contains names listed alphabetically. The second indicates the corresponding coordinates.

To create a table of named cells 1 Click Insert, Name, Cells. 2 Click the Output button. 3 Select the top-left cell of the cells where you want the table to display.


157

Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for each name. Existing data is overwritten in the cells used for the table. A named cell table is not automatically updated. If you add, change, or delete cell names, you must re-create the table to reflect the changes.

Deleting a cell name If you no longer want to identify a cell or block of cells by a name, you can delete that name.

To delete a cell name 1 Click Insert, Name, Cells. 2 Choose a name from the list, or type a name in the Name box. 3 Click the Delete button. Although clicking Delete All deletes all cell names in the notebook from memory, the notebook data is not affected. Formulas that reference named cells change so that they refer to cell coordinates instead of names.

To delete all names in the notebook, click Insert, Name, Cells, then click the Delete All button. Click the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete all names.

158


EDITING AND FORMATTING A SPREADSHEET

7

Quattro Pro lets you edit and format cells, rows or columns, or the entire spreadsheet. For example, you can copy or paste cells to different parts of the notebook, change the color of a cell or text within the cell, change the text orientation of a cell, and resize rows and columns to a specified height or width. You can also create and edit headers, footers, and margins within your spreadsheet. Avoid presetting cell properties for large areas of the notebook because it consumes memory and increases file size. It is more efficient to set properties only in the cells or sheets you are currently using. Or change the Normal style default properties to preset the notebook differently. Quattro Pro uses the Spell Checker tool to ensure the spelling accuracy of your document. You can easily search for specific spreadsheet data to edit in Quattro Pro using the Find and Replace tool. You can control changes to your spreadsheet by protecting selected cells, or the entire spreadsheet. Editing in Group Mode lets you quickly make the same changes to more than one spreadsheet simultaneously.

Editing spreadsheet data Quattro Pro makes it easy to edit spreadsheet data. If your spreadsheet contains large amounts of data, you can save editing time by using the Find and Replace, and Spell Checker tools.


159

You can change cell content or you can edit parts of cells. If you make a mistake while editing spreadsheet data, Quattro Pro lets you erase or undo cell entries, actions, and operations. You can also transpose columns and rows in the spreadsheet so that the rows appear as columns and the columns appear as rows. You can apply spreadsheet or cell protection to lock areas of your spreadsheet and prevent unwanted data editing.

Finding and replacing data Quattro Pro lets you quickly find a cell and replace the data it contains using the Find and Replace tool. You can look for data in cell formulas or cell values. You can also set conditions for the search criteria. For example, in an expenses spreadsheet, you can look for only expenses greater than $300. When using conditional searches, type a question mark (?) before the search condition (e.g. ? > 300). You can also choose from numerous search options. You can also use Notebook Query to search a Quattro Pro database. For more information about searching a notebook database, see “Querying notebook databases” on page 292.

To find and replace cells 1 Click Edit, Find and Replace. 2 Type the text or value to find in the Find box. 3 Type the replacement text or value in the Replace box. 4 Type the cell or cells to search in the Cells box. Leave the box blank to search the current sheet. 5 Enable one of the following buttons: Formula — finds data in a formula Value — finds data in a value Condition — compares cells in the spreadsheet with any conditions specified in the Find box (<, >, <>, >=, <=) 6 To further customize the search, enable one of the following check boxes in the Options section: Columns First — searches down columns before searching across rows Match Whole — finds exact matches to the information entered in the Find box Case Sensitive — matches the capitalization of the text in the Find box

160


7 Click one of the following buttons: Find Next — finds the next occurrence of the search item Find Previous — finds the previous occurrence of the search item 8 Click the Replace button to replace the found text with the data entered in the Replace box. To replace all occurrences of the search item with the replacement text or value, click the Replace All button. You can clear all search boxes by clicking the Reset button.

Checking spelling You can use Quattro Pro to check the spelling of your spreadsheet. Use the Spell Checker tool to search the document for misspelled or duplicate words, and irregular capitalization. Use the QuickCorrect tool to automatically replace common spelling and typing errors. For example, QuickCorrect automatically replaces “adn” with “and”. QuickCorrect comes with a list of commonly misspelled words linked to the correct spelling. You can add and delete words from the list. For example, if you frequently type “frmo”, you can have the word automatically corrected to “from.” You can also expand acronyms and abbreviations. For example, if you frequently type a phrase such as Quattro Pro, you can customize QuickCorrect to expand the acronym QP to the full phrase each time you type the acronym. Quattro Pro enables the QuickCorrect tool by default. However, you can disable this tool if necessary.

To check spelling in your document Click Tools, Spell Checker.

To add QuickCorrect words 1 Click Tools, QuickCorrect. 2 In the Replace box, type the incorrect spelling of a word you commonly misspell or mistype, or type an acronym or abbreviation to expand in the document. 3 In the With box, type the correct spelling of the misspelled or mistyped word, or type the expanded acronym or abbreviation. 4 Click the Add Entry button. 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until you finish adding all the words to correct. Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

161

6 Enable the Replace Words As You Type check box. 7 Click the Close button.

To delete QuickCorrect words 1 Click Tools, QuickCorrect. 2 Select an entry in the list box, then click the Delete Entry button.

To disable the QuickCorrect tool 1 Click Tools, QuickCorrect. 2 Disable the Replace Words As You Type check box.

Protecting data You can prevent users from changing an entire spreadsheet, specific cell entries, or floating objects. Spreadsheet protection properties work in conjunction with properties for cell protection. That is, cell protection works only if you enable overall sheet protection using the Sheet Protection property. Likewise, disabling sheet protection disables cell protection for cells individually protected. When you want to allow users to edit only specific cells, first protect the entire sheet from editing, then “unprotect” specific cells users can change. You can also restrict the type of data entered in a cell. For example, you can restrict a cell to accept only date entries. For information about restricting data, see “Restricting data” on page 115. Using sheet protection properties, you can prevent users from moving, resizing, editing, or deleting floating objects on the current spreadsheet. Protected objects include floating charts and graphic objects, linked and embedded objects using Dynamic Data Exchange or Object Linking and Embedding, drawn objects, and form controls. You can also set protection for individual objects. However, if you disable the sheet protection for objects, Quattro Pro ignores the status of individually protected or unprotected objects. For information about protecting floating objects individually, see “Protecting graphics” on page 401. Protecting your notebook with a password prevents unauthorized access. For information about protecting your notebook with a password, see “Using password protection” on page 703.

To protect all spreadsheet cells 1 Click Format, Sheet.

162


2 Click the Protection tab. 3 Enable the Enable Cell Locking check box in the Sheet Protection section.

To unlock cells in a protected spreadsheet 1 Select the cells to unlock. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Constraints tab. 4 Enable the Unprotect check box in the Cell Protection section. You can also right-click the cells, move the cursor to Cell Properties, click Constraints tab, then enable the Unprotect button. Hold down CTRL to select noncontiguous cells.

To protect all spreadsheet objects 1 Click Format, Sheet. 2 Click the Protection tab. 3 Enable the Enable Object Locking check box in the Sheet Protection section.

Changing cell content There are two ways to change a cell entry. You can change the entire cell, or you can make changes to data inside a cell. You change cell content in Edit mode. When you first enter Edit mode, you are also in Insert mode. Any characters you type within a cell display to the left of the insertion point. You can over write existing characters in Overtype mode. Inside a cell, you can drag across text you want to change, or click where you want to add new text. You can press DELETE to erase characters to the right of the insertion point, or press BACKSPACE to delete characters to the left of the insertion point. Using the Cut, Copy, or Paste commands you can move text to different locations. You can also change the appearance of a cell using the Property Bar. For more information about using the Cut, Copy, or Paste commands, see “Copying and moving data” on page 169. For information about changing the appearance of a cell, see “Formatting cells and applying styles” on page 174.


163

To change from Insert mode to Overtype mode Press INSERT. You can return to Insert mode from Overtype mode by pressing INSERT.

To change the entire content of the cell 1 Click the cell, then type a new entry. 2 Press ENTER.

To change part of the cell content 1 Double-click the cell 2 Make the required changes to the cell content. 3 Press ENTER. You can also select a cell by clicking the cell, then clicking anywhere in the input line, or pressing F2. You can also click the check mark in the input line to replace an old entry with a new one.

You can move the insertion point within a cell by clicking in the cell or input line, or by using the arrow keys. You must press ENTER to store the changes in the cell. Pressing ESC before you press ENTER returns the cell content to its original state.

Erasing cell entries You can erase cell data using several methods: erase the contents of selected cells but leave the formatting (alignment, numeric format, font, etc.) unchanged erase the formatting of cells but leave the contents unchanged erase the contents of cells and remove formatting erase and move the contents of cells to the Clipboard

164


To erase cell

Click...

Content but not formatting

Edit, Clear Values

Formatting but not content

Edit, Clear Formats

Content and formatting

Edit, Clear Cells

Data and formatting and move it to the Clipboard Edit, Cut The Clear Formats command does not affect column width or row height. Unnecessary cell formatting can add significantly to the size of a notebook file. Clear Formats removes unnecessary formatting and reduces the size of the notebook file.

Undoing actions and operations The Undo command lets you reverse most operations after performing them. You can undo most actions and operations in reverse order of performance. For example, if you create a cell entry, and then want to remove it, you can use the Undo command immediately after making the entry. This removes the entry and restores any previous content entered in the cell. To reinstate the change, use the Redo command. The Undo command does not work for some actions. (The Undo menu command appears dimmed immediately after you perform one of these actions.) In all situations, except where program speed and available memory are absolutely crucial, keep Undo enabled.

To undo an action or operation Click Edit, Undo.

To redo an action or operation Click Edit, Redo. You can also click the Undo button and the Redo button to undo or redo actions.

To enable the Undo command for all actions 1 Click Tools, Settings.


165

2 Click the General tab. 3 Enable the Undo Enabled check box in the Options section.

Transposing columns and rows Transposing columns and rows changes columns to rows and rows to columns. For example, all data that appeared in a transposed column is now displayed as a row. Although you can transpose data to the same location as the existing cells, the transposed data usually takes a different shape than the original data and does not overwrite it completely. Avoid overwriting existing rows and columns when transposing by copying transposed rows and columns to another area of the spreadsheet. Do not transpose cells containing formulas because cell references do not adjust properly. The following example shows a column transposed to appear as a row

To transpose columns and rows 1 Select the cells to transpose. 2 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Transpose. 3 In the To Edit field, specify the top-left cell where you want to copy the transposed data. Do not specify a cell within the source cells or the data appears disarranged. The new data overwrites existing data in the destination cells.

Editing grouped data When a notebook contains similar text or formats in several spreadsheets, you can create groups to edit multiple spreadsheets at once. A spreadsheet

166


can belong to only one group. A change to one spreadsheet in a group affects all spreadsheets in the group. For example, you can simultaneously change the same cell in spreadsheet A, B, and C if you group these spreadsheets together. Group mode lets you enter column or row headings and make formatting changes to cells on multiple sheets simultaneously. The QuickSum tool is ideally suited to use with groups. Quattro Pro writes the appropriate formula in each spreadsheet in the group. Pay attention while entering formulas that involve 2-D and 3-D references. (Watch the input line as you point to references.) For information about using QuickSum, see “Performing calculations using QuickSum” on page 121. When you enable Group mode, a blue line appears below the sheet tabs to identify the spreadsheet group. Turn off Group mode to perform some tasks that use 2-D references. Enable the Undo command before working in Group mode to ensure that you can undo any unwanted changes. For information about enabling the Undo command, see “Undoing actions and operations” on page 165. You can work with named groups of cells in Quattro Pro. For information about naming groups of cells, see “Naming cells” on page 153.

Creating, editing, and deleting spreadsheet groups Creating spreadsheet groups lets you enter or delete data on multiple spreadsheets simultaneously. You can edit or delete groups as required. When you enable Group mode, Quattro Pro uses the group name when you select cells or use formulas in a spreadsheet. For example, if you create a group named 1stQtr that includes spreadsheets entitled Jan, Feb, and Mar, a formula would read 1stQtr:A1:A10 instead of Jan..Mar:A1:A10.

To create spreadsheet groups 1 Click Insert, Name, Group of Sheets. 2 Enter a group name. You can use letters and numbers, as well as these characters: ~‘!%_|\‘? You can also use spaces, but not as the first character in a name. 3 Type the first and last spreadsheets within the group, then click OK. To select the spreadsheets before creating the group, select any cell in the first sheet, then hold down SHIFT and click the last sheet tab to include in the group.


167

To edit a spreadsheet group 1 Click Insert, Name, Group of Sheets. 2 Click a spreadsheet group name. 3 Change the entries for First Sheet and Last Sheet.

To delete a spreadsheet group 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure. 2 Choose the name of the group to delete from the Defined Groups list. 3 Click Delete.

Entering, copying, and deleting data on multiple spreadsheets You can enter, copy, and delete data in multiple spreadsheets using spreadsheet groups. Make sure that Group mode is enabled before changing grouped data. Entering data or formatting changes in one spreadsheet changes the same cells in other spreadsheets within the group. Using the Cut or Clear commands in Group mode affects all sheets in the group.

To turn Group mode on Click View, Group Mode. When Group mode is enabled, a blue line appears below the sheet tabs in the group. To turn Group Mode off , click View, Group Mode.

To enter data on multiple spreadsheets 1 Enter the data in a cell on any spreadsheet in the group. 2 Press CTRL+ENTER. Cell formatting applied to the cell is applied to that cell location on all spreadsheets in the group.

To copy data to spreadsheets in a group 1 Disable Group mode if Group Mode is checked in the View menu.

168


2 Select the source data to copy, then click Edit, Copy. 3 Click View, Group Mode to enable the Group mode option. 4 Select the destination cell in any spreadsheet in the group, then click Edit, Paste.

To delete data from multiple spreadsheets 1 Select a cell or cells on any spreadsheet in the group. 2 Press CTRL+DEL.

Copying and moving data Quattro Pro provides three different methods for moving or copying data. The first method, the Drag and Drop feature, lets you move several cells by selecting them and dragging them to a different location. While the Drag and Drop feature can move and copy cells, it does not work on noncontiguous selections, and you can not make multiple copies of your selection. For more advanced moving and copying options, use the second method, the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands. These commands use the Clipboard to move and copy cells. The third method, the Copy Cells command, lets you specify the cells to move or copy by name and provides a unique, timesaving option called Model Copy. Moving or copying a cell removes the properties from the original cell and moves them with the data to the new cell location. If you paste cells you copied or cut with Paste Special, you can control whether cell properties paste with the cells. For more information about using Paste Special, see “Using the Paste Special command” on page 173. When you want to copy only formatting, you can use the QuickFormat tool. For information about using the QuickFormat tool see, “Using the QuickFormat and SpeedFormat tools” on page 175. If you copy formulas, consider making the cell addresses absolute. For information about copying cell formulas, see “Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123.

Using the Drag and Drop feature Using the Drag and Drop feature lets you visually choose exactly where to move or copy selected cells in a notebook. You can drag cells anywhere on the current spreadsheet, between spreadsheets, or between notebooks. Select and point to the edge of the cells to move. When the four-way arrow appears, drag the data to the destination cell. A colored outline of the cell selection moves with the four-way arrow as a guide to help you locate an area


169

in which to “drop” your selection. Be careful; dropping cells onto unprotected data overwrites the content of those cells. You can change the delay time for Drag and Drop if the four-way arrow appears too slowly (or too quickly) when you drag objects.

To move cells by dragging 1 Select a cell or cells. 2 Point to an edge of the cells until the four-way arrow appears. 3 Drag the cells to the destination area using the colored outline as a guide. 4 Release the mouse button to drop the cells into place.

To copy cells by dragging 1 Select a cell or cells. 2 Hold down CTRL and follow steps 2 to 4 from the previous procedure. To move or copy noncontiguous cells, use the Cut or Copy command.

To drag cells to another notebook 1 Select a cell or cells. 2 Point to an edge of the cells until the four-way arrow appears. 3 Drag the cells onto the notebook name on the Application Bar. 4 Hold down the left mouse button until the other notebook displays, then drag the cells into the other notebook. 5 Release the mouse button to drop the cells into place. Make sure you open the notebook to which you want to drag the selected cells before moving or copying them.

To change the delay time for the Drag and Drop arrow 1 Click Tools, Settings.

170


2 Click the General tab. 3 Type a new interval time, in milliseconds (ms) in the Cell Drag And Drop Delay Time box. The default interval for Cell Drag And Drop Delay Time is 5000 ms.

Using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands Copying cells in the notebook leaves the original cells intact while cutting cells removes them from their original location. Copying and cutting cells or cell content places a copy of the selection on the Clipboard. You can paste the selection in the input line of another cell or in a text box a cell or cells within the current spreadsheet another spreadsheet in the notebook, or in another notebook When you paste the entire selection in a specific cell, the Clipboard uses that cell as the upper-left position of the pasted information. You can use the Copy and Cut commands to copy or move contiguous and noncontiguous selections, to paste a selection to several locations without reselecting the source, or to copy data to and from other Windows applications. Be careful to allow enough space to paste the complete source. Pasting a selection on existing cells replaces the content and properties of those cells. If you select a single cell, column, or row as the source selection, you can make multiple copies by selecting more cells as the destination. You can fill an area with data cut from the spreadsheet. The first time you use the Paste command, you move the source data. Using the Paste command a second time copies the source data throughout a destination area. For information about filling data, see “Automatically entering data” on page 107.

To copy or move cells 1 Select the cells to copy or move. 2 Do one of the following: To copy cells, click Edit, Copy To move cells, click Edit, Cut 3 Select the location to paste the selection. 4 Click Edit, Paste.


171

To copy or move noncontiguous cells 1 Hold down CTRL and select the cells to copy or move. 2 Follow steps 2 to 4 from the previous procedure.

To make multiple copies of a cell, column, or row 1 Select the cell, column, or row to copy. 2 Click Edit, Copy. 3 Select the location to paste the selection. 4 Click Edit, Paste.

To make multiple copies of data cut from a spreadsheet 1 Select the cell, column, or row to cut. 2 Click Edit, Cut. 3 Select the location to paste the selection. 4 Click Edit, Paste. 5 Select the destination area for the multiple copies of data. 6 Click Paste.

Using the Copy Cells command Use the Copy Cells command to copy one or many cells. This command copies cells a bit faster than copying them to the Clipboard. You can use the Copy Cells command to copy the following: cell or cell references either named or not such as B4..B4, or C5..D10, or INCOME; copying named cells copies the value only, not the name noncontiguous selections, such as B4..B4,C5..D10 cells in other sheets in the same notebook, such as C:B4..B6 cells in other notebook files, such as [C:\BUDGETS\SALES]B:D10..D15 Copied cells overwrite any data contained in the destination cells. Use the Model Copy option to copy cells that contain absolute references to cells within the copied area. To copy or move data or objects other than cells, use the Clipboard features. For more information about copying or moving data or objects, see “Using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands” on page 171.

172


To copy cells using the Copy Cells feature 1 Click Edit, Copy Cells. 2 Select the cells to copy in the From box. 3 Select the destination cells in the To box. 4 If you copy cells containing absolute references to cells within the copied area, enable the Model Copy check box. Instead of pointing to the cells you want to copy, you can enter new coordinates or press F3 to choose from a list of cell names.

Using the Paste Special command Pasting information using the Clipboard also pastes cell properties, formulas, and labels. Paste Special lets you control what you paste by including either more or less options than the Paste command. For example, you can paste data without properties, or paste properties without data. You can paste from other applications, or control the format of the data you paste in the notebook. You can do simple math, or you can copy row and column sizes. For information about using Paste Special for mathematical operations, see “Combining files using Paste Special” on page 669. Relative and absolute addresses let you control how formulas adjust when you copy them. The Model Copy option lets you control this adjustment; it is useful when the cells you copy contain absolute references to other cells within that cell area. The Model Copy option adjusts absolute references to the new copied location. Although the absolute reference adjusts, it remains absolute to make future copies absolute. Copied cells overwrite any data contained in the destination cells, unless you select a math operation.

Pasting from another application You can create a live data link with data in the Clipboard from a participating Dynamic Data Exchange application. With linked data, your notebook reflects changes from the other application. For more information about live links, see “Linking and embedding objects” on page 672. When data from other applications is stored on the Clipboard, you can choose the format in which to paste the information. For example, when pasting WordPerfect data from the Clipboard, you can paste it as unformatted text directly in a cell. You can also paste the information in WordPerfect format. Quattro Pro treats pasted WordPerfect data as an object which you can size


173

and move on the notebook. If you click the object, this launches the WordPerfect application, which displays the data.

To paste data from the Clipboard using Paste Special 1 Select the destination for the pasted cells. 2 Click Edit, Paste Special. 3 Enable one or more of the paste special check boxes. 4 Click the Paste button. For information about one or more of the check boxes in the Paste Special dialog box, click the What’s This button and point to the appropriate check box. To link the copied cells to the source cells click the Link button on the Paste Special dialog box. When you update the source, the copied cells update also.

Formatting cells and applying styles Quattro Pro lets you format cell content in various ways. Using QuickFormat, you can copy formatting from one cell and apply it to numerous cells in the spreadsheet. The SpeedFormat tool lets you apply predefined formats to your data. You can control the format of cell text by wrapping long strings of text within the cell. By joining cells, you can create titles and vertical side bars across multiple cells. Rotating text within a cell lets you control the angle in which text is displayed. You can also format text by changing font and appearance options. For example, you can change the font color to blue or underline the text within a cell.

Using styles Styles create a uniform look for notebooks. A style consists of several text properties. You can apply predefined styles to text. For example, the Currency style formats the cell as currency with two decimals. You can also merge styles. Normal is the default style applied to all cells in a new notebook. However, you can define new styles or modify predefined styles. When you define a style, you set or disable properties. New styles save with the current notebook. The following table outlines style settings in Quattro Pro.

174


Style

Result

Comma

Sets the numeric format to a comma with two decimals

Comma0

Sets the numeric format to a comma with no decimals

Currency

Sets the numeric format to currency with two decimals

Currency0

Sets the numeric format to currency with no decimals

Date

Sets the numeric format to user defined (with the date format specified)

Fixed

Sets the numeric format to fixed with two decimals

Heading 1

Sets the font to Arial (or Helvetica) 18 point bold

Heading 2

Sets the font to Arial (or Helvetica) 12 point bold

Normal

Sets the numeric format and alignment to general; sets the font to Arial (or Helvetica) 10 point regular; sets shading to white; turns protection on; and sets the text color to black

Percent

Sets the numeric format to percent

Total

Inserts a double line above the active cell

Using the QuickFormat and SpeedFormat tools Quattro Pro provides two formatting tools to help you format your spreadsheet. Using the QuickFormat tool, you can copy and paste the formatting (background color, font, numeric format, etc.) of one cell to another cell or selection of cells. You can use the SpeedFormat tool to apply a predesigned format to your data. The SpeedFormat tool also lets you add custom formats or revise existing ones. Using SpeedFormat overrides any existing cell property settings. New formats are saved with the notebook. When you add or remove rows or columns from a range of cells formatted using SpeedFormat, Quattro Pro reapplies that format to the modified range. The following example shows a sample of the Green SpeedFormat.

To copy cell formatting 1 Click the cell or cells with the format you want to copy.


175

2 Click the QuickFormat button on the toolbar to turn on QuickFormat. 3 Select the cell or cells where you want to paste the formatting. To turn off QuickFormat, click the QuickFormat button.

To apply a predesigned format 1 Select the cells to format. 2 Click Format, SpeedFormat. 3 Choose a format from the Formats list box. 4 Deselect any properties (column headings, row headings, etc.) that you do not want applied to the cells. You can also click the SpeedFormat button on the Notebook toolbar.

To add a custom format 1 Click Format, SpeedFormat. 2 Choose a format to customize from the Formats list box. 3 Deselect any properties (column headings, row headings, etc.) you do not want applied to the cells. 4 Click the Add button. 5 Type the name of the new format in the Format Name box. 6 Type the coordinates of the example cells in the Example Cells box. 7 Click OK. The new format is available for you to apply to other cells.

Wrapping text Text that appears wider than a column overflows to the next cell when that cell is empty. If the next cell contains data, the overflow text is hidden and the text appears truncated. You can adjust text in a cell to appear as a paragraph within the cell, or you can enter individual lines of text within the cell. Wrapping text works only on text, not on numeric data. You can include up to 4096 characters (4KB) in a single cell.

176


The following example shows a cell containing wrapped text.

Using the Text Reformat feature, you can adjust text in a cell to appear as a paragraph covering several rows or columns. Although reformatted text appears in several rows or columns, the data is stored in the left-most cells of each row. The Text Reformat feature maintains the original row height. However, row heights do change when you reformat entries with different font sizes; the font size of the entry in the first row determines the font size of the reformatted text. You can reformat only existing text; text entered later is not affected. Type cell content that you want to reformat in one column. Do not include blank cells between cells to reformat as cells following a blank cell are not reformatted.

To wrap text within a cell 1 Click the cell where you want to wrap the text. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Alignment tab, then enable the Wrap Text check box in the Cell Options section. To wrap text from the toolbar, click the Property button, then click Alignment, Wrap Text.

To enter short lines of text in one cell 1 Click the cell where you want to enter the text. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Alignment tab, enable the Wrap Text check box in the Cell Options section, then click OK. 4 Type the first line of text. 5 Press ALT+ENTER to move to the next line.


177

6 Continue typing. Press ALT+ENTER to move to a new line until you finish entering the text. 7 Press ENTER.

To wrap text over multiple rows or columns 1 Select the first cell to reformat, then click Format, Text Reformat. 2 In the Cells box, choose the columns or rows where you want the reformatted text to appear. Begin with the cell you selected to reformat as the upper-left cell. For example, if you selected cell A1, you can select A1..B3 as the destination cells for the reformatted text. If data already exists in the destination cells for the reformatted text, the existing data moves down. If you specify the destination cells for the reformatted text in the active row only, it fills up as many rows as necessary to display the text within the columns containing those cells. If you specify both columns and rows as the destination cells for the reformatted text, Quattro Pro reformats the text within those cells if enough space exists.

Joining cells You can combine cells using the Join feature. Joining cells lets you create a title across multiple cells, or a vertical side bar by joining cells in a column. In joined cells, you can center and align text and numbers as you would in a single cell. You can join cells in rows, columns, or both. You can also perform calculations and use formulas in a joined cell as you would in a regular cell.

To join cells 1 Drag across the cells you want to join. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Alignment tab. 4 Enable the Join Cells check box in the Cell Options section. To quickly join and center cells, select the cells to join, then click the Join Cells button on the Notebook toolbar.

178


When typing in a joined cell, press ALT+ENTER to return to the next line inside the joined cell. Pressing ENTER moves the insertion point to the next cell in the column.

To separate joined cells 1 Select the joined cells. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Alignment tab. 4 Disable the Join Cells check box in the Cell Options section.

Rotating text By rotating text, you change its orientation. You can specify the degrees of rotation. Rotating text works well with the Join feature. Join the cells first, type your text, then rotate the text.

To rotate text 1 Click the cell with text to rotate. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Alignment tab. 4 Enable the Rotated button, then specify the degrees of rotation. Specify 90 or 270 to rotate the text vertically from the bottom of the cell to the top.

Changing text font and appearance You can change the font of the text in one or more cells by adjusting the font face, font size, or text color. Changing the color of text does not affect cell color or shading. (You may need to click outside the cells to see the new shading.) When you change cell shading, choose a contrasting text color to ensure visibility. If text does not appear on your printout, choose a darker color; light colors print as white on some printers. You can create custom colors using the Notebook palette. For information about using the Notebook Palette, see “Changing colors in the Notebook palette” on page 414. You can also change text appearance options. For example, you can underline and italicize text, or you can set text to superscript or subscript. Quattro Pro lets you preview changes to text font or appearance of selected cells using the Corel RealTime Preview feature. When you select a font or appearance option, Quattro Pro automatically displays a preview of the Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

179

change in the selected cells. If you use the Property Bar lists to change the font face or text size, Quattro Pro displays an immediate preview of the change beside the list. By default, Quattro Pro enables the Corel RealTime Preview feature. However, you can choose to disable it. For more information about Corel RealTime Preview, see “Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components” on page 65.

To change text font 1 Select the cells with text to format. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Cell Font tab. 4 Consider the following options: Face — sets the typeface of the selected text Size — sets the size of the selected text Color — sets the color of the selected text; click More to expand the color palette selection You can also select text by double clicking the cell and selecting the text to change.

If a font face has a TrueType (TT) or Adobe Type Manager (a) symbol beside it, text appears in print as it does on-screen. Font faces with a printer symbol beside it print but may not appear in the correct font on-screen. Font faces without a symbol appear accurately on-screen, but may not appear in the correct font when printed. When you enlarge or reduce the font size, the row height changes to display the tallest letters in the row (unless you have set the row height).

To change text appearance 1 Select the cells to change. 2 Enable any of the following check boxes in the Appearance section: Bold Italics

180


Underline Strikeout You can also use the Bold, Italic, Underline, or Strikeout buttons on the Property Bar to change the text appearance. To toggle off bold, italic, underline, or strikeout click the button again.

To set text to superscript or subscript 1 Double-click the cell and select the data to change. 2 Do one of the following: Click the Superscript button to display text as superscript. Click the Subscript button to display text as subscript. To toggle off superscript or subscript click the button again while the text is selected.

Defining, changing, and deleting styles You can define a style for cells in a notebook and set or disable properties. Disabled properties have no effect on cells to which you apply the new style. This lets you create partial styles that affect only a few properties at a time, and combine new and existing properties. You can redefine existing styles by adding, removing, or changing existing properties. If you redefine a style used in the notebook, all cells using that style change to reflect the new property settings. Styles save with the current notebook. You can delete any style you no longer use except the Normal style. If you delete a style, cells using this style revert to the Normal style. When you set style properties, Quattro Pro uses default settings for each property. However, you can customize each property setting. For example, you can adjust the Font properties to set the font face to Times New Roman and size to 12 point. Text which uses this style displays the style properties you set.

To define a new style 1 Click Format, Styles. 2 Type a new name in the Define Style For text box.


181

3 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the properties you want to include in the style. 4 Click any of the following buttons to set the properties for the style: Alignment — sets the alignment properties for the cell Format — sets the cell format properties Protection — enables or disables cell protection Line Drawing — sets the properties for cell lines Shading — sets the shading, pattern, and color properties for the cell Font — sets the font type for the text in the cell Text Color — sets the font color for text in the cell

To change an existing style 1 Click Format, Styles. 2 Choose the style to change from the Define Style For list box. 3 Enable the Property check box for properties you want to change. 4 Click the Property button(s), and change the settings in the corresponding dialog box. Disable the Property check box to remove a property from the style definition.

To delete a style 1 Click Format, Styles. 2 Choose the style name in the Define Style For list, then click the Delete button.

Applying and merging styles You can apply predefined styles to cells. You can choose a style from the default style list in Quattro Pro or you can define a new style to apply to cells. For more information about defining a new style, see “Defining, changing, and deleting styles” on page 181. When you apply a style, cells with preset properties do not change. You can also copy a style to another notebook.

182


Quattro Pro lets you merge property settings for one style with those for another style or formatted cell. For example, you can merge a cell with purple text color properties with the Normal style. When you apply the Normal style to cells in your notebook, the cells display the Normal style properties and the text is purple.

To apply a predefined style to cells 1 Select a cell or group of cells. 2 Choose a style from the Style list on the Property Bar.

To copy a style to another notebook 1 Select a cell with the style format you want to copy. 2 Click Edit, Copy. 3 Select a cell or group of cells in another notebook. 4 Click Edit, Paste. The style name appears in the Style list box for that notebook. Click File, Open if the notebook you want to copy the style to is not currently open.

To merge styles or preformatted cells 1 Click Format, Styles. 2 In the Define Styles For list box, select the style to merge, then click Merge. 3 Do one of the following: Enable the Style button and choose the style name from the Select Style list box to merge another style Enable the Cell button and type the cell address in the Select Cell box to merge a formatted cell

Working with fills, patterns, and borders Quattro Pro lets you add flare to your spreadsheet using fills, patterns, and borders. You can choose from a broad selection of colors, patterns, and borders to improve the appearance of your spreadsheet. You can also create new colors to add to the color palette by modifying existing colors. For information about adding colors to the palette, see Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

183

“Changing colors in the notebook palette” on page 414. When you print a spreadsheet with color and it does not appear on your printout, choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

Adding color to a spreadsheet Quattro Pro lets you color cell backgrounds using the color palette. You can also use colors to identify data ranges. With the spreadsheet Conditional Color property, you can change the color of specific types of data: values above or below a specified range, and ERR values. For example, you can display all negative values in red or all values greater than 1000 in green. When you enable the Conditional Color option, changing the text color does not change the color of data designated as a normal value. You can also color-code spreadsheet tabs. For example, you can make all tabs for Expenses one color and all tabs for Revenue another color.

To color the cell background 1 Select the cells. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Fill/Pattern tab. 4 Choose the solid pattern box, then choose a color from the Pattern Color palette or click More to expand the color palette selection. Click the Fill button to choose a background color using the Property Bar.

To add color to a range of data 1 Click Format, Sheet. 2 Click the Conditional Color tab. 3 In the Smallest Normal Value text box, type the smallest value to which you want to apply conditional color. 4 In the Greatest Normal Value text box, type the largest value to which you want to apply conditional color. 5 Enable one of the following buttons, in the Option section: Below Normal — sets the color of cells whose values are below the smallest normal value

184


Normal Color — sets the color of cells whose values fall within the range set in the Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value text boxes Above Normal Color — sets the color of cells whose values are above the greatest normal value ERR Color — sets the color to use for ERR and NA values generated by formula errors 6 Choose the color to associate with the option you chose in the previous step. 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enable a different color for as many options as you want to color code. 8 Enable the Enable check box to apply the colors you set to the spreadsheet. You can also right-click a sheet tab, then click Sheet Properties to access the Conditional Color tab.

To turn off conditional colors, disable the Enable check box.

To color-code a spreadsheet tab 1 Click Format, Sheet. 2 Click the Tab Color tab. 3 Disable the Use System Color check box. 4 Choose a color from the palette or click More to expand the color palette selection. You can also right-click a sheet tab, then click Sheet Properties to access the Tab Color tab.

Adding patterns to a spreadsheet Quattro Pro lets you fill cells with patterned backgrounds. You can choose the pattern and background color from the color palette or create new colors using the notebook palette. For information about creating new colors, see “Changing colors in the notebook palette” on page 414.


185

To add a pattern to cell backgrounds 1 Select the cells. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Fill/Pattern tab. 4 Choose a pattern from the pattern display. 5 Choose a pattern color from the Pattern Color palette or click More to expand the color palette selection. 6 Choose a background color from the Background Color palette or click More to expand the color palette selection.

Adding lines and borders to cells Quattro Pro lets you choose from a variety of lines and borders. You can draw lines around a cell or you can add borders to a selection of cells. You can set the style, thickness, and color of lines and borders in the spreadsheet. Using the Line Drawing tool you can apply more than one border to selected cells. For example, you can draw a double-line border around an entire cell selection, or draw single vertical lines between the columns in the selection. The Line Drawing tool provides a mock-up or sample box of the cell selection to which you are adding lines. You can use the sample box to indicate where to draw lines on selected cells. For example, clicking the outer edges of the sample box draws border lines only outside of the selection; clicking the inner lines in the sample box draws border lines between every row and column in the selected cells. You can also add lines for total and grand total columns in your spreadsheet.

To add borders to cells 1 Select the cells to which you want to add a border. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Border tab. 4 Click Border Type, then choose a border from the list. 5 Click Border Color, then choose a border color from the list. 6 Click one of the following buttons: All — applies the borders to all the grid lines of the cell selection

186


Outline — applies the borders to only the exterior grid lines of the cell selection Inside — applies the borders to only the interior grid lines of the cell selection

To add lines around or within a border 1 Select the cells to format. 2 Click the Line button on the Property Bar, then choose a line or box drawing.

To remove lines in a border 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of the “To add borders to cells” procedure. 2 Click No Line type. 3 In the sample box, click the lines to remove. If you change your mind as you are adding lines, click the line you recently changed, then click the No Change line type. This returns the line to the line type in effect when you last clicked OK. To cancel all changes, click the Cancel button.

To add lines for totals and grand totals 1 Select the cells to which you want to add lines. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Cell Font tab. 4 In the Accounting Style section, enable one of the following buttons: Single Line Double Line

Aligning data You can align data horizontally or vertically within a cell. Horizontal alignment positions the data at the right or left edge of a cell, or centers the data within a cell. You can also center data across selected cells. When you indent a cell, data appears left-aligned and indented. Vertical alignment positions data at the top, center, or bottom of a cell. Adjust the row height or column width if you cannot see all data in a cell. Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

187

Using Text Orientation options, you can change the direction of cell text. Usually, text displays horizontally within a cell, from left to right. Vertical orientation, displays text from top to bottom.

Aligning data horizontally Data automatically aligns itself in a cell according to the default alignment setting: numbers and formula results are right-aligned, and labels and dates are left-aligned. You can format a cell to align data horizontally at the left, right, or center of a cell. You can also choose to indent data within a cell. You can change the default alignment of all labels by changing the alignment setting of the Normal style. You can also align data by preceding the data with an aligning character: ‘ (apostrophe) = left-align ^ (caret) = centered “ (quotation mark) = right-align

To align data horizontally in a cell 1 Select the cells to align. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Alignment tab. 4 In the Horizontal Alignment section, enable one of the following buttons: General — right-aligns values and left-aligns labels Left — left-aligns all types of data Right — right-aligns all types of data Center — centers cell data Indent — moves text in from the edge of a cell

188


Click the Alignment button to change horizontal cell alignment using the Property Bar.

To set the default alignment of all labels 1 Click Format, Styles. 2 Choose Normal from the Define Style For list. 3 Click Alignment, then set the alignment style.

Centering data across cells You can center data over several cells. Although the data moves to the center of the selected cells, it actually resides in the cell where you originally entered the text. If you have applied shading to this cell, the cells over which you centered text also appear shaded.

To center text over cells 1 Type the text to be centered in the left-most cell. (For example, if you are centering text in row 12 across columns C, D, and E, type the text to be centered in C12.) 2 Select the cells to center the text over starting with the cell containing the text (highlight C12..E12 in this example). 3 Click Format, Selection. 4 Click the Alignment tab. 5 Enable the Center Across Block button in the Horizontal Alignment section. To display the centered text in the input line, click the cell where the text was originally entered. If you enter text in a second cell where text is centered across cells, the first entry is centered over formatted cells to the left of the next entry.

Aligning data vertically You can align data vertically within a cell to appear at the top, middle, or bottom of the cell.


189

The following example shows the vertical alignment options available.

To align data vertically 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the “To align data horizontally in a cell” procedure. 2 In the Vertical Alignment section, enable one of the following buttons: Top — aligns text at the top of the cell Center — aligns text at the middle of the cell Bottom — aligns text in the bottom of the cell

Changing text orientation You can change the text orientation of a cell to display text horizontally from left to right, or vertically to display text from top to bottom. The following example shows the difference between horizontal and vertical text orientation.

You can also change the rotation of text within a cell. For more information about rotating text, see “Rotating text” on page 179.

To change text orientation 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the “To align data horizontally in a cell” procedure. 2 In the Text Orientation section, enable one of the following buttons: Horizontal Vertical

190


Working with numeric formats Quattro Pro lets you format numbers in your spreadsheet. For example, you can format a number to display a specific number of decimals. You can use the existing numeric formats in Quattro Pro or you can create your own numeric formats to further customize the appearance of numbers. For information about creating custom formats, see “Working with custom formats” on page 195. There are two groups of formats: number formats and date/time formats. For more information about Date/Time formats, see “Working with date, time, and currency formats” on page 193. By default, when you enter a number, the column width expands to fit it (unless the number has a General format). If columns do not expand when you enter numbers, enable the Fit-As-You-Go tool. For more information about changing column width as you enter numbers, see “Using QuickFit and Fit-As-You-Go” on page 209.

Changing the numeric format of cells Numeric formats do not affect cell values; they affect only the way values are displayed. For example, a format that limits the number of decimal places that appear does not affect the precision of Quattro Pro calculations, which is accurate to 16 significant digits. When you enter numbers, Quattro Pro displays them in the default General format. You can change how the number displays (for example, add commas, dollar signs, specific number of decimals, other characters to the number, etc.), select a predefined style, or set a specific numeric format. A significant digit refers to any digit that is not a leading zero. For example, the number 1.23 has three significant digits. The number .000829 also has three significant digits because the leading zeros do not count. Decimals, commas, dollar signs, and percent signs do not count as digits. Quattro Pro rounds the appearance of numbers to the specified decimal place in the case of fixed, scientific, currency, comma, and percent formats. The general format rounds off fractional numbers as necessary to fit in the cell. To round the number actually stored in a cell, use @ROUND. For information about spreadsheet functions, see “Working with spreadsheet functions” on page 139.

To change the numeric format of cells 1 Select the cells to format. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Numeric Format tab. Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

191

4 Enable the button that corresponds to the format you want keeping the following in mind: If you enable General, numbers display exactly as you enter them. If the format allows a variable number of decimal places, type a number from 0 to 15 (the default is 2) in the Enter Number of Decimal Places box. If the format allows, choose how you want negative numbers to display. If you enable Number, you can choose to include the 1000 separator (comma). If you enable Currency, choose the country currency symbol to use. You can also use the Accounting Alignment option. If you enable Fraction, choose the fraction type. Enable the Reduced Fraction check box to reduce fractions to their lowest common denominator. If you enable Custom, select a previously defined custom format or click Add to create a new custom format. Quattro Pro has added the Euro to the available currency formats. You can view the Euro currency symbol if you are using Microsoft Windows 98 or if your system has a Euro compliant font installed. If you enable the Hidden button, you hide cells. To prevent them from being accidentally overwritten, protect the sheet with Format, Sheet Protection, Enable Cell Locking. For information about one or more of the check boxes in the Numeric Format dialog box, click the What’s This button and point to the appropriate check box.

Hiding zeros on a spreadsheet Quattro Pro lets you hide all values that equal zero on your spreadsheet. For example, a value such as .004 that appears as 0 if decimal precision is 0, will still appear, even if Display Zeros is set to No, because it is not actually 0. Hiding zeros does not remove zero values from the sheet. Zeros remain in memory and reappear if you change the Display Zeros setting. It is easy to accidentally overwrite cells containing formulas that evaluate to zero. Make sure Undo is enabled, or consider protecting the spreadsheet. For information about enabling Undo, see “Undoing actions and operations” on page 165. For information about protecting your spreadsheet, see “Protecting data” on page 162.

192


To hide zeros on a sheet 1 Click Format, Sheet, Display. 2 Enable the No button in the Display Zeros section.

Working with date, time, and currency formats Quattro Pro lets you format dates and times in your spreadsheet. You can use the existing formats in Quattro Pro or create your own custom formats to further customize the appearance of dates and times. For information about creating custom formats, see “Working with custom formats” on page 195. The International currency, date, and time formats correspond to the International settings located in Tools, Settings. If you change these settings, you must conform to the new settings when you enter currency, dates, or times. By default, Quattro Pro displays times in long form as HH:MM:SS (for example, 09:32:30), or in short form as HH:MM (for example, 09:32) when no seconds have been specified. Once you enter a date or time, you can reformat it to any setting you choose. For more information about time formats, see “Applying formats to dates and times” on page 105. For information about changing the International currency, date, and time formats, see “Using international settings” on page 57.

Editing dates in previous versions of Quattro Pro Any two-digit years entered in a cell or formula as a label in earlier versions of Quattro Pro now use the two-digit year entry window. For example, if cell A1 contains the label ‘1/1/20’ (assumed to be 1/1/1920 in versions of Quattro Pro prior to Quattro Pro version 7 upgraded for Windows NT), the formula @DATEVALUE(A1) now returns the integer date value for 1/1/2020. You should change any label previously entered using a two-digit year date format to a four-digit year date format to explicitly indicate the century. (For example, edit the label ‘1/1/20’ as ‘1/1/1920’.) Once you have changed a date label from two to four digits, the century designation remains unless you override it by re-entering all four year digits of the date. For more information about date formats, see “Applying formats to dates and times” on page 105.

Exchanging date information between applications When you import data containing dates in strings or numeric format from an application that does not support four-digit year date formats, the data imported may also use the two-digit year window. All Quattro Pro 8 date functions updated for easier multi-century use remain compatible with previous versions of Quattro Pro. For example, @DATE Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

193

(26,3,12) will return 16873 (12-Mar-1926) in Quattro Pro 8 and all previous versions.

Setting the date default to display four digits You can set all dates to display in a four-digit year format by default. In Windows (Settings, Control Panel, Regional Settings), set the preferred date short style format to M/d/yyyy. Exit Windows (Settings), then set the default Date Format in Quattro Pro to Windows Default (Tools, Settings, International, Date Format).

Formatting dates Quattro Pro stores each date you enter as a five-digit serial number. Quattro Pro uses this number for calculations. If you type a date, it displays in the format in which you type it. If you enter the date using @DATE, @DATEVALUE, or @NOW, you must reformat the cells with the date numeric format. Otherwise, Quattro Pro displays the results as a date serial number. For example, 33857 appears instead of 10-Sep-92.

To format dates 1 Select the cells to format. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Numeric Format tab. 4 Enable the Date button, then choose a specific date format from the list box.

Formatting times Once you enter a time in the spreadsheet, you can change to another time format with the Numeric Format property.

To format times 1 Select the cells to format. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Numeric Format tab. 4 Enable the Time button, then choose a specific time format from the list box.

194


Working with custom formats Custom formats let you change how values are formatted, including numbers, dates, and times. Quattro Pro provides several predefined custom formats. You can edit one of these formats or you can create a new format. You can preview a custom format in the preview box located under the Custom Formats list. Using the advanced custom format options you can customize the format of values (e.g., numbers, dates, and times) set conditions in a format statement adjust how a value displays using arithmetic operators for example, you can divide 10,000 by 1,000 to display it as 10K; the value in the cell remains 10,000 but displays as 10K in the spreadsheet add rich text formatting to formatted values (e.g., font type, size, and color) display numeric values as horizontal bars to create a graphical representation of data A custom format can contain more than one format statement. Quattro Pro maintains a summary of each format statement in the Format Summary section of the custom format. New custom formats are added to the Custom Formats list in all open notebooks, but only the custom formats you apply to cells in open notebooks are saved. If you paste a formatted cell into another notebook, the custom format also copies. For information about the available number formats, see “Adding numeric format codes” on page 195. For information about the available date or time formats, see “Adding date format codes” on page 197 and “Adding time format codes” on page 198.

Adding numeric format codes You can customize the format used for numbers in your spreadsheet using numeric format codes. You can also customize the format of dates and times. For information about customizing date formats, see “Adding date format codes” on page 197. For information about customizing time formats, see “Adding time format codes” on page 198. For information about applying numeric format codes, see “Creating, editing, and applying custom formats” on page 199. The table below outlines and describes each numeric format code available in Quattro Pro. Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

195

196

Numeric format code

Description

0

Always displays a digit. If the number does not have a digit in this position, a zero appears. If there are more digits in the number than zeros in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion are displayed and the fraction portion is rounded.

9

Displays a digit if the number has one. If there are more digits in the number than nines in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion are displayed and the fraction portion is rounded.

, (comma)

Inserts a thousands separator (a comma unless specified otherwise with the application’s International properties). If not part of a number code, the comma is inserted wherever it is positioned in the format.

. (period)

Inserts a decimal separator (a period unless specified otherwise with the application’s International properties).

E- or e-

Displays the number in scientific notation, preceding negative exponents with a minus sign. If the format includes at least one zero or nine following this symbol, the number displays in scientific notation with E or e. If the exponent contains more digits than nines or zeros following this symbol, the extra digits are displayed.

E+ or e+

Displays numbers in scientific notation, preceding positive exponents with a plus sign. If the format includes at least one zero or nine following this symbol, the number displays in scientific notation with E or e. If the exponent contains more digits than nines or zeros following this symbol, the extra digits are displayed.

?//M

Displays a fraction followed by the maximum number of digits for the denominator.

?//

Displays a fraction followed by the denominator to use. The fraction is not reduced.

?//R

Displays a fraction followed by the base denominator to use. The fraction is reduced if possible.

* (asterisk)

Fills the column by repeating the character to the right of the asterisk.

_ (underscore)

Skips the space that would have been required to display the character that follows the underscore. This lets you align numbers for formats with optional trailing characters such as negative numbers with parentheses.

| (bar)

Displays the first character following the | code in the space that would have been required to display the second character following the | code. This allows the alignment of formats with different trailing characters, such as the K Meg Gig predefined format.


LeftBar

Displays the number as a red horizontal bar starting at the left of the cell using the range 0 to 100. You can change the limits of the range and the bar color.

CenterBar

Displays the number as a red horizontal bar starting in the center of the cell. Uses the range 0 to 100 from the center to the left, and 0 to 100 from the center to the right of the cell. You can change the limits of the range and the bar color.

RightBar

Displays the number as a red horizontal bar starting at the right of the cell using the range 0 to 100. You can change the limits of the range and the bar color.

General

Uses the General numeric format.

Adding date format codes You can customize the format for dates in your spreadsheet using date format codes. You can also customize the format of numbers and times. For information about customizing number formats, see “Adding numeric format codes” on page 195. For information about customizing times, see “Adding time format codes” on page 198. For information about applying date format codes, see “Creating, editing, and applying custom formats” on page 199. The table below outlines and describes the date format codes available in Quattro Pro. Date format codes

Description

d

Displays the day of the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-31).

dd

Displays the day of the month as a two digit number (01-31).

wday, Wday, WDAY

Displays the day of the week as a three-character abbreviation in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase.

1wday, 1Wday, 1WDAY

Displays the weekday as an abbreviation using the number of characters you specify in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase.

weekday, Weekday, WEEKDAY

Displays the day of the week in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase.

mo

Displays the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-12).

mmo

Displays the month as a two-digit number (01-12).

mon, Mon, MON

Displays the month as a three-character abbreviation in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase.


197

1mon, 1Mon, 1MON

Displays the month as an abbreviation using the number of characters you specify in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase (e.g., SEPT).

month, Month, MONTH

Displays the name of the month in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase.

yy

Displays the last two digits of the year (00-99).

yyyy

Displays all four digits of the year (0001-9999).

* (asterisk)

Fills the column by repeating the character to the right of the asterisk.

_ (underscore)

Skips the space that would have been required to display the character that follows the underscore. This lets you align numbers for formats with optional trailing characters, such as negative numbers with parentheses.

| (bar)

Displays the first character following the | code in the space that would have been required to display the second character following the | code. This allows the alignment of formats with different trailing characters, such as the K Meg Gig predefined format.

Adding time format codes You can customize the time formats in your spreadsheet using time format codes. You can also customize the format for numbers and dates in your spreadsheet. For information about customizing number formats, see “Adding numeric format codes” on page 195. For information about customizing date formats, see “Adding date format codes” on page 197. For information about applying time format codes, see “Creating, editing, and applying custom formats” on page 199. The table below outlines and describes the time codes available in Quattro Pro.

198

Time format codes

Description

s

Displays seconds as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).

ss

Displays seconds as a two-digit number (01-59).

[ss]

Displays a count in seconds that can exceed 60 (formats 00:01:01 as 61 seconds). This format should not be used with year, month, day, hour, or minute codes.

mi

Displays minutes as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).

mmi

Displays minutes as a two-digit number (01-59).


[mmi]

Displays a count in minutes that can exceed 60 (formats 01:01:01 as 61 minutes). This format should not be used with year, month, day, or hour codes.

h

Displays the hour as a one- or two-digit number (1-24). If the format includes am/pm or AM/PM, the number is between 1-12. If am/pm or AM/PM is not included, the 24-hour format (0-24) is used.

hh

Displays the hour as a two-digit number (01-24). If the format includes am/pm or AM/PM, the number is between 01-12. If am/pm or AM/PM is not included, the 24-hour format (00-24) is used.

[hh]

Displays a count of hours that can exceed 24 (e.g., formats one day and one hour as 25 hours). This format should not be used with year, month, or day codes.

.s

Displays the decimal portion of seconds (the number of digits to display follows this format).

.mi

Displays the decimal portion of minutes (the number of digits to display follows this format). This format should not be used with seconds codes.

.h

Displays the decimal portion of hours (the number of digits to display follows this format). This format should not be used with minutes or seconds codes.

a or A

Displays a shortened version of am/pm and sets the time to a 12-instead of a 24-hour format in either lowercase or uppercase.

am or AM

Displays am/pm in either lowercase or uppercase and sets the time to 12 hour instead of 24 hour.

Creating, editing, and applying custom formats With custom formats you can change the way dates, times, or numeric values appear in your spreadsheet using a format statement. A format statement must contain format codes. These codes, when applied to values in the spreadsheet, change the way values are formatted. For example, you can add a format statement with specific date codes to display the date 01/23/99 as January 23, 1999. Or, you can use time codes to format the time 00:01:01 to appear as 61 seconds. You can add text with format codes. The text appears in a cell when you apply the custom format. For example, if you use the numeric format code 9 and then type cm in the Format box, the number five appears in the spreadsheet as 5 cm. You can edit an existing custom format or you can create a new custom format. When you create a new custom format, you modify an existing format and save it with a new name. By default, when you modify an existing format Quattro Pro changes the format name. Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

199

For information about specific format code functions, see “Adding numeric format codes” on page 195. “Adding date format codes” on page 197, and “Adding time format codes” on page 198.

To create a custom format 1 Select the cell for which you want to create a custom format. 2 Click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab. 3 Enable the Custom button. 4 From the Custom Formats list, choose the format that most closely resembles the one to which you want to create, then click the Add button. 5 In the Format Summary section, type a format name in the Format Name text box. 6 In the Format section, consider the following options: To add a numeric format, click the Add Numeric Code button, then choose a format code from the list box. To add a date or time format, click the Add Date/Time Code button then choose a format code from the list box. To add rich text formatting to format codes (e.g., text color and font type and size), select the format code in the Format box, then apply formatting using the text formatting buttons in the Format section. To add text to be displayed with the format, click inside the Format box, then type the text. A summary of the format statement appears in the Format Summary section under the Format label. You can add to the existing format codes in the Format section or you can delete these codes altogether.

To edit a custom format 1 Select a cell formatted with the custom format to edit. 2 Click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab. 3 Click the Edit button. 4 Make the appropriate changes to the custom format.

200


When you edit a custom format, Quattro Pro applies the formatting changes to all cells that use the custom format. If the custom format contains multiple format statements, you can edit a specific statement by selecting it from the Format Summary section, then making the appropriate changes to the statement.

To apply a custom format 1 Select the cells to which you want to apply the custom format. 2 Click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab. 3 Enable the Custom button. 4 Choose a custom format from the Custom Formats list.

Setting conditional formats Quattro Pro lets you set a condition within a format statement. When you set a condition, you must specify the condition, and the resulting format to be applied when the conditions are true (e.g., if X is greater than Y, then apply the Z format). You must specify a default format statement which is applied if the condition is false. The default format statement must not contain a condition and must appear as the last format statement in the Format Summary section A custom format can contain multiple conditions. When you apply a custom format to cells, all conditions within the custom format are evaluated. Quattro Pro evaluates conditions from top to bottom until it finds a condition that is “true,” or reaches the default format statement. The following figure is an example of a custom format that contains multiple format statements with conditions. The first column contains the conditions, and the second column contains the formats to be applied when each condition is true. The third column specifies how to adjust the value before displaying it in the spreadsheet. For more information about adjusting values, see “Adjusting how values display”Adjusting how values display>Proc4 The following figure displays multiple format statements. The first column contains conditions, the second column

You can add or insert new format statements in the Format Summary section. You can also delete format statements.


201

You can adjust how a value displays within a format statement. For information about adjusting the way a value displays, see “Adjusting how values display” on page 203.

To set a condition 1 Select the cell with the custom format to which you want to set a condition. 2 Click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab. 3 Enable the Custom button. 4 Click the Add button. 5 In the Format section, create the format to apply if the condition is false by considering the following options: To add a numeric format, click the Add Numeric Code button, then choose a format code from the list box. To add a date or time format, click the Add Date/ Time Code button then choose a format code from the list box. To add rich text formatting to the format codes (i.e., text color, font type and size), select the format code in the Format box, then add the appropriate text formatting using the text formatting buttons in the Format section. To add text to be displayed with the format, type the text directly into the Format box. 6 In the If Condition section, choose the first term of the condition from the First Term list box. Consider the following options: If you choose Value, type a value in the text box If you choose This Cell, Quattro Pro uses the currently selected cell If you choose Other Cell, select a cell from the spreadsheet using the Pointer button 7 Choose an operator from the Operator list box. 8 Choose the second term of the condition from the Second Term list box. 9 In the Format section, choose the resulting format code to apply when the condition is true. Consider the following options: To add a numeric format, click the Add Numeric Code button, then choose a format code from the list box. To add a date or time format, click the Add Date/ Time Code button then choose a format code from the list box.

202


To add rich text formatting to the format codes (e.g., text color and font type and size), select the format code in the Format box, then add the appropriate text formatting using the text formatting buttons in the Format section. To add text to be displayed with the format, type the text directly into the Format box. When creating the default format statement, you can add to or replace any existing format codes that exist. If you enable the Adjust Value Before Display check box, the adjustment applies to the format statement that is currently selected in the Format Summary section. If you choose a bar format, you can adjust the limits of the bar range in the Bar Format Values section. For more information about bar formats, see “Displaying values as horizontal bars” on page 205.

Click the Add button in the Format Summary section to add another format statement with condition after the currently selected format statement. Click the Insert button in the Format Summary section to insert a format statement with condition before the currently selected format statement.

To delete a format statement In the Format Summary section, choose the format statement to delete, then click the Delete button.

Adjusting how values display You can also use arithmetic operators to adjust the way formatted values display in your spreadsheet. Say you have a table that contains populations of European countries in millions. You can reduce the number of zeros that display in the population column by adjusting how the population value is displayed. This does not change the actual population figure. If you adjust the value by dividing each population by one million, you can display the necessary population figures without repeating zeros for each population. For example, if you select a cell that contains a population figure of 12,000,000, the number 12 displays in the cell. However, because you only adjust the way the number displays, the number in the input line remains 12,000,000.


203

The following graphic displays the population table before and after adjusting the way the values are displayed.

When you adjust how values display, make sure that the format statement you adjust contains numeric, date, or time format codes.

To adjust the way values display 1 Select the cell with the value to adjust. 2 Click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab. 3 Enable the Custom button, then do one of the following: To adjust the way values display in an existing custom format, choose the format from the Custom Formats list, then click the Edit button. To adjust the way values display in a new custom format, click the Add button. 4 In the Format section, consider the following options: To add a numeric format, click the Add Numeric Code button, then choose a format code from the list box. To add a date or time format, click the Add Date/Time Code button. then choose a format code from the list box. 5 Enable the Adjust Value Before Display check box. 6 In the First Term list box, choose one of the following terms: Value — uses the specific value as the term; type the value in the adjoining text box This Cell — uses the value of the current cell as the term Other Cell — uses the value of another cell as the term. This cell can use either absolute or relative cell addressing; type the cell address or select it using the Pointer button.

204


7 From the Operator list box, choose the operator. 8 From the Second Term list box, choose the second term to complete the mathematic expression. If you have multiple format statements with conditions, you can adjust the way values display for each statement.

Displaying values as horizontal bars The Bar format lets you visually identify patterns or anomalies in numeric data. By displaying numeric values as horizontal bars you create a graphical representation of your data. For example, consider a mousetrap company that tracks monthly sales for 1998. By viewing these figures using a Bar format, you can view any sales trends for the year and quickly identify the month with the highest and lowest sales records. This figure displays the monthly sales figures in numbers and in a bar format.

You can apply a predefined Left Bar, Center Bar, or Right Bar format. You can also change the color of the bar and the limits of the bar range. By default, Quattro Pro uses the color red and a bar range from 0 to 100.

To apply a bar format 1 Select cells to which you want to apply the format. 2 Click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab. 3 Enable the Custom button. 4 From the Custom Formats list, choose one of the following bar formats:


205

Left Bar — displays the number as a red bar starting at the left of the cell Right Bar — displays the number as a red bar starting at the right of the cell Center Bar — displays the number as a red bar starting in the center of the cell

To change the bar color 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure. 2 Click the Edit button. 3 In the Format section, select the bar format code in the Format box. 4 Click the Text Color button, then choose a color from the color palette. Click the More button to expand the color palette selection.

To change the bar range limit 1 Select the cells to which you want to edit the bar range. 2 Click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab. 3 Enable the Custom button. 4 From the Custom Formats list, choose the bar format to edit, then click the Edit button. 5 In the Bar Format Values section, click the Lower Limit button, then choose one of the following options: Value — uses a specific value as the lower limit; type the value in the adjoining text box Other Cell — uses the value of another cell that is either relative to the current cell or an absolute cell address as the lower limit; type the cell address in the text box or select it using the Pointer button. 6 In the Bar Format Values section, click the Upper Limit button, then choose one of the following options: Value — uses a specific value as the lower limit; type the value in the adjoining text box Other Cell — uses the value of another cell that is either relative to the current cell or an absolute cell address as the upper limit; type the cell address in the text box or select it using the Pointer button.

206


Sizing rows and columns Quattro Pro lets you resize rows and columns in your spreadsheet. You can format just one row or column, or you can change the default height and width for all rows and columns in your spreadsheet. You can hide columns and rows you do not want to see on your desktop. Hiding rows or columns does not delete them from the spreadsheet, it just hides them from view.

Resizing rows Quattro Pro lets you change the row height for one row or multiple rows in your spreadsheet.

To change row height 1 Select a cell in each row you want to resize, or select the row borders. Press CTRL to select noncontiguous rows. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Row/Column tab. 4 In the Row Options section, enable the Set Height button. 5 In the Units Of Measure section, enable one of the following buttons: Points Inches Centimeters 6 Type the height in the Height Options box. To use the mouse to change row height, select the row borders (press CTRL to select noncontiguous rows). Move the pointer to the bottom edge of a row border; the pointer turns into a double arrow. Drag the double arrow to resize the rows.

Resizing columns You can change the width of one column, or a selection of columns. You can resize contiguous or noncontiguous column selections.

To change column width 1 Select a cell in each column you want to resize, or select the column borders. Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

207

Press CTRL to select noncontiguous columns. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Row/Column tab. 4 In the Column Options section, enable the Set Width button. 5 In the Units Of Measure section, enable one of the following buttons: Characters Inches Centimeters 6 Type the width in the Width Options box. To use the mouse to change column width, select the column borders (press CTRL to select noncontiguous columns). Move the pointer to the right edge of a column border; the pointer turns into a double arrow. Drag the double arrow to resize the columns.

Working with default column widths and row heights Quattro Pro uses a default column width for all columns in the spreadsheet. This default is wide enough to display nine characters in the default font. You can change the default width. If you change column widths, you can reset the column width to the spreadsheet default width. Columns whose widths you explicitly adjust (using QuickFit, the mouse, or the Column Width property) are not controlled by the Default Width property. Before those columns can be affected by a change in the default width, you must reset the column width to the spreadsheet default. You can return row heights to the default size, which is determined by the largest font used in the row.

To change the default column width for a spreadsheet 1 Click Format, Sheet. 2 Click the Default Width tab. 3 In the Unit section, enable one of the following buttons: Characters Inches

208


Centimeters 4 Type a column width in the Column Width box. You can also right-click a sheet tab, then click Sheet Properties to access the Default Width tab.

To restore the default column width 1 Select any cell in each column you want to resize, or select their borders. Press CTRL to select noncontiguous columns. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Row/Column tab. 4 Enable the Reset Width button.

To restore the default row height 1 Select a row. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Row/Column tab. 4 In the Row Options section, click Reset Height. Click the Properties button to access the Row/Column tab. Double-click the row border to return the row height to the default size.

Using QuickFit and Fit-As-You-Go The QuickFit tool adjusts column width to one character wider than the longest entry. You can apply QuickFit to several contiguous columns at once. If you select entire or partial columns, the width is based on the longest entry in the selection. If a single-row (or just one cell) is selected, the width is based on the longest entry in that row and all cells below it. Number values that are wider than the cell width appear either in scientific notation or as a row of asterisks (*********), depending on the numeric format and width of the cell. Use the Fit-As-You-Go tool to automatically increase the column width as you type so that number values are always visible.

209


To increase column width using QuickFit 1 Select the cell containing the long text string. 2 Click the QuickFit button on the Notebook toolbar. You can also double-click the column letter to increase column width. To apply QuickFit to several contiguous columns, select a block of cells, including all of the columns, then click the QuickFit button.

To enable Fit-As-You-Go 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the General tab. 3 Enable the Fit-As-You-Go check box in the Options section.

Hiding rows and columns Quattro Pro lets you selectively hide rows or columns from your view on the desktop. Hidden rows or columns do not print. Although they are hidden from view, they are still used in calculations. Columns move left to fill in the empty space from the hidden column, and rows move up. However, row numbers and column letters do not change. For example, if you hide column B, the columns on-screen are labeled A, C, D, and so on. When you move or copy hidden columns to a different part of the notebook, use the Paste Special feature. For information about using Paste Special, see “Using the Paste Special command” on page 173.

To hide rows or columns 1 Select the rows or columns to hide. 2 Right-click the rows or columns, then click Hide. If you use Tools, Data Tools, Extract To File to save part of a notebook that includes hidden rows or columns, the hidden rows or columns save in the new file and remain hidden when you open the new file.

To reveal hidden rows or columns 1 Click Edit, Select All, or select cells on both sides of the hidden area. 2 Click the Properties button.

210


3 Click the Row/Column tab. 4 Click Reveal under Column Options or Row Options. To reveal a hidden column with the mouse, place the pointer slightly to the right of where the hidden column should be, then drag. For a hidden row, drag from just below the hidden row’s border. You can also reveal hidden columns or rows by selecting columns or rows on both sides of the hidden area. Right-click the selection then choose Reveal from the list.

Working with page breaks You can change the look of your spreadsheet by specifying page breaks. There are two kinds of page break: soft page breaks and hard page breaks. Quattro Pro lets you view and find page breaks in the spreadsheet. You can create or delete page breaks and convert existing ones to the opposite type. For example, you can convert a soft page break to a hard page break.

Viewing and finding page breaks You can view page breaks on your desktop. The page breaks displayed are soft page breaks unless you have made them hard page breaks. Quattro Pro also lets you search your document to find a specific page break. Page breaks display as solid blue lines on your desktop, when you are in Page View or Page Breaks View.

To view page breaks Click View, Page Breaks. Click View, Zoom and enable the 50% button to see multiple pages.

To find page breaks 1 Click Edit, Find Page Break. 2 Choose the type of page break to find from the list in the Break Type section.


211

If you select Intersection, decide whether to search down or to the right and enable the appropriate button. 3 Choose the type of page break to search for from the list in the Break Classification section, then click Find Next to search forward in the notebook. Click Previous to search backward through the notebook.

Inserting and deleting page breaks Quattro Pro automatically creates soft page breaks at the bottom of each page, according to your page size. You can insert either horizontal or vertical hard page breaks to start a new page. You can delete page breaks no longer needed or you can delete all page breaks within the spreadsheet.

To insert hard page breaks 1 Click the cell where you want to create a page break. 2 Click Insert, Page Break, then click Create. 3 Select Vertical, Horizontal, or Intersection (for both), then click OK. If you click next to (below or to the right of) an existing hard page break, the new page break is created in the opposite direction. For example, if you click next to a horizontal page break, then click Insert, Page Break, a vertical page break is created.

You can also select a row or column , then click Insert, Page Break, Create to create either a horizontal or vertical Page Break.

To delete hard page breaks Click a cell below or to the right of the hard page break, then click Insert, Page Break, Delete.

To delete all page breaks Click Insert, Page Break, Delete All.

Converting page breaks Quattro Pro lets you convert existing soft page breaks to hard page breaks. When you drag an existing soft page break to a new location in the

212


spreadsheet, Quattro Pro automatically converts the soft page break to a hard page break.

To convert soft page breaks to hard page breaks 1 Move the pointer over the displayed page break until it turns to a double arrow,then right-click the page break. 2 Click Set Hard Page Break. Right-click the hard page break, then click Remove Hard Page Break to revert a hard page break to a soft page break.

To convert page breaks by dragging 1 Click View, Page Breaks. 2 Drag the blue page break line to a new location. You can also drag page breaks in Page View by clicking View, Page.

Creating headers, footers, and margins Headers and footers are lines of text that print at the top and bottom of each page. Use headers or footers to include such information as page numbers, title, date, time, and filename on each notebook page. You can format headers and footers using header and footer codes. After creating a header or footer, you can edit them as required. Quattro Pro uses default margin settings. However, you can change the size of the margins.

Inserting header and footer codes You can type codes in a header or footer to add items such as page numbers and dates instead of adding them from the Property Bar. For example, when you enter text in a header or footer, you can use the bar character (|) to change the text alignment from the left to either centered or right-aligned. On some keyboards, the vertical bar character appears broken in the middle. For information about adding headers and footers using the Property Bar, see “Adding headers and footers” on page 214. If you want to enter a “#” or a “@” as a symbol and not as a header or footer code, insert a “\” in front of the symbol. For example, \@, displays as, @. Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

213

You can change the default date, time, or currency codes using the International settings. For information about “Using international settings” on page 57. The following table outlines header and footer codes and their function. Code

Description

| (vertical bar)

Centers text that follows

|| (two vertical bars)

Right-aligns text that follows

#p

Current page number

#p+n

Current page number plus the number n

#P

Number of pages in the document

#P+n

Number of pages plus the number n

#d

Current date in the short format specified in Tools, Settings, International, Date Format

#D

Current date in the long format specified in Tools, Settings, International, Date Format

#ds

Current date in Short Date format

#Ds

Current date in Long Date format

#t

Current time in the short format specified in Tools, Settings, International, Time Format

#T

Current time in the long format specified in Tools, Settings, International, Time Format

#ts

Current time in Short Time format

#Ts

Current time in Long Time format

#f

Notebook filename with no path (e.g. BUDGET.WB3)

#F

Notebook filename, including the path (e.g. C:\DATA\BUDGET.WB3)

#n

Moves to a new line

# (number sign)

Current page number; use for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS

Adding headers and footers Quattro Pro lets you add headers and footers to your spreadsheet. You can also change the distance between a header or footer and the first or last row of data. Use the Property Bar for notebook headers and footers to add codes, symbols, or other information to the header or footer.

214


To add a header or footer 1 Click View, Page. 2 Right-click the top or bottom margin, then click Create Header or Create Footer. 3 Type the header or footer text. 4 Click Property Bar options to change the font, add header or footer codes, symbols, or other information. 5 Click outside the header or footer to see the changes.

To add space between the header or footer 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Header/Footer tab. 3 In the Height box, increase or decrease the height value. You can also drag the dotted line that borders the top or bottom of your spreadsheet data to adjust the space between the header or footer and the first or last row of data.

Editing headers and footers Quattro Pro lets you edit headers or footers in your spreadsheet. For information about header and footer codes, see “Inserting header and footer codes” on page 213.

To edit a header or footer 1 Click View, Page. 2 Double-click in the header or footer dotted area. 3 Make the required changes to the header or footer. 4 Click outside the header or footer to see the changes. You can also edit headers or footers in Page Setup. Click File, Page Setup, then click the Header/Footer tab. Enter the appropriate changes in either the header or footer text box.


215

Customizing margins You can change margins to best present your data. Quattro Pro uses the measurement system specified in the Windows Control Panel to determine whether to use inches or centimeters for margin measurements. You can override the default for a particular margin by entering in (inches) or cm (centimeters) after its value. The default suffix is displayed next to each default margin setting. For example, to set the left margin to three centimeters when the default measurement system is inches, choose Left Margin, then type 3 cm. Quattro Pro then converts the entry into the default measurement system. Some printers cannot print to the edge of the paper, and many print drivers do not allow zero-inch margins.

To change margin settings 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Print Margins tab. 3 Choose the margin you want to adjust: Top, Bottom, Left, or Right. 4 Highlight the current margin measurement. 5 As you highlight a measurement, the margin line darkens in the drawing in the center of the dialog box, the arrow indicates the margin you are setting. Do one of the following: For top and bottom margins, type the distance between the top or bottom of the paper and the header or footer. For left and right margins, type the distance from the edge of the paper to the data. Use inches if “in” is displayed next to the default margin settings; use centimeters if “cm” is displayed. Use decimals to indicate partial inches or centimeters, for example 0.5 centimeters. To change margins while in Page View, move the cursor over the dotted margin line until the pointer turns into a double arrow, then drag the margin to set the current margin for a column or row of pages.

216


ORGANIZING AND MANIPULATING DATA

8

Quattro Pro lets you organize and manipulate your data in different ways. You organize your data by sorting, filtering, or grouping it. The Sort and QuickFilter tools let you sort and filter data using preset options or customized settings. You manipulate data using the combine and consolidate features. The Consolidator tool lets you combine data from two files, or from separate source locations using mathematical operations. Using the Outline tool, you can group data automatically to show summary cells, such as totals and averages, while hiding detail cells.

Sorting data Sorting lets you order multiple criteria based on sort keys within the sort selection. In Quattro Pro you sort data using two different tools. Using the QuickSort tool, you can sort data in ascending or descending order. Using the Sort tool, you can select more advanced sort options. Sorting data in ascending order organizes your selection in the following sequence: labels beginning with numbers in numeric order labels beginning with letters and special characters in ASCII order values in numeric order blank cells


217

For example, if you sort data in an address book in ascending order using the sort key “LAST_NAME,” all last names would appear in alphabetic order, starting with “A.” If you select descending order, the last names would appear in alphabetic order, starting with “Z.” You can specify up to five sort keys. Sorting begins with the first key. If there are two identical entries, Quattro Pro looks at the second key. If the first two fields are identical, the third key determines sort order, and so on. This example shows what a list of names looks like before and after you sort by LAST_NAME, in ascending order.

The results of sorting the same name list by LAST_NAME, and then by FIRST_NAME, in ascending order.

You can restore your data to its original sort order after performing several sort operations, or undo a sort immediately after sorting. As well, the Sort tool lets you reuse previous sort settings. Cells entered in your spreadsheet after sorting your data are not displayed in the sorted order. To include the new records in the correct sort order, re-sort your data . Likewise, formulas that refer to cells outside of their row do not update when you re-sort data. If your sort selection contains formulas that reference cells outside the sort selection (for example, +A2), make them absolute (+$A$2) or convert them to their end values before sorting. For more information about making cell addresses absolute, see “Specifying absolute and relative addresses” on page 152. For more information about converting formulas to values, see “Viewing and converting formulas to values” on page 128.

218


Sorting spreadsheet data Quattro Pro provides two different sorting methods. For simple sorts, use the QuickSort tool. Use the Sort tool to perform complex sorts. When you sort data, make sure that you specify all the cells of each row you sort, otherwise the sorted fields appear mismatched. Quattro Pro sorts dates by their date serial numbers, and formulas by their results. To ensure numbers sort in numeric order, include leading zeros or spaces with numbers stored as labels. For example, enter the numbers ‘5 and ‘100, as ‘005 and ‘100 to sort them correctly. QuickSort — sorts your data in ascending or descending order according to the specified sort keys. Sort settings remain until you select a different set of sort keys. Sort tool — lets you use sort options. For example, you can sort data from left to right instead of top to bottom, or sort numbers last or blank cells first. Quattro Pro saves up to five previous sort settings so that you can redo a previous sort. You can also indicate which row contains your heading, or sort keys, and sort all rows beneath the heading row according to the selected sort options. Using the Undo option, you can undo a sort.

To sort using QuickSort 1 Select the cells to sort. 2 Hold down SHIFT+CTRL and click the column to use as the first sort key. To use a second sort key, click that column next, and so on. You can specify up to five sort keys. 3 Click a QuickSort button. The top button sorts in ascending order; the bottom button sorts in descending order. QuickSort saves the current sort settings until you select a different set of sort keys.

To sort using the Sort tool 1 Click any cell in your data, then click Tools, Sort. 2 Select the cells containing the data to sort (heading rows included in the sort selection do not sort).


219

3 If your data contains a heading row, enable the Selection Contains A Heading check box. 4 Select a sort key from the list box in the Top To Bottom section. 5 Enable the Ascending check box to sort a key in ascending order, or disable the Ascending check box to sort in the descending order. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each sort key you want to specify. 7 Click Options, and enable any of the following buttons: Left To Right — sorts across rows instead of down columns Sort Blank Cells First — sorts empty cells first Sort Numbers Last — sorts numbers in each sort field last Selection Contains A Heading — sorts using the heading row, (in the Heading Size section, select the row where the heading appears) 8 Click OK, then click Sort. By default, the data sorts by columns (top to bottom). If your data contains a heading row, Quattro Pro automatically uses that row of data as sort keys in the sort key list boxes, and enables the Selection Contains A Heading check box.

You can also select sort keys in the Top To Bottom section by double-clicking in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc. boxes of the Data Sort dialog box.

To reuse previous sort settings 1 Click Tools, Sort. 2 Select a sort setting from the list box in the Previous Sorts section. The Data Sort dialog box retains up to five previous sort settings at a time. Previous sort settings are saved with the notebook.

To undo the last sort operation Click Edit, Undo.

220


Preserving and restoring the original sort order You can preserve the original order of your data so that if you make an error while sorting it, you can restore its original order. You preserve the original order of the data by creating a numbered column in your spreadsheet before you begin sorting. The numbered column tracks the original order of the cells. You can restore your data’s original order by re-sorting your data using this numbered column as the sort key.

To preserve the original sort order 1 Insert an extra column in the sort area before sorting your data. 2 Click Edit, Fill, Fill Series to fill the column with consecutive numbers. 3 Select the cells in the new column to the end of your data set, in the Cells section. 4 Click OK.

To restore the original sort order 1 Select a cell in the numbered column created in the previous procedure. 2 Click the top (ascending) QuickSort button.

Filtering data Filters provide a quick way to work with a subset of column data. When you create a filter, Quattro Pro displays only the rows containing the values you specify, temporarily hiding other rows in the list. For example, you can filter a birthday list with columns for First Name, Last Name, Year, Month, and Day, to display only those people who were born in January. You can perform a simple data filter or customize your filter using the Top 10 or Custom filters. You can also sort columns alphabetically or numerically, in ascending or descending order using the QuickFilter tool. This examples sorts the data numerically by the middle column.


221

This example sorts the data alphabetically by the column on the right.

To create a sort order that you can customize and reuse, use the Sort tool. For information about using the Sort tool, see “Sorting spreadsheet data” on page 218. The filter buttons above each column let you select which sort or filter option to use. When you apply a filter to a column, the filter button above that column turns blue. You can specify different types of filters within one notebook. For example, in a column of income data, you can use the Top 10 filter to display the top 10% incomes. In a name column, you can create a Custom filter and specify names that begin with S. The filter results display only people in the top 10% income bracket whose names begin with S.

Using simple filters When you filter data, Quattro Pro assumes that the first row of data contains the heading and places the filter buttons in this row. If the data does not have a heading row, you can insert a blank row above the data at the top of your spreadsheet and set the filter buttons to display here. You use the QuickFilter tool to perform simple sorts or filters of rows of data. For example, you can sort a column in ascending or descending order, or filter the data to display only rows that contain blank cells in that column. You can also filter data by a single value. For example, in a personnel notebook, you can select Sales from a job description column to display only sales personnel. You can undo a column filter to show all the cells or you can turn off the QuickFilter feature altogether.

To display filter buttons above the data 1 Click any cell in the first row of data. 2 Click Insert, Row. 3 Click OK. 4 Select the blank row and the first row containing data. 5 Click Tools, QuickFilter.

222


To sort or filter data 1 Click in the data you want to sort or filter. 2 Click Tools QuickFilter. 3 Click the filter button on the column that you want to sort or filter. 4 Select one of the following sort or filtering options: Blanks — displays only rows that do not contain data in the sort or filter column Non Blank — displays only rows that contain data in the sort or filter column Sort (A-Z) — sorts the column rows in ascending order Sort (Z-A) — sorts the column rows in descending order

To filter by a single value 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure. 2 Choose the specific value from the QuickFilter list box.

To undo a column filter 1 Click the filter button in the column where you want to undo the filter. 2 Click Show All.

To turn off the QuickFilter tool Click Tools, QuickFilter.

Using Custom and Top 10 Filters You use the Top 10 filter to display rows in your data that contain specified upper or lower amounts, for example, the top 10% of a class. When using the Top 10 filter, the column where you create the filter must contain numeric values. Using the Custom filter, you can specify three conditions for filtering data. For example, you can choose to display items that begin with A, or B, or C. If you are filtering numeric values, you can choose to display values equal to, greater than, or less than a certain amount. For example, to display names that begin with A, B, or C, you would choose the following: begins with

A

Or


223

begins with

B

begins with

C

Or

To display only numbers between 50 and 100, you would choose the following: greater than or equal to less than or equal to

50

And

100

To use the Top 10 filter 1 Click in the data to filter. 2 Click Tools, QuickFilter. 3 Click the filter button on the column to sort or filter, then click Top 10. 4 Select Top or Bottom to specify either the top or bottom values or percentages, then specify a number. 5 Click Value to display a specific number of values, or click Percent to display a percentage of the values.

To use the Custom filter 1 Click in the data to filter. 2 Click Tools, QuickFilter. 3 Click the filter button on the column to sort or filter, then click Custom. 4 Choose a phrase from the list box on the left. 5 Choose an item or type a value (letter or number) from the center list box. 6 To specify more than one condition, choose either And or Or from the list box on the right, then specify another row of options. You can specify up to three filter conditions.

Consolidating data Consolidating data combines cells from different source areas into one location using @function operators. In addition to summing values, the Consolidator tool lets you choose from the following @functions: AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, and VARS. For example, you can add each item in a row of figures to the corresponding items in another row of figures. You can also use row or column labels to consolidate areas of equivalent data entered in different row and column orders. As long as the data has identical row and/or column labels, the Consolidator tool can combine it and sort the results in any order you specify.

224


This example shows the result of consolidating source data using the SUM operator.

The Consolidator tool lets you create and edit consolidation settings, or add or remove source cells. You can save each consolidation setting and reuse previous settings as required. If you no longer need a saved consolidation setting, you can delete it. If you work with a database, you can use the field names to automatically sort and then consolidate the data. While you can use the Consolidator tool to perform permanent calculations, its flexibility also makes it useful for data modeling. For more information about data modeling, see “Using the Scenario tool” on page 245. The Consolidator tool contains features similar to the Paste Special command; both tools let you combine data from separate source locations. For more information about the Paste Special feature, see “Using the Paste Special command” on page 173.

Performing and editing consolidations You perform and edit consolidations using the Consolidator tool. Consolidation results appear in destination cells, overwriting any existing data. By default, consolidation results are formulas.

To perform consolidations 1 Click Tools, Consolidate, New. 2 Select source cells (rows with rows, columns with columns), then click Add. Repeat for each set of source cells to consolidate. Click Browse to specify source cells in a different notebook. 3 Click Next, then specify an operator. 4 Click Next. 5 Specify destination cells in the Destination Cells block. 6 To match cells by label rather than position, click one or more label options in the Use Label From section, then click Next. 7 Enter a consolidation name in the Consolidation Name box.


225

To edit a consolidation setting 1 Click Tools, Consolidate, Edit. 2 Select the consolidation setting to edit in the Consolidations section. 3 Edit the consolidation setting. 4 Click Consolidate to perform the new consolidation, or click Close to exit. If the destination area is smaller than the source areas, results are limited to the size of the destination area. When the source and destination areas have different dimensions, the Consolidator tool combines equivalent cells when possible. Cells without equivalent dimensions are handled differently depending on the operator. You can type labels in the destination cells or leave them blank and follow the label order of the first source. If you click both column and row labels, the Consolidator tool matches column labels first, then matches row labels within columns.

Adding and removing consolidation source cells You can add or remove consolidation source cells in a saved consolidation setting. You can add both contiguous or noncontiguous source cells.

To add consolidation source cells 1 Click Tools, Consolidate, Edit. 2 In the Consolidations section, select the consolidation setting you want to edit. 3 Click the Add button. 4 Enter the source cells in the Source Cells box. Click the Browse button to select cells in another notebook. Hold down CTRL to select noncontiguous source cells. 5 Click OK. Quattro Pro treats each noncontiguous source cell selection as a separate entry. If you select 3-D source cells, the Consolidator tool treats the selection on each sheet separately and combines each selection with those on the other sheets.

226


To remove source cells 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure. 2 Select the source cells you want to remove from the list and click the Remove button.

Reusing consolidation settings Quattro Pro saves consolidation settings with your notebook so if you make changes to your document and want to reconsolidate your data, you can reuse previous consolidation settings.

To reuse a consolidation setting 1 Click Tools, Consolidate, Edit. 2 Choose the name of the consolidation setting, from the Consolidations list box, then click the Consolidate button. Quattro Pro combines the current contents of the source cells; new results appear in the destination area or areas. To save a “snapshot” of consolidation source and destination cell contents, click Tools, Scenario, Edit, Capture before performing the consolidation. For more information about Scenarios, see “Using the Scenario tool” on page 245.

Deleting consolidation settings Quattro Pro lets you delete consolidation settings you no longer need.

To delete a consolidation setting 1 Click Tools, Consolidate, Edit. 2 Choose the name of the consolidation setting from the Consolidations list box. 3 Click Delete.

Working with outlines An outline summarizes data in part or all of a notebook. The Outline tool sorts row or column cells in groups to show summary cells,such as totals and averages, while hiding detail cells. For example, if you have an organization with several departments and each employee within each department Organizing and manipulating data

227

contributes a standard amount to charity each year, you can automatically create an outline to display only the total amount (summary cells) contributed by each department. The Outline tool hides each employee contribution (detail cells) showing only the total amount per department. Combining detail cells with the associated summary cells forms an outline group. You can use the Outline tool to create outline groups automatically, based on the summary cells within your spreadsheet, or manually, by selecting the detail and summary cells to include in each outline group. You can specify the row or column location of the summary cells in the outline. You can also add and remove outline groups, or expand and collapse them within your outline. Quattro Pro also lets you format, sort, and print your outline.

Creating an outline automatically Before you can automatically create an Outline, your notebook must contain detail cells that are summarized in summary cells. For example, a summary cell may contain an organization’s total revenue, and a detail cell may contain individual employee contributions to the total revenue. Once you have created detail and summary cells, select the Auto Outline tool. You can create an outline manually if the rows and columns of summary cells contain values instead of formulas, if summary cells are not adjacent to detail cells, or if you want to add more outline groups. For more information about creating outlines manually, see “Creating an outline manually” on page 228.

To create an outline automatically 1 Add a formula or formulas that summarize data cells in adjacent rows or columns in a notebook. For example, add a column of totals next to the cells you want to total. 2 Click any cell in the notebook. 3 Click Tools, Outline, Auto Outline. The Outline indicators in the panel on the side or top of the notebook show each outline group.

Creating an outline manually You have the option to manually create an outline if the rows and columns of summary cells contain values instead of formulas, or summary cells are not adjacent to detail cells,. When selecting cells for an outline group, select cells in the rows or columns and make sure to include the summary row or column cells. Hold down CTRL to select multiple noncontiguous cells.

228


To create an outline manually 1 Add summary data cells in rows or columns in your spreadsheet. 2 Select the cells for the outline group, including the summary cells. 3 Click Tools, Outline, Group. 4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 until you create all the outline groups required. You can create groups, using the Outline Toolbar, by selecting the rows or columns and clicking the Group button until you finish creating all outline groups for your outline. The Outline indicators located in the outline panel on the side or top of the notebook identify expanded outline groups.

Positioning outline summary cells Quattro Pro lets you specify where to position outline summary cells in the spreadsheet.

To position outline summary cells 1 Click Tools, Outline, Options. 2 Select the location to display the row and column summary cells. To position the outline summary cells using the Outline Toolbar, click the Outline Options button. The Summary indicator, which appears in each outline group in the outline panel on the side or top of the notebook, shows the location (in what row or column) of the summary cells for the outline group.

Grouping cells in an outline Once you create an outline, you can group the cells in the outline . Outline groups can include other outline groups. For example, if column C contains subtotals for columns A-B, column E contains subtotals for columns A-D, and column G contains grand totals of columns A-F, you can create outline groups for columns A-C, A-E, and A-G. When creating multilevel outline groups, select all of the detail and summary cells that make up each outline group level.


229

This example shows a multilevel outline containing outline groups within other outline groups.

You can also remove all outline groups from a spreadsheet within your notebook.

To group or ungroup outline cells 1 Click Tools, Outline, Show Outline Toolbar. 2 Select the row or column cells to group or ungroup, including the summary cells. 3 Click Tools, Outline. 4 Choose one of the following: Group — combines selected cells into a group Ungroup — separates a group into individual cells 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you finish grouping or ungrouping the required cells. You can also group or ungroup cells using the Outline Toolbar. Select the appropriate rows or columns, and click either the Group or Ungroup button. When selecting cells to group or ungroup, include the summary row or column cells. Hold down the CTRL button to select noncontiguous cells.

To remove all outline groups from the current sheet Click Tools, Outline, Ungroup All. To remove all outline groups on the current sheet using the Outlining Tools toolbar, click the Ungroup All button.

230


Expanding and collapsing outline groups Expanding or collapsing an outline group lets you show or hide the detail cells for that group. In a multilevel outline, you can expand or collapse the outline groups in a specific level using the Outline Level indicators on the outline panel. The outline panel is located on the side or top of the spreadsheet. All data below the level you expand or collapse is either displayed or hidden on your spreadsheet. You can also choose to show or hide the outline panel as well as the Outline toolbar.

To expand or collapse an outline group 1 Select the outline group you want to expand or collapse, then click Tools, Outline. 2 Choose one of the following: Expand Group — expands details of the currently collapsed outline group Collapse Group — collapses details of the currently expanded outline group To expand or collapse the outline group using the Outlining Tools toolbar, select the outline group you want to expand or collapse, then click the Show Group or Hide Group button. To expand or collapse the outline groups using the outline panel indicators on the side or top of the notebook, click either the Plus indicator to show all data cells, or the Minus indicator to show only the summary cells in an outline group.

To expand or collapse a level of outline groups In the outline panel, click the row or column level to expand or collapse. To undo the expanded or collapsed level click the appropriate row or column level indicator again.

To show or hide the outline panel Click Tools, Outline, Show Outline.


231

To show or hide the outline panel using the Outlining Tools toolbar, click the Show Outline button.

To show or hide the Outline toolbar Click Tools, Outline, Show Outline Toolbar.

Formatting and sorting an outline You can apply a predesigned format to cells in an outline and sort expanded or collapsed outline groups. For more information about formatting, see “Using the QuickFormat and SpeedFormat tools” on page 175. For more information about sorting data, see “Sorting spreadsheet data” on page 218.

To apply a predesigned format to cells in an outline 1 Select the outline cells to format. 2 Click Format, SpeedFormat. 3 Choose a format in the Format section. 4 Deselect any properties you do not want applied to the cells. 5 Deselect any options (e.g. column headings, row headings) that you do not want included in the format. 6 Click OK. To apply a predesigned format using the Outlining Tools toolbar, click the SpeedFormat button.

To sort an outline group Follow all of the steps from the “To sort using the Sort tool” procedure. Collapsed outline groups sort even though they are hidden in the spreadsheet. To verify the sorted data, expand the outline group.

Printing an outline Quattro Pro lets you print an outline to show as much or as little data as necessary. For example, you can choose to show only summary data on your

232


printed outline. For more information about printing, see “Printing” on page 471.

To print an outline 1 Expand or collapse the outline groups to show or hide in your printout. 2 Click File, Print.


233

ANALYZING DATA

9

After you have entered, edited, and formatted data, you can perform many powerful functions to summarize your data, answer specific questions, or solve problems. Quattro Pro has many statistical, numerical, and financial analysis tools you can use to analyze and summarize your data. For example, you can perform advanced regression analysis, compile descriptive statistics, find the moving average, or construct an amortization schedule for your mortgage. Using the Scenario Manager, you can examine your data from many different angles and find out how your results will change when different variables are modified. For instance, you can discover how a home-construction budget would be affected if the price of lumber increased, or if interest rates fell. Similarly, the What-If feature shows you the results of substituting a number of values for one or two variables. Solve For allows you to specify the result you want, and Quattro Pro demonstrates how to reach it.

Using statistical analysis tools With Quattro Pro, you can perform a number of advanced statistical, numerical, and financial analysis tasks. You can access any of the following statistical analysis tools by clicking Tools, Numeric Tools, Analysis. The Analysis Expert will guide you through the steps you must perform. Before you use an analysis tool, make sure the input cells you are analyzing are arranged properly and contain numeric data, not strings. The analysis tools have varying restrictions on the contents of the input cells and size of the cell area. Analyzing data

235

Advanced Regression Amortization Table ANOVA: One-Way ANOVA: Two-Way with Replication ANOVA: Two-Way without Replication Correlation Covariance Descriptive Statistics Exponential Smoothing Fourier F-Test Histogram Mortgage Refinancing Moving Average Random Number Rank and Percentile Sampling t-Test Z-Test

Interpreting an amortization table The amortization table tool lets you generate an amortization schedule, showing principal and interest payments, as well as interest paid from start to date and from year to date. The table created by the amortization table tool consists of two sections. The top section is the input section of the table in which you enter values about your mortgage. You can change any of these input values to customize the bottom section of the table.

236

Column name

Description

Interest Rate

The annual interest rate of the loan

Term

Number of years of the loan, not the number of payments

Original Balance

Money originally borrowed


Ending Balance

The amount of principal remaining to pay off at the end of the loan

Last Year

The number of years to show in the table

1st PMT

The first payment date for the mortgage

The bottom section of the table consists of 10 columns: Column name

Description

Pmt #

Number of payments from the first payment to the last payment of the loan or the last one in the last year specified by Last Year

Date

Date on which the corresponding payment number is due. Mortgage payments are typically due on the first day of the month following the month covered by the payment. The default date format is Month-Year (MMM-YY).

Yr Rate

Equivalent yearly interest rate for the period; for fixed-rate loans, this rate does not change; for variable rate loans, specify an estimated average interest rate when you create the table, then replace individual monthly rate values later by overwriting the calculated values.

P&I Payment

Shows the principal and interest payment for the corresponding payment period. This will not vary for fixed loans, but will vary with variable interest loans or other variable loans such as graduated payment loans. In the case of “graduated payment” loans, you can type in the actual P&I payment to replace the calculated value. Even if this results in a negative amortization, the New Balance and other columns calculate correctly. Negative amortization occurs when the P&I payment is insufficient to cover the interest charged for the period, and so the loan balance increases by the shortage amount.

Principal

Principal portion of the P&I payment

Interest

Interest portion of the P&I payment

Extra Prin

Amount of extra principal per pay period. If you intend to pay extra principal for some portion of the loan, enter the amount in this column at the row of the corresponding payment number. The extra principal amount is included in every row that follows. If extra principal payments vary from month to month, type in the actual extra principal amount wherever it changes.

New Balance

Balance after each payment. The balance decreases with each payment and eventually reaches zero (or Ending Balance, if it is not zero). The amortization table stops short of zero if Last Year precedes the end of the loan.

Analyzing data

237

Cum. Interest

Cumulative interest paid through the corresponding payment

Yearly Total Int

Cumulative interest paid for each calendar year. Use this column to calculate the yearly interest paid for tax purposes.

Interpreting a mortgage refinancing table The mortgage refinancing table provides you with information about refinancing a mortgage and lets you compare your current loan with candidate loans. The mortgage refinancing table consists of two sections: the Current Loan section and the Candidate Loans section. The Current Loan section takes information about your present mortgage from the Analysis Experts dialog box. Column name

Description

Rem. Term

The number of years remaining on the loan, not the number of payments

Balance

The remaining principal to pay off in the current loan

Rate

The annual interest rate of the current loan

Candidate Loan Rate

The annual interest rate of the proposed loan

Fees

The amount of percentage fees for the proposed loan

The Candidate Loans section takes information about the rates and terms of different mortgages from the Analysis Experts dialog box. The table calculates the gross savings by showing how different the monthly payment is for the candidate loan compared to the current loan. It also calculates the net savings, by determining the amount of money saved. The Candidate Loans section of the table consists of 19 columns:

238

Column name

Description

Loan Description

Name of the candidate loan

Current Balance

Balance of the current loan

Cash Out

Cash removed from equity (a positive value), or cash paid up front into the loan to pay down the balance or to prevent financing or loan fees (a negative value)

Pct Fees

Percentage fees (points) charged by the lender (for example, 1.75%)

Fixed Fees

Fixed fees involved in the refinancing; if a loss (for example, a loan prepayment penalty), enter a positive value; if a gain (for example, a prorated return of prepaid Private Mortgage Insurance from payoff of current loan), enter a negative number

Loan Amount

Amount of the candidate loan


Rate

Annual interest rate of the candidate loan

Term (yrs)

Loan term in years

Future Value

Future value of the candidate loan; enter a positive value if the loan requires a balloon payment

P&I Payment

Principal and interest payment for each period

Fixed mo. Loan Fees

Fixed monthly loan fees (such as private mortgage insurance)

Loan Pmt

Monthly payment (Loan Pmt = P&I Payment + Fixed Mo. Loan Fees)

Savings: Gross

The difference in the monthly payment of the candidate loan and the current loan; if negative, the candidate’s monthly payment is higher; if positive, the candidate’s monthly payment is lower and all gross savings are applied as extra principal

Savings: Term +/-

Portion of gross savings due to lengthening the term of the loan; if the term is lengthened, Term +/- is negative; if the term is shortened, Term +/- is positive

Savings: Cash I/O

Portion of gross savings due to closing costs paid up front (a negative number), or the amount of gross savings that has already been reduced by cash taken out (a positive number enclosed by “><”, which does not affect the Net amount)

Savings: Net

Sum of savings from Gross, Term +/-, and Cash I/O

Payback: When

The initial estimate of the number of years it will take for the candidate loan to pay for the cost of refinancing; displays “Never” if the refinance loses money

Payback: Loan Life

The number of years you plan to keep the property before selling it or refinancing

Payback: Bal chg

The difference in the balance at the end of Loan Life of the candidate loan and the current loan due to extra principal paid on the candidate loan; a negative number represents money saved

Creating a mortgage refinancing table With Quattro Pro, you can create a mortgage refinancing table that provides information about refinancing a mortgage and lets you compare your current loan with other candidate loans.

To create a mortgage refinancing table 1 In the Equivalent P&I cell of the Current Loan section, overwrite the value with your actual monthly principal and interest if you have paid extra principal at any time during the current loan.

Analyzing data

239

2 In the Future Value cell of the Current Loan section, type a value if the mortgage requires a balloon payment. 3 In the Fixed mo. Loan Fees cell of the Current Loan section, type any loan-related fixed monthly fees, such as private mortgage insurance. Do not include taxes or hazard insurance fees, which are not loan-related. 4 Type values in the following boxes of the Candidate Loans section: Cash Out Pct Fees Fixed Fees Rate Term Future Value Fixed mo. Loan Fees All other values in the Candidate Loans section of the table are calculated. 5 In the Loan Life cell of the Payback section, type a value to indicate the number of years you plan to keep the candidate loan before selling or refinancing. Payback occurs when the balance of the candidate loan would be equal to that of the current loan; that is, when Bal Chg equals zero, for equal comparison of the loans, any cash put into the candidate loan is alternatively considered a lump sum extra principal on the current loan. When you create the table, any savings that result from refinancing are automatically used to pay extra principal for the life of the candidate loan.

You can accurately determine the payback period by trying alternate estimates in the Loan Life column until Bal Chg is near zero. Bal Chg is a negative number when Loan Life is greater than the payback period. To compare several candidate loans with the current loan, copy the row for the first candidate loan into one or more rows below it, then enter information for each loan.

Using frequency distribution tables A frequency distribution is a table indicating the values that a variable can take on and the frequency with which each value occurs. For example, you

240


can ask for the number of times that numbers between two and five appear in a given block of cells. You can supplement the statistical information in your notebook with appropriate spreadsheet functions. For example, you can include these formulas at the end of the weekly sales figures contained in a selection named SALES: @SUM(SALES)

Calculates total sales

@COUNT(SALES)

Calculates the number of sales in the column

@AVG(SALES)

Calculates the average sales amount

Creating a frequency distribution table With Quattro Pro, you can create a frequency distribution table. To create a frequency distribution table, you need one or more areas of values to count and bin cells listing the value intervals, or bins, for each count. Bin cells contain the range of intervals you want analyzed. The bin must be a single column with a column of blank cells to its right, where the results will be written.

To create a frequency distribution table 1 Enter values in a bin of ranges to analyze in a single column. 2 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Frequency. 3 Select the Value Cells. 4 Select the Bin Cells. The bin cell ranges must be in ascending order. The results display to the right of the Bin Cells.

To set up frequency bin cells Click Edit, Fill, Fill Series. Numbers must appear in ascending order, from top to bottom of the column.

Analyzing data

241

Each value in the bin cells represents all values from it down to the previous value. The first value represents any value less than or equal to itself. The result area will be one cell longer than the bin cells. The last cell contains the number of values found that were greater than the final number in the bin.

To create an XY chart of a frequency distribution, specify the bin cells as the x-axis series and the results as the first series of values. For information about working with XY charts, see “Working with XY charts” on page 328.

Using regression analysis Regression analysis shows the relationship between a set of independent variables and one dependent variable. It can answer the question “To what extent can a dependent variable, grade point average for example, be explained and predicted by one or more independent variables, such as credit hours and work hours?” The relationship between dependent and independent variables is a linear estimate. With one independent variable, regression analysis plots a line of best fit, also called a regression line, through a scatter plot of each independent-dependent value pair. Because regressions assume a linear relationship, your results will be more accurate if your data closely matches a linear model. To help you determine accuracy, the regression table includes two standard error estimates. For information about the regression output cells, see “Understanding regression output cells” on page 242.

Understanding regression output cells The regression output is nine rows deep and three columns wider than the number of columns in the independent cells. Make sure to leave enough blank space because any underlying data will be overwritten. The output cells contain the following information:

242

Output Cell

Description

Constant

The y-intercept value, zero if Y Intercept is set to Zero instead of Compute

Std Err of Y Est

The estimated standard error of y values; the degree of deviation of observed y values from predicted values


R Squared

The variance; the degree of relationship between independent and dependent variables. With one independent variable, R Squared is the square of the correlation between the two variables.

No. of Observations

The number of values for each variable; the number of rows in the regression table

Degrees of Freedom

The number of observations minus the number of independent values being computed by the regression. With Y Intercept set to Zero, Degrees of Freedom = (No. of Observations) - (number of independent variables); with Y Intercept computed, Degrees of Freedom = (No. of Observations) - (number of independent variables + 1).

X Coefficient(s)

The regression coefficients of the independent (x) variables; the slope of the regression line representing the relationship between each independent variable and the dependent variable.

Std Err of Coef.

An error estimate of the X Coefficient above it. Interpret each coefficient as the X Coefficient value plus or minus the Standard Error of Coefficient.

Performing regression analysis You can create a regression analysis table showing how sets of independent variables affect a certain set of dependent variables. Regression analysis answers the question “To what extent can one or more independent variables explain and predict a dependent variable?” For example, you can estimate how the number of hours worked affects production, or how advertising expenditures affect sales.

To perform regression analysis 1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Regression. 2 Select the column of dependent data. 3 Select the column(s) of independent data. 4 Select the upper left cell of the output cells where you want Quattro Pro to write the regression information. The data cells you compare in regression analysis must have an equal number of rows. Regression tables are not automatically updated. If you alter the values in the independent and dependent cells, click Tools, Numeric Tools, Regression to see the new results.

Analyzing data

243

Enable the Zero button if you want to force the y-intercept to zero.

Using matrix operations A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers. Each column in the matrix corresponds to one variable, and each row corresponds to a linear constraint. Quattro Pro can multiply two matrices or invert a matrix. Matrix operations can help you solve sets of linear formulas and equations. For example, suppose you have these four unique equations describing variables w, x, y, and z: 1w+1x+2y+3z=10 3w+2x+2y+1z=20 1w+0x+3y+4z=15 1w+1x+0y+1z=6 You can express the coefficients of these equations (the numbers multiplying the variables w, x, y, and z) in this “4 by 4" coefficient matrix: 1123 3221 1034 1101 And you can express the results in this “4 by 1" constant matrix (the first variable is at the top of the list, the second is next, and so on): 10 20 15 6 You can use matrix multiplication and inversion to find the value of each variable in the second matrix that satisfies the constraints in the first matrix.

Multiplying two matrices Matrix multiplication is helpful when you need to multiply the elements of one matrix by the elements of a second and sum their products. For example, matrix multiplication can combine several types of building materials across development phases, or it can compute job costs involving different labor categories.

244


To multiply two matrices 1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Multiply. 2 Specify Matrix 1, the first matrix you want to multiply. 3 Specify Matrix 2, the second matrix. 4 Specify the Destination, the top left cell of the area where you want to write the resulting matrix. The number of columns in the first matrix must equal the number of rows in the second matrix.

Inverting a matrix Matrix inversion is the first step in solving sets of linear equations. When you multiply a matrix by its inverse, the resultant matrix is an identity matrix (all 1s and 0s, with only a single diagonal of 1s). You cannot invert a matrix that is mathematically singular. A matrix is singular when its determinant equals zero. You cannot invert a matrix with mathematical redundancies or inconsistencies. You can use invert with “square” matrices only. A square matrix is one with the same number of rows and columns.

To invert a matrix 1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Invert. 2 Select the Source cells, the matrix cells you want to invert. 3 Select the Destination cells, the upper left cell of the cells where you want to write the inverted matrix. You can invert matrices up to 90 rows by 90 columns. If you specify the same cells as the invert cells, the inverted matrix overwrites the existing matrix.

Using the Scenario tool Scenarios are snapshots of data models. A data model is a set of formulas designed to simulate real life situations and conditions. Scenarios show changing data or variable values plugged into a model and the values that result. For example, a worst-case scenario shows what you can expect from the least desirable set of variable values; a best-case scenario uses the most Analyzing data

245

desirable values as input. Scenarios are often used to find the optimum solution to a problem. For a powerful and interactive approach to scenario analysis, use the Scenario Manager. It highlights value changes for new data, so it is easy to compare and summarize scenarios. At any time you can name and save scenario variations in report form. The Scenario Manager tracks two types of scenario cells: changing cells, which generally contain new data entries, and result cells, which are formula cells that reference the changing cells. When you save a scenario and generate a Scenario Summary Report, the report includes values in all the shaded cells. When you work with groups of scenarios, you can compare different parts of a problem theme. Before using scenarios, you should create a data model. Enter formulas in your notebook spreadsheet and add any supporting data. Choose how much of the notebook to include in the scenario group: cells, a spreadsheet, or the entire notebook. Choose which information to change with each different scenario. These are the changing cells. Determine which formula cells reference the changing cells and contain the results you are interested in. These are the result cells.

Creating and displaying scenarios You can use the Scenario Manager to help determine the best possible solution to a problem. Once you plan your data model, you can create and display scenarios. The Scenario Summary Report shows you how your changing data affects the results. Each time you add a scenario, its changing and result cell values are stored. You can view and print them whenever you want. If you have checked a labels option or named each changing and result cell, a label or name displays next to each value in the Scenario Summary Report.

To create scenarios 1 Click a cell containing data. 2 Click Tools, Scenario, New. 3 Select your data cells. 4 Click Next. 5 Type a name in the Scenario name field. 6 Type a value for each changing cell in the Changing Cells And Their Values field. 7 Click Add Scenario.

246


8 Click Next. 9 Click Show Scenario. When you highlight a scenario in the list and click Show Scenario, the values for that scenario display in the notebook. You can drag the Expert window to a new location to view all scenario cells. You can click Create Report to see a Scenario Summary Report. By default, changing cells are yellow; result cells are green.

To display scenarios 1 Click a cell containing data. 2 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 3 Click a scenario name in the Scenarios list. If you have several scenario groups, select the target group in the Scenario Groups list before you select the scenario. When you display a scenario, its changing cell and result cell values replace those currently on-screen. You can change the contents of any cell with standard editing procedures.

To display a Scenario Summary Report 1 Click a cell containing data. 2 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 3 Click Report. 4 Enable any of the following options in the Scenario Report dialog box: Report all scenario groups — displays a report for each scenario group, not just the active group Use cell labels from the left — identifies scenario cells with text in cells immediately to their left Use cell labels from above — identifies scenario cells with text above them

Analyzing data

247

Find Empty Sheet — places the report on the first empty spreadsheet in the notebook Insert report at — places the report on a spreadsheet that you specify

Editing scenarios After you plan your data model and decide which variables will affect the outcome, you can edit the data model as many times as you want. You can also save the scenario you have edited by giving it a new name or overwriting the active scenario. You can also highlight the changed and result cells with color to help you understand how the scenario is affecting your data.

To edit scenarios 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Click the Settings button in the Scenario Manager dialog box to set a capture area. Sheet is the default, but you can choose Notebook or Cells. 3 Name and save the scenario baseline. 4 Name, save, and edit the scenario. 5 Rename the scenario. Group1 is the default. You can click Report to view the Scenario Summary Report.

To save edits to the active scenario 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Click the Capture button. 3 Type the name of the active scenario in the Capture Scenario As dialog box to replace it with current cells and values. You can type another name to replace another existing scenario or create a new one. Changes appear in the Scenario Summary Report when you click the Report button.

248


To highlight changed and result cells with color 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Click the Highlight button in the Scenario Manager dialog box. 3 Click a color square in the color selection pane for Changed and Result cells. By default, changed cells are yellow on color monitors; result cells are green. Disable the Highlight changes to the Base Scenario check box if you do not want the changed and result cells to be highlighted with color.

Tracking scenario edits With the Scenario Manager, you can track versions of your scenarios and view previous versions. If you have been editing anywhere in the capture area, save the current version in the Scenario Manager before you display a previous version. Otherwise, edits may be lost. You can restore an unsaved scenario as long as no edits have been made since you displayed the current scenario.

To track versions using the Scenario Manager 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Click the Settings button. 3 In the Scenario Group Settings dialog box, select the Capture Area to suit your tracking needs; keep the area as small as possible, but remember that changes outside that area will not be recorded. 4 Click Close. 5 Click the Capture button to set the baseline. 6 Make changes in the capture area until you are ready to save a version, then click Capture again and enter a new version name. If you want to track changes in cell attributes such as shading or fonts, click Highlight and disable Highlight changes to Base Scenario to turn highlighting off while you are editing. 7 Continue editing and saving versions until your work session is over. Be sure to save a final version before you close the Scenario Manager dialog box.

Analyzing data

249

To view previous versions of cells, a spreadsheet, or a notebook 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Choose the target group in the Scenario Groups list if it is not active already, then choose the target version from the Scenarios list.

Changing scenario edits The Scenario Manager allows you to verify or change the area where scenario changes are tracked, either in the notebook, on the page, or in specific cells. You can also change the scenario baseline using Capture. Capture acts like a camera that takes a snapshot of current data in the capture area.

To verify or change the area where changes are tracked 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Click the Settings button. 3 Enable a Capture Area option: Notebook — tracks changes within the entire notebook. Set Capture Area to Notebook only if you are interested in tracking changing and result cells across several spreadsheets and do not intend to use the notebook for anything else but storing related scenarios. Sheet — tracks changes in the active spreadsheet. Choose Sheet if you will be changing data on a single spreadsheet but do not want to specify where. Choose Sheet for most purposes. Cells — tracks changes in the specified cells (2-D or 3-D). If you edit data in the capture area, then display an existing scenario, any changes not yet saved to a scenario are lost — unless you immediately click Edit, Undo to restore them. Choose a capture area carefully to avoid possible data loss or extra changing and result cells; the capture area applies to all scenarios in the current group. If you choose Notebook, scenario changes are tracked and displayed on all spreadsheets except the Scenarios spreadsheet and Objects spreadsheet. Use this setting carefully to avoid unexpected results. For example, suppose you change spreadsheet B, save a scenario, change spreadsheet C, then display the scenario you last saved. All data on spreadsheet B appears but the changes on spreadsheet C disappear.

250


To change the scenario baseline 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Click the Capture button. 3 Type a name in the Scenario Name edit field. The default baseline name is Base Scenario. All changes within the capture area are tracked until you save another scenario. The Scenario Manager tracks value changes against a baseline. If you are working with an empty notebook, enter any labels and formulas before you set the baseline. If you will be changing data that is already in the notebook, set the baseline before you start the changes.

Deleting scenarios Once you have finished your work session, you can delete a scenario. If you are viewing the Scenario Summary Report when you delete a scenario, it still displays until you click the Report button to update the report.

To delete scenarios 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Click a name in the Scenarios list. 3 Click the Delete button. If the scenario is in another scenario group, choose the group name in the Scenario Groups list before step 2.

Adding, renaming, and deleting scenario groups A set of scenarios is called a group. Each notebook can have as many scenario groups as you need, each with its own baseline. If you want to compare several scenarios, you can add a scenario to a group of existing scenarios, or you can rename a scenario if it helps you better understand how you use it. When your comparison is finished, you can delete a scenario group.

To add scenarios to a group of existing scenarios 1 Type new values in the changing cells. Analyzing data

251

2 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 3 Click the Capture button. 4 Type the new scenario name in the Scenario Name edit field. 5 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you have added as many scenarios as you want. They are saved permanently when you save the notebook.

To rename a scenario group 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Click the Settings button. 3 Click one of the following buttons: New — lets you add a new scenario group Rename — lets you rename a scenario group Delete — lets you delete a scenario group

To delete a scenario group 1 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit. 2 Select the group in the Scenario Groups list. 3 Click the Delete button.

Using What-If tables What-If tables show the results of substituting a number of values for one or two variables in a formula. Also called sensitivity tables, What-If tables can answer questions such as “What if my company’s expenses increase 10%, 20%, 30%? And, what if production increases 10% to 25% at the same time?” What-If tables can also be used to look up values, such as postal charges for different parcel weights. You can create basic tables that use data you supply, or you can use tables that refer to data already entered in the notebook.

Creating one-variable What-If tables You can create one-variable What-If tables by varying a single value that is referenced by one or more What-If formulas. You can build a basic table that uses only the data you supply, or you can build a table that refers to data already entered in the spreadsheet. Each formula is calculated using the values in the substitution column, and the column below each formula is filled in with calculated values.

252


To create one-variable What-If tables 1 Type a column of values to substitute in one or more formulas. (This will be the left column of the table.) 2 Type one or more formulas in the row above the first substitution value, starting in the column to the right. These formulas must refer to a blank cell (the input cell), which can be any cell outside the table. 3 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, What-If. 4 Enable the One Free Variable button. 5 Select the What-If Table cells containing both formulas and substitution values. 6 Select the Input Cell, the blank cell referenced in the formulas. 7 Click the Generate button.

To create a What-If table to display results of numeric scenarios 1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, What-If. 2 Click the Expert button in the What-If dialog box. 3 Follow the steps in the What-If expert.

Creating two-variable What-If tables Two-variable What-If tables show the results of varying two values in a What-If formula. You can build a basic table that uses only the data you supply, or you can build a table that refers to data already entered in the spreadsheet.

To create two-variable What-If tables 1 Type a column of substitution values. 2 In the row above and to the right of the substitution column, enter a second set of substitution values. 3 In the top left cell of the table, enter the formula to be used in calculating table values. It should refer to two blank cells. 4 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, What-If. 5 Enable the Two Free Variables button. 6 Select the What-If table cells, including the formula and both substitution ranges.

Analyzing data

253

7 Select the Column Input Cell and Row Input Cell, the two blank cells referenced in the What-If formula. 8 Click the Generate button.

Using goal seeking with the Solve For tool The Solve For feature lets you calculate a formula backward, starting with the result and solving for a variable that produces that result. You specify the result you want, then indicate which variable can be adjusted to reach that result. Instead of calculating an optimum solution, the Solve For feature changes a single variable to reach the solution you specify.

Performing goal seeking using the Solve For tool When you know the result you want, but aren’t sure how to reach it, use the Solve For feature to help you find the answer.

To perform goal seeking using Solve For 1 Enter the formula to solve; it should reference one variable cell. 2 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Solve For. 3 Select the cell containing the formula in the Formula Cell edit field. 4 Type the result you want from the formula, or reference a cell containing the target in the Target Value edit field. 5 Select the the cell that can be varied to achieve the result you want in the Variable Cell edit field. You can change the calculation options. Max Iterations determines how many passes from one to 1000 Solve For can make to solve the formula. The default is five. Accuracy specifies how close Solve For must get to the Target Value. The default is 0.0005.

Finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems The Solve For feature allows you to substitute values in a single formula to meet a specified goal. However, you can use the Optimizer if you need to find optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems. With the Optimizer, you can evaluate formulas with one or more variables

254


solve sets of linear and nonlinear equations and inequalities find a minimum or maximum solution, or meet an exact goal find values that satisfy problem limits, or constraints Once you define a problem, you can save Optimizer settings for future use. You can also print reports of interim and final problem solutions.

Solving a problem with the Optimizer tool To solve a problem with Optimizer, you can maximize or minimize a single formula, make it meet a target value, or solve a set of equations or inequalities. You must first define the problem and assign a cell to each variable in the problem. If you are solving a set of expressions, add them as constraints. You can also enter constraints when goal seeking to set upper and lower limits for the Solution Cell formula.

To solve a problem with the Optimizer tool 1 Enter a single formula into a cell. The formula should reference any variable cells you have assigned. 2 If you are solving a set of expressions, enter their left terms into cells. You can enter the right term into adjacent cells, or you can enter the value into the Optimizer directly when adding constraints. 3 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Optimizer. 4 If you have a goal-seeking problem with one formula, enter its location in the Solution Cell input box. Enable one of the following buttons: Max — maximizes the formula Min — minimizes the formula None — chooses a default solution cell Target Value — makes the solution cell formula reach an exact value 5 Type the variable cell or cells in the Variable Cell(s) input box. You can enter them as a selection (A1..A4) or as lists (A1, B1, C1). You can assign up to 200 variable cells. Variable cells must not contain dates, formulas, or text, and they must not be protected.

Analyzing data

255

Entering an optimizer constraint Constraints are conditions that serve as problem limits, or the range of acceptable values. All constraints must be met before an answer is considered acceptable.

To enter an optimizer constraint 1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Optimizer. 2 Click the Add button. 3 In the Cell edit field, enter a cell containing a formula that must be bounded, or that must equal a target value. You can select a single cell, or select cells that must all have the same bound. 4 Enable the operator that connects both terms of the constraint and describes their relationship: less than or equal to (<=), equal to (=), greater than or equal to (>=), or Integer (cell must be a whole number). 5 In the Constant edit field, type a value for the target or bound, or specify a cell that contains a value. You can specify a selection of cells equal to or larger than the number of cells included on the left side of the constraint. Each cell on the left is compared with the corresponding cell on the right. A single cell on the left is compared with the upper left cell of the cells on the right. To edit a constraint, select it in the Optimizer dialog box, then click the Change button. To delete a constraint, select it in the Optimizer dialog box, then click the Delete button.

Saving an optimizer model Once you define a problem, you can save Optimizer settings for future use.

To save an optimizer model 1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Optimizer. 2 Click Options. 3 Click Save Model. 4 Select cells to hold the model in the Save Model dialog box.

256


The cells must be three columns wide, with enough rows to hold the model. You can select the cell in the upper left corner of the cells. The last Optimizer problem you defined is always saved with the note.

Reusing an optimizer model After you have saved an Optimizer solution, you can reuse it.

To reuse an optimizer model 1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Optimizer. 2 Click the Options button. 3 Click the Load Model button. 4 Select the cells containing the model you want to use.

Producing an optimizer report With Quattro Pro, you can produce an Optimizer report. The Optimizer report shows how well the constraints were met and indicates starting and final values for the solution cell starting and final values for the variable cells value, binding, slack, and dual value for the constraints Slack is the difference between the constraint constant value, or, Right Value and the value actually used in the solution. Variable dual values are sometimes called reduced gradients. They show how a one-unit increase in the variable affects the solution cell. Constraint dual values, or Lagrange Multipliers, measure the amount by which the solution could be improved if the constraint were relaxed by one unit. Increment for variable cells is the amount of increase in the Gradient value before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For constraint cells, Increment is the amount of increase in the Right Value before the binding status changes. Decrement for variable cells is the amount of decrease in the Gradient value before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For constraint cells, Decrement is the amount of decrease in the Right Value before the binding status changes.

Analyzing data

257

If you enable the Assume Linear Model button in the Optimizer Options dialog box, the Optimizer report also indicates Gradient, Increment, and Decrement for the variable cells. Right Value, Increment, and Decrement for the constraint cells. Binding status, Yes or No, indicates whether the constraint affects the solution; if No, the constraint can be eliminated.

To produce an optimizer report 1 Define the Optimizer problem. 2 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Optimizer. 3 Click the Options button. 4 Click the Reporting button. 5 Select the Answer Report Cells. 6 Select the Detail Report Cells. 7 Click OK. 8 Click OK. 9 Click the Solve button.

258


SUMMARIZING DATA USING CROSS TAB REPORTS

10

Cross Tab Reports let you summarize large amounts of data from both spreadsheets created in Quattro Pro and external databases. With Cross Tabs, you can analyze information based on two or more variables. Cross Tab Reports are dynamic. A dynamic report has responsive data. For example, when you drag a cell to a new location, this changes all columns affected by the cell’s new location. A dynamic report may contain drop-down arrows, links to other data, or sensitive data that reveals its origin when clicked with your mouse. Cross Tab Reports are a useful way to display and explore data stored in online analytical processing (OLAP) databases. OLAP is a software tool that provides fast, interactive access to information located in an external database. OLAP goes beyond the simple data storage and retrieval capabilities of traditional databases. With OLAP, you can transform raw data into meaningful strategic information by creating a model that supports explanatory reporting and forecasting. The fundamental principle behind OLAP technology is fast, interactive data analysis. You can run queries and generate reports on the fly using multidimensional databases. You can manipulate these dynamic reports to filter, sort, hide, and display data.

Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports

259

Getting familiar with the Cross Tabs Report dialog box To create Cross Tab Reports, you must make some decisions about the report before building it. You must choose the fields to analyze, where to place the fields in the report, on which spreadsheet to display the report in the notebook, and how to align the data fields. You make these decisions when you build the report in the Cross Tabs Report dialog box.

Source data The source data is the data you want to summarize in a Cross Tab Report. This data is contained in a Quattro Pro database (a selection of cells in a spreadsheet), or an external database. You can use an OLAP server to access an external database. All of the fields in the source data appear in the Fields list.

Destination In the Destination box, you tell Quattro Pro where you want the report that you are building to appear. If you do not select a destination, Quattro Pro places the report on the next available, unprotected spreadsheet, starting at cell A1.

Align data fields Quattro Pro lets you select the alignment of the Cross Tab Report data fields. When you choose to align the data fields by row, the Cross Tab Report data appears vertically in the report. When you choose to align the data fields by column, the data appears horizontally. You might find it easier to view the report on your screen when the data fields are aligned by row. Alignment by row is the default.

Fields list All of the available fields from the source data are listed in the Fields list. You might have to scroll to view all of the fields if your source data has many fields. You must decide which fields you want to include in the Cross Tab Report and where in the Layout area to place them. Although you can place multiple fields in each position of the Layout area, you cannot place an individual field in more than one position of the report.

Layout The Layout area is a mock-up of how the final Cross Tab Report will appear on the spreadsheet when you ask Quattro Pro to build the report. Using the mouse, you drag fields from the Fields list into the Layout area. Choose from the four positions available:

260


Pages — fields appear in the upper-left corner of Cross Tab Reports. These fields have a list box that you click, allowing you to select which Pages field item to view. You do not need to place a field in the Pages position of the Layout area for Quattro Pro to build a Cross Tab Report. Columns — fields appear vertically along the top of the Cross Tab Report. Rows — fields appear horizontally along the left side of the Cross Tab Report. Data — fields contain the data that you want to analyze in the Cross Tab Report. Data fields can contain labels or values.

Creating Cross Tab Reports With Quattro Pro, you can summarize database information in report form. Creating Cross Tab Reports lets you arrange data into categories calculate, analyze, and examine data You can use Cross Tab Reports to analyze and organize data located in notebooks and databases. For example, a company may maintain a database with addresses of customers in different cities, including information on customer sales. The database effectively stores the information but does not allow you to analyze the data in a convenient or precise manner. Using the Cross Tab Report feature, the company can analyze, organize, and summarize the data into a constantly updated report on area sales. The same database can be used to analyze sales by salesperson for each product that the business sells.

Planning and interpreting your data analysis Before you produce a Cross Tab Report from a data source like a database, you must plan which data fields you want to analyze. The Cross Tab Report feature analyzes data by using selected data fields as row or column labels and numeric data fields as the data being analyzed. The fields in the row and column areas are used as selection criteria to determine which values from the database to include at intersections of the row and column field labels. For example, assume your database contains product sales information (data). In the Cross Tab Report, you place the field containing the names of your company’s salespeople along the left of the spreadsheet (rows), and the field containing the products you sell along the top of the spreadsheet (columns). The intersection of the labels “Salesperson A” and “Televisions” shows the total number of televisions that Salesperson A sold.


261

Accessing data contained in Quattro Pro notebooks or external databases You can use Cross Tab Reports to summarize large amounts of information in Quattro Pro or an external database. If you do not have access to an external database, you can create original data in any spreadsheet of your notebook. For information about creating databases in Quattro Pro notebooks, see “Creating notebook databases” on page 282. To summarize data that is contained in more than one spreadsheet of your notebook, you can connect the spreadsheets and create a Cross Tab Report. After you create or select the source data that you want to summarize, you can produce dynamic Cross Tab Reports.

Creating Cross Tab Reports using the menu or the toolbar Using the menu or the Cross Tabs Report toolbar, you can create Cross Tab Reports, format the report or field options, expand, copy, or delete reports, change the display options, or refresh the report if you make changes to the source data. You can also drill down or roll up field details in OLAP Cross Tab Reports from the menu or the toolbar. You can use the menu to create and modify Cross Tab Reports by clicking Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Report. You access the Cross Tabs Report toolbar by clicking View, Toolbars and enabling the Cross Tabs Report check box. You can place the Cross Tabs Report toolbar on your spreadsheet, or move it to a different area of the screen, such as the Application Bar.

Using macros You can use macros to perform difficult or lengthy procedures when setting up or creating Cross Tab Reports if you plan to create several reports from the same data. For information about working with scripts and macros, see “Using macros” on page 489. A macro is a sequence of keystrokes or commands, stored in a notebook, that you can play to perform an action automatically.

Creating source data for Cross Tab Reports You can input original data if you do not have existing or external database information. You can enter source data on any spreadsheet of the notebook with as many fields as you wish. Field names can be as long as you want; data can consist of either values or labels. For information about creating databases in Quattro Pro, see “Creating notebook databases” on page 282.

Building Cross Tab Reports After you decide which data fields you want to analyze, you can build a Cross Tab Report in the Cross Tabs Report dialog box. All of the available data

262


fields from your source data are listed in the Fields list. To create a Cross Tab Report, you must drag at least one field into the Rows position. These fields are displayed horizontally along the left side of the report. drag at least one field into the Columns position. These fields are displayed vertically along the top of the report. drag at least one field into the Data position. These fields contain the data that you want to summarize. Data fields that contain labels are summarized (by default) by a count of the labels, while data fields that contain values are summarized (by default) by a sum of the values.

To build Cross Tab Reports 1 Click a spreadsheet cell containing data. 2 Click the Report button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. The source data is highlighted. 3 In the Cross Tabs Report dialog box, drag a field from the Fields list into the following positions of the Layout area: Rows position Columns position Data position Pages position Dragging a field to the Pages position is optional. Fields placed in the Pages position appear in the upper-left corner of the Cross Tab Report and have a list box so that you can select the desired field item to view. If fields are placed in the Pages position, you can expand the report. For more information about expanding Cross Tab Reports, see “Expanding Cross Tab Reports” on page 278. You can drag more than one field into each position of the Layout area but fields cannot appear more than once in each position. The Cross Tab Report is placed on cell A1 of the next available, unprotected spreadsheet, unless you select an alternate destination in the Destination text box. After you summarize your data, you might find it useful to display your Cross Tab Report as a chart. For more information about creating charts, see “Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart ” on page 305.


263

Connecting multiple spreadsheets to produce Cross Tab Reports Your data does not have to be on the same spreadsheet of the notebook for you to create a Cross Tab Report. You can connect two or more spreadsheets that contain data, and create Cross Tab Reports to summarize the data.

To connect multiple spreadsheets to produce Cross Tab Reports 1 Click a spreadsheet cell containing data. 2 Click the Report button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Click the Pointer button in the Source Data box. 4 Hold down the SHIFT key and click the tab of the spreadsheets where your data is stored. You must click the spreadsheet tabs in ascending order. 5 Click the Maximize button on the Cross Tabs Report dialog box. 6 Build a Cross Tab Report. After you connect multiple spreadsheets of data, the first field in the Fields list of the Cross Tabs Report dialog box is [SHEET]. You can drag this field to the Pages, Rows, or Columns positions of the Layout area.

Creating Cross Tab Reports using OLAP data sources Cross Tab Reports are particularly suited to displaying and exploring data contained in OLAP servers. You can create Cross Tab Reports from fields in an OLAP server by selecting an OLAP server as your data source. You can also import Cross Tab Reports you create with OLAP software into a Cross Tabs Report Creation dialog box.

Selecting OLAP data sources When you create a Cross Tab Report, Quattro Pro lets you select a data source other than your active notebook. Choosing an alternative data source lets you to manipulate data stored in an OLAP server. OLAP data sources can contain a very large amount of data.

To select OLAP data sources 1 Click an empty cell on the spreadsheet. 2 Click the Report button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Enable the OLAP Report button in the Report Type dialog box.

264


4 Click OK. 5 Type a user ID and password in the Connect to Provider dialog box. 6 Select a data source in the Cross Tabs Data Sources dialog box.

Importing OLAP Cross Tab Reports You can import existing online analytical processing (OLAP) Cross Tab Reports from your OLAP server provider. Importing an existing OLAP report lets you use a report template, which you can also modify. Changes you make to the report template are not reflected in the original OLAP server report.

To import OLAP Cross Tab Reports 1 Click an empty spreadsheet cell. 2 Click the Report button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Enable the OLAP Report button in the Report Type dialog box. 4 Select the desired server in the Cross Tabs Data Sources dialog box. 5 Type a user ID and password in the Connect to Provider dialog box. 6 Select a data source. 7 Click Import Report in the Cross Tabs Report dialog box. 8 Select a report type in the Import Templates Dialog box. 9 Select a report in the Import Report dialog box. You must have an OLAP provider running in the background before you can connect to the server.

You can also click the Import button in the Cross Tabs Report dialog box to import OLAP Cross Tab Reports.

Formatting Cross Tab Reports Once you summarize data in a Cross Tab Report, you can change the report name from the default, align data fields by row or column, and display row or column summaries. You can also change the appearance of the data in the Cross Tab Report. When you ask Quattro Pro to check for changes in the source data it Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports

265

automatically updates the data in the Cross Tab Report. If there are blank cells in the Cross Tab Report because of missing source data, you can enter a custom label to appear in the empty cells of the Cross Tab Report. You can preserve the data formatting from the source data to the report and center the field names in the report.

Naming Cross Tab Reports Although Quattro Pro generates default titles for all Cross Tab Reports that you create, you can give them more descriptive or specific names.

To name Cross Tab Reports 1 Click a cell on the Cross Tab Report. 2 Click the Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Type a name for the report in the Name box. The default name is Cross Tabs Table 1. If you generate several Cross Tab Reports from your source data, the report names must be unique. Report names cannot be blank.

Aligning data fields by column or row You can significantly change the appearance of Cross Tab Reports depending on whether you align the data fields by column or by row. Data fields aligned by row are generally easier to view on your screen than aligned by column.

To align data fields by column or row 1 Click a cell on the Cross Tab Report. 2 Click the Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Enable one of the following buttons: By Row — data appears vertically in the report By Columns — data appears horizontally in the report The default data field alignment is By Row.

266


Showing column and row summaries When you create Cross Tab Reports, you can ask Quattro Pro to display the totals and grand totals for both column and row data. Showing column and row totals is useful because it gives you a better understanding of how each field relates to the total. This feature can help you see an overall picture of your data.

To show column summaries 1 Click a cell on the Cross Tab Report. 2 Click the Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Enable the Show Column Summaries check box.

To show row summaries 1 Click a cell on the Cross Tab Report. 2 Click the Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Enable the Show Row Summaries check box. You can enable both row and column summaries for your Cross Tab Report.

Controlling Cross Tab Report data Cross Tab Reports are dynamic, meaning that changes in the source data are reflected in the Cross Tab Report. You can ask Quattro Pro to automatically check the source data when you open the report and update the report if the source data has changed. You can have a custom label appear if there are blank cells in the source data. This feature is useful if you are using a database with a large number of records.

To control Cross Tab Report data 1 Click the Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 2 Enable either of the following Data check boxes: Update Data On Open — checks the source data when the report is opened and updates the data if it has changed Display In Empty Cells — specifies the label to appear in the Cross Tab Report when a cell is empty. You can enter a custom label, such as an asterisk, or choose from the available presets. Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports

267

You cannot edit or delete data in a Cross Tab Report. To edit the values in a Cross Tab Report, make a static copy of the report. For information about making static copies of Cross Tab Reports, see “Making static copies of Cross Tab Reports” on page 277.

Customizing the appearance of Cross Tab Reports Quattro Pro can apply a preset format to the report, preserve the data format from the source data, or center the field names in the report.

To customize the appearance of Cross Tab Reports 1 Click the Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 2 Enable any of the following Format check boxes: Format Cross Tabs Report — applies a preset format to the fields and data, making the report easier to read Preserve Data Formatting — maintains the numeric format of the source data, such as currency Center Labels Across Blocks Of Cells — centers the field names (labels) across the column of data. (By default, field names are right-aligned). Format Cross Tabs Report is enabled by default.

Formatting Cross Tab Report fields A field is a category of information that appears in a database column. Examples of fields include name, city, and country. Each field in a database has items — the individual entries that occur in a field. For example, a field named “Country” might have field items that include France, Venezuela, and Kenya. When you create a Cross Tab Report, you can format and customize the fields that appear in the report. You can rename a field in the Cross Tab Report, while keeping the field name as it appears in the source data. You can change a field’s position in the report from row to column, pages, or data. This changes the Cross Tab Report significantly, as the data may be completely different when you change field positions. You can specify which field items appear in the Cross Tab Report if you want to hide certain field items and display others.

268


You can summarize and compare fields using the field summary and data comparison features. Only fields in the Data position of a Cross Tab Report can be summarized or compared. You can calculate the average, standard deviation, and variance for data fields or display the data as a percentage of the total. These features are useful if you need to analyze, summarize and compare the information in the report or present the report as an overall picture of the data.

Changing field names You can change a field name in a Cross Tab Report. The field name is changed only in the report — it is not changed in the original data. When you edit the report, the field name retains its name in the Cross Tabs Report dialog box if you drag it to another position of the layout. If you drag it back to the Fields list, the field name reverts to its original name.

To change field names 1 Click on the field to change. 2 Click the Field Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Type a new name in the Label box in the Field dialog box. Double-click the field name to quickly access the Field dialog box.

Changing field positions After you create a Cross Tab Report, you can change the position of any field. You may want to change a field’s position to explore hidden relationships in the data. There are four positions: Rows, Columns, Data, and Pages. Row fields are displayed along the left side of the report, column fields are displayed along the top of the report, and pages fields are displayed in the top left corner of the report. Changing a field’s position can significantly change the information that appears in the Cross Tab Report. Certain fields are more useful in some positions than others. For example, a field with several hundred field items is not an appropriate choice for the Pages position of the Cross Tab Report because you must scroll through several hundred different versions of the Cross Tab Report to view all of the data.

To change field positions 1 Click on the field to change.


269

2 Click the Field Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 In the Position area of the Field dialog box, click the position where you want to move the field. The field’s current position is enabled when you open the Field dialog box.

You can change a field’s position without accessing the Field dialog box. For information about dragging Cross Tab Report fields, see “Dragging Cross Tab Report fields” on page 276. Double-click the field name to quickly access the Field dialog box.

Hiding field items Fields can contain multiple field items. For example, your database may have “Region” with four field items: East, West, North, and South. If a field has more than one field item, you can prevent selected items from appearing in the Cross Tab Report. The item’s information is still available, but it is not displayed in the report. You may want to hide field items if a particular item is not relevant or necessary to your report. This feature is useful if your Cross Tab Report is large or complex.

To hide field items 1 Click on the field to modify. 2 Click the Field Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Enable the field items to hide in the Hide Field Items list. You cannot hide all items in a field.

Double-click the field to quickly access the Field dialog box.

Calculating field summaries You can choose from many field summary options, including calculating the sum, average, and standard deviation. Only fields in the Data position of Cross Tab Reports can be summarized because they are the fields that have numeric values.

270


You can display an enormous amount of information about your data if you enable all of the summary options; include only those options which are most relevant.

To calculate field summaries 1 Click on the data field to modify. 2 Click the Field Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Enable any of the following check boxes in the Summary list: Sum — calculates the sum of items for numeric field items Count — calculates the number of occurrences for label field items Average — calculates the average Max — displays the maximum value Min — displays the minimum value StdDevp — calculates the population standard deviation StdDevs — calculates the sample standard deviation Varp — calculates the population variance Var — calculates the sample variance CountNonBlank — counts non-blank cells for a field You cannot drag field summaries because they are superficially generated on the report. The default Summary option is Sum for values, and Count for labels.

Performing field data comparisons Quattro Pro lets you choose from many field data comparison calculations. Field data comparisons are useful when you want to summarize and analyze the data. Only fields in the Data position of Cross Tab Reports can be compared because they are the fields with numeric values. You can display an enormous amount of information about your data if you enable all of the data comparison options; decide which options are most relevant and include only them.

To perform field data comparisons 1 Click on the data field to modify. Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports

271

2 Click the Field Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 3 Click the Compare>> button in the Field dialog box. 4 Select one of the following options from the Data Comparison list: Difference From — displays all data in the data area as the difference between the value for the specified field and field item % Of — displays all data in the data area as the percentage of the value for the specified field and field item % Difference From — displays all data in the data area as the difference between the value for the specified field and field item, but displays the difference as a percentage of the base data Running Total In — displays the data for successive items as a cumulative total % Of Row — displays all data in each row as a percentage of the total for each row % Of Column — displays all data in each column as a percentage of the total for each column % Of Total — displays all data in the data area as a percentage of the grand total of all of the data in the Cross Tab Report Index — displays the result using the following calculation: ((value in cell) X (grand total of grand totals)) / ((grand row total) X (grand column total))

Formatting OLAP Cross Tab Reports and report fields You can perform many of the same formatting procedures with OLAP Cross Tab Reports as you can with non-OLAP Cross Tab Reports. You can rename OLAP Cross Tab Reports, align the data fields by row or column, and update the OLAP Cross Tab Report when it is opened to reflect changes in the source data. For more information about formatting OLAP Cross Tab Reports, see “Formatting Cross Tab Reports” on page 265. There are some important differences between OLAP Cross Tab Reports and Cross Tab Reports created from a selection of cells in a Quattro Pro spreadsheet. You have access to the OLAP Data Source Explorer when you produce OLAP Cross Tab Reports. This tool lets you drag fields and elements from the Explorer to the OLAP Cross Tab Report, and gives you more analytical power to produce a report with the type of information you need. OLAP Cross Tab Reports have fields that often have several additional layers of information, referred to as elements. Because OLAP databases can be very large, Quattro Pro lets you display as much or as little of the data as you want. You can manipulate the OLAP Cross Tab Report fields by drilling

272


down element levels (showing more detail) or rolling up (showing less detail). You can also filter and delete the elements to show only the most relevant information in the OLAP Cross Tab Report. Row and column summaries are not available in OLAP Cross Tab Reports. You cannot preserve data formatting from the source data to OLAP Cross Tab Reports.

Using the OLAP Data Source Explorer The OLAP Data Source Explorer is a tool that appears when you access data from an OLAP server database. You can use the OLAP Data Source Explorer to add field elements and explore their hierarchies. The Explorer is a tree, with branches that expand and collapse, giving more or fewer details with each click of the mouse. Using the OLAP Data Source Explorer, you can select field elements and drag them into your Cross Tab Report. The report is automatically updated when you drag the field element into the report. If you close the OLAP Data Source Explorer window, you must exit and reconnect to your provider to retrieve the window. You cannot drag field elements from the Cross Tab Report back to the OLAP Data Source Explorer.

Drilling down OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements When a database is large or complex, the field elements have many levels. Drilling down a Cross Tab Report element reveals all hidden details associated with a field. You can drill down to the bottom of an element, or drill down one level at a time. Drilling down is a navigational technique that lets you to explore levels of data ranging from the most summarized (up) to the most detailed (down). The drilling paths may be defined by the hierarchies within dimensions or other relationships that may be dynamic within or between dimensions. Assume your database contains information about the Olympic Games. If you drill down “Olympics”, details appear that contain information related to the Olympics: whether it was a winter or summer games, the country that hosted the Olympics, and the city where the games were held. Because some countries have hosted more than one Olympics, there are more details associated with those countries.


273

You can see how the “Olympics” field can be drilled down to reveal elements and subelements. You can choose the amount of detail to show. Drill down by clicking the Plus button, or roll up by clicking the Minus button.

Drilling down is useful when you want to analyze your data or compare the details of one element with other elements. It takes you from the most general detail of an element to the more specific detail(s).

To drill down to the bottom of OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements 1 Click the element to drill down. 2 Click the Drill Down button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.

To drill down level by level Click the Plus button in the element cell. The Minus button indicates that the element has been drilled down.

Rolling up OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements Rolling up a Cross Tab Report element performs the opposite function to drilling down; it takes you from the most specific detail of an element to more general detail(s). Rolling up is desirable when you want to see an overall picture of your data. You can roll up to the top, or roll up an element one level at a time.

To roll up to the top of OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements 1 Click the element to roll up. 2 Click the Rollup button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.

274


To roll up level by level Click the Minus button in the element cell.

Filtering OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements Because OLAP source data is often very large, it is important to be able to minimize the amount of information that appears in your Cross Tab Reports. Level filtering lets you select specific field elements from the level to display in the Cross Tab Report, rather than displaying all elements in a level. In the Elements Selection dialog box, there are two elements lists. The list on the left side of the dialog box is the Source List and the list on the right is the Filtered List. Move elements from the Source List to the Filtered List to choose the elements that will be shown in the OLAP Cross Tab Report.

To filter OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements 1 Double-click the name of the field to filter in the OLAP Cross Tab Report. 2 Click Filter in the Field dialog box. 3 In the Element Selection dialog box, highlight the element(s) in the Source List that you want to move to the Filtered List. 4 Click the Add button. When you open the Element Selection dialog box and all of the field elements are in the Filtered List, click the Remove All button to move them to the Source List so that you can select the elements to display in the OLAP Cross Tab Report.

To move all of the elements from the Source List to the Filtered List, click the Add All button. To add or remove elements, double-click their name in the Source or Filtered List. You can drag elements from the Source to the Filtered List and from the Filtered to the Source List.

Removing OLAP Cross Tab Report elements After you create OLAP Cross Tab Reports, you can delete elements from the report to minimize the amount of data it contains.


275

To remove OLAP Cross Tab Report elements 1 Click the element to remove. 2 Click the Remove Element button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.

Manipulating Cross Tab Reports After you select your source data and produce a Cross Tab Report, there are many ways you can manipulate your Cross Tab Reports. You can place the report on a specific spreadsheet of the notebook, or change the location of the report once it is created. You can also make a copy of your Cross Tab Report. The copy is static, meaning it is no longer connected to the source data and, therefore, any changes in the source data are not reflected in the static copy. If you modify your source data, the Refresh feature updates the Cross Tab Report to reflect any changes in the source data. Expanding a Cross Tab Report places field items of the Cross Tab Report onto several different spreadsheets of the notebook. When you finish with a Cross Tab Report, you can save or delete it.

Dragging Cross Tab Report fields You can drag the fields in the report to different areas of the report. The data is automatically updated each time you change a field’s position. You cannot drag fields to certain positions in the Cross Tab Report. Quattro Pro warns you if you try to drag a field to a prohibited location.

To drag Cross Tab Report fields 1 Click on the field to move. 2 Move the cursor across the name of the field until it changes to cross hairs. 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the field to its new position.

Changing the location of Cross Tab Reports You can specify on which spreadsheet you want Quattro Pro to place your Cross Tab Reports. If you do not specify where you want them to appear, Quattro Pro automatically places reports on the next available, unprotected spreadsheet of your notebook. After you create a Cross Tab Report, you can move it to another spreadsheet of your notebook.

276


To change the location of Cross Tab Reports 1 Click the Report button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. 2 Click the Pointer button in the Destination box and drag an area on the spreadsheet where you want your Cross Tab Report to appear. You can place one or more Cross Tab Reports on any spreadsheet of the notebook. Be sure you do not overwrite an existing Cross Tab Report; select a destination range that does not overlap existing Cross Tab Reports.

You can also type the destination in the Destination box.

Making static copies of Cross Tab Reports You can make an exact copy of a Cross Tab Report. This is called a static copy because it is no longer connected to the source data so any changes made to the source data are not reflected in the static copy. The static copy is placed on the next available, unprotected spreadsheet of your notebook.

To make static copies of Cross Tab Reports 1 Click any cell of the Cross Tab Report to copy. 2 Click the Copy Static button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. You can determine whether a report is dynamic or a copy from the appearance of the field names. In dynamic Cross Tab Reports, the field names are grayed.

Refreshing Cross Tab Reports The Refresh feature updates the data in the Cross Tab Report when changes are made to the source data. You cannot edit or remove data values in the Cross Tab Report. If you need to edit the values in a Cross Tab Report, make a static copy of the report. For information about making a static copy of Cross Tab Reports, see “Making static copies of Cross Tab Reports” on page 277.


277

To refresh Cross Tab Reports 1 Click any cell of the Cross Tab Report to refresh. 2 Click the Refresh button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.

Expanding Cross Tab Reports The Expand feature lets you to open a Cross Tab Report onto several different spreadsheets of your notebook. You can expand a report only if you have a field in the Pages position of the Cross Tab Report. For example, say you generate a Cross Tab Report, which is placed on spreadsheet B. You have a field named “Year” in the Pages position with two field items, 1990 and 1991. When you expand the Cross Tab Report, the first field item (1990) and the data associated with it is placed on spreadsheet C, and the second field item (1991) and the data associated with it is placed on spreadsheet D.

To expand Cross Tab Reports 1. Click any cell of the Cross Tab Report to expand. 2. Click the Expand button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. The report is expanded on to the next available, unprotected spreadsheets of the notebook.

Hiding and showing the details of Cross Tab Report fields You can conceal information about a selected field so that you have the same level of information for data analysis, but fewer details are shown in the report. For example, assume that your Cross Tab Report has two fields in its columns: “Year” (with field items 1991 and 1992) and “Quarter” (with field items Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4). When you ask Quattro Pro to Hide Details of the Year field, the resulting report shows the field items for “Year” (1991 and 1992) without showing the breakdown for the values by quarter. Therefore, the Cross Tab Report has the same information as before, but with fewer details. You must have more than one field in the rows or columns of a Cross Tab Report to use the Hide Details feature. If you hide the details of a selected field, you can make them reappear at any time by using the Show Details feature.

278


To hide the details of Cross Tab Report fields 1 Click the name of the field to hide. 2 Click the Hide Details button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.

To show the details of Cross Tab Report fields 1 Click the name of the field to show. 2 Click the Show Details button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.

Saving and deleting Cross Tab Reports When you save your source data, any Cross Tab Reports that you have created are also saved. When you reopen your source data, the Cross Tab Reports are also opened. If you do not want to save a report, be sure to delete it before you save your source data file. You can also save OLAP Cross Tab Reports. OLAP Cross Tab Reports are not attached to the source data because the source data is contained in an external database. Therefore, you must save OLAP Cross Tab Reports in their own file, separate from the source data.

To save Cross Tab Reports Click File, Save.

To delete Cross Tab Reports 1 Click a cell of the Cross Tab Report to delete. 2 Click the Remove button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. You can retrieve a deleted Cross Tab Report if you immediately click the Undo button or press CTRL+Z.


279

USING DATABASES

11

Databases are collections of information organized as fields, records, and files. A field is a single piece of information; a record is a set of fields; and a file is a set of records. A database can contain information such as names and addresses of clients, patient records, or product inventory. There are many examples of databases. This table shows the records, field names, and number of fields each can have.

With Quattro Pro, you can set up databases in notebooks. Quattro Pro recognizes each row as a record and each column as a field in the database. Data Forms is a tool you use to create and edit notebook databases using a form. You can enter and update database information manually in the notebook if you do not want to use Data Forms.

Querying databases A query is a request for information from a database. You can use queries to find information in a database that matches your search criteria. You can query notebook and external databases using search formulas, AND and OR queries, and wildcards. These functions can broaden or narrow your search criteria. When you query external databases, the output data can be imported as a database table.

Using databases

281

Accessing information stored in external databases To save the work of re-entering data stored in other software programs, you can import external databases to Quattro Pro notebooks. You can retrieve database information stored in Paradox, dBASE, or using any Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Borland Database Engine (BDE) data source provided there is a full conformance 32-bit ODBC or IDAPI driver installed for the data source. The Database Desktop lets you view, edit, query, and create new external databases. You can also import database tables, which contain only a portion of data extracted from a database. Database tables are useful when the database contains a large amount of data and you want to analyze only a part of it.

Working in different spreadsheet environments If you work in different spreadsheet environments, or share files with other spreadsheet program users, you can change the compatibility settings of Quattro Pro. You can create or edit notebooks in formats compatible with Microsoft Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, and previous versions of Quattro Pro. You can change the default Menu Bar, file type, and increase or decrease the size of the notebook to make Quattro Pro compatible with other spreadsheet programs. For information about changing the compatibility options, see “Using compatibility settings” on page 55.

Using Database Desktop The Database Desktop is a companion program to Quattro Pro that you can use to access information in Paradox and dBASE database files. Using this program, you can query external databases, add, edit, or delete database records, or create new dBASE or Paradox database files. This program does not install in the Typical installation of WordPerfect Office 2000. You must perform a custom installation to be able to access the Database Desktop. For more information about Database Desktop, see “Database Desktop basics.”

Summarizing database information using Cross Tab Reports You can use the Cross Tab feature to create more elaborate tables that summarize information from notebook databases or external databases. For information about using the Cross Tab function, see “Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports” on page 259.

Creating notebook databases You can create a database in Quattro Pro notebooks. Quattro Pro recognizes the cells containing the field names and data records as database cells. When you enter database cells in a Quattro Pro database, you must ensure that

282


database cells fill a rectangular area that can contain any number of blank cells database cells are entered in a contiguous format and are confined to one spreadsheet field names are entered in the top row of the database cells, one name per column (each column of the database cells is a field) field names are labels with no blank spaces at the beginning or end field names are unique; they are different from other field and cell names you use the first row of data is entered directly below the field names without leaving a blank row or inserting a row of symbols you use the same type of data throughout each column — do not mix labels and values in the same column

Creating notebook databases using Data Forms You can use the Data Forms tool to create databases in Quattro Pro. Data Forms helps you do the basic functions of adding, deleting, or changing records in your database using a form, instead of typing the information directly in the notebook cells. The Data Forms tool lists each field from your database. You type in the information, then Quattro Pro automatically places it in a row in your notebook database. Once you complete your database, you can use Data Forms to edit your records. This tool lets you search your database, taking you instantly to the record you need — it is not necessary to scroll through a lengthy notebook. Once you find the record, you can either edit or delete it directly in Data Forms.

Creating notebook databases manually In addition to using Data Forms, you can also manually enter the data records in the appropriate rows of your database. If you choose to create a database in this way, you must type the information directly in the notebook cells without the structured help of a form.

Setting up notebook databases You can set up databases in Quattro Pro notebooks using a form that lists your field names, or you can enter the information without the use of a form. You must follow certain conventions when setting up notebook databases. For information about these conventions, see “Creating notebook databases” on page 282.

Using databases

283

The Data Forms tool automates the process of entering records in a database. This tool creates a form from your database field names in which you can enter the data in the appropriate fields. Additionally, you can create notebook databases manually by typing data (records) under the appropriate columns (field names).

To set up notebook databases using Data Forms 1 Type field names (e.g., Name, Address, City) in individual columns of Row 1 in an empty notebook. For example, type Name in A1, Address in cell B1, City in cell C1. 2 Select the field names in Row 1 and the empty cells directly beneath them in Row 2. For example, if you have field names in cells A1 to F1, select the block of cells from A1 to F2. 3 Click Tools, Data Tools, Form. 4 Click OK. 5 Type the record information in the appropriate fields. 6 Click the New button. 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each record, except the final one. 8 Type the final record. 9 Click the Close button.

To set up notebook databases manually 1 Type field names in individual columns of Row 1 in an empty notebook. 2 Type the data in the rows beneath the appropriate field name columns.

Searching for records and navigating databases You can use Data Forms to search for records in your notebook database when you need to edit or delete existing records, or discover if there are duplicate records in your database. To narrow your search, fill out as many fields with search criteria as you can. To broaden your search, use wildcards in your search criteria. For information about using wildcards as search criteria, see “Using wildcards as search criteria” on page 292. Data Forms has several navigational tools that let you move quickly through the database when searching for records. These include navigational buttons and the Slider.

284


To search for records 1 Click a cell in the database. 2 Click Tools, Data Tools, Form. All of the database cells are highlighted. 3 Click OK. 4 Click the Search button. 5 Type the information to search in the appropriate fields. 6 Click the Record Forward button.

To navigate databases 1 Click a cell in the database. 2 Click Tools, Data Tools, Form. All of the database cells are highlighted. 3 Click any of the following buttons: First Record button — moves directly to the first database record Last Record button — moves directly to the last database record Record Forward button — moves forward one database record Record Back button — moves backward one database record When searching for records, the navigation buttons only navigate records that meet the search criteria. To navigate all database records, clear the search criteria.

You can also navigate databases using the Slider. As you drag the slider across its bar, Quattro Pro displays the record number above the bar. You can drag the Slider from the first record to the last record, and can stop at any record.

Adding database records You can use Data Forms to add new records to the end of your notebook database. After you add records, you can sort the notebook database alphabetically or numerically. You can quickly sort cells by clicking the Sort button on the Selection Formatting toolbar. For information about the Selection Formatting toolbar, see “Working with toolbars” on page 24.

Using databases

285

To add database records 1 Click a cell in the database. 2 Click Tools, Data Tools, Form. All of the database cells are highlighted. 3 Click OK. 4 Click the New button. 5 Type the record information in the appropriate fields. Click Close instead of the New button to add the last record in a session.

Editing and deleting database records Using Data Forms, you can change information in existing records and delete records that you no longer need. To find specific records, use the Search function. For information about searching for records in notebook databases, see “Searching for records and navigating databases” on page 284.

To edit database records 1 Click a cell in the database. 2 Click Tools, Data Tools, Form. All of the database cells are highlighted. 3 Click OK. 4 Click the Record Back button to locate the record to edit. 5 Edit the record. 6 Click the Record Forward button to save the changes. 7 When you are finished editing records, click the Close button to save the changes. If you do not want to save your editing changes to a particular record, click the Revert button to reinsert the original information in the record.

286


To delete database records 1 Click a cell in the database. 2 Click Tools, Data Tools, Form. All of the database cells are highlighted. 3 Click OK. 4 Click the Record Back button to locate the record to delete. 5 Click the Delete button. 6 Click Yes. You cannot retrieve records after you delete them.

Preparing notebook database search queries Using Notebook Query, you can query notebook databases for records that match your search criteria. Querying is useful when your database is large or complex, or if a manual search of the database is difficult or time-consuming. Preparing to query your notebook database is a three-step process. First, you must create a criteria table. Next, you must create the search output cells for viewing the results of your query. Finally, you can set up search formulas, AND and OR queries, and wildcards in the criteria table to help you narrow or broaden your search. You can use Data Forms to conduct simple searches of database records. For more information about using Data Forms, see “Searching for records and navigating databases” on page 284. You can also use a variety of spreadsheet functions with databases. These functions use database cells and criteria tables, just as in a database search. For information about using spreadsheet functions, see “Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123.

Creating a criteria table and search output cells A criteria table consists of a row of field names that must match one or more fields in the database cells, and one or more rows of search criteria. The criteria table must be contiguous and confined to one spreadsheet, but does not have to be on the same spreadsheet as the database cells. You can use AND and OR queries, search formulas and wildcards when defining your search criteria in a criteria table.

Using databases

287

Your data search results are placed in search output cells. You create these output cells on an area of the notebook where database records that match your search criteria will be copied. It is important to place your output cells in an area that does not overlap with either the database cells or the criteria table.

To create a criteria table 1 Copy the names of the fields to search in the first row of the table. 2 Enter the search data beneath the appropriate field names. 3 Do one of the following: To search for exact matches — type search criteria exactly as the data appears in the database To search for conditional matches — type search criteria using search formulas, wildcards, or queries To require each record to meet more than one criterion, enter the criteria in the same row, under the appropriate field names. To search for records that meet any of the given criteria, use a separate row for each criterion.

To create search output cells In the first row of the output cells, copy the names of the fields to include in the output from the database. The output cells do not have to be on the same spreadsheet as the criteria table or the database cells.

Using AND and OR queries in a criteria table A query is a request for information from a database. You can include AND and OR queries in search criteria tables when searching through databases. These queries can help you either narrow or broaden your search. To get the most out of your search, combine AND and OR queries. When you use AND queries, all data must match all search criteria in all rows of the criteria table. When you use OR queries, data can match criteria in one or more rows of the criteria table, but not necessarily all rows.

288


The following procedures use the example of a database that contains two columns listing first and last names of company employees to illustrate how you can use AND and OR queries to search a database. A simple database listing the first and last names of company employees.

To use AND queries 1 Type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table. 2 In the same row, type a criterion under another field name of the criteria table. For example, to create an AND query in a criteria table in the example described above, type Kelly in the row under First Name and Kind in the row under Last Name. The criteria are entered in different cells of the same row in the criteria table. An example of a criteria table using an AND query.

Quattro Pro searches for records with the last name Kind and first name Kelly. The search results reveal only one possible match. The output cells contain a record for Kelly Kind.

To use OR queries 1 Type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table. 2 In a different row, type a criterion under another field name of the criteria table. To create an OR query in a criteria table using the database example, type Barbara in the row under First Name and Kind in the next row under Last Name.

Using databases

289

An example of a criteria table using an OR query.

Quattro Pro searches for any records with the last name Kind and the first name Barbara. The search results reveal five matches. The output cells contain records for Kelly Kind, Steve Kind, Barbara Kind, Barbara Smith, and Barbara Wong.

To combine AND and OR queries 1 Type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table. 2 In the same row, type a criterion under another field name of the criteria table. 3 In a different row, type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table. To combine AND and OR queries in a criteria table using the database example, type Kelly in the row under First name, type Kind in the same row but under Last name, and Barbara in a new row under First Name. An example of a criteria table combining an AND and OR query.

Quattro Pro searches for any records with the last name Kind and the first name Barbara or Kelly. The search results reveal four matches. The output cells contain records for Kelly Kind, Barbara Kind, Barbara Wong, and Barbara Smith. Records for Kelly Smith, Kelly O’Toole, and Steve Kind do not match the search criteria and are therefore not displayed in the search output cells.

Using search formulas in a criteria table Search formulas are a powerful database search tool. They let you specify conditions that must be met for Quattro Pro to find matching records. Your search conditions can be as specific or as general as you want. For example, you can create a search formula that looks for payments of less than $25.00

290


(+~PAYMENT<25) or records dated after January 1, 1939 (+~DATE>@DATE(1939,1,1)). When you reference another cell in a criteria table formula, while the cell reference on the left needs to be relative, the reference on the right needs to be absolute; for example: +~AGE>$H$5. You can also use search formulas that use cell names to represent field names. Using Field Names, you can generate cell names that refer to the first record in the database. When you use field names or named cells on the left side of a search formula, the name must be relative. You can indicate a relative cell name by preceding it with a tilde (~). For example, +~WAGE>25 is a valid search criteria. However, +WAGE>25 is invalid. The following table shows the operators and symbols you can use in search formulas. Use

To indicate...

=

Equals

<>

Not equal

<

Less than

>

Greater than

<=

Less than or equal to

>=

Greater than or equal to

#AND#

Both expressions are true

#OR#

Either the first or the second expression may be true

#NOT#

The first expression is true, the second is false

To use search formulas in a criteria table 1 Type search formulas under field names of the criteria table using any of the operators and symbols listed in the table above. 2 Click Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query. 3 Click Field Names in the Notebook Data Query dialog box. You cannot combine search formulas with wildcards. Logical formulas in criteria tables display either 1 (true) or 0 (false).

Using databases

291

Using wildcards as search criteria Wildcards are placeholder characters that represent one or more characters. They are a powerful searching tool for searching for text in database cells. You can use wildcards or search formulas as search criteria, but you cannot combine wildcards with other operators. For example, +~Item=tape is a valid comparison formula. However, if you enter the formula +~Item=t?p , the exact string t?p is found; records containing tip, tap, or top are not found. The following table lists the wildcards you can use as search criteria. Use...

To search for...

?

Any single character in a label. For example, t?p finds tip, top, or tap, but not tape or stop.

*

Any number of characters to the end of a label. For example, ten* finds tender, tension, and tent, but not attention.

~

All labels in a field except those that match the search condition. This symbol is referred to as tilde. For example, entering ~Boston under the City column in the criteria table finds all records that do not have Boston in the City field.

To use wildcards as search criteria Type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table using any of the wildcards listed above.

Querying notebook databases After creating a criteria table, setting up search formulas, queries, or wildcards, and creating search output cells, you can query notebook databases. For information about query preparation, see “Preparing notebook database search queries” on page 287. Quattro Pro lets you highlight matching records, making it easy for you to scroll through the database records to see all records which match your search criteria. You can also make copies of records that match your search criteria and display them in the search output cells. You can delete records that match your search criteria from the database. Use caution when doing this unless you are certain you want to remove the records. You can use the delete function in conjunction with the highlight function, allowing you to see the records that match your search before they are deleted.

292


Highlighting matching records Using the Locate feature, you can highlight all records that meet the conditions specified in the criteria table. Quattro Pro highlights the first record in the database cells that meets the search conditions. You can navigate to other records that meet your criteria. Press UP ARROW to move to previously found matches, or DOWN ARROW to move to the next match. If there are no matching records, Quattro Pro beeps and returns you to the Notebook Data Query dialog box.

To highlight matching records 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query. 2 Select the database cells in the Notebook Data Query dialog box. To select database cells in another open notebook, use standard linking syntax. For example, [DATA]A1..Z50 specifies cells A1..Z50 in the notebook called DATA. 3 Select the criteria table. 4 Select the output cells. Select only the first row of the output cells which contains the field names so that you do not limit the range of the output cells. 5 Click the Locate button. Press ESC to return to the Notebook Data Query dialog box.

Copying and eliminating duplicate matching records You can copy matching records in a notebook database to the search output cells. Only fields whose names are written on the first row of the output cells are copied. All data in the cells beneath the output cells is erased before it is extracted; do not store notebook data in that area of the spreadsheet. You can avoid losing data by specifying an output area larger than one row; this also limits the number of records the output cells accept. To eliminate records from the output cells that match in all fields, use Extract Unique instead. Matching records are eliminated from the output cells only, not from the database.

Using databases

293

To copy matching records 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query. 2 Select the database cells in the Notebook Data Query dialog box. To select database cells in another open notebook, use standard linking syntax. For example, [DATA]A1..Z50 specifies cells A1..Z50 in the notebook called DATA. 3 Select the criteria table. 4 Select the output cells. 5 Click the Extract button.

To eliminate duplicate matching records from the search output cells 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query. 2 Select the database cells in the Notebook Data Query dialog box. 3 Select the criteria table. 4 Select the output cells. 5 Click the Extract Unique button.

Deleting matching records Quattro Pro lets you delete matching records from your notebook database. After you set up the criteria for matching, you can find and delete all records that match. Records below the deleted records move up to fill in the empty rows. You may sometimes want to see the records that match your search before they are deleted. You can view the records, then decide whether to delete them. For information about using Locate to highlight matching records, see “Highlighting matching records” on page 293.

To delete matching records 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query. 2 Select the database cells in the Notebook Data Query dialog box. To select database cells in another open notebook, use standard linking syntax. For example, [DATA]A1..Z50 specifies cells A1..Z50 in the notebook called DATA. 3 Select the criteria table. 4 Click the Delete button.

294


You can click Edit, Undo to restore a record if you accidentally delete it.

Querying external databases With Quattro Pro, you can search for records and information in external Paradox or dBASE database tables. The Notebook Query feature lets you extract information from the external database without first having to translate the file. You can use Query By Example (QBE) to format queries of external databases. When you query external databases, you must create a criteria table specifying the type of information you are searching for and output cells to hold the results of the search. For information about criteria tables and output cells, see “Creating a criteria table and search output cells” on page 287. When you are working with external database tables, it is useful to assign aliases for your private and working directories. Aliases are shortcut names used when path names are long or complicated. You can use Database Desktop to view search results in or delete records from external databases. For more information about using Database Desktop, see “Using Database Desktop” on page 302. You can use linking syntax to query a database file created with Paradox. This lets you access database information without first having to translate the database into a notebook file. You can query an external database by specifying cells, and including the name of the file and directory, if they are different.

Querying external databases using Notebook Query You can link to an external database using Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query. This lets you access information in database files created with Paradox, Reflex, or dBASE (versions II, III, and IV). You can extract information from the database without first having to translate the file. With Notebook Query, you can use Extract and Extract Unique to search external databases. However, Locate, Delete, and Field Names do not work with external databases.

To query external databases using Notebook Query 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query. 2 In the Database Cells box, type the path of the external database file using linking syntax.You do not need to type the path if the database path is already in your Working Directory. Using databases

295

The format of linking syntax is [Database]A1..A2, where [Database] is the name of the database, including the path; for example, C:\PARADOX\SAMPLE.DB. The cells specified after the file name can be any valid area with at least two rows. A1..A2 acts as a hook into the database. It remains A1..A2, no matter how large the database area actually is. 3 Select the criteria table. 4 Select the output cells. 5 Click the Extract button. If your criteria contain formulas with cell references to data elsewhere, those cell references must be absolute. For example, for a table with Name and Age as column titles, you could enter +~age>25 to identify all entries where age>25. To reference the cell C1 that contained the value 25, entering +AGE>C1 would not work. Instead, you would need to enter +~AGE>$A:$C$1 as the criteria, using absolute references.

Using Query By Example In database management systems, Query By Example (QBE) refers to a method of forming queries in which the database program displays a blank record with a space for each field. You can then enter conditions for each field to be included in the query. For example, to find all records where the age field is greater than 65, you type >65 in the age field. Once you use the Query by Example technique to create a .QBE file in Paradox or Database Desktop, you can run the QBE query from Quattro Pro. Use Insert, External Data, Table Query, then specify a .QBE file or a QBE query in a notebook selection. A QBE query in a notebook selection always starts with the word Query and ends with the word EndQuery. The best way to learn the QBE syntax is to create queries in Database Desktop or Paradox, import them into Quattro Pro, then experiment by revising them.

To use Query By Example 1 Click Insert, External Data, Table Query. 2 Enable one of the following buttons: Query in File — indicates that the query is located in a .QBE file Query in Selection — indicates that the query is located in a notebook selection

296


3 Type the location of the query in the Query File box. 4 Select the destination for the query results in the Destination box. The QBE query and the database table must be in your working directory. For information about setting up a working directory, see “Assigning aliases for private and working directories” on page 297. You can make a query selection easy to read by setting the font for the QBE selection to a non-proportional font, such as Courier.

Assigning aliases for private and working directories An alias is a shortcut name that takes the place of a long path name. When using external database tables, it is convenient to assign aliases for your private and working directories. A private directory is a location for your temporary answer tables and other nonshared files. A working directory is where a database application or a feature looks for external database tables.

To assign aliases for private and working directories 1 Click Insert, External Data, Aliases. 2 In the Private Directory box, type the path for your private directory. 3 In the Working Directory box, type the path for your working directory. You can click the Browse button to insert a path.

Importing data from external databases When you need to work with data stored in databases created in other software applications, you can import the data to save the work of retyping it or opening a large database as a spreadsheet file. You can import database files with up to 1,000,000 records. You can work with external database tables in Quattro Pro. Database tables contain data extracted from a database, arranged in a specified sequence. Tables are useful when your database contains a large amount of data and you need to work with only a certain portion of it. You can link to or import external database tables. You can also control the amount of information that you import by joining or filtering database tables. You can access and retrieve data from Paradox, dBASE, or any Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Borland Database Engine (BDE) data Using databases

297

source, provided there is a full conformance 32-bit ODBC or IDAPI driver installed for that data source. When using an ODBC driver to access data, password-protection is an issue for the driver. For information about the installation and conformance level of a specific driver, refer to the driver documentation. ODBC and IDAPI drivers may be purchased separately from a third party.

Inserting external databases You can insert into Quattro Pro databases created with other software applications. If the external database file has more than 1,000,000 records, close the file when you are done, but do not save it. If you save the file, records that are not displayed are lost.

To insert external databases 1 Click File, Open. 2 In the Open File dialog box, choose the database file. If no ODBC sources are listed in the Data Type list, you need to add them. Click Start, Settings, Control Panel. Click ODBC. If no Borland Database Engine (BDE) sources (also called aliases) are listed, you can create them. Click Start, Programs, WordPerfect Office 2000, Utilities, Borland Database Engine 5.01.

You can also insert external databases by clicking Insert, External Data, Import Database File. You can also insert external databases using an Expert. For information about importing external databases using an Expert, see “Importing external database tables” on page 299.

Linking to external database tables You can insert external database tables as linked data into notebooks using Table Link. Changes made in the source data are reflected in the linked table when you reopen it. You can open files with .DB or .DBF extensions directly in Quattro Pro and edit them as if they were spreadsheets, as long as they do not contain index or memo files. Quattro Pro can also create new .DB and .DBF files.

298


For best results, use Database Desktop to work with external database tables. For information about using Database Desktop, see “Using Database Desktop” on page 302.

To link to external database tables 1 Click Insert, External Data, Table Link. 2 Select the cell location for the linked database table in the Table Link dialog box. 3 Click the Browse button in the Table box. 4 Choose the database file in the Open File dialog box. 5 Click the Open button. 6 Click OK. You can also link to external database tables by clicking the Table Link button on the Data Manipulation toolbar . For information about the Data Manipulation Toolbar, see “Working with toolbars” on page 24. You can use @TABLELINK to link directly to an external database table, which allows you to specify the number of columns and rows to display. For information about using spreadsheet functions, see “Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123.

Importing external database tables You can choose the type of database tables to import from external databases. You can import data from Paradox, Borland Database Engine (BDE), or ODBC. You have several options when importing database tables from external databases. You can display duplicate rows of information in the data you import. For example, if the imported data lists all customers who have ordered books, any customers who have ordered more than one book are listed on a new row for each book. You can include field names as column headings in the first row of data you import.

To import external database tables 1 Click Insert, External Data, Expert. 2 Choose the type of the data you are going to import from the Data Type drop down list box. Using databases

299

3 Type the path where the database is stored in the Database Path box. 4 Click the Next button. 5 Enable the tables to import in the Select Tables dialog box. 6 Click the Next button. 7 Double-click the fields to import in the Available Fields section of the Set Criteria dialog box. 8 Select a destination for the import results in the Destination box. 9 Click the Finish button. You can change the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list by clicking the Arrow Up button or the Arrow Down button. The Arrow Up button moves the highlighted field up one position; the Arrow Down button moves the highlighted field down one position. You can remove a field from the Selected Fields list by selecting the field then clicking the Trash Can button. You can update imported data that has changed in the original database. To do this, click a spreadsheet cell containing the data, then click Insert, External Data, Expert, Finish.

To set import options for external database tables 1 Click Insert, External Data, Expert. 2 Click Options in the Set Criteria dialog box. 3 Enable any of the following check boxes in the Import Options dialog box: Allow Duplicate Rows — displays duplicate rows of information in the data you import Include Column Headings — displays field names as column headings in the first row of data you import Keep Query Definition — maintains the parameters you specify the next time you import data tables from external databases

Joining and filtering external database tables You can join two or more data tables from external databases. When using more than one table, you must join common fields in the tables, even if they have different field names, to avoid duplicating their records in the data you import. For example, if two tables contain the same customer identification field, you should use the customer identification field to join the tables.

300


Because external databases can contain a large amount of information, it is useful to minimize the amount of information that you import, retrieving only the portions of data you want. For example, you can list only those customers who have ordered a particular book so that you can send them a letter announcing the sequel.

To join external database tables 1 Click Insert, External Data, Expert. 2 Select the tables to join. 3 Click Query Properties in the Set Criteria dialog box. 4 Click the Joins tab in the Query Properties dialog box. 5 Choose a field from the first Field list. 6 Choose the common field from the second Field list. 7 Select = from the Operator list. 8 Click OK. 9 Click the Finish button. You can join more than two tables by clicking And, then repeating the above steps.

To filter external database tables 1 Click Insert, External Data, Expert. 2 Click Query Properties in the Set Criteria dialog box.. 3 Click the Filters tab in the Query Properties dialog box. 4 Choose the field you want to filter from the Criteria Field list box. 5 Select an operator (such as = or >) from the Operator list. 6 Enable the List Values check box to list a few sample values from the selected field in the Value list, then select one of those values, or type a value. 7 Click OK. 8 Click the Finish button.

Using databases

301

Click And to narrow the filter results. For example, you can generate a list of customers who have a credit limit above a specified amount and who live in a certain city. Click Or to broaden the filter results. For example, you can generate a list of customers who live in a certain city or who bought a specified product. Click Clear to clear the filter criteria and start again.

Opening password-protected tables You can open password-protected tables. For security, as you type the password, the pound symbol (#) represents the characters you type. When you import a password-protected database file by clicking Insert, External Data, Import Database File or by clicking File, Open, the password for the table is discarded when you close the file. When you perform a Query by Example query using Insert, External Data, Table Query, the password is functional until you exit Quattro Pro.

To open password-protected tables 1 Click File, Open. 2 Type the password for the table in the Password dialog box. 3 Click one of the following buttons: Add — stores the password in memory so that if other tables you want to query require the same password, you can open them without re-entering the password Remove — releases the password from memory so that if any table you want to query requires the password, you must re-enter the password to open it Remove All — deletes all passwords from memory so that you must enter a password for any protected table you want to query

Using Database Desktop Database Desktop lets you create, view, sort, modify, and query database tables in a variety of Paradox, dBASE, and Structured Query Language (SQL) formats. Using Database Desktop, you can view and query databases add, edit, and delete database records copy data from an external database into Quattro Pro

302


create new dBASE or Paradox databases link external database data to corresponding data in Quattro Pro, and have your notebook updated whenever the database changes query external databases from Quattro Pro and have the results returned directly to the notebook Database Desktop is installed only when you install WordPerfect Office 2000 using a custom installation. Read the help information provided with Database Desktop to find out about its features.

Installing Database Desktop The Database Desktop program is installed only with the custom installation of WordPerfect Office 2000, not with the typical installation. You can use Install As You Go to access Database Desktop if you have installed WordPerfect Office 2000 using the typical installation.

To install Database Desktop 1 Click Insert, External Data, Database Desktop. 2 Follow the directions for Install As You Go.

Using Database Desktop help A complete online Help guide is available when you start Database Desktop. Help for Database Desktop is available if you have performed a custom installation of WordPerfect Office 2000 and have selected Additional Help Files.

To use Database Desktop help 1 Click Insert, External Data, Database Desktop. 2 Click Help, User Guide Topics. 3 Click one of the following tabs: Contents — browses the online help by chapter Index — searches for topics in the index Find — finds help topics based on a keyword

Using databases

303

PRESENTING SPREADSHEET DATA IN A CHART

12

You can make charts from data contained in your spreadsheet. A chart presents a set of data as a picture. It may uncover a trouble spot, display a trend, or illustrate a correlation between categories of data in your spreadsheet. Using charts to analyze your data is faster and easier than examining the data cell by cell. Quattro Pro provides several different chart types. Certain chart types are best suited for specific types of data, and each basic chart type can be displayed in various ways, such as 2-D, 3-D, or rotated. You can customize the various aspects of a chart to suit your requirements, and manage and share the chart within notebooks and with other applications. For more information about specific chart types, see: “Working with line and area charts” on page 312 “Working with bar charts” on page 317 “Working with pie, doughnut, and column charts” on page 322 “Working with specialty charts” on page 327 “Working with bullet charts” on page 341 “Working with analytical charts” on page 345

Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

305

Choosing a charting tool A chart presents a set of data as a picture. It may uncover a trouble spot, display a trend, or illustrate a correlation between categories of data in your notebook. You can create floating charts or window charts. Both appear on the Objects sheet as icons. Quattro Pro gives you three options for creating a chart: QuickChart — a button you can click to create a floating chart; Quattro Pro chooses the most appropriate chart type based on the selected data. Chart Expert — a Quattro Pro expert that helps you create floating and window charts from start to finish; you enter data at each stage of the creation process. The Chart Expert can also select a chart type based on the selected data. custom charting tool — a tool you use to create a window chart from scratch; you enter the data and select all chart options manually. Using any chart tool, you can create area, line, bar, pie, doughnut and column, or specialty charts. “Expert’s Choice” is the chart type Quattro Pro selects when you use the QuickChart button or the Chart Expert tool.

Creating charts with the QuickChart button Use the QuickChart button to create a chart on a notebook sheet using defaults, including a chart type selected by Quattro Pro. For more information on selecting data to use in a chart, see “Selecting chart data” on page 308.

To create a floating chart 1 Select the cells you want to plot. If surrounding cells contain explanatory labels that you want to use as axis or legend labels, include them in the selection. 2 Click the QuickChart tool, then drag over the area of the notebook sheet to where you want to place the chart. If you click the notebook sheet instead of dragging the mouse, Quattro Pro creates a default chart. 3 Release the mouse button to create the chart.

Creating charts The Chart Expert prompts you to provide specific information to automatically create a chart. It lets you choose a chart type or, using Expert’s Choice, Quattro Pro selects an appropriate chart type based on the selected

306


data. For more information about selecting data to use in a chart, see “Selecting chart data” on page 308.For helpful information while you create the chart, click the Tip button in the Chart Expert.

To create a chart using the Chart Expert 1 Select the cells containing the data you want to plot, including any column labels. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Follow Chart Expert steps. The chart name is displayed in the Chart List and next to the chart icon on the Objects sheet. If you are creating many charts in a notebook, having charts named Chart 1, Chart 2, etc., may be confusing.

To reverse the order of a series or switch columns and rows, enable the Reverse Series or Row/Column Swap check box. This feature is useful in 3-D bar and unstacked charts when a series with high values is plotted at the front of the chart, obscuring the other series. Another way to assign cell series is to type the coordinates in the series box.

Creating custom charts The New Custom Chart tool lets you choose what to include and exclude in a chart, from selecting the chart type to specifying the spreadsheet data. For example, when no chart type is selected, Quattro Pro automatically assigns a chart type based on the number of data points and series you entered. If you omit titles, the chart does not display titles for axes or series data by default.

To create a chart from scratch 1 Right-click the spreadsheet, then click New Custom Chart. 2 Click the Pointer button to select the cells on the notebook sheet that you want to include in the series. You can select a single cell, a contiguous selection, or noncontiguous selections. 3 Click the Type tab, choose a chart category from the Category list, then click an icon to choose a chart type.


307

If no chart type is selected, Quattro Pro assigns one. 4 Click the Titles tab to enter the Title, Subtitle, and chart axes titles. If no titles are entered, no axes or series titles will be displayed. 5 Click the Name tab to enter a name for the chart in the Chart Name box. If no name is entered, Quattro Pro assigns a default name (for example, Chart 1). The chart name is displayed in the Chart List and next to the chart icon on the Objects sheet. If you are creating many charts in a notebook, having charts named Chart 1, Chart 2, etc., may be confusing.

To reverse the order of a series or switch columns and rows, enable the Reverse Series or Row/Column Swap check box. This feature is useful in 3-D bar and unstacked charts when a series with high values is plotted at the front of the chart obscuring the other series. Another way to assign cell series is to type the coordinates in the series boxes. For more information on selecting data to use in a chart, see “Selecting chart data” on page 308.

Selecting chart data Every chart you create must have at least one data series. A data series is a set of numbers representing the values of something being measured or reported. To create a chart, you must select a data series on your spreadsheet to use in a chart, and ensure the data is organized in the way that produces the chart you want.

Selecting a data series You can select a data series by pointing before you create a chart, when using the Chart Expert, or within the Series dialog box. You can select rows, columns, and noncontiguous blocks in a single series. Blank columns and rows can create a series of zero values that may skew your chart; delete them or exclude them from your selection before you create the chart.

308


To select a data series 1 Click the Pointer button to the right of a Chart data box in the Step 1 of 5 window in the Chart Expert. The chart and the Step 1 of 5 window move behind the notebook. The current coordinates for the series are highlighted on the notebook. 2 Drag to select the cells. 3 Do one of the following to return to the Chart Expert: Click the Maximize button in the Chart Expert title bar. After selecting a data series, press ENTER. 4 Do one of the following: Click the Next button to go to the next Chart Expert window. Repeat steps 1 to 3 again to re-select the data series. You can use the Pointer button to select a cell or a group of cells by clicking a cell on the spreadsheet, then dragging to select the cells, rows, and columns desired. If you want to select a non-contiguous block of cells, hold down the CTRL key as you select cells by pointing. Double-click the Chart data box to minimize the Step 1 of 5 window. This hides the Chart Expert behind the spreadsheet so that you can select your data without obstructions.

Setting up your data axes All charts except pie, doughnut, and column charts have two references for plotting data: the x-axis and the y-axis. The x-axis is a horizontal line at the bottom of the chart pane with fixed reference points; the column labels in your data series are used for x-axis labels to explain what each data series represents. Y-axis labels show the values being represented. Depending on the data series, Quattro Pro determines the range and increment amounts of the y-axis. If your y-axis range is greater than 1000, you can use the Show Units option to simplify the scale and add a title beside the y-axis (for example “(thousands)”). There are a few exceptions to this format: Rotated charts have a vertical x-axis and a horizontal y-axis. Quattro Pro reverses the axes of rotated charts automatically.


309

In XY charts (scatter diagrams), the x-axis series is data, not labels. Quattro Pro scales the x-axis to match the data. When you right-click the x-axis of an XY chart and click Properties, the properties match the y-axis properties. If the chart is a 2-D bar, line, or area chart, you can assign any series to a secondary y-axis, which appears on the right side of the chart. You can select specific series for x and y axes when you create a custom chart. For more information about creating a custom chart, see “Creating custom charts” on page 307.

Assigning chart data How Quattro Pro plots your data depends on the range and values of the cells you select before you create the chart. When the selection contains more rows than columns or an equal number of rows and columns: Quattro Pro plots each column as a single series. If the first series contains labels, the labels are placed along the x-axis. This column of labels is called the x-axis series. If the first row contains labels, these labels are used in the chart legend. This row is called the legend series. When a selection contains more columns than rows: Quattro Pro plots each row as a single series. If the first row (the first series) contains labels, these labels become the x-axis series. If the first column contains labels, these labels become the legend series. Blank columns and rows can create a series of zero values that may skew the chart; delete them or exclude them from your selection before you create the chart. If you have noncontiguous selections, Quattro Pro uses the dimensions of the first selection to determine whether to plot rows or columns. If you specify a 3-D selection, Quattro Pro starts the selection with the row or column from the first sheet, then appends the corresponding cells from succeeding sheets to form the series. For example, if you select A..C:B3..D11, the first series is A..C:B3..B11, the second series is A..C:C3..C11, and the third series is A..C:D3..D11. Pie charts, doughnut charts, column charts, and 3-D area charts plot negative numbers as positive values.

310


To add series to a chart on a notebook sheet 1 Select the cells. 2 Point to an edge of the selected cells until you see a four-way arrow. 3 Drag the cells over the chart. 4 Release the mouse button while the pointer is over the chart. If you drop the series while the mouse pointer is not over a chart, you move the cells to where the pointer rests.

Adding linked data to charts You can display the data from linked cells on the chart. This is useful when you use a chart type that shows information that lacks specific numeric content (for example, in a surface chart). If you select multiple cells, a linked picture of them appears on the chart. If you select a single cell, the data in that cell displays on the chart (for example, the number in the cell). The cells in the chart update with any changes you make to the data or properties of the notebook cells.

To add data to a chart 1 Select a chart. 2 Double-click the chart (so you see a thick outline around the chart). 3 Click Insert, Link to Cells. 4 Drag a rectangle on the chart where you want the data to appear, then release the mouse button. 5 Click the Pointer button next to the Select Cells box in the Link Cells dialog box, then choose the cell or group of cells you want to display. 6 Enable one or both of the following check boxes in the Border Options section: Row Borders Column Borders 7 Enable one or both of the following check boxes in the Grid Lines section: Horizontal


311

Vertical 8 Enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box in the Display Scaling section to match the same aspect ratio used on the notebook. You cannot select noncontiguous selections with the Link to Cells tool.

Working with line and area charts Line charts plot series values as points, then connect the points in each series with a line. You can customize markers, line styles, and other properties by right-clicking a line and clicking Properties. Area charts (except 3-D, unstacked area charts) plot cumulative rather than individual values. The first series is plotted without modification. The second series is plotted using the top of the first series as the baseline. The third series is charted on top of the second, and so forth. You can modify chart properties such as the type of analysis performed on a series, and fill and border settings for the data series. For more information about modifying chart properties, see “Editing x and y axes” on page 365. Lines charts and 3-D Floating Marker charts have additional properties that you can modify. For information about modifying line charts, see “Modifying line charts” on page 315 and “Modifying 3-D Floating Marker charts” on page 316.

2-D line and area charts include: hows how values change over time. This simple chart, the 2-D line chart is easy to read when there are many data series plotted. Rotated Line charts shows the pattern of values over time, but the x-axis and y-axis positions are reversed. The rotation leaves more room for long x-axis labels. 2-D area charts shows how each series affects the all the data over time. Although only the first line plotted is an accurate pattern (a dip in a further series might appear as a rise if values beneath it are high), the size of the area corresponding to each series represents its contribution to the whole.

312


Rotated Area charts shows the series contribution to the data results represented by the width of each series. This chart type reverses the x and y axes, so areas are stacked side by side.

3-D line and area charts include: Ribbon charts shows line charts plotted on 3-D grids, with each line flattened out into a segmented ribbon. Ribbon charts are good for showing trends over time, but individual points are less visible than on standard line charts. 3-D area charts shows series plotted as 3-D areas inside a 3-D grid. 3-D unstacked area charts shows changes over time. It plots actual series values, not cumulative values. The first series is plotted at the back of the chart; additional series are drawn in front of it. Like line charts, 3-D unstacked area charts are useful for showing changes over time. 3-D floating marker charts show each point in a series, but individual points are not connected (as they are on a standard line chart). Floating solid shapes (cubes, spheres, pyramids, diamonds, hexa-diamonds, or octa-diamonds) represent the points against a 3-D grid. This chart type is not available in the Chart Expert, but you can convert an existing chart into a 3-D floating marker chart. For information about creating 3-D floating marker charts, see “Creating 3-D floating marker charts” on page 315.

Creating line charts Use this procedure to create line, rotated line, and ribbon charts.

To create a line chart 1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally


313

Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series) 4 Click the Next button, then click the Line or Area chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Next, then click one of the following icons: Regular — creates a 2-D line or rotated 2-D line chart 3-D — creates a ribbon chart 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, then choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Creating area charts Use this procedure to create 2-D or 3-D area charts.

To create an area chart 1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series) 4 Click the Next button, then click the Line or Area chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Next, then click one of the following icons:

314


3-D — creates a 3-D unstacked area chart Stacked — creates a 2-D area chart or a 3-D area chart. 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Creating 3-D floating marker charts This type of chart is a modification of an existing chart, and is not available in the Chart Expert.

To create a 3-D chart with floating markers 1

Select a chart that contains multiple data series.

2 Click Chart, Type/Layout. 3 Choose Area/Line from the Category list. 4 Click the 3-D Floating Marker chart icon.

Modifying line charts You can customize each line in a line chart using Line Series Properties. You can modify options, the type of analysis performed on the data series, the marker style, as well as color and fill style options.

To change the marker style of a line series 1 Select a chart on a notebook sheet. 2 Right-click a series and click Properties. 3 Click the Marker Style tab, then click a marker icon. 4 Do one of the following:


315

Enable the AutoSize check box to let Quattro Pro size the marker in proportion to the rest of the chart, with a default size of five. Disable the AutoSize check box to enlarge the marker manually, then move the Weight slider to create a larger or smaller marker. 5 Repeat this procedure for all the other series.

To change the line style 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in the previous procedure. 2 Click the Line Settings tab. 3 Do one of the following: Choose a line color from the on-screen color palette. Click a line style icon. Clicking None will display only series markers, not the line. For more information about modifying the kinds of analysis a line displays, see “Working with analytical charts” on page 345. For more information about modifying the line color and fill, see “Changing colors and fill of chart objects” on page 382.

Modifying 3-D Floating Marker charts You can modify a 3-D Floating Marker chart just like any other 3-D chart. You can also modify the shape and size of the floating markers used to show specific data points. When you modify a floating marker, all the floating markers on the chart will display the same property settings.

To change the shape of float and markers 1 Select the 3-D floating marker chart, then right-click Float Series Properties. 2 Click the Float Style tab, then click the Floating Marker Type icon that matches the shape you want. 3 Click an icon in the Cross Section View to select the 3-D shape. 4 Move the Weight Slider to increase or decrease the size of the floating markers.

316


Working with bar charts Bar charts show each value in a series as a bar. Values are plotted against the y-axis scale; the taller the bar, the greater the value. You can modify bar chart properties. including the bar width, the bar margin percentage, and the bar overlap options. In 3-D bar charts, you can also select different 3-D risers (or bar shapes). For more information about modifying bar chart properties, see “Modifying bar charts” on page 321.

2-D bar chart types include: 2-D bar shows each series value as a bar plotted against the y-axis scale. When you plot more than one series, the bars appear side by side, providing a good comparison of corresponding values in different series. Rotated Bar emphasizes that values “move forward,” rather than increase by plotting values as horizontal bars. This is also a good choice if you have long x-axis labels.

3-D bar chart types include: 3-D bar shows series values as columns, with square tops and bases on a three-dimensional grid. The first series is plotted across the front of the chart from left to right. Bars that represent additional series are plotted, in order, in front of the first series. Rotated 3-D bar shows series values as horizontal columns on a 3-D grid. The first series is plotted at the back of the chart, and additional series are drawn in front of the first series. Unlike standard 3-D bar charts that display legend text along the z-axis, a rotated 3-D bar chart has a legend box. 2.5-D bar shows the values in each series as vertical bars that project from the front to the back of a 3-D grid. Rotated 2.5-D bar shows the values in each series as horizontal bars that project from the front to the back of a 3-D grid. The first value in the first series is plotted on the base of the chart, and corresponding values of additional series are layered on top, in order. Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

317

Step similar to 3-D bar charts, but adjacent bars touch to emphasize the progression of values in the series. The step chart serves the same purpose as a 3-D unstacked area chart, but the steps emphasize individual values. Multiple bar plots each series in its own small bar chart to provide side-by-side comparisons of different sets of data. Although each series looks like a separate chart, it is really one chart. Each unit displays the same y-axis scale, x-axis divisions, and so forth. Any changes to one chart are reflected in the others. You can plot as many series as you like in a multiple bar chart, but the size for each series gets smaller as you add new series.

Working with stacked bar charts Stacked bar charts show the relationship of each value to the total, for example, how total sales are divided between regions. You can also modify stacked bar charts properties. including the bar width, margin percentage, and overlap options. In 3-D bar charts, you can also select different 3-D risers (or bar shapes). For more information about modifying stacked bar chart properties, see “Modifying bar charts” on page 321.

Stacked bar charts include: Stacked bar plots the corresponding values of different series in vertical stacks, showing both the total reached by the combined values and the contribution of each value to the total. The first series is plotted on the bottom; additional series are stacked on top, in order. Stacked bar charts may be 2-D or rotated 2-D. 100% stacked bar charts shows the relationship of each value to the total by displaying the percentage of the total contributed by each series. They may be 2-D, rotated 2-D, 3-D, or rotated 3-D. 3-D stacked bar shows individual and cumulative values. The first series is plotted on the base of a 3-D grid; additional series are stacked on top. 3-D stacked bar charts may be rotated. Comparison has lines connecting the boundaries between series. This makes it easier to compare series values or proportions from one bar to

318


the next. They may be stacked bar or 100% stacked bar charts, 2-D, or rotated 2-D.

Creating bar charts Using the Chart Expert, you can create two general bar charts: bar, and rotated bar.

To create a bar chart 1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. Select multiple data series if you want to create multiple bar charts. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series) 4 Click the Next button, then click the Bar chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 The Next button, then click one of the following icons: Regular — creates a 2-D bar, 2.5-D bar, or 3-D bar chart Multiple — creates multiple bar charts 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.


319

To create a rotated bar chart with the Chart Expert 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure. 2 Click the Next button, then click the Rotated Bar chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 3 Click the Next button, then click an icon in the following list: Regular — creates rotated bar, rotated 2.5-D bar, or rotated 3-D bar chart. 4 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 5 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 6 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Creating stacked bar charts You create 2-D, 3-D, or rotated stacked bar charts with the Chart Expert.

To create a stacked bar chart 1 Select the cells to plot in your chart. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally. Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series) 4 Click the Next button, then click the Bar chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Click the Next button, then click one of the following icons:

320


Stacked — creates 2-D stacked bar, comparison stacked bar, or 3-D stacked bar chart 100% Stacked — creates 2-D 100% stacked bar, 100% stacked bar comparison, or a 2.5-D stacked bar. 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Modifying bar charts Bar Series Properties let you change the bar width, margin percentage, and overlap options. In 3-D bar charts, you can also select different 3-D risers (or bar shapes).

To modify a bar chart 1 Select a bar chart. 2 Right-click a bar series, then click Bar Series Properties. 3 Click any of the following tabs: Series Options — controls the way the selected series is plotted Bar Options — sets the width, spacing, and overlap of all bars in the graph Riser Style — controls you change the shape of the 3-D bars Fill Settings — sets the type of fill for the bars in the series Border Settings — sets the line thickness of the border and the border color For information about modifying 3-D charts, see “Working with 3-D charts” on page 356.


321

Working with pie, doughnut, and column charts Pie, doughnut, and column charts plot a single series. Each value is plotted as a percentage of the whole and negative values are plotted as though they were positive. You can modify the layout and change the way labels display in these charts. You can use the drawing tools in the chart window to add graphics and text to the center (hole) of doughnut charts. With pie charts and doughnut charts, you can explode slices (or separate them from the whole pie) to emphasize the data in that slice. Pie charts include: Pie plots each value in a series as a slice of the pie. 2-D multiple pie displays different data series as side-by-side pie charts. Use this chart type to show the proportion of individual values to the whole, and how these proportions change from series to series. 3-D pie plots each value in a series as a slice of the pie; the pie has a thicker look for a more dramatic appearance. 3-D Multiple Pie displays different data series as side by side 3-D pie charts. Use this chart type to show the proportion of each value to the whole, and how these proportions change from series to series.

Doughnut charts include: Doughnut plots each value in a series as a slice of a doughnut (ring) shape. They can be either 2-D or 3-D.

Column charts include: Column represents values as sections of a vertical bar. The first value in the series is plotted on the bottom; additional series are stacked on top, in order. 3-D column plots series values as sections of a column. Like the 2-D version, 3-D column charts plot series values from the bottom up.

322


2-D multiple column displays each series as an individual column chart. Like multiple pie charts, multiple column charts show the proportion of individual values to the whole, and how these proportions change from series to series. In addition, the column arrangement leaves more room for labels. 3-D multiple column plots each series as individual 3-D column charts. They serve the same purpose as 2-D multiple column charts.

Creating pie charts With the Chart Expert, you can create 2-D and 3-D pie charts.

To create a pie chart 1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. (Select multiple data series if you want to create multiple pie charts. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Click the Next button, then click the Pie Chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 4 The Next button, then click one of the following icons: Regular — creates a 2-D pie chart or 3-D pie chart Multiple — creates multiple 2-D pie charts or multiple 3-D pie charts. 5 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis 6 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 7 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Creating doughnut charts You can create 2-D or 3-D doughnut charts with the Quattro Pro Chart Expert. The following is an example of a doughnut chart:


323

This doughnut chart shows the percentage of t-shirts sold in different sizes.

To create a doughnut chart 1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Click the Next button, then click the Pie Chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 4 The Next button, then click one the following icon: Doughnut — creates a 2-D doughnut chart or 3-D doughnut chart 5 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis 6 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 7 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Creating column charts You can create a column chart with the Chart Expert, including displaying the series in reverse order. The number of data series selected in step 1 of the procedure reflect the number of column charts created.

324


To create a column chart 1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. (Select more than one data series if you want to create multiple column charts.) 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Enable the Reverse Series check box to display the series in reverse order. 4 Click the Next button, then click the Bar chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Click the Next button, then click one of the following icons: Multiple Columns — creates 2-D column charts 3-D column charts — creates a 3-D column chart 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Modifying pie, doughnut, and column charts You can modify pie, doughnut, and column chart layouts. By default, the label for each slice of a pie or doughnut, or section of a column chart, shows what percentage the segment contributes to the whole. A tick mark connects the label and the slice or column section. When you define an x-axis series for one of these chart types, its labels appear next to the percentages.

To change the layout of a pie, doughnut, or column chart 1 Select the chart, and click Chart, Type/Layout. 2 Choose a pie, doughnut, or column chart type, then click the desired chart type icon.


325

To change the labels in a pie, doughnut or column chart 1 Select the chart. 2 Right-click the chart, then click Chart Properties. 3 Click Label Options. 4 Enable one of the following Data Label buttons: Currency — shows the values in dollars Percent — shows the data as a percentage of the value of the whole series. (default) Value — shows the actual data that appears in the spreadsheet page None — no value are displayed next to the slice 5 Disable the Show Tick check box to prevent ticks displaying on the chart if necessary. (Be sure to do this if you selected the None option in step 3.) 6 Click any of the following tabs to customize label text: Text Settings — change fill style, color, and background color Text Font — change font face, size, or appearance.

Exploding a pie or doughnut chart slice An exploded slice of a pie or doughnut chart is separated from the rest of the chart for emphasis. You cannot explode column segments. This example shows a slice exploding from a pie chart.

To explode a chart 1 Select the chart, and right-click Pie Chart Properties.

326


2 Click the Explode Slice tab. 3 Move the Explode Distance slider to set the distance (a percentage of the pie or doughnut radius). Type a percentage of the chart radius in the box next to the Explode Distance slider.

Working with specialty charts Quattro Pro lets you create specialized charts for your spreadsheets, including surface and combination charts. Specialty charts often require special consideration when organizing your data. Specialty charts include: XY plots data against two scaling axes. High-Low is mostly used for tracking daily stock market prices. Radar plots circles with a line for each x-axis value extending from the center to the edge, like the spokes of a wheel. Y-axis values for each series are charted on the spokes. Variance shows how the values in each series deviate from the zero line, which is an arbitrary baseline you choose using the Scale property.

Surface charts include: 3-D surface shades the area between each series with a different color. 3-D shaded surface shades a single-colored surface as though a light is shining down from directly above the chart. Flat areas, where values are the same from series to series, or from one point to another in the same series, are lightest. Areas where there are great differences between adjacent values have the darkest shading.

327


3-D contour has shading that follows the grid lines, making it easy to compare points on the surface with values on the y-axis scale.

The next two chart types are combination charts: Line bar and area bar mixes bars, lines, and areas in the same chart to highlight a series or contrast between different series in the chart. Quattro Pro builds these combination charts automatically. High-Low bar is used when showing stock market activity and volume (number of shares exchanged that day). The bar in a High-Low chart represents the volume. Quattro Pro also lets you create bullet charts. These can be text charts suitable for inserting in slide shows, analytical charts for pointing out trends and patterns in data series, and 3-D charts. (3-D charts is not a specific chart type, but charts of this type have additional customization options.

Working with XY charts XY charts have x-axis series that contain numeric data rather than text labels. The y-axis scale is calculated from the data in all the other series you plot. Each series value is plotted as a pair of coordinates. The first coordinate is an x-axis series value; it determines where the data point is placed relative to the x-axis. The second coordinate is the corresponding value in the series you are plotting; it gives the data point’s position relative to the y-axis. For example, if you have a spreadsheet where the first column is the x-axis series, (with values 1, 2, 3, 4) and the other two columns are plotted as the first and second series, (with the values 1, 2. 3. 4 and 10, 20, 30, 40), Quattro Pro plots the values in the first series as (1,1), (2,2), (3,3), and (4,4). The coordinates of the second series are (1,10), (2, 20), (3, 30), and (4, 40). An XY chart.

328


XY charts are useful for illustrating statistical trends. You can also plot frequency distributions and regression analyses. For more information on adding these features to an XY chart, see “Working with analytical charts” on page 345.

Creating XY charts You create an XY chart with the Chart Expert. Quattro Pro automatically designates an x-axis series only when the series contains labels. If the x-axis series contains dates, the XY chart plots the data against the serial number of each date.

To create an XY chart 1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series) 4 Click the Next button, then click the Line/Area chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Click the Next button, then click the XY chart icon in the Specific Chart Type list. 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.


329

Modifying XY charts You can modify XY charts the same way as you modify other charts. You can also display an XY chart as a Scatterplot chart, where the XY chart displays only the data points, not the connecting line between the points.

To create a scatterplot chart 1 Select the XY chart. 2 Right-click a line series to change. 3 Click the Line Settings tab, then click the None icon.

Working with High-Low charts High-Low (open-close) charts are often used to track daily stock prices. You need at least two series to create this type of chart (to represent the highest and lowest price a stock reached each day). To create a “bar and whisker” High-Low chart, you need at least four series (the two additional series represent the opening and closing prices for the stock each day). How Quattro Pro plots additional series depends on the number series you assign to the chart. If you plot...

Result...

Three series

The third series shows the close data (the price of the stock at the end of the business day). This data is shown as a tick mark to the right of the I-beam.

Four series

The third series shows the open data (the price of the stock at the beginning of the day) and the fourth series shows the close data. Each open value is shown as a tick mark to the left of the I-beam, and each close value is shown as a tick mark to the right of the I-beam.

More than four series

Additional series are plotted as lines (as though they were part of a line chart).

A common use for the fifth series is to display the volume data, or number of shares of stock that changed hands that day. Volume data is usually much larger than High-Low data, so the High-Low data does not show up well in the chart. The High-Low-bar chart has special formatting to deal with this problem. High-Low-bar charts plot the first four series as regular High-Low charts. The fifth series, however, is plotted as bars against the secondary y-axis. The secondary y-axis scale is adjusted to plot the bars on the lower quarter of the chart, where the bars are unlikely to cover the High-Low values. To do this, Quattro Pro calculates the high and increment values for the secondary y-axis, then multiplies them by four (the increment adjustment makes the scale less crowded).

330


A sample of a High-Low chart.

High-Low marker styles Quattro Pro offers four High-Low marker styles: Style...

Description...

Bar style (the default)

A “bar and whisker” or “candle” chart. A line connects high and low values and a bar spans the open and close values. When the close value is higher than the open value, the bar is white. When the open value is higher than the close value, the bar is blue. (Retain this light and dark relationship if you change fill colors.)

I-Beam

Shows high and low values at each end of an I-beam. Open and close are represented by left and right tick marks.

Line

Connects corresponding high and low values with a line, and shows open and close values as left and right tick marks.

Marker

Assigns different-colored markers to high, low, open, and close values, and connects each set of corresponding values with a line.

A High-Low chart using the Marker style.


331

Creating High-Low charts You can create a 2-D High-Low chart using the following procedure. The default marker style is Bar which displays the data using bars and whiskers or candle symbols. If you want a different marker style, you must modify the markers. For information about changing the marker style, see “Modifying a High-Low chart” on page 333.

To create a High-Low chart with the Chart Expert 1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series) 4 Click the Next button, then click the Specialty chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Click the Next button, then click the High-Low chart icon in the Specific Chart Type list. 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Creating a volume series for a High-Low chart Use this procedure to create a High-Low chart with a volume (fifth) series. This series is plotted against the second y-axis. Once the chart displays the volume series, you can also plot the volume data on the primary y-axis.

332


To add a volume series to a High-Low chart 1 Right-click the notebook sheet, then click New Chart Window. 2 Assign cells to each series by pointing, then click OK. 3 Click Chart, Type/Layout. 4 For Category, click Bar. 5 Click the High-Low-Bar icon.

To plot volume data on the primary axis of a High-Low chart 1 Select a High-Low chart containing a volume series. 2 Right-click the volume series in the legend, then click Line Properties. 3 Enable the Primary button in the Y-Axis section. For more information on using multiple y-axes, see “Adding another y-axis to charts” on page 374.

Modifying a High-Low chart You can modify the style of a High-Low chart by changing the series style; for example, a line series can become a marker or I-beam series. When you change the style of one series, all series (except the volume series) in the chart are changed. You can also customize the marker style, or shapes, used to mark the points on a High-Low chart.

To change the style of a High-Low chart 1 Select a chart on a notebook sheet. 2 Right-click any High-Low marker, and click Bar Series Properties. 3 Click the Hi-Lo Bar Style tab. 4 Enable one of the following bar styles: bar I-beam line marker

To change the marker style of a High-Low chart 1 Select a High-Low chart.


333

2 Right-click the first marker in the series (usually the marker closest to the x and y axes), and click Bar Series Properties. 3 Click the Marker Style tab. 4 Choose one or both of the following options: Marker Style icons — changes the shape and type of the marker AutoSize — a check box that gives the markers a standard size 5 If AutoSize is disabled, move the Weight slider to increase or decrease the size of the markers.

Working with radar charts Radar charts can highlight trends. Growth trends show as outward spirals; static or fluctuating trends look more like circles or stars. Radar charts can also simplify series comparisons; the series with the highest values occupies the most area. You can customize radar chart markers and lines. A sample radar chart.

Creating radar charts You can create a radar chart in the Chart Expert.

To create a radar chart 1 Select the cells to plot in your chart. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series)

334


4 Click the Next button, then click the Specialty chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Click the Next button, then click the Radar chart icon in the Specific Chart Type list. 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Modifying radar charts You can modify the radar chart properties, line properties, and the background.

To change the line properties for a radar chart 1 Select the chart. 2 Click Chart, Edit. 3 Choose the radar chart icon from the list. 4 Click a line series in the Legend, then click Line Properties. 5 Click one of the following tabs: Marker Style — changes the marker symbol and size Fill Settings — changes the fill for the markers Line Settings — changes the color and thickness of the line series

To change the chart properties 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure. 2 Right-click on the chart, then click Chart Pane Properties. 3 Click one of the following tabs: Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

335

Border Position — controls the way the chart pane grids are displayed Fill Settings — changes the fill type for the chart Border Settings — changes the line style and color for the chart When a hidden chart pane border coincides with an axis, the axis line is hidden, but all other features, such as tick marks, are displayed.

Right-click any part of the chart and click the Properties option.

Working with variance charts Variance charts have a zero line set as a series option so that the chart displays data series containing positive and negative numbers. The zero line provides the frame of reference for determining variance. Values less than zero are plotted below the zero mark; values above zero are plotted above the zero mark. The zero line in the following figure, for example, is set to show how temperatures vary from the freezing point on the Farenheit scale. A sample variance chart.

Variance charts can be modified in the same way as regular charts. For information about modifying charts, see “Editing charts” on page 362.

Creating a variance chart You can create a variance chart with the Chart Expert. A variance chart requires some values in a data series to be below zero.

To create a variance chart 1 Select the cells to plot in your chart. Select data which contains values greater and less than zero.

336


2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series) 4 Click the Next button, then click the Bar chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Click the Next button, then click a 2-D chart type in the Specific list. For example, bar or line chart. 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Setting a zero line You can adjust the zero line value of the y-axis in a variance chart using the y-axis properties options. The Zero Line At option appears as a Scale option only for Variance charts.

To change the zero line value for the y-axis 1 Select a chart on a notebook sheet. 2 Click Chart, Axes, Primary Y-Axis. 3 Click the Scale tab. 4 Type a value for Zero Line At no greater than the High scale setting, and no less than the Low scale setting.


337

Working with surface charts Surface charts plot rows and columns as lines that form a “mesh” on a 3-D frame. When you chart a square array of cells, values in columns correspond with mesh lines from left to right. Rows of data correspond to mesh lines from front to back. Each data point is represented by an intersection of two mesh lines. How the surface of the mesh is shaded depends on the type of surface chart (3-D Surface, 3-D Contour, or 3-D Shaded Surface you choose. You can customize area properties for surface charts as you would most other charts.

Creating surface charts With the Chart Expert, you can create 3-D Surface, 3-D Contour, or 3-D Shaded Surface charts.

To create a surface chart 1 Select the cells to plot in your chart. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series 4 Click the Next button, then click the Line or Area chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Click the Next button, then click the one of the following icons in the Specific Chart Type list: 3-D Surface — creates a surface chart with shading the area between each series with a different color. 3-D Contour — creates a surface chart with shading that follows the grid lines, making it easier to compare points on the surface with values on the y-axis scale. 3-D Shaded Surface — creates a surface chart with a surface that appears lit from above the chart. Flat areas, where values are the same from series to series, or from one point to another in the same series, are lightest. Places where there are great differences between adjacent values have the darkest shading. 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes:

338


Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window:: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Modifying surface charts You can modify most object properties of a surface chart, including the surface area displayed. In addition, you can modify surface charts the same way as you modify 3-D charts. For information about modifying 3-D charts, see “Working with 3-D charts” on page 356.

To modify the surface area of a surface chart 1 Select a surface chart. 2 Click Chart, Edit, then choose the surface chart from the list. 3 Right-click a data series on the surface area, then click Area Series Properties. 4 Choose one of the following tabs: Series Options — changes the data series used (you can re-select the data series or add a Legend) Analyze — chooses an analysis method for the data series Fill Settings — changes the fill and color used for the data series Border Settings — changes the color and border line style of the series For more information about applying analysis settings to a data series, see “Working with analytical charts” on page 345.


339

Working with combination charts Combination charts mix bars, lines, and areas in the same chart to highlight a series or contrast different series in the chart. Quattro Pro builds three combination charts automatically: line bar, area bar, and High-Low bar charts. Line bar charts and area bar charts plot the first series as a line or area, and plot all other series as bars. High-Low bar charts plot corresponding data points in the first and second series as I-beams, then plot all other series as bars. For more information about High-Low bar charts, see “Working with High-Low charts” on page 330. You can create your own custom combination charts by overriding the chart type for any series in 2-D bar, rotated bar, 2-D line, rotated line, and variance charts. For example, to create a multiple line chart or multiple area chart, right-click any bar in a multiple bar chart, click the Properties option, then override the chart type for the series with a line or area type.

Creating a combination chart You can create a combination chart with the Chart Expert.

To create a combination chart with the Chart Expert 1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Consider one of the following options: Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data horizontally Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series) 4 Click the Next button, then click the Specialty chart icon in the General Chart Type list. 5 Click the Next button, then click the one of the following icons in the Specific Chart Type list: Line-Bar chart Area-Bar chart High-Low bar chart 6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes: Title — the title of the chart Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart

340


X-Axis — the title of the x-axis Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis 7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step 4 of 5 Chart Expert window: Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page 8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme list.

Creating custom combination charts from existing charts Quattro Pro lets you override the chart type of an existing chart by modifying the series properties. You can modify any series in a 2-D bar, rotated bar, 2-D line, rotated line, or variance charts. High-Low charts restrict the override to the fifth series or greater.

To create a custom combination chart 1 Click a chart to select it. Make sure the chart belongs to one of the types listed above. 2 Right-click the series to change, then click Properties. 3 Enable one of the following buttons on the Series Option tab: Bar Line Area Default For information about customizing the fifth series in High-Low charts, see “Working with High-Low charts” on page 330.

Working with bullet charts Bullet charts are text charts with data Quattro Pro interprets as label data (for example, text or data containing numbers like dates). Bullet charts use text data to create bulleted items in an outline form. A bullet chart consists of a title, followed by major bulleted items and, optionally, minor bulleted items. To create a bullet chart, you must enter your data in a specific order on the spreadsheet. Bullet chart cells have up to three columns of labels: Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

341

Column

Contains:

First column

the bullet chart title and, optionally, the subtitle

Second column

major bullets

Third column

minor bullets

The third column is optional as you can create a bullet chart with only one level of bulleted items. However, you cannot create a bullet chart with more than two levels of bulleted items. You start new bullet charts by leaving blank rows or columns in the spreadsheet. You can create a bullet chart on its own page or on the spreadsheet. Bullet chart cells look like this:

The bullet chart created from cells looks like this:

You can change the bullet style, fonts, colors, and line spacing used in a bullet chart by changing the properties of the bullet series.

Creating a bullet chart When you create a bullet chart, Quattro Pro recognizes data in the cells as text and not numerical data. As a result, the Chart Expert and the QuickChart button behave the same way when you create this kind of chart. You can also create a bullet chart with the custom chart tool.

342


To produce a full-page bullet chart with the custom chart tool 1 Type the title of the bullet chart in a notebook cell, for example, cell A1. 2 Type the text for subtitle in the cell directly below the first cell. 3 Continue to type the text for the bullet chart in spreadsheet cells, moving down and one cell to the right for each sublevel of data. 4 Select these cells. 5 Right-click the selected cells, click New Custom Chart, and click OK. 6 To return to the notebook, click the Close button in the top right corner of the bullet chart window.

To create a bullet chart on a spreadsheet 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure. 2 Click Insert, Chart. 3 Click or drag to where you want the chart.

To create a bullet chart on a spreadsheet with QuickChart 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in the first procedure. 2 Click the Chart button, then click or drag to where you want the chart. Only the text contained in the bullet chart cells is used to create bullet charts. Cell properties such as fonts and colors do not affect the bullet chart. However, the cell Numeric Format property does affect how numeric values will appear in the bullet chart. For information about putting bullet charts in slide shows, see “Creating slide shows” on page 449.

Applying templates to bullet charts Templates are useful if you want to create a bullet chart with a certain look or color scheme. Any template can be applied to a bullet chart. Quattro Pro provides more than 30 templates in the Chart Gallery.

To apply a template to a bullet chart 1 Select an existing bullet chart.


343

2 Click Chart, Gallery. 3 Choose a template icon from the Style section.

To apply a template using the Chart Advisor 1 Select an existing bullet chart. 2 Click Chart, Gallery. 3 Click the Advisor button. 4 Do any of the following: Move the sliders to choose the style (Informal/Formal, Entertaining/Serious, Sophisticated/Simple, Vivid/Subdued, or Plain/Fancy) Enable a check box to select the format (Onscreen, 35mm slide, paper color, or Transparency color) 5 Click the Advise button, then click one of the four template icons the Advisor displays matching the criteria selected in step 4.

Modifying a bullet chart You can modify bullets and fonts, and add new data to an existing bullet chart. Changes made at the bullet series level affect only that level of bullet, not all the bullets. For example, modifications made to major (first level) bullets do not affect minor (second level) bullets.

To customize a bullet chart 1 Do one of the following: To edit a bullet chart in its own window, right-click anywhere in the notebook window, click Edit Chart, and choose a chart in the list. To edit a bullet chart on a spreadsheet, right-click the chart, click Edit, and specify the chart. 2 Click the part of the chart you want to edit. 3 Right-click, and click one of the following options: Bullet Series Properties Chart Pane Properties Background Properties Chart Title Properties

344


Chart Subtitle Properties 4 In the dialog box, change the formatting options as required.

To customize bullet series properties 1 Follow step 1 from the previous procedure. 2 Right-click a bulleted item, and click Bullet Series Properties. 3 Change the following options as required. You can change the bullet style, bullet indentation, and bullet color, as well as line spacing, text font, and text settings.

To change the title, subtitle, or text for bulleted items Edit the data in the notebook cells used to create the bullet chart. To locate the source cells for a bullet chart, right-click the spreadsheet, click Edit Chart, then click Chart, Series. The source cells for the bullet chart are listed in the 1st Series box.

Working with analytical charts Quattro Pro can calculate new data points and graph them without changing data in the spreadsheet. This feature is called analytical charting. For example, suppose your spreadsheet contains daily sales totals. Analytical charting allows you to graph average monthly totals. If daily sales vary widely, you can display a “moving average” to smooth the data points. You can also show general trends by fitting the data to a line or an exponential curve. You can also build tables of analysis results.

Working with Aggregate charts Aggregation combines multiple data points and plots them as a single point that can be the sum, average, standard deviation, minimum, or maximum of the data. Plotting aggregates transforms a chart series and reveals relationships not immediately apparent in the spreadsheet, such as weekly averages for information recorded daily. The example below shows daily sales data aggregated so that each point represents a weekly sales average.


345

A sample Aggregation chart.

In the example above, Series Period is set to Days, Aggregation Period is set to Weeks, and Function is set to AVG. It helps to think of the Aggregation commands as useful standards for simple periodic aggregation. For example, when you specify Days for the Series Period, Months for the Aggregation Period, and AVG for Function, Quattro Pro will average 30 data points, plot the average, average the next 30 points, plot the average, and so on. Line charts work well with aggregation because they easily show trends. Bar charts are also impressive when plotting aggregated data over time, although trends are not as easy to see when you chart multiple series in the same chart.

Creating an Aggregate chart You can modify Aggregate charts for the following options: Series Period, Aggregation Period, and Function. Since you will often aggregate a series according to a time period, the Aggregation commands are based on one day representing a period of one. For the purposes of aggregation, Quattro Pro uses the following standards: Time Period

Equals

Week

7 days

Month

30 days = 4 weeks

Quarter

90 days = 12 weeks = 3 months

Year

360 days = 51 weeks = 12 months = 4 quarters

To create an aggregate chart 1 Select a Line, Area, or Bar chart. 2 Click Chart, Edit Chart, and specify the chart. 3 If your chart shows data for many dates, you can display one label per week.

346


Right-click the x-axis, click X-Axis Properties, then click the Tick Options tab. 4 Click the 2 button in the Number of Rows list, disable the No Overlapping Labels check box, then choose a number from the Skip Labels list (for example, 6).then click OK. This combination displays the labels in two rows, with the label showing for every seventh day in a chart displaying daily results. You can modify the options in the Tick Options tab to match the time period used in a specific chart. 5 Select the chart, then right-click the line, area, or bar that represents the data series you want to analyze, then click Line Properties in the submenu that appears. 6 Click the Analyze tab, then choose Aggregate from the Method list. 7 Choose a Series Period from the Period list. Aggregation commands are based on one day representing a period of 1. The Series Period indicates what the series values represent, or what period exists in the series. For example, if the series contains weekly information, choose Weeks. 8 Choose one of the following periods from the Aggregation Period list: Weeks — shows weekly data, and aggregates by 7 (default) Months — aggregates by 30 Quarters — aggregates by 90 Years — aggregates by 360 9 Choose one of the following functions from the Functions list: SUM — uses @SUM to total the data AVG — uses @AVG to average the data STD — uses @STD to calculate the population standard deviation STDS — uses @STDS to calculate a sample standard deviation MIN — uses @MIN to specify a series minimum MAX — uses @MAX to specify a series maximum VAR — uses @VAR to calculate the population variance VARS — uses @VARS to calculate a sample variance


347

You can view multiple aggregate relationships in the same chart if you aggregate by the same period for each analysis. For more information about working multiple relationships, see “Viewing relationships and creating tables from analytical charts” on page .

Working with Moving Average charts The Moving Average analysis smoothes fluctuating data points by plotting progressive averages. This helps eliminate cyclic, seasonal, and fluctuating patterns and can accentuate a trend’s direction and substantiate trend reversals. Line and area charts are most effective for displaying moving averages. Starting with the first point in the series, Quattro Pro calculates and plots the average for a specified previous number of points, called a period. At each following point, Quattro Pro maintains the specified period: it drops the oldest value (the one farthest from the new point) so the number of points averaged is always the specified period. Quattro Pro then calculates and plots the new average, and continues in this way. For example, if daily sales vary widely, you could determine a general trend by smoothing data points with the period set at three points to be averaged. In this case, each day’s sales would be averaged with the previous two so that each point is tempered by previous points and data is smoothed to show a general trend. The chart below displays two moving averages with daily data. The moving average with a period of three provides a smoother line through the daily data. A moving average with a period of nine provides an even smoother effect, although it is less true to the daily totals. A sample Moving Average chart.

You can also perform a standard (weighted) moving average. When you select this option, Quattro Pro places greater numeric emphasis, or weight, on recent points (closest to the point it is working with) and less weight on older points (farthest from the most recent point).

348


Creating a Moving Average chart You can modify the following Moving Average options: Period and Weight. Period indicates the number of points to average. Weight lets you select a weighted moving average. When you specify Standard as the Weight, greater numeric emphasis is placed on recent points (closest to the point being analyzed) than on older points (farthest from the most recent point). The oldest point is multiplied by 1, the next multiplied by 2, and so on; the most recent point is multiplied by the specified period. The weighted moving average is determined by dividing the sum of the weighted points by the sum of the weights.

To create a moving average chart 1 Select a line or area chart. 2 Right-click the chart, then click Edit. 3 If your chart shows data for many dates, you can display one label per week. Right-click the x-axis, click X-Axis Properties, then click the Tick Options tab. 4 Enable the 2 button in the Number of Rows list, disable the No Overlapping labels check box, then choose a number from the Skip Labels list (for example, 6). This combination displays the labels in two rows, with the label showing for every first day in the week. You can modify the Tick Options tab to match the time period used in a specific chart. 5 Select the chart, then right-click the line or area that represents the data series you want to analyze. 6 Click Line Properties, click the Analyze tab, then choose Moving Average from the Method list. 7 Choose the number of points to average in the Period list. 8 Choose one of the following options from the Weight list: None — does not apply a weight to the moving average (default) Standard — applies a weighted moving average

Working with Linear Fit charts Regression analysis is a mathematical method that shows relationships between multiple variables, so it is often used to predict values of one variable by taking into account the values of the others. In Quattro Pro, a


349

Linear Fit series generates a regression line that best fits the data. Linear Fit is useful for showing a general trend among fluctuating points. For more information about linear regression, see also “Using regression analysis” on page 242. Linear Fit calculates and plots regression information in a line, even if the data does not have a general trend. For information about how to use this line to project future data based on past relationships, see “Viewing multiple relationships in analytical charts” on page 354. A sample of a Linear Fit chart.

Creating a Linear Fit chart This is the procedure for creating a straight line to illustrate the trends in the chart data.

To create a Linear Fit chart 1 Select a line or area chart. 2 Click Chart, Edit, then click OK. 3 If your chart shows data for a large number of dates, you can display one label per week. Right-click the x-axis, click X-Axis Properties, then click the Tick Options tab. 4 Click the 2 button in the Number of Rows list, disable the No Overlapping Labels check box, then choose a number from the Skip Labels list (for example, 6). This combination displays the labels in two rows, with the label showing for every first day in the week. You can modify the options on the Tick Options tab to match the time period used in a specific chart.

350


5 Select the chart, then right-click the line or area that represents the data series you want to analyze. 6 Click Line Properties, click the Analyze tab, then choose Linear Fit from the Method list. If you specify an area larger than the number of existing data points in step 3, for example by including future dates, additional values are projected based on the plotted line.

Modifying Linear Fit charts You can modify Linear Fit charts by changing the properties for the line series, as well as any other modifications you make with other charts. For more information about modifying line series properties, see “Changing colors and fill of chart objects” on page 382.

To modify the line series properties 1 Select a chart on a notebook sheet. 2 Right-click a series and click Properties. 3 Click the Line Settings tab. 4 Do one of the following: Choose a line color from the on-screen color palette. Click a line style icon. Clicking None will display only series markers, not the line.

Working with Exponential Fit charts An Exponential Fit chart generates a curve to fit data that increases or decreases geometrically (through multiplication rather than addition). For this feature to work, all values in the series must be of the same sign (either all negative or all positive) and none can be zero. If you specify an area larger than the number of existing data points, additional values are projected, based on the plotted curve. In any Exponential Fit charts, you can display different data series and data relationships. For example, you can compare weekly maximum sales totals with weekly sales averages.


351

A sample of an Exponential Fit chart.

Creating an Exponential Fit chart An Exponential Fit chart generates a curve to fit the data. For example, if no exponent is applied to the data, the results display a straight line. By applying the Exponential Fit attribute, Quattro Pro displays a curved line based on an exponential calculation.

To create an Exponential Fit chart 1 Select a line or area chart. 2 Click Chart, Edit, then click OK. 3 If your chart shows data for many dates, then you can display one label per week. Right-click the x-axis, click X-Axis Properties, then click the Tick Options tab. 4 Click the 2 button in the Number of Rows list, disable the No Overlapping Labels check box, then choose a number from the Skip Labels list (for example, 6). This combination displays the labels in two rows, with the label showing for every first day in the week. You can modify the options on the Tick Options tab to match the time period used in a specific chart. 5 Select the chart, and right-click the line or area that represents the data series you want to analyze. 6 Click Line Properties, click the Analyze tab, then choose Exponential Fit from the Method list.

Modifying Exponential Fit charts You can modify Exponential Fit charts by changing the properties for the line series, as well as any other modifications you make with other charts. For

352


more information about modifying line series properties, see “Changing colors and fill of chart objects” on page 382.

To modify the line series properties 1 Select a chart on a notebook sheet. 2 Right-click a series and click Properties. 3 Click the Line Settings tab. 4 Do one of the following: Choose a line color from the on-screen color palette. Click a line style icon. Clicking None will display only series markers, not the line.

Viewing relationships and creating tables from analytical charts When you create analytical charts, Quattro Pro lets you view multiple data series on the same chart. You can also take the chart data from single or multiple data series and generate a table on the spreadsheet of the chart results.

Viewing multiple relationships in analytical charts You can view more than one relationship in the same chart without redesigning your spreadsheet or making repetitive calculations. Just specify the same cells for several series and perform different analyses on each series. For example, to view weekly maximum sales in the same chart as weekly averages, as in the chart below, create a chart specifying the same cells for both the first and second series and specifying line or area as the chart type. A chart showing multiple analytical relationships.


353

Creating Tables based on analytical chart results Graphs show trends, but sometimes you need exact data for further analysis. Quattro Pro allows you to generate a table of analytical charting results in a spreadsheet. Once created, you can also use the table values to label graph points on your charts. You can specify the table location by selecting a single cell; Quattro Pro enters the table data in cells downward as needed. Make sure there is enough room for the table; Quattro Pro may overwrite unprotected existing data. Try specifying a cell below and to the right of the unprotected data. You specify the table size by selecting a block of cells. Depending on how you want to view the table values, you can specify a block one row wide, one column wide, or composed of multiple rows and columns. Quattro Pro fills the block starting with the upper-left cell, fills the column, then starts at the top of the next column, and so on. If the block you selected is too small, Quattro Pro displays only what the selected block will hold. If the type of analysis is Linear Fit or Exponential Fit, and you specify a table block larger than the number of existing data points, Quattro Pro projects additional values based on the plotted line or curve and enters them after the others. This projection feature applies only to standard line graphs, not to XY graphs. Table data can be used to label points in an analytical chart.

Viewing multiple relationships in analytical charts The following procedure describes how to set up the relationship between two different data series; in this example, weekly sales and weekly averages are shown in an existing chart.

To view more than one relationship in a chart 1 Select an analytical chart. 2 Right-click a line or area, click Series Properties, then click Analyze, Aggregation.

354


3 Choose Days from the Series Period list, choose Weeks from the Aggregation Period list, then choose AVG from the Function list. 4 Right-click the second series and choose the same options, but choose MAX from the Functions list.

Creating tables based on analytical chart results Follow these procedures to generate a table of analytical chart results in a spreadsheet. The second procedure describes how to see all the table values if the selected block is too small to display all the data. Once you create a table, you can use the values to label the chart points.

To create a table with analytical chart results 1 Create a column heading in a cell on the spreadsheet. (Adjust the column width to fit the heading.) 2 Select the chart. 3 Right-click the line or area that represents the data series you want to analyze. 4 Click Line Properties, click the Analyze tab, then choose one of the following options from the Method list: Aggregation Moving Average Linear Fit Exponential Fit 5 Click the Pointer button to the right of the Table box, and select one of the following: a single cell to specify the top left corner of the table a block of cells. Quattro Pro fills the selected cells with table data.

Labeling analytical charts with table values When you have created a table on the spreadsheet to display the analyzed values, you can label the points on the chart using the same values. These values are displayed close to the points. You can select whether the labels appear above, below, or on either side of the points.

To label chart points with values in tables 1 Select the chart.


355

2 Right-click the line or area that represents the data series you want to label. 3 Click Line Properties, then click the Series Option tab. 4 Type the series representing the table with analytical chart results in the Label Series box. For example, enter the column or block.

To align chart point labels 1 Select the analytical chart. 2 Right-click a label, then click Label Series Properties. 3 Click one of the following tabs: Label Alignment — positions labels above, below, left, right, or centered on the point Format — specifies the numeric format (if the label contains numeric data) Text Font — specifies the font face, size, or appearance option Text Settings — specifies the color and fill for the label text

Working with 3-D charts Quattro Pro lets you create 3-D charts for most chart types, although there is no specific 3-D charts category. 3-D charts are more complex chart types as they have extra properties (for example, 3-D backgrounds, view perspective, depth, and a z-axis).

Selecting 3-D data When you specify a 3-D selection, you select the same cells on several sheets. To create the 3-D chart, Quattro Pro starts the selection with the row or column from the first sheet, then appends the corresponding cells from succeeding sheets to form the series. For example, if you select A..C:B3..D11, the first series is A..C:B3..B11, the second series is A..C:C3..C11, and the third series is A..C:D3..D11.

Modifying 3-D charts You can display or hide each wall and the base of 3-D charts by changing the 3-D options. You can view a 3-D chart from a different vantage point, creating interesting effects, or reveal objects in a chart that were previously hidden, by changing the 3-D View options.

356


In some 3-D charts, a legend box appears when you define a legend series. Many 3-D charts display legend labels along the z-axis. Because of overlap, you may have to modify the legend labels. In addition, the legend position cannot be moved for some 3-D charts (for example, 3-D bar charts). For information about modifying legends, see “Customizing Legends and Titles” on page 375. For more information about modifying 3-D bar charts, see “Modifying bar charts” on page 321.

Modifying 3-D chart options Each wall in a 3-D chart is a separate object. You can hide or reveal the walls and the base of a 3-D chart. Additional features like grid lines can be displayed on the walls and the base. Grid lines on the walls of 3-D charts are part of the y-axis; grid lines on the base are part of the x-axis.

To change 3-D options 1 Select a 3-D chart on a spreadsheet. 2 Click Chart, Perspective. 3 Click the 3-D Options tab. 4

Enable or disable any of the following check boxes: Show Left Wall — hides or reveals the left wall Show Back Wall — hides or reveals the back wall Show Base — hides or reveals the area under the series display Thick Walls — gives the chart 3-D walls.

To display grid lines on transparent walls 1 Repeat steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure, but enable the Thick walls check box in step 4. 2 Click OK. 3 Right-click the wall on the chart, then click Area Fill Properties. 4 Click the Fill Settings tab, then choose one of the following Fill Style options: None Solid Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

357

Wash Bitmap 5 Click Chart, Axes, then click X-Axis or Primary Y-Axis. 6 Click the Major Grid tab, then choose one of the following options: Border Color Grid Line Style If you select the None Fill Style, only the outline of the wall or base is displayed. If you display a bitmap in the background of a 3-D chart, some printers may not print all of the bitmap.

Adjusting the 3-D chart perspective 3-D charts are created with a default perspective. Enable the Perspective check box to turn this feature on. In the Perspective dialog box, the sample chart displays the results of different property settings.

To change the 3-D view options 1 Select a 3-D chart on a spreadsheet. 2 Click Chart, Perspective. 3 Click the 3-D View tab. 4 Move the sliders for any of the following options: Rotation — pivots the chart on its base (you can adjust rotation to any angle between zero and 90 degrees; the default is 30 degrees) Elevation — shifts your view of a graph to different heights (when elevation is set to zero, you are at the same level as the base of the chart. Increasing the angle to 90 degrees shifts your view to the top of the chart; the default is 30 degrees) Perspective — makes objects in the distance appear smaller than closer objects (if this feature is enabled, you can adjust the amount of perspective that appears) Depth — controls the apparent thickness of a 3-D chart (if you move the slider to 166, the top and base of a 3-D bar are square (moving the slider left flattens the chart, or makes it more 2-D) Height — controls the proportion of height to width in a chart

358


To return all 3-D View options to the default settings, click the Reset button.

Modifying a 3-D chart legend In 3-D charts, the z-axis displays the legend series. For example, in a 3-D bar chart the column names are displayed along the base of the chart. If several data series are displayed, the legend will appear crowded. You can reduce the text or choose a different font to achieve a better display.

To modify legend text for the z-axis 1 Select a 3-D chart on a spreadsheet. 2 Right-click the legend, then click Legend Properties. 3 Click one of the following tabs: Text Font — lets you specify the font face, size, or appearance Text Settings — lets you select a fill style, color and, in the case of 3-D text, you can also select background color and perspective For more information about modifying legends, see “Adjusting legend properties and x-axis series” on page 377.

You can also select a chart, and right-click the legend text to change legend properties. Once you display a legend, you can drag it to any position.

Changing the chart type You can change the chart type using the Chart Types dialog, the Chart Gallery, the Chart Advisor, or by changing a chart’s properties. The Chart Types dialog lets you select a different category type and chart style, without changing the color scheme of the chart. The Chart Gallery is a collection of pre-designed chart templates and color schemes that make formatting charts easy. Instead of changing the properties of individual chart elements, you can quickly change the overall look of a chart using the Chart Gallery’s visual tools.


359

You can choose from six chart categories: bar, rotated bar, pie, line or area, and specialty are categories for plotting numeric series. The templates category provides different template styles used to format charts, and is accessible only from within the Chart Gallery. The Chart Gallery color schemes apply colors to all elements of numeric charts, including the background, chart pane, titles, text, legends, axis and series labels, chart walls, and series. Color schemes are not available when you select a templates style or if selected chart is a bullet chart. The chart color scheme does not affect the color of drawn objects, such as text boxes, lines, and shapes, that you add to a chart. The Chart Gallery also includes Chart Advisors; these present a selection of styles that match stylistic criteria you specify.

Changing chart types You can change the chart type by selecting a different chart category and chart style. For example, you can convert a bar chart into a line chart or pie chart.

To change the chart type in the Chart Type dialog box 1 Select a chart. 2 Choose a chart category from the Category list box in the Chart Type dialog box. 3 Click a chart icon in that category.

Changing chart types with the Chart Gallery You can change the chart type for most charts using the Chart Gallery on the Chart menu. You can use the Chart Gallery to format selected charts on notebook sheets, chart icons on the Objects sheet, a chart window, or charts in the Light Table view of a slide show.

To change the chart 1 Select one or more charts. 2 Click Chart, Gallery. If you selected a slide in the Light Table window, click Slides, Chart Gallery. 3 Select a chart category, style, and color scheme. If you need help deciding on the right style for a chart or chart background, click the Advisor button.

360


For information about using the Chart Advisor, see “Using the Chart Advisor” on page 361. For information on customizing a High-Low chart, see “Modifying a High-Low chart” on page 333.

If you have a bullet chart or a blank chart selected when you click Chart, Gallery, the Chart Gallery dialog box lets you select a template style for the chart. You can click the Advisor button to show suggested template styles based on stylistic criteria you specify. For information on customizing a Bullet chart, see “Modifying a bullet chart” on page 344. You can change the chart type using the Chart menu by selecting Type, Layout, choosing a chart category from the list, then a chart type. (The name of the chart type you selected appears below the chart icons.)

Using the Chart Advisor The Chart Advisor lets you select a chart type based on the parameters and options you select in the advisor. The view window shows you how the same data displays in four different charts types, so you can view the chart before accepting the changes.

To apply a chart type 1 Select a chart or master slide. (If you select multiple charts, the Advisor button does not appear in the Chart Gallery dialog box.) 2 Click Chart, Gallery. (If you selected a slide in the Light Table window, click Slides, Chart Gallery.) 3 Choose a chart type from the Category list, then click the Advisor button. 4 Move any of the following Constraints sliders: Individual/Cumulative — selects charts pointing out individual data results or grouped results Differences/Trends — selects charts emphasizing differences or trends in the data Simple/Fancy — selects simple or more sophisticated chart types 5 Click the Advise button to generate a selection of suggested styles. 6 Choose one of the styles from the Suggestions list, then click the Apply button. Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

361

With bullet charts, the Chart Advisor offers more constraint options than listed in the above procedure. For more information about modifying bullet charts, see “Applying templates to bullet charts” on page 343.

Combining chart types in a single chart You can combine different chart types in a single chart to represent different data series (for example, a chart with bars, lines, and markers) by overriding the chart type of a selected series in a chart. You can override a series on a 2-D bar, line, variance, and High-Low chart, and on rotated bar and line charts. (High-Low charts restrict the override to the fifth series or greater.)

To changing the chart type for a series 1 Select a chart. 2 Right-click a series, then click Series Properties. 3 Enable one of the Override Type buttons: Bar Line Area Default The original selection is enabled when you open the Series Properties. To return the series to the original chart type, enable the Default Override Type button.

Editing charts When you edit a chart in Quattro Pro, you can make changes that affect the overall look of the chart. Many modifications involve changing the properties for different chart objects. Things you can change include chart properties and the color and fill of chart objects.

Using chart object properties When you modify charts and chart objects, you will make your changes to many of the following properties:

362


Alignment Property The Alignment property affects the placement of text within chart titles and text boxes. To change alignment, select the text box or chart title, right-click the box or title, then click the Properties option.

Text Font Property The Text Font Property is available for all text objects, including titles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the chart window toolbar.

Text Settings Property The Text Settings Property is available for all text objects, including titles, subtitles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the Chart toolbar. Wash, Bitmap, and 3-D options are not available for the y-axis and y2-axis in 2-D and 3-D chart types, and for the x-axis in rotated chart types.

Box Settings Property The Box Settings property is available for the chart background, text boxes, and floating charts. A preview of the box type and color appears in the lower-right corner.

Border Color Property The Border Color property lets you specify a color for the border of the active floating object.

Border Settings Property The Border Settings Property is available for every solid object that appears in or on a chart, except the chart background and text boxes. It sets the style, thickness, and color of the object’s border.

Fill Settings Property The Fill Settings Property is available for every solid object that appears in or on a chart, including bars, areas, line chart markers, and drawn objects such as ellipses and rectangles. Fill settings are also available for Map Legends.


363

Name Property (Chart Icons) The Name property is available when you view the properties of chart icons and slide show icons on the Objects sheet. This property lets you rename charts and slide shows.

Editing chart methods With floating charts and window charts, you can edit the chart object or parts of the chart using the Properties dialog box.

To edit a chart Right-click the chart, then consider the following options: Type/Layout — changes the chart type Series — modifies or rearranges the data series Titles — modifies the title or subtitle View — displays the selected chart in full-screen view Chart Properties — sets the protection and print options, changes the object name, modifies the border or box type, or selects a source chart

To edit a floating chart on a spreadsheet Select the chart, and right-click the area to modify, then click Properties.

To edit a window chart Right-click an empty place on the notebook, click Edit Chart, then select a chart.

To edit a chart on the Objects sheet Double-click a chart to edit it. When you click a chart that is only partially visible in the spreadsheet, the window scrolls automatically to display the entire chart. If the chart cannot fit in the window, Quattro Pro opens it on a separate page.

Changing chart window and chart pane properties Modifications to the chart window allow you to change the chart proportions or display a grid. When you change the chart pane properties, you can

364


customize the border position, the background fill of the chart pane, and the border.

To change chart window properties 1 Select a chart on a spreadsheet. 2 Right-click on the border (the slash lines), then click Graph Window Properties. 3 Set one or both of the Aspect Ratio and Grid properties: Aspect Ratio — affects the proportion of width to height in a chart. Grid — lets you display a grid to help you draw, size, and position chart objects To change properties for a chart on its own page, right-click on the notebook sheet, click Edit Chart, then select the chart. Right-click the chart title bar. If the chart window is maximized, right-click the area outside the chart border.

To change chart pane properties 1 Select a chart on a spreadsheet. 2 Right-click the area bordered by the x and y axes in a 2-D chart (a bar chart, for example). 3 Click the Chart Pane Properties. 4 Click one of the following tabs: Border Position — sets whether a border line appears on the left, right, top, and bottom of the pane. It also sets whether a grid appears on top of the chart. Fill Settings — sets the foreground and background color of the pane, and the type of fill style used. Border Settings — sets the color and thickness of the border line.

Editing x and y axes You can modify the Quattro Pro charts you create. For example, by making changes to the x-axis or y-axis, you can change the look of your chart. You can change either axis by redefining cell series selection, selecting ticks to separate axis divisions, selecting label font and text settings on the x-axis and the y-axis, and applying a grid style. Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

365

In addition, you can add a secondary y-axis to show two different series of data against the same x-axis. If information in the x-axis series changes, you have to manually update the chart legend and the series properties, or you can override the existing label series.

Changing x-axis properties You can modify any x-axis property using the X-Axis Properties dialog box. Change specific appearance options and modify the labels. You can also adjust the scale, show units, and display a logarithm on the scale.

Modifying x-axis properties Use the X-Axis Properties dialog box to modify the x-axis. You can redefine the data series, font and text settings, and major grid styles.

To change specific x-axis properties 1 Select a chart on a speadsheet. 2 Click Chart, Axes, X-Axis. 3 Click one of the following tabs: X-Axis Series — lets you redefine the cells you want to include in the series Tick Options — lets you change the short, vertical lines that separate divisions on the x-axis and adjust the label display (there are four tick styles: None, Below, Above, and Across) Text Font — lets you select a different font or font size for the x-axis labels Text Settings — lets you select shadowing, color, and fill style for labels Major Grid Style — lets you select a new line style and color for a grid 4 Make the changes you want.

To apply major grid style options 1 Click a chart on a notebook sheet. 2 Click Chart, Axes, X-Axis. 3 Click the Major Grid Style tab. 4 Click a line style icon. The option in the upper-left corner turns the grid lines off.

366


5 Click Color. 6 Select a line color from the palette, or use the color scales to create your own. If you want to set major or minor grid styles on the y-axis, follow the steps from the previous procedure. For more information about working with the y-axis, see “Changing y-axis properties” on page 371.

There are two other ways to access the X-Axis Properties dialog box: Select a chart, right-click the x-axis of most bar, line, and area charts, then click Axis Properties Right-click the spreadsheet and click Edit Chart. Choose the correct chart from the Edit Chart list box, and then right-click the x-axis. Click X-Axis Properties.

Changing x-axis tick options You can modify the appearance of tick marks and labels. Tick marks are the short vertical lines that separate major divisions of the x-axis. There are four tick options: None, Below, Above, or Across.

To change tick options on the x-axis 1 Select a chart on a spreadsheet. 2 Click Chart, Axes, X-Axis. 3 Click the Tick Options tab. 4 Choose a tick style: None — no vertical lines between major divisions of the x-axis Below — short vertical lines below the x-axis Above — short vertical lines above the x-axis Across — short vertical lines display above and below the x-axis You can assign tick options for the y-axis using the same method. For information about y-axis properties, see “Changing y-axis properties” on page 372.


367

Adjusting the scale of the x-axis Quattro Pro automatically adjusts the x-axis scale to fit the range of values plotted against it. In an XY chart, you can change the High, Low, Increment, and number of Minors values to fine-tune the chart.

To adjust the x-axis scale of an XY chart 1 Select the chart. 2 Click Chart, Axes, X-Axis. 3 Click the Scale tab. 4 Enter a suitable number in one of the following boxes: High — sets the highest value displayed on the scale (if you enter a value that is higher than the values in the data series, the plot for the value will appear to run off the right side of the chart) Low — sets the lowest value displayed on the scale (if you enter a value that is lower than the values in the data series, the plot for the value will appear to run off the left side of the chart) Increment — determines the numeric “distance” between major x-axis divisions (X-axis labels, major tick marks, and major grid lines are placed at these divisions. Enter zero if you want Quattro Pro to calculate an increment using the new High and Low settings) No. of Minors — specifies the number of evenly-spaced minor tick marks or grid lines between the major x-axis divisions

To set a descending axis scale Reverse the High and Low values in step 4 in the above procedure.

To set the scale back to its default axis settings Enable the Automatic check box.

Showing units on the x-axis If the numbers displayed on the x-axis are 1000 or greater, you can simplify the labels using the Show Units option. Show Units displays only the first characters of the label, and automatically adds the appropriate unit title in parentheses along the x-axis, for example, “Thousands” or “Million”.

To display units on a numeric x-axis 1 Select a chart.

368


2 Click Chart, Axes, X-Axis. 3 Click the Scale tab. 4 Enable the Show Units check box. (Disable to turn the feature off.) 5 To change the font, color, or other properties of the unit title that is now displayed along the x-axis, right-click the title, then click the Properties option.

Scaling the x-axis logarithmically In a logarithmically scaled axis, each major division of the axis represents 10 times the value of the previous major division. This type of scale is useful when you plot series with wide ranges in magnitude. A sample chart using a logarithmic scale.

To create an x-axis logarithmic scale 1 Select a chart. 2 Click Chart, Axes, X-Axis. 3 Click the Scale tab. 4 Enable the Log button. If you are unable to set your x-axis to logarithmic scaling, select the XY chart type instead of the Line chart type.

Modifying x-axis labels You can modify any x-axis in any Quattro Pro chart. Occasionally, the length of words used in labels may overlap, making the chart hard to read. You can modify the labels properties to correct this.


369

To modify axis labels 1 Double-click the chart, and then double-click an axis. 2 Select the color, appearance, style, size, and font desired for the labels.

To hide axis labels 1 Double-click the chart, then double-click the x-axis. 2 Click Tick Options, then disable the Display Labels check box.

To delete axis labels 1 Select a chart. 2 Click Chart, Series. 3 Select the axis label series in the Axis box, then press DELETE.

To prevent x-axis labels from overlapping 1 Select a chart. 2 Click Chart, Axes, X-Axis. 3 Click the Tick Options tab. 4 Use one of these options to adjust the label display: Display Labels — toggles the label display on or off Number Of Rows — places the labels in a single row, or in two or three staggered rows No Overlapping Labels — eliminates some of the labels when label text would otherwise overlap (the default setting is On (enabled). Disable this option to activate Skip n Labels) Skip n Labels — sets the number of labels to eliminate to prevent overlap (for example, if you skip two labels, the first label in the x-axis series is displayed, the second and third labels are skipped, the fourth label is displayed, the fifth and sixth labels are skipped, and so on) Length Limit — specifies the maximum number of characters displayed in a label (any additional characters will not appear in the label)

370


The Text Font Property is available for all text objects, including titles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the chart window toolbar.

Changing y-axis properties Quattro Pro automatically adjusts the y-axis scale to fit the range of values plotted against it. You can change the High, Low, Increment, and No. (number) of Minors values to fine-tune the chart or to zoom in on a specific area. High — sets the highest value displayed on the scale (if you enter a value that is lower than the values in the data series, the plot for the value will appear to run off the top of the chart) Low — sets the lowest value displayed on the scale (if you enter a value that is higher than the values in the data series, the plot for the value will appear to run off the bottom of the chart) Increment — determines the numeric “distance” between major y-axis divisions. Y-axis labels, major tick marks, and major grid lines are placed at these divisions. No. of Minors — specifies the number of evenly-spaced minor tick marks and/or minor grid lines between the major y-axis divisions. In addition to scale modifications, you can set the y-axis to display units or a logarithmic scale.

Secondary y-axes You can plot a series in 2-D bar, line, and variance charts on a secondary y-axis. High-Low charts restrict this feature to the fifth series or greater. You may want to do this, for example, when the values in one series are much larger or smaller than those in other series. When there is a wide variation between series, the y-axis scale range can be so large that some series are barely visible above the x-axis. If you plot the series that differs most on the secondary y-axis, the primary y-axis adjusts to accommodate the other series. You can also use this feature when the data is based on a different kind of scale. For example, on a High-Low (open-close) volume chart, you can plot share prices on the primary y-axis, and the volume (number of stocks traded) on the secondary y-axis. The secondary y-axis will have the same properties as the primary y-axis.


371

Changing y-axis properties Use the Y-Axis Properties dialog box to modify the y-axis. You can change any of the y-axis properties, including the way the y-axis displays units.

To change the y-axis properties 1 Select a chart. 2 Click Chart, Axes, Primary Y-Axis. 3 Click one of the appropriate tabs: Scale — selects the range of numbers used on the y-axis Tick Options — sets the style of the short, horizontal lines that separate divisions on the y-axis (there are four tick styles: None, Left, Right, and Across) Numeric format — lets you choose from a large list of formats or custom numeric formats Text Font — sets the font or font size for the y-axis labels Text Settings — sets the shadowing, color, and fill style for labels Major Grid Style and Minor Grid Style — sets the number of lines on the y-axis and between ticks In Quattro Pro charts, the method you use to assign a grid style is similar for the x and y axes, other than the y-axis lets you assign a major and a minor grid style. If you want information about assigning either grid style, see “Modifying x-axis properties” on page 366. For information about changing tick options, see “Changing x-axis tick options” on page 367.

For a descending axis scale, reverse the high and low values. To return to the default setting, enable the Automatic check box.

Showing units on the y-axis If the numbers displayed on the y-axis are greater than 1000, you can adjust the scale to display only the unit title along the y-axis; for example. by selecting the Show Units option, display “Thousands” or “Millions”,

372


To show units on the y-axis 1 Select a chart. 2 Click Chart, Axes, Primary Y-Axis. 3 Click the Scale tab. 4 Enable the Show Units check box. (Disable the check box to turn the feature off.) 5 Right-click the title, and click Properties to change the font, color, or other properties of the unit title displayed along the x-axis.

Scaling the y-axis logarithmically In a logarithmically scaled axis, each major division of the axis represents 10 times the value of the previous major division. This type of scale is useful when you plot series with wide ranges in magnitude. A sample of a chart using a logarithmic scale.

To create an y-axis logarithmic scale 1 Select a chart. 2 Click Chart, Axes, X-Axis. 3 Click the Scale tab. 4 Enable the Log button.

Setting a zero line on the y-axis This turns your chart into a variance chart. A variance chart requires values below zero in one of the data series. For information about setting a variance line, see “Working with variance charts” on page 336.


373

Changing the numeric format of the y-axis This procedure allows you to change the type of numeric format displayed on the y-axis. For example, you can display data using currency symbols or percentages.

To change the numeric format for the y-axis scale 1 Select the chart. 2 Click Chart, Axes, Primary Y-Axis. 3 Click the Numeric Format tab. 4 Select a format option from the following options: General — displays numbers as entered Number — displays negative and positive values, including decimals Currency — displays numbers using currency symbols Scientific — displays numbers with scientific notation, allowing only one digit in the integer portion of the number Fraction — displays numbers as fractions Percent — displays numbers as percentages Date — displays numbers as date values in the format you choose Time — displays numbers as times in the format you choose Custom — lets you choose from a list of formats you have previously created

Adding another y-axis to charts A secondary y-axis displays on the right side of the chart, while the primary y-axis displays on the left. Quattro Pro scales the secondary y-axis to accommodate the highest and lowest values in the series. The secondary y-axis has the same properties as the primary y-axis.

To plot series on the secondary y-axis 1 Select the chart. 2 Right-click the chart series marker, then click Line Series Properties. 3 Click the Series Options tab. 4 Enable the Secondary button in the Y-Axis section.

374


Customizing legends and titles You can customize both chart legends and chart titles. You can also add a subtitle to a chart and a title to the chart’s legend.

Understanding legends A legend box appears as soon as you define a legend series in all 2-D (except pie, column, and doughnut) charts, and in some 3-D charts. For more information on 3-D charts labels, see “Modifying a 3-D chart legend” on page 359. When you add or delete a data series, the legend series (if one is defined) does not change automatically. If you insert or delete a series from a chart, you also have to edit the legend accordingly. If you add on additional series, another bar, line marker, or area boundary point is added at each x-axis division. If you see new x-axis divisions without labels after you add a series, this means the new series has a greater number of data points than the other series in the chart. Select the series again, and assign a selection that has the correct number of values. You can also enter legend label text (or label cell coordinates) for individual series by right-clicking the series and clicking Properties.

Understanding chart titles You can create a title and subtitle for any numeric chart type, but not for bullet charts or blank charts. You can also use this option to place titles on the chart axes. On 2-D charts, you can add titles for the x-axis, the primary y-axis (the left, or Y1 axis) and for a secondary y-axis (the right, or Y2 axis). 3-D charts will not display secondary y-axis titles. You can change the title and subtitle properties including the spelling, font size, and type. You can edit the main title and subtitle text directly on the chart, or change the title or subtitle in the Titles dialog box. Instead of typing in a title, you can reference the cell that contains the appropriate text using the title box. Just type the cell reference preceded by a backslash (\). For example, type \G8 in the title box displays the text in cell G8 as the title. You can use @STRING and other string spreadsheet functions with numeric formulas to create dynamic titles that change along with your data. For example, entering the following formula in cell G8 creates a string that displays the average of cells C5..C9 after the equal sign: +"Five-Year Mileage Average = “&@STRING(@AVG(C5..C9),0)


375

Adding titles and labels to charts Quattro Pro lets you add titles and subtitles to charts. It also lets you add labels to bars or data points in a chart.

To add titles to a chart 1 Right-click the chart, then click Titles. 2 Type text in the appropriate boxes.

To add labels to bars or data points on a chart 1 Enter a series of labels into the cells (if suitable labels do not already exist). 2 Right-click the bar, line, or area that represents the series, then click Series Properties. The Series Options property is automatically selected. 3 Click the Pointer button to the right of the Label Series box, then select the cells on the notebook sheet that contain the labels. The cells you specify as the label series can contain text or data. For example, if you assign the same cells to the data series and the label series of a bar chart, Quattro Pro places a label with the actual data value over each bar in the series.

Changing title and subtitle properties A single text box encloses the chart title and subtitle. When you create a title, you do not see the text box because its fill style and box type are set to None by default. You can change the title and subtitle properties such as alignment, font, color, box, and fill. The chart title’s Alignment property also sets the alignment for the subtitle.

To change title or subtitle properties 1 Select the chart. 2 Click Chart, Titles. 3 Click one of the following Chart Title tabs: Alignment — positions the title left, right, or center Text Font — sets the font face, size, or appearance

376


Text Settings — sets the fill settings, color, and background color if a pattern or wash has been selected Box Settings — sets the type of border for the title field Fill Settings — sets the fill and background colors for the title field You can edit the main title and subtitle text directly on the chart, or change the title or subtitle in the boxs of the Chart, Titles dialog box. The Text Settings Property is available for all text objects, including titles, subtitles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the Chart toolbar. Wash, Bitmap, and 3-D options are not available for the y-axis and y2-axis in 2-D and 3-D chart types, and for the x-axis in rotated chart types.

Positioning the chart legend You can position a legend at the right side of the chart or at the bottom of the chart. You can also choose not to display the legend.

To position a legend 1 Select the chart. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click the Legend Position tab, then click one of the following icons: None — hides the legend Bottom — displays the legend on the bottom of the chart Right — displays the legend on the right of the chart You can also manually drag the legend to a new location on the chart.

Adjusting legend properties and x-axis series Legend labels appear in the legend box of 2-D charts (except pie and column charts), and in some 3-D charts. In most 3-D charts, legend labels appear along the z-axis. In multiple charts, legend labels appear as “titles” of the sub-charts that represent each series.


377

To adjust the legend and x-axis series 1 Select the chart. 2 Click Chart, Series. 3 Click the Pointer button to edit the Legend box. Repeat this step to edit the X-Axis Series box. 4 Hold down the CTRL key, then point to the label for each series, in order.

To override a legend label 1 Select the chart. 2 Click Edit, Chart. 3 Right-click the chart series marker and click Series Properties. 4 Type the label text or enter the label’s cell address preceded by a slash (for example, \A:E5) in the Legend box.

Modifying the legend’s appearance You can change how the legend appears on the chart.

To customize the legend 1 Select the chart. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click one or more of the following tabs: Text Font — sets the font face, size, or appearance Text Settings — sets the text color and fill Box Settings — sets the type of border for the legend Fill Settings — sets the fill and color of the legend box For information about changing fill and color of text on the Text Settings tab, see “Changing fill and border properties” on page 383.

You can also double-click any series box to edit the series.

378


Adding graphics to charts You can add clipart and graphics to Quattro Pro charts. You can draw different shapes to emphasize aspects of the chart, or insert an existing graphic.

Understanding the aspect ratio of charts Depending on the intended purpose of the slides, adjusting the aspect ratio of charts sets the proportions of the chart in relation to the way the chart can be viewed. For example, a chart can appear in a full screen format (suitable for adding to a slide show) or as a floating chart. You can also choose an aspect ratio suitable for 35 mm slide formats. As a chart moves from one display to another, its overall shape sometimes shifts. You can control these changes by setting a chart’s aspect ratio. If you want to add graphics to a chart, it is important to set the aspect ratio so that no distortion occurs to the graphics if a different aspect ratio is selected later.

Drawing objects on a chart Quattro Pro includes a drawing toolbar that contains drawing tools you can use to create arrows, circles, rectangles, and other graphic effects on your charts. This is useful for highlighting certain aspects of data represented on your charts. This toolbar includes a set of quick-access tools and buttons: Cut button , Copy button , and Paste button objects to and from the Windows Clipboard Import button

imports a file

Selection Tool button with a drawing tool Text tool

transfer

switches to selection mode when you finish

creates text boxes

The following drawing tools create shapes: Line tool Arrow tool Polyline tool Freehand drawing tool Polycurve tool Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

379

Polygon tool Rectangle tool Rounded Rectangle tool Ellipse tool For more information about drawing objects, see “Adding graphics to spreadsheets” on page 393.

Maximize the chart window to make drawing easier.

Inserting graphics in your charts Quattro Pro lets you add clipart or other graphics to the charts you create. The procedure for adding these objects to charts is the same as if you were adding them to the spreadsheet. For more information about adding graphics to your charts, see “Designing borders, lines, and shapes” on page 404.

Adjusting the aspect ratio of charts To save time, choose the aspect ratio for your final output before you begin to change properties or draw objects. A 35 mm slide has different proportions than an 8.5 x 11-inch sheet of paper, for example. A graph and its labels may look right when the aspect ratio is set to 35 mm screen slide, but everything may need to be resized when the aspect ratio is changed to printer view. The following examples show the same chart viewed with different aspect ratio options: The Floating Chart aspect ratio view of a chart.

380


The Screen Slide aspect ration view.

The 35-mm aspect ratio view.

The Printer Preview apsect ratio view.

The Full Extent aspect ratio view.


381

You set the aspect ratio for charts and maps the same way. For more information about changing the aspect ratio, see “Changing the aspect ratio of maps” on page 426 in the maps help.

Changing colors and fill of chart objects While the Quattro Pro chart tools provide you with pre-defined color combinations, you can customize the color and/or the type of pattern fill for specific chart objects. For example, the chart background is the area behind the title, the legend, the chart itself, and any drawing elements you added. If the default background color you originally select appears too bright, you can select a more conservative background. You can also change the color of chart items, and change the fill and border properties (pattern or plain color for inside and around chart objects). Quattro Pro contains a default color palette. Custom colors can be added to the palette and stored with the application. For information about customizing the color palette of a notebook, see “Changing colors in the Notebook palette” on page 414.

Changing the color of chart items You can change the color of a specific item in a chart using the Properties dialog box. For example, Chart Background has two property tabs that control the appearance of the chart background settings: fill settings and chart button. You can also display patterns or images in most chart items.

To change the color of a chart item 1 Select the chart. 2 Right-click the chart item (for example, bar or pie slice), then click Properties. 3 Click the Fill Settings tab. 4 Choose from the following options: None Pattern Wash Bitmap

To change the chart ‘s background 1 Click a chart on a notebook sheet.

382


2 Click Chart, Background. 3 Set the Fill Settings, Box Settings, and Chart Button properties. 4 Choose one of the following options: Fill Settings — assigns a fill color, background color, and fill style to the background Chart Button — controls slide shows. You can assign a macro or show a different chart when the user clicks on an area outside of defined text-box chart buttons For more information on using chart buttons in slide shows, see “Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps” on page 467. If you display a bitmap in the background of a 3-D chart, some printers do not print all of the bitmap.

Select a chart, right-click the background, then click Background Properties.

Changing fill and border properties You can modify the fill settings of chart objects, including text, backgrounds, legends, and data series. A solid object has two areas, an interior and a border. The appearance of the interior is determined by the way Fill Settings properties are set. The Border Settings properties control the appearance of the perimeter of the object. The Fill Settings properties make the box transparent (None), or fill it with a solid color, a two-color pattern, a wash, or an imported bitmap graphic. If the fill style is a pattern, the Pattern Color is the color of the pattern. If the fill style is a wash, the Start Color is distributed over the End Color. The Border Settings properties set the color of the frame or box around the object. The choices range from “no frame” to 3-D styles.

To change the fill settings 1 Select a chart. 2 Right-click the object, and click Properties. 3 Click the Fill Settings tab.


383

4 Choose a fill style: None — makes the object transparent Solid — makes the object one solid color Pattern — gives you a choice of 24 two-color patterns (the color of the pattern is the Foreground Color; the background behind the pattern is the Background Color) Wash — gives you a choice of six bi-colored wash styles (in a wash, the first color is distributed over the second color) Bitmap — fills the object with an imported bitmap graphic 5 If you selected Pattern or Wash in step 4, choose the foreground color and background color.

To select a new box type or border style. 1 Right-click the border of the chart, then click Chart Properties. 2 Click one or both of the following tabs: The Box Type — determines the thickness of the border, or whether to add a drop shadow, or make it transparent The Border Color — determines the color of the border (or box) around the chart. To print text that has a Wash fill on some laser printers, you may have to select the Print Truetype fonts as graphics option. To set the option, click File, Print, Details, Properties, Fonts. For more information about using an imported bitmap for a fill, see “Filling and cropping shapes with graphics” on page 398.

If you want to change an item’s Fill Settings or Border Settings, click the object, then click the Properties button to display the Properties dialog box.

Managing charts After you have created a chart, it is important to know how to manage it using basic menu commands. Procedures for saving, closing, and deleting charts are similar to the procedures you use to perform these actions on other objects created or added to a notebook.

384


Saving charts When you save a notebook, Quattro Pro saves every chart in that notebook.

To save a chart in a notebook Click File, Save.

To save a chart in a notebook under another file name 1 Click File, Save As. 2 Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list box. 3 Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type the filename in the File Name box.

Closing charts You can close a floating chart with the Close button. Charts on their own pages can be closed with menu commands or with shortcut keys.

To close a chart using the Close button Click the Close button at the far right of the title bar of the chart. To close a chart using a menu command, double-click the Control menu box in the upper left corner of the window. To close a chart using keystrokes, press CTRL + F4.

Deleting charts Quattro Pro lets you delete charts that you no longer need.

To delete a chart on a spreadsheet 1 Select a chart. 2 Click Chart, Delete Chart. 3 Select the chart name from the list that appears. Click Edit, Cut, to cut the chart from the notebook.


385

To delete a chart on the Objects sheet 1 Click an icon. 2 Do one of the following: Click the Cut button. Click Edit, Cut. Press DELETE.

Moving charts on your spreadsheet You can move charts anywhere on your spreadsheet. For information about copying charts within your notebook, see “Sharing Quattro Pro charts” on page 386.

To move the chart to another position on the spreadsheet 1 Click the chart border. Square handles appear at eight positions on the border of the chart. 2 Drag the chart to the desired location.

Resizing charts You can resize a chart the same way you resize other graphic objects.

To resize a chart’s height or width 1 Click the chart border. 2 Drag a top, bottom, side, or corner handle. To change the height and width of the frame at the same time, click the chart border, then drag a corner handle diagonally.

Sharing Quattro Pro charts You can share charts with other notebooks in Quattro Pro, or export them to other applications. For example, if you are writing a document in a word processing application like WordPerfect or Microsoft Word, you can add a chart you created in Quattro Pro to illustrate a point.

386


Copying charts within a notebook There are three ways to copy a chart within a notebook: use the Drag and Drop feature, use the Copy and Paste Special options to copy and paste a selection of chart attributes, or use the Insert option. The Edit, Paste Special option lets you copy the attributes of a chart, including the style, data, and annotation objects (drawn objects like rectangles, ellipses, etc.), from one chart to another. You can use the Paste Special option to copy some or all attributes of a chart template to several charts at a time. The Insert option lets you add a chart to another part of a notebook by selecting from a list of all the charts stored in that notebook.

Copying charts between notebooks You can copy charts between notebooks using the Edit, Paste Special option or the Drag and Drop feature. These methods give the container notebook a record of where the original data is located. (The data is not physically copied.) Each time you open the destination notebook, Quattro Pro checks whether the source notebook is open. If it is closed, Quattro Pro provides three options: Open Supporting — opens the source notebook. If the notebook contains links to closed notebooks, those notebooks will also open Update References — accesses linked values in closed supporting notebooks without opening them. This takes up less memory than opening the notebooks None — temporarily replaces links to closed supporting notebooks with the value NA (not available). This lets you examine or edit notebooks when you do not need the linked values. It saves the time required to update values and the memory required to open supporting notebooks. If the destination notebook already has a chart with the same name, the new copy is given a default name (for example, Chart 6). For more information about replacing link placeholders with the actual link values in charts, see “Using OLE automation with OLE objects” on page 545.

Copying charts within a notebook Quattro Pro lets you copy floating charts and window charts into other areas of the notebook. Copying also allows you to change a floating chart into a window chart, and vice-versa.


387

To copy charts using the Clipboard 1 Do one of the following: Click the border of a chart on a spreadsheet. On the Objects sheet, select the chart icon(s) you want to copy. 2 Click Edit, Copy. 3 Select one of the following locations: a spreadsheet — places the copy as a floating chart. the Objects sheet — places the copy in a chart window. 4 Click Edit, Paste.

To copy a window chart using the Clipboard 1 In the chart window, click Edit, Select All. 2 Click Edit, Copy, then close the window. 3 Select one of the following locations: a spreadsheet — places the copy as a floating chart. the Objects sheet — places the copy in a chart window. 4 Click Edit, Paste. You cannot paste a chart directly into a chart window.

Click the QuickTab button to display the Objects sheet, or to return to the notebook from the Objects sheet.

Inserting charts in notebooks In addition to copying charts to other parts of a notebook, Quattro Pro lets you insert a chart stored on the Object sheet to another area within a notebook.

To insert a chart on a notebook sheet 1 Go to the sheet where you want the chart to appear. 2 Right-click the notebook sheet, then click Insert Chart. 3 Select a chart from the list.

388


4 Click OK. The mouse pointer changes to a miniature chart. 5 Click the upper left corner of the area where you want the chart to appear, or drag the mouse to specify the size and placement of the chart. 6 Release the mouse button. If the chart has too much background area, change the chart’s aspect ratio. Select the chart, click View, then click one of the following options: Floating Chart, Screen Slide, 35mm Slide, Printer Preview, or Full Extent. You can insert the same chart in more than one place in the notebook. Whenever you make changes to a chart, all charts on a notebook sheet associated with that chart reflect those changes.

Copying charts to another notebook You can copy charts to another notebook in three ways: by dragging and dropping the charts; using the Edit, Paste Special commands; or cutting and pasting to the Clipboard.

To copy a chart to another notebook using Drag and Drop 1 Open the source and container notebooks. 2 Click Window, Tile so you can see both notebooks. 3 To copy charts from the Objects sheet, click the QuickTab button at the bottom of each window to display the Objects sheet for both notebooks. 4 Press CTRL while dragging the chart from the source notebook to the Objects sheet of the container notebook. 5 Release the mouse. When you open a notebook containing charts copied from other notebooks, the Hotlinks dialog box is displayed. Enable Open Supporting or Update References to display the charts in the current notebook.

If you drag a chart to a notebook sheet or chart icon without pressing CTRL, you will move the chart instead of copying it.


389

For information about cutting and pasting to the Clipboard, see “Copying charts within a notebook” on page 387. For more information on how to use Edit, Paste Special, see “Copying selected attributes of charts” on page 390.

Copying selected attributes of charts Quattro Pro lets you copy some or all of the attributes on one chart and apply them to another chart. For example, annotations can be copied. The container chart for the Paste Special option must be an existing chart (or a blank chart); you cannot use Paste Special to create a new chart. You can also copy chart attributes and create a template for new charts. This second option applies the style and properties to the destination chart’s data.

To copy selected attributes to another chart 1 Select the chart that has the attributes you want to copy. 2 Click Edit, Select All. 3 Click Edit, Copy. 4 Do one of the following: Select the chart to which you want to copy the attributes. Select a blank chart on the spreadsheet 5 Click Edit, Paste Special. 6 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the attributes you want to copy. By default, all the check boxes are enabled when the

To copy chart attributes to create a template 1 Select the chart that has the attributes you want to copy. 2 Click Edit, Select All. 3 Click Edit, Copy. 4 Select the chart to which you want to copy the attributes. 5 Click Edit, Paste Special. 6 Disable Data Series, but leave the other check boxes enabled.

390


To preserve annotation objects already existing in the destination chart Disable the Annotations check box. Enabling the Annotations check box erases all annotation items in the destination chart, even when there are none to copy from the source chart. Paste Special does not copy annotations drawn on a blank chart type or chart templates selected with the Chart Gallery.

Adding charts to other applications You can save a chart as a graphic file, which allows you to use it with other applications. When you save a chart this way, you also save any drawn shapes, imported graphics, or text boxes associated with the chart. For example, if you are writing a report in a word processing application like WordPerfect or Microsoft Word, you can import any chart from one of your Quattro Pro notebooks. If you want to include charts in a 35-mm slide show, you must set the chart’s aspect ratio to 35mm slide before saving as a graphic and talk to a slide show service bureau about which file formats they support. This adjusts the chart object proportions so the whole chart appears centered on the slide. For more information about setting the aspect ratio of charts, see “Adjusting the aspect ratio of charts” on page 380.

To save a chart as a graphic 1 Select the chart, then click Chart, Export to File. 2 Choose a destination and filename. 3 Click the Browse button next to the File Name box. 4 Choose a file format from the File Type list. 5 Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list. 6 Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file. 7 Type a filename in the File Name box, then click OK. 8 Enable the Bitmap Gray Scale check box to save the map without colors.


391

.GIF files must be exported when you are in 256 color (or less) mode. .JPG files can only export in true color mode.

392


ADDING GRAPHICS TO SPREADSHEETS

13

Quattro Pro lets you display your spreadsheet data in a wide variety of graphic formats. You can insert clipart images and create graphics that exist in a layer above the notebook, but are part of the sheet in which they appear. You can draw lines and shapes and add text boxes directly on a notebook using tools on the toolbar. You can insert a regular or animated graphic into your spreadsheet.

Creating graphics You can add graphics to spreadsheets, move and resize graphics on a spreadsheet, group graphics in charts or maps, or crop and fill a graphic shape with another graphic.

Drawing in Quattro Pro Quattro Pro includes a drawing toolbar that contains drawing tools you can use to create arrows, circles, rectangles, and other graphic effects on charts, maps, or spreadsheets. You can also access these tools from the Insert, Shape menu. When you install Quattro Pro, you cannot see the Charts and Drawing toolbar. For information about displaying the drawing toolbar, see “Accessing drawing tools in Quattro Pro” on page 404. This toolbar includes a set of quick-access tools and buttons:

Adding graphics to spreadsheets

393

Cut button , Copy button , and Paste button objects to and from the Windows Clipboard Import button

imports a file

Selection Tool button with a drawing tool Text tool

transfer

switches to selection mode when you finish

creates text boxes

The following drawing tools create shapes: Line tool — use to draw straight lines in any direction Arrow tool — use to draw arrows in any direction Polyline tool — use to draw zig-zag lines in any direction Freehand Drawing tool — use to draw multiple lines that follow the path of your mouse Rectangle tool — use to draw precise rectangles and squares Rounded Rectangle tool — use to draw rectangles and squares with rounded corners Ellipse tool — use to draw ovals and circles Polycurve tool — use to draw curved shapes that follow the path of your mouse For more information about using more advanced drawing tools, see “Creating graphic images in Quattro Pro” on page 394.

Creating graphic images in Quattro Pro Quattro Pro uses the Corel Presentations Draw window, creating new graphics or shapes to add to your spreadsheets.

394

Corel XXXX: Chapter 13

To create a new graphic in Quattro Pro 1 Click Insert, Graphics, Draw Picture to launch Corel Presentations. 2 Click Insert, Shape, and select one of the following shapes: Text Box Arrow Line Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Ellipse Polyline/Polygon 3 Click outside the Draw Picture window to return to the spreadsheet. If you want to move an object as you draw it, hold down the right mouse button while dragging the shape to a new location. If you want to delete an object while you are drawing it, press ESC to cancel the drawing.

Selecting and deselecting graphics Before you can edit, move, or resize a graphic, you must select it.

To select a graphic Click the graphic.

To select a graphics group Click any graphic in the group.

To select multiple graphics individually 1 Click a graphic. 2 Press SHIFT while clicking additional graphics.


395

To select multiple graphics in an area 1 Right-click any toolbar, then click Charts and Drawing Tools, and select the Select Object tool. 2 Point just outside one corner of the area, then drag diagonally until the selection box encloses the graphics you want.

To deselect a graphic Click the graphic while you press SHIFT.

Moving and resizing graphics You can move, resize, and change the size of a graphic.

To move a graphic 1 Select a graphic. 2 Drag to its new location. Do not drag the graphic handles as this will resize it.

To change the height or width 1 Select a graphic. 2 Drag a top, bottom, or side handle.

To change the height and width proportionally 1 Select a graphic. 2 Drag a corner handle diagonally. For information about cropping graphics, see “Filling and cropping shapes with graphics” on page 398.

Grouping graphics in charts, maps, or the Draw Picture window Group two or more graphics in a chart to manipulate them as a single graphic in subsequent operations. For example, you could group all the graphics in a complex drawing to move them at the same time.

396


Once you group graphics, you can move and resize them as a single object. You can nest a grouped graphic within other grouped graphics. If you ungroup a group that had other groups nested within it, these groups remain intact. For information about customizing grouped graphics, see “Changing the properties of grouped graphics” on page 418.

To group graphics 1 Click in the chart, map, or Draw Picture window. 2 Hold down SHIFT and click the objects you want to group. 3 Right-click the selected graphics, then click Group.

To ungroup graphics 1 Click in the chart, map, or Draw Picture window. 2 Select a grouped graphic. 3 Right-click the selected objects, then click Separate Objects.

To nest groups within other groups 1 Click in the chart, map, or Draw Picture window. 2 Select any combination of groups and individual graphics. 3 Right-click one of the selected groups, then click Group.

To ungroup a group containing nested groups 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure. 2 Right-click the groups, then click Separate Objects. You can click the Group button on the toolbar to group objects. This button activates when you select two or more objects or shapes. You can ungroup grouped objects if you click the Ungroup button.

Arranging graphic object layers and overlapping graphics A layer is one of a series of transparent planes on which you can place objects in a drawing. You can control how objects overlay each other by moving the layer and the objects they contain. Use layers to organize different components of complex drawings.


397

To arrange object layers 1 Select the object or group of objects. 2 Click Format, Object Order. 3 Click of the following options: Bring Forward — moves the object one layer closer to the top Send Backward — moves the object one layer closer to the bottom Bring To Front — brings the object to the front or top of the layers Send To Back — sends the object to the bottom layer You can also layer graphics using tools for each of the above options on the Property Bar or on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar Object Layer buttons.

Filling and cropping shapes with graphics When you import a graphic file (.BMP, .GIF, .JPG, .PCX, or .TIF format), Quattro Pro places the graphic in a rectangular container. You can also fill any drawn object in a chart window or a drawn object on the notebook with a bitmapped graphic. A bitmap fill style has four options: Crop To Fit — displays only the part of the graphic that fits within the object Tile To Fit — fills adjacent blocks of the object with copies of the same bitmapped graphic Shrink to Fit — shrinks or enlarges the bitmap to fit within the object (the default) 3-D Perspective — (for 3-D chart walls only) adjusts a bitmap to simulate the depth of a 3-D wall The upper-left corner of the rectangle around the graphic is a reference point that cannot be changed or eliminated. If you drag a handle on the left or top side of the graphic to resize the container, the right or bottom side of the bitmap becomes cropped. Any part of the image left outside the resized frame is deleted when you return the graphic image to the drawing window.

To fill a shape with a graphic 1 Click the shape, then click Format, Selection.

398


2 Click the Fill Settings tab, then choose Bitmap in the Fill Style list. 3 Enable one of the following buttons: Crop To Fit — to crop the drawing (cut out all pieces that do not fit) Tile To Fit — to fill adjacent blocks of the graphic with the same graphic Shrink To Fit — to shrink or enlarge the drawing to fit it within the graphic 3-D Perspective (for 3-D chart walls only) — to adjust a graphic to simulate the depth of a 3-D wall 4 Click the Browse button next to the File Name box. 5 Choose the drive and folder where the graphics file is stored. 6 Double-click the filename. If you want to crop a graphic, select Bitmap in the Fill Style list, then enable the Crop to Fit button on the Fill Settings tab.

Managing and sharing graphics Once you create a graphic, you can work with it as an object and as a graphic file. You can open, save, and close files containing graphics. You can rename a graphic with a name you can recognize in the objects list. You can share graphics between Quattro Pro projects and between Quattro Pro and other applications. You can also import a copy of a graphic (sometimes this is done with the Paste command) export a copy of a graphic created in Quattro Pro to another application Before you can import or export a graphic, check to see whether the graphic format is one of the types compatible with Quattro Pro 9. For more information about compatible graphic formats, see “Graphic formats for importing” on page 681 and “Graphic formats for exporting” on page 681.

Opening, saving, and deleting graphic files You can save any graphic you create or add to the spreadsheet when you save the notebook. You can also delete graphics from your notebooks.


399

To save a graphic in a Quattro Pro notebook Click File, Save.

To use the Save As feature to save a graphic in a Quattro Pro notebook 1 Click File, Save As. 2 Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list box. 3 Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file. 4 Type the filename in the File Name box.

To delete a graphic in Quattro Pro 1 Click the graphic. 2 Click Edit, Delete. You can also press DELETE to remove a selected graphic.

Renaming graphics You can change the object name of charts, maps, text boxes, OLE objects, and controls such as buttons and check boxes. You can reference the Object Name in macros that work with this item. For more information about referencing objects, see “Using macros” on page 489.

To rename a graphic 1 Right-click the graphic, then click OLE Object Properties. 2 Click the Object Name tab. 3 Type a new name in the Object Name box. You cannot change the object name of shapes on the spreadsheet or in the Draw Picture window. You can however, change the object name of the Draw Picture window which is an OLE object container.

400


Protecting graphics You can protect or lock graphics to limit access, for example, a data entry form for other users. You can protect the entire sheet, then unprotect the graphics you want users to edit. Or you may want to unprotect a chart that graphs the data that users enter.

To protect a graphic 1 Click the graphic, then click Format, Selection. 2 Click the Protection tab. 3 Enable the Locked check box.

To unprotect a graphic 1 Click the graphic, then click Format, Selection. 2 Click the Protection tab. 3 Disable the Locked check box.

To unprotect all graphics on a sheet 1 Click Format, Sheet. 2 Click the Protection tab. 3 Disable the Enable Object Locking check box. If you want an alternate way to display the OLE Objects Properties dialog box, click the graphic, then click the Property button.

Inserting graphics from other sources Quattro Pro lets you insert graphic files created in other applications in your spreadsheets, charts, and maps. After you insert a graphic, you can adjust the size and position of the graphic. For more information about sizing and positioning graphics, see “Moving and resizing graphics” on page 396.

To import graphics in other formats 1 Do one of the following: Open the spreadsheet where you want to insert a graphic Click the chart, map, or Draw Picture window


401

2 Click Insert, Graphics, From File. 3 Browse through the category folders until you find the graphic file you want to insert. 4 Select the file. You can also click Insert, File, then specify the name of the graphic file you want to insert.

Adding Quattro Pro graphics to other applications You can export graphics by cutting and pasting the graphic or by exporting the graphic as an object. You can paste an image into Microsoft Paint or into CorelDRAW to save it as a separate object. Any annotations added to a chart or map remain with the chart or map when exported.

To paste a Quattro Pro image into Microsoft Paint 1 Select the area you want to include in the image. The area must be contiguous. 2 Click Edit, Copy. Make no further changes in Quattro Pro until you paste this image. 3 Do one of the following: Click Start, Programs, Accessories, Microsoft Paint to launch this application Maximize Microsoft Paint if it is already running 4 Click Edit, Paste. Be sure to paste the image into the target application immediately after copying it to the Clipboard from Quattro Pro, before making any changes to the Quattro Pro notebook. Otherwise, the image is invalid and unavailable.

To export a Quattro Pro chart or map 1 Click the chart or map. 2 Click Chart, Export to File. 3 Click the browse button next to the File Name box.

402


4 Choose a file format from the File Type list. 5 Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list. 6 Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file. 7 Type a filename in the File Name box, then click OK. 8 Enable the Bitmap Gray Scale check box to save the chart or map without colors. The Bitmap Gray Scale option is not available for .EPS files. .GIF files must be exported when you are in 256-color (or less) mode. .JPG files can only be exported in true color mode.

Working with Clipart Quattro Pro contains a scrapbook of Clipart and other graphics that you can add to your notebooks. The Scrapbook is a window in which you can browse folders that store collections of: Clipart (including .WPG, .GIF, and .JPG files) Photos (.BMP) Sounds (including MIDI and WAVE files) Movies (.AVI) Web images (.GIF) The Scrapbook provides drag-and-drop access to these folders. In addition, the Scrapbook lets you organize, store, and access favorite files. Clipart files are usually WordPerfect graphic (.WPG) files which are metafiles containing vectored or bitmap images, or Encapsulated PostScript. This type of graphic is used in several Corel Office Suite applications, including Corel Presentations. You can add images to the Scrapbook by copying and pasting .WPG files into the Clipart folder. You can also create your own group of images and display them as a new category folder in the Scrapbook by creating a new folder, then copying and pasting .WPG image files into it. Corel Presentations 9 can automatically read and convert images in many standard formats, including .JPG, .BMP, .PCX, and others. For more information about converting imported graphics in Corel Presentations, see “Import graphics formats” on page in the Corel Presentations 9 help. Use Clipart to add interest and emphasis to highlight ideas in notebooks, slides, and charts. Thousands of Clipart images and photos are provided with WordPerfect Office 2000. During a typical installation, only some of these Adding graphics to spreadsheets

403

images are copied to your hard drive. The remaining Clipart images are stored on the WordPerfect Office 2000 CD. For more information about the Scrapbook, see Using Scrapbook in the online Help.

Designing borders, lines, and shapes Quattro Pro lets you draw graphics, including shapes, lines, and arrows, on the spreadsheet or within a floating window. With drawing tools, you can draw simple lines, shapes, polylines, and polygons on notebooks, charts, and maps. The Draw Picture feature launches the Corel Presentations drawing tools. Some of these tools include special drawing toolbars that let you click buttons to make selections for drawing tools, line widths, color selections, and special effects.

Accessing drawing tools in Quattro Pro There are two ways to access drawing tools in Quattro Pro: displaying the Charts and Drawing Tools toolbar, or automatically when you launch the Draw Picture window from Corel Presentations. For more information about some of the drawing tools, see “Drawing in Quattro Pro” on page 393.

To display the Charts and Drawing Tools toolbar 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Enable the Chart and Drawing Tools check box in the Toolbars list. 3 Drag the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar to the toolbar area if you want to display the toolbar permanently.

To use drawing tools from Corel Presentations Click Insert, Graphics, Draw Picture.

404


Once you drag the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar to the toolbar area, the toolbar does not display if you disable the Chart and Drawing Tools check box in the Toolbars list. However, if you display the same toolbar later, it will default to the permanent position. For more information about managing toolbars, see “Working with toolbars” on page 24. Pick the correct Aspect Ratio for a chart before you begin to draw; otherwise, you may have to resize, reposition, or even redraw elements to fit the final format. For more information about adjusting the aspect ratio of graphics, see “Adjusting the aspect ratio of charts” on page 380.

Click the Close button on the top right side to close the toolbar. If you want to keep a drawing tool selected after you use it, double-click the tool. Click it again to deactivate it.

Drawing simple lines and shapes You can add lines and shapes to charts or maps within a notebook. Graphics added to charts and maps are stored with the chart or map; when a chart or map is exported or pasted into another location, the graphics remain attached. For drawing lines and shapes, you can access various tools from the following tool flyouts: The Line Tools Flyout


405

The Shape Tools Flyout

To draw a line or arrow on a chart, map, or spreadsheet 1 Do one of the following: Click the chart or map where you want to add the graphic Click Insert, Graphics, Draw Picture (this opens the floating window where you can draw) Proceed to step 2 if you want to draw directly on the spreadsheet 2 Open the Line Tools flyout on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar, then click of the following buttons: Line — lets you draw a straight line Arrow — lets you draw a straight arrow 3 Point where you want to start the line or arrow. 4 Drag to where you want the line or arrow to end. You can customize the lines and arrows that you draw. The properties for lines and arrows that you draw on a sheet differ from the properties of lines and arrows drawn in a chart window. For more information about changing line and arrow properties, see “Editing and customizing graphics” on page 414.

To draw a shape on a chart, map, or spreadsheet 1 Do one of the following: Click the chart or map where you want to add the graphic Click Insert, Graphics, Draw Picture (this opens the floating window where you can draw) Proceed to step 2 if you want to draw directly on the spreadsheet

406


2 Open the Basic Shapes flyout on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar, then click of the following buttons: Rectangle — creates a rectangular shape or square shape Ellipse — draws a circle or an ellipse Rounded Rectangle — creates rectangular shapes with rounded corners 3 Drag the mouse until the shape is the size you want. If you want to create a perfect square or circle, press SHIFT while dragging the mouse to create the shape. You can also click Insert, Shape to draw lines, arrows, and shapes. If you want to modify the shape, change the properties of the object. For more information about modifying shapes, see “Editing and customizing graphics” on page 414. You can make a spreadsheet graphic transparent which allows you to see the cells beneath it. For more information about making graphics transparent, see “Making graphics transparent” on page 418.

Drawing polylines and freehand lines Quattro Pro lets you draw a regular polyline or a freehand line on a chart, map, on the spreadsheet or in the Draw Pictures window. If you create a polyline with one of the polyline tools, you can create polylines with or without arrows.

To draw a polyline 1 Do one of the following: Click the chart or map Open the spreadsheet where you want to add the polyline 2 Click a polyline tool on the Line Object flyout. 3 Drag to create each segment in the polyline. 4 To end the polyline, double-click.

To draw a freehand line on a chart or map 1 Click the chart or map. 2 Click Insert, Shape, Freehand Line or Freehand Polygon.


407

3 Drag to draw the shape. 4 To end the shape, release the mouse button.

Drawing polygons Quattro Pro lets you draw regular or freehand polygons on a chart or map, on the spreadsheet, or in the Draw Pictures window. You can select a polygon tool from the main menu or from the Basic Shapes Flyout. To create a freehand polygon (or shape), use one of the following drawing tools: The Freehand drawing tool The Polycurve drawing tool

To draw a polygon 1 Do one of the following: Click the chart or map Open the spreadsheet where you want to add the polygon 2 Click one of the polygon shapes on the Basic Shapes flyout . 3 Drag to create each side of the polygon. 4 To end the shape, double-click. You can also end the polygon by right-clicking or clicking very close to the starting point.

To draw a freehand polygon using the Freehand drawing tool 1 Do one of the following: Click the chart or map Open the spreadsheet where you want to add the polygon 2 Click the Freehand drawing tool on the Line Tools Flyout to draw a freehand lines similar to how you would draw them by hand. 3 Drag the mouse to create the desired shape, then double-click to end the line.

To draw a freehand polygon using the Polycurve drawing tool 1 Do one of the following: Click the chart or map

408


Open the spreadsheet where you want to add the polygon 2 Click the Polycurve drawing tool on the Line Tools Flyout to draw curved lines and shapes. 3 Click the spreadsheet where you want to start the shape, drag the mouse, then click when you want the line to change direction. 4 To end the shape, release the mouse button. You can close an open shape created with the Freehand drawing tool by double-clicking the shape (you will see small white circles wherever the line curved when creating the shape), then dragging one of the end points to join with the other end point. The closed shape automatically has a default fill color. For information about changing the fill color of drawn objects, see “Changing the color or background of graphics” on page 416.

Making text into graphics Quattro Pro lets you convert regular text to a graphic using TextArt or text box graphics. TextArt differs from text box graphics in that TextArt can be a geometric shape, whereas text in a box exists in a cell or a rectangular frame. Use TextArt for creating shapes like pennants, circles, and waves. Use text box graphics for formatting text in cells on a spreadsheet, or creating an active chart button that triggers a macro command when clicked.

Creating TextArt Use TextArt to change words in your documents into designs. You can shape the image using patterns, colors, and other options, or you can select from a wide variety of predesigned shapes. Besides creating 2-D TextArt images, you can create 3-D TextArt images if you select the 3D TextArt component during a custom installation. An example of TextArt.

TextArt designs are graphic images. They are contained in a graphics box that can be moved and sized in the notebook. They can also be used in any Windows application as an OLE object.


409

Adding TextArt The TextArt dialog has four different tabs: General — lets you enter the text you want displayed as well as select the shape, font and font style, and justification settings 2D Options — sets pattern fill, shadow types, outline, rotation, or a preset TextArt style 3D Options — sets lighting effects, bevel and depth, rotation, or a preset 3D TextArt style Advanced 3D Options — sets the texture for the face and bevel, the texture size and lighting, and the quality of the texture

To create text-shaped art 1 Click the spreadsheet where you want to create text-shaped art. 2 Click Insert, Graphics, TextArt, then type the text you want. 3 Select various options to make it look the way you want it. 4 When you are finished, click outside the text box.

Creating 3D TextArt You can create more advanced TextArt using the 3D options in the TextArt dialog box.

To create 3D TextArt 1 Click the spreadsheet where you want to create text-shaped art. 2 Click Insert, Graphics, TextArt, then type the text you want. 3 Enable the 3D Mode check box. 4 Click of the following tabs: 3D Options Advanced 3D Options

Creating text box graphics Text boxes can be used on your spreadsheet to format text in individual cells or to create buttons that can link the current spreadsheet to another data source or type of display. For example, you can add a chart button to a chart or map that links to a spreadsheet or Internet address. When text box live buttons are used in slide shows, they create jumps between parts of the slide

410


show. For information about creating chart buttons in slide shows, see “Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps” on page 467. You can create a text box, type text in it, add texture and color to the background, and position and size the box just as you would any graphic. The text box exists in a layer above the notebook, but is still part of the notebook. An example of a text box.

You can create a text box, move and size a text box, add bullets to a text box, add 3-D text to a text box, or place text in a formatted cell: You can also create text in a normal cell, then rotate the text and add fill colors, borders, and textures to the cell. You can also change the color of the cell background, add a border to a cell, or add other cell formatting. For information on cell formatting, see “Formatting cells and applying styles” on page 174.

Creating text boxes You can create a text box using menu commands or using the Text Box button on the Charts and Drawing Tools toolbar. When you type in your text, the text wraps to fit the width of the box, and the depth of the box increases automatically. The Alignment property turns this wordwrap feature off and on. For information about turning off the alignment property, see “Customizing a text box” on page 412.

To create a text box 1 Do one of the following: Click Insert, Shape, Text Box Click the Text Box button 2 Do one of the following: Click the spreadsheet to create the text box. Drag out a text box to the size you want. 3 Type text.


411

To type a reference to a label cell, type a backslash (\), a forward slash (/), the cell reference, then a closing backslash (for example, \/A:A1\). 4 Click outside the text box to see the label text instead of the reference. To add a text box to a chart or map (so that the text box moves with the chart or map), click the chart or map, then create the text box.

Adding bullets to a text box You can add bullets to your text box by typing a reference code. The following shows the available bullets and the codes that create them:

To add bullets to a text box 1 In a text box, type a bullet code, for example, \BLT1\ or \BLT2\. 2 Click outside the text box to see the bullets. You can also create bullet charts, charts that consist of bulleted lists. Bullet charts are easier to revise because their text is based on notebook data. For more information on bullet charts, see “Working with bullet charts” on page 341.

Customizing a text box Once you create a text box, you can modify its properties to achieve a variety of different effects. You can convert regular text into 3-D text or display the text without the box outline.

To customize a text box border or box type 1 Click a chart, then click Format, Selection.

412


2 Select one of the following tabs: Alignment — changes alignment, or tab settings Text Font — changes font, size, and appearance Text Settings — changes the fill style and color of the text Box Settings — changes the frame around the text box Fill Settings — changes the background of the text box (pattern, wash, bitmap) Protection — locks the contents of the text box Object Name — sets the object name (used in the Object list or referenced in macros) Print — sets whether the text box is printed with the spreadsheet

To make 3-D text in a text box 1 Click a text box. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Click the Text Settings tab, then choose 3-D from the Fill Style list. 4 Click a 3-D style button. 5 Enable the Shaded check box, then choose a shadow color from the Background Color list. 6 Move the slider to change the perspective of the text.

To create a text box with a transparent box border 1 Click a chart, then click Format, Selection. 2 Click the Box Settings tab. 3 Open the Fill Color color picker, then select No Color in the upper-left corner of the color picker. 4 Choose the None line option from the Box Type list.

Moving and sizing text boxes You can move and resize text boxes just like any other graphic.

To move a text box 1 Click the text box border to select it. 2 Drag the border to move the box to a new location. Adding graphics to spreadsheets

413

To size a text box 1 Click the text box border to select it. 2 Do one of the following: Drag a sizing handle to the appropriate size. Drag a corner handle to size in two directions at once.

Editing and customizing graphics You can customize color palettes and color selections used with Quattro Pro graphics. You can use color palettes to change the fill and border properties of chart elements and drawn shapes. Each palette square has the following properties: Fill Settings — selects the foreground and background color of the graphic, and sets the fill style (none, solid, pattern, wash, or bitmap graphic) Border Settings — sets the color and thickness of the lines that form the boundary of the graphic The large square to the right of the palette displays the active palette selection. Objects you create with a drawing tool display the Fill Settings and Border Settings shown in this square. The easiest and most efficient way to customize the appearance of a graphic is to click it, then modify the properties. Drawn graphics have many of the same properties as charts. For example, the rectangle properties are also found in the Chart pane and Bar Series properties. You can also make a graphic transparent. When you group graphics, you can make changes that are applied to the entire group.

Changing colors in the notebook palette When you cannot find a color in an existing palette, you can define your own colors. You can save custom colors in the notebook palette. This palette gets saved with the notebook. For information about saving graphics with notebooks, see “Opening, saving, and deleting graphic files” on page 399.

To define a new color for the notebook palette 1 Click Format, Notebook. 2 Click the NBPalette tab. 3 Click a color on the onscreen color palette that you want to modify, then click Edit Color.

414


4 Move the slider in one or both of the following: Circle Color Wheel — lets you choose lighter or darker settings, as well as move into different color sectors of the color wheel Vertical Scale — lets you select lighter or darker settings within the area selected displayed in the color wheel You can also choose a new color by typing numbers in the Color Values section of the Select Color dialog box.

Returning to the default palette If you customize the colors in the palette and want to delete the new colors, you can reset the palette to the default palette that comes with Quattro Pro.

To reset the default palette 1 Click Format, Notebook. 2 Click the NBPalette tab. 3 Click the Reset Defaults button.

Creating custom colors Quattro Pro provides three models for creating new colors: HLS, RGB, and CMY. Only one model displays at a time, but all three update when you change a color setting. Choose whichever model you prefer. Color

Description

HLS

Hue, Luminosity, and Saturation — Hue is the basic color: red, yellow, orange, or green, for example. Saturation is the amount of white mixed with the hue. Brightness is the amount of light energy present. When brightness is zero, no light is present, and the result is black for every hue and saturation value. By adjusting the saturation and brightness, you can easily control the amount of gray in a color.

RGB

Red, Green, and Blue — You mix different amounts of red, green, and blue to form all other colors.

CMY

Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. You mix different amounts of these colors to form all other colors. Commercial printing houses often use this model to mix colors.


415

Changing graphic properties Quattro Pro lets you modify any graphics you create or insert. You can set box properties and border colors. You can also change the box type and colors for charts, maps, OLE objects, and controls such as radio buttons and check boxes.

To change graphic properties 1 Select a graphic. 2 Click Format, Selection. 3 Change any settings.

To change a graphic’s border display 1 Click the graphic, then click one of the following: Format, Selection the Properties button 2 Click the Box Type tab, then click one of the following line types: None Thin Medium Thick 3 Enable the Drop Shadow check box to add a shadow to the item.

To change a graphic’s border color 1 Click the graphic, then click one of the following: Format, Selection the Properties button 2 Click the Border Color tab, then click a color on the color palette.

Changing the color or background of graphics You can change the background color or the type of fill used in the background of most graphics by modifying the properties. If you create a graphic using Draw Picture, you must follow a different procedure for modifying the background of the window.

416


To change the background color or pattern of a graphic 1 Select the graphic (until you see slashes around the perimeter and handles inside the frame). 2 Click Chart, Background. 3 Click the Fill Settings tab. 4 Choose one of the following in the Fill Style list: Pattern — sets the pattern or background fill color Wash — sets the start and end colors of the wash fill

To change the color or pattern background of the Draw Picture window 1 Double-click the Draw Picture window. 2 Right-click, then click Page Setup. 3 Click the Page Color tab. 4 In the Fill Style list, click one of the following options: None — sets a white background Pattern — selects a pattern display and the color combination you want to display Gradient — selects a gradient effect and a color combination Texture — selects a Quattro Pro texture pattern, or you can browse and choose a texture from another file or application Picture — selects a Quattro Pro graphic to display in the background, or you can browse and choose a graphic from another file or application In order to do step 2 in the above procedure, you must have a print driver installed.

Choose from more colors by clicking More and specifying a color. You can add the color to the custom colors by clicking Add to Custom Colors, then clicking OK.


417

Changing the properties of grouped graphics Once you group graphics in a Draw Picture window, you can modify them as a group using the Properties dialog box.

To change the properties of every graphic in a group simultaneously 1 Click a graphic in the group. Be careful to select the graphic, not the blank space between the graphics. 2 Right-click, and click Object Properties. 3 Make the modifications you want.

To change the fill and border settings of all solid graphics in a group simultaneously 1 Click the object or Draw Picture window. 2 Click the group, then click Object Properties. 3 Click one or more of the following tabs: Fill — sets select the color and fill type Line — sets the line style, color, width, joints, and start and end markers Shadow — sets the shadow direction, offset, and shadow color 4 Make the appropriate changes on the selected tab.

Making graphics transparent You can make drawn graphic shapes, the Draw Picture window, and inserted graphics in your spreadsheet transparent. One way to use a transparent graphic is when you want to create a watermark on a spreadsheet. If you mark the graphic as transparent, the color won’t display.

To make an inserted graphic transparent or the Draw Picture window 1 Click the graphic border. 2 Do one of the following: Click Format, Selection Click the Properties button 3 Click the Box Type tab, then enable the Transparent check box.

418


To make a drawn shape transparent 1 Click the shape, then click Format, Object Properties, Fill. 2 Click the Fill tab, then choose None for Fill Style.

Aligning and spacing drawn graphics You can align or center drawn graphics in the Draw Picture window and adjust the amount of space between graphics. You can align single objects — align with respect to the draw window margins multiple objects — align all objects within the selection area (for example, Align, Left aligns all selected objects with the left edge of the object that is furthest left) The Space Evenly option places an equal amount of space between three or more objects; the left most and right-most objects do not move, however, other objects move to make all objects equidistant

To align or center graphics 1 Select the graphics or shapes you want to align. 2 Click Edit, Arrange, Align Objects. 3 Choose one of the following options: Left — aligns the left sides of the selected graphics with the left margin of the draw window Right — aligns the right sides of the selected graphics with the right margin of the draw window Top — aligns the top edges of the selected graphics to the top margin of the draw window Bottom — aligns the bottom edges of the selected graphics to the bottom margin of the draw window Center Left/Right — aligns graphics vertically with respect to the draw window Center Top/Bottom — aligns graphics horizontally with respect to the draw window Center Both — moves both graphics to the center with respect to the draw window

To space graphics 1 Select the graphics you want to space. Adding graphics to spreadsheets

419

2 Click Edit, Arrange, Space Evenly. 3 Choose one of the following options: Left/Right — spaces the graphics horizontally Top/Bottom — spaces the graphics vertically You can also use Snap To Grid to align chart and dialog graphics. Right-click the chart or the dialog window title bar, then click Grid, Snap To Grid.

Changing sections of .CGM or .CLP graphics Computer graphics metafile (.CGM) and Quattro Pro graphics for DOS (.CLP) files function as groups of graphics. To edit or change a part or all of this type of graphic, the graphic must be ungrouped and then, after editing, regrouped. For more information about working with grouped graphics, see “Grouping graphics in charts, maps, or the Draw Picture window” on page 396 or “Changing the properties of grouped graphics” on page 418.

To change sections of .CGM or.CLP graphics 1 Select the graphic. 2 Click Format, Ungroup. Handles appear around the individual objects in the graphic. 3 Click an object, then click the Properties button to change settings such as the fill and border. 4 When you are finished, select all the objects and click Format, Group to regroup the graphic. If you want to ungroup graphics, you can right-click the graphic, and select Ungroup. You can also group graphics using the Group button.

420


ADDING MAPS TO SPREADSHEETS

14

Maps can expose trends in adjoining regions that would be hidden in a spreadsheet table or a numeric chart. You create maps just as you create charts. They can appear in the same places — next to data or on its own page. You can also customize maps and include them in a slide show. Quattro Pro automatically selects the most appropriate map from those available, then assigns colors or patterns to each region. Before you create a map, it is important to arrange data in a suitable format. Quattro Pro maps contain the following parts: Title and subtitle — gives the map name and an indication of what information the map shows. Legend — provides users with a key to understanding the meaning of patterns and colors used on a map, and the range of data each section represents. Pin — identifies cities or other important information. Symbol — identifies the type of marker assigned to mark pin locations. Overlay — is a layer of data which is superimposed on top of the basic map. Highways, city locations, state borders and site locations (for example, regional offices) can be added to maps with overlays. After you create a map, you can change the way that data is represented on your map, as well as add customized details like symbols and other graphic

Adding maps to spreadsheets

421

effects. You can edit the whole map or only portions of it. Once the map contains all the features you want to include, you can copy and save it. The Mapping component is accessible in Quattro Pro only if you have included it with a custom installation of Quattro Pro. Quattro Pro can recognize regions belonging to installed maps only. For example, if you have data from states in India, Quattro Pro will not recognize those states as part of India without installing the map India by State. All region names to be used in a map must be of the same type. For example, you cannot use France, Germany, and Sicily as region names in the same map, as Sicily is a part of Italy, and not a nation. If you replace Sicily with Italy, however, you can display your data in a map of Western Europe.

Setting up map data You can create a map from spreadsheet data, sample data provided with Quattro Pro, or a blank map. The Datamap files installed with the Quattro Pro mapping component contain statistical and geographic data related to various world regions. Sample data is stored in data map files and can be copied to your spreadsheet and combined with your own spreadsheet data. You can also sort and filter columns to obtain data results for a specific category. For more information about sorting and filtering data, see “Organizing and manipulating data” on page 217. Quattro Pro automatically fills in the map with the data you provide. To have Quattro Pro interpret your data correctly, enter it on the spreadsheet in the following sequence: A spreadsheet showing region name, color, pattern, and pin information.

If you include latitude and longitude decimal values to identify a location, enter them in the following order:

422


A spreadsheet showing longitude and latitude data.

Column A contains region names or IDs. You can list country names in full, (for example, United Kingdom, France, Germany), or you can list standard abbreviations (for example GB, FR, DE). Column B contains color data associated with each region name. Variations in this set of data are displayed as different colors in the map. Color data can be either numbers or text. Column C contains pattern data associated with each region name. Variations in this second set of data are displayed as different patterns in the map. Pattern data can be either numbers or text. Column D contains either (1) the pin location or (2) latitude. Column E contains either (1) the pin label or (2) longitude. Column F contains pin labels if you have entered latitude and longitude. Latitude is expressed as degrees, minutes, and seconds north or south of the equator. Longitude is expressed as degrees, minutes, and seconds east or west of the prime meridian that runs through Greenwich, England. For Quattro Pro to interpret latitude and longitude coordinates, you must convert them to decimals. The simplest way to convert coordinates to decimals is to use the @LLDEC function to create a new series. The resulting coordinates are preceded by a minus sign if they are south of the equator or west of the prime meridian. For example, the longitude coordinate 38×20’40"W converts to -38.334444. For more information about converting latitude and longitude values to decimals, see the Quattro Pro spreadsheet function @LLDEC function.For more information about Quattro Pro spreadsheet functions, see the Reference Information in the online Help. Map data is easier to select when you arrange it in adjacent columns. If your notebook has blank columns or columns containing other data between your map data columns, you need to exclude those columns from your selection.

Using Quattro Pro datamap files You can copy columns and rows of data directly from a datamap file, or choose only the data you need to create the map you want. Each datamap file is write-protected preventing you from deleting any data. The regional datamap Adding maps to spreadsheets

423

files you can copy data from are: Australia, Canada, Europe, Japan, Mexico, and the World. For example, if you want statistics on Australia, open the file Australia.wb3. For a complete listing of all the files with descriptions of their contents, read the datamaps.txt included in the Datamaps folder.

To copy data from the datamap file 1 Open a new notebook and save it with a new name of your choice. 2 Open a datamap file. The default location is usually (C:\PROGRAM FILES\COREL\WORDPERFECT OFFICE 2000\PROGRAMS\DATAMAPS). 3 Select the data you want to copy to your notebook.

Creating, sizing, and moving maps You can use the Map Expert to create maps representing your data. The Map Expert allows you to create floating maps or full-page maps. You can also create map titles or subtitles in the Map Expert at the same time you create your map. You can create a map without titles or subtitles, simply by leaving those text boxes blank in the Map Expert. When you create a map with data, Quattro Pro calculates the full range of map data and assigns each map region one of six colors or patterns, depending on where that region lies in the data range. The map legend identifies the range of data associated with each color or pattern. The upper range of the first group of ranges is greater than the lowest value or group of values, and the upper range of the last group of ranges is greater than the highest value in the map data. When you create a map with Quattro Pro, the Map Expert displays a Check Region list box when it encounters an unknown region in the data. You can replace the unknown name with one from the list Quattro Pro provides, or you can skip the region. If you skip the unknown region, the map displays no data for that region. For example, you can replace an area name with an abbreviation, or vice-versa. You can also resize floating maps. You can change the aspect ratio for both floating maps and full page maps to view the map’s proportions in relation to the way the map is displayed.

Creating, moving, and sizing floating maps Using the map expert, you can create a floating map from the data on your spreadsheets. A floating map appears on the spreadsheet with the data it

424


represents. Once you create a floating map you can adjust the size and move it anywhere on your spreadsheet.

To create a floating map 1 Select the cell references containing the map data. The first cell must contain the first map region name. 2 Click Insert, Graphics, Map. 3 Follow the directions in the Map Expert. 4 Click or drag where you want to place the map on the spreadsheet. You can create a blank map by not entering any cell references in the color or pattern boxes in the Step 1 of 5 window of the Map Expert.

To move or resize a floating map 1 Click the borders of the map to select it. 2 Do one of the following: Drag to move the map to where you want. Drag a sizing handle to change the width or height. Drag a corner handle to change the width and height without changing map proportions. You can also start the Map Expert by clicking the Create Map button on the Experts And Numeric Tools toolbar. Click the Tip button during any step in the Map Expert for more information.

Creating full page maps Quattro Pro lets you create maps on a separate page rather than on the spreadsheet with the data it represents. You can also convert full page maps into slides. For more information about adding maps to slide shows, see “Adding charts and other objects to slide shows” on page 452.

To create a map on a separate page 1 Select the cell references containing the map data. Adding maps to spreadsheets

425

The first cell must contain the first map region name. 2 Click Insert, Graphics, Map. 3 Follow the directions in the Map Expert. When you reach the Step 4 of 5 window in the Map Expert, enable the Map Window button in the Destination section to create the map on a separate page. You can create a blank map by not entering any cell references in the color or pattern boxes in the Step 1 of 5 window of the Map Expert.

Changing the aspect ratio of maps When you change a map’s aspect ratio, you are changing the height and width proportions of the map. Quattro Pro provides you with the following pre-set aspect ratios: Floating chart, Screen Slide, 35-mm Slide, Print Preview, and Full Extent. Changing the aspect ratio also changes the proportions of the title and the legend. For this reason, maps with the Full Extent aspect ratio often look different on a spreadsheet page than they do on their own page or in one of the two slide formats. The Print Preview option provides a view of how the same map looks when printed on 8.5 x 11 inch paper. For information about printing maps, see “Printing charts, maps, and slide shows” on page 484.

To change a map’s aspect ratio 1 Click the chart. 2 Click View, then click one of the following: View Floating Chart — (default) retains the proportions of the floating map, even when you print the map or display it on its own page Screen Slide — displays the proportions for maps intended for use in an onscreen slide show 35mm Slide — displays the correct proportions to a map that you plan to send to a slide service for processing into 35-mm slides Printer Preview — displays how the map looks when printed with the current page setup Full Extent — adjusts the map proportions to fill the window and fit the area designated for the floating graph

426


To see examples of aspect ratio in Quattro Pro, see “Adjusting the aspect ratio of charts” on page 380.

Displaying portions of a map Quattro Pro provides you with zoom tools that let you view the map (or a portion of the map) with increased or reduced magnification. You can create a new map from the magnified view. For example, if you zoom a map of Africa by Country, you can view a single country (for example, Egypt) on your map. You can return to the original view of the region, as that zoom view does not override the original. You can print the magnified map if you use the Print command with the selected zoom. If you save the notebook, the map is saved with the magnification.

To use the zoom tool on a map 1 Click a map. 2 Right-click the area you want to zoom, then click one of the following: Zoom To Normal — returns the map to its original magnification. Zoom In — lets you expand a section of the map to fill the map window. After you click Zoom In, the pointer changes to a magnifying glass. Click and drag the pointer to select the section of the map you want to magnify. Zoom Out — reduces the magnification. Center — lets you make a different point the center of the map window without changing magnification. Right-click the point you want to make the center of the map, then click Center.

Representing data using colors, patterns, and overlays Quattro Pro lets you use spreadsheet data and represent it on your map in the form of colors and patterns. A map consists of one or more overlays with or without spreadsheet data. For example, a map of the U.S. usually shows state borders, but may also show highways or the location of major cities. Each of these sets of boundaries or locations is called an overlay because they can be laid on top of each other, like overhead transparencies or sheets of tracing paper. There are three types of overlays you can add to a map:


427

Region — shows boundaries, such as states or districts. A basic map consists of one region overlay. You can link color or pattern data to region overlays. Static — shows other features, such as highways or the world grid. You cannot alter the content of a static overlay. Pin — shows points, such as cities or corporate offices. Unlike static overlays, pin overlays are dynamically linked to location coordinates in Quattro Pro notebooks, so you can select the points you want to display and mark them with symbols or labels. Every time you add an overlay to a map, the map becomes more complex. Use overlays conservatively, so that your maps are easy to read. If you want to use data from a different file or notebook, copy the data to your working notebook or open the file before you add an overlay to your map. When the Map Data dialog box is displayed, you can switch between open notebooks, but you cannot open any other files.

Displaying map data by color or pattern When you create a map, you have the option of displaying spreadsheet data on the map. Colors and patterns show ranges related to the data on the spreadsheet. You can include this information when you create the map with the Map Expert, or you can add it to your map at a later time. You can also remove the colors or patterns from a map related to a data selection.

Adding color and pattern data to maps You can add color or pattern data series to maps at any time.

To add color and pattern data to a map 1 Right-click the map, then click Data. 2 Do one of the following: Enter the cell references for the data you want to represent colors in the Color Data box. Enter the cell references for the data you want to represent patterns in the Pattern Data box. You can also edit a map following these methods: From the Objects Sheet, click View, Objects, then double-click the map icon. You can also right-click the map to bring up editing options.

428


Removing color and pattern data from maps You can remove a color data series or a pattern data series from a map.

To remove map data 1 Right-click the map, then click Data. 2 Do one of the following: Select the series in the Color Data edit field. Select the series in the Pattern Data edit field. 3 Press DELETE.

Displaying region and static overlays on maps If you want to associate color or pattern data with the regions in an overlay, you need to select region names or IDs along with your color or pattern data. If you leave the color, pattern, or pin location and label fields blank, Quattro Pro adds only the region boundaries to your map. If you add a region overlay to a map that already contains color data but no pattern data, you can display pattern data in the regions defined within the new overlay. Conversely, you can add color data to your overlay if the original map has only pattern data. If you add an overlay from a different geographic location, you need to zoom out before you can see the new overlay in the map. A basic map consists of one region overlay. You can display two different regions in the same map using overlays. For example, if you create a map of Canada, you can add a United States overlay and a Mexico overlay. You can display the same type of data as colors or patterns across more than one overlay if: the data has the same type and increment, and the regions in each overlay do not overlap. For example, you can add an overlay of Canada by province onto a map of the United States, as long as both regions use data sets of population data with the same increment, such as population in thousands. You cannot, however, mix Canadian employment data with United States population data, unless you display one in colors and the other in patterns. Unlike other types of overlays, static overlays do not require any notebook data. Static overlays display correctly only if they are appropriate for the current map. For example, a static overlay of U.S. highways is of no use in a map of Japan.


429

Quattro Pro includes two static overlays: the U.S. Interstate Highways overlay, and the World Grid overlay. The U.S. Interstate Highways overlay marks in the major highways which cross the United States. The World Grid overlay adds longitude and latitude lines to the map.

Adding region overlays to maps You can add region overlays to a map to display regional boundaries.

To add a region overlay to a map using the Map Data dialog box 1 In a notebook spreadsheet, click a map. 2 Do one of the following: Click Chart, Map, Data. Double-click a map, then click Chart, Series. Right-click a map, then click Data. 3 Click the Add Overlay button. 4 Click the Region tab. When you create a map with the Map Expert, the first region overlay is added automatically when you create the map.

Displaying multiple regions in maps You can extend a map to add other regions to it. For example, you can add the Africa overlay to a map of Asia if you want to show all the countries in the Middle East. If you add another region to a map, make sure you add that region’s region, color and pattern data to your spreadsheet. For more information about organizing map data, see “Setting up map data” on page 422.

To display another region on a map 1 Add the region data to your spreadsheet, including any color or pattern data. 2 Right-click the map, then click Data, Add Overlay. 3 Select a region to add, then click OK. 4 Enter the cell addresses for the new region in the Region Names box.

430


5 Enter the cell addresses for the new region data you want represented by color. 6 Enter the cell addresses for the new region data you want represented by patterns. 7 Zoom out to view the new region added to the map. For information about using the zoom feature with Quattro Pro maps, see “Displaying portions of a map” on page 427.

Adding static overlays to maps Quattro Pro includes two static overlays which apply pre-set data to your maps: the World Grid, and the U.S. Highway grid.

To add the World Grid or the U.S. Highway grid 1 Right-click the map, click Data, Add Overlay. 2 Click the Static tab. 3 Choose one of the following overlays in the Static overlay list: US Interstate Highways World Grid

Working with city and location overlays Quattro Pro lets you create pin overlays to show specific locations. You can mark any location on a map using names or coordinates. If you enter names of U.S. state capitals, world capitals, or world major cities, Quattro Pro can mark those on the map. To enter any other location, use the latitude and longitude coordinates. You can also create pin symbol overlays for other features you want to display on the map. For example, you can show the location of important buildings, geographic landmarks, and historic sites. If you want to add specific locations to a map, you can create an overlay that includes longitude and latitude intersection points relative to the locations.

Adding cities to maps with pin overlays Pin overlays can display locations of cities or towns. You can add pin overlays when you create the map or at a later time. Before you add a pin overlay, make sure the spreadsheet data is organized correctly. Enter the names of major cities, their longitudes and latitudes in the three columns next to your Adding maps to spreadsheets

431

other map data in your notebook. Or, copy the same data from a datamap file into the appropriate columns. For more information about organizing map data, see “Setting up map data” on page 422.

To add major cities with the Map Expert 1 Select the data on the spreadsheet. 2 Click Insert, Graphic, Map. 3 Follow the directions in the Map Expert until you get to step 4. 4 Click the Mark Points on Your Map button. 5 Do either or both of the following: Enter the cell addresses for the Pin IDs in the Pin IDs box. Enter the cell addresses for the pin labels in the Pin Labels box. 6 Click or drag where you want to place the map on the spreadsheet.

To add major cities to an existing map 1 Click the map. 2 Right-click, and click Data, Add Overlay. 3 Click the Pin tab, and enable the Use Pin Name button. 4 Choose a city overlay in the list. 5 Type the cell addresses containing the pin IDs in the Pin ID Cells box. 6 Type the cell addresses containing the pin labels in the Pin Label Cells box. 7 Click or drag where you want to place the map on the spreadsheet.

To add major cities to a map using longitude and latitude 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure. 2 Click the Pin tab, and enable the Use Lat/Long. button. 3 Type a name for the overlay in the Name box. 4 Type the cells containing the latitude values in the Latitude Cells box. 5 Type the cells containing the longitude valued in the Longitude Cells box. 6 Type the cells containing the pin labels in the Pin Label Cells box.

432


Adding specific pin locations to maps You can add pin locations of corporate branch offices, historic sites, or geographic landmarks to your maps. Before you add a pin overlay, make sure the spreadsheet data is organized correctly. Enter the names of locations and their longitudes and latitudes in the three columns next to your other map data in your notebook. For more information about organizing location data, see “Setting up map data” on page 422.

To add pin locations to a map with the Map Expert 1 Select the data on the spreadsheet. 2 Click Insert, Graphic, Map. 3 Follow the directions in the Map Expert until you get to step 4. 4 Click the Mark Points on Your Map button. 5 Type a name for the overlay in the Name box. 6 Type the cell references containing the latitude values in the Latitude Cells box. 7 Type the cell references containing the longitude valued in the Longitude Cells box. 8 Type the cell references containing the label names you want to appear next to the pins in the Pin Label Cells box. 9 Click or drag where you want to place the map on the spreadsheet.

To add pin locations to an existing map 1 Click the map. 2 Right-click, and click Data, Add Overlay. 3 Click the Pin tab, enable the Use Lat./Long. button. 4 Follow steps 5 to 8 in the previous procedure. 5 Click OK. For information about changing the pin symbol or the appearance of the pin symbols and labels, see “Customizing pin location labels” on page 434 and “Customizing pin location symbols” on page 434.


433

Customizing pin location labels You can change the appearance of a pin label by applying different font properties. You can also display only the labels at the pin location or the labels next to a symbol.

To change the appearance of pin location labels 1 Click a region on the map. 2 Click the Property button. 3 Click the Pin Symbol tab. 4 Enable the Display Pin Labels check box. 5 Click the Font tab. 6 Do any of the following: Choose a new font from the Face list. Choose a new font size from the Size list. Choose a font color from the Color list.

To display pin labels but no pin symbols on maps 1 Click a region on the map. 2 Click the Property button. 3 Click the Pin Symbol tab. 4 Enable the Display Pin Labels check box. 5 Disable the Pin Symbol check box. Pin labels appear in your map only if you select them along with your pin names or latitude and longitude coordinates. If you do not include the labels in your selection, pin locations are marked with a symbol or left blank, depending on the Display Pin Symbol setting.

Customizing pin location symbols You can change the pin symbol that displays next to any label. For example, you can display symbols that represent schools, direction arrows, or other landmarks on your map.

434


To change the location symbol 1 Click the map. 2 Click the Property button. 3 Click the Pin Symbol tab. 4 Enable the Display Pin Symbols check box. 5 Do any of the following: Choose a new font from the Face list. Choose a new font size from the Size list. Choose a font color from the Color list. 6 Choose a symbol from the Symbol list to change the symbol used.

To display pin symbols with no pin labels in maps 1 Click a region on the map. 2 Click the Property button. 3 Click the Pin Symbol tab. 4 Disable the Display Pin Labels check box. 5 Enable the Pin Symbol check box.

Hiding labels and symbols You can hide either the label or the symbol of a pin location.

To hide a pin location or symbol 1 Click a region on the map. 2 Click the Property button. 3 Click the Pin Symbol tab. 4 Do one of the following: Disable the Display Pin Labels check box to hide the pin label. Disable the Pin Symbol check box to hide the pin symbol.

Moving and resizing legends, titles, and objects The region displayed on a map is an object. Legends, titles, and any additional graphics you add to a map, are also map objects. Each object can be


435

resized or moved around on the map independently. As well, multiple objects can be selected and moved or resized as a unit.

Moving map objects on the map You can move the title and subtitle, the legend, and the region. The title and subtitle move as a unit.

To move a map object 1 Click the object to select it. 2 Drag to move the object to its new position on the map.

To move multiple map objects 1 Click a map object to select it. 2 Press SHIFT and click a second map object. 3 Drag to move the objects to their new positions on the map.

Resizing map objects You can change the size of the titles, the legend, and the region. Resizing titles and subtitles means resizing the text box around them.

To resize a map object 1 Click the object to select it. 2 Do one of the following: Drag a sizing handle to change the width or height. Drag a corner handle to change the width and height without changing map proportions.

To resize multiple map objects 1 Click an object to select it. 2 Press SHIFT and click another map object. 3 Do one of the following: Drag a sizing handle to change the width or height. Drag a corner handle to change the width and height without changing map proportions.

436


Editing maps When you want to change a map, you can edit the map and the map objects by modifying the properties associated with each. You can change the box around the map, the background, and the type of font used in any text displayed on the map. You can select the alignment of titles, or insert a graphic as fill into a map or a background.

Editing map properties Quattro Pro lets you edit maps using the main menu, using the submenu, and from the Objects sheet. Like charts, any map you create is stored on the Objects sheet at the back of the notebook. For information about editing specific map properties, see “Editing maps” on page 437.

To edit a map from the main menu 1 Click the map you want to edit. 2 Click Chart, Edit Chart, then specify the chart. 3 Click the part of the map you want to edit. 4 Right-click, then click the Properties option at the bottom of the submenu. This option varies depending on what you have selected. 5 In the dialog box, select formatting as required.

To edit a map using the submenu 1 Click the map you want to edit. 2 Click the part of the map you want to edit. 3 Right-click, and click the Properties option at the bottom of the submenu. This option varies depending on what you have selected. 4 In the dialog box, select formatting as required.

To edit a map from the Objects sheet 1 Click View, Objects to go to the Objects sheet. 2 Double-click the map icon you want to edit. 3 Do one of the following: Right-click the part of the map you want to edit, then click the Properties option at the bottom of the submenu.


437

Double-click the part of the map you want to edit to display the Properties dialog. 4 In the dialog box, select formatting as required.

Redrawing maps to reflect data selections You can redraw the map automatically when you make changes to spreadsheet data, or you can choose the option of manually updating the maps.

To set map redraw options 1 Click the map. 2 Right-click the region, click Map Properties, then click the Redraw Options tab. 3 Click one of the following: Automatic — lets you update the map every time the source data changes. Manual — lets you update the map only when you click Redraw in a submenu.

To redraw the map manually Right-click the map, then click Redraw.

Changing map borders You can customize a map border (or the box around the map) to coordinate with a color scheme used on the map itself. The drop shadow option also creates a 3-D look to the map border.

To change map borders 1 Right-click the map, then click Map Properties. 2 Click the Border Color tab, then click a color on the on-screen Color Palette. 3 Click the Box Type tab, then enable a box type button (None, Thin, Medium, or Thick) to choose the line style. 4 Enable the Drop Shadow check box to create a drop shadow behind the border.

438


Changing the map background You can change the map background to display colors, patterns, or wash effects. In addition, you can also make the background transparent.

To change the map background 1 Click a chart on a notebook sheet. 2 Click Chart, Background Properties. 3 Choose a background fill type from the Fill Style list: Pattern — to choose a solid color or two-color pattern. Wash — to choose a wash effect using one or two colors. 4 You can do one or both of the following: Choose a color from the Start Color list. Choose a color from the End Color list.

To make the map background transparent 1 Right-click the map, then click Map Properties. 2 Click the Border Color tab, then click a color on the on-screen Color Palette. 3 Click the Box Type tab, then enable the Transparent check box. Making the background transparent overrides the background fill options you set on the Background Properties dialog box.

Displaying a graphic in the map background Quattro Pro lets you use a graphic file as a background fill for a map. You can select from any of these formats: .BMP, .TIF, .PCX, .GIF.


439

To display a graphic in the background 1 Click a map on a notebook sheet. 2 Click Chart, Background Properties, Fill Settings. 3 Choose Bitmap in the Fill Style list. 4 Enable one of the following buttons: Crop To Fit — cuts out areas of the graphics which do not fit. Tile To Fit — covers the entire map background with the graphic image. Shrink To Fit — shrinks or enlarges the drawing to fit within the map background. 5 Click the Browse button next to the File Name box. 6 Choose the drive and folder where the graphics file is stored. 7 Double-click the filename.

Changing map font properties You can select different text properties like font, appearance, and size for titles, subtitles, and legend titles in maps. You can also select the fill style and color of the text.

To change map font properties 1 Click the map. 2 Right-click the text you want to modify, then click Chart Title Properties.

440


3 Click one of the following tabs: Text Font — to change the face, size, or appearance of the font. Text Settings — to change the Fill style or color settings.

Adding, editing, and deleting map titles You can add titles, subtitles, or legend titles to your maps, either as a step in the Map Expert, or after the map is created. As well, if the map has an inappropriate title or subtitle, you can delete it. You can retype a title or subtitle to reflect contents of any map. For example, if you change the data shown in the map, you can update the titles to indicate what data the map displays.

To add titles to maps using the Map Titles dialog box 1 Right-click the map, then click Titles. 2 Type text in any of the following boxes: Main Title Subtitle Legend title

To delete a map title 1 Right-click the map, then click Titles. 2 Choose the title(s) you want to delete, then click DELETE.

To retype text in a title or subtitle 1 Click the map, then click the title or subtitle you want to modify. 2 Put the pointer at the end of the text, and hold down BACKSPACE until you have removed the undesired text. 3 Type the new title or subtitle. You can also click a map, then click Chart, Titles to display the Map Titles dialog box. If you want to remove the existing text in a text frame, press DELETE.


441

Changing the alignment of titles and subtitles Quattro Pro lets you align your titles and subtitles from the Titles Property dialog box, or by manually moving the titles in question.

To change the alignment of titles and subtitles in maps 1 Click the map, right-click the text you want to modify, then click Properties. 2 Click the Alignment tab, then click either the left alignment button or the right alignment button.

To move titles manually 1 Click the edge of the title or subtitle. A text frame displays around the titles. 2 Drag the text frame where you want the titles.

Editing map legends In Quattro Pro, legends are map objects that help control how data is represented on the map. You can edit the map legend, change map legend colors, patterns, position, or layout. Each color or pattern in a legend and its associated range of values is called a bin. For example, red might represent values ranging from 0 to 500, blue might represent values of 500 to 1000, and so on. In this case, a region with a value of 375 would be red, and a region with a value of 725 would be blue. A map can contain only six colors and six patterns, but you can display data for many regions at once by assigning multiple regions to one of the available colors or patterns. You can use the Map Legend Properties to override bin assignments.

Adding titles to map legends You can give a map legend a title at any time.

To add a title to a map legend 1 Click the map, then click Chart, Legend. 2 Click the Title tab, then type the title in the Legend Title box.

442


You can also right-click the legend, then click Legend Properties to display the dialog box. Then, follow step 2 in the above procedure.

Adding and editing legend text You can add new text to the legend, or edit text you add to a legend. The text you add to the legend replaces the numeric values connected to the legend on the map display.

To add text to a legend 1 Click a map on a spreadsheet. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click one of the following: Colors Patterns 4 Type the text you want in the Legend Text boxes next to each color or pattern bin.

To edit text in a legend 1 Click a map on a spreadsheet. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click one of the following: Colors Patterns 4 Do one of the following: Leave the Legend Text boxes next to each color or pattern bin blank to display only numeric values. Enter the text you want to display in the Legend Text boxes next to each color or pattern bin.

Changing legend color selections You can choose the set of colors you want to represent the data on your map legend. You can also exclude color data from some map regions by requiring exact matches with bin values.


443

To change map legend colors 1 Click a map on a spreadsheet. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click the Colors tab. 4 Click the current color and select a new color to change the color associated with a color bin.

To exclude color data from some regions 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure. 2 Enable the Set Bin Values Manually check box. 3 Enable the Require Exact Match check box. You can also exclude color data from some regions by requiring exact matches with bin values. For information about any legend properties option, click the What’s This button, then click the option.

Changing legend pattern selections You can choose the set of patterns you want to represent the data on your map legend. You can also exclude pattern data from some regions by requiring exact matches with bin values.

To change map legend patterns 1 Click a map on a spreadsheet. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click Patterns. 4 Click the current pattern, then choose a new pattern in the Pattern list to change the pattern associated with a pattern bin.

To exclude pattern data from some regions 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure. 2 Enable the Set Bin Values Manually check box. 3 Enable the Require Exact Match check box.

444


You can also make changes to a legend by clicking a chart, right-clicking the legend, then clicking Legend Properties or by clicking a map, then clicking Chart, Legend.

Changing legend bin values You can change the values assigned to a legend by changing the maximum values for the color or pattern bins.

To change the values of the map legend 1 Click a map on a spreadsheet. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click one of the following: Colors Patterns 4 Enable the Set Bin Values Manually check box. 5 Enter new values in the Maximum Value boxes next to each color bin.

Positioning the legend You can change where the legend sits on a map. As well, you can place the legend on the right of the map or below the map. You can also drag the legend to another position on the map. For information about dragging the legend, see “Moving and resizing legends, titles, and objects” on page 435.

To change the position of a legend 1 Click a map. 2 Click Chart, Legend, Legend Position. 3 Enable one of the following buttons: Legend right — to place the legend to the right of the map. Legend below — to place the legend below the map.

Hiding and displaying the legend You can display only the color or pattern legend. As well, you can hide the whole legend.


445

To hide the color or pattern legend 1 Click a map. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click one of the following tabs: Colors Patterns 4 Disable one of the following check boxes: Show Color Legend Show Pattern Legend

To hide the legend 1 Click a map. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click the Legend Position tab. 4 Click the Hide legend button. Once you hide a legend, you cannot access the properties dialog box by right-clicking the map.

To display a hidden map legend 1 Click a map. 2 Click Chart, Legend. 3 Click the Legend Position tab. 4 Enable one of the following buttons: Legend right — to display the legend to the right of the map. Legend below — to display the legend below the map.

Saving and copying maps After you have created and customized a map, you can save the map with your spreadsheet. You can also copy the maps you make to other locations on your spreadsheet. You can save maps independently from the spreadsheet as graphic files, which allows you to use the map with other applications.

446


Saving and deleting maps When you save a notebook, Quattro Pro saves every map in that notebook. You can see the maps saved on a notebook by opening the Objects sheet.

To save a map in a notebook Click File, Save.

To delete a map 1 Click the map. 2 Press DELETE.

Copying maps You can insert the same map in more than one place in the notebook. Any time you make changes to a map, all maps on a spreadsheet associated with that map reflect the changes. If you do not want the maps to automatically update to reflect changes to the source data you must use the manual redraw feature. For more information about working with the redraw feature, see “Redrawing maps to reflect data selections” on page 438.

To insert a chart on a notebook sheet 1 Click the spreadsheet where you want to insert the map. 2 Right-click the spreadsheet, then click Insert Chart. 3 Choose a map from the list. 4 Click OK. The mouse pointer changes to a miniature chart. 5 Drag the mouse to specify the size and placement of the map. If you create a map, you can change its aspect ratio if the chart appears to have too much background area. For information about changing the map’s aspect ratio, see “Changing the aspect ratio of maps” on page 426.

Saving maps as graphic files When you save a map as a graphic file, you also save any drawn shapes, imported graphics, or text boxes associated with the map. If you want to include maps in a 35-mm slide show, you must set the map’s aspect ratio to 35mm Slide before saving as a graphic and talk to the slide service bureau Adding maps to spreadsheets

447

about which file formats they support. This adjusts the map object proportions so the whole map appears centered on the slide. For more information on setting the aspect ratio of maps, see “Changing the aspect ratio of maps” on page 426.

To save a map as a graphic 1 Click the map. 2

Click Chart, Export to File.

3 Click the Browse button next to the File Name box. 4 Choose a file format from the File Type list. 5 Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list. 6 Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file. 7 Type a filename in the File Name box, then click OK. 8 Enable the Bitmap Gray Scale check box to save the map without colors. .GIF files must be exported when you are in 256 color (or less) mode. .JPG files can only export in true color mode.

448


DEVELOPING SLIDE SHOWS IN QUATTRO PRO

15

Quattro Pro lets you create professional-looking slide shows with a variety of graphic and automation effects. You can create slide shows using maps, charts, and graphics stored in a notebook. You can use a variety of features to build your slide show. Master slides let you apply formats to all the slides in your slide show at once. Transition effects determine how the slide show moves from slide to slide. Chart buttons let you create jumps between slides. The slides you create are stored in miniature form on a virtual light table. In Light Table view, you can add, copy, move, and edit slides. You can also change the slide order, transition effect, transition speed, and display time assigned to each slide. The Light Table displays slides in the order in which they will appear in the slide show

Creating slide shows All the objects you create in your notebook — charts, maps, and graphics — are minimized into icons and placed on the Objects sheet. You can create slides directly from these icons. Because there are many types of icons Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro

449

residing on an Objects sheet, the term “chart icon” will be used to describe any graphical icon. Once you have created a slide show, a slide show icon appears on the Objects sheet. You can create slide shows from bullet charts. Bullet charts are especially effective in slide shows. They can be used to introduce graphics, list key information, or summarize main points. The slides that make up a slide show are stored on the Light Table.If you decide your slide show requires a slide of a chart that you have not yet created, you can create a new chart slide from the Light Table. Your slide show is saved as part of the current notebook when you save the notebook.

Creating slide shows from Objects sheet icons There are two methods of creating slide shows with Objects sheet icons. You can create slides directly from icons on the Objects sheet, or you can create a blank slide show on the Light Table and then add icons from the Objects sheet to your slides. When you create a slide show without specifying any formatting, the current default formats are applied to your slides.

To create a slide show on the Objects sheet 1 Click View, Objects. 2 Hold down SHIFT and select the icons you want to turn into slides. Be sure to select them in the order in which you want them to be shown. 3 Click Tools, New Slide Show. 4 In the Slide Show Name text box, type a name for the slide show. To view a chart icon in its own window, double-click it.

To create a slide show on the Light Table 1 Click View, Objects. 2 Click a blank area of the Objects sheet to deselect all icons.

450


3 Click Tools, New Slide Show. 4 Type a name for the slide show and click OK. This opens the Light Table. 5 Click Window, Tile Top to Bottom to display both the Objects sheet and the Light Table. 6 Do one of the following: To add an existing notebook chart to the slide show, drag the chart icon from the Objects sheet to the Light Table. To add a blank slide, click Tools, New Slide, From New Chart, then leave all the series blank.

To close the Light Table and return to the Objects sheet Click the Close button in the upper right corner of the Light Table window. You can also close the Light Table window by clicking CTRL+F4. If you select an icon by mistake, hold down the SHIFT key and click the icon to deselect it.

Creating slide shows from bullet charts You can create slide shows from bullet charts created from data on a spreadsheet. For information about creating bullet charts, see “Working with bullet charts” on page 341.

To create a slide show from bullet charts 1 Select the bullet chart data on your spreadsheet. 2 Click Tools, Slide Show, New. 3 Follow the steps in the Slide Show Expert. 4 When you have finished using the Slide Show Expert, the Light Table displays the slides in a thumbnail view. Leave a space between the bullet charts on your spreadsheet to distinguish them as individual charts.

Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro

451

Creating slides from cell data You can create a new chart on the Light Table and turned it into a slide. For more information on creating a new chart, see “Creating custom charts” on page 307.

To create a slide from cell data 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Click Tools, New Slide, From New Chart. 3 In the New Custom Chart dialog box, fill in the cell data that describes your new chart.

Adding charts and other objects to slide shows You can add a single chart icon or several chart icons to a slide show using the drag and drop method.

To add a chart to a slide show using only the Objects sheet On the Objects sheet, drag one or more chart icons and drop them on a slide show icon.

To add objects from the Objects sheet to a slide show on the Light Table 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Click Window, Tile Top to Bottom to display both the Objects sheet and the Light Table. 3 Drag an object from the Objects sheet to the Light Table. When you drag the icons to the Light Table, they are arranged in the slide show in the order they are selected. For information about adding slides to your slide show, see “Adding slides to existing slide shows” on page 466.

452


To select more than one object icon, hold down SHIFT and select the object icons. You can drag slides from the Light Table to a spreadsheet to create a chart.

Previewing slide shows and changing the view Previewing a potential slide show gives you an idea of how your slides will look when they are full-size and in sequence. You can view your slides and resize them on the Light Table. If you have a large slide show, you can choose to view your slides in a small format to see more slides at once. Choose a large slide format to view the slides in more detail, for example, to read the text on slides.

Previewing charts on the Objects sheet On the Objects sheet, you can preview how your charts look on a full screen before you turn them into slides.

To preview charts 1 Hold down SHIFT and select several charts, in the sequence you want to present them, from the chart icons on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Tools, Play Slide Show. 3 Click anywhere on the chart to move to the next chart. Chart buttons work when you display charts in this way. For information about creating chart buttons, see “Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps” on page 467. Double-click a chart to preview it before adding it to the slide show.

Viewing slides You can view your slides on the Light Table.

To view a slide On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table.


453

Double-click a chart to preview it before adding it to the slide show.

Changing the viewing size of slides You can change the size of the slide displayed in the Light Table. If you want to fit more slides on the Light Table, you should choose the small format for your slides. If you want to read text on a slide, you should choose the large format. You can also view slides by name.

To resize slides 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Click View, then click one of the following options: Small Slides Medium Slides Large Slides

To view slides by name 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Click View, Name Only. You can also resize slides by right-clicking the Light Table background, clicking SlideSorter Properties, then clicking the Slide Type tab and enabling the appropriate button.

Using master slides A master slide sets the overall look of your slide show. It maintains common elements such as a corporate logo, chart annotations, or a background style for all the slides in a slide show. When the master slide contains a bullet chart, this slide determines the position, size, and color of chart titles, bullets, and bulleted text for all bullet chart slides in the show. Chart elements are not carried over to other slides. For example, if the master slide contains a pie chart, a pie chart will not appear in each slide.

454


The first slide position in the Light Table is reserved for the master slide. If a slide follows the master slide, any chart elements that have a defined fill color will overlay the master slide background. If the slide already has a colored background fill style, the master slide format is ignored. The master slide does not display when you play the slide show unless you include it as a separate slide.

Master Slide Gallery The Master Slide Gallery provides a collection of pre-designed slide templates. You can choose a template to serve as a master slide for your slide show.

Creating a new master slide Master slides serve as templates for the entire slide show. Once you format a master slide, all slides can adopt its format.

To create a master slide 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Click Slides, New Master Slide. A master slide model appears. 3 Right-click the part of the slide you want to customize, and click Properties. 4 In the dialog box, select the desired formatting. If you do not want a slide to use the master slide as its template, turn off the Use Master Slide option before you select a master slide. For more information about turning the Master Slide option off, see “Disabling the master slide format for particular slides” on page 457.

Selecting a pre-defined master slide The Master Slide Gallery provides a collection of pre-designed slide templates. The template styles in the Master Slide Gallery are identical to the ones in the Chart Gallery.

To create a master slide from a template 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro

455

This opens the Light Table. 2 Click Slides, Master Slide Gallery. 3 Choose a template style. If you need help deciding on the right style for a chart or chart background, click the Advisor button.

To have Quattro Pro advise you on a master slide template 1 Follow steps 1-3 in the above procedure. 2 Click the Advisor button. 3 Move any of the following Constraints sliders depending on the effect you want to achieve: Informal/Formal Entertaining/Serious Sophisticated/Simple Vivid/Subdued Plain/Fancy 4 Enable any of the following check boxes depending on how you want to present your slides: Onscreen — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing onscreen. 35mm Slide — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing in 35 millimeter slides. B+W Paper — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing on paper in black and white. Color Paper — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing on paper in color. B+W Transparency — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing on black and white transparencies. Color Transparency — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing color transparencies. 5 Enable one of the following check boxes depending on the slide show environment: Darkened Room — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing in a darkened room.

456


Lighted Room — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing in a lighted room. 6 Click the Advise button. 7 Choose one of the styles from the Suggestions list, then click the Apply button. To use only some of the attributes of the master slide, see “Disabling the master slide format for particular slides” on page 457.

Selecting a master slide from existing charts You can use an existing chart as your master slide instead of choosing a template style from the Master Slide Gallery.

To select a master slide from an existing chart 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 In the Light Table, click the background. 3 Click SlideSorter Properties. 4 Click the Master Slide tab. 5 Choose a chart to set as the master slide. The master slide appears in the first slide position in the Light Table window. It does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide.

Disabling the master slide format for particular slides When your slide show uses a master slide, you can disable the master slide format for particular slides. You can also choose to apply only some of the master slide features.

To disable the master slide format for a particular slide 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Right-click the slide, then click Slide Properties. Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro

457

3 Click the Slide Effect tab. 4 Disable the Use Master Slide check box.

To apply only some master slide attributes to a slide 1 Select the master slide. 2 Click Edit, Copy. This copies the master slide to the Clipboard. 3 Select the slide you want to customize. 4 Click Edit, Paste Special. 5 In the Paste Special Chart dialog box, enable the check boxes for the master slide features you want to keep.

Using slide transitions A slide transition consists of three components: transitions effects that determine how your slide show moves from one slide to the next; the length of time that effect takes; and the amount of time a slide stays on-screen before automatically moving to the next slide. To move from slide to slide, you can choose transition effects such as dissolve, tilt up or down, spiral, and curtain up or down. You can set the speed of the transition effect to slow, medium, or fast. You can also determine how many seconds the slide will display. You can set a transition effect as the default transition for all slides in a slide show.

Adding slide show transition effects By default, each slide uses the “wipes right” transition effect to the next slide in a slide show. However, you can choose from several types of transition effects: Wipes — simulates turning a page; the second slide appears to be “underneath” the first one. Tilts — gives the effect of one image “pushing away” another. Dissolve — breaks up the slide into pixels as it changes to the next slide.

Overlaying slides Use overlays to build slides from other slides. This method is effective for displaying bullet charts one bullet at a time. The first slide would show only the first bulleted item. The second slide would build on the first by adding

458


the second item. The subsequent slides would continue building until the entire list is displayed.

Selecting slide show transitions and display times You can choose several special transition effects when moving from one slide to another.

To select a transition effect and speed 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Right-click the appropriate slide and click Slide Properties. 3 Click the Slide Effect tab. 4 From the Transition Effect list box, choose a transition effect. By default, each slide immediately wipes right to the next slide. 5 To determine the speed of the transition effect, enable one of the following buttons: Slow Medium Fast

To quickly change the transition effect and speed of the effect On the Light Table, select the slide and use the list boxes on the left side of the Property bar to select the transition effects and speed for that slide. For a description of transition effects, see “Using slide transitions” on page 458.

Avoid Dissolve — 2x2 pixels unless there is good reason to keep your viewers waiting (perhaps to increase suspense). Moderate dissolves and fade out/fade in can be restful, but fast dissolves (when run at full speed) can be abrupt.

Setting a display time for each slide The display time determines how long each slide will be displayed. Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro

459

To set a slide display time 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Right-click the appropriate slide, and click Slide Properties. 3 Click the Slide Effect tab. 4 In the Display Time list box, type the number of seconds you want the slide to be displayed before the slide show moves to the next slide. Entering zero (the default) will display the slide until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key.

Overlaying slides Use overlays to build slides one upon the other. Overlays effectively present slides with bulleted lists. The first slide shows only the first bulleted item. The second slide then builds on the first by adding the second item. Subsequent slides continue building until all bulleted items are displayed. The slides must be in the proper sequence for this effect to work.

To create slide overlays 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Select the slide located after the slide you want to overlay, and right-click. 3 Click the Slide Effect tab. 4 To overlay the previous slide instead of replacing it, enable the Overlay Previous Slide check box. 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the rest of the slides in the sequence.

Setting slide show defaults Instead of setting transition effects, display times, master slides, and so forth for each individual slide, you can establish default settings for all the slides in your slide show. If you create default settings for a slide show that contains customized slides, these settings will affect only the slides you add after setting these defaults. The following buttons set default features:

460


Transition Effect — controls the way each slide appears. Slow, Medium, and Fast buttons — control the speed of the transition effect. Overlay Previous Slide — makes the selected slide overlay the previous one instead of replacing it. Use Master Slide — makes the selected slide display the template style and chart elements used in the master slide. The master slide also affects the position and color of chart titles and bulleted text in bullet chart slides. Skip Slide In Presentation — skips the selected slide during the slide show presentation. (You can skip a slide without removing it.) Display Time — specifies how long (in seconds) the slide will remain on screen. Enter zero to display the slide until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key.

To set slide show defaults 1 In the Light Table, right-click the background and click SlideSorter Properties. 2 Click the Default Effect tab. 3 Choose default settings for the features listed above. For information about using transition effects, see “Using slide transitions” on page 458. For information about master slides, see “Using master slides” on page 454.

Editing and formatting slides When you edit a slide show, Quattro Pro displays the slides as though they were laid out on a virtual light table. In Quattro Pro, this is called the Light Table view. From this vantage point, you can edit a single slide or make changes that affect the entire slide show. The Light Table shows all the slides in the slide show in miniature form and in the order in which they will appear in the slide show. You can rearrange the order of slides, change the bullets in a bullet chart, or change slide text, borders, or colors. When you edit a slide, you edit the chart from which the slide is made. However, deleting a slide does not remove the corresponding chart from the notebook. You can also edit the chart in a chart window or on a spreadsheet.


461

You can modify slide shows by adding new slides from the Objects sheet, copying existing charts to your slide show, or adding slides from another slide show. Quattro Pro also lets you rename slides and slide shows, and add comments to slides.

Editing a slide show You can edit a slide show from a spreadsheet or from the Objects sheet.

To edit a slide show from a spreadsheet 1 On a spreadsheet, click Tools, Slide Show, Edit. 2 From the Select Slide Show list box, choose a slide show to edit.

To edit a slide show from the Objects sheet 1 Click Tools, Edit Slide Show. 2 From the Select Slide Show list box, choose a slide show to edit. The Slide Show Property Bar contains additional tools for editing slide shows and formatting slides.

Moving, copying, and deleting slides You can build and modify a slide show by copying, moving, and deleting slides. You can also copy or move slides from other slide shows in other notebooks.

To move a slide to a new position On the Light Table, drag the slide icon to a new location.

To copy charts and slides into a slide show 1 Select one of the following: charts on a spreadsheet chart or slide show icons on the Objects sheet slides in a Light Table window When you select a slide show icon, all slides in the slide show are selected.

462


2 Click Edit, Copy. 3 On the Objects sheet, double-click the slide show icon for the slide show that will receive the copied slides. 4 Click Slides, Edit Slide Show. 5 Select the slide that will appear before the copied slides. 6 Click Edit, Paste. The slide(s) will be added after the selected slide. You can also copy a slide by pressing CTRL and dragging the slide to a new location.

To drag one or more slides between multiple Light Tables 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Click File, Open, and select another notebook file where you have created a slide show. 3 Repeat step 1. 4 Click Window, Tile Top to Bottom to display the two Light Tables on the same screen. 5 Drag one or more slides from one Light Table and drop them into the other Light Table. Add slides directly by dragging chart icons to a slide show icon in the Objects sheet. You can also drag slides from the Light Table to a spreadsheet to create a chart.

Rearranging the slide order You can rearrange the order of slides in your slide show.

To rearrange the order of the slides 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro

463

2 Click and drag the slide icon to a new position. The pointer turns into a four-way arrow. To rearrange slides, you can also use the Edit, Cut, Copy, and Paste commands. The Light Table scrolls to reveal more slides if you drag the pointer to the top or bottom edge.

Changing slide bullets You can change the bullets in a bullet chart slide to a variety of styles.

To change slide bullets 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Double-click the slide to enlarge the view. 3 Right-click a bullet, then click Bullet Series Properties. 4 Choose any of the following options: Bullet Style — sets the bullet symbol Bullet Indentation — sets the indentation Bullet Color — sets the bullet color Text Settings — sets text color, background, and fill settings Text Font — sets the text size, style, and appearance Line Spacing — sets the amount of spacing between bullet lines When you edit a slide, your changes affect the corresponding chart. However, deleting a slide does not remove the corresponding chart from the notebook.

Changing slide text You can change slide text by changing the original chart or graphic in the notebook or by making changes from within the Light Table.

464


To edit slide text Edit the text on the spreadsheet. This will change text in both the chart and the slide.

To change slide text fonts 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Double-click the slide to enlarge the view. 3 Right-click an area with text, then click the Properties option. 4 Do one or both of the following: To change the font of bullets, click the Text Settings tab or the Text Font tab. To change the font of a slide title or subtitle, click the Title Font (or Subtitle Font) tab or the Title (or Subtitle) Text Settings tab.

Changing slide borders or colors You can change the border of a slide, and the colors or patterns of individual elements in the slide. For example, you can change the color of the background, chart bars or lines, or fill patterns.

To change slide borders 1 Double-click the slide to enlarge the view. 2 Right-click the border, then click Background Properties. 3 Click the Box Settings tab. 4 Do either of the following: To change the border color, choose a color from the Fill Color list box. To change the border type, choose a box type.

To change the color of slide elements 1 Double-click the slide to enlarge the view. 2 Right-click an element to modify, then click the properties option. 3 Click the Fill Settings tab. 4 Make the desired color changes.


465

Adding slides to existing slide shows After you have created a slide show, you can expand it by adding new slides.

To add slides to a slide show 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Click Window, Tile Top to Bottom to display both the Objects sheet and Light Table. 3 Consider the following options: To add an existing chart to the slide show, drag the chart from the Objects sheet to the Light Table. To create a new slide from cell data, click Slides, New Slide, From New Chart, and then fill in the series data. To add a blank slide, click Slides, New Slide, From New Chart, and then leave all of the series blank. For information about filling in series data, see “Creating custom charts” on page 307.

Renaming slides and slide shows You may want to rename a slide or an entire slide show. Renaming slides lets you apply a more meaningful name when you have used the default names (Chart 1, Chart 2, etc.) for charts and graphics.

To rename a slide 1 Right-click an icon on the Objects sheet, then click Icon Properties. 2 Enter the new name of the chart in the Name dialog box.

To rename a slide show 1 Right-click the slide show icon on the Objects sheet, then click SlideShow Properties, Name. 2 Type the new name.

466


Adding and viewing slide comments If you want to make special note of a slide, you can attach a short comments to it. This comment is contained in a dialog box and will not appear on the slide.

To add comments to a slide 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Right-click a slide, then click Slide Properties. 3 Click the Slide Comment tab. 4 Type a comment in the Enter Text box.

To view a slide comment Follow steps 1 to 3 in the above procedure.

Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps You can jump from one slide to any other by simply clicking it. This is done by creating a text box chart button which is connected to a macro. Chart buttons let you construct branching presentations driven by the viewer’s clicks. This hypertext-like ability offers virtually unlimited possibilities. For example, you can set up a self-playing slide show that starts by asking the viewer what he or she wants to learn. You can create an invisible background chart button that defines what will happen when a viewer clicks anywhere outside the text box chart button. For example, this button lets you specify what will happen when a viewer randomly clicks in a slide show. Each chart can have many text box chart buttons, but only one background button. Chart buttons are active whenever a chart appears full-screen in a slide show or when you right-click the chart and choose View. Chart buttons are inactive in a chart window or in a chart on a spreadsheet.

Creating chart buttons You can create a jump to another slide in your slide show by creating a chart button. When you click a chart button on a slide, you can jump forward or backward to different sections.


467

To create a chart button 1 Click a chart on a spreadsheet. 2 Click Insert, Shape, Text Box, and drag to create the button on the chart. 3 Type a button name in the text box. 4 Right-click the text box, then click Text Box Properties. 5 Click the Chart Button tab. 6 Enable the Select Chart check box. 7 In the Select Chart list box, select a chart to jump to. 8 Enable the Execute Macro check box. 9 Type a macro name in the box. For example, if you created the button in Chart 1 to jump to Chart 2, in the Execute Macro text box, type Slide.GoTo “Chart 2". For more information about macros commands, see the Quattro Pro Macro Command List in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help. Chart buttons are active whenever the chart appears full-screen — in a slide show or when you right-click the chart and choose View. They are inactive in a chart window or in a chart on a spreadsheet.

Creating background chart buttons You can create an invisible background chart buttonchart button. When you click anywhere in the background of the slide, the slide show jumps to a pre-defined slide.

To create a background chart button 1 Right-click the background of the chart, then select Background Properties. 2 Click the Chart Button tab. 3 Enable the Select Chart check box. 4 Select a chart to jump to in the Select Chart list box.

468


5 Enable the Execute Macro check box. 6 Type a macro name in the box. For example, to jump to Chart 6 whenever a viewer clicks in the slide background, in the Execute Macro text box, type Slide.GoTo “Chart 6".

Playing slide shows Play your slide show to review how everything works together — the order of slides, the formats, the transitions, and the jumps. While playing a slide show, you can hide or show the pointer, skip over a slide in the slide show, or create jumps in your slide show.

Playing slide shows You can play a slide show from a spreadsheet or from the Light Table.

To play your slide show from a spreadsheet 1 Do one of the following: From a spreadsheet, click Tools, Slide Show, Play. From a Light Table window, click Slides, Play Slide Show. 2 Select a slide show. To...

Do this...

Go to next slide

Left-click or press SPACE BAR.

Go to previous slide

Right-click or press BACKSPACE.

Go to a selected slide

Left-click+right-click, or press F5.

Cancel slide show

Press ESC.

Jump to another slide

Click a chart button or type its first letter.

Sound files in the slide show will be ignored. For information about editing slides, see “Editing and formatting slides” on page 461.

Hiding/showing the pointer during a slide show You can display a pointer on a slide when there are chart buttons in the slide show. A chart button lets you jump to other parts of the slide show. It is


469

helpful to hide the pointer if your slide show contains no chart buttons for branching to different slides.

To hide or show the pointer during a slide show 1 Right-click the slide show icon on the Objects sheet, then click Slide Show Properties, Show Pointer. 2 Do one of the following: To hide the pointer, click No. To show the pointer, click Yes. To redisplay the pointer, follow the above steps and choose Yes to show the pointer. For more information on chart buttons, see “Creating chart buttons” on page 467.

Skipping a slide in a slide show If you create a slide show for a general audience, you may want to skip some slides when you present that same slide show to a specific audience.

To skip a slide in a slide show 1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon. This opens the Light Table. 2 Right-click the slide to skip, then click Slide Properties. 3 Click the Slide Effect tab. 4 Enable the Skip Slide In Presentation check box.

470


16

PRINTING

Quattro Pro provides extensive printing options. You can specify a printer or preview a print job to see how it will look when you print. You have complete control over what your printed data will look like. For example, you can customize margin settings, paper size and orientation, and add headers and footers. You can print your work in different ways by choosing to print selected cells, specific pages, or the entire notebook. You can save the document as a print file if you want to print from a computer that does not have Quattro Pro installed, or if you take your printing to a service bureau with high-quality printers.

Setting up a printer Many printer settings are printer-specific; therefore, not all printer settings may be available for your printer. Consult your Windows documentation and printer manual for more information. Before you can print in Quattro Pro, you need to specify a printer in the Control Panel. The printer is available in all Windows applications. If multiple printers are connected to your computer, you can specify which printer to use in Quattro Pro, or you can add a new one. You can also set a printer’s resolution. Resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (DPI) appearing on a printed page.

Printing

471

Specifying a printer Quattro Pro lets you specify the printer you want to use to print data from your notebook.

To specify a printer for Quattro Pro 1 Click File, Print. 2 Choose a printer from the Name list box.

Adding a printer You can add a printer if the one you want to use is not listed in the Print dialog box.

To add a printer 1 Click File, Print. 2 Click the Details tab. 3 Click the Add Printer button. 4 Follow the instructions in the Add Printer wizard.

Setting printer resolution Quattro Pro lets you set the print resolution, or print quality, for your print job. Higher resolutions return better print quality.

To set the resolution for a printer 1 Click File, Print. 2 Click the Details tab. 3 Choose a setting from the Resolution list box.

Previewing a print job You can preview your notebook before you print. The Print Preview Toolbar lets you view your data in more or less detail using the Zoom feature. When you preview a print job, you can also print the data from the Print Preview screen. For information about using shortcut keys for previewing your print job, see “Using keyboard shortcuts” on page 36.

472


Working in print preview Quattro Pro lets you preview your print selection and then return to your data to make any changes, or you can print your selection directly from Print Preview.

To preview a print selection 1 Click File, Print Preview. 2 Click any tools on the Toolbar while previewing.

To print from Print Preview Click the Print button.

To exit Print Preview Click the Cancel Preview button.

Zooming in print preview Changing the zoom level lets you preview your document in more or less detail. You can increase or decrease the zoom level by using the Zoom buttons. The current zoom level displays to the right of the Zoom section in the toolbar. Use the scroll bars to adjust the section of the spreadsheet viewed.

To increase the zoom level 1 Click File, Print Preview. 2 Click the Zoom In button.

To decrease the zoom level 1 Click File, Print Preview. 2 Click the Zoom Out button. You can also left-click the page to increase the level of detail or right-click the page to decrease the level of detail.

Customizing print settings Quattro Pro lets you change print settings, such as margins, paper size, page orientation, headers, footers, and scaling. You can also specify whether to Printing

473

include titles, headings, grid lines, soft page breaks, and cell formulas in your printed document, as well as the space between print selections in the printed document. You can also center your print selection between the left and right margins. Default print settings are set when you install Quattro Pro. You can change these settings or restore them at any time. Print settings are saved with the notebook. In addition, you can create different print settings with different names and save them in the same notebook. For example, if a notebook contains numerous reports, you can create and name different print settings for each report.

Viewing and Setting page margins You can view and set exact page margins. You can also change margins to best present your data. For example, you can set the distance between the top or bottom of the paper and the header or footer, and you can set the distance from the left and right edge of the paper to the data.

To see all margins on one page 1 Click View, Page. 2 Click View, Zoom. 3 Enable the 50% button. You can also click the Zoom button and select 50%.

To set exact margins 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Print Margins tab. 3 Click Print Margins, then specify the margins for Top, Bottom, Left, or Right. You can enter margin settings in another measurement than is displayed, by typing the amount and the measurement abbreviation. For example, type “in” for inches or “cm” for centimeters. For more information about changing the default measurement type, see your Windows Control Panel documentation.

474


To change page margins by dragging 1 Click View, Page. 2 Drag a dotted margin line to reset a margin. You can also drag margins in Print Preview.

By default, the first column of each contiguous selection within the print area prints at the left margin. Some printers are not able to print to the edge of the paper, and many print drivers do not allow 0" margins.

Changing paper size and orientation The default page setting prints data on 8.5" by 11" paper in portrait orientation. You can change the paper size and orientation to suit your data. When you change the print orientation, the margins change to match the new orientation setting. For example, the top margin stays with the top of the notebook data printed, along with the header and top heading (if any).

To change paper size 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Paper Type tab. 3 Choose a paper size from the list.

To change paper orientation 1 Click File, Page Setup 2 Click the Paper Type tab. 3 Enable one of the following buttons: Portrait Landscape

Printing headers and footers Quattro Pro lets you print or hide headers or footers. For information about creating headers and footers, see “Creating headers, footers, and margins” on page 213. Printing

475

To print a header or footer 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Header/Footer tab. 3 In the Header or Footer section, enable the Create check box. Enter the text to appear in the header or footer if no text appears in the box. 4 Click the Print button. The Create check box automatically appears enabled if headers and footers exist in your document.

To hide a header or footer 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Header/Footer tab. 3 In the Header or Footer section, disable the Create check box. Hiding a header or footer does not delete it from the document.

Scaling a print selection Quattro Pro lets you shrink or enlarge your print selections by an exact percentage. For example, specifying 110% enlarges output by 10%; specifying 90% reduces it by 10%. You can also print your notebook on as many pages as you want by setting the number of pages wide and high to print your data.

To shrink or enlarge your print selection 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Print Scaling tab. 3 Click Print To % Of Normal Size, then specify a percentage.

To print data on a set number of pages 1 Click File, Page Setup.

476


2 Click the Print Scaling tab. 3 Click Print To Desired Width, then specify the width and height in pages.

Printing row and column titles, headings, and grid lines Quattro Pro lets you repeat a row or column title on each page of your spreadsheet. You can set row and column titles, and you can choose to print the row letters and column numbers that appear on your screen as headings. You can also print the spreadsheet grid lines to make your report look more like your on-screen notebook.

To print row titles as the top heading on each page 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 Click the Top Heading box. 4 Select the address of any cell in the row you want. The entire row is used as the heading, regardless of the cell you select.

To print column titles as the left heading on each page 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 Click the Left Heading box. 4 Select the address of any cell in the column you want. The entire column is used as the heading, regardless of the cell you select. Selecting cells makes all rows (for a top heading) and all columns (for a left heading) in the cells print as headings. Do not include top or left headings in the print selection, or they will print twice. For example, if you specify A2..G2 as a top heading, and you want to print all data through row 30, specify A3..G30 as the print selection.

To print top row letters and left column numbers as headings 1 Click File, Page Setup.

Printing

477

2 Click the Options tab. 3 Enable the Row/Column Borders check box.

To print grid lines 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 Enable the Gridlines check box.

Printing formulas, addresses, and comments Quattro Pro prints the contents of each cell, one cell per line, just as they appear on the input line when you select a cell. This includes each cell’s address and contents, as well as any comments you have added. When you print using Cell Formulas, the following print features are disabled: Center Cells, Left and Top Heading, Gridlines, and Row/Column Borders. The information is printed in the font specified in File, Page Setup, Header/Footer.

To print cell formulas 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 Enable the Cell Formulas check box.

Printing data without soft page breaks Turning off page breaks is useful for producing long printouts on continuous-form paper. When you turn page breaks off, soft page breaks are ignored, but hard page breaks still exist. Headers and footers are not printed, and only right and left margins are used. For more information about setting page breaks, see “Working with page breaks” on page 211.

To print data without soft page breaks 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Print Margins tab. 3 Disable the Break Pages check box.

Spacing a print job You can print noncontiguous cell selections as they appear in the spreadsheet. This prints any blank lines that appear between selections. You can also collapse the blank lines between each cell selection.

478


You can add space between print selections or between each printed spreadsheet. One line of space equals a sixth of an inch. Quattro Pro also lets you choose to print each selection or spreadsheet on a new page.

To keep blank lines between cell selections 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 In the Print Between Selections section, enable the In Place button.

To collapse blank lines between cell selections 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 In the Print Between Selections section, enable the Collapse Blanks button.

To add space between each printed selection 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 In the Print Between Selections section, enable the Lines button, then type the number of lines you want between each selection. You can also add space between each printed selection by pressing CTRL and selecting a blank group of cells between each selection.

To add space between each printed spreadsheet 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 In the Print Between 3D Sheets section, enable the Lines button, then type the number of lines you want between each page.

To start each printed selection on a new page 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 In the Print Between Selections section, Click Page Advance.

Printing

479

To start each printed spreadsheet on a new page 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 In the Print Between 3D Sheets section, Click Page Advance.

Centering print selections In Quattro Pro, you can center your print selections between the left and right margins. Extra blank columns on the right or left side of a print selection affect centering. Do not include these blank columns in the print selection if you want the data to be centered.

To center print selections between left and right margins 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Options tab. 3 Enable the Center Cells check box.

Saving or restoring default print settings Initially, Quattro Pro installs default print settings. You can change default print settings in either the Print dialog box or the Page Setup dialog box. You can save the changes as new default settings for either dialog box. You can restore the original settings by reloading the defaults in the Page Setup dialog box. Current settings change back to the defaults. You can save your customized print settings or restore default settings. Any named settings you have created are not affected when you restore the default settings. For more information about named settings see, “Naming print settings” on page 481.

To save changes to the default print settings 1 Click File, Print. 2 Adjust the print settings. 3 Click the Save Settings button, click OK, then click Close. 4 Click the Page Setup button. 5 Adjust the page setup settings. 6 Click the Save Defaults button, then click OK.

480


To restore default print settings 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Load Defaults button, then click OK.

Naming print settings You can save different print settings and use them to print reports, pages, or spreadsheets within the same notebook. Named print settings are saved with the notebook, and you can update or delete them as necessary.

To save the current print settings as a named setting 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Named Settings tab. 3 Enter a setting name in the New Set box, then click Add. 4 Click OK to save the settings.

To update an existing named setting 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Named Settings tab. 3 Click the named setting to update, then click Update.

To delete a named setting 1 Click File, Page Setup. 2 Click the Named Settings tab. 3 Click the name to delete, then click Delete.

To print using a named setting 1 Click File, Print. 2 Click Page Setup, Named Settings. 3 Choose the named setting to use. 4 Click Use, OK. 5 Click Print. Make sure you save your notebook after creating a named setting.

Printing

481

Printing selected print areas You can print part of a notebook or an entire notebook. You can print a simple list or a multiple-page report. You can also print graphics, charts, maps, and slide shows from your notebook. If a graphic, chart, or map covers a page break, the graphic splits, printing on multiple pages. Once you have started printing your work, you can cancel or pause the print job. Quattro Pro will not print unless at least one cell fits on the printed page. If a cell’s contents spill over into adjacent cells on screen, include the spill-over cells in the selection. Otherwise only part of the entry will print. Quattro Pro will not split a column. If the full column will not fit on a page, it prints on the next page. Click File, Print Preview to see where your pages will break. If the data in the print selection is wider than one page, as many columns as possible print on the first page and all rows for those columns are printed. Then, the next columns are printed, starting at the first row of data until all data in the selection has printed. The data prints on as many pages as necessary. You can adjust the settings if your printout is not readable because of colored background or text. When printing graphics, you can speed up your printing by displaying only graphic outlines on the screen. Quattro Pro also lets you print multiple copies of your document. When printing a notebook with multiple pages or spreadsheets, you can collate or group the copies as required. Collating your print selection prints one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 will print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on). Grouping your print selection prints the requested number of copies of each selected page before the next page prints (e.g., five copies of page 1 will print before five copies of page 2 will print, and so on).

Printing selected cells You can choose to print a selection of cells. Quattro Pro lets you print both contiguous and noncontiguous cells including 2-D or 3-D selections. When you print noncontiguous selections, each selection will print just below the selection preceding it. You can also change the print selection without closing the Print dialog box.

To print contiguous blocks of cells 1 Click File, Print. 2 In the Print section, click Selection. 3 Select the cells to print from the spreadsheet. 4 Click Print.

482


You can also select cells by typing the cell range in the Selection box.

To print 2-D or 3-D selections of noncontiguous cells 1 Click File, Print. 2 In the Print section, click Selection. 3 Click the Pointer button, select the cell or group of cells, then click Ctrl as you select other groups of cells. For 3D selections, click the Sheet tab when selecting cells from different spreadsheets. 4 Click Print.

To change the cell selection in the Print dialog box 1 Click File, Print. 2 In the Print section, click Selection. 3 Click Selection, then click the Pointer button. 4 Select the cells you want, then press Enter. The new coordinates appear in the Selection box. If you select two or more cells and then open the Print dialog box, the coordinates of the selected cells appear in the Selection box. In the Print dialog box, you can print all data on the active spreadsheet or notebook even if Selection is enabled, by enabling the Current Sheet or Notebook button instead. You do not need to delete the cell selection.

Printing the current spreadsheet, or notebook When you select to print the Current Sheet in the Print dialog box, Quattro Pro scans the active spreadsheet from left to right, top to bottom, and prints the smallest area that covers all the data. You can print only certain pages of a spreadsheet or you can print an entire notebook.

To print the current spreadsheet 1 Click File, Print.

Printing

483

2 In the Print section, click Current Sheet. 3 Click Print.

To print certain pages of the current sheet 1 Click File, Print. 2 In the Print section, enable the Current Sheet sheet. 3 In the Range section, specify the page numbers in the From and To boxes. 4 Click Print.

To print a notebook 1 Click File, Print. 2 In the Print section, click Notebook. 3 Click Print.

Printing charts, maps, and slide shows In Quattro Pro you can print charts and maps the same way that you print notebook data. Quattro Pro also lets you print multiple charts or maps from the Objects sheet. You can print slide shows, or selected charts within a slide show. For more information about creating a slide show see “Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro” on page 449. Before printing a chart or map, you can select an aspect ratio for the object. For more information about setting aspect ratios see “Adjusting the aspect ratio of charts” on page 380. You can adjust print settings for charts, maps, or slide shows by customizing your print settings. For information about customizing print settings see, “Customizing Print Settings” on page 473.

To print a chart or map 1 Select a chart or map by doing one of the following: click the border of the chart or map on the spreadsheet click a chart icon on the Objects sheet click a slide in the Light Table 2 Click File, Print. 3 Enable the Selected Chart button.

484


You can select more than one chart by pressing the Shift key and then clicking the charts that you want to print.

To print all charts or maps 1 Click View, Objects. 2 Click Edit, Select All. 3 Click File, Print.

To print a slide show 1 Click View, Objects. 2 Click the Slide Show icon. 3 Click File, Print. You can also click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet.

Printing graphics Any graphics (charts, buttons, drawn shapes) in a selected print area print with the notebook data.

To print a graphic 1 Click File, Print. 2 In the Print section, enable the Selection button. 3 Select the cells containing the graphic from the spreadsheet. 4 Click Print.

Printing multiple copies You can choose to print multiple copies of your document. Quattro Pro also lets you collate or group your print selection.

To print multiple copies 1 Click File, Print. 2 In the Copies section, specify the number of copies in the Number of Copies box.

Printing

485

To collate or group your document 1 Click File, Print. 2 In the Copies section, enable one of the following buttons: Collate — Prints multiple copies sorted by sets of copies. Group — Prints multiple copies sorted by page.

Canceling a print job You can cancel a print job after you send it.

To cancel a print job 1 Click Cancel from the printing progress box. If the printing progress box is not showing, click File, Print. 2 Click the Print tab. 3 Click the Status button. Current print jobs appear in the order they were sent. 4 Choose the print job you want to cancel. 5 Click Document, then Cancel Printing. If your printer has a large memory buffer, printing may continue for a few moments after you cancel.

Adjusting print readability and printing speed If your printed document is not readable because of colored background or text, you can adjust the settings to print all backgrounds white, all text black, and all lines black. You can save time when printing graphics if you display only the outline of graphics on the screen.

To adjust settings to print black and white 1 Click File, Print. 2 Click the Details tab. 3 Enable the Adjust Image To Print Black And White check box.

486


To save time when printing graphics 1 Click Format, Notebook 2 Click the Display tab. 3 Enable Show Outline.

Printing to a file If you want to print from a computer on which Quattro Pro is not installed, or if you take your printing to a service bureau with high-quality printers, you can store the document as a print file. This file, called a binary file, contains instructions in the printer’s native language for creating the document. For example, if your printer is a PostScript printer, Quattro Pro creates a PostScript file. If your printer is an HP LaserJet, it creates a PCL (Printer Control Language) file.

Printing to file Quattro Pro lets you print any notebook as a binary file. You can print documents stored to a binary file from DOS. You can revert to printing your documents on a printer by changing the print location to Port. This reroutes a print job to your selected printer.

To print to file 1 Click File, Print. 2 Click the Details tab. 3 Choose a printer type from the Name list. 4 Click Print To File, then specify the filename. If you do not specify a file extension, the extension .PRN is used. 5 Click Print. Printing in Quattro Pro sends the output to the binary file (overwriting the old file each time), not the printer. If you want to store the file in a directory other than the default, or on a floppy disk, include the complete path in the Print To File box.

To print a binary file from DOS 1 Use the DOS COPY command with the /B parameter.

Printing

487

2 Type COPY filename.PRN /B LPT1. This sends a binary file (/B) to the LPT1 printer port. If your printer is connected to a different port (such as COM1 or PRN), specify it instead of LPT1.

To revert printing to a selected printer 1 Click File, Print. 2 Click the Details tab. 3 In the Current Printer section, click the Port button. Make sure the selected printer appears in the Name section.

488


USING MACROS

17

A macro is a sequence of scripted commands that automate complex or repetitive command sequences. Macros can perform keystrokes, mouse actions, and menu commands. You can also attach macros to buttons, and then run them from another application using Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). A macro is a script that contains instructions that you record and then play back to perform simple or complex tasks. For example, you can record a macro that prints a report. Or you can record a macro that opens a notebook, moves the insertion point to a specified place, and prompts you to type information. You can customize the look and feel of a notebook instead of displaying the standard notebook you see when you install Quattro Pro. For example, you can have a corporate logo on the splash-screen display when Quattro Pro launches instead of the default Quattro Pro splash screen. Your macro can consist only of events, or you can create user interface (UI) components other users can interact with such as dialog boxes which prompt users for information and to make choices. For more information about dialog boxes, see “Dialog boxes” on page 579. You can use link commands to assign actions or connections to controls in a dialog box. A link command can get or change property settings, or run macros.

Using macros

489

The Quattro Pro macro command reference guide is available in the Reference information section. For information about the list of product commands, see the Quattro Pro Macro Command List of the Quattro Pro online Help. For information about the list of programming commands, see PerfectScript Programming Macros Help. The PerfectScript & Macros User Guide in the WordPerfect Office 2000 Reference Center can provide more information about macros and programming. For more information about the Reference Center, see “Using the Corel Reference Center” on page 5. The WordPerfect Office 2000 Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) is a set of tools that lets software developers customize WordPerfect Office 2000 applications for commercial or business use. The SDK is located on the WordPerfect Office 2000 installation CD in the D:\SDK folder (where “D” is the letter that corresponds to the CD-ROM drive). The SDK includes the online Help for the SDK, OLE automation samples, PerfectScript tools, code generation wizards for third-party add-ons, utilities to monitor events, and a file format parsing tool.

Choosing a macro creation tool Quattro Pro provides several built-in scripting tools. You can create three types of macros: Quattro Pro macros are stored in notebook cells. Use this type of macro when your task is performed within Quattro Pro. For information about using Quattro Pro macros, see “Working with Quattro Pro macros” on page 492. PerfectScript macros are stored in a .WCM file. This type of macro is useful when you want to automate tasks with several notebooks or interact with other WordPerfect Office 2000 applications, such as WordPerfect. For example, you can update Quattro Pro data in a WordPerfect report. For information about using PerfectScript macros in Quattro Pro, see “Working with PerfectScript” on page 501. Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) lets you develop scripts that are saved within specific projects using a robust version of the Visual Basic programming language. You can access the VBA Editor from within Quattro Pro. For information about using VBA with Quattro Pro, see “Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with Quattro Pro” on page . The simplest way to create a macro is to record the keystrokes in Quattro Pro. You can also write a macro to include non-recordable tasks. For example, you can define a macro to play until a certain event happens or include a comment to prompt users to enter specific data.

490


Comparing Quattro Pro macros with PerfectScript Quattro Pro macros and PerfectScript use similar command syntax. There are, however, some major differences in the two scripting tools to keep in mind: Quattro Pro macros

PerfectScript macros

Are stored in notebooks or cells

Are stored in .WCM macro files

Are created and edited in the notebook

Are created and edited in WordPerfect

Are played from a library notebook

Are played from the source folder

Can use shortcut names for playing

Cannot play from shortcut names

Play only in Quattro Pro

Play in any WordPerfect Office 2000 application

Use blank lines to separate macros

Use blank lines to separate commands and subroutines

Use commands and arguments

Use commands and parameters (which contain arguments)

The following table presents the major syntactical differences between both macro tools: Quattro Pro syntax

PerfectScript syntax

Command has curly braces

No braces around command

No parentheses around argument list

Parentheses required around parameter list

Object and property separated by period

Object and property separated by underscore

Arguments separated by commas

Arguments separated by semi-colons

Syntax Examples Quattro Pro macro syntax uses the following syntax format: {CONTENTS E15, F15, G15}

The command name CONTENTS is the exact name of the command. Arguments are values providing instructions to the command. Not all macro commands require arguments, but when they do, they require specific information. For example, {BEEP} is a macro command without arguments. Many command equivalents contain a period (.) in their command name , for example {Search.Find “3rd Quarter Profits}. PerfectScript uses the following syntax format: GraphGallery(GraphStyle:"3dbar";ColorScheme:"Tangerine")

The command name GraphGallery indicates the feature the command activates. This particular example launches the Chart Gallery and selects a Using macros

491

3-D bar chart with a tangerine color scheme. Some commands are made up of only a command name, such as FileOpenDlg(). Parameters provide more information about the command, such as which options of a feature are active. Parameters are always enclosed in parentheses; for example, Backup(State:On!). A semi-colon is the separator mark between parameters in a command. For more information about Quattro Pro syntax, see “Using macro syntax and arguments” on page 562. To get more information about recording and attaching macros to toolbars, notebooks, and controls, see “Using macros” on page 489.

Working with Quattro Pro macros Quattro Pro macros are native to Quattro Pro. Macros created in Quattro Pro are stored in the notebook they apply to, or in a macro library file for use by other notebooks. You can also attach macros to buttons, and you can run macros from another application using Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). Macros can reproduce the behavior of keys on the keyboard and mouse actions. Special macro commands can perform actions such as prompting the user for input, looping a macro repeatedly, or controlling other Windows applications. Use them to automate complex or repetitive command sequences (like printing a standard report), to enter frequently used labels with a keystroke, or to build complete applications for use by people with little Quattro Pro experience. When storing macros, place them in an area unaffected by macro commands. For example, do not place macros to the right of cells where rows will be inserted or deleted. The ideal place for a macro depends on what operations it performs. If you want to use a macro with many notebooks, place it in a macro library or create a PerfectScript macro (an actual file). If only one notebook uses the macro, add a spreadsheet named Macros to that notebook and place the macro there.

Understanding Quattro Pro macro syntax Macro commands are like spreadsheet functions: they have specific grammatical rules, or syntax. The basic syntax is {COMMANDNAME Argument1,Argument2, Argument3,...}

COMMANDNAME is the name of the command. Arguments are values. Not all macro commands require arguments; when they do, they require a specific type of information. The following are some examples of macro commands: {Query.Criteria_Table B27..B29}

492


{BlockCopy A1,A2..A37} {Search.Find “3rd Quarter Profits”} {GETNUMBER “How old are you?”,AGE} {CONTENTS E15,F15,5}

Quattro Pro syntax requires that you enter the entire macro command in a single cell. The following syntax rules for macro commands also apply: QP syntax must include

Examples

Opening and closing braces{ }

{BEEP 3}

COMMANDNAME(space)Argument1

{BlockCopy A1}

Commas or semi-colons between arguments

{CONTENTS E15,F15,5}

Correct argument types

{GETLABEL hello world, A4} where “hello world” is not a valid string type

Quotation marks around punctuation or spaces {GETLABEL “Hello,world”,A4} Type command in upper/lower case

GETLABEL = getlabel

One or more commands per cell

{BEEP}{GETLABEL “Hello, world”,A4}{QUIT}

If a setting contains spaces, punctuation, or quotation marks, enclose it within double quotation marks (for example, “Prefix, ”"Windows Default"",",No"). Macro commands are labels. Therefore, Quattro Pro does not recognize a syntax error as you type it in; the error only occurs when you try to run the macro. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the format of macro commands as you enter them, and record macros whenever possible to avoid syntax and typing errors.

Understanding arguments Arguments in macro commands, like those used with spreadsheet functions, require specific information to be supplied with the command. There are four types of arguments: numbers, strings, locations, and conditions. Number arguments

Examples

Any numeric value, entered as a number

2 or 0.45

A formula resulting in a number

A3*15

A cell address with a numeric value or formula

C10, where C10 contains a number or formula

A named block with a numeric value or formula C10, where C10 contains a valid number or formula

493

Using macros

String arguments

Examples

A text string, such as an actual string

“Corel”

A reference to a cell or block containing a label

A1..A4

A property separated by a comma (,)

“Currency, 2" (This also applies to command settings separated by a comma)

A formula resulting in a label

@UPPER(“hello ”)

Location arguments

Examples

A block name

INTEREST refers to a cell block C5-C15

Block coordinates with more than 1 cell

A1,A1..A4 or A..B:C4..D22

A block relative reference of more than 1 cell

[]C(0)R(0),[]P(-2):C(0)R(22) or []C(0)R(0)..C(3)R(10)

Coordinates for noncontiguous blocks

(A1,B1..B7,C1..C7) or (A1,B:C27..C52)

A label or text formula in any of these options

+"A"&"2" which results in A2

Condition arguments

Examples

A formula that evaluates to true or false

+C4>500

Some commands accept a combination or choice of argument types. For example, {LET} stores either a label or a number in a cell, depending on the argument type. You can use argument suffixes in a command to specify a value or label entry. Using :string (or :s) assures a label entry, and :value (:v) ensures a value entry (if the entry is a valid number). In the following example, the first example enters the value 7 into a new_block, while the second example enters a label into a new_block: {LET new_block,3+4:value} {LET new_block,3+4:string}

For information about PerfectScript syntax, see “Choosing a macro creation tool” on page 490. For information about using relative cell references, see “Recording macros using absolute and relative cell addresses” on page .

Recording and editing Quattro Pro macros With Quattro Pro, you can record actions as you perform them. Recording converts actions into macro commands and stores them as labels in a block. Quattro Pro does not record actions keystroke by keystroke. Instead, it translates keystrokes and mouse actions that invoke menu choices into one

494


or more macro commands called command equivalents. This recording method is called logical recording. Macros recorded in this way are more efficient and can run with a customized Quattro Pro menu system. For example, a macro containing commands to print the active notebook runs even when the File, Print menu command is not in the active Menu Bar. When you write a Quattro Pro macro, keep in mind the following guidelines: Add comments to your macros to make them easier to understand and debug. Type the comments in a separate column, to the right of the macro column. You can use curly braces with the first character being a semi-colon to indicate a comment as well. For example, {:Text} is a comment. List cell names to the left of the macros or cells they reference; then you can use Insert, Name, Cells to name the macro. You can also list cell names using Insert, Name, Cells, Labels, then enable the Right button to automatically label cells.

Recording Quattro Pro macros One of the easiest ways to create a macro is to record it. Quattro Pro translates keystrokes and mouse actions that invoke menu choices into one or more macro commands called command equivalents. Record macros whenever you can to avoid syntax errors. You can cut and paste recorded commands into other Quattro Pro macros. You can store macros in the notebook they apply to or in a macro library file for use by other notebooks.

To record a Quattro Pro macro and to save it in a notebook 1 Click Tools, Macro, Record. 2 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button. 3 Select the cells to store the macro in (on the same spreadsheet or on a spreadsheet specifically assigned to the macro). 4 Click OK to begin recording (noted by

on the Status Bar).

5 Create your macro. 6 Click Tools, Macro, Record to stop recording the macro. 7 Leave an empty cell below the last cell of the macro to indicate the end of the macro. Using macros

495

To record a Quattro Pro macro and store it in a macro library 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure. 2 Click the Pointer button, and click the notebook named on the status bar to open the macro library. (If you do not choose a notebook, the macro is saved in the active notebook). 3 Select the cell(s) on the sheet in which to store the macro, then press ENTER. 4 Click OK to begin recording. 5 Follow steps 5 to 7 in the above procedure. If you name a macro, it is easier to play it later. For information about naming macros, see “Naming Quattro Pro macros” on page 497. For information about macro syntax, see “Understanding Quattro Pro macro syntax” on page 492.

You can also enter macro commands by typing them or double-clicking in a cell, then clicking the Insert Macro button on the input line. To pause recording, click Tools, Macro, Pause. Repeat this to resume recording. When you select cells to store the macro in, select a single cell if there is no chance of overwriting data in the cells below (Quattro Pro fills the cells below as necessary). When you select more than one cell, the macro is confined only to those cells, and stops recording when they are full.

Typing Quattro Pro macros You can type Quattro Pro macros if you prefer to enter the macro manually. You can enter multiple macro commands in the same cell, or enter each separately in multiple cells. When you enter commands in more than one cell, be sure the entries proceed downward (A1, A2, A3) with no empty cells between them. Each cell must contain a label or a text formula. At the end of the macro, terminate it using one of the suggested methods. Otherwise, the macro interprets labels below it as macro commands.

To type a Quattro Pro macro 1 Plan your macro.

496


2 Click Tools, Macro, Record. Record sections of your macro that include menu choices. This speeds entry time and reduces errors. 3 Move to the first cell where you want to store the macro. 4 Type in the commands you want. Refer to the Quattro Pro Macro Command List in the Reference information section of the online help for descriptions and examples of the available commands. 5 If necessary, copy any recorded macro sections from other macros into your macro. 6 Do one of the following to indicate the end of the macro: Leave an empty cell Type {QUIT} or {RETURN} Macro commands are labels, therefore, Quattro Pro does not recognize a syntax error as you type it in; the error occurs only when you try to run the macro. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the format of macro commands as you enter them, and record macros whenever possible. Even a typing error can prevent a macro from running. For information about macro syntax, see “Understanding Quattro Pro macro syntax” on page 492.

Creating macros using the Dialog Designer The Quattro Pro Dialog Designer allows you to create custom dialog boxes and forms. It includes point-and-click tools to facilitate dialog box creation. You can link macros to dialog boxes and to dialog box controls. For information about using the Dialog Designer, see “Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls” on page 579. For information about linking macros to controls, see “Attaching actions to dialog controls” on page 617.

Naming Quattro Pro macros Cell names make macros more readable and easier to remember. Give your macros names that reflect the tasks they perform. For example, PERCENT could be the name of a macro that changes the numeric format of the current cell to a percentage. When you finish entering a macro, name its first cell

Using macros

497

using the Cell name command. Then you can play the macro by choosing its name from the Tools, Macro, Play menu or using a keyboard shortcut. If you name a cell “\” (for example “\A”), then you can activate it using CTRL+SHIFT+A. When naming macros, avoid names that are the same as macro command names because this makes the macro commands invalid. For example, say you name a macro READLN, this is also the name of a predefined macro command for reading a line from a file. If you try to use this command to read a line into cell A6 rather than {READLN A6}, Quattro Pro assumes you are playing the READLN macro rather than the {READLN} command.

To name a Quattro Pro macro using the cell name Click Insert, Name, Cells. Be careful to avoid macro names that could be misinterpreted as cell addresses. For information about working with cell names, see “Naming cells” on page 153.

Editing Quattro Pro macros If you want to edit a Quattro Pro macro, you can retype or edit the macro on the spreadsheet the same way you modify spreadsheet text.

To add a new command to a macro script 1 Click the spreadsheet with the macro script. 2 Click the cell above where you want to add the new command. 3 Click Insert, Row. 4 Enter the new command.

To delete a command from a macro script 1 Click the row label containing the command you want to remove. 2 Click Edit, Delete. Do not leave any blank cells within the macro, as Quattro Pro recognizes blank cells as separators between individual macros.

498


Working with macro libraries The best way to store macros is in a macro library, a special notebook reserved for macros that you can access from any notebook. Macro libraries can simplify linked access make tracking macros easier activate a search through all open macro libraries until it finds the macro you specify if Quattro Pro cannot find it within the active notebook ensure that macros do not interfere with the notebook data and vice versa save disk space by using one set of macros for a group of notebooks store a set of macros that can be copied into individual notebooks as you need them create a separate set of macros for each application or type of notebook you work with Use Hide on the Window menu, (or the macro command that emulates it, {WindowHide}), to hide a macro library. You can also use medium password protection to ensure that a macro library is always hidden. This prevents novices from altering the macro library. If a hidden macro library is also a system notebook, it remains open even when all other notebooks have been closed. Keep only one macro library open at a time. When two open libraries contain a macro with the same name, it is difficult to predict which macro will play. Quattro Pro searches only open macro libraries for macros; closed libraries are ignored. For information about setting password access to a macro library, see “Using password protection” on page 703.

Creating macro libraries A macro library is a notebook reserved for macros that you can use with any notebook.

To create a macro library 1 Do one of the following: Open a new notebook Use the current notebook Using macros

499

2 Do one of the following: Create macros to store in it Copy macros to it from another notebook 3 Click Format, Notebook, Macro Library. 4 Click Yes to define the active notebook as a macro library. 5 Click OK to save the change. 6 Save the notebook. Keep only one macro library open at a time. When two open libraries contain a macro with the same name, it is difficult to predict which macro will run. Quattro Pro searches only open macro libraries for macros; closed libraries are ignored. When dealing with cell addresses, manipulating cells, and assigning cells particular values, make sure that you use correct cell references in the correct notebook. For information about saving notebooks, see “Saving, and closing notebooks” on page 77.

Creating a system notebook Programmers can use system notebooks to hold application macros and ensure their availability while Quattro Pro is running. Designate the system notebook as a macro library. For more information about macro libraries, see “Working with macro libraries” on page 499. System notebooks are hidden from user view and access. A system notebook, when hidden, stays open even when users close all notebooks. There are several methods of hiding the notebook. Two of these methods are described in the procedure below. You can also use password protection to hide a system notebook. For information about passwords, see “Using password protection” on page 703.

To create a system notebook 1 Click Format, Notebook. 2 Click the System tab. 3 Click Yes. 4 Do one of the following:

500


Click OK to close the dialog. Click the Macro Library tab, then enable the Yes button if you want to designate the notebook as a macro library.

To hide a system notebook Do one of the following: When you open the notebook in your application, click Window, Hide. Click Format, Notebook, then click the Password Level tab. If you apply the Medium protection level, the notebook is hidden each time it is opened without a password.

Working with PerfectScript You can use PerfectScript macros not only with Quattro Pro, but also with other Corel applications such as Corel Presentations and WordPerfect. Unlike Quattro Pro macros, you store PerfectScript macros in a .WCM file. PerfectScript is a command-based language that records the results of keystrokes or mouse selections rather than the keystrokes themselves. PerfectScript includes commands that direct the function of the macros. These commands let you create macros that can prompt for user input, make decisions based on conditions in a notebook, access system variables, etc. You can record or type PerfectScript macros. A recorded macro includes only product commands. When you play a recorded macro, each action is played in recorded order. A typed macro can include non-recordable statements that specify how a macro performs a task. When writing this kind of macro, you specify the conditions for playing assignments, loops, and programming commands. You can type a macro only in WordPerfect. You do not need to use a macro editor or edit WordPerfect Office 2000 macros, so you can insert macro commands by typing them in a blank document in WordPerfect or insert them. With the Macro Command Browser, you can insert macro product and programming commands into your PerfectScript macros. The WordPerfect macro command reference guide is available in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help. The WordPerfect Office 2000 Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) is a set of tools that lets software developers customize WordPerfect Office 2000 applications for commercial or business use. The SDK is located on the WordPerfect Office 2000 installation CD in the D:\SDK folder (where “D” is the letter that corresponds to the CD-ROM drive). Using macros

501

The SDK includes the online Help for the SDK, OLE automation samples, PerfectScript tools, code generation wizards for third-party add-ons, utilities to monitor events, and a file format parsing tool. The PerfectScript & Macros User Guide in the WordPerfect Office 2000 Reference Center can provide more information about macros and programming. For more information about the Reference Center, see “Using the Corel Reference Center” on page 5.

Recording PerfectScript macros You can record a PerfectScript macro from within Quattro Pro.

To record a PerfectScript macro 1 Click Tools, Macro, Record. 2 Enable the PerfectScript Macro button. 3 Type the filename for the macro. 4 Click OK to begin recording (noted by

on the Status Bar).

5 Perform your task. Each action is recorded and written as one or more macro commands in the macro file. 6 Click Tools, Macro, Record to stop recording. You cannot record a macro that pauses for user input. If you want the macro to pause, edit it after recording it.

Typing PerfectScript macros You can type a macro in WordPerfect and play it in Quattro Pro. In WordPerfect, you can simplify typing macros using the Macro Command Browser, which lets you insert macro product and programming commands into your macros. Product commands perform functions that let you use WordPerfect Office 2000 features in your macros. Many product commands require you to specify parameters and enumerations; these give the applications information about which options to select in dialog boxes and whether certain features (such as the Ruler) should be displayed or hidden. You can use the Command Browser to specify the commands quickly. Online help for each command in the Command Browser is available by

502


right-clicking a command; this displays the Help topic for the highlighted command.

To type a PerfectScript macro 1 Open WordPerfect. 2 Click Tools, Macro, Macro Toolbar to display the macro tools. 3 Click the Commands button on the Macro toolbar. 4 Choose the command type from the Command Type list. (If the Command Type list is the only list displayed, skip to step 7). 5 Choose the parameter you want from the Parameters list box. 6 Choose the enumeration related to the selected parameter from the Enumerations list box (if this list displays). 7 Type any additional parameters or values in the Command Edit box to complete the command. 8 Click Insert to insert the completed product or programming command into your macro. 9 When you are finished writing the macro, click the Save & Compile button on the macro toolbar.

To pause a PerfectScript macro 1 Click Tools, Macro, Pause. 2 Click Tools again to resume recording. Enumerations are used to set parameter values when they are limited to a specific set of values. For example, the FileClose command lets you close a file. It has a parameter named DoSave? with two enumerations, Yes! and No!.

You can also access the WordPerfect Command Browser from the Start menu. Click Start, Programs, WordPerfect Office 2000, Utilities, PerfectScript. Then click Help, Macro Command Browser to display the list of PerfectScript commands.

Using macros

503

Editing PerfectScript macros There are two ways to edit a PerfectScript macro; in WordPerfect or in the PerfectScript Macro Facility. From Quattro Pro, you can select a .WCM file to edit, which when selected launches WordPerfect.

To edit a PerfectScript macro from Quattro Pro 1 Click Tools, Macro, Edit. 2 Specify the .WCM filename that you want to edit.

To edit a PerfectScript macro in WordPerfect 1 Click Start, Programs, WordPerfect Office 2000, Utilities, PerfectScript. 2 Click File, Edit, and choose a macro file to edit. This launches WordPerfect 9 and displays the macro commands. 3 Do one of the following in WordPerfect: Click Tools, Dialog Editor to edit macro dialogs Click any of the following buttons — Play, Stop, Record, Compile, Edit, or Debug Type changes to the macro Click Help, then select one of the options to get more information about PerfectScript macros.

Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with Quattro Pro You can use Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) with WordPerfect Office 2000. VBA is an object oriented programming language that lets you create VBA macros to automate tasks. You can, for example, create a macro in WordPerfect that changes the color of the headings.

Event driven programming Visual Basic for Applications is an event-driven programming language. Most of the code you create is written to respond to an event. An event is an action that is recognized by VBA; for example, clicking a button or choosing an option from a list box. Unlike traditional procedural programming, in which the program starts at line 1 and executes line by line, event-driven programming executes code in response to events.

504


The difference between PerfectScript and VBA Previously, you could only use the PerfectScript language to automate specific tasks. Both product commands and programming commands are used in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. The PerfectScript language is useful for developing simple macros. VBA offers more flexibility and power. When you use VBA to create macros, you are assisted by the Visual Basic compiler. The compiler helps you by providing context-sensitive help when you are coding a VBA macro. You can combine the power of VBA with the PerfectScript product commands to create powerful macros. You have to use the Visual Basic Editor to create VBA macros; however, PerfectScript macros are developed from the WordPerfect Editor. You can access the Visual Basic Editor only when you are working in an active document.

The PerfectScript class All product commands used in WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations can be used in VBA macros. You must call the PerfectScript object to access a product command. An object is an instance of a class. All objects have properties; for example, the name of a document is a property that belongs to the document object. You can set or change an object’s properties by calling certain methods. A method performs a specific action, such as inserting a table into a document. You can, for example, close a document by calling the close method, or you can save a document by calling the save method. The term class is a VBA programming term and means a collection of related methods, which are referred to as class members. The product commands are the class members that belong to the PerfectScript class. WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations have their own PerfectScript class because the class members, which are the product commands, are different depending on the application. All members of the PerfectScript class perform a specific action. For more information about product commands, see the macros manual.

Assigning security When you open WordPerfect Office 2000 documents created by other users, be aware that a document could contain a macro virus. As a screening measure, VBA includes a security mechanism to help manage document security. You determine the security level used when opening or loading documents and add-ins containing embedded VBA macros. The Security dialog box lets you review the assigned security level and your collection of trusted certificates. You can trust a certificate you know as coming from a reputable source. A VBA developer can attach his digital signature to a macro which creates a certificate when the document is opened. The fact that a document has a digital signature does not automatically ensure the document

Using macros

505

to be free of viruses, so that the onus is on you to find out if the developer scans for viruses before adding his certificate to your trusted sources. There are three security level settings available: High, Medium, and Low. With the High setting, you can open a signed VBA project from a trusted source with the macros enabled. Otherwise, the document is opened with the macros disabled. The default security setting is Medium. A Medium setting indicates that a warning displays if you try to load a VBA document that is not on your trusted source list. You can then choose to open the document with the macros enabled or disabled. The Low setting allows you to open all VBA projects without applying any security (which disables all virus protection). If you want to create your own certificate (in situations where you do not have formal certification), you can run the SELFCERT.EXE that installs with Visual Basic for Applications. For more information about Visual Basic for Applications security, open the Security dialog box (click Tools, Visual Basic, Security) and click the What's This Help button. Although there may be some differences, the syntax for the product commands and the PerfectScript members is usually the same.

Working in the VBA Editor In most cases, the name of the class is the same as the name of the object. WordPerfect Office 2000 has one object, which is the document object. In WordPerfect, the name of the document object is ThisDocument, which is the same as the class. In Corel Presentations, the name of the document object is ThisSlideShow, which is the same as the class. In Quattro Pro, the name of the document object is ThisDocument, which is the same as the class. The document object is the host application that is open. In future versions, there will be many more objects, such as a table object or a cell object. You can create a new object, such as a dialog box, which is known as a form. You can add controls, such as a check box or a text box. You can set the object’s properties in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor. You can also set the object’s properties at run time by programming a method. For example, you can color a form red when you click on it. For more information about setting an object’s properties, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor. An experienced programmer can work directly with the Windows API (Application Programming Interface) and, for example, be able to determine how much disk space is free or gain access to the system’s time and date values. Most VBA users will want to automate specific and repetitive tasks.

506


Accessing an Application from another Application’s macro You can access and change an application from another application’s macro. For example, you can create and use a Quattro Pro object from a WordPerfect VBA macro. This allows you to change and save a Quattro Pro document from a WordPerfect VBA macro.

Creating VBA macros You can create two kinds of VBA macros: a global or a project macro. You can play a global macro from more than one document; however, a project macro can be played only in the document which was used to create it. You can create a project VBA macro by creating a public method for the ThisDocument object. The term public refers to the access level. If a method is public, it can be accessed from outside the class. This means that you can call it from the host application. If a method is Private, then only methods in the same class can access it. Every public method that belongs to the ThisDocument class is a project macro. You can create a VBA macro called ShowMessage and code one line as follows: MsgBox “Hello”. This VBA macro calls a Message Box that displays the string “Hello.”

Using VBA macros You can store a VBA macro in the document by saving the document. Once you have saved the document, you can close and reopen the document and access the macro. After you have developed the macro, you should debug it. You can step through each macro line by line. This is a useful exercise to ensure that the macro will have the desired outcome. A project macro is not available if the document is closed. After you have debugged the macro, you can play the macro.

Starting VBA from Quattro Pro You can start Visual Basic for Applications from Quattro Pro. The members of the PerfectScript class are applicable only to Quattro Pro.

To start VBA from Quattro Pro Click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor. For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

Using macros

507

Creating a VBA macro in Quattro Pro You can program a project or a global VBA macro in Quattro Pro. A new macro, called ShowForm, is developed. In the following example, the macro will produce a dialog box that asks you for your name. After you type your name in the dialog box, a Message Box appears with your name displayed in it. This example illustrates how to use VBA forms.

To create a VBA project macro in Quattro Pro 1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor. 2 Double-click on Project (NoteBook) in the Project view. 3 Click Insert, User Form. 4 Change the form so that it resembles the following diagram:

5 Change the name of the TextBox control to NameBox as illustrated in the following list: Command Button - CommandButton1 TextBox - NameBox You can change all of the control’s attributes, including the name of the control, in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor. 6 Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the UserForm1 class, then type the following lines of code in the CommandButton1_Click method: Private Sub CommandButton1_Click() Dim myname, Msg As String myname = NameBox Msg = “Hello ” & myname MsgBox Msg End End Sub

508


This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is clicked. 7 Double-click the Quattro Pro Objects folder in the Project view. 8 Double-click ThisDocument, then type the following lines of code in the Editor window: Public Sub ShowForm() End Sub This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. If you declare ShowForm as a Private method, you will not be able to run it from Quattro Pro. 9 Type the following line of code in the ShowForm method: Public Sub ShowForm() UserForm1.Show End Sub

To create a VBA global macro in Quattro Pro 1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor. 2 Double-click on Global Macros in the Project view. 3 Click Insert, User Form. 4 Change the form so that it resembles the following diagram:

5 Change the name of the TextBox control to NameBox as illustrated in the following list: Command Button - CommandButton1 TextBox - NameBox

Using macros

509

You can change all of the control’s attributes, including the name of the control, in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor. 6 Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the UserForm1 class, then type the following lines of code in the CommandButton1_Click method: Private Sub CommandButton1_Click() Dim myname, Msg As String myname = NameBox Msg = “Hello ” & myname MsgBox Msg End End Sub This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is clicked. 7 Double-click the Quattro Pro Objects folder in the Project view. 8 Double-click ThisDocument, then type the following lines of code in the Editor window: Public Sub ShowForm() End Sub This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. If you declare ShowForm as a Private method, you will not be able to run it from Quattro Pro. 9 Type the following line of code in the ShowForm method: Public Sub ShowForm() UserForm1.Show End Sub The name of this macro will be called ShowForm. For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

Playing a VBA macro in Quattro Pro You can play a VBA macro in Quattro Pro. You can play either a global macro or a project macro. You can play a Project macro only from the document that

510


was used to create it. If your macro does not perform the desired action, then you can debug the macro.

To play a project VBA macro 1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Play. 2 Choose Project(NoteBook) from the Macros In list box. 3 Choose a macro from the Macro Name list box. 4 Click the Run button.

To play a global VBA macro 1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Play. 2 Choose Global from the Macros In combo box. 3 Choose a macro from the Macro Name list box. 4 Click the Run button. To start a VBA macro, you can also click the Play button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

Debugging macros created in VBA Debugging is an extremely important part of the programming process. Debugging lets you step through your code line by line to ensure that the macro executes properly. This feature of programming is known as Single-Stepping. For example, if you are at a point in the code where a variable is about to be assigned a value, you can step into this line of code to determine the value of the variable at run-time.

To debug a macro created in VBA 1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Play. 2 Choose a macro from the Macro Name list box. 3 Click the Step Into button. 4 Click Debug, Step Into. 5 Repeat step 4 for each line of code you want to step into. 6 Change the code as necessary.

Using macros

511

After you have stepped into a line of code, you can position the pointer over a specific variable to determine the value of the variable. For more information about debugging in VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

Editing macros created in VBA You can edit a VBA macro. To edit a macro involves going directly to start of the code, whereas debugging steps you through each line of the code.

To edit a VBA macro 1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Play. 2 Choose a macro from the Macro Name list box. 3 Click the Edit button. 4 Edit the code as necessary. For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

Displaying the VBA toolbar You can activate the VBA toolbar. The VBA toolbar provides quick access to commands such as playing a macro or starting the VBA Editor.

To display the VBA toolbar 1 Click View, Toolbars to display the Options dialog box. 2 Enable the Visual Basic check box to display the VBA toolbar. For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

Using the PerfectScript Class to change a Quattro Pro document The PerfectScript class lets you automate specific and repetitive tasks. The members of the PerfectScript class are the product commands that are used in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. The following example creates a project macro.

512


In the following procedure, a new method, called AddInventory, is added to the ThisDocument class. This macro creates an inventory table, populates the table with specific values, and calculates the values. All PerfectScript class members can be accessed only by calling the PerfectScript object, which must be followed by a “.”. You can call the FileSave method, which is a PerfectScript class member, by typing: “PerfectScript.FileSave”.

To change a Quattro Pro document using the PerfectScript class 1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor. 2 Double-click Project(NoteBook), then double-click the Quattro Pro Objects folder in the Project view. 3 Double-click ThisDocument, then type the following lines of code in the Editor window: Public Sub AddInventory() End Sub This code adds a new method, called AddInventory, to the ThisDocument class. If you declare AddInventory as a private method, you will not be able to run it from Quattro Pro. 4 Type the following lines of code to create a private method called CreateTable: Private Sub CreateTable() PerfectScript.SetCellString “B1", ”Jan" PerfectScript.SetCellString “C1", ”Feb" PerfectScript.SetCellString “D1", ”Mar" PerfectScript.SetCellString “A2", ”TVs" PerfectScript.SetCellString “A3", ”VCRs" PerfectScript.SetCellString “A4", ”Radios" End Sub This code creates an inventory table. 5 Type the following lines of code to create a private method called AddValues: Private Sub AddValues() ‘Populate the January Column PerfectScript.SelectBlock “B2" PerfectScript.PutCell2 “200" Using macros

513

PerfectScript.SelectBlock “B3" PerfectScript.PutCell2 “250" PerfectScript.SelectBlock “B4" PerfectScript.PutCell2 “350" ‘Populate the February Column PerfectScript.SelectBlock “C2" PerfectScript.PutCell2 “100" PerfectScript.SelectBlock “C3" PerfectScript.PutCell2 “280" PerfectScript.SelectBlock “C4" PerfectScript.PutCell2 “340" ‘Populate the March Column PerfectScript.SelectBlock “D2" PerfectScript.PutCell2 “150" PerfectScript.SelectBlock “D3" PerfectScript.PutCell2 “230" PerfectScript.SelectBlock “D4" PerfectScript.PutCell2 “490" End Sub This code adds numeric values to the inventory table. 6 Type the following lines of code to create a private method called CalculateValues: Private Sub CalculateValues() ‘Calculate the January totals PerfectScript.SelectBlock “B2 B4" PerfectScript.QuickFunction “SUM”, “B5" ‘Calculate the February totals PerfectScript.SelectBlock “C2 C4" PerfectScript.QuickFunction “SUM”, “C5" ‘Calculate the March totals PerfectScript.SelectBlock “D2 D4"

514


PerfectScript.QuickFunction “SUM”, “D5" PerfectScript.SetCellString “A5", ”Totals:" End Sub This code adds the values in each column. 7 Type the following lines of code, in the AddInventory method, to call the Private methods: Public Sub AddInventory() CreateTable AddValues CalculateValues End Sub This code calls all of the private methods that you created. You can access the private methods because you are working in the same class. It is not possible to access a private method from outside of the ThisDocument class. For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

Working with the VBA methods You can use VBA to get system information, such as the system’s date and time values. Retrieving the system’s date and time values using VBA is very easy because all of the Windows functions are hidden, and all you have to do is call the appropriate VBA method. In the following procedure, you have to create a new method called, ShowTime. Next, you will declare two new variables: myTime and myDate. You can use the return value of the Time method to populate the myTime variable. The variable myDate can be populated by the return value of the Date method. You will have to type-cast the two variables — myTime and myDate — into string values. The easiest way to accomplish this is to declare two new string variables: myStrDate and myStrTime. Use the Str method to convert the contents of myDate and myTime into strings. Display the contents of myStrDate and myStrTime in a Message Box. The following example creates a project macro.

Using macros

515

To access the system’s date and time values 1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor. 2 Double-click Project(Document1) in the Project view. 3 Double-click the Quattro Pro Objects folder in the Project view. 4 Double-click ThisDocument, then type the following lines of code in the Editor window: Public Sub ShowTime() End Sub This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. Make sure that ShowTime is declared public so that you can access this macro from Quattro Pro. 5 Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to declare two new variables: Public Sub ShowTime() Dim myTime Dim myDate As Date End Sub 6 Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate the myTime and the myDate variables: Public Sub ShowTime() Dim myTime Dim myDate As Date myTime = Time myDate = Date End Sub 7 Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to convert the two variables to string data types: Public Sub ShowTime() Dim myTime Dim myDate As Date myTime = Time myDate = Date

516


Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String myStrDate = Str(myDate) myStrTime = Str(myTime) End Sub 8 Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate and display the Msg variable: Public Sub ShowTime() Dim myTime Dim myDate As Date myTime = Time myDate = Date Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String myStrDate = Str(myDate) myStrTime = Str(myTime) Msg = “The date is ” & myStrDateI & “ and the time is ” & myStrTime MsgBox Msg End Sub For the purpose of this procedure, a Message Box was selected to display the date and time; however, you can create a new form and then display the time and date in this form. For more information about VBA, see Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

Accessing and manipulating an application from another application You can create a VBA macro that will call another application. It is possible to program a VBA macro to open and change another application at run time. For example, you can create a Quattro Pro object from the WordPerfect VBA Editor. This lets you create a WordPerfect VBA macro that will change a Quattro Pro document. The following example demonstrates how to create a Quattro Pro object from the WordPerfect VBA Editor. However, the

Using macros

517

procedure remains the same regardless of the object you create or what application you use. In the following procedure, a Quattro Pro object, called myQp, will be created. This object will be used to create an inventory table in a Quattro Pro document.

To create a WordPerfect VBA macro that will manipulate a Quattro Pro document 1 Open WordPerfect, then click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor. 2 Double-click on Project (Document1) in the Project view. 3 Click Tools, Reference, then enable QuattroPro 9, and click OK. Every application has an object. Make sure you reference the right object. 4 Double-click the WordPerfect Objects folder in the Project view. 5 Double-click ThisDocument, then type the following lines of code in the Editor window: Public Sub CreateQPTable() End Sub This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. Make sure that CreateQPTable is declared public so that you can access this macro from WordPerfect. 6 Type the following lines of code in the CreateQPTable method: Public Sub CreateQPTable() Dim myQp Set myQp = CreateObject(“QuattroPro.PerfectScript”) If myQp Is Nothing Then MsgBox “The Quattro Pro Object is invalid”, vbCritical End If This code creates a Quattro Pro PerfectScript object. After the object is created, it is tested to determine if memory has been allocated to it. A Message Box will inform you if the object is invalid. 7 Type the following lines of code in the CreateQPTable method: Public Sub CreateQPTable() Dim myQp Set myQp = CreateObject(“QuattroPro.PerfectScript”)

518


If myQp Is Nothing Then MsgBox “The Quattro Pro Object does not exist”, vbCritical End If ‘Populate the Quattro Pro document myQp.FileNew “FileNew” PerfectScript.SetCellString “B1", ”Jan" PerfectScript.SetCellString “C1", ”Feb" PerfectScript.SetCellString “D1", ”Mar" PerfectScript.SetCellString “A2", ”TVs" PerfectScript.SetCellString “A3", ”VCRs" PerfectScript.SetCellString “A4", ”Radios End Sub This code will create a new Quattro Pro document and create an inventory table. For the purpose of this procedure, a simple inventory table was created in a Quattro Pro document. You can run this macro from WordPerfect. For testing purposes, make sure that Quattro Pro is open. For more information about VBA, see Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

Working in Developer mode You can work in Developer mode, which adds special properties to property menus and lets you use the shortcut key, CTRL+M, which varies in function depending on the current program state. In most instances, CTRL+M restores the standard Quattro Pro Application Bar and Input Line. In Developer mode you can modify property settings or change the title displayed in the Quattro Pro Title Bar.

Launching Developer mode In Developer mode, you gain additional settings and properties. Additional global settings let you

Using macros

519

display a different title in the title bar (Title setting) turn off access to property settings (Enable Inspection setting) Additional properties of drawn objects in a chart or map window let you read or change property settings with macro commands, link commands, and spreadsheet functions (Name property) You do not have to be in Developer mode to change or read these property settings. Macro commands can always access them. Use CTRL+M

Result

When debugging a macro

Stops macro execution and exits Debug mode

In all other states

Restores the standard Quattro Pro Menu Bar, Application Bar, and Input Line, and re-enables the ability to right-click and access property menus

To start Quattro Pro in Developer mode 1 On the Windows Taskbar, click Start, Run. 2 Type the Quattro Pro command with its path, followed by a space, and then /d (for example, QPW.exe /d). 3 Do one of the following: Click Tools, Settings, Title to display a different title in the Title Bar. Click Tools, Settings, Enable Inspection, No to turn off right-clicking and access to property settings. Click the object, then click the Property button to change the properties of a chart or map object.

Limiting access to property settings from Developer mode You can control whether users can access object property settings using the Enable Inspection setting. Enable Inspection controls mouse right-clicking.

To turn off access to property settings 1 Start Quattro Pro in Developer mode (for example, QPW.EXE /d). 2 Click Tools, Settings. 3 Click the Enable Inspection tab. 4 Enable the No button to turn off access to property settings and right-clicking.

520


To re-enable property settings after you disable them, click CTRL+M on the notebook.

Creating macro applications When you have selected Quattro Pro macros or PerfectScript as your macro tool, you can then create your application. You can set up data with absolute and relative cell addresses and attach a completed macro to other design elements like toolbars and controls with either macro tool. For information about PerfectScript syntax, see “Working with PerfectScript” on page 501. To view in-depth descriptions of Quattro Pro macro syntax, click Help, Contents, Reference Information, Quattro Pro Macros Help. You cannot record a macro that pauses for user input. If you want the macro to pause, edit it after recording it.

Recording macros using absolute and relative cell addresses By default, addresses in macro commands use absolute cell addressing like A1, C6. However, you can record macro commands that use relative references so you can play the macro in different parts of the notebook or in different notebooks. The following is an example of absolute and relative addressing: Absolute: []A:A1..D10 Relative: []P(0):C(0)R(0)..C(4)R(10) When you record with relative references, the macro records cells in relation to each other, rather than recording exact cell addresses. For example, the macro indicates two cells to the right of the selector, rather than a specific cell. The following example shows how to use absolute and relative cell referencing in macros: Absolute: []$A:$A$1..$D$10 Relative: [][]A:A1..D10 Using relative references increases macro portability (letting you use a macro with different notebooks), but hinders readability, since it is harder to track which cells the macro affects. If your macros use the spreadsheet function @CELLPOINTER frequently, you can try relative references. For more information about the spreadsheet function @CELLPOINTER, see

Using macros

521

@CELLPOINTER in the Quattro Pro spreadsheet functions reference in the online Help. For more information about setting absolute and relative cell references, see “Setting cell addresses” on page 150. To create a macro, select the macro tool (for example, Quattro Pro macros or PerfectScript), then follow the rules in the chart below for assigning relative cell addresses.

Reading macros containing relative cell references Relative references specify cells as offset from the cell selector. For example, the cell selector’s relative reference is []P(0):C(0)R(0). Reference...

Result...

([])

Specifies that you are referring to the active notebook.

P(0):

Indicates the number of sheets from the selector (in this case, zero); it is optional (except when selecting an entire row or column, which is discussed below).

C(0)

Indicates the number of columns from the selector.

R(0)

Indicates the number of rows from the selector.

The cell below the selector is []C(0)R(1), the cell to the right of it is []C(1)R(0), and the cell beneath the selector (on the next sheet) is []P(1):C(0)R(0). If [] does not precede a relative reference, the relative reference is offset from the cell containing the macro command, not the cell selector. For example, if {BLANK C(1)R(0)} were stored in A:A16, playing the macro would erase the cell to the right of it (A:B16). You can precede a relative reference with a colon (:) to affect the same cell, but on the active sheet. For example, if {BLANK :C(1)R(0)} were stored in A:A16, playing it when sheet B is active would erase the cell B:B16.

522


You can omit C( ) or R( ) to select entire rows or columns. For example, {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(0)} selects the column containing the active cell; {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):R(0)} selects the row containing the active cell. To select the three columns to the right of the active cell, use {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(1), C(3)}. Relative references can use negative or positive offsets. For example, if the selector is in cell A2, you could use []C(0)R(-1), C(2)R(1) to specify the cells A1, C3.

Recording relative cell addresses By default, macros are recorded as command equivalents with absolute cell addresses (like A1, B26). For greater portability, you can record with relative cell references. Relative references specify cells as offset from the cell selector. For example, the macro indicates two cells to the right of the selector, rather than a specific cell.

To record relative cell references 1 Click Tools, Macro, Options. 2 Enable the Relative button. To revert to recording absolute cell references (for example, A1, C6) click Tools, Macro, Options, then enable the Absolute button.

Attaching macros to other notebooks You can use links in macros just as you do in formulas. Macros can play macros from other notebooks, access data from them, or store user input in them. If you play a macro that is from a different notebook, such as a macro library, the macro behaves as though it were stored in the active notebook. Coordinates entered in dialog boxes refer to the active notebook. However, coordinates stored in the macro as arguments to a macro command refer to the macro library. For example, {BRANCH A:A1} branches to cell A1 of the macro library, not the active notebook. To refer to cells in a different notebook, use linking. For example, the following command branches to sheet B, cell A1 of the MACROS notebook: {BRANCH [MACROS]B:A1}

Using macros

523

To refer to cells in the active notebook, precede the coordinates with empty brackets. For example, {BRANCH []A:A1} branches to cell A:A1 in the active notebook.

Attaching macros to a notebook When you finish recording a macro with Tools, Macro, Record, you can attach the macro to a specific notebook so that it plays automatically when you open or close the notebook.

To attach a macro to a notebook 1 Right-click the top-left cell of the macro. 2 Click Name, Cells. 3 Type one of the following in the Name box: \0 (backslash zero) or _nbstartmacro — creates a startup macro that plays when you open the notebook _nbexitmacro — runs a macro when you close the notebook any block name (for example, “Fred” could be the name of a macro stored in a block) 4 Click Add. 5 Click Close. \Character (for example, \A) creates a macro that can be activated by CTRL+SHIFT+character.

Attaching macros to buttons Quattro Pro lets you create a button, and then attach a macro or Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to it. The button can then launch the macro or jump to a Web site when clicked, or display a dialog box you have created.

Creating a macro button You can create a button to play a macro or go to a URL site. Buttons also work on spreadsheets, slides in a slide show, or graphics (for example, a chart, a map, or an image). For information about creating buttons in slide shows, see “Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps” on page 467.

524


To create a macro button 1 Click Insert, Form Control, Button. 2 Do one of the following: Drag to create a custom size button. Click instead of dragging to create a default size button. 3 Do one or both of the following: Click the button, then drag the handles to the desired size to resize it. Click the button, then drag it to a new position to move it.

To display a label on a macro button 1 Right-click a macro button, then click Button Properties. 2 Click the Label Text tab. 3 Type the text you want to appear on the button. You can also add a macro button to a spreadsheet by clicking the Push Button tool in the Form Controls flyout on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar. You can also use macro buttons to display dialog boxes. For information about connecting macro buttons to dialog boxes you create, see “Attaching macro buttons to custom dialog boxes” on page 526.

Attaching a macro to a button You can attach a macro to buttons you create.

To link a button to a script 1 Right-click the button, then click Button Properties. 2 Click the Macro tab. 3 Type the macro command name in the Enter Macro box. (The maximum length is 200 characters.) Enclose the command name with braces { }. If you want a button to play a macro in a notebook, use the {BRANCH} command.

Using macros

525

To edit the macro that activates when you click the button, right-click the button, click Button Properties , Macro.

Attaching macro buttons to a Web site You can specify a URL address to link to World Wide Web (HTTP), Gopher, and FTP sites. Internet files are opened for read-only access and you cannot save files to the Internet.

To attach a macro button to a URL address 1 Right-click the button, then click Button Properties. 2 Click the Macro tab. 3 Click Link To URL to go to a URL site when the button is clicked. 4 Type the URL address.

Attaching macros to keystrokes If the Quattro Pro macro you create is used often, you can give it a special block name that makes it easier to run. To do this, precede the name with a backslash (\), followed by a letter of the alphabet. Because there can be only 26 block name macros (one for each letter of the alphabet), reserve them for macros you use often.

To attach a block name macro to a keystroke 1 Select the starting cell of the macro. 2 Click Insert, Name, Cells. 3 In the Name field, type a backslash (\) followed by a letter of the alphabet. 4 Click Add. Macros assigned to keys play using CTRL+SHIFT+letter. Avoid using the same alphabet letters already assigned to shortcuts in the application (for example, CTRL+SHIFT+N).

Attaching macro buttons to custom dialog boxes You can use the macro buttons you create to display the dialog boxes you create in Quattro Pro. If you did not create a dialog box using Tools, Macro, Dialog Designer, no dialog boxes are available to display using your macro

526


buttons. For information about creating dialog boxes, see “Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls” on page 579.

To make a macro button display a dialog box when clicked 1 Select the macro button. 2 Right-click the button, then click Button Properties. 3 Click the Macro tab, then click Execute Dialog. 4 Choose a dialog box in the Active Dialog list. 5 Do one of the following in the Result Cell box: Type a cell reference Use the Pointer button to select a cell reference After the dialog box is closed, this cell contains 1 or 0. The value 1 means the dialog box was closed by clicking the OK button; the value 0 means it was closed by clicking the Cancel button. 6 Do one of the following in the Values Range box: Type a cell reference Use the Pointer button to select a cell reference Specify the cells that contain initial settings for the dialog box. When the dialog box is closed, its final settings are written back into these cells.

Modifying macro buttons Once you create a macro button, you can change the button properties by modifying the box type, border color, protection, and button name.

To modify a macro button 1 Right-click the macro button, then click Button Properties. 2 Choose one of the following tabs to make changes: Border Color — changes the color around the outside of the button Box Type — changes the thickness of the line around the button or applies a shadow effect Protection — locks the button, preventing users from moving or changing the button when protections are set at the spreadsheet level Object Name — changes the button’s name (used when referring to the button in a macro)

Using macros

527

Print — limits access to the button to prevent unauthorized changes in the button properties dialog Label text — changes the name displayed on the label Macro — changes the button activation, URL link, or dialog box that displays when clicking the button For more information about setting object protection, see “Protecting graphics” on page 401.

Attaching macros to toolbars You can attach a Quattro Pro or PerfectScript macro to a customized toolbar button. You can then display the button on the Quattro Pro workspace. When you click the button, the macro executes.

Attaching macros to toolbar buttons You can attach a macro to a graphic toolbar button. The buttons you create are stored in the Macros folder in the Command list.

To attach a macro to a toolbar button 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Click the Commands button. 3 Click New Macro. 4 Enable one of the following buttons in the Macro Command Category dialog: Quattro Pro Macro PerfectScript Macro 5 Type the macro in the Enter Macro box. 6 Type a name to reference the command in the Command Name box. 7 Type text to use as the button’s Tool Tip in the QuickTip box. 8 Choose a button graphic from the Icon list.

Displaying macro toolbar buttons Once you create a macro toolbar button, you can then display the button on any of the toolbars.

528


To display a macro button 1 Click Tools, Customize. 2 Choose the Macros folder from the Command list. 3 Select the macro button you want to add to the toolbar area. 4 Drag the macro button to the appropriate toolbar.

Playing macros While a macro plays, appears on the Application Bar. When Quattro Pro plays a macro, it begins with the first cell in the macro cells. It continues down through the column, interpreting everything it encounters as part of the macro, until it finds one of the following: an empty cell a cell containing a value the {QUIT} macro command the {RETURN} macro command an invalid macro entry At that point, the macro stops and control returns to the user. Windows applications that support Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) can make Quattro Pro play macro commands. See documentation for those Windows applications for more details.

Playing Quattro Pro macros You can play any Quattro Pro macro that you have stored in a notebook or a macro library.

Playing Quattro Pro macros You can play a Quattro Pro macro from the menu or using the macro buttons on a customized toolbar. For information about creating customized toolbars, see “Customizing toolbars” on page 74. If the macro contains an error, Quattro Pro beeps, displays an error message, and then stops the macro. Use the debugger to pinpoint and correct macro errors. For information about debugging macros, see “Debugging macros” on page 534.

Using macros

529

To play a Quattro Pro macro 1 Do one of the following: Click Tools, Macro, Play Press ALT+F2 2 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button. 3 Do one of the following: Specify the macro location Specify a macro library and select a macro name If the macro is in another notebook, use full linking syntax to specify the macro location (for example, [LIBRARY]A:C26). To stop a macro while it is playing, click ESC or CTRL+BREAK. If CTRL+BREAK key has been disabled with {BREAKOFF}, you cannot interrupt the macro. If you need to use {BREAKOFF} in the macro, add it as a last step after debugging the macro.

Playing PerfectScript macros Playing a PerfectScript macro is similar to playing a Quattro Pro macro. However, PerfectScript macros cannot be used as they are for startup or exit macros. There is a way to run a PerfectScript macro from Quattro Pro that plays when Quattro Pro launches, but it involves entering a reference to the PerfectScript macro within the context of a Quattro Pro macro. For more information about playing a PerfectScript macro when Quattro Pro launches, see “Playing startup macros when opening a notebook” on page 532.

Playing PerfectScript macros PerfectScript macros get stored in the .WCM macro files by name, simplifying the playing of this type of macro.

To play a PerfectScript macro 1 Do one of the following: Click Tools, Macro, Play Press ALT+F2 2 Enable the PerfectScript Macro button.

530


3 Do one of the following: Type the macro name (if you know it) Browse the macros folder to select the macro you want To stop a macro while it is playing, click ESC or CTRL+BREAK.

Playing keystroke macros You can play Quattro Pro macros attached to keystrokes. For information about attaching a keystroke to your macro, see “Attaching macros to keystrokes” on page 526. For information about conversion options from other applications, see Conversion notes for Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro and Conversion notes for Lotus 1-2-3 and Quattro Pro in the Reference section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Playing keystroke macros You can play the macro from the keyboard by pressing CTRL+SHIFT and the letter you specified (in either uppercase or lowercase). Example If you type \A, you can play the macro using CTRL+SHIFT+A. Macros assigned to keys play using CTRL+SHIFT+letter. Avoid using the same alphabet letters already assigned to shortcuts in the application (for example, CTRL+SHIFT+N).

Playing macros attached to buttons, notebooks, and startup macros You can attach macros to many items in Quattro Pro so that the macro plays when the user performs some action (for example, clicks a button, activates a control, or changes a value). Many controls in dialog windows can play macros using link commands. For more information about using link commands, see “Understanding Link Events” on page 620.

Using macros

531

You can play a macro each time a user opens or closes a notebook. For example, Quattro Pro can enter the current date and time when you open a notebook, or open a notebook after closing another. You can also play a macro each time you start Quattro Pro.

Playing macros attached to buttons Once you attach a macro to a Form Control button, you select it by right-clicking the button. Selecting the button lets you modify or make changes to the button.

To execute a Form Control button macro Click the button.

Playing startup macros when opening a notebook You may want to have Quattro Pro launch a macro whenever a user opens a particular notebook. You can create a startup macro in two ways: Create a macro and have it _NBSTARTMACRO Enter the name of a macro in the Startup Macro box of the Settings dialog box Every time a user opens a notebook, Quattro Pro looks for a macro named _NBSTARTMACRO and plays it, if found. If that macro is not found, Quattro Pro plays the macro specified in the Startup Macro box. You can also create macros that play when you close a notebook. For information about playing macros when closing a notebook, see “Playing macros when closing notebooks” on page 533. Quattro Pro can have the same macro startup every time a user launches Quattro Pro. For information about assigning this kind of macro, see “Playing macros when launching Quattro Pro” on page 533.

To play a startup macro in a notebook 1 Do one of the following: Use Tools, Macro, Record to record a macro Type a macro in a cell or cells 2 Select the first cell of the macro, then click Insert, Name, Cells. 3 Type _NBSTARTMACRO. 4 Click Add, then click Close.

532


To assign an existing macro as the startup macro 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the Macro tab. 3 Type a new name in the Startup Macro box (by default, \0 is the startup macro). If a notebook is linked to other notebooks, a Links dialog box appears when you open it. To ensure that _NBSTARTMACRO plays correctly in a notebook that contains links, begin the macro with {ESC}. This cancels the Links dialog box. You can use Edit, Links to access linked values or to load supporting notebooks after accessing the file. If you rename the default startup macro name, existing macros named \0 will no longer play automatically. For example, if you set the startup name to AUTOSTART, macros named \0 do not play automatically; they must be renamed AUTOSTART.

Playing macros when closing notebooks When you close a notebook containing a macro named _NBEXITMACRO, Quattro Pro plays the macro before closing the notebook. Design the macro to make sure any ongoing operations are completed so users can exit the notebook without problems.

To play a macro when closing a notebook 1 Do one of the following: Use Tools, Macro, Record to record a macro Type a macro in a cell or cells 2 Select the first cell of the macro, then click Insert, Name, Cells. 3 Type _NBEXITMACRO. 4 Click Add, then click Close.

Playing macros when launching Quattro Pro You can have a macro play every time you launch Quattro Pro by storing the path to the macro in the Autoload File box of the Settings dialog box.

Using macros

533

To assign a macro to launch automatically whenever Quattro Pro launches 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the File Options tab. 3 Do one of the following in the Autoload File box: Type the name of the macro Browse to locate the macro

Debugging macros Debugging is the process of isolating and fixing problems in a macro. With the debugger, you can play macros in slow motion (step by step), pausing as long as you want between steps set breakpoints to pause a macro when it reaches a given cell or satisfies a given condition play macros at full speed until reaching a breakpoint, then either continue in slow motion or at full speed until the next breakpoint monitor or trace changes to specific cells as a macro plays Debugging is especially important when you type macros or insert extra parameters into a macro, such as cell references. A bug (or error) can stop a macro from executing, or can cause unexpected consequences when playing the macro.

Debugging Quattro Pro macros Once you create a Quattro Pro macro, you can turn on the Macro Debugger to check for errors in your code. This allows you to assign standard or conditional breakpoints assign trace cells assign cells for editing You control when Debug Mode is active, and turn it on or off as needed.

Setting macro breakpoints If you know that most of a macro is correct, you can use breakpoints to play parts of a macro at full speed and step through other parts that may have problems. There are two types of breakpoint:

534


Standard breakpoints — pause the macro at the breakpoint cell. Conditional breakpoints — pause the macro when the result of a logical formula in the conditional breakpoint cell is true. You can set up to four standard breakpoints and four conditional breakpoints in one macro.

Example The following macro includes a loop that continuously increments a single cell called COUNTER. counter Is_done

0 +COUNTER>=100

\m {LET counter,0} again {; increment counter} {LET counter,counter+1}~ {BRANCH again}

A pass count specifies the number of loops that occur before reaching a breakpoint. If you specify the cell containing {BRANCH} again as the first breakpoint and leave the pass count at 1, the macro stops at the {BRANCH} command each time it goes through the loop. When you click Go, the macro continues, incrementing the counter cell by one. In the top of the debugger window, the selector highlights the {BRANCH} command, indicating that it is the next command. If you specified a pass count of 5 for the first breakpoint in the above example, then every time you click Go, five loops occur, and the counter increments from 0 to 5, to 10, and so on.

Conditional breakpoints Conditional breakpoints stop a macro when the result of a logical formula becomes true. In the previous macro example, the cell Is_done contains a logical formula. Is_done is false (has a value of 0) until 100 or more loops occur. If this cell is specified as a conditional cell, the macro pauses when the counter reaches 100. You can set up to four conditional breakpoints per notebook. Conditional breakpoints can be extremely valuable. Suppose you have a macro loop that contains date calculations and you want it to pause whenever December is reached. If the date is in cell A5, assign the first conditional breakpoint to a cell containing the following formula: MONTH(A5)=12

As long as the formula in the condition cell is true (has a value of 1), the macro plays in step-by-step mode. Once the formula is false (has a value of Using macros

535

0), click Go to let the macro continue until the next conditional formula evaluates as true. This process repeats until all conditional breakpoints are passed.

Playing macros in debug mode You can play a macro while in Debug mode.

To play a Quattro Pro macro in Debug mode 1 Click Tools, Macro, Debugger. 2 Click Tools, Macro, Play. 3 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button, then choose the macro you want. 4 Do one of the following if you want to play the first command of the macro: Click in the Debugger window Press the SPACEBAR 5 Do one of the following: Press the SPACEBAR to step through each macro command until you find an error Click Go or press ENTER to play the rest of the macro at full speed You can also activate Debug mode by pressing SHIFT+F2 or the PAUSE key.

Setting a standard breakpoint for debugging Quattro Pro macros You can set up to four standard breakpoints. Sometimes a problem appears after many repetitions of the same commands in a macro loop. If this is the case, you can set a pass count to indicate how many times to pass through the breakpoint before stopping. The default, 1, stops the macro every time it passes through the breakpoint. Setting it to 2 stops the macro every other pass.

To set a standard breakpoint in a macro 1 Click Tools, Macro, Debugger. 2 Click Tools, Macro, Play. 3 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button, then choose the macro you want.

536


4 Click Breakpoints, then select a breakpoint to set (1st Breakpoint through 4th Breakpoint). 5 Type the cell reference of the cell where you want the macro to stop in the Location box of the Breakpoint dialog. 6 Type a number in the Pass Count box. 7 Click OK to set the breakpoint. 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to set additional breakpoints. 9 Press the SPACEBAR to resume stepping through the macro, then click Go to continue at full speed until the next breakpoint or the end of the macro. If there are several macro commands in the breakpoint cell, you may need to click Go more than once to make the macro play at full speed. Click Reset from the Macro Debugger to clear all trace cells and macro breakpoints. You can remove a standard breakpoint by setting its pass count to 0.

Setting conditional breakpoints for debugging Quattro Pro macros Conditional breakpoints debug a macro using Boolean logic. The debugging process pauses only when a positive result (1) is returned by playing the script.

To set a conditional breakpoint in a macro 1 Click Tools, Macro, Debugger. 2 Click Tools, Macro, Play. 3 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button, then choose the macro you want. 4 Click Conditional, then select a conditional breakpoint to set (1st Cell through 4th Cell). 5 Do one of the following in the Location box of the Conditional Cell dialog box: Type the cell reference for the conditional cell Use the Pointer button to assign a cell reference 6 Click OK to set the breakpoint. 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to set additional conditional breakpoints.

Using macros

537

8 Press the SPACEBAR to resume stepping through the macro. 9 Click Go to continue at full speed until the next breakpoint or the end of the macro. When there are several macro commands in the breakpoint cell, you may need to click Go more than once to make the macro play at full speed. If you want to clear all trace cells and macro breakpoints, click Reset from the Macro Debugger.

Setting trace cells for debugging Quattro Pro macros Macros often affect the contents of one or more cells. By tracing these cells, you can see what the macro is doing. You can specify up to four trace cells whose addresses and current values display during debugging in the Debugger window. The Debugger updates as the contents of the trace cells change.

To set a trace cell for a macro 1 Click Tools, Macro, Debugger. 2 Click Tools, Macro, Play. 3 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button, then choose the macro you want. 4 Click Trace, then select a trace cell to set (1st Cell through 4th Cell). 5 Do one of the following in the Location box of the Trace Cell dialog box: Type the cell reference for the trace cell. Use the Pointer button to assign a cell reference. 6 Click OK to set the trace cell. 7 To specify additional trace cells, repeat steps 4 to 6. When you want to clear all trace cells and macro breakpoints, click Reset from the Macro Debugger. If you want to see all the trace cells, resize the Macro Debugger window.

Editing Quattro Pro macro cells from the debugger This feature lets you edit a specific cell of a macro.

538


To edit macro cells from the Macro Debugger 1 Click Tools, Macro, Debugger. 2 Click Tools, Macro, Play. 3 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button, then choose the macro to edit. 4 Click Edit. 5 Do one of the following in the Location box of the Edit Cell dialog box: Type the cell reference for the edit cell. Use the Pointer button to assign a cell reference. 6 Edit the contents that display in the Content box.

Exiting macro Debug mode for Quattro Pro macros There are three methods of closing the Macro Debugger in Quattro Pro.

To exit macro Debug mode Do one of the following: Click Tools, Macro, Debugger Press SHIFT+F2 Press the Pause button If you want to stop a macro before debugging finishes, click Terminate from the Debugger or press CTRL+BREAK. Then you can debug another macro or exit Debug mode. When the Debugger displays, part of the notebook is covered. You can move the Debugger to see the data it covers.

Debugging PerfectScript macros Macros are written with an editor and saved as a source file. The macro compiler creates an object, which it saves in a hidden area of the source (the macro compiler does not create a separate object file). When you save a source file, the object is destroyed. It is recreated each time the source file is compiled. A compiled source file (macro) contains instructions that are executed when you play the macro. A macro compiler is used to compile or “translate” macros so that WordPerfect Office 2000 applications can play them. Macros in PerfectScript are compiled when you record, play, or save them, or when you click Save & Using macros

539

Compile or Options, Close Macro on the Macro Edit Feature Bar. The tool used for compiling PerfectScript macros is the PerfectScript Debugger.

Compilation errors Bugs are fixed by editing the macro. Errors are sometimes created when you edit a macro. For example, if you mistype a word, when you compile the macro, a compile-time syntax error displays a syntax error message box. The compiler does not recognize typographical errors and guesses that it is a label’s calling statement. When the compiler reaches the end of the file and does not find a corresponding label, it displays a syntax error message. The message contains information about the error and its location. The compiler makes a best guess and may not always be accurate. The compiler identifies syntax errors and suggests solutions. Common syntax errors are caused by: missing semicolons between parameters missing parentheses missing double quotation marks missing command in a conditional or loop statement undefined calling statements using commas between parameters instead of semicolons

Runtime errors Runtime is the same as execution time. Run-time errors occur while the macro is playing. Referencing a variable that has not been assigned a value causes a run-time error. Run-time error messages identify errors that occur while the macro plays and show where the errors occur. For users familiar with other programming languages such as Visual Basic or C++, the PerfectScript Debugger has many of the same features and buttons found in those language compilers.

Playing PerfectScript macros in Debug mode If you want to debug a PerfectScript macro, you must run it in Debug mode. For information about debug options, see “Using PerfectScript debug options” on page 542 and “Setting PerfectScript debugging breakpoints” on page 541.

To play a PerfectScript macro in Debug mode 1 Click Tools, Macro, Debugger.

540


2 Click Tools, Macro, Play. 3 Enable the PerfectScript Macro button, then choose the macro you want. 4 Click Debug, then choose one of the menu options. 5 Correct the errors using the macro editor you selected and the Contents text box for variable values.

Setting PerfectScript debugging breakpoints Use breakpoints to indicate locations in the macro where execution of the macro should be interrupted and suspended, and where the debugger should become active. While the macro executes statements, the Debugger is mostly inactive, and the Debugger state message line displays the text “Macro is running.” However, the Debugger is not completely disabled. You can interrupt the macro by clicking Break. This causes the Debugger to become active, as if there were a breakpoint at the point where the macro is currently executing. Breakpoint commands are also available while the macro is running, so that you can add and remove breakpoints. You can stop a macro at any line, .DLL call, or other place in the macro. The Debugger dialog displays the labels, functions, procedures, variables being passed, etc., so that you can check them. All breakpoints allow a message to be logged to the Debugger Event Log. The PerfectScript Debugger automatically creates three breakpoints: Macro Start, Macro End, and Error. It marks the breakpoints it adds with an exclamation mark (!), which can be removed if desired.

To specify where you want the Debugger to stop while playing a macro 1 Click File, Debug, Play. 2 Specify the macro you want to play with the Debugger. 3 When the Debugger dialog box opens, click Debug, Breakpoints, Edit. 4 Choose the type of breakpoint you want to use, then click the Add button. 5 Specify the options you want to use for the type of breakpoint you added, then click the Update button. Each type of breakpoint has different options; Press SHIFT+F1, then click a control for specific information. You can add a Line Number breakpoint by double-clicking the line in the macro source list where you want the macro to pause.

Using macros

541

Using PerfectScript debug options When the debugger stops at a macro statement, it stops before the indicated statement executes. The PerfectScript Debugger provides the following options to continue macro execution: Continue — continues executing the macro until the next breakpoint. Step Into — executes the next single statement. Step Over — executes the label or routine call without stopping until it has completed. This will stop the macro at the next statement in the current label or routine. Step Out — executes the macro until the next return is encountered, if you have entered a routine or label. Run to Cursor — executes down to the line under the mouse cursor in the macro source list. Skip to Cursor — skips a series of statements without executing them, or, if some statements need to be repeated, sets the next statement to be executed by the Debugger, without executing any statements between the current point and the new line. Animate — in this mode, the next Continue or Step command is repeated until you stop it, or until the macro ends. Between each command, the debugger is displayed for the amount of time you specify in the Settings dialog box. Use the Skip to Cursor option with extreme caution, since skipping to a line that is not within the same label or routine could cause the internal macro execution to become invalid, which will almost certainly result in execution failure.

Customizing application settings using macros As the application you create may affect standard settings on the desktop, it is a good idea to save and reset the user’s environment settings. You can include extra code in the macro to restore the original settings once the user exits the application. You can also update links to other notebooks and objects using linking parameters. You can customize macros using self-modifying (or dynamic) macro codes. Self-modifying macros either alter all or part of the macro when playing.

542


Saving and resetting application defaults When you develop a Quattro Pro application, it is usually best to store the user’s environment settings. If you create a custom application in Quattro Pro that changes a user’s environment settings, it is a good idea to include macro code that saves the user’s current settings and restores them when the user exits the application. Assuming that you have a spreadsheet called SETTINGS where these settings can be saved, you can save the current settings with the following macro commands: {LET SETTINGS:A1,PROPERTY(“Application.Display”)} {LET SETTINGS:A2,PROPERTY(“Application.International”)} {LET SETTINGS:A3,PROPERTY(“Application.Macro”)} {LET SETTINGS:A4,PROPERTY(“Application.File_Options”)} {LET SETTINGS:A5,PROPERTY(“Application.General”)}

To change the settings, you can use macro commands like the following: {Application.Display “None,Yes,Yes,Yes,A..B:A1..B2,Yes,Yes,Yes”} {Application.International “$, Quattro Pro, Prefix, Signed, ”"1,234.56 (a1,a2)"", MM/DD/YY (MM/DD), HH:MM:SS (HH:MM), Windows Default, English (American), No"} {Application.File_Options “H:\, QUATTRO.WB3, WB3, No, 20, Yes, Yes,Yes”} {Application.Macro “Both, No, Quattro Pro - DOS, \0"} {Application.General “Yes,No,Yes,No,500"}

Finally, to restore the settings, use these macro commands: {Application.Display +SETTINGS:A1} {Application.International +SETTINGS:A2} {Application.Macro +SETTINGS:A3} {Application.File_Options +SETTINGS:A4} {Application.General +SETTINGS:A5}

Using the active selection within a macro PROPERTY(“Active_Block.Selection”) returns the address of the currently selected cells as an address, and can be used within macro commands. The following macros set the print selection and create a named cell from the active cells: Print_Block {Print.Block PROPERTY(“Active_Block.Selection”)} Name_Blk {BlockName.Create TestBlk", PROPERTY(“Active_Block.Selection”)}

Using macros

543

Updating links with macros To pass linking parameters such as “Open Supporting,” “Update References,” or “None,” you must spell out the entire parameter in the {FileOpen} macro command, as follows: {FileOpen “TEST.WB3, ”Open Supporting"} {FileOpen “TEST.WB3, ”Update References"} {FileOpen “TEST.WB3, ”None"}

Creating self-modifying macros You can use macro commands and text formulas to create self-modifying macros (also called dynamic macros) that alter themselves while playing. For example, to save the active notebook as ACCTx.QPW, where x is a value stored in cell A5, enter the following text formula into a cell: +"{FileSaveAs “”ACCT"&STRING(A5,0)&".QPW""}“

The result of this formula plays as a macro command. For example, if cell A5 contains the value 5 in the previous example, Quattro Pro plays {FileSaveAs “ACCT5.QPW”}. If cell A5 changes to 10 and the notebook recalculates, Quattro Pro plays {FileSaveAs “ACCT10.QPW”}. You can also use macro commands to change a portion of the macro while it is playing. The next example shows a macro that uses {GET} to convert user keystrokes into macro actions: cell_typeb type_indic

{INDICATE UPPER(CELLPOINTER(“type”))}

{LET cell_type,cellpointer(“type”)} {IF cell_type="l"}{INDICATE LABEL} {IF cell_type="b"}{INDICATE BLANK} {IF cell_type="v"}{INDICATE VALUE}{GET next_key} {IF UPPER(next_key)="{ESC}“}{BRANCH clear_indic} next_key {Esc}{BRANCH type_indic} clear_indic {INDICATE}{QUIT}

You can use these concepts to create powerful macros that completely change themselves based on their environment.

544


USING OLE AUTOMATION WITH OLE OBJECTS

18

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is the process of inserting an object (for example, a file or graphic) created in one application into a file in another application. OLE capabilities within Quattro Pro allow you to import and export projects, objects, and graphics. You have the ability to integrate data and objects from the source application, usually referred to as the object, within another application that acts as a container for the object. For example, you can use Quattro Pro from within Lotus Notes as well as accessing some Lotus Notes data from within Quattro Pro. This version of Quattro Pro supports OLE 2.0, OLE 1.0, and DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange). OLE 2.0 allows the user to edit in-place objects as well as drag and drop objects across applications to move or copy them. Application developers can use Quattro Pro macro commands and other features to create and control OLE objects in other applications that support OLE automation as containers.

Link commands Link commands perform dynamic actions in response to actions that a user performs (events). For example, a control can be assigned a link command that initiates an object property when the control is clicked or displays additional controls. Events recognized by Quattro Pro include clicking Using OLE automation with OLE objects

545

right-clicking pressing a key entering a new value Link commands also let you connect a control to another control or a notebook cell. For a comprehensive list of link events, see “Understanding link events” on page 620. For information about attaching controls to other controls, see “Working with child controls” on page 630.

Using Quattro Pro with Lotus Notes Lotus Notes is a database application with messaging capabilities. Notes/FX (Notes Field Exchange) lets you embed a Quattro Pro notebook in a Lotus Notes field, using it to exchange data between the applications. Either application can use the data. To start communication between Quattro Pro and Lotus Notes, you must first create a Notes/FX field block in Quattro Pro. Once you create the block you can: Name the field block with a name recognized by Lotus Notes. Create a Lotus Notes database. Create a form with some or all of the information in the embedded Quattro Pro Notes/FX field. Create a Lotus Notes database view for displaying data entered in the embedded Quattro Pro Notes/FX field. Activate Notes/FX so that data entered in Quattro Pro displays in Lotus Notes view.

Setting up Notes/FX field blocks The Notes/FX feature uses a field block to determine how Lotus Notes exchanges data. The field block is defined in two columns of information or database cells. The first column lists the field names, which exchanges data with similarly named fields in Lotus Notes. The second column contains a field value or block reference. Here is an example of a field block:

546


The labels in A6..A9 are field names; B6..B9 contains field values.

There are three types of fields: data fields, predefined fields, and reference fields.

Data fields Data fields contain data from a Lotus Notes database. You can edit data fields in Lotus Notes. The data is always stored in Lotus Notes. In the example above, Author and Date are data fields. The following table illustrates the bidirectional fields used to share data between Quattro Pro and Lotus Notes: Quattro Pro property

Lotus Notes field and data type

Title

Title (text)

Subject

Subject (text)

Author

Author (text)

Keywords

Keywords help Notes categorize notebooks using keywords input in the Quattro Pro file properties (text)

Comments

Comments (text)

Predefined fields Predefined fields contain a calculated value, such as the size of a notebook or its creation date. In the example shown above, SizeInK is a predefined field. Here are the predefined fields supported by Quattro Pro with the related Notes fields and data types: Predefined cells or properties

Lotus Notes field and data type

SizeInK

SizeInK for size of the notebook embedded in Notes (number)

LastRevisionDate (or Last Saved)

LastRevisionDate (or LastSavedDate) (time)

Last Saved By

LastSavedBy (text)

Revision Number

NumberOfRevision (number)

Using OLE automation with OLE objects

547

Sheet Titles

SheetTitles are the custom names used in the notebook (text)

SizeInSheets

SizeInSheets are the number of sheets used in the notebook (number)

DocumentClass

DocumentClass is always set to “Notebook” and refers to the OLE class name of the embedded notebook (text)

Reference fields Reference fields are block coordinates that reference a block of data. In the above example, DataBlock is a reference field. You also reference this block of cells when naming the field block.

Creating a field block in Quattro Pro The first step in linking a Quattro Pro notebook with a Lotus Notes database is to set up a field block in Quattro Pro. This helps set the fields you want the Lotus Notes database to recognize as common to both applications.

To create a field block in Quattro Pro 1 Set up your data into two columns in a new notebook. 2 Name the field block. For information about naming the field block, see “Naming a Quattro Pro Notes/FX field block” on page 549. 3 Click File, Properties, then click the Summary tab. 4 Type the title in the Title box. For example, type Current Value. 5 Type a subject in the Subject box. For example, type Present Value Calculation. 6 Type keywords in the Keywords box. Separate keywords with a comma if they are used as field names in the field block. For example, type: payment, rate, period, result, author, date, datablock, and the name given to the field block. 7 Type a comment in the Comments box, then click OK. For example, type: This returns the value of an investment where Payment is invested for N periods of time at the rate of Rate per period (interest). 8 Click the Statistics tab, then click OK.

548


The information on this tab shows you the filename, where it is stored, the title, the creation date, date last saved, and revision number. 9 Click File, Save, then close Quattro Pro. For example, name the file QPTEST.QPW.

Naming a Quattro Pro Notes/FX field block The second step to connecting a Quattro Pro notebook with a Lotus Notes database is to name a cell in the field block. The cell name is used by Lotus Notes to find the field block. For information about creating Notes/FX field block, see “Creating a field block in Quattro Pro” on page 548.

To name a Quattro Pro Notes/FX field block 1 Select the field block (for example, A1..C9). 2 Click Insert, Name, Cells. 3 Type Notes Fields as the cell name, then click Add to create it. 4 Click the Close button.

Creating Lotus Notes databases Before you can create a form to embed a Quattro Pro notebook containing a Notes/FX field block, you must create a new database in Lotus Notes. For more information about working with Notes databases, refer to the online Help of the Lotus Notes application.

To create a Lotus Notes database 1 Launch Lotus Notes, click File, Database, New to create a database. 2 Do all of the following in the appropriate boxes on the New Database dialog: Choose Local in the Server list box Type a name for the database in the Title box Type a filename in the File Name box, then click the browse button to select a location other than the default Choose Blank in the template list 3 Click the OK button.


549

Embedding Quattro Pro notebooks in Lotus Notes Once you have created and named a field block, you can set up your Lotus Notes database to interact with Quattro Pro. For information about creating a database in Lotus Notes, see “Creating Lotus Notes databases” on page 549. A field block set up to calculate the present value of an item.

You must create a Notes form with an embedded rich text field which contains the Quattro Pro notebook containing the Notes/FX field block. The procedure below uses the following field block as an example: A field block set up to calculate the present value of an item.

To create a Lotus Notes form with an embedded Quattro Pro notebook 1 Double-click the database icon on the Lotus Notes workspace. 2 Click Create, Design, Form, then create the following edit fields with descriptors and properties which correspond to fields in the Notes/FX field block. Use the following data as an example: Payment (number, editable) Rate (number, editable) Period (number, editable) Result (number, editable) Author (author, editable) Comments (text, editable) Payment form (rich text field, editable) 3 With your pointer in the rich text edit field, click Create, Object. 4 Enable the Create An Object From File button, then click the Browse button to select the saved Quattro Pro file. This embeds the Quattro Pro file containing the Notes/FX field block into the rich text field that was created on the form. 5 Click Design, Form Properties, and do the following on the Launch tab:

550


Choose Quattro Pro 9 in the AutoLaunch list. Enable Creating, Editing, and Reading in the Launch When list if not already selected. 6 Do one of the following in the Hide When list on the Launch tab: Enable Creating, Editing, and Reading if you want Quattro Pro to launch automatically when activating the form. Disable these three items if you want the form to launch only when the Launch button on the activated form window is clicked. 7 Type a name for the form in the Form Name box on the Basics tab. For example, Current Values. 8 Press ESC, then click the Yes button to save the form. If you enable the Create A New Project button, a blank Quattro Pro spreadsheet gets embedded to allow you to create the Notes/FX field block at this time.

You can label an edit field with a descriptor by typing directly on the form next to where you want the edit field to display on the Lotus Notes form. You can create an edit field on a Lotus Notes form by clicking Create, Field or by clicking the Create Field SmartIcon on the SmartIcon toolbar. You can customize the appearance of the form (for example, changing the background color or font colors of labels). For information about making changes to the form, see the Lotus Notes online Help.

Creating a Lotus Notes view for embedded Quattro Pro fields Once you set up the form in Lotus Notes with fields configured to match those in the Notes/FX field block file, then you can create a view. In Lotus Notes, a view displays data from the database in a specified order. The columns you create display the data entered into a single field on a database form.

To create a Lotus Notes view for embedded Quattro Pro fields 1 Open the Lotus Notes database you created. 2 Click Create, Design, View, then specify a name for the view. For example, Current Values.


551

3 In the navigation pane, click View under the Design folder, then double-click the view. 4 Do one of the following: Click Create, Insert New Column — to insert a new column to the left of the default # column. Double-click on the column bar — to add a column to the right of the default # column. 5 Give the column the name of the first field on the form (for example, Payment). 6 At the bottom of the Design Pane, enable the Field button, and click Payment in the list of field names. 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 for the remaining form fields. 8 Press ESC, then click the Yes button to save the view. If there is only one view in a database, that view displays by default when you open the Lotus Notes database. To display a specific view when there are multiple views, select the view name in the Folders and View section of the navigation tree.

You can customize the view to display alternating colors for the database entries or display special fonts in column headings. For information about ways to customize a view, see the Lotus Notes online Help.

Activating Quattro Pro Notes/FX Before you can activate a Quattro Pro Notes/FX field block, you must make sure you have completed the following: Created a Notes/FX field block Named the Notes/FX field block Created a database and form in Lotus Notes where the Quattro Pro Notes/FX field gets embedded Created a view for viewing data entered in the embedded Notes/FX field Activating the Notes database form allows you to enter data in Quattro Pro that displays in the Lotus Notes database view.

552


To enter data in Quattro Pro Notes/FX 1 Launch Lotus Notes, and open the database you created in the “To create a Lotus Notes database” procedure. 2 Click Create, then click the name of the form you created. For example, click Current Values. 3 Do one of the following based on the options selected in step 6 of the procedure “Embedding Quattro Pro notebooks in Lotus Notes” on page 550 Click File, Open to open the file containing the Notes/FX field block if Quattro Pro automatically launches. Click the Launch button to launch Quattro Pro, then open the file containing the Notes/FX field block. 4 Enter new data next to the fields you created (for example, enter a new amount for Payment) in Quattro Pro. 5 Click File, Properties and type new information in the following fields: Title Subject Keywords Comments 6 Save the file, and click File, Exit to close Quattro Pro.

To close the Lotus Notes form after entering data in the Quattro Pro embedded field 1 In Lotus Notes, click the Close button in the upper right corner of the dialog to close the form window. 2 Press ESC, then click the Yes button to accept the changes when saving the latest information. If there is only one view in a database, that view displays by default when you open the Lotus Notes database. To display a specific view when there are multiple views, select the view name in the Folders and View section of the navigation tree.


553

Using OLE automation The OLE automation features let you create and manipulate objects in other applications that support OLE 2.0 automation as a container. Several Quattro Pro macros can help application developers initiate and conduct DDE exchanges, called conversations. Application developers can use Quattro Pro macro commands and other features to create and control OLE objects in other applications that support OLE automation as a container. OLE automation lets you operate another application from within Quattro Pro. For this to happen, an object model must be created for the automated application. In the case of a television, objects might represent the volume control, the power control, the channel selector, and various tuning controls for color quality and image centering. Properties are the settings used to control object appearance and other attributes, while methods are the actions you can perform with or on each object. OLE automation works through automation expressions created with macro statements. The process to follow for working with OLE automation and macros involves: Opening an application and creating a new object or getting an existing object Using macro commands and an application’s automation methods to set properties and perform other actions Closing the object and exiting the application To understand the structure of automation expressions, you need to know how certain terms are used for OLE automation in Quattro Pro. For information about automation terminology, see “Automation terms” on page 554.

Automation terms These terms are important for understanding OLE automation features. The terms are listed in order, from the most basic to the most complex. For the best understanding, read their definitions in order.

Automation objects An automation object represents all or part of an application that has been exposed for OLE automation. Most applications that support OLE automation as clients expose the main application object — for example, Visio.Application

554


or Excel.Application.

Automation objects have properties and methods that can be used to change the attributes of objects and act on them. To learn which objects are exposed for OLE automation, check the documentation accompanying the application.

Methods and collections Methods are associated with automation objects. Methods act on objects and usually return the result of the action. To learn which methods are available for each object, check the documentation for the application. A collection is a group of related automation objects, usually listed as a plural. For example, if MenuItem is an object, MenuItems could be a collection of all menu items. Like objects, collections can have their own sets of properties and methods.

Properties Properties are characteristics of an automation object that describe its current state — usually appearance or behavior. You can use methods to change some property settings. Other properties can be changed directly by specifying a different argument.

Values In OLE automation, a value can be a number a double-quoted string an automation object empty Values can be stored as variables and included in expressions.

Variables In OLE automation, a variable is a place to store a value. A variable can be a cell (used to store a string, a number, or nothing/empty) a member of an automation object a named variable (used to store values of any type — often automation objects — in contrast with cells, which can hold only strings and numbers)


555

Named variables Named variables are automation expressions created with the {ASSIGN} macro. They cannot be used in formulas directly, but can be used indirectly if you first assign them to a cell name or reference. For more information about using named variables with the {ASSIGN} macro, see “OLE automation and macros” on page 559. Named variables last as long as Quattro Pro is running. To delete one before closing Quattro Pro, use the {DELVAR} macro. When an expression is parsed names are first assumed to identify a cell, cells, then named variables. This means that a named variable cannot have the same name as a cell reference, a group of cells, or a cell name in the notebook that contains the currently executed macro. Otherwise, it is not accessible. The name of a named variable cannot contain any formula operators or leading or trailing spaces, although spaces within the name are acceptable.

Expressions An expression symbolizes a value or variable, depending on its use. An expression can be a string a number a cell (cell reference, cell coordinates, or cell name) the name of a named variable a formula expression (for information about syntax rules for entering functions, see “Working with spreadsheet functions” on page 139. an automation expression A value expression is an expression of a value. If an expression is used to express a value and it represents a variable, the value of the variable is returned. For example, if a value is expected from expression A1, the value stored in A1 is used. A variable expression is an expression of a variable. If an expression is used to express a variable and it represents a value, the value is converted to a cell or named variable if the value is a string. For example, +"A"&"1" results in a cell variable representing the cell reference A1.

Arguments An argument is information supplied to part of an automation expression — to a property, method, or formula.

556


Automation expressions An automation expression is an automation object (or object hierarchy) plus any associated property or method and arguments, if any. In its simplest form, the syntax is object.property or object.method. Because automation objects are usually found in hierarchies, members of successive hierarchical levels can be used to specify the exact target object. Elements of automation expressions are separated by periods — for example, Application.ActiveSheet(1) Range(“RangeName”).ClearContents

For more information about automation syntax details, see “OLE automation syntax” on page 557. Non-syntax errors in automation expressions can be trapped with the {ONERROR} macro command.

OLE automation syntax Automation expressions introduce OLE automation expressions and their basic syntax. The full syntax is Starting_object

or starting_object.member_cascade

where: starting_object is an object function or named variable that represents an object object function is CreateObject(args) or GetObject(args) member_cascade is member or object_member.member_cascade member is name or name(args) or [unquoted string] object_member is member representing an object args is empty or arg or arg, arg arg is a value expression (expression of a value) All OLE automation methods and properties can be included as member, usually at the end of an expression. A property or method without arguments can be used without parentheses.


557

The object connector, shown above as a period (.), is determined by the international setting for a decimal point. The list separator, shown above as a comma (, ) — as in arg, arg — is determined by the international separator character setting. For sample expressions derived from these definitions, see “OLE automation expression examples” on page 560. For more information about using CreateObject and GetObject, see “OLE automation object functions” on page 558. Quattro Pro does not support the use of automation expressions in formulas, although there is a way to accomplish the same thing. For information about using automation expressions in formulas, see {ASSIGN} in “OLE Automation and Macros” on page 559.

OLE automation object functions Quattro Pro uses two OLE automation object functions, GetObject and CreateObject, to create and retrieve objects from other applications and insert them in notebooks. These functions perform different tasks depending on the arguments used with them and the application that provides the objects. Both functions accept the progID argument, which is a programmatic identifier registered by an application during its installation — for example, Excel.Application or Visio.Application. These object functions can be used in OLE automation expressions within Quattro Pro macros.

CreateObject CreateObject(progID) locates the target application, loads it, creates an object, and returns the object. The application can be loaded only if its path is registered or specified in PATH. For example, CreateObject(“Visio.Application”)

returns a Visio graphics object. This object function is not the same as the macro {CREATEOBJECT}.

GetObject This object function retrieves an existing object from somewhere, depending on the given arguments: GetObject(filename) — returns an object from the specified file. The filename should be fully qualified with path and extension. GetObject loads the application that can open the file and returns an object from the file to the active notebook. If filename identifies a specific object, such as “c:\excel\a.xls!a1:b10" GetObject returns an object represented by A1:B10 in that file.

558


GetObject(filename, progID) — loads the specified application and returns the specified file. Although this expression seems to work like GetObject(filename), it can return objects, such as charts, that the other expression cannot access. For example, GetObject(“c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1", ”Excel.Application") returns a Microsoft Excel chart automation object, but GetObject(“c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1") fails. GetObject(, progID) or GetObject(“”, progID) — GetObject(“chart 1", ”Excel.Application") returns the active object of the specified application. For example, the expression returns chart 1 from the active Microsoft Excel notebook. GetObject(object_name) — locates an embedded automation object inside Quattro Pro. All of the following syntax expressions are acceptable: GetObject(“object”) GetObject(“page:object”) GetObject(“[notebook]page:object”) GetObject(“[]page:object”)

If GetObject(object_name) fails, try GetObject(filename). CreateObject and GetObject expressions work with the {ASSIGN} macro to create a named variable that refers to the returned object. For example, the following macro expression creates the variable Chart1 that represents the returned object: {ASSIGN Chart1, GetObject(“chart 1", ”Excel.Application")}

OLE automation and macros These macro commands directly support OLE automation in Quattro Pro: Command

Definition

{ASSIGN}

Assigns a value to a variable. If you use {ASSIGN} to create a named variable, the variable exists until you exit Quattro Pro. To delete a variable before exiting, use {DELVAR VarName}.

{DELVAR}

Deletes the named variable VarName and frees any object assigned to that variable.

{EXECAUTO}

Evaluates one or more automation expressions, but drops any returned values from expressions.

{GETLABEL}

Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as a label in VariableExpression.


559

{GETNUMBER}

Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as a numeric value in VariableExpression.

{IFAUTOOBJ}

Checks to see whether the ObjectExpression is an OLE automation object before continuing with the macro.

{SETLCID}

Sets the locale ID (local ID in PerfectScript) in to the default locale ID or to one specified by LocaleID. The locale ID is a fixed number which specifies language, separator character, and a variety of other international settings; use {SETLCID} to ensure that the automation controller is using the default ID or the ID of a specific target object.

Because macro command arguments are value expressions, you can pass an automation expression as an argument to any macro command. For example, if calc.accum represents the accum value of the calc named variable, and excel.ActiveCell.Value represents the current value of the Microsoft Excel ActiveCell object, then both these macros are valid: {DOWN calc.accum} {DOWN excel.ActiveCell.Value}

Quattro Pro does not support the use of automation expressions in formula expressions. So, the following macros are invalid: {IF named_variable>0} {do something} {LET A2, named_variable+A1} {IF named_variable.member>0}

To solve this problem, first assign the value of an automation expression to a cell, then use that cell in a formula expression: {ASSIGN A1, named_variable} {IF A1>0} {do something}

OLE automation expression examples OLE automation expressions are used within Quattro Pro macros to perform OLE automation tasks. Automation expression syntax defines acceptable syntax for OLE automation expressions. The following are acceptable expression forms: named_variable CreateObject(progID) /where progID is the program identifier registered for an application during its installation/ GetObject(filename and/or progID) named_variable.member

560


named_variable.member1.member2(arg1, arg2) named_variable.member1(arg1, arg2).member2

For more information about automation syntax expressions, see “OLE automation syntax” on page 557. OLE automation objects, properties, and methods can be included as members of the expression; properties and methods usually occur at the end of the expression. For more information on named variables, see Named Variable in “Automation terms” on page 554. For information about using CreateObject and GetObject in automation expressions, see “OLE automation object functions” on page 558.

OLE automation macro examples This topic includes examples that show how automation expressions are used within macros to work with objects in other applications. The automation expressions execute in the background of the application. For example, the following macro opens the Microsoft Excel file, TEST.XLS, and saves it as TEST2.XLS: {ASSIGN Test, GetObject(“c:\excel\test.xls!C2:C6")} {EXECAUTO Test.SaveAs(“c:\excel\test2.xls”)} {ASSIGN File, GetObject(“c:\excel\test2.xls”)} {ASSIGN Myrange, File.Range(“Myrange”)} {IFAUTOOBJ Myrange}{LET G39, “New”}{RETURN} {LET G39, “Empty”}

If you try to assign another variable to TEST2.XLS without using {DELVAR} to delete the variable File, which represents TEST2.XLS, you are prompted that TEST2.XLS already exists and is open. The following macro opens the graphics application Visio, creates a new file, draws a rectangle in the workspace, saves the file, then exits Visio: {ASSIGN VisioApp, CreateObject(“Visio.Application”)} {IFAUTOOBJ VisioApp}{EXECAUTO VisioApp.Documents.Add(“”)} {EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActivePage.DrawRectangle(1, 7, 5, 10)} {EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActiveDocument.SaveAs(TestFile)} {EXECAUTO VisioApp.Quit()}

TestFile is the cell name of a cell containing this string: C:\DATA\OLE2\VISIAUTO.VSD. The macro statement that saves the active document as TestFile actually creates VISIAUTO.VSD in the specified directory.


561

The next macro names a variable Test, assigns zero to it, prompts for an entry other than zero, then stores it in Test: {ASSIGN Test, 0} {GETNUMBER “Enter a number other than 0:”, Test} {ASSIGN VariableValue, Test} {DELVAR Test} {IF VariableValue<>0}{LET A1, “PASS”}{RETURN} {LET A1, “FAIL”}

After assigning the value in Test to VariableValue (the name of a cell), and deleting Test, it evaluates VariableValue and determines whether Test received a new value that was assigned to VariableValue. For information about named variables, see “Automation terms” on page 554. For information about using CreateObject and GetObject in automation expressions, see “OLE automation object functions” on page 558.

Using macro syntax and arguments Macro commands, like functions, have specific grammatical rules, or syntax. The syntax for macros is: {COMMANDNAME Argument1, Argument2, Argument3...}

COMMANDNAME is the exact name of the command. Arguments are values providing instructions to the command. Not all macro commands require arguments, but when they do, they require a specific type of information. The following examples are in Quattro Pro script form. To use them in PerfectScript, modify these in your PerfectScript code accordingly. For information about converting Quattro Pro script to PerfectScript, see “Choosing a macro creation tool” on page 490. Some examples of macro commands are: {Query.Criteria_Table B27..B29} {BlockCopy A1, A2..A37} {Search.Find “3rd Quarter Profits”} {BEEP 3} {GETNUMBER “How old are you?”, AGE} {CONTENTS E15, F15, 15}

Many command equivalents contain a period (.) in their command name. The syntax rules for Quattro Pro macro commands are as follows: You must enter the entire macro command in a single cell. You can enter the command in uppercase or lowercase.

562


The command must begin and end with braces { }. There must be a space between the command name and the first argument. For example, {GETNUMBER"Number?", A1} results in a syntax error; {GETNUMBER “Number?”, A1} works correctly. Separate multiple arguments with commas. To use semicolons or periods as separators instead, change the setting in Tools, Settings, International, Punctuation. Arguments must be the correct type (for example, number, string, location, or condition). If a string is required, the argument must be a valid character string; otherwise, a syntax error occurs. If an argument contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in quotation marks. For example, {GETLABEL “Hello, world”, A4}

is allowed, but {GETLABEL Hello, world, A4} is not. You can include more than one macro command in a cell. For example, {BEEP}{GETLABEL “Hello, world”, A4}{QUIT}

Because macro commands are labels, a syntax error is not recognized when you mistype a macro command; an error occurs instead when you try to play (or run) the macro. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the format of macro commands as you enter them and record macros whenever possible. For information about formats for macro command arguments, see “Using macro command arguments” on page 563. For information about converting Quattro Pro macro syntax to PerfectScript syntax, see “Choosing a macro creation tool” on page 490.

Using macro command arguments Arguments in macro commands require specific information to be supplied with the command. There are four types of arguments: numbers, strings, locations, and conditions.

Number arguments Number arguments require any numeric value, entered as an actual number (such as 2 or 0.45) a formula resulting in a number (such as A3*15) a cell address or named cell containing a numeric value or formula (such as C10, where C10 contains a valid number or formula)


563

String arguments String arguments require a text string, entered as an actual string in quotation marks (“Quattro Pro”). a reference to a cell or named cell containing a label. a comma-separated list of property or command equivalent settings, enclosed in quotation marks (for example, “Currency, 2"). If a setting in the list usually requires a single quotation mark, enter two quotation marks (for example, ”Prefix, “”Windows Default"", No"). If a setting contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in two sets of quotation marks. a formula resulting in a label, such as UPPER(“hello”).

Location arguments Location arguments require a reference to a cell or cells. The reference can be a cell name selections referencing one or more cells; for example, A1, A1..A4 or A..B:C4..D22 the relative reference of cells; for example, []C(0)R(0), []P(-2):C(0)R(22), or []C(0)R(0)..C(3)R(10) coordinates for noncontiguous selections, enclosed in parentheses; for example, (A1, B1..B7, C1..C7) or (A1, B:C27..C52) a label or text formula resulting in any of the above options; for example, +"A"&"2" which results in A2

Condition arguments Condition arguments require a logical expression. A logical expression is a formula that can be evaluated as either true or false, for example, +C4 > 500. Some commands accept a combination or choice of argument types. For example, {LET} stores either a label or a number in a cell, depending on the argument type.

564


Unlike functions, cell references in macros are not updated when the macro is copied. So, if you move the contents of a cell, or insert or delete a row or column, the macro reference might be wrong. For this reason, use cell names whenever possible. Quattro Pro updates cell names to reference the correct location.

Using macro subroutines A subroutine is a macro stored separately from macros that use it. You name the subroutine the same way macros are named. You can call the subroutine from another macro, and Quattro Pro plays the subroutine’s macro commands. After playing the subroutine, the command immediately following the call (in the main macro) plays. Using subroutines makes the macro more readable and easier to debug. To call a subroutine from within a macro, type its name inside braces. For example, {go_right} calls the subroutine named go_right. You can pass arguments to a subroutine for use by its commands. These arguments are stored in cells referenced by the subroutine. For example, {set_cost C10, 36} calls the subroutine set_cost and passes two arguments (C10 and 36) to it. For a subroutine to know what to do with the arguments, you must define them within the subroutine using {DEFINE}.This macro command tells Quattro Pro where to store the arguments and whether they should be interpreted as values or labels. Whenever you call a subroutine, Quattro Pro stores the return point in an internal list called a stack. One return point in this stack clears when the subroutine encounters a {RETURN} command or empty cell. If you do not clear all of these locations, the stack fills up, causing the error “Too Many Nesting Calls”. The {BRANCH} command can move to or return from any cell in a macro. Use {BRANCH} instead of a subroutine when a macro does not need to pick up where it left off after calling the subroutine needs to return to a different point in the macro than the point directly following the subroutine call calls the main macro as a subroutine

Using command equivalents Command equivalents perform operations usually done with menus or dialog boxes. Options usually set in a dialog box are passed as arguments to a Using OLE automation with OLE objects

565

command equivalent, in the same manner as passing them to a subroutine. Command equivalents make macros easier to read and understand, and let the macro play in any Quattro Pro menu system. Menu choices with many settings (such as File, Print) have a set of command equivalents that emulate their operation. The following example shows a macro that emulates Edit, Find And Replace: search_string

Fri

\s {GETLABEL “Search For? ”, +search_string} {Search.Reset} {Search.Block “”} {Search.Find +search_string} {Search.ReplaceBy +search_string} \n {Search.Next}

Notice that each command equivalent sets one option in the Edit, Find And Replace dialog box. You do not have to set each option every time. If one of the command equivalents is omitted, the default setting is used. The final command ({Search.Next}) performs the Find operation. You can use command equivalent names with COMMAND to find current settings. For example, COMMAND(“BlockFill.Series”) returns the current setting of Series in Edit, Fill, Fill Series. Menu choices with a few settings have one command equivalent that emulates their operation. Command equivalents without a period are typically of this type. When you specify a command equivalent with a question mark (?) after the command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the user can manipulate. If the name of the command equivalent contains a period, use only the part of the command name that precedes the period. For example, {BlockFill?} displays the Edit, Fill, Fill Series dialog box for the user to manipulate. When the user clicks OK, the fill occurs and the macro resumes. When you specify a command equivalent with an exclamation mark (!) after the command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the macro can manipulate. You can make the dialog box revert to user control at any point in the macro using the command {PAUSEMACRO}. The next example shows a macro that uses {PAUSEMACRO} and {RestrictInput} to display a small form for the user to enter a name and phone number: new_name Nick Piercherd new_phone(804) 555-2315 get_record

{BLANK A:E28..E29}

{RestrictInput.Enter A:D28..F29}

566


{PAUSEMACRO} {IF #NOT@ISSTRING(E28)}{RETURN} {IF #NOT@ISSTRING(E29)}{RETURN} {LET new_name, E28} {LET new_phone, E29}

Make sure that a dialog box is displaying or that Quattro Pro is in INPUT or FIND mode when the macro command plays {PAUSEMACRO}. Otherwise, the macro waits until it is stopped by CTRL+Break.

Using DDE macro commands Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) lets Window applications communicate with one another. Use {INITIATE} to open a channel of communication with another application. This is called initiating a conversation. Every DDE conversation consists of a client and a server. The application initiating the conversation is the client; the other application is the server. When you initiate a conversation, you can use {POKE} to send data, {REQUEST} to receive data, or {EXECUTE} to play macros in the server, {TERMINATE} ends the conversation. The data source that a DDE conversation connects with in the server application is called a topic. Many DDE applications support the topic system and items available from it. Other DDE applications can call Quattro Pro as their server. To do so, use the server name “QPW” and specify “System” or the filename of an open notebook as the topic. When a notebook is the topic, you can enter cell addresses or coordinates as the item to request, or play macro commands. When system is the topic, you can play Quattro Pro macros or request the items listed in the following table: Item

Returns

SysItems

A list of the items you can request from system.

Topics

A list of topics currently available from the server application.

Status

The current status of the application. In Quattro Pro, this is the text of the Application Bar indicator (READY, WAIT, LABEL, etc.).

Formats

A list of Clipboard formats supported by the application.

Selection

The coordinates of the active cells.

To play macro commands in Quattro Pro using DDE, establish a link to Quattro Pro using “QPW” as the DDE topic. To play PerfectScript macro Using OLE automation with OLE objects

567

commands in Quattro Pro using DDE, establish a link using “QPMacros” as the DDE topic. Then use the EXECUTE command provided by your DDE client application to play the command. You can also request any property from Quattro Pro. The property must be enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks, for example, “(Application.Display).” Play Quattro Pro macros from other applications using DDE.

Using object macro commands Object macro commands can create Quattro Pro objects, change their property settings, or move them to new positions. Object commands can create three types of objects: drawn objects dialog controls floating objects

Drawn objects Drawn objects are objects in a chart window that you usually create using the toolbar. When creating a drawn object with a macro command, specify the position for the object by stating how far (how many pixels) it should appear from the upper-left corner of the chart background. (A pixel is the smallest dot that Windows can display on your screen.) You can create drawn objects with {CREATEOBJECT}. The following command activates a chart window and creates a line near the upper-left corner of the chart: {GraphEdit “PROFITS”} {CREATEOBJECT “Line”, 0, 0, 25, 25}

Dialog controls Dialog controls are objects in a dialog window. When creating a dialog control using a macro command, specify the position by stating how far (how many pixels) it should appear from the upper-left corner of the dialog window. You can create dialog controls with {CREATEOBJECT}. For example, the following command creates a push button in the active dialog window: {CREATEOBJECT “Button”, 43, 41, 58, 77}

568


Floating objects Floating objects are Form Control buttons and charts that appear on the spreadsheet. Unlike chart objects and dialog controls, the position of a floating object is specified as an offset from a cell in the notebook. The offset is specified in twips; each twip is 1/1440th of an inch. You can create floating objects with {FLOATCREATE}. For example, the following macro command creates a button that is half an inch from the left edge of A:A1: {FLOATCREATE “Button”, A:A1, 720, 0, A:B2, 720, 360, “Bt1"}

In this example, A:A1, 720, 0 specifies that the upper-left corner of the button is in A:A1, is 720 twips (half an inch) from the left side of the cell, and is zero twips from the top of the cell. A:B2, 720, 360 specifies that the lower-left corner of the button is in A:B2, 720 twips from the left side of A:B2, and a quarter inch (360 twips) from the top of A:B2. After you create an object with a macro command, use {SETPROPERTY} to set its name or {GETPROPERTY} to store its name in a cell. Then you can change its properties with macro commands at any time.

Selecting, positioning, and sizing objects Dialog controls and floating objects are selected after you create them, so you can reposition them or change their property settings. There are three commands that select Quattro Pro objects: {SELECTBLOCK}— selects cells. {SELECTOBJECT}— selects chart objects or dialog controls. When a chart object or dialog control is selected, you can use {MOVETO} and {RESIZE} to move and resize it. {SELECTFLOAT}— selects a floating object. When a floating object is selected, you can use {FLOATMOVE} and {FLOATSIZE} to move and resize it.

Changing or reading property settings You can use {SETPROPERTY} and {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} to change the property settings of Quattro Pro objects. For example, the following macro selects cells and changes their text color: {SELECTBLOCK A:A1..C22} {SETPROPERTY “Text_Color”, 5}

You can also change a property setting without selecting the cells using the following command: {SETOBJECTPROPERTY “A:A1..C22.Text_Color”, 5}


569

You can use {GETPROPERTY} and {GETOBJECTPROPERTY} to read property settings. {GETPROPERTY} reads settings of the selected object; {GETOBJECTPROPERTY} lets you read property settings without selecting an object.

570


CREATING CONTROLS ON THE SPREADSHEET

19

You can attach form controls to your spreadsheet. These controls make your spreadsheet an interactive part of the UI (user interface). Form controls let users choose from list boxes or enable check boxes and buttons. These selections automatically display on the spreadsheet. When you create a form control, you can activate it to behave in a specific way. You customize the appearance and behavior of the controls by setting control properties. Because form controls are located on the spreadsheet they are also known as spreadsheet controls. In addition to creating controls using the Insert, Form Control menu option, Quattro Pro provides three other tools for creating controls: Quattro Pro macros lets you record macros and add form controls to the spreadsheet. For more information about recording macros, see “Working with Quattro Pro macros” on page 492. Dialog Designer lets you create custom dialog boxes with dialog controls. These dialog controls look similar to form controls, but their configuration properties are different. Dialog controls only exist in dialog boxes and cannot be placed directly on the spreadsheet. For information about working with dialog controls, see “Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls” on page 579. Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) lets you create customized controls, and applications. For information about working in Visual Basic for

Creating controls on the spreadsheet

571

Applications, see “Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with Quattro Pro” on page .

Working with controls on the spreadsheet You can add form controls to a spreadsheet. For example, you can add a button that displays a chart or jumps to a Web site, or create a list box to display selected data on the spreadsheet. You can add the following form controls to a spreadsheet: Control

Description Button — performs a specific action when clicked Check Box — provides two choices: Yes when enabled and No when disabled Radio Button — typically used in a mutually exclusive list where only one radio button can be selected at a time Group Box — usually contains other controls, such as radio buttons or check boxes List Box — lets a user type values or browse values using a scroll bar Combo Box — creates a list box that a user can make choices from Label — allows you to add static text near a control Scroll bar — lets a user choose values by clicking arrows Spin Control — lets the user choose a value by typing or by clicking arrows and selecting a value Edit Box — lets a user type text

If you add a control from the Dialog Controls flyout on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar, you may find that the following controls cannot be added to the spreadsheet: color control, bitmap button, rectangle control, timer control, and tab control. For more information about these controls, see Dialog box controls in the Reference section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

572


Adding buttons and other form controls to spreadsheets You can add a form control to your spreadsheet using the Form Control commands in the insert menu. The way controls are activated varies depending on the action they incur. When you specify a source block to appear in a control (for example, a list box), each row in the block you specify becomes one item in a list. If you want to make a control functional, you must specify the appropriate information in a different area depending on the controls: Control

Tab in the properties dialog:

Button

Macro

Radio button

Macro

Check box

Macro

Group box

Label text

List box

Destination Block or Source Block

Combo box

Destination Block or Source Block

Scroll bar

Destination Block, Settings

Spin control

Destination Block, Settings

Label control

Label text

To add buttons and other controls 1 Click Insert, Form Control. 2 Choose a control from the submenu that appears. 3 Drag the control to the spreadsheet. 4 Right-click the control, then click Properties.

Specifying spreadsheet data for form controls Each row of the source block becomes one item in a list box or combo box. If a destination block is assigned, it displays the user’s selection from the list. For example, if you have a source block naming the days of the week (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, etc.) and select Tuesday in the list, the destination block displays Tuesday.

To specify data to appear in a list box or combo box 1 Create a control on the spreadsheet. 2 Right-click the control, then click Properties.

573


3 Click Destination Block. 4 Specify the cells that contain the data you want to appear in the control.

Attaching a macro to a form control You can attach a macro to a form control that runs a macro when the user activates the control. For example, a user can click a button that runs a macro to perform a calculation. You can attach a macro to all form controls except group boxes and labels. For information about creating macros, see “Using macros” on page 489.

To attach a macro to a spreadsheet control 1 Right-click a control on the spreadsheet. 2 Click Properties. 3 Click the Macros tab. 4 Type the macro command name in the Enter Macro box. Enclose the command name with braces {} .

Attaching form controls to a Web site You can link form controls to the Internet by specifying the URL site to link World Wide Web (http), gopher, and ftp sites. For example, a button can launch a browser linked to a Web site. Internet files are opened for read-only access. You cannot save files to the Internet. For information about using Quattro Pro notebooks with the Internet, see “Working with the Internet” on page 709.

To attach a form control to a Web site 1 Right-click a form control on the spreadsheet. 2 Click Properties, and then click the Macro tab. 3 Click the Link To URL button. 4 Type the URL address in the URL box.

Displaying dialog boxes from form controls You can link a custom dialog box to a form control, so that when a user executes a macro, the specified dialog box displays.

574


To display a dialog box from a form control 1 Right-click the control, then click Properties. 2 Click the Macro tab, then click the Execute Dialog button. 3 Choose a dialog box from the Active Dialog list. 4 Do one of the following in the Result Cell box: Type a cell reference. Use the Pointer button to select a cell reference. 5 Do one of the following in the Values Range box: Type a cell reference. Use the Pointer button to select a cell reference.

Customizing and managing controls on the spreadsheet You can change and manage form controls through the form control properties. You can change the visual appearance of the control by customizing the border around the control or modifying the label that displays with the control. You can also change the object name, enable or disable control protection, and set the print options.

Changing form control borders You can change the border of form controls. This lets you change the color, width, and shadow properties associated with a control.

To change the border color of a form control 1 Right-click a control on the spreadsheet, then click Properties. 2 Click the Border Color tab. 3 Click a color on the on-screen Color Palette.

To change the width of a border around a form control 1 Right-click a control on the spreadsheet, then click Properties. 2 Click the Box Type tab. 3 Enable one of the following buttons in the Box Type section: None — displays no border around the control (default box type for radio button, check box, and label)


575

Thin — creates a thin border around the control (default box type for all other controls) Medium — creates a medium border around the control Thick — creates a thick border around the control 4 Enable the Drop Shadow check box if you want to create a shadow behind the control.

Labeling form controls When you add a form control to a spreadsheet, Quattro Pro assigns it a default object name in the format ControlName1, ControlName2, etc. The default object name is the control label. You can customize the label name to better describe its role in the spreadsheet. The following form controls have labels: buttons check boxes radio buttons group boxes labels edit boxes For the controls that do not have labels (list boxes, combo boxes, scroll bars, and spin controls), you can add a label control next to the original control. If you want a label to appear on the spreadsheet near the control, you must add it to the spreadsheet as a separate control.

To change a form control’s label 1 Double-click the control on the spreadsheet. 2 Click the Label Text tab. 3 Type a new label in the Enter Text box.

To add a label next to a form control 1 Click Insert, Form Control, then choose a control. 2 Do one of the following: Click the spreadsheet to create a control in the default size at that location. Drag the control to the desired size.

576


3 Click Insert, Form Control, Label. 4 Drag the label to the spot near the control you want to describe. 5 Right-click the label, then click Properties. 6 Click the Label Text tab. 7 Type the label you want to add in the Enter Text box.

Changing the object name of form controls The object name is the name used to reference the form control in macros, link commands, and in spreadsheet functions. You can change the object name of a form control the same way you change the object name of other OLE objects.

To give a form control a new object name 1 Right-click a form control, then click Properties. 2 Click the Object Name tab. 3 Type a new name in the Object Name box.

Unprotecting form controls You can enable or disable control protection. Enabling control protection prevents a control from being changed or deleted by other users when protections have been set at the sheet level. For information about protecting spreadsheets and cells, see “Protecting data” on page 162.

To unprotect a form control on a spreadsheet 1 Right-click the control, then click Properties. 2 Click the Protection tab. 3 Do one of the following in the Object Protection section: Enable the Locked check box to prevent users from altering the control Disable the Locked check box to allow users to alter the control

Printing a spreadsheet without printing form controls You can print a spreadsheet, without printing the form control. For information about printing objects on spreadsheets, see “Printing” on page 471.


577

To print a spreadsheet without printing a form control 1 Right-click the form control, then click Properties. 2 Click the Print tab. 3 Disable the Print Object check box.

578


CREATING CUSTOM DIALOG BOXES AND FORM CONTROLS

20

Quattro Pro lets you attach dialog controls to your dialog boxes create custom dialog boxes in your application. A dialog box is a box that contains controls, such as check boxes and edit fields. These controls let users add data to the notebook. You can attach dialog boxes to menu items and toolbars using macros or to spreadsheet form controls. When users click the menu item, a macro toolbar button, or spreadsheet form control, the dialog box appears. Quattro Pro provides a complete set of tools for creating dialog box controls. When you create a dialog box or form, you can add controls and then activate them to behave in a specific way. You customize the appearance and behavior of the dialog box and its controls by setting control properties and linking the controls to macro link commands. Quattro Pro also contains two other tools for creating controls and dialog boxes: Form controls — lets you add form controls to a spreadsheet. Form controls look similar to dialog controls, but their configuration properties are different. For information about working with form controls, see “Creating controls on the spreadsheet” on page 571. Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) — lets you create customized controls, and applications. For information about working in Visual Basic for Applications, see “Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with Quattro Pro” on page .

Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls

579

Developing a dialog box Quattro Pro lets you create custom dialog boxes for your notebooks. Dialog boxes are saved with the notebook they are created in. You can copy them to other notebooks. You can add controls to your dialog boxes. When you add a control to a dialog box, it is inactive. For example, list boxes do not contain information and check boxes are not linked to anything. Activating a control involves: setting control properties linking the control to a macro or to another control When a macro activates a control, it becomes a button, check box, or other UI feature. For information about activating controls, see “Attaching actions to dialog controls” on page 617.

Creating a dialog box You can create customized dialog boxes using the Dialog Designer. Dialog boxes are stored on the Objects sheet. You can double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet to edit it. For more information about editing dialog boxes, see “Editing dialog boxes” on page 637.

To create a dialog box 1 Click Tools, Macro, Dialog Designer. 2 Right-click the dialog box background, click Dialog Properties, then click Name. 3 Type a name in the Enter Text box to appear in the title bar. Use this name with macros, links, and formulas. 4 Right-click the dialog box background, click Dialog Properties, then click Title. 5 Type the title the user will see and click OK. 6 Do one of the following: Click the button icon to display the Dialog Controls flyout on the Property Bar to add controls, choose a control, then drag on the dialog box. Click Insert, Form Control.

580


7 Click the control you want to add, drag the control onto the dialog box, then do one of the following: Right-click the control, then click Connect to connect the control to another control or a notebook cell (for example, enter control value into a cell). Right-click the control, then click Links to specify more complex actions for the control to perform. 8 Click the Test button to test the operation of each control. 9 Click the spreadsheet in the notebook, then click File, Save to save the notebook. The dialog box is saved with the notebook. You cannot perform a File, Save when creating a dialog box in the dialog designer. To deactivate the dialog box and activate the File, Save menu command, click the spreadsheet. Password protection rights can be assigned to controls and dialog boxes. For information about working with passwords, see “Using password protection” on page 703.

You can also create a dialog box on the Objects Sheet by clicking the QuickTab button, then clicking the New Dialog button. For information about the behavior of specific form controls, see “Understanding dialog controls” on page 581 and Dialog box controls in the online Help.

Understanding dialog controls Once you have named a dialog box and given it a title, you can add controls to it. Each control is best suited for presenting or receiving a certain type of information. Most controls display a setting and allow users to change the setting. The following Table describes the most common form controls: Control Button

Description Performs a specific action when clicked


581

Check Box

Provides two choices: Yes when enabled and No when disabled

Radio Button

Typically used in a mutually exclusive list where only one radio button can be enabled at a time

Group Box

Contains other controls, such as radio buttons or check boxes

List Box

Lets a user select data from a list

Combo Box

Lets a user add items to a list box

Label

Lets a user display text next to a control

Spin Control

Lets a user choose a value by typing or by clicking arrows and selecting a value

Edit Field

Lets a user type text

Vertical Scroll Bar

Lets a user select a value from a range of values

Horizontal Scroll Bar

Lets a user select a value from a range of values

Bitmap button

Lets a user display a bitmap on the button instead of a label and then imitates the behavior of a check box, radio button, or push button

Rectangle

Embellishes a dialog box or groups two or more controls

File Select Control

Lets a user choose a file name and a browse button with access to all available files.

Color Control

Lets a user change a color setting.

TAB Control

Lets a user create tabs on a dialog box

Timer Control

Lets a user add a timer, clock, or alarm to a dialog box.

For more information about the functions of form controls, see Dialog box controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

582


Adding controls to an existing dialog box You can add form controls after you create a dialog box. The Dialog Designer provides two default buttons: OK and Cancel. These buttons are not active until you activate them. For information about activating controls and buttons, see “Attaching actions to dialog controls” on page 617.

To add a control to an existing dialog box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Do one of the following: Click Insert, Form Control, then click a control. Select a control from the Dialog Controls flyout, then drag the control onto the dialog box. 3 Do one of the following: Right-click the control, then click Connect to connect the control to another control or a notebook cell (for example, enter a control value into a cell on the notebook) Right-click the control, then click Links to specify more complex actions that you want the control to perform 4 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click any option in the submenu that appears if you want to customize a control. The first several options on the Properties menu are specific to that control. All the properties from the Dimension property to the end of the menu are properties you can set for all controls. For information about specific form control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help. Add group boxes and rectangles first, then add the radio buttons or other controls inside them.

You can change the size of a control you add to a dialog box by selecting it, and dragging a handle.

Labeling a dialog box control You can add labels to dialog box controls to identify the purpose of each control. Some controls have a label text property that is used to display a label with the control (for example, buttons). For more information about Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls

583

control labels, see Dialog box controls in the online Help. For more information about control label property settings, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

To label a dialog box control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Label. 3 Click where you want the label. (Move the control if you need more room.) 4 Double-click the label, type the label text, and press ENTER. You can also add a label to a dialog box by clicking the tool on the Form Controls flyout, then drag the control onto the dialog box. If you want to change the properties of a label, see “Editing label text” on page 643.

Testing a dialog box You can test the dialog box and the form controls whenever a change is made to the dialog box. For example, test a new control after assigning properties or creating links for the control to see if the control activates in the manner intended. When in Test mode, the dialog box appears as the user sees it. In Test mode, you cannot activate any other windows to display as the active object unless you have configured a control in the dialog box to do so. For example, you can have a second custom dialog box displays only when you click a button on the first dialog box.

To test a dialog box 1 Do one of the following: Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. Select the active dialog box (if it is displayed but is not the active window.) 2 Click Dialog, Test 3 Do any or all of the following: Click any buttons

584


Choose data in list boxes, combo boxes, spin controls, or File Select controls Type data in edit fields Enable or disable check boxes and radio buttons 4 With each action done in step 3, notice if the control behaves in the way you have configured it (for example, if text typed in an edit field displays in a notebook cell.) You can also click the Test button on the Properties bar.

Adding dialog controls After you create a default dialog box, you can add dialog controls. You can add any of the following dialog controls to a dialog box. The procedure for assigning these controls differs from control to control. “bitmap buttons” on page 586 “buttons” on page 587 “check boxes” on page 588 “color controls” on page 588 “combo boxes” on page 589 “label controls” on page 590 “edit fields” on page 591 “file controls” on page 592 “group boxes” on page 592 “scroll bars” on page 594 “list boxes” on page 594 “radio buttons” on page 595 “rectangle controls” on page 596 “spin controls” on page 597 “TAB controls” on page 598 “timer controls” on page 599


585

Adding bitmap buttons A bitmap button displays a bitmap on the face of the button instead of a label. Bitmap buttons can imitate the behavior of all button types (for example, radio buttons or Cancel buttons.) Before you link actions to the bitmap button, you must assign a bitmap and a button-type to it. For information about assigning a button type, see “Assigning bitmap button properties” on page 600. There are two ways to display a bitmap on a bitmap button: Pasting a bitmap from the clipboard or by selecting a bitmap through the Bitmap property dialog box. For information about selecting a bitmap in the Bitmap property dialog box, see “Assigning bitmap button properties” on page 600.

To add a bitmap button 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Bitmap button, then drag the control onto the dialog box. 3 Right-click the button, move the cursor to Properties, then click Bitmap in the submenu that appears. 4 Do one of the following: Choose a system bitmap. Click the Browse button and specify a .BMP file. 5 Click OK to return to the dialog box. 6 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. For more information about control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

586


You can also create a control by clicking the Bitmap Button tool in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control. You can add a bitmap not in the list by copying a graphic to the clipboard. To paste a bitmap from the clipboard, right-click the bitmap button, then click Paste.

Adding buttons You can add buttons to forms that can execute a macro, link to a Web site, or activate another custom dialog box when the button is clicked. Buttons do not have a value (meaning buttons execute an event like Click instead of displaying a value that can be transferred to a cell on a spreadsheet or to another control.) A button can also imitate the behavior of an OK button or a Cancel button, allowing the button to close the dialog box. For information about setting this property for a button, see “Assigning button properties” on page 601.

To add a push button 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Button, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control. 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. For more information about control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

You can also create a button by clicking the Button tool in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control.


587

Adding check boxes You can add check boxes to a dialog box. Each check box displays next to a default label. The text that appears next to the button on the right and is stored in its Label Text property. You can also display a label to the left of the check box. For information about changing the display of a check box label, see “Assigning check box properties” on page 601. Check boxes present a Yes or No option to the user. The value of a check box is Yes when it is enabled and No when it is disabled.

To add a check box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Check Box, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control. 3 Right-click the button, move the cursor to CheckBox Properties, then click Label Text in the submenu that appears. 4 Type the label you want to display in the Enter Text box on the Label Text dialog box. 5 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. You can also add a check box by clicking the Check Box tool in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control. Another way to add the label text is to double-click the default label, then type text.

Adding color controls A color control lets a user choose a color or create a custom color.

To add a color control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Color Control, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control.

588


3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. For information about color control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

You can also add a color control by clicking the Color Control tool in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control.

Adding combo boxes Combo boxes (also called list boxes) are a type of list box that lets a user add items to a list. They consist of an edit field, a down arrow button, and a list box. The value of the combo box is the value of its edit field.

To add a combo box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Combo Box, then drag to create the control. 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform.

To specify a system list for a combo box 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure. 2 Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties, click List in the submenu that appears, then choose a list type from the list box.


589

To include cell contents in a combo box 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from “To add a combo box”. 2 Right click the combo-box, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties, then click List in the submenu that appears. 3 Double-click the edit field, then select a cell block on the spreadsheet. 4 Press ENTER, then click OK to close the List dialog box.

To paste a block of data into a combo box 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from “To add a combo box”. 2 Select a block of data on the spreadsheet. 3 Click Edit, Copy. 4 Click the combo box, then click Edit, Paste. When a user presses ENTER on a drop-down list item, it clicks the dialog box’s default button, which typically closes the dialog box. For information about disabling this feature, see “Setting a default button control” on page 615. For more information about control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

You can add a combo box by clicking the Combo Box tool in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control. Click the Test button to test the combo box. Click the down arrow to see the items.

Adding label controls You can add a label control to a dialog box. The label control lets you place text on the dialog box as a stand-alone feature or near a control that does not have a label (i.e. a rectangle control).

To add a label control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet.

590


2 Click Insert, Label, then drag to create the control. 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform.

To change the default label text 1 Select a label control on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the label, move the cursor to Label Properties, then click Label Text in the submenu that appears. 3 Type the text in the Enter Text box.

Adding edit fields Edit fields in dialog boxes let users add data. The input data can be characters, numbers, cell addresses, or can make the typed data hidden. When you specify Integer as the field type, the control is renamed to Edit Integer. For information about specifying the data type for an edit field, see “Assigning edit field properties” on page 603.

To add an edit field 1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet. 2 Click the Edit Field tool from the Form Control flyout on the Property Bar, then drag to create the control. 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell Click Links to specify the action to perform If you want to remove the box around an edit field, right-click the edit field, move the cursor to EditField Properties, click Show Frame in the submenu that appears, then click No. For more information about control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.


591

Adding file controls A file control consists of an edit field for entering filenames and a Browse button that displays a list of files on disk. From this list, the user can choose a filename, folder, and drive. For example, the value C:\FILES\QTRREP.WB3 means Drives is set to C: Directories is set to C:\FILES\ File Name is set to QTRREP.WB3 File Types is set to *.WB3 (if a wildcard is specified; otherwise, File Types is not affected by the value) The value of a file control determines the drive letter, folder, and filename that appear. Whenever a user views a different folder or uses a different filename, the change is reflected in the value of the file control. For information about displaying the Open or Save dialog box when a user clicks the Browse button, see “Assigning file control properties” on page 605.

To add a file control 1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, File Select Control, then drag to create the control. 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. You can also Click the File Control tool in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control. For more information about control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Adding group boxes A group box control acts as a container for other controls. Group boxes can contain radio buttons, check boxes, or buttons. These controls are considered

592


child controls of the group box. For information about child controls, see “Working with child controls” on page 630. Add a group box first, then add the radio buttons or other controls to the group box. You can use a group box to manage the controls it contains as a single unit. For example, when you move the group box on the dialog box, you also move the contents of the group box. When a group box contains radio buttons, its value is the title of the radio button chosen. By default, an empty group box does not have a value. A group box has a Value property and a Selected property. The Selected property indicates numerically which of its radio buttons is enabled, starting from the top-left radio button (zero) and proceeding to the bottom-right button. When you create a group box, the Process Value of a group box is set to Yes. The Process Values of radio buttons in the group box are set to No.

To add a group box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Group Box, then drag the group box onto the dialog box to create the control. 3 Click Insert, and choose the controls you want to add to the group box, then drag them onto the dialog box to create each control. 4 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. Another way to create a group box is to click the Group Box tool in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control. When you create a group box, you can automatically fill it with radio buttons. Click Insert, Group Box, then hold down CTRL while dragging the control onto the dialog box to an appropriate size. You can also paste a block from the Clipboard inside the group box. Each row of the block becomes a radio button. For information about control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.


593

Adding scroll bars The Dialog Designer features two scroll bar controls that you can add to a dialog box: a Horizontal Scroll Bar and a Vertical Scroll Bar. Scroll bars let you scroll through a list of data to make a data selection. The value of a scroll bar is an integer from a fixed range of integers. For a complete description about scroll bars, see Dialog box controls.

To add a horizontal or vertical scroll bar 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, then do one of the following: Click Vertical Scroll Bar, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control Click Horizontal Scroll Bar, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. Another way to create a scroll bar is to click the Horizontal Scroll Bar control or the Vertical Scroll Bar control in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control.

Adding list boxes A list box lists items which users can choose. The item that the user chooses becomes the value of the list box. By default, list box entries are sorted alphanumerically in ascending order.

To add a list box 1 Double-click a dialog box the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, List Box, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control. 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following:

594


Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform.

To specify a system list for a list box 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure. 2 Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, click List in the submenu that appears, then choose a list type from the list box.

To include cell contents in a combo box 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from “To add a combo box”. 2 Right click the combo-box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, then click List in the submenu that appears. 3 Double-click the edit field, then select a cell block on the spreadsheet. 4 Press ENTER, then click OK to close the List dialog box.

To paste a block of data into a combo box 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from “To add a combo box”. 2 Right click the combo-box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, then click List in the submenu that appears. 3 Select a block of data on the spreadsheet. 4 Click Edit, Copy. 5 Click the list box, then click Edit, Paste. Another way to create a list box is to click the List Box control in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control. For information about other list box control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Adding radio buttons Grouped radio buttons present a list of mutually exclusive choices to the user. Only one radio button can be selected. When radio buttons are on a dialog box, the radio buttons are still mutually exclusive. The dialog box acts


595

as a container for the radio button controls. When you want to use more than one set of radio buttons and have each set provide mutually exclusive choices on the same dialog box, place each set within a group box or rectangle. Add group boxes or rectangles first, then add the radio buttons or other controls inside them. By default, a radio button’s Process Value property is set to No, and the group box containing it has its Process Value property set to Yes. When the Process Value property of a radio button is set to Yes, a radio button has a value of Yes when enabled and No when disabled.

To add a radio button 1 Double-click a dialog box the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, radio button, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control. 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. Another way to add a radio button is to click the Radio Button control in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control. You can fill a group box with radio buttons by holding down CTRL and drag the group box onto the dialog box to the appropriate size. You can paste a block of data from the Clipboard, so that each row of the block becomes a radio button. For information about radio button control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Adding rectangle controls A rectangle control performs the same function as a group box control. A rectangle can be used to organize controls in a dialog box. Add rectangles first, then add the radio buttons or other controls inside them. Like group boxes, controls added to a rectangle become child controls. For information about child controls, see “Working with child controls” on page 630. Rectangles do not have a value.

596


To add a rectangle control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Rectangle, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control. 3 Click Insert and choose the controls you want to add to the rectangle, then drag each control onto the rectangle. 4 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. Another way to add a rectangle control is to click the Rectangle control in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control. For information about rectangle control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Adding spin controls A spin control is an edit field that lets users enter numeric data. A spin control has two arrows on its edge. The user can click an arrow to increase or decrease the value of the spin control, or type the value. The value of a spin control is always an integer.

To add a spin control 1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Spin Control, then drag to create the control. 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform.


597

You can also click the Spin control button in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control. For more information about spin control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Adding TAB controls A TAB control lets you organize settings in a notebook of controls. Clicking a TAB displays controls associated with that TAB. For information about creating additional TAB pages, see “Assigning TAB control properties” on page 610. For information about other TAB control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

To add a TAB control 1 Double-click a dialog box the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, TAB Control, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control. 3 Do one or both of the following: Double-click the TAB name to rename the TAB Click Insert, click a control, then drag it onto the TAB to add a control to the TAB 4 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform. Another way to add a TAB control to a dialog box is to click the TAB Control button in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control.

598


Adding timer controls You can use a timer control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a specified time of day. This is useful for creating toolbar controls that periodically retrieve current values from the active window. For information about setting timer control properties to convert a timer control into a clock, a timer, or an alarm, see “Assigning timer control properties” on page 611. For more information about timer control properties discussed in the following procedures, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

To add a timer control 1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet. 2 Click Insert, Timer, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the control. 3 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then do one of the following: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell. Click Links to specify the action to perform.

Assigning control properties You can use the properties connected to a dialog box control to dictate the appearance and behavior of the control. You can assign properties for a control by right-clicking it, then clicking Properties. The options on the Properties menu listed before the Dimension property are specific to that control. All the properties from the Dimension property to the end of the menu are properties you can set for all controls. For more information about specific properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Assigning properties to individual controls After you create a default dialog box, and add the dialog controls you can assign properties to each control. Some properties are common to all controls while others are control-specific. The procedure for assigning these properties differs from control to control. The following lists identifies the controls which contain control-specific properties. “bitmap buttons” on page 600 Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls

599

“buttons” on page 601 “check boxes” on page 601 “combo boxes” on page 601 “label controls” on page 603 “edit fields” on page 603 “file controls” on page 605 “group boxes” on page 606 “scroll bars” on page 606 “list boxes” on page 607 “radio buttons” on page 608 “rectangle controls” on page 608 “spin controls” on page 609 “TAB controls” on page 610 “timer controls” on page 611

Assigning bitmap button properties You can select a bitmap from the systems list or display a bitmap you have available from another source using the Bitmap properties dialog box. You can also assign a bitmap button a behavioral identity from the Button Type properties.

To change the bitmap 1 Right-click the button, move the cursor to Properties, then click Bitmap in the submenu that appears. 2 Do one of the following: Choose a system bitmap. Click the Browse button and specify a .BMP file. You can add a bitmap not in the list by copying a graphic to the clipboard. To paste a bitmap from the clipboard, right-click the bitmap button, then click Paste.

600


To select a button type for the bitmap button to imitate 1 Right-click the button, move the cursor to Properties, then click Button Type in the submenu that appears. 2 Click one of the following options: push button — the bitmap button imitates a push button radio button — the bitmap button imitates a radio button check box — the bitmap button imitates a check box OK exit button — the bitmap button imitates the OK button on the dialog box Cancel exit button — the bitmap button imitates the Cancel button on the dialog box

Assigning button properties A button can also imitate the behavior of an OK button or a Cancel button, allowing the button to close the dialog box.

To have a push button close the dialog box 1 Right-click the button, move the cursor to Properties, then click Button Type in the submenu that appears. 2 Do one of the following: Click OK Exit Button — to close the dialog with success saving changes to the dialog (returns a 1 value). Click Cancel Exit Button — to close the dialog as a failure without saving changes to the dialog (returns a 0 value).

Assigning check box properties You have the option of displaying a check box label to the left of a check box in addition to the default display (which displays the label on the right side.)

To display a check box label on the left Right-click the control, move the cursor to the CheckBox Properties, click Draw to Right in the submenu that appears, then click No.

Assigning combo box properties One of the variations possible is to configure the combo box to prevent a user from entering a value into the list. By default, combo box entries are sorted


601

alphanumerically in ascending order. You can set the combo box to display a history as the list of the combo box.

To remove the down arrow button Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties, click Add Down Button in the submenu that appears, then click No.

To prevent users from entering a value Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties, click Edit Disabled in the submenu that appears, then click Yes. [VentGraphic 0, ]

To store a history list of the entries that have been typed into its edit field in the combo box Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties, click History List in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.

To let users select cells by double-clicking in the edit field Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties, click Allow Point Mode in the submenu that appears, then click Yes. The Field Type property must be set to a Field Type other than Integer.

To order items in the order in which they are added to the list Right-click the combo box, click the ComboBox Properties, click Ordered Property in the submenu that appears, then click No. Setting Ordered Property to No does not reset the order of a list that has been sorted. In some cases, a limit on the number of characters users can enter into an edit field, combo box, or spin control is necessary.

To specify the maximum number of characters in an combo box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet.

602


2 Right-click the combo box control, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties, click Edit Length in the submenu that appears. 3 Type a number to indicate the maximum characters allowed in the Edit Length box.

Assigning label control properties You can use the default font in a label control, or you can change the label font through the Label Font properties. You can also change the word wrap features of the label and position of the text on the label.

To change the label font 1 Select a label control on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the label, move the cursor to Label Properties, then click Label Font in the submenu that appears. 3 Choose a new font style from the Face list box. 4 Choose a size for the font from the Size list. 5 Enable one or more of the following Appearance attributes: Bold — makes the label stand out Italics — emphasizes the label in a subtle way Underline — places a line under the label Strikeout — places a line through the middle of the label

To change the position of the text on a label 1 Select a label control on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the label, move the cursor to Label Properties, then click Text Draw Flags in the submenu that appears. 3 Enable one of the following options in the Text Draw Flags dialog box: Vertical Position — places the text vertically in relation to the label background Horizontal Position — places the text horizontally in relation to the label background

Assigning edit field properties The input data can be characters, numbers, cell addresses, or can make the typed data hidden. When you specify Integer as the field type, the control is renamed to Edit Integer. Default values for Edit Integer are 0 as the Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls

603

minimum value, 32,676 as the maximum value, and 0 as the initial (default) value in the edit field. You can configure the edit field to accept special characters, using the following chart for characters available: Special character

Result

\n

Displays following text on a new line

\t

Inserts a TAB

\\

Inserts a backslash (\) into the text

You can set an edit field so that users can double-click the edit field, then point to a cell or cell block on a spreadsheet to add the cell references to the edit field.

To specify the type of information the edit field can accept 1 Select the edit field on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the edit field, move the cursor to EditField Properties, click Field Type in the submenu that appears, then click an option to specify the type of information the edit field accepts: Integer — restricts user entry to integers String — accepts any text a user enters (including numbers) (Default) Real — accepts any number or formula Block — accepts only cell addresses or cell coordinates Hidden — accepts any text, but displays a pound sign (#) for each character instead of the actual character. For example, this is useful for users to enter a password

To change default Integer values in an edit field Right-click the edit field, click the EditField Properties in the submenu that appears, then click Minimum, Maximum, or Default.

To allow special characters (\n, \t, or \\)in the edit field 1 Right-click the edit field, then move the cursor to EditField Properties. 2 Click Convert Text in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.

604


The Convert Text property is valid only if you set a field’s value using a macro command or link, and not by typing it in the edit field. In some cases, a limit on the number of characters users can enter into an edit field, combo box, or spin control is necessary.

To specify the maximum number of characters in an edit field 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the edit field, move the cursor to EditField Properties, click Edit Length in the submenu that appears. 3 Type a number to indicate the maximum characters allowed in the Edit Length box.

To let users select cells on a spreadsheet by double-clicking in the edit field 1 Right-click the edit field, then move the cursor to EditField Properties. 2 Click Allow Point Mode in the submenu that appears, then click Yes. 3 Right-click the edit field, then move the cursor to EditField Properties. 4 Click Field Type in the submenu that appears, then select any field type except Integer.

Assigning file control properties You can use a predefined list to display in the File List control. When the user clicks the Browse button, the Quattro Pro Open File dialog box displays. If the Dialog Type property is set to Save, the Quattro Pro Save File dialog displays. You can also prevent users from typing in the file box.

To specify the list to appear in a file list 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to FileSelCtrl Properties, then click FileTypeList in the submenu that appears. 3 Choose a list type from the dialog box to use a predefined list, such as Fonts, DriveList, BitmapList, or BarExt


605

If you specify cells and the cell contents are changed after the List property has been set, the List settings will not be updated until the dialog box is opened again or an EXECUTE link command is used to refresh the list box.

To set the browse button to display the Open or Save dialog box 1 Select the file control on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the edit field, then move the cursor to FileSelCtrl Properties. 3 Click Dialog Type in the submenu that appears, then click one of the following: Open — to launch the Open File dialog box Save — to launch the Save File dialog box

To disable typing in the file box Right-click the control, click FileSelCtrl Properties, click Edit Disabled in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.

Assigning group box properties When a group box contains radio buttons, its value is the title of the radio button chosen. By default, an empty group box does not have a value. A group box has a Value property and a Selected property. The Selected property indicates numerically which of its radio buttons is enabled, starting from the top-left radio button (zero) and proceeding to the bottom-right button. When you create a group box, the Process Value of a group box is set to Yes. The Process Values of radio buttons in the group box are set to No.

Assigning scroll bar properties You can configure a scroll bar by setting parameters and changing the settings.

To set parameters for a horizontal or vertical scroll bar 1 Select the horizontal or vertical scroll bar. 2 Right-click the scroll bar, move the cursor to ScrollBar Properties, then click Parameters in the submenu that appears. 3 Specify the minimum and maximum integer values for the scroll bar.

606


To change the settings for working in scroll bars Change Line, Page, and Time settings.

Assigning list box properties You can use a predefined list or assign data in a cell block to be the list in a list box. By default, the list displays with one column, but you can add more columns to a list box. By default, lists display in alphanumeric order. You can also order items added to the list box in the same order they are added.

To specify the list to appear in a list box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the list box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, then click List in the submenu that appears. 3 Do one of the following: Double-click in the entry box in the List dialog box, then select the cells to use cell contents in the notebook as the list. Choose a list type from the dialog box to use a predefined list, such as Fonts, DriveList, BitmapList, or BarExt If you specify cells and the cell contents are changed after the List property has been set, the List settings will not be updated until the dialog box is opened again or an EXECUTE link command is used to refresh the list box. You can specify the list to appear in a combo box or file control using the same method. For information about assigning properties in combo boxes or file controls, see “Assigning combo box properties” on page 601 and “Assigning file control properties” on page 605.

To add multiple columns to a list box 1 Select the list box on the dialog box. 2 Right-clicking the list box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, then clicking the Number of Columns property in the submenu that appears. 3 Type the number of columns in the Enter Number box.


607

To order entries in a list box 1 Select the list box on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, click Ordered Property in the submenu that appears, then click No. Setting it to No does not reset the order of a list that has been sorted, however.

Assigning radio button properties You can change the label of a control, as well as display the label on either the right (default) or left sides of the radio button.

To add a label to a radio button 1 Select the radio button on the dialog box. 2 Do one of the following to add a label to the radio button: Right-click the button, move the cursor to RadioButton Properties, click Label Text in the submenu that appears, then type in the label Double-click the text “Radio Button” to type new text next to the radio button

To display label text to the left of the radio button 1 Select the radio button on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the radio button, move the cursor to RadioButtons Properties option, click Draw to Right in the submenu that appears, then click No.

Assigning rectangle control properties You can customize the appearance of the rectangle through the rectangle control properties. Select a raised rectangle (or etched, recessed, etc.) The Transparent rectangle style is useful for grouping controls together without displaying the rectangle to which they are attached. The background color and the border color around the rectangle can also be customized.

608


To display a different rectangle style Right-click the rectangle, move the cursor to Rectangle Properties, click Rectangle Style in the submenu that appears, then click one of the following options: Plain — the rectangle border becomes invisible, but the rectangle remains opaque Framed — the default rectangle style displays a black line around the rectangle Beveled Out — creates a raised button look around the rectangle Beveled In — creates a depressed area around the rectangle Transparent — makes the rectangle and border transparent, allowing you to group controls and place the rectangle on top of another dialog box control without blocking the control with an opaque rectangle Engraved — makes the rectangle look engraved onto the dialog box

To change the background or frame color of the rectangle Right-click the rectangle, move the cursor to Rectangle Properties, then click Fill Color or Frame Color in the submenu that appears.

Assigning spin control properties You can assign a range of values to a spin control through the spin control properties. You can also change the number of digits allowed to display by adjusting the Integer length (the default length is 6.)

To change the Integer length 1 Select the spin control on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the spin control, move the cursor to SpinCtrl Properties, then click Edit Length in the submenu that appears.

To assign a range of values to a spin control 1 Select the spin control on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the spin control, move the cursor to SpinCtrl Properties, then click one of the following values for the spin control in the submenu that appears: Maximum — sets the highest number that can appear in a spin control


609

Minimum — sets the lowest number that can appear in a spin control Default — sets the number that displays by default in the spin control In some cases, a limit on the number of characters users can enter into an edit field, combo box, or spin control is necessary.

To specify the maximum number of characters in a spin control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the spin control, move the cursor to SpinCtrl Properties, click Edit Length in the submenu that appears. 3 Type a number to indicate the maximum characters allowed in the Edit Length box.

Assigning TAB control properties Once you add a TAB control to a dialog box, you can then create multiple tabs (or pages) to help organize the dialog box controls. The Active Page property indicates which TAB is active. The Page list property displays commands for creating, removing, and reordering tabs.

To add additional tabs to a TAB control 1 Right-click the TAB control, move the cursor to TABCtrl Properties, then click Page List in the submenu that appears. 2 Type a sheet name, then click the Insert button. 3 Follow steps 1 and 2 to create additional pages. 4 Choose one of the following to organize the tabs: Move Up — moves the TAB closer to the front of the list Move Down — moves the TAB closer to the back of the list Add — adds the TAB indicated in the Sheet Name box after the TAB name you chose in Sheet List box Delete — deletes the selected TAB name from the TAB control 5 Add controls to each page TAB by clicking Insert, then click a control. 6 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click the button, then: Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell Click Links to specify the action to perform

610


Assigning timer control properties There are two ways to configure a timer control for generating regular events: as a timer or as an alarm. A timer generates the Timer event at regular intervals (for example, every two seconds). A timer control shows the user the current time. You can also use a timer control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a certain time of day. You can use timer controls to display the current time in a dialog box or toolbar. Timer controls do not have a value. Two properties of the timer control are used to specify the number of milliseconds to wait between Timer events, as shown in the following formula: Wait = Units in Milliseconds X Interval in Units Units in Milliseconds is set to 1000 by default, so you can use the Interval in Units property to specify how many seconds to wait between Timer events. As an Alarm, the timer control generates the Alarm event at a certain time of day (for example, at 5:00). The toolbar must be open; for example, an alarm set for 3:00 will not generate an Alarm event if the toolbar is not onscreen at 3:00.

To turn the timer control into a clock 1 Select the timer control on the dialog box. 2 Right-click the timer control, move the cursor to TimeCtrl Properties, click Show Time in the submenu that appears, then click Yes (the timer becomes a digital clock.) 3 Right-click the timer control, move the cursor to TimeCtrl Properties, click Timer On in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.

To make a timer 1 Follow step 1 from the previous procedure. 2 Right-click the timer control, move the cursor to TimeCtrl Properties, then click Units in Milliseconds in the submenu that appears. 3 Enter how many milliseconds it takes for one unit to elapse in the Enter Number box, then click OK. 4 Right-click the timer control, move the cursor to TimeCtrl Properties, then click Interval in Units in the submenu that appears.


611

5 Enter how many units to wait before generating a Timer event in the Enter Number box. 6 Right-click the timer control, move the cursor to TimeCtrl Properties, click Timer On in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.

To set an alarm 1 Follow step 1 from the “To turn a timer control into a clock” procedure. 2 Right-click the timer control, move the cursor to TimeCtrl Properties, click Alarm On in the submenu that appears, then click Yes. 3 Right-click the timer control, move the cursor to TimeCtrl Properties, then click Alarm Time in the submenu that appears. 4 Enter the time at which the Alarm event activates. You can enable Alarm On and Alarm Time for a timer control to enable functions simultaneously. For example, you can have a timer generate Timer events every 2 seconds and send out an alarm event at 5:00 to signal the end of the work day. Assign the Units in Milliseconds property with the Interval in Units property. The Interval in Units property determines how frequently the timer refresh event is generated. The Units in Milliseconds property determines the number of milliseconds represented by each unit.

Assigning other properties Dialog box controls are similar to OLE objects. When you reference these objects in macros, link commands, or spreadsheet functions, you can use either the Object ID or the object name Object IDs are assigned to dialog controls in the order they were created. You can assign new object names to controls by modifying the control properties. For information about using object names, Object ID, or defining properties in macros, see “Using object macro commands” on page 568. You can also assign properties to controls that deal with their behavior to other controls in a dialog box. You can assign the order in which items are chosen in a group box, or which item in a list box or combo box is the default selection. You can also specify the default text to display in a list, combo box, or file list control. Every dialog has a default button that closes the dialog box. By default, the OK button on a dialog box performs this function. You can assign another

612


control the same function, so that it closes the dialog box when a user presses ENTER. As with macro buttons, you can assign a dialog box control a shortcut key which runs a macro when that control is selected or activated. You can also specify when a control or dialog box is available in Quattro Pro.

Properties you can assign in macros, link, or spreadsheet functions You can use macros, link commands, and spreadsheet functions to select objects, change their properties, or read their properties. For information about using macros or spreadsheet functions, see “Using macros” on page 489 or “Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123. There are several properties that you can read and set only with macro, link, and spreadsheet function commands: The Value property — is the current setting of a control. This varies from control to control. Most dialog controls have a Value property. The Show property — is the opposite of the Hidden property. Set it to No to hide the control from the user. The Enabled property — lets you turn on the dialog controls that have been turned off with the Disabled property or by setting Enabled to No. The Enabled property is available for all dialog controls. For descriptions about individual control properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Identifying the Object ID property of controls The object ID property of a control is a number that indicates the order in which controls were added to the dialog box. In most dialog boxes, the default buttons OK and Cancel carry the Object ID of 1 and 2 respectively. This means that the next control you add to the dialog box has an Object ID of 3. You cannot change the Object ID of an object. It is a read-only property.

To identify the Object ID property of a control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Object ID in the submenu that appears.

Identifying the object name property of controls The object name property of a dialog box or dialog box control is usually the way you reference that object in a macro, link command, or spreadsheet Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls

613

function. This property is accessed for graphic objects, clipart, maps, charts, and OLE objects. For information about changing the object name for graphics, charts, or maps, see “Renaming graphics” on page 400.

To identify the object name property of controls 1 Double-click the dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Name in the submenu that appears. For information about changing the name of dialog boxes and controls, see “Renaming dialog boxes” on page 638 and “Renaming dialog controls” on page 641.

Setting the Selected property for dialog controls The Selected property indicates numerically which radio button in a group box is chosen, or which item in a list box or combo box is highlighted. Numbers are sequential (beginning at zero). If the first item is chosen or highlighted, the Selected property is set to 0. Choosing or highlighting the second item sets the Selected property to 1, and so on.

To set the Selected property for a dialog control 1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click Selected in the submenu that appears. 3 Type a number to indicate which item is selected in the Selected box.

Setting the Selected text property for dialog controls You can specify the selected text to display in a list, combo box, or file list control. Users see this text highlighted when the control is activated or they open the dialog box.

To set the Selection Text property for a dialog control 1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click a list box, move the cursor to Properties, click Selection Text in the submenu that appears. 3 Type text you want to be selected.

614


For more information about creating the list used in a list box, spin control, or file control, see “Assigning list box properties” on page 607, “Assigning spin control properties” on page 609, or “Assigning file control properties” on page 605.

Setting a default button control The default button has a thick black border. There can be only one default button on a dialog box. If the Terminate Dialog property is set to Yes, when a user presses ENTER, the default button is automatically clicked. OK is the default button unless you have set the Default Button property to Yes for another bitmap or push button. This property is available for combo boxes, edit fields, and spin controls. For more information about the Terminate Dialog property, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

To make a control the default button 1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click one of the following: combo box edit field spin control bitmap button button 3 Move the cursor to Properties, click Terminate Dialog in the submenu that appears, then click Yes. You can set Terminate Dialog to No to let users press ENTER in an edit field without closing the dialog box if you do not want the edit field to be the default button. For example, you may have a link between the edit field and the notebook which displays the text entered in the edit field in a notebook cell.

Assigning shortcut keys to controls Assigning a shortcut key to a control allows the user to run a macro when the control is selected or activated. You can add alternative shortcut keys to


615

controls using link commands. For more information about using the key: link events, see “Understanding link events” on page 620. When a control or label control has an attached shortcut, the first letter of the label is underlined.

To assign a shortcut key to a labeled control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Double-click the label of a control. 3 Move the insertion point to just before the first letter of label text. 4 Type an ampersand (&). For example, &Button sets the title to Button.

To assign a shortcut key to a control without a label 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control without a label (such as an edit field or a list box) , then move the cursor to Properties. 3 Click Name in the submenu that appears. 4 Move the insertion point to just before the letter to use. You can type a new name for the control if needed. 5 Type an ampersand (&). Use only one ampersand character in the label. If you add more than one, the first is recognized as a shortcut key designation, and the remaining ones appear in the label as text.

Limiting access to controls and dialog boxes in specific areas of Quattro Pro You can specify areas of Quattro Pro where a dialog box or control should not be available. For example, some controls are appropriate only when a chart window is active. The Depend On property is available for many dialog controls. If all options in the Depend On property are checked, the dialog control is always available.

To limit access to a control or dialog in Quattro Pro 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet.

616


2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Depend On in the submenu that appears. 3 Disable any check boxes where you do not want the control available to users. For example, to have a control available only when a chart window is active, disable all the check boxes except Graph. You can also limit access to dialog boxes and controls by using password protection. For information about assigning password protection, see “Using password protection” on page 703.

Attaching actions to dialog controls After you add a control to a dialog box, you must specify what happens when a control executes an action or result. A control can execute when triggered by a user action or when triggered by another control’s actions. There are two ways to activate a control: Connecting controls or Linking controls Connect a control when you want to create a static or dynamic link to a spreadsheet. For example, if you want the list in a list box to display a list of current customers, then a dynamic link is appropriate as it reflects the most recent data in the connected column on the spreadsheet. Link a control when you want to create a more complicated link. For example, you can create a compound link (a link containing several link actions for a control) or a conditional link (a link using an IF condition.)

Connecting controls When you connect a control, you can create a static or dynamic link to data on the spreadsheet. The data or result the control returns can be displayed in the target cell or cell block on the spreadsheet.

Connecting controls to cells or other controls You can connect a control to another control or to a notebook cell. This creates a link command for the selected object. The object name of the control appears in Source. For information about changing the object name of a control, see “Changing the object name of form controls” on page 577 in the online Help.

To connect a control to cells or other controls 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls

617

2 Select the control you want to connect. 3 Click Dialog, Connect. 4 Do one of the following: Type the cell reference in the Target edit field, then click OK. Use the Pointer next to the Target edit field to select a cell or group of cells. 5 Click OK. You can also display the Connect dialog box by right-clicking the control, then click Connect in the submenu that appears. You can access the Connect command through the Object Link dialog when you are in Developer mode. For more information about Developer mode, see “Working in Developer mode” on page 519.

Connecting controls dynamically There are two ways to dynamically connect dialog box controls. The first method immediately displays changes in the value of a control on the target cell or control. For example, you can connect a check box so that the current value displays in a specific cell. When you enable the check box, Yes displays in the cell. When you disable the check box, No displays. The second method displays the changes in the value only when the dialog box closes. Using the check box example, this means that Yes or No does not display in the selected cell until you close the dialog box.

To immediately send control value changes to a cell or another control 1 Select a control on a custom dialog. 2 Click Dialog, Connect. 3 In the target box, do one of the following: Type the cell reference in the Target edit field, then click OK. Use the Pointer next to the Target edit field to select a cell or group of cells. 4 Enable the Dynamic Connection check box, then click OK.

618


To display control value changes to a cell or another control only when you close the dialog box 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in the previous procedure. 2 Disable the Dynamic Connection check box, then click OK. The Dynamic Connection check box by default is enabled.

Linking controls The Object Link dialog box is where you can link events and link commands to controls. This tool creates the macro that activates the control. For more information about creating macros, see “Using macros” on page 489. The Object Link dialog is made up of a five lists, however the lists that display vary depending on the selections made in the Link Events and Link Commands lists and the type of control being linked. For example, you can select from three, four, or five lists. For information about the kinds of link events and link commands available, see “Understanding link events” on page 620 and “Understanding link commands” on page 622. This example shows how to assign link events and link commands for an edit field. 1 Select a control, then click Dialog, Links. 2 Click the Add button, then click the first TAB on the left side of the dialog box (the Link Event list), then choose Valuechanged in the list. This selection sends a value to the notebook when the value changes. 3 Click the TAB immediately to the right of the Link Event list (the Link Command list), then choose SEND in the list. This selection sends the changed value to the notebook. 4 Click the TAB immediately to the right of the Link Command list (the Link Control Properties list), then click Value in the list. This selection sends the new value to the notebook. 5 Click the TAB immediately to the right of the Link Control Properties list (the Object Selector list). This selection specifies the object to be acted upon. 6 Hold down the mouse button, and click , move the Object Link dialog box out of the way if you need to, then click cell B2 in the notebook.


619

7 Click the TAB immediately to the right of the Object Selector list (the Selected Object Properties list), then click Value in the list. The Value property for cell B2 receives and displays the value of the edit field control. 8 Click OK. For more examples about how to link dialog controls, see Examples of linking controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Understanding link events A link command runs in response to an link event that occurs in a dialog box. For information about available link commands, see “Understanding link commands” on page 622. The first list in the Object Link dialog (the Link Event list) shows the event that you want to trigger the link command. For information about link commands, see “Understanding link commands” on page 622. More than one link command in a control can respond to the same event. The order in which the link commands appear in the Object Link dialog box is the order in which they run. There are generic link events and link events associated with specific controls. The following list describes the link events common to all dialog box controls:

620

Link Event

Triggers the link command when...

Init

The dialog box is about to appear. Use Init to set initial settings.

Init_Complete

Available only when you add a link command to the dialog box itself. This event occurs immediately after all controls have run all link commands that respond to Init.

OKExit

The user closes the dialog box. The link command runs before the dialog box closes.

CancelExit

The user cancels the dialog box. The link command runs before the dialog box closes.

Clicked

The user clicks the control.

Right_bdown

The user right-clicks the control.

Left_bdown

The user points to the control and holds down the left mouse button. Releasing the button generates a Clicked event.

Doubleclick

The user double-clicks the control.


Valuechanged

The user changes the value of the control. This event occurs any time the value is changed (by the user, a link command, or a macro command).

key:keystroke

The user presses the key keystroke. When you choose key from the Link Event list, it flashes to indicate that you must press a key. Press the key you want to generate the event. The key displays after key: in the pick list button when it is set. For example, key:Ctrl + F5 indicates that the link command is triggered by Ctrl + F5.

Activate

The user has chosen the control for manipulation. For example, clicking an edit field generates this event so that Valuechanged traps the final result entered in the edit field.

Deactivate

The user has chosen another control, leaving this control inactive.

Trigger

This event cannot be generated by any user action. Use it to connect link commands that are triggered (or executed) by link commands. Use the link command TRIGGER to generate this event.

Link events for specific controls Some link events that trigger link commands are available only for specific controls. The following list describes link events for edit fields, scroll bars, combo boxes, and timer controls: Control

Link event and purpose

Edit field

Enter — executes when the user presses ENTER.

Scroll bars

Lineup — permits the user increases the value of the scroll bar by clicking a scroll arrow Linedown — permits the user decreases the value of the scroll bar scroll bar by clicking a scroll arrow Pageup — permits the user increases the scroll bar’s value by clicking between a scroll arrow and the scroll box Pagedown — permits the user decreases the scroll bar’s value by clicking it between a scroll arrow and the scroll box Thumb — lets the user click or drag the scroll bar’s scroll box

Combo box

Editdynamic — lets the user insert or delete characters in the combo box’s edit field

Timer control

Alarm — executes when the time of day specified in the timer’s Alarm Time property has been reached Timer — executes the amount of time indicated in the timer’s Timer Interval property has elapsed (timer controls only).


621

Understanding link commands Link commands perform dynamic actions in response to actions that a user performs (which are events). For information about available link events, see “Understanding link events” on page 620. A link command can make a control do different things. For example, it can send a value to a cell in the notebook, send a value to another control, run a macro, close the dialog box, or change the zoom factor in the notebook. One control can have several link commands listed in the Object Link dialog box. For information about selecting link commands, see “Specifying control actions” on page 623. The following chart shows you the link commands available in the Link Command list: Choose

Result

SEND

To send a control property or value to: a cell in the notebook; another control; a property in a selection; a sheet; a notebook; or the Quattro Pro application.

RECEIVE

To receive a value or property from a cell in the notebook, another control, or a property in a selection, sheet, notebook, or the Quattro Pro application.

DOMACRO

To plays the macro that you specify.

EXECUTE

To execute another control or another dialog.

SET

To set properties in the dialog, another dialog, a cell, a sheet, a notebook, or the Quattro Pro application.

TRIGGER

To “fire” or execute an action or piece of code when certain events or conditions are met. For example, you might use a trigger event for a button that updates values.

IF

To create conditional statements. For more information about creating conditional links, see “Creating conditional links” on page 624.

The {DODIALOG} macro command brings changed values to the notebook when the user closes the dialog box. However, if you set up a dynamic link, users do not have to close the dialog box to see the changed values. For more information about using {DODIALOG}, see “Using macros to display the dialog box on a spreadsheet” on page . or {DODIALOG} in the Macro Command reference in the online Help.

622


Specifying control actions You can specify actions for a control to perform in the Object Link dialog box. You can assign a single link or consecutive links to a control. The links execute in the order they display. The list types in the Object Link dialog from which to select are: List (from left to right)

Description

Link Events

The first list shows the specific event that you want to trigger the link command

Link Commands

The second list shows the command (action) that can send a value to another control or notebook cell, run a macro, or run another event in response to a triggering event

Link Control Properties

This list displays available properties for the control

Object Selector List

This list allows you to specify a control or cell on which to act

Selected Object Properties

This list displays properties for the item selected in the Object Selector list

For information about controls you can assign to properties only with link commands, see “Assigning other properties” on page 612.

To specify the action that a control performs 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Do one of the following: Select the control, click Dialog, then click Links. Right-click the control, then click Links. 3 Click either of the following: Add — creates a link command to place the link below the active link. Insert — creates a link above the active link. 4 Choose the event that initiates the action from the Link Event list. 5 Choose the action to perform from the Link Command list. The remaining pick list buttons change, depending on which action you chose in step 5. 6 Choose an option in any of the available lists: Link Control Properties Object Selector


623

Selected Object Properties 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to assign consecutive link commands for the control. When you choose in the Object Selector List, type the text you want, then press ENTER to make a selection on another list. When you choose in the Object Selector List, move the Object Link dialog box so you can see the custom dialog box, then click a control. The object name of that control displays in the Object Selector list.

You can also create a dynamic link for a control. For information about creating a dynamic link, see “Connecting controls” on page 617.

Creating conditional links You can create conditional links using the IF-THEN-ELSE link command. An IF-THEN-ELSE link command compares a minimum of two conditions and tests if the results are true. If the conditions are true, the THEN part of the link command occurs. The ELSE portion of the link command occurs if the result is false, so that the second IF link command occurs. For example, you can create a group box with three radio buttons, and link the radio buttons to two edit fields that display different results, depending on which radio button is selected. [VentGraphic 1, The object dialog with an example of a conditional link shows the results that display in the edit fields when the condition is true or false.]

To create a conditional object link 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, then click Links. 3 Click Add to create a link command to create the first link. 4 Choose the event that initiates the action from the Link Events list. 5 Choose IF from the Link Commands list. 6 Choose an option in any of the available lists: Link Control Properties Object Selector

624


Selected Object Properties The following example features a button that when clicked, displays a dialog box called “Andrew”.

To display a dialog box using a conditional link 1 Click Insert, Macros, Dialog Designer to create a blank dialog box. 2 Right-click the dialog box, click Title, then type “Andrew” in the Enter Text box. 3 Repeat step 1 to create a second dialog box. 4 Click Insert, click Button to add a button, then repeat this procedure and add a check box to the dialog. 5 Right-click the button, then click Links. 6 In the Object Link dialog, click the Add button, choose the following options in the appropriate lists , then click OK: List

Choose

On

On

Link Events

Clicked

Link Commands

TRIGGER

Object Selector

Check Box1


Trigger

7 Right-click the check box, then click Links. 8 In the Object Link dialog, click the Add button, choose the following options in the appropriate lists to create two links, then click OK: List

Choose

On

On

Link Events

Trigger

Link Commands

IF

Link Control Properties

Value

Operator

=

Object Selector

Check Box1


Enabled (THEN)

On

On


625

Link Events

Trigger

Link Commands

EXECUTE

Object Selector List

Andrew


Execute

9 Click the Test button to test the two dialogs. When you choose in the Object Selector List, type the text you want, then press ENTER to make a selection on another list. When you choose in the Object Selector List, move the Object Link dialog box so you can see the custom dialog box, then click a control. The object name of that control displays in the Object Selector list.

Deleting connected link commands You can change or delete link commands you create with the Connect command. For information about the Connect command, see “Connecting controls” on page 617. You can view all connect commands in the Object Link dialog box. It is possible to have only links related to the Connect command or a combination of a Connect link command and regular Link Commands. For more information about creating links in the Object Link dialog, see “Linking controls” on page 619.

To delete a connected link command 1 Select a control on a custom dialog. 2 Click Dialog, Links. 3 Click one of the following buttons: Delete — deletes the selected link in the Object Link dialog box Delete All — deletes all links displayed in the Object Link dialog box

Using macros to display the dialog box on a spreadsheet You can create a macro to display a custom dialog box and store the user’s choices in cells in the notebook. You can display it using the {DODIALOG} macro command. The most important argument in {DODIALOG} is the third argument, which are cells that contain the initial settings of the dialog box controls.

626


You can then play the macro from graphics, toolbars, buttons, and keystrokes. The macro sends initial values to each control in the dialog box. If the user changes a setting in the dialog box, that change is sent back to a cell in the notebook when the user closes the dialog box. The user can save the changes when saving the notebook. First, set up an area in the notebook that will send default settings to the dialog box. For example, in the following table for a loan payment dialog box, B1..B5 is a block that defines the initial dialog box settings: A

B

1. Pay_Every

Month

2. Loan_Amount

100000

3. Int_Rate

12.5

4. Term

30

5. End_Of_Period

No

This sets the default payment period to monthly, the default loan amount at 100,000, the default interest rate at 12.5%, the default term at 30 years, and specifies payment at the start of the month. After the initial dialog box settings have been entered in the notebook, you can enter a macro command that will display the dialog box and send the user’s choices back to the notebook. Use the {DODIALOG} command to do this. Each cell in the block (starting at the upper left cell and proceeding row by row to the lower right cell) sets the initial value of one control. If the user cancels the dialog box, the values in this block remain unchanged. Here is an example of a {DODIALOG} macro command used to display a loan payment dialog box using the initial settings in B1..B5: {DODIALOG LoanData,B6,B1..B5,1}

This command displays the dialog box and sends (or passes) the initial values in cells B1 through B5 to the dialog box controls. If the user cancels the dialog box, it also sends a value of 0 to cell B6 ; otherwise, the value is 1. The final argument of the command specifies that the user can manipulate the dialog box. For example, if your dialog box has six controls, but you have set the Process Value Property of the third control to No, your setting block should be only five cells long. The values in the first two cells will be passed to the first two controls. However, the value in the third cell will go to the fourth control, and the values in the fourth and fifth cells will go to the fifth and sixth controls, respectively.


627

Setting the Process Value property to Yes lets the {DODIALOG} macro command access the control’s value. For more information about {DODIALOG}, see {DODIALOG} in the macro reference section of the online Help. The Process Value property is available for many Dialog box controls. By default, the order in which you created controls is the order that the {DODIALOG} command sets initial values in a dialog box. The first control you created is sent the first value from the {DODIALOG} command, regardless of its position in the dialog box. You can make this dialog box dynamic by adding link commands to each control so that the user’s changes are immediately reflected in the notebook. For more information about using link commands, see “Attaching actions to dialog controls” on page 617.

Displaying a dialog box and setting initial values The most important argument in {DODIALOG} is the third argument, which are cells that contain the initial settings of the dialog box controls. Each cell in the block (starting at the upper left cell and proceeding row by row to the lower right cell) sets the initial value of one control. If the user cancels the dialog box, the values in this block remain unchanged. Each control stores one setting. The user manipulates the control (by clicking a scroll arrow, typing text, and so on) to change that setting. There are several ways to set a control’s value: through initial settings you send (or pass) using a {DODIALOG} command by a user changing a setting in the dialog box using the {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} command with link commands from any dialog control For example, the following macro command uses the Value property to enter Spanish in an edit field: {SETOBJECTPROPERTY “Dialog1:EditField3.Value”,"Spanish"}

To display a dialog box and set initial values 1 Set up an area in the notebook that will send default settings to the dialog box. 2 Enter a {DODIALOG} macro command that displays the dialog box and send the user’s choices back to the notebook. The {DODIALOG} macro has several arguments:

628


Argument 1 — is the name of the notebook that contains the dialog box you want to display, and the name of the dialog box. The name of the notebook is optional if the dialog box is stored in the active notebook. Argument 2 — specifies a cell that will store a value indicating how the user closed the dialog box. If the dialog box was canceled, 0 is stored in the cell. If the dialog box was closed by Enter or OK, 1 is stored. Argument 3 — specifies a block that contains initial values for the dialog box controls and receives final values from the dialog box controls when the user closes the dialog box. Argument 4 — (1 or 0) specifies whether the user should manipulate the dialog box (1) or if the macro should manipulate it (0). The default is 1. If a control’s Process Value property is set to No, the control will not receive an initial value. Controls that do not have a Process Value property have no initial value.

If you want to make a dialog box dynamic so that the user’s changes are immediately reflected in the notebook, add link commands to each control. For information about using link commands, see “Attaching actions to dialog controls” on page 617.

Changing the order for setting initial values The first control you click receives its initial value from the first cell of the block, the second control you click receives its initial value from the second cell of the block, and so on, regardless of their arrangement in the dialog box. You can also change the order of some of the controls. For example, if the order was: 123456 Select items 2, 4 and 6, then choose Reorder From First to change the order to: 124635

To change the order for setting initial values 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click the dialog window background to deselect the controls.


629

3 Hold down SHIFT and click each control in the order in which you want to send initial value settings. 4 Click Format, Value Order, Set New.

To reorder only some controls 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in the previous procedure. 2 Click Format, Value Order, Reorder. 3 Hold down SHIFT and click each control in the order in which you want to send values. You can also change the TAB order for controls. For information about changing the TAB order, see “Changing the tab order for controls” on page 647 and “Disabling the tab option for specific controls” on page 648.

Working with child controls When you place controls inside a group box or rectangle control, the controls are automatically attached to the control acting as a container. Each control becomes a child control of the parent control (group box or rectangle). This provides several advantages for creating dialog boxes: Child controls are moved, copied, or resized with the parent control. When you hide a parent control, child controls are hidden. When you disable the parent control, any child controls are also disabled. Dialog boxes act as parent controls for the individual controls added to them. While controls are automatically attached to group boxes and rectangles, you can disable the automatic setting. You can also attach controls to controls which are not by default containers; like list boxes, spin controls, and timer controls. For more information about creating group boxes and rectangles, see “Adding group boxes” on page 592 and “Adding rectangle controls” on page 596. For more information about linking group boxes and rectangles, see Examples of linking controls.

Attaching child controls to group boxes and rectangles When you drag a control on top of another control, they become attached. The top control is the child; the bottom control is its parent. When you add controls to group boxes and rectangles, they are automatically attached. When you move a parent control on top of another control, the controls

630


attached to the original parent stay associated with the original parent. For example, you can place a group box of radio buttons on top of a rectangle control and the radio buttons remain children of the group box, not of the rectangle. You can enable the Attach Child property for other controls, for example, list boxes and timer controls.

To attach controls to group boxes and rectangles 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Drag the control you want to add (for example, drag a list box) onto the rectangle or group box. 3 Right-click the parent control (for example, a rectangle or a group box), move the cursor to one of the following properties: Group Box Properties Rectangle Properties 4 Click Attach Child in the submenu that appears, then click Yes. For information about adding buttons, radio buttons, or check boxes to group boxes and rectangles, see “Adding group boxes” on page 592 and “Adding rectangle controls” on page 596. Child controls must cover only the parent control. Controls partially covering one another will not attach.

Creating unattached controls on a parent You can move a control onto a parent control, like a group box or rectangle control, that you want to maintain its own independent status. This means that the new control is not controlled by the parent control. For example, resizing the parent does not affect the new control.

To create an unattached control on a parent control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Select a parent control (for example, a group box.) 3 Right-click the parent control, move the cursor to Properties, click Attach Child in the submenu that appears, then click No.


631

4 Click Insert, choose a control, then drag the control you want to add (for example, a list box) onto the parent. 5 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click Attach Child in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.

Unattaching child controls You can eliminate the connection between a child control and its parent. This allows the control to work independently from the other child controls in the parent control (like a rectangle control or group box.)

To unattach a control from a parent control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Drag the control onto the dialog box outside of the parent control. 3 Select the parent control (for example, the group box.) 4 Right-click the parent control, move the cursor to Properties, click Attach Child in the submenu that appears, then click No. 5 Drag the control back onto the parent.

To disable controls in a dialog box 1 Follow step 1 from the previous procedure. 2 Right-click the dialog box, move the cursor to Dialog Properties, click Disabled in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.

Moving and resizing child controls When you move a group box, any controls (for example, radio buttons) move with it. One setting in the Position Adjust property specifies how a child control moves when you resize the parent control. The other setting in the Position Adjust property specifies whether the child control resizes in proportion to its parent. By selecting a relative position for a control, the unlocked edges of a child control move relative to its position in the parent control rather than resize the child control. If you change settings, however, you can move a child control with the parent as shown by the arrows below. [VentGraphic 0, ]

632


To move a child control when the dialog box resizes 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click a control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Position Adjust in the submenu that appears. 3 Enable one or more of the following options in the Position Adjust section: Depend on Parent — locks each edge of the child control in place so that the child resizes in proportion to the proportions of the resized parent control Center Horizontally — centers the control between the left and right sides of the resized parent control Center Vertically — centers the control between the top and bottom sides of the resized parent control 4 Enable one or more check boxes in the Position Relative To section: Top — unlocks the top edge of the control Bottom — unlocks the bottom edge of the control Left — unlocks the left edge of the control Right — unlocks the right edge of the control 5 Drag the lower right corner of the dialog window to shrink the parent control. Notice the location and size of the child control.

Creating Help and tips for controls You can create your own help (HLP) files and use them for custom applications you build with Quattro Pro. This allows you to enter tips and help files for the controls and the dialog boxes you create.

Creating Application bar hints for controls The Help Line property is available for many dialog controls. For dialog controls, this property displays the text of the at the bottom right of the Application Bar when the cursor hovers over the control.

To create an Application bar hint for a control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Help Line.


633

3 Type the hint in the Enter Text box. 4 Click Dialog, Test, move your cursor arrow over the control, then look for the hint in the Application bar.

Creating Help for controls The Object Help property creates context-sensitive help for objects in custom dialog boxes. The help displays as a message box with an OK button to close the message box. For more information about using the Object Help property, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help. The combined total of all characters in the three Object Help fields cannot exceed 194 characters.

To create help for controls 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Object Help in the submenu that appears. 3 Type the title to appear in the Object Help Title box. 4 Type the text to appear in the Object Help Text box when you right-click the object in a dialog, then click OK. 5 Click Dialog, Test to run the dialog box in Test mode. 6 Right-click the control to see the help.

Linking Help files to controls The Object Help property allows you to connect existing help files to dialog boxes and controls. To specify a WinHelp context string for a help topic instead of using the Object Help title and text fields, type a context string that must be followed immediately by the @ symbol and Help file name (for example, [email protected]). You can then right-click the control to display help for it. For more information about creating help files, see the Windows95 SDK documentation.

To link help files to controls 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Object Help in the submenu that appears. 3 Type the context string, an @ symbol, then the Help file name.

634


4 Click OK. 5 Click Dialog, Test to run the dialog box in Test mode. 6 Right-click the control to see the help file. In order for the Help file to launch successfully, make sure the Object Help Title and Object Help Text boxes are both empty of text.

Linking dialog boxes to Help files You can link an individual dialog box to a topic page within a Help file.

To link a dialog box to Help 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Select the dialog box, then click Dialog, Links. 3 Click the Add button and make the following list selections to create a link command: List

Choose

On

On

Link Event

Init

Link Command

Set

Help topic and file name

HelpContext@HelpFile To

Selected Object

Help


Context

4 Click Dialog, Test to run the dialog box in Test mode. 5 Right-click the dialog box to display the Help. In the edit field to the right of Set, type the WinHelp context string followed by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file. The name of the Help file cannot include a path.


635

When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick list next to where you type in the help file, click and type Help in the edit field. For details on how to create Windows Help files, refer to the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK).

Linking Help buttons to Help files You can create a Help button on a dialog box attached to a Help file.

To link a Help button to a Help file 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Select the Help button, then click Dialog, Links. 3 Click the Add button and make the following list selections to create two link commands: List

Choose

On

On

Link Event

Init

Link Command

SET

Blank

HelpContext@HelpFile To

Object Selector

Help


Context

On

On

Link Event

Clicked

Link Command

EXECUTE

Object Selector

Help


Context

4 Click Dialog, Test to run the dialog box in Test mode. 5 Click the Help button to launch the Help. In the edit field to the right of Set, type the WinHelp context string followed by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file. The name of the

636


Help file cannot include a path. For details on how to create Windows Help files, refer to the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK). When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick list next to where you entered the name of the help file, click and type Help in the edit field.

Editing dialog boxes You can make many changes to a dialog box and to individual controls. You also can move, copy, or delete a dialog box or a control. Password protection rights can be assigned to controls and dialog boxes. For information about working with passwords, see “Using password protection” on page 703.

Editing and managing dialog boxes Quattro Pro lets you make changes to custom dialog boxes. You can change the object name or add a title to a dialog box, move the dialog box on the desktop, and edit a dialog box through its properties. You can also copy a dialog box within a notebook or to another notebook, and delete notebooks.

Modifying dialog boxes You can modify various properties of a dialog box. For information about specific dialog box properties, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

To edit the dialog window 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the title bar on the dialog box, then click Dialog Properties. 3 Click any of the following in the submenu that appears: Dimension — specifies the exact size and position of the dialog window. Title — lets you change the title that displays on the title bar Position Adjust — specifies how the dialog box moves when the window is resized Grid Options — lets you display a grid to aid with placing controls Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls

637

Name — lets you type an object name to which macros, link commands, and formulas can refer Disabled — disables all controls in the dialog box Value — changes the settings of a dialog that has the process value set to Yes

Renaming dialog boxes Dialog boxes are created with a default object name (for example, Dialog 1). Macros, link commands, and formulas use this name when referring to a specific dialog box. You can rename an active dialog box or a dialog box can be renamed when it is represented by an icon on the Objects sheet.

To rename an active dialog box 1 Right-click the dialog box, move the cursor to Dialog Properties, then click the Name property in the submenu that appears. 2 Type a new name into the Enter Text box.

To rename a dialog box on the Objects sheet 1 Click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the dialog box icon, click DialogBox Properties, then click Name. 3 Type a new name in the Enter Text box. For more information about the Name property, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Changing titles of dialog boxes You can change a title that displays on the title bar of a custom dialog box. The default title is usually something like “Notebk1.QPW:Dialog1".

To change the title of a dialog box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the dialog box background, move the cursor to DialogBox Properties, then click Title in the submenu that appears. 3 Type a title in the Enter Text box.

638


Moving dialog boxes You can move dialog boxes the same way you move other floating objects in Quattro Pro.

To move a dialog box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Select the dialog box 3 Drag the dialog box to the new location. Copying a parent control copies any controls attached to it as well. For more information about parent controls, see “Working with child controls” on page 630.

Copying dialog boxes in the same notebook You can copy a dialog box to other places in the same notebook.

To copy a dialog box to another spot in a notebook 1 Click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet. 2 Select a dialog box icon. 3 Click Edit, Copy. 4 Move your cursor to the cell or spreadsheet page in the notebook where you want to position the dialog box. 5 Click Edit, Paste. A duplicate cannot have the same object name as the original, so a unique name is automatically generated. For information about changing the name of a dialog box, see “Renaming dialog boxes” on page 638.

You can also use the Cut and Paste buttons on the Quattro Pro toolbar.


639

Copying dialog boxes to another notebook You can copy a dialog box to another notebook using copy and paste. You can also use the Drag and Drop the dialog box from one notebook into another notebook.

To copy a dialog box to another notebook 1 Click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet. 2 Select a dialog box icon you want to copy. 3 Click the dialog box icon, then click Edit, Copy. 4 Click the QuickTab button to display the Objects sheet of the other notebook, then click Edit, Paste.

To drag and drop a dialog box to another notebook 1 Click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet. 2 Select a dialog box icon. 3 Open the second notebook. 4 Click the QuickTab button to display the Objects sheet of the other notebook. 5 Click Window, Tile Side to Side. 6 Press CTRL, then drag the selected dialog box icon to the Objects sheet of the second notebook. Make sure to press CTRL when dragging the dialog box. If you just drag the dialog box to its new location you are removing the dialog box from the source notebook, not copying it.

Deselect any controls in the active dialog window before clicking Edit, Paste, so a selected control is not changed. You can also copy individual controls. For information about copying controls, see “Copying controls” on page 650.

Deleting dialog boxes You can permanently remove a dialog box by using DELETE, by cutting the dialog box out of the notebook, or by dragging and dropping the dialog box

640


icon. If you use the Drag and Drop feature, you remove the dialog box from the source notebook and add it to another notebook.

To delete a dialog box with DELETE 1 Click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet. 2 Select a dialog box icon. 3 Press DELETE.

To delete a dialog box using Cut 1 Click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet. 2 Select a dialog box icon. 3 Click the dialog box icon, then click Edit, Cut.

To drag and drop a dialog box to another notebook 1 Click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet. 2 Select a dialog box icon. 3 Open the second notebook. 4 Click the QuickTab button to display the Objects sheet of the other notebook. 5 Click Window, Tile Side to Side. 6 Drag the selected dialog box icon to the Objects sheet of the second notebook.

Editing and moving dialog controls Quattro Pro lets you edit, move, and copy dialog controls. You can edit single or multiple controls, move the position of controls and labels, change the size of controls, and edit label text. You can control how groups of controls interact by changing and disabling the TAB feature. You can also choose whether to show or hide a control so that it displays only at certain time or in certain situations.

Renaming dialog controls Dialog controls are created with a default object name (for example, Dialog 1). Macros, link commands, and formulas use this name when referring to a specific control.


641

To rename a dialog control 1 Click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet. 2 Double-click a dialog box icon. 3 Right-click a control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Name in the submenu that appears. 4 Type a new name in the Enter Text box.

Positioning label text You can position text (for labels, check boxes, and radio buttons) in relation to its background or in relation to the button itself (for push buttons and bitmap buttons). Labels do not have a value. If control has the Single Line check box disabled in the Text Draw Flags property, text shows on multiple lines with wrapped text. Special Characters: \n — makes characters to the right of it display on a second line. This option works only when Single Line is disabled in the Text Draw Flags property. \t — inserts a TAB into the text. \\ — inserts a backslash (\) into the text. Use this to enter \n or \t into a label as normal text so that users see only the result of \n or \t, not the actual special character. & — makes the character to the right of it appear underlined in the text (the ampersand does not appear). This is useful for naming controls.

To position label text 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Text Draw Flags. 3 Disable the Single Line. 4 Enable a button in the vertical and horizontal position sections 5 Click Apply, then click OK. Use only one & character. If you use two, the & character appears underlined in the text. By default, the label appears in the upper left corner of the background.

642


Editing label text You can edit the text that displays for a label control or the label of a control.

To edit label text 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click Label Text in the submenu that appears. 3 Type the new text in the Label box. To follow Windows conventions, type an ellipsis (...) at the end, if a button leads to another dialog box.

You can also double-click the label to edit the text.

Editing several controls simultaneously You can edit all the controls on a dialog box simultaneously or you can select several controls for editing at the same time.

To edit all dialog box controls simultaneously 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click a control. 3 Click Edit, Select All. 4 Perform a task on all controls (for example, drag them to another spot).

To edit several controls simultaneously 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click a control. 3 Click the dialog box with the cursor pointer, then drag a frame around the controls you want to edit 4 Perform a task on the selected controls (for example, align them all on the left or drag them to another spot).


643

You can also select multiple controls by holding down SHIFT and clicking the controls you want to edit Click the dialog window background to deselect controls.

Specifying the position of controls on a dialog box You can specify the position of controls on a dialog box. You can also display grid lines to help position controls. For information about moving controls, see “Moving dialog controls” on page 645.

To specify a position for a control on a dialog box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Dimension in the submenu that appears. 3 Type a value in the following boxes in the Dimension dialog: X Pos — the distance in pixels between the left edge of the control and the left side of the dialog box Y Pos — the distance in pixels between the top edge of the control and the bottom edge of the dialog box’s title bar

To use grid lines to position a control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the dialog title bar, click Dialog Properties, then click Grid Options. 3 Type a number in the Grid Size box to change the pixel distance between grid points. 4 Click Show Grid to display the grid while you are creating a dialog box. (Users will not see this grid.) 5 Click Snap To Grid to have controls align only on grid points.

Aligning and spacing controls You can align, center, and space multiple controls. For example, when you space controls horizontally, the first control you select appears at the left after repositioning, the next control appears to the right of the first, and so on. When you vertically space controls, the first control you select appears at the top, and so on.

644


To align multiple controls 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click a control, then hold down SHIFT to select other controls. 3 Click Format, Align. 4 Click one of the following options: Left — lines up the left sides of the selected controls Right — lines up the right sides of the selected controls Top — lines up the top edges of the selected controls Bottom — lines up the bottom edges of the selected controls

To center controls 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click a control, then hold down SHIFT to select other controls. 3 Click Format, Position, then click one of the following options: Horizontal Center — centers controls between the left and right sides of the dialog box Vertical Center — centers controls between the top and bottom sides of the dialog box

To space controls 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click a control, then hold down SHIFT to select other controls. 3 Click Format, Space, then click one of the following options: Horizontal Space Vertical Space 4

Type a number in the Space Between Objects box (this indicates the pixel distance to space the selected controls).

Moving dialog controls You can move dialog controls the same way you move other floating objects.

To move a control on a dialog box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet.


645

2 Select a control on the dialog box 3 Drag the control to a new location. Copying a parent control copies any controls attached to it as well. For more information about parent controls, see “Working with child controls” on page 630.

You can also use grid lines to position controls. For more information on using grid lines, see “Specifying the position of controls on a dialog box” on page 644.

Moving overlapping controls If two or more controls are covering all or part of another control, you can adjust the overlap options so that the controls position separately. Controls float on layers over the dialog box, similar to graphics or other floating objects which float above a spreadsheet. For more information about working with layers, see “Arranging graphic object layers and overlapping graphics” on page 397.

To move overlapping controls 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Select a control that overlaps another control. 3 Click Format, Object Order, click one of the following options: Bring Forward — moves the object one layer closer to the top Send Backward — moves the object one layer closer to the bottom Bring To Front — brings the object to the front or top of the layers Send To Back — sends the object to the bottom layer

Resizing controls You can change the size of a control the same way you resize other objects. You can resize several controls to the same uniform size. You can also enter a specific size width or height values for controls.

To resize a control with sizing handles 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet.

646


2 Select a control. 3 Drag one of its handles.

To resize several controls to a uniform size 1 Click the control you want to pattern the remaining controls after, then hold down SHIFT and click the remaining controls. 2 Click Format, Resize To Same.

To specify a precise size for a control 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Dimension. 3 Type a value in the following boxes in the Dimension dialog: Width — is the width of the control in pixels Height — is the height of the control in pixels Copying a parent control copies any controls attached to it. For information about working with parent controls, see “Working with child controls” on page 630.

If multiple controls are selected, dragging one control moves all selected controls, dragging one handle resizes selected controls.

Changing the tab order for controls A user can press TAB on the keyboard to cycle through each control in a dialog box. By default, when you press TAB, you cycle through the controls in the order they were added to the dialog box. However, you can set any TAB order.

To change the TAB order for controls 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Hold down SHIFT and select each control in the order you want to TAB through the controls. 3 Click Format, TAB Order, Set New to save the new order.


647

You can also change the order for settings initial values of a control and the order in which they activate. For more information about changing the initial values and order of controls, see “Changing the order for setting initial values” on page 629.

Disabling the tab option for specific controls Users can move from control to control, in the order in which they were added to the dialog box by pressing the TAB key. You can prevent users from using the TAB to move to a control. The TAB Stop property is available for many dialog controls.

To disable TAB for a control 1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click TAB Stop in the submenu that appears, then click No. If you want to re-enable the TAB properties to the control, just set the TAB Stop property to Yes.

Changing control selection order in group boxes When check boxes or radio buttons are placed in a group box, the user can activate one of the check boxes and then use arrow keys to move to the next check box or radio button. Additionally, the user can press the SPACEBAR to enable the check box.

To change selection order in a group box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Click the dialog window’s background to deselect any selected controls. 3 Click Format, click TAB Order, then click Set New. 4 Hold down SHIFT and select each check box (or radio button) in the order you want the user to scroll through them. 5 Drag the check boxes (or radio buttons) until the pointer changes to a four-way arrow. This saves the new order.

648


For information about creating group boxes, see “Adding group boxes” on page 592.

Disabling controls A disabled control is a control that appears gray and cannot be activated by users. Use this setting to specify areas in Quattro Pro where the control should not be available. For example, some controls are appropriate only when a chart window is active. If all the options in the Depend On property are enabled, the dialog control is always available.

To disable controls in a dialog box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Disabled in the submenu that appears, then click Yes to disable the feature (but the control is not dimmed)

To gray out controls in a dialog box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click Grayed in the submenu that appears, then click Yes to disable the feature and dim the control

To disable controls in areas of Quattro Pro 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Depend On in the submenu that appears. 3 Disable any check boxes that represent areas in which you want to deactivate the control. For example, to have a control available only when a chart window is active, disable all check boxes except Graph. The Depend On property is available for many dialog controls. For more information on the Depend On property, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.


649

Hiding controls You can hide controls so that they display to users only at certain times or only during runtime. When the Hidden property is applied, the control still appears in the dialog window while you are editing, but will disappear when you test the dialog box with the Test button.

To hide controls on a dialog box 1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet. 2 Right-click a control, move the cursor to Properties, click Hidden in the submenu that appears, then click Yes. The Show property, (opposite of Hidden), hides the control when set to No. It is used by link commands and does not appear in the control properties. For more information about using link commands, see “Attaching actions to dialog controls” on page 617.

Copying controls You can copy controls the same way you copy other objects. Copy controls using the copy and paste commands. Each instance of a control has a different object name (Button1, Button2, etc.), to avoid confusion when referring to the control in macros, link commands, and spreadsheet functions.

To copy a control 1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet. 2 Select a control. 3 Click Edit, Copy, click the location, then click Edit, Paste. Another way to copy a control is to click the Copy button, click the location, then click the Paste button on the toolbar. If multiple controls are selected, dragging one control moves all selected controls, copying copies selected controls. Copying a parent control copies any controls attached to it as well.

650


MANAGING FILES AND DATA

21

File management is an important part of any project. For example you can open many different file formats in Quattro Pro. You can import, insert, or combine data. You can also link data between notebooks or between Quattro Pro and another application.

Changing notebook size Quattro Pro lets you customize the number of rows and columns on each spreadsheet, and the number of spreadsheets in a notebook.

Opening files from other applications You can open and save files in many spreadsheet and database file formats from within Quattro Pro. When you’ve made changes, you can save the file as a Quattro Pro file.

Importing text files When you import text files, Quattro Pro lets you format how information appears on a spreadsheet.

Inserting files Quattro Pro lets you insert files into a notebook. Existing data shifts to make room for the new data.

Managing files and data

651

Linking and embedding objects You can also import, link, or embed data from other applications into Quattro Pro. When you import data, you import only the data without any accompanying formatting or control codes. Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) can be used to insert formatted files from an OLE-compliant application into Quattro Pro. When you place data in Quattro Pro using OLE, you can access the OLE source application directly from Quattro Pro to make any changes.

Linking data between notebooks Another method of file management is linking. You can link data between spreadsheets and notebooks. Linking gives you quick access to related data.

Version Control You can archive notebooks using Version Control. This allows you to compare versions of the same file to see the changes you have made.

Sending Quattro Pro files to other applications You can send Quattro Pro files electronically to other applications or the Internet. You can also email Quattro Pro files.

File-handling options Whether you are saving or opening a file, options that operate on files require the name of a file to work on. When you choose one of these options, you will see a dialog box with the options described below. If the filename you want is already displayed, double-click it. To display filenames in other drives or folders, use these controls:

652

Control

What it does

Look In or Save In

highlights the current folder. To change to a different folder, click the down-arrow button and choose a drive or folder from the list. From the list below, choose a folder by double-clicking it.

File Type

controls the filenames that are listed in the Filename list box above it. For File, Save As, File Type controls the file format. Regardless of the filename and extension you enter, the file is saved in the selected format.


Filename

lets you choose the file to be saved or opened, either by typing it in the text box or clicking it from the list. You can also control the types of files displayed using wildcards. For this version of Quattro Pro, the default file extension for notebooks is .QPW.

Password Protect

Lets you enter a password to protect your notebook from unauthorized use.

Folders When you first open the dialog box, it displays files in the startup folder. The startup folder is initially the folder from which you start Quattro Pro, but you can change it. For more information, see “Saving a notebook” on page 77. If you save or load a file in a folder other than the startup folder, this last-used folder becomes the default folder. Then the next time you choose an option to save or load a file, the default folder initially appears in the dialog box. The last-used folder is always the default folder displayed until you restart Quattro Pro, when the startup folder again appears.

Wildcards You can use the wildcard characters asterisk (*) and question mark (?) in any part of the Filename edit field to limit the files displayed. An asterisk stands for any number of characters in its position; a question mark stands for any single character in its position. For instance, *.PRN lists all files with the extension .PRN, and BUDGET9?.QPW lists all notebooks that begin with BUDGET9 followed by one character before the .QPW extension.

Read-only files If you are working on a network and the file you are trying to open or retrieve has already been opened by another user, you will view a Read-only prompt. You can choose to open the file with read-only rights (able to save it under a different name) or cancel the operation.

Alternate file handling dialog boxes You will see an alternate dialog box if you are using a document managing system that is compliant with the Open Document Management API (ODMA) standard.

Opening, saving, and customizing file formats Quattro Pro can open and save files in many spreadsheet and database program formats. For example, if you use Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1-2-3, you can open your files in Quattro Pro. For information about opening Microsoft Excel files, see Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Managing files and data

653

Proin the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help. For information about opening Lotus 1-2-3 files, see Opening and saving a Lotus 1-2-3 file. in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help. Quattro Pro can also open Multiplan files, Quicken Interchange Format (.QIF) files, Quattro Pro for DOS files, and various database files. For a list of file formats Quattro Pro supports, see “File formats supported by Quattro Pro” on page 654.

Changing the notebook size A Quattro Pro spreadsheet consists of approximately 1,000,000 rows and 18,000 columns. There are approximately 18,000 spreadsheets in each notebook. If your project does not require such a large notebook, you can specify a spreadsheet and notebook size.

File formats supported by Quattro Pro You can use spreadsheet files from a variety of applications with Quattro Pro. This table identifies the Quattro Pro filters available to convert files created in other applications. You can also save a Quattro Pro file in most of the formats listed below.

654

Extension

Application file type

.QPW

Quattro Pro 9 for Windows 95, 98, and NT

.WB3

Quattro Pro 7 and 8 for Windows 95 and Windows NT

.WB2

Quattro Pro for Windows, version 6.0

.WB1

Quattro Pro for Windows, versions 1.0 and 5.0

.WQ1

Quattro Pro for DOS

.WQ2*

Quattro Pro for DOS, versions 5.0 and 5.5

.XLS

Excel, versions 5.0, and 7.0, 97

.WKS

Lotus 1-2-3, version 1.0

.WK1

Lotus 1-2-3, version 2.x

.WK3

Lotus 1-2-3, version 3.x, and 1-2-3 for Windows

.WK4

Lotus 1-2-3, versions 4, 5

.WKE

Lotus 1-2-3, educational version

.DB

Paradox

.DBF

dBASE III, dBASE II, III Plus, IV, and dBASE for Windows Quattro Pro 9: Chapter 21

.TXT

Tab-delimited text

.CSV

Comma-delimited values

.DIF

VisiCalc

.SLK

Multiplan (SYLK)

.HTML/.HTM

HTML version 3 (tables only), includes XML

.WPD*

WordPerfect (all versions)

.QIF

Quicken Interchange Format

* = Open only, not save To see a list of supported file formats, click File, Save As. Click the File Type list, and scroll through the listed file types. If you can’t find the format you need and you are saving the document for use in another application, consult the application’s documentation for suggested compatible file formats.

Opening a file from another application You can open files in many file formats in Quattro Pro. Conversely, Quattro Pro files can be saved in other formats. For a list of the file formats Quattro Pro supports, see “File formats supported by Quattro Pro” on page 654. If you omit the filename extension when specifying a file to open, Quattro Pro still looks for the filename you specify, trying different filename extensions.

To open a file from another application 1 Click File, Open. 2 Make sure the Look In box displays the correct drive or folder. 3 From the File Type list box, choose the extension for the file you want to open. 4 In the Filename text box, type the filename.

To find a file saved on a network drive 1 Click File, Open. 2 Do one of the following:


655

If the drive is displayed in the Look In list box, follow steps 3 and 4 in the above procedure. If the drive is not displayed in the Look In box, Click Tools, Map Network Drive, and map the drive. If the drive will not map to the path you specify, you may not have access to that location. See your System Administrator. If the Open File dialog box does not provide the option of mapping a network drive, click Tools, Settings, and click the File Options tab. Enable the Use Enhanced File Dialogs check box.

To open a file on the Internet 1 Click File, Open. 2 Type a URL in the Filename field. Quattro Pro makes a local copy of the file. You do not have to be continuously connected to the Internet to work with the file.

To find a hidden file 1 Click Start, Programs, Windows Explorer. 2 Click View, Options. 3 Click the View tab. 4 Enable the Show All Files button. If you are using Quattro Pro for DOS, you can open .SQZ files by saving them as .WQ1 files first.

Opening Multiplan files Multiplan does not save its files in .SLK file format by default. This means that you must perform one of the following procedures before opening the file in Quattro Pro.

656


To prepare a Multiplan file for import into Quattro Pro 1 Click Transfer, Options, Symbolic. 2 Click Transfer, Save, then save the file with the extension .SLK.

To save a Multiplan file in a Lotus 1-2-3 file format for import into Quattro Pro 1 Click Transfer, Options, Other. 2 Click Transfer, Save, then save the file with the extension .WK1 or .WKS depending on your version of Multiplan.

Opening Quicken Interchange Format (.QIF) files Quattro Pro 8 can open a Quicken Interchange Format (.QIF) file. This file format is created in Quicken when you export an account register and choose the .QIF export file format option. You can choose options in Quicken that let you specify which categories and information you want to export. When you open the .QIF file in Quattro Pro, each spreadsheet row contains a single transaction record with the date, check number, payee, cleared status, and amount columns. In addition, the assigned categories are broken down into columns. You can sum the category amounts for each column, create custom reports and charts, or use the transaction data within Quattro Pro as actual data. In addition to checking account registers, you can also import other .QIF files such as investment accounts. When opening split transactions (multiple categories assigned to a single transaction), Quattro Pro places the correct amount in each category column. If a split transaction is composed of only a single category but has multiple descriptions, the category column contains a formula that includes all of the individual amounts. When you save the opened .QIF file, you must save it as a .QPW v9 or .QPW v7/v8 file. You can save it in a different file format, but some formatting may be lost.

Opening Quattro Pro for DOS files Quattro Pro supports all Quattro Pro for DOS functions and most features. However, once you change a Quattro Pro for DOS notebook in Quattro Pro, save it as a .QPW file to avoid losing new features and spreadsheet functions not recognized by the DOS program. Managing files and data

657

Quattro Pro for DOS functions Quattro Pro supports all Quattro Pro for DOS spreadsheet functions. However, once you change a DOS notebook in Quattro Pro, save it as a .QPW v9 or .QPW v7/v8 file to avoid losing new functions not recognized by the DOS program.

Using Quattro Pro DOS editing keys You can use Quattro Pro for DOS editing keys in later versions of Quattro Pro. When the Compatible Keys check box is enabled, a variety of keys work the same way as in Quattro Pro for DOS. When the check box is disabled, these keys work as they would in most Windows applications. For example, Tab moves the insertion point five spaces to the right when the Compatible Keys check box is enabled. When it is disabled, Tab moves the insertion point to the next word.

To use Quattro Pro for DOS editing keys 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the General tab. 3 Enable the Compatible Keys check box. If you are working in Quattro Pro for DOS, you can open .SQZ files by saving them as .WQ1 files first.

Opening and saving database files You can save Quattro Pro data in dBASE or Paradox file format. The field names are based on the data in the first row of the first sheet. If the first row contains data that is invalid as a database field name — for example, containing numbers, spaces, symbol characters, or duplicate labels — Quattro Pro uses the spreadsheet column letters to represent the field names. When you open any database file in Quattro Pro, database field names are converted to spreadsheet labels that serve as column headings, and cell names are assigned to the cells beneath each name.

To save database files 1 Click File, Save As.

658


2 From the File Type list box, choose dBASE or Paradox. 3 In the Filename text box, type a filename. 4 Click Save. If you have used unique Quattro Pro features, a message may appear stating that you are saving in a file format other than Quattro Pro. Click the database format to continue saving the database file. 5 From the Fields list box, choose a field name, then make any needed changes to the field name or field type. The default settings are based on the spreadsheet data. 6 Click the Write button. To mark a field to be deleted, click it in the list, then press the Delete button. An asterisk appears next to the field name. To restore the field, press the Delete button again.

Saving a file in another format If you want to save a file for use in a different application, you must include the appropriate extension and choose the appropriate file type when you save it. For example, to save the notebook MyFile for use with Quattro Pro for Windows version 1, you must specify the filename MyFile.WB1. For a list of file formats available for saving files, see “File formats supported by Quattro Pro” on page 654.

To save a Quattro Pro file in another format 1 Click File, Save As. 2 Type the filename in the Filename text box. 3 Choose a file type from the File Type list box.


659

When you use unique Quattro Pro features like linking or presentation-quality graphics, you may see a warning when you try to save the file to a format other than Quattro Pro version 9 format. The warning lists the features that will be lost when the file is saved. To retain the features, save the file as a QPW v9 (*.QPW) file. The entire file is saved when saving the file in the .WK3, .WK4, and .XLS (Microsoft Excel versions 5, 7, and 97) file formats. When saving in any other formats, only the contents of the current sheet (or if it is empty, the first non-empty sheet) are saved.

Changing the size of your notebook When you do not need to use the more than 18,000 spreadsheets in a notebook, you can specify how many spreadsheets Quattro Pro should include. Limiting the size of your spreadsheet makes the scroll bars more useful and protects you from writing data outside of the desired range. You can limit the size of a spreadsheet by specifying the number of rows and columns. You can limit the size of a notebook by specifying the number of spreadsheets.

To increase or decrease the notebook size 1 Click Tools, Settings. 2 Click the Compatibility tab. 3 Type the number of spreadsheets to include in the Sheet text box (do not exceed 18,278). 4 Type the number of columns to include in the Columns text box (do not exceed 18,278). 5 Type the number of rows to include in the Rows text box (do not exceed 1,000,000).

To specify a minimum number of sheet tabs to display 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in the previous procedure. 2 Type the number of spreadsheet tabs to display in the Minimum Number To Display text box. Any changes you make in the compatibility tab become the default settings for the program.

660


To be fully compatible with the Microsoft Excel 97 notebook size, choose Quattro Pro 9 or Microsoft Excel 97 from the Compatibility Options list. To be fully compatible with the Quattro Pro 8 notebook size, choose Quattro Pro 8 from the Compatibility Options list.

Importing, inserting, and combining files Quattro Pro can import text files and distribute their contents into columns and rows. Every sheet in the imported file that contains data is placed on a new sheet in the active notebook. If only one sheet is inserted, the sheet is given the name of the inserted file. If multiple sheets are inserted, the new sheets are named in the default letter sequence. If a text file has not been saved with tabs, the text in each row appears in a single cell in Quattro Pro. However, you can rearrange text as you insert the file. This is called parsing a file.

Parsing data If a file’s data is not delimited with tabs, you can specify how to arrange it into columns when you open it. Arranging data into columns and rows is called parsing. For example, you can parse a column of long labels into two or more columns of data. The Quattro Pro QuickColumns command automatically parses text from a file into columns. You can use the QuickColumns Expert to import a text file and rearrange the text into columns at the same time. For more information, see “Importing and parsing data” on page 664.

Inserting a file You can insert a file into an active notebook. This lets you specify a location for the inserted data.

Importing text files Quattro Pro lets you import both delimited and fixed-width text files. When you import text, you can specify how the text should be arranged on the spreadsheet. This is called parsing. You can customize parse settings, save the settings, and load them when parsing new files.

Using Paste Special You can use Paste Special to paste selected data as text only or save the file in plain ASCII text file format without any control codes or other word Managing files and data

661

processor formatting. For more information, see “Importing data using Paste Special” on page 668.

Importing text files You can import text files and specify parse settings — how the text is arranged on the Quattro Pro spreadsheet. Before you open a text file in Quattro Pro, remove any special formatting such as bold, underlining, or centering by saving your file as text only. For more information on the Parse settings, see “Importing and parsing data” on page 664.

To import text files 1 Click File, Open. 2 Choose ASCII Text (*.TXT) from the File type list. A text file can have any extension except one reserved for other file formats. 3 Select a text file. The QuickColumns Expert appears. 4 Choose one of the following parse settings from the Parse Settings list: Automatic — automatically determines how best to parse your imported text file Delimited auto — automatically parses imported delimited text files Fixed width auto — automatically parses imported fixed-width text. Make sure no lines in the file are larger than 4KB, the maximum size of a cell. Lines larger than the 4KB limit are not imported. If the total number of lines (rows) you import exceeds the limit of the number of rows you specified for your spreadsheet in Tools, Settings, Compatibility, QuickColumns displays an error message and truncates the data to this limit. QuickColumns does not automatically parse into the next spreadsheet. To print a file as ASCII text, save the document in ASCII format, then click File, Print.

662


Importing tab-delimited text files When you open a text file that includes tabs indicating new segments of data, Quattro Pro starts a new column each time it encounters a tab in the text. Files must be unformatted and saved as plain ASCII text files without any control codes or other word-processor formatting. Before you open a text file, remove any special formatting characters such as bold, underlining, or centering. A text file delimited by tabs is sorted into columns and rows when opened in Quattro Pro.

To import tab-delimited text files 1 Click File, Open. 2 Choose ASCII Text (*.TXT) from the File Type list. A text file can have any extension except one reserved for other file formats. 3 Choose a text file.

To save a tab-delimited text file 1 Select a cell on the sheet you want to save. 2 Click File, Save As. 3 Type a filename, with the extension .TXT. 4 Choose ASCII Text (tab delimited) from the File Type list. Only the contents of the current sheet (or, if it is empty, the first non-empty sheet) of a notebook are saved. Make sure no lines in the file are larger than 4KB, the maximum size of a cell. Lines larger than 4KB are not imported.


663

You can combine data in a tab-delimited text file with data in the active notebook by combining files. You can also insert data in a tab-delimited text file and perform operations with data in the active notebook. For more information, see “Combining files using Paste Special” on page 669. To print a file as ASCII text, save the document in ASCII format, then click File, Print.

Importing and parsing data The QuickColumns Expert imports data and parses it automatically. Quattro Pro determines options for the type of file you are parsing. However, you can change the options at any time. QuickColumns options lets you customize how fixed-width or delimited text files are parsed.

To import a text file using QuickColumns 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, QuickColumns. 2 In the Text Source text box, click one of the following buttons: Pointer —to select cells on the spreadsheet Browse —to locate a file 3 In the Destination text box, click the Pointer button to select a location for the imported data. The Destination text box lists the active cell in the spreadsheet. Instead of specifying all the destination cells, you can specify one cell in which to begin inserting the parsed cells. 4 From the Parse Settings list, choose one of the following parse settings Automatic — automatically determines how best to parse your imported text files Delimited auto — automatically parses imported delimited text files Fixed width auto — automatically parses imported fixed width text. 5 Click Format to view how data appears in the spreadsheet. You can save and load your parse settings for future use. For more information, see “Customizing parse settings for delimited text files” on page 665.

664

Corel XXXX: Chapter 21

Customizing parse settings for delimited text files You can import text and specify delimiters that determine how the text is parsed.

To customize parse settings for delimited text files 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, QuickColumns. 2 In the Text Source text box, click one of the following buttons: Pointer —to select cells on the spreadsheet Browse —to locate a file 3 In the Destination text box, click the Pointer button to select a location for placing the imported data. The Destination text box lists the active cell in the spreadsheet. Instead of specifying all the destination cells, you can specify one cell in which to begin inserting the parsed cells. 4 In the Parse Settings list box, choose Delimited Auto. 5 Click the Settings button. 6 In the General section, enable any of the following check boxes: Apply Formatting To Spreadsheet — automatically applies the existing spreadsheet formatting to the imported text Set Spreadsheet Column Widths — automatically applies the existing spreadsheet column width to the imported text Set Page Length To — lets you type the number of lines per page in the Lines text box Text Qualifier — lets you select the character you want Quattro Pro to identify as a label indicator 7 Enable check boxes to establish delimiters (data breaks) in each of the following categories: End of Cell — establishes the selected character or characters as the start of a new cell within a row End of Row — establishes the selected character or characters as the start of a new row End of Sheet — establishes the selected character or characters as the start of a new spreadsheet


665

To save parse settings 1 Follows steps 1 to 7 in the above procedure. 2 Click the Save button. 3 Type a filename with a .QPX extension to save your current settings.

To load previously saved parse settings 1 Click the Browse button beside the Parse Settings list box in the Quick Columns Expert dialog box. 2 Locate the .QPX file you want to load. 3 Click Open.

Customizing parse settings for fixed-width text files When you parse a fixed-width file, you can choose options for how the data is displayed.

To customize parse settings for fixed-width text 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, QuickColumns. 2 In the Text Source text box, click one of the following buttons: Pointer —to select cells on the spreadsheet Browse —to locate a file 3 In the Destination text box, click the Pointer button to select a destination location for the imported data. The Destination text box lists the active cell in the spreadsheet. Instead of specifying all the destination cells, you can specify one cell in which to begin inserting the parsed cells. 4 In the Parse Settings list box, choose Fixed Width Auto. 5 Click the Settings button. 6 To customize fixed-width text, enable the following check boxes: Skip First Character — skips the first character in each line of text Ignore Nonconforming Rows — unwraps lines before parsing. For example, if the text was generated by an application that wrapped text lines that exceeded 80 characters, check this option and type 80. Join Broken Lines At ## Characters — skips lines in the text that the QuickColumns Expert cannot parse. Otherwise these lines are copied into the destination cells as unparsed labels.

666


Formatting imported text files Quattro Pro lets you preview and fine-tune the formatting for imported text files. The preview pane lets you change the column width, alignment, and numeric format of parsed columns, and skip rows. Vertical lines in the preview area (called column breaks) show where data is divided into columns. The scroll bars let you scroll to view the entire file.

To access the QuickColumns Expert 1 Click Tools, Data Tools, QuickColumns. 2 Choose the file you want to import into Quattro Pro.

To adjust column width 1 In the QuickColumns Expert dialog box, click the Format button. 2 In the column heading, move the pointer over the border until it turns into a double arrow. Drag the border until the column reaches the desired width. When you adjust columns that contain fixed-width text, the adjustment may change where the data is placed in the destination cells. When you adjust columns that contain that contain delimited text, the adjustment resizes the entire column and does not affect where the data is placed.

To change column format 1 In the QuickColumns Expert dialog box, click the Format button. 2 In the preview pane, select the column you want to adjust. 3 In the format list boxes immediately above the pane, choose options for alignment and data type.

To change row format 1 In the QuickColumns Expert dialog box, click the Format button. 2 Select one of the following options for parsing an individual line: Parse (the default) — parses the row Skip — skips the row Label — copies the row as an unparsed label to the destination cells Managing files and data

667

Click the Break Data Flow Control button to insert a row, column, or spreadsheet into your parsed text file. Click the Merge Data Control button to remove the delimiter and, therefore, the column break. The data merges into the first cell selected. Click the Transpose Data Control button to switch columns with rows. Click the Delimiter to Text button to remove columns and move the selected text into the first sell selected. However, the delimiter remains to separate text. Click the Revert Text button to restore the original parse.

Importing data using Paste Special You can use Paste Special to import data as text only. For more information on Paste Special, see “Using the Paste Special command” on page 173.

To import data as text only 1 In the source application, select the data you want to paste into Quattro Pro. 2 Click Edit, Copy. 3

In Quattro Pro, click Edit, Paste Special.

4 In the As list box, choose Text Only. 5 Enable the Paste button.

Inserting a file into a notebook You can insert a file into a notebook; this pushes existing spreadsheets back to make room. Only files containing data are inserted. Text imported with Insert, File inserts each line of text into a single cell. To choose how the imported data is arranged, use the QuickColumns Expert to parse the data into multiple cells. For information about parsing data, see “Importing and parsing data” on page 664. Every spreadsheet in the inserted file that contains data is placed in a new spreadsheet in the active notebook. If only one spreadsheet is inserted, the spreadsheet is given the name of the inserted file. If multiple sheets are inserted, the new sheets are named in the default letter sequence. You can also insert a file at a specific cell by combining files using Paste Special. For more information, see “Combining files using Paste Special” on page 669.

668


Inserting files You can insert other Quattro Pro files, or files from other applications, into a Quattro Pro notebook.

To insert a file into a notebook 1 Make sure the file you want to insert is closed. 2 Click Insert, File. 3 Choose a filename or browse to locate the file. To insert a file from another application, include its filename extension. 4 In the Before Sheet text box, type the location before which you want to place the inserted file. If the file is inserted within the boundaries of a named selection of cells, or cells referenced by a formula, references expand to include the new spreadsheets. If inserting a file expands a named selection of cells or cell reference beyond the limit of a notebook (beyond spreadsheet ZZZ), the reference becomes ERR. If the file has a password, you will be prompted to enter it before the file is inserted.

Combining files using Paste Special By combining files, you can copy all or part of a notebook into any area of the active notebook. Combining files does not erase the active notebook; however, the inserted file overwrites the destination cells, even if they are protected.

Combining files using Paste Special math operations When you combine data, you can add, subtract, multiply, or divide cells with those of another notebook. Adding data is useful for combining files for a cumulative total. For example, you could compile year-to-date figures from monthly notebooks to create a cumulative notebook showing year-to-date expense totals. When you combine files with math operations, keep the following in mind: In the active notebook, cells that contain labels, formulas, ERR, or NA are not altered by the incoming data. Managing files and data

669

When adding incoming values to those in the notebook, you can specify that all incoming formulas convert to their end values, and that labels and blank cells be ignored. Formulas resulting in ERR, NA, or strings can be also ignored. References in formulas adjust to reflect their new positions, even when they are absolute. (Absolute formulas remain absolute in the new notebook after their initial adjustment; they retain the dollar signs ($), but their references adjust.) If a formula refers to cells outside of the selection being copied, the result may be inaccurate. Value entries in the destination cells of the receiving notebook are replaced by the results of the mathematical operation you choose to perform with the original and incoming values. If you don’t choose any mathematical operation, a normal paste is performed. Named cells are converted to cell coordinates when they are copied to avoid confusion with names in the open notebook. Column widths in the destination notebook can be adjusted to correspond to incoming source data. You can also perform arithmetic operations between cells with notebook links. For more information on notebook links, see “Creating notebook links” on page 682. To combine blocks in the same notebook with a variety of statistical spreadsheet functions, such as @SUM, see “Consolidating data” on page 224.

Combining files using math operations You can add, subtract, multiply, or divide cells from one notebook with those of another. Before you combine files, you should prepare both your source and destination notebooks. Inserted cells from another notebook can contain formulas as well as values. You can choose to copy either the formulas or the resulting values. To prepare for combining files, note the following guidelines: Save the destination notebook so that you can close and reopen it if you do not get the results you want from combining notebooks. If you are combining only part of a file with the current notebook, find out the cell name or coordinates you will be copying.

670


Make sure you set up the source and destination areas similarly. For example, put headings in the same position. Data that is pasted takes on the properties of the open notebook, retaining only its numeric format. Check that the receiving notebook contains only values where you are combining data. If cells contains formulas, convert them to values (with Edit, Convert to Values) before using a mathematical operation. The mathematical operation will not occur in cells with formulas or labels.

To combine data from two files using math operations 1. In the source notebook, select the data you want to paste to the destination notebook. 2. Click Edit, Copy. 3. In the destination notebook, select the cell where you want the upper-left corner of the source file to be pasted. Make sure you have enough space so data will not be overwritten unexpectedly. 4. Click Edit, Paste Special. 5 In the Operation section, enable one of the following buttons: None — inserts the contents of the incoming file Add — adds the incoming values to the existing values Subtract — subtracts the incoming values from the existing values Multiply — multiplies the incoming values by the existing values Divide — divides the existing values by the incoming values 6 Click the Paste button.

To copy formulas’ resulting values instead of the formulas themselves In the Paste Special dialog box, enable the Formulas As Values button. When performing math operations, you can only paste (Link is not available). Subtracting subtracts the Clipboard contents from the current selection. Dividing divides the Clipboard contents into the current selection. Any destination cells are overwritten, even if they are protected.


671

Linking and embedding objects Quattro Pro lets you use Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to import and export projects and objects. You can use data and objects from one application in a different application, either by embedding or linking. For example, you can embed a Quattro Pro chart in a word processing document so that the chart updates automatically to reflect changes to the spreadsheet data. Object linking and embedding works through two client-server protocols: OLE and Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). DDE allows two applications running simultaneously to interact. This version of Quattro Pro supports OLE 2.0 as a container (client) and server, so you can edit OLE objects in place and drag and drop objects across applications to move or copy them. Quattro Pro also acts as a client and server for OLE 1.0 and DDE. You can include text, charts, graphics, spreadsheets, controls, sound clips, video clips, or any file type created by an OLE or DDE compliant application in your notebooks. An OLE object can be linked or inserted, while DDE objects can only be linked. Several Quattro Pro macros can help application developers initiate and conduct DDE exchanges or “conversations.” Application developers can use Quattro Pro macro commands and other features to create and control OLE objects in other applications that support OLE automation as a client.

Linking objects When you link a file, the information resides in the source file and a linked copy of the source file exists in your notebook. When information changes in the source application, it is automatically updated in your notebook. You may want to link to a file for a large object, such as a bitmap, especially when it is used several places in a notebook, to keep your notebook file size at a minimum. Linking large objects makes your file size smaller because the object is stored in the source file, not in your file. OLE objects are inserted as actual objects and you edit the entire object. DDE links are inserted into a notebook and you can edit any part of the linked object or file.

Embedding objects When you embed an object, a copy of the object is inserted in your notebook. The copy remains separate from the original object. You can edit the embedded object without changing the information in the original object file. Likewise, when changes are made to the original object, the inserted object does not change.

672


Using link commands Link commands perform dynamic actions in response to events performed by a user. For example, a link command can be assigned to a control to display an object property or additional controls when the control is clicked. For more information about link commands, see “Attaching actions to dialog controls” on page 617. Events recognized by Quattro Pro include: clicking right-clicking pressing a key typing a new value For a comprehensive list of link events, see “Understanding link events” on page 620. Link commands also let you quickly connect a control to another control or a notebook cell. Quattro Pro provides options for keeping notebook links accurate even when one of the files (the source file or the file containing the link) is closed. Quattro Pro acts as an OLE server, so, for example, you can paste any Quattro Pro object into a WordPerfect document. You can also use OLE to link to other non-spreadsheet applications.

Troubleshooting with OLE When you click an object and receive the message Can’t Turn Into An OLE Object, there are several possible reasons: The object is not an OLE object and has no source file. This means you can use the object in the document, but you cannot edit it. The information may have been created in an application that does not support DDE or OLE linking. For example, if you are trying to link to a spreadsheet or database application, you should use a spreadsheet or database link. You can use the Windows Object Packager utility to create an OLE package. Consult Windows documentation. The application necessary to edit the object is not available. For example, if the object is linked to Corel Presentations, Corel Presentations must be installed. Managing files and data

673

If the OLE object doesn’t open when you double-click it, consider the following: The source application may have an open dialog box. Switch to the source application and close the dialog box. Double-click the object again in Quattro Pro. You may not have pasted the object as an OLE link or embedded object. For information on linking and embedding OLE objects, see “Linking objects” on page 674 and “Embedding objects” on page 675. Your system may not have enough resources to open the application. Close unnecessary applications or windows, then double-click the object again. If it is a linked object, make sure the source file has not been moved, renamed, or deleted. If the source file has been moved or renamed, select object, then click Edit, OLE Links, Change Source to change the source of the link.

Linking objects In Quattro Pro, you can create a link to an object in another application. For example, you can create a link to a graphic in CorelDRAW, a bitmap in PHOTO-PAINT, a memo in WordPerfect, or a slide in Corel Presentations. You must save the file to disk before you can link to it. If the file has not been saved, the link options are not available in Edit, Paste Special. To create a link to an unsaved file, switch back to the source application, save the file, then copy the selection to the Clipboard again. You can embed a file that has not been saved. In this case, the information exists only in your Quattro Pro notebook.

To link objects 1 Select a cell in the sheet approximately where you want to place the object. 2 Click Insert, Object. 3 Enable the Create From File button to link to an existing file. 4 Browse to locate the file, then choose the file. 5 Enable the Link check box. Enable the Display As Icon check box to display the object as an icon, taking up less screen space.

674


To drag an OLE object from another application into Quattro Pro, hold down CTRL while dragging the object to link to it and hold down SHIFT while dragging the object to embed it. For specific details, refer to Help for the object’s source application. You can also link to an object by dragging the object’s file from the Windows Explorer into a document, or dragging an icon that represents a data file from the desktop into a document.

Embedding objects When you embed an object in Quattro Pro, you insert a copy of the object. If you edit an embedded object, the original object does not change.

To embed objects 1 On the spreadsheet, select a cell that is located approximately where you want to place the object. 2 Click Insert, Object. 3 Enable one of the following buttons: Create New — inserts a new, unlinked object. Click an object type, then click OK. After you create the new object, click outside the OLE box to return to the notebook. Create From File — links to an existing file. Browse to locate the file, choose the file, then enable the Link check box. If you choose Create New, a new blank object appears. If the source application supports in-place editing, the object is activated for in-place editing. Otherwise, a new window opens and the source application runs in the new window. Use the source application’s editing commands and tools to create and manipulate data.

Enable the Display As Icon check box to display the object as an icon, taking up less screen space.


675

To drag an OLE object from another application into Quattro Pro, hold down CTRL while dragging the object to link to it and hold down SHIFT while dragging the object to embed it. For specific details, refer to Help for the object’s source application. You can also drag a file from the Windows Explorer into a document, or drag an icon that represents a data file from the desktop into a document.

Linking and embedding Quattro Pro objects in other applications You can link or embed Quattro Pro OLE objects into other applications.

To drag and drop a Quattro Pro object into another application 1 Select an object in Quattro Pro, for example, a chart or selection of data. 2 Drag the object into the other application using one of the following options: To embed the object, press SHIFT while dragging. To link the object, press CTRL while dragging.

To embed a Quattro Pro object in another application by copying 1 Copy data from Quattro Pro to the Clipboard. 2 Go to the destination application. 3 Use the Paste Special option, then choose one of the Quattro Pro formats to paste.

To embed a Quattro Pro object in another application by inserting 1 Select a destination application. 2 Click the Insert Object option. 3 From the server list, choose Quattro Pro Notebook or Quattro Pro Chart.

Viewing OLE source file information and resizing OLE objects You can view details about the source of an OLE object and resize OLE objects. In the OLE dialog box, Server identifies the OLE server used to create the object, Object identifies the OLE object, and Link Source identifies the source of the linked OLE object.

676


To view details of an OLE source file 1 Right-click an object, then click OLE Object Properties. 2 Click the OLE tab.

To resize OLE objects 1 Right-click an object, then click OLE Object Properties. 2 Click the OLE tab. 3 Disable the Automatic Resizing check box. 4 Drag the borders of the OLE object to resize it. You can also view source file information by selecting the object and clicking Edit, OLE Links.

Editing linked and embedded objects Any objects you link or embed can be edited. When you edit a linked object, any changes you make to the object are also made to the object in the source file. When you edit an embedded object, you can edit it in the container application, or you can open the source application, edit the object, then update the object to insert the changes in the container application.

To edit a linked or embedded OLE object 1 Right-click the object, then click the object type. 2 Click Edit. 3 Make any changes. 4 To return to the Quattro Pro notebook, do one of the following: If the Quattro Pro menus changed to let you edit the object, click outside the object box to return to the notebook. If the source application for the object opened, click File, Update, File, Exit, or the appropriate File menu option to return to Quattro Pro.


677

You can double-click most objects to edit them. However, when you double-click a sound or video clip, the clip plays. To open the source application for the object, click Open instead of Edit. Then click File, Update, File, Exit, or the appropriate File menu option to return to Quattro Pro.

Updating OLE object links You can update links manually or have Quattro Pro automatically update links to reflect any changes made in the source file.

To manually update an OLE object link 1 Select the linked object. 2 Click Edit, OLE Links. 3 Enable the Manual button.

To update an OLE object link 1 Select the linked object. 2 Click Edit, OLE Links. 3 Click the Update Now button.

To automatically update an OLE object link 1 Select the linked object. 2 Click Edit, OLE Links. 3 Enable the Automatic button.

Editing and updating DDE links DDE is a communication system used by Windows, OS/2, and Macintosh operating systems to allow two applications running simultaneously to interact. You can edit and update DDE links.

To edit DDE links 1 Open the two applications that are linked. 2 Make changes in the source file. The changes are updated in your linked notebook.

678


If you open a file that contains DDE links and all supporting DDE source applications are not open, a dialog prompts you to update the link. If you are having trouble setting up a DDE link, check the source application. The type of link you create depends on the types of links the source application supports and which format you select in Edit, Paste Special. When you click on a format, text below the format name describes how each format will appear in your document. To update DDE links, open the linked object’s source and container files in their respective applications. When you open a file that contains DDE links, and all supporting DDE server applications are not open, a dialog appears prompting you to open the corresponding application.

Changing linked OLE and DDE object sources You can change OLE links. Most objects are inserted as OLE links. Whether an object is inserted as an OLE or a DDE link depends on the source application of the object’s file and the format you selected when you inserted the object. If the linked file is moved to a different directory, you can use Edit, OLE Links, Change Source to relink to the file in its new location.

To change the source of a linked OLE or DDE object 1 Select the object. 2 Click Edit, OLE Links, Change Source. 3 Specify another file and path as the source of the link. 4 Do one of the following: For an OLE link, select the filename you want to link to. For a DDE link, change the Link Name, Application, Topic/Filename, or Item.

Converting the format of objects You can convert a linked or embedded object to a different format.

To convert an object format 1 Right-click the object, then click the object type. 2 Click Convert. 3 Enable the Convert To button. 4 Choose a format from the Object Type list. Managing files and data

679

When you convert an object, the object is permanently converted to the selected format. For example, if you convert an embedded OLE object to a picture object, you can no longer edit the object in the source application.

Converting the activation of objects Some objects can appear in more than one source application for editing when activated. If more than one activation choice is available for the object, you can click Convert To, then check Activate As to change the current activation effect.

To change an object’s activation effect 1 Right-click the object, then click the object type. 2 Click Convert. 3 Enable the Activate As button, then select a format from the Object Type list. When you click OK, the object is set to activate in the selected server.

Changing the OLE object to an icon You can display an object as an icon. In this format, the object takes up very little space until you need to view or edit it.

To change the OLE object to an icon 1 Right-click the object, then click the object type. 2 Click Convert. 3 Enable the Display As Icon check box, but do not change the format in the Object Type list. To change the OLE object back, disable the Display As Icon check box. To change the icon, click Change Icon.

Importing and exporting graphic formats You can enhance your charts, maps, slides, and spreadsheets with graphics in the most popular graphics formats. You can also export the entire contents of a chart window into other file formats. The exported file can be used in other programs or sent to a 35mm slide service bureau for processing.

680


Graphic formats for importing You can import or export graphics files in any of these formats. You should install the required filters when you install the application. Format

Description

.BMP

Bitmap — the format used in Windows paint programs such as Paint, and the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper.

.CDR

CorelDRAW — the filename extension for files created in CorelDRAW.

.CGM

Computer Graphics Metafile — the most common vector-based clip art format. To install .CGM import, you must select it under Accessories during a custom installation.

.CLP

QP DOS Clipboard — a graphic format used by Quattro Pro for DOS.

.CPT

PHOTO-PAINT — the filename extension for bitmap files created by PHOTO-PAINT.

.EPS

Encapsulated PostScript — the file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output, plus a bitmap of the image for lower-resolution screen display. (If the .EPS file does not contain a bitmap image, you cannot import it into Quattro Pro.)

.GIF

Graphics Interchange Format — a bitmap format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards.

.JPG

JPEG Bitmap — a standard format developed by the Joint Photographers Experts Group, allowing the transfer of files between a wide variety of platforms, using superior compression techniques.

.PCX

PC Paintbrush — a bitmap format supported by many programs, including Paint and Quattro Pro for DOS.

.PIC

Lotus PIC — the chart format used in the DOS versions of Lotus 1-2-3.

.TGA

Truevision Targa bitmap — the extension for files in Targa format, a bitmap format commonly used to store digitized color photographs.

.TIF

Tag Image file format — a bitmap file format often used for scanned or gray scale images. Because .TIF files can be large, they are often compressed.

.WMF

Windows Metafile — a file format used by many Windows programs.

.WPG

WordPerfect Graphic — a graphic format used by Corel Presentations.

Graphic formats for exporting You can export to the following file formats: Managing files and data

681

Format

Description

.BMP

Bitmap — the format used in Windows paint programs such as Paint, and the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper.

.CGM

Computer Graphics Metafile — the most common vector-based clip art format.

.EPS

Encapsulated PostScript — the file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output, plus a bitmap of the image for lower-resolution screen display.

.GIF

Graphics Interchange Format — a bitmap format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards. .GIF files can be exported only if the user is in 256 color (or less) mode.

.JPG

JPEG Bitmap — a standard format developed by the Joint Photographers Experts Group, allowing the transfer of files between a wide variety of platforms, using superior compression techniques. .JPG files can export only in true color mode (available when using the High Color (16 bit) color palette).

.PCX

PC Paintbrush — a bitmap format supported by many programs, including Paint and Quattro Pro for DOS.

.TIF

Tag Image file format — a bitmap file format often used for scanned or gray scale images. Because .TIF files can be large, they are often compressed.

.WMF

Windows Metafile — a file format used by many Windows programs.

.WPG

WordPerfect Graphic — a graphic format used by Corel Presentations.

If you are exporting a chart to send to a 35mm slide bureau, be sure to set the chart’s Aspect Ratio to 35mm Slide.

Creating notebook links Links are formulas with filenames in them. You can link to cells in another notebook, another spreadsheet that Quattro Pro supports, or a file on the Internet. The reference is live; this means Quattro Pro updates the link results when the referenced data changes. Another name for a live link is a hotlink. When you link notebooks, the primary notebook must be a Quattro Pro file. The supporting files can be in any spreadsheet format that Quattro Pro supports. A supporting file could even be an Internet file.

682


You can create links by typing them, pointing to them, or pasting them. Whenever you open a notebook that contains a link, you are prompted to update links from supporting files. However, you can update and maintain links any time. The filename precedes the spreadsheet reference and is enclosed in brackets; as in the following example: +[BUDGET]B:A15 There are several advantages to setting up notebook links instead of using multisheet notebooks:

Sharing information By linking pertinent information in different files, you can eliminate redundancy. Because Quattro Pro updates primary formulas when you make a change, your data is always up to date. By using one formula for several files or notebooks, you save disk space.

Dividing work among several people If you use linked files to perform a task, you can divide the task among several people. For example, say three users have notebooks keeping track of an employee’s Identification Number, Salary, and Hours Worked, respectively. A fourth user, whose job is to determine overtime pay, can link to these three notebooks to create a master notebook that calculates overtime pay.

Building data models by linking notebooks You can create a data model — a framework of related information built from several files — by linking files. If you access, via links, the data from other files, you can build larger models that exceed the limits of a single notebook.

Preserving portability to non-3-D spreadsheets or databases Because only one sheet of a notebook is saved when you save a notebook in some other formats, you may want to link the first sheets of different notebooks instead of sheets within the same notebooks.

Naming links If you often link to certain cells, you can store the reference in a named cell (either in the active notebook or in a separate one) to simplify the process. Naming links offers several advantages:


683

To reference a different file or different cells, you need to edit only the reference in the named cell, not each individual link. If the link statement is long, you can choose a short name to reference instead of typing the entire link statement. Suppose you often reference the total of cells F12..F36 on sheet B in the file BUDGET. Instead of typing @SUM([BUDGET]B:F12..F36) wherever you want that sum, you can name a cell TOTAL, and type @SUM([BUDGET]B:F12..F36) in the cell. Wherever you want that sum, you can type +TOTAL instead of typing the full link. When you move a named cell in a supporting notebook while the primary notebook is closed, the primary notebook is updated to reflect the change the next time you open it. For links that refer to cell addresses, the primary notebook is not updated.

Linking to closed notebooks A file does not have to be open for you to link to it. You can type a link to a closed file. When you open a primary notebook, you can enable the Update References button from the dialog box that appears. This loads only the linked values from supporting files, leaving the supporting files closed. This is useful if you do not have enough memory to open the linked files. Linking closed files has one disadvantage: you cannot update links to closed files. For best results, structure linked files hierarchically, with links that flow only one way. Then you can work on one file at a time. As long as you start with the file at the bottom of the hierarchy and proceed upward (choosing Update References for each file you open), the values are always correct. If you are revising notebook A (which has a link to notebook B) on a network, and someone else is revising notebook B, the primary notebook, click Edit, Links, Refresh Links after that person saves and closes B to update the links in notebook A.

Moving and copying links These rules apply when you copy and move notebook links: When you copy a link, relative cell references in the formula adjust like other cell addresses. Relative cell references change to reference position, while absolute cell references stay the same. For more information on relative cell references, see “Setting cell addresses” on page 150. When you copy a link from one notebook to another, the link remains, even if you copy it into the notebook it references. When you move a link into the notebook it references, Quattro Pro removes the link, leaving only the sheet and cell reference.

684


If you move a formula to another notebook without moving the cells it references, Quattro Pro creates a link to the original notebook. When you move cells in a supporting file, any links to it in open primary notebook adjust accordingly. However, links in closed files are not updated. To avoid this problem, use cell names in links when possible. Each time you open a primary notebook, cell names that have been moved are updated.

Typing a notebook link When you type a notebook link, type a plus sign (+) as the first character in the cell when the link is the first item in the cell, so the reference is not interpreted as a label. You should also follow this format: +[Drive:\Path\Filename.Extension]Sheet:Cell reference For example, the following link statement enters the value from cell B9 on sheet C in the BUDGET.QPW file from the C:\ARCHIVE folder into the active cell: +[C:\ARCHIVE\BUDGET.QPW]C:B9 The link address is composed of the following: drive — the drive containing the file. This is necessary only if the file you are referencing is not on the same drive as the primary notebook. path — the path to the folder containing the file. This is necessary only when the file is not in the same folder the primary notebook. filename — the name of the file. extension — a three-letter suffix separated from the filename by a period (.). It is necessary only when the file has a different extension from the primary notebook. sheet — any valid sheet name, sheet range, or group name (such as C, Sales, D..F, or YearToDate). cell reference — any valid cell address, pair of coordinates, or cell name. However, cell coordinates are valid only when the link contains a spreadsheet function to operate on the cells. The link in the example above (beginning with +) simply links the active cell with the referenced cell. If you keep all linked files in the same folder and use the same extension for each, you only have to enter a filename for links. This is because the default drive, path, and extension are the same as those of the primary notebook. Also, when you move all linked files to a different folder, you do not need to edit the references.


685

You can type a link to a closed file. For more information, see “Linking to closed notebooks” on page 684. Because link statements are not case sensitive, you can enter all parts of the link in either uppercase or lowercase. Do not include blank spaces in any part of the reference.

Linking notebooks by pointing to cells You can establish a link by simply pointing to the link in the source notebook. Make sure both notebooks are open. You can open Quattro Pro notebooks, spreadsheets in other formats, or a file on the Internet.

To link notebooks by pointing to cells 1 Click File, Open to open the notebook in which you want to create a link. 2 Select a cell and type a plus sign (+). 3 Activate the supporting file by clicking its name on the Application Bar. 4 Click the cell that contains the link you want to place in your primary notebook. If there is more to the formula, finish typing it. 5 Press ENTER. The selector returns to its original place in the primary notebook and enters the cells (along with the linked file’s filename) in the input line. You can also activate the target notebook by clicking anywhere in the notebook (if your notebooks are tiled side-by-side), or by clicking Window and choosing the window from the numbered list at the bottom of the menu.

686


To add more to the formula after pointing to a cell in a target notebook, click in the input line instead of pressing ENTER. You return to the formula cell where you can finish the formula. If you are entering a spreadsheet function (such as @SUM) that allows multiple cell references, you can type a comma (,) after the first cell reference (which returns you to the primary notebook), then point to the next cells in any notebook. After the last one, type “)” (close parenthesis) to complete the spreadsheet function, then press ENTER to complete the formula. For example, your formula might look like this: @SUM([NOTEBK1]A:A1,[NOTEBK2]A:B1)

Pasting a notebook link You can copy and paste a notebook link. Each pasted cell contains a formula beginning with a plus sign (+) followed by the filename in brackets (if different from the active notebook) the sheet name and a colon (if different from the active sheet) the cell address You can create notebook links between Quattro Pro and other applications. For example, You can write a memo in WordPerfect and link a cell in Quattro Pro to it.

To link cells by pasting 1 In the source notebook, select the cells that you want to link to. 2 Click Edit, Copy. 3 In the destination notebook, select the upper-left cell of the destination cells for the links. 4 Click Edit, Paste Special. 5 Click the Link button.

To link data between applications 1 In the source application, select the data you want to link to in Quattro Pro. 2 Click Edit, Copy. 3 In Quattro Pro, click the cell where you want to place the linked data. 4 Click Edit, Paste Special.


687

5 Choose the proper file format from the As list box. 6 Enable the Paste Link button. You can paste contiguous and noncontiguous selections.

Using wildcards for linking notebooks When you are consolidating information from several files that have the same layout, you can use wildcards to link to the same place in all of them.

How wildcards work in links You can use the wildcards question mark (?) and asterisk (*) in links. A question mark (?) stands for any single character, and an asterisk (*) stands for any number of characters. The following examples show how different wildcard characters work in notebook links: [] — looks in the active notebook [*] — links to all open notebooks [AB*] — links to all open notebooks whose names begin with AB [A*B] — links to all open notebooks whose names begin with A and end with B [A?B] — links to all open notebooks with three-character names that begin with A and end with B [AB???] — links to all open notebooks with five-character names that begin with AB

Examples of wildcard links To type a wildcard link 1 Click File, Open. 2 Open the primary notebook and all of its supporting files. 3 Close all files you do not want to reference. 4 Type a wildcard character in place of the filenames in the link to reference corresponding values in all open files. When you finish entering the link, the formula is revised to include specific filenames. This means that if you open new files after using a wildcard in a link, they are not referenced in the formula.

688


Opening files linked to the active notebook You can open closed files that are specifically linked to the active notebook.

To open files linked to the active notebook 1 Click Edit, Links, Open Links. 2 Choose any files to open. When you open files linked to the active notebook, only files that are directly linked to the active notebook are opened. If additional files are linked to those directly linked, you need to activate the directly linked files and choose Open Links again.

Updating links to unopened files You can update links to unopened files so that they reflect any changed information. Updating links is useful when you are working on a network. While you are using one notebook, others can be working on supporting files, which remain closed to you. If people announce over the network when they save or close a file, you can use Edit, Links, Refresh Links to access updated values in the primary notebook.

To update links to unopened files 1 Click Edit, Links, Refresh Links. 2 Choose any files whose values you want to access. When you refresh links to a Internet file specified by a URL, the file is reloaded from the Internet, not from a local temporary file.

Deleting notebook links To sever a notebook link, you can delete it.

To delete notebook links 1 Click Edit, Links, Delete Links. Quattro Pro displays a list of files referenced in the active notebook. 2 Choose any files whose links you want to delete.


689

Be careful when deleting links because Edit, Undo cannot restore deleted links. When you click OK, Quattro Pro replaces all link references to the selected files with ERR values, but does not remove any formulas containing ERR values. You can edit them to replace the ERR values with valid references.

Switching links from one file to another When you are using notebook links, Quattro Pro lets you switch a link to reference a different file.

To switch links from one file to another 1 Click Edit, Links, Change Link. 2 Choose the item whose links you want to change. 3 In the To edit field, type the name of the new file. All link references to the selected file change to the new filename in the active notebook. The new supporting file must have the same layout as the previous one because the same relative cells are referenced. If it does not, formulas that reference linked cells may show errors or produce meaningless values. To avoid this, enter all links as cell names so the correct values are included.

Inserting hyperlinks You can create a hyperlink in your notebook that jumps you to another file or an Internet file or site. Using QuickLinks you can automatically create hyperlinks when you type certain kinds of text. For example, when you type text that begins with “www,” “ftp,” “http,” or “mailto,” QuickLinks can automatically convert it to an Internet link. You can even modify QuickLinks to convert the link to more meaningful terms. For example, you might specify that when you type “www.corel.com,” QuickLinks should replace the visible text with “Corel” and create a link to the Corel home page at URL http://www.corel.com. You can also create Web links that let you link to a specific site on the Internet, such as a stock quote. For more information, see “Working with Web links” on page 724.

690


To insert a hyperlink 1. Select a cell on the current spreadsheet. 2. Click Tools, Hyperlink. 3. In the Text To Link box, enter a text description of the link or leave it blank. If left blank, the contents of the Link To File Or URL text box display in the cell. 4 Consider the following options: To link to another file or the Internet, enter the name of the file to link to in Quattro Pro, or the URL in the Link To File Or URL text box. To link to a cell address or bookmark in the same notebook, enter the location in the Specific Location:Cell Address or Bookmark box. You can also browse the location and point to it to select it. Enable the Use Relative Path check box to have Quattro Pro use a relative path to the file you’ve linked to. If you move a file, that contains a hyperlink, to a different directory, Quattro Pro will use the relative path (displayed beside the Use Relative Path check box), to find the link. To remove a hyperlink 1 Select the cell containing the link, then click Tools, Hyperlink. 2 Click the Remove Link button.

Using Version Control Version Control lets you control and track multiple copies of the same file. Instead of tracking updates to a file by saving new versions under different filenames, Corel Versions lets you save changes you have made to successive versions of your file. You can archive each version of a file in its own folder, or to the folder you choose, on any read/write drive. Through a history list, you can open any archived version of a file. You can compare any two files to see the text differences between them. Corel Versions can be used on a network when several people work on the same files. Each saved version shows the name of the user who archived it.


691

When you archive a file for the first time, you are not given a Comments field. Instead, you are given options to make the first version permanent, set the number of temporary versions, and use compression. When you enable the Permanent option, your file is kept until you delete it. If you do not choose the Permanent option, your file is automatically saved as a temporary version. Temporary versions of a file are replaced by newer versions when the maximum number of temporary versions for the file is reached. Version Control is available from the File menu only if you have performed a custom installation and selected the Corel Versions component in Accessories.

Archiving files Your files are archived when you choose to do so; it is not automatic. You have complete control over which versions are archived, depending on how significant they are to you (for example, first draft, version with all approved changes made, version sent to legal department, etc.,) When you enable Corel Versions, you have the option of designating a specific directory for storing your archived files. If you delete the storage folder, you also delete all of the archived files in that folder, so be very sure that is your intention. The archive files created by Corel Versions have the same folder and filenames as your files. You also have the option of keeping your archived files in the same directory as the original file. No matter where a file is archived (either in a local directory or the versions directory) the filename is the same. The Corel Versions filename is the full path of the archived file, but the special characters backslash (\) and colon (:) are replaced with a dollar sign ($). If you move an archive between the files directory and the global versions directory, Corel Versions can find it. For example, you may decide to move a file from your local directory to a shared directory so that other users can modify it. Corel Versions tracks the changes and which users made them. You can exclude certain file types (such as .EXE or .SYS files) from being archived by opening the Control Panel, double-clicking the Corel Versions icon, then entering the extensions of the file types that you want to exclude.

692


Enabling or disabling Corel Versions Corel Versions operates directly with your operating system. The icon for Corel Versions is in the Windows Control Panel. From the Control Panel, you can enable or disable Corel Versions enable your file compression options (file compression saves disk space but adds to your retrieval time for larger files) set where your archived versions are stored — in a single location or the current directory set your maximum number of temporary versions set the file types that will not be archived When you have set your options, they can be modified in the Corel Versions dialog box.

To specify settings for Version Control 1 Open the Windows Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Corel Versions icon. 3 Enable the Enable Version Control check box. 4 In the Default Maximum Number Of Temporary Versions section, choose the number of temporary versions. 5 In the Path text box, type the archive location. 6 In the File Types to Exclude From Corel Versions, specify the types of files that should not be archived. To set the archive location as the default location, enable the Default Archiving To Single Location check box. The number of temporary versions and the archive location are global settings and can be overwritten for each individual file.

Archiving and opening archived notebooks You can control and track multiple copies of the same file by archiving it. You can retrieve any file from the archived history list. By retrieving a file, you save the retrieved version in place of the current version. Once retrieved, you can use the file like any other.


693

When you retrieve a file, Corel Versions prompts you for a filename. The default filename is (V#).EXT. For example, version three of SAMPLE.DOC would be SAMPLE(V3).DOC.

To archive a file for the first time 1 Open a file to archive 2 Click File, Version Control, Save Current. 3 Consider the following options: To save this version of the file as a permanent copy, enable the Make First Version Permanent check box .This is a useful option if the file is fairly complete; otherwise it is not necessary. To compress your saved versions, which saves disk space but adds to your retrieval time for larger files, enable the Use Compression check box. To save the archive to the directory specified in the Enable Versions dialog, enable the Save Version To Single Location check box. If this check box is not enabled, the archive is stored in the same directory as the original file. To set the maximum number of temporary versions that you can archive at one time, choose a number from the Maximum Number Of Temporary Versions list box. This number is not affected by the number of permanent versions you choose to keep.

To save versions of the archived file 1 Click File, Version Control, Save Current. The new version should appear in the Comment box. 2 Consider the following options: To attach a comment to the version, type the comment in the Comments box. To keep a copy of this version for future use, enable the Permanent check box. Permanent copies are in addition to temporary versions. You can archive a file as a temporary or a permanent version. Temporary versions are replaced by newer versions when the maximum number of temporary versions for the file is reached. Permanent versions are kept until you choose to delete them.

694


To change the maximum number of temporary versions for a file, open the Windows Control Panel, click the Control Versions icon, then specify the number you want in the Default Maximum Number of Temporary Versions text box.

To retrieve an archived version of the current notebook 1 Click File, Version Control, Retrieve Current. 2 Select the file or the version of the file you want. You can scroll to the right to see any Comments associated with the version. 3 Click the Retrieve button.

Comparing files You can compare any two files in the archived history list. Corel Versions displays the two files side by side in a text viewer.

To compare files 1 Open the folder where the file is located, using Windows Explorer. 2 Right-click the filename, then click Properties. 3 Click the Corel Versions tab. 4 Highlight the version to compare. 5 Click the View or View Multiple button. To compare an older version of a file with the current version, simply select the older version from the list, then click View Multiple. The newest version is automatically loaded for comparison.

Sending a notebook by email Once you’ve saved a notebook file, you can send it via email. If you have an email application installed on your system or network, you can access it from within Quattro Pro.

Sending a notebook by email You can send a notebook by electronic mail (email) from within Quattro Pro.


695

To email the current file 1 Click File, Send To, Mail. 2 Set mail options according to your mail system. 3 Send the mail. You can send selected parts of your notebook by first selecting the parts you want, then clicking File, Send To, Mail.

696


USING WORKGROUPS AND PASSWORD PROTECTION

22

The Quattro Pro Workgroups tool lets you share a notebook with other users. When users make changes to the notebook, the changes go into a change history that appears as a comment for the cell affected by the changes. Changes can be accepted or rejected when the notebook is reviewed. You can also use the Workgroup tool to compare two different notebooks. Issues regarding document security have become increasingly important. With the introduction of the Internet, the corporate intranet, and collaborative file sharing, the ability to keep confidential information secure is an essential component of many applications. Quattro Pro provides several levels of password security for your notebooks.

Using Workgroups The Workgroup tool makes it possible for multiple users to share a single notebook. Users who have network access can enter and edit data in the shared notebook. The user who reviews the notebook can view a history of the changes and choose whether to accept them. You can also compare two different notebooks using Workgroups. Comparing notebooks is a useful tool for analyzing trends. For example, if you have two notebooks for recording monthly sales for a particular item during two different years, you can compare sales trends by month.

Using Workgroups and password protection

697

Users can also send messages to each other. When a user opens, saves, or reviews a shared notebook, any messages addressed to him or her appear.

Sharing notebooksSharing notebooks Some projects require input from several sources. Sharing a notebook is a convenient way of giving multiple users access to a single notebook. All users can make changes to cell data, but Quattro Pro remembers what each user enters in each cell. During a notebook review, all changes can be viewed and accepted or rejected.

Updating notebooks You can determine when Quattro Pro updates changes made to a notebook. You can have Quattro Pro update the notebook each time you save it, and if required, at regular intervals. If you let Quattro Pro automatically update a notebook at specified intervals, you can also choose whether Quattro Pro updates only the changes others make, or the changes both you and others make. When a notebook is shared, Quattro Pro keeps track of all of the changes. You can choose how many days Quattro Pro keeps a change history.

Conflicts If two users have a notebook open at the same time, a conflict arises if one user saves changes and the second user attempts to edit the data that has just been saved. When the second user attempts to save the notebook, a conflict dialog box displays a warning that the data the second user is attempting to save has been previously changed and saved. The second user can then review the changed data and consider whether to keep the first user’s changes.

Cell comments In Workgroups, cell comments provide a history of changes made to a specific cell. These comments appear when you move the pointer over a cell that contains changed data. Such cells are flagged by a comment marker when this display feature is enabled. For information about enabling or disabling comment markers, see “Displaying special Quattro Pro features” on page 68.

698


Setting up a shared notebook Quattro Pro provides setup options to facilitate notebook sharing. You can specify how and when notebooks are updated, choose the number of days Quattro Pro keeps changes to the notebook, and determine how notebook conflicts are resolved. If you want to share your notebook, make sure the notebook file is available on a network drive.

To set up a notebook for sharing with other users 1 Click Tools, Workgroup, Sharing. 2 In the Notebook Sharing dialog box, enable the Enable Notebook Sharing check box. 3 Click OK. Quattro Pro prompts you to save your notebook. 4 Save the notebook in a shared folder that has full read and write access.

To determine how and when Quattro Pro updates changes 1 Click Tools, Workgroup, Sharing. 2 In the Updating Changes section, do one of the following: To have the changes to the notebook update only when a user saves it, enable the When Saving The Notebook button. To set a specific interval for Quattro Pro to automatically update changes made to the notebook, enable the Every ## Minutes button, then choose a time period.

To specify which changes appear in the change history during updates 1 Click Tools, Workgroup, Sharing. 2 In the Updating Changes section, enable the Every ## Minutes button and set an update interval. 3 Enable one of the following buttons: Save My Changes and Receive Others’ Changes — saves both your changes and other users’ changes during automatic updates Receive Others’ Changes Only — updates only those changes made by others during automatic updates. Your changes are recorded in the Change History only when you save your notebook


699

To specify how long changes are kept in the change history 1 Click Tools, Workgroup, Sharing. 2 In the Tracking Changes section, enable the Keep Change History For ## Days check box. 3 Choose a time period. If you disable the Keep Change History For ## Days check box, any changes you make are permanent and are not recorded in the change history.

To specify how Quattro Pro should resolve data entry conflicts 1 Click Tools, Workgroup, Sharing. 2 In the Resolving Conflicts section, enable one of the following buttons: Ask Me Which Changes To Keep — has Quattro Pro prompt you when a conflict has arisen between data you have entered in a cell and data previously entered (and saved) by another user during your session Keep The Changes Being Saved — has Quattro Pro accept the last changes saved when two users are using a notebook at the same time

Resolving conflicts in shared notebooks When two users are working on a shared notebook at the same time, neither will be aware of changes made by the other. However, when one user makes changes and saves the notebook, the second user is warned of a conflict if he or she attempts to save data that has been changed since the first user saved it. The Conflict Resolution dialog box displays to advise the second user of the conflict.

To resolve a conflict when entering data in a shared notebook 1 In the Conflict Resolution dialog box, observe the previously entered data that conflicts with yours. 2 Click one of the following buttons: Accept Mine — accepts your change Accept Other — accepts the other changes Keep Original — reverts to the original cell data

700


Accept All Mine — accepts all of your changes and rejects the others Accept All Other’s — accepts all changes previously made by another user If you want to specify that, in the event of a conflict, the changes made by the last user to save the notebook take precedence over any changes made and saved previously, click Tools, Workgroup, Sharing, then enable the Keep the Changes Being Saved button.

Showing and hiding cell comments Quattro Pro lets you choose whether cell comments display automatically, or only when you position the pointer over a comment cell.

To show or hide cell comments 1 Click Tools, Workgroup, Review Notebook. 2 Click Show/Hide Comments.

Comparing notebooks Quattro Pro lets you compare data between two notebooks, cell by cell. Comparing notebooks lets you quickly discover how your notebook data differs from another notebook’s data. For example, say you have a notebook that lists wine sales by month. A second notebook lists wine sales by month but for a different year. You can compare these two notebooks to discover sales trends.

Comparing two notebooks You can compare two similar notebooks, cell by cell, to examine changes in data. Make sure one of the notebooks you want to compare is open.

To compare two notebooks 1 Click Tools, Workgroup, Compare Notebooks. 2 In the Compare Notebook dialog box, locate the notebook you want to compare with the active notebook. Cells that differ between the two notebooks have comments added to them that explain the change. Position the pointer over these cells to access the Change comments.


701

Reviewing notebooks When changes are made to a shared notebook, you can use the Review option to see which of the changes to keep or discard. For example, you can accept all changes made by a particular user and discard all changes made by another. Reviewing a notebook allows you to restore original data that was changed after the notebook was shared. Quattro Pro provides a Review toolbar to help you review a shared notebook. This toolbar consists of the following buttons: Review Start/Stop — starts and ends the review process. When you click this button, all cells in the notebook whose contents have been changed display the latest saved data with comments describing the changes. Changed cells are identified by a thick border. Select Colors — lets you assign different colors to the users who have edited the document so that cells modified by different users have different border colors. User List — gives the reviewer the option of selecting which user changes to review. The default option is All. Previous Cell — takes you to the previous cell that was changed when the notebook was shared. This tool is useful for navigating through changed cells. Next Cell — takes you to the next cell that was changed when the notebook was shared. This tool is useful for navigating through changed cells. Accept — accepts the change currently displayed in the selected cell. In case of multiple changes to a cell, a dialog box prompts you to select which change to accept. All other changes made to the cell are discarded. Accept All — accepts all changes currently displayed in the shared notebook. Reject — rejects the change currently displayed in the selected cell. When only one change is made to the cell, the original value is restored. Otherwise, a dialog box prompts you to select the change to reject. Reject All — rejects all changes currently displayed in the shared notebook. The cells revert to their original data. Cell Comments — displays all comments in the notebook.

Reviewing a shared notebook You can review notebooks and decide which changes to accept. During a review, edited cells are flagged by a red triangle in the upper-right corner.

702


When you move the mouse over a tagged cell, a comment appears listing the history of changes, and you can choose which revision to accept. Although the tools you need to review a shared notebook are available from the main menu, Quattro Pro provides a Review toolbar to facilitate notebook reviewing. For a list of these tools and their functions, see “Reviewing notebooks” on page 702.

To display the Review toolbar 1 Click View, Toolbars. 2 Enable the Review check box.

To review a shared notebook 1 Open a shared notebook to review. 2 Click Tools, Workgroup, Review Notebook. 3 Click Review Start/Stop. 4 Make the appropriate edits using the Review toolbar. Take care before choosing Accept, Reject, Accept All, or Reject All. When you click any of these buttons, the change history is discarded.

Using password protection You can assign a password to a notebook so that only authorized users can open it. You can also assign a Low or Edit with Controls Only password that allows users access to specific parts of the notebook. To protect your data, you can restrict cells to certain data types or protect them from accidentally being changed.

Password level property The highest level of protection is to save a notebook with a password. Then, only users who know the password can open the notebook. You can also set lower password protection so users can open the notebook but cannot view formulas. For information about assigning password protection, see “Assigning passwords to notebooks” on page 704. You can choose from the following password levels: None — requires no password to open and use the notebook.


703

Low — requires a password to view and edit formulas in the notebook. Other users see values instead of formulas. Selected formula cells show asterisks (*****) in the input line. Medium — requires a password to display spreadsheets and the Objects sheet. To view a medium protected file, you must open Quattro Pro with a special startup option. The notebook is always hidden when it is saved and closed. This level of protection is useful for keeping macro libraries hidden. All the features of Low protection apply as well. High — requries a password to open the notebook. This option is suitable for most purposes. This is the same as saving the file with a password. Edit with Controls Only — restricts users to editing spreadsheet data through form controls only. If your spreadsheet contains form controls, you can set passwords so that users can edit the spreadsheet only through these controls. For example, say you have created an edit box form control where users can enter personal tax information in list boxes. You can set a password so that users can enter information only in the appropriate places and cannot alter the form control itself. Because the form control is linked to a spreadsheet, the data the user enters is automatically entered into your notebook. Be sure to write down the password and keep it in a safe place. If you lose it, you are locked out of part or all of the protected notebook. Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, “MYBUDGET” and “mybudget” are different passwords.

Assigning passwords to notebooks Use passwords to keep unauthorized users from editing either specific cells or your entire notebook. When the notebook is open, you can hide or show it, or edit its formulas without restriction. You can also change the password protection level. For more information about the levels of password protection, see “Using password protection” on page 703.

To assign password levels to a notebook 1 Click Format, Notebook. 2 Click the Password Level tab. 3 Enable one of the following buttons: None Low

704


Medium High Edit with Controls Only 4 Click OK. 5 Type a password in the Enter Password text box, then click OK. 6 In the Verify password text box, type the password again for verification. Be sure to write down the password and keep it in a safe place. If you lose it, you are locked out of part or all of the protected notebook.

When the notebook is open, you can hide or show it, or edit its formulas without restriction. You can also change the password protection level. If you plan to choose either the Low, Medium, or Edit with Controls Only option, you should protect formula cells first or shade them so they are easily distinguishable from data cells.

Opening password protected files If a file is password protected, you must enter a password to open it. You can also open a password-protected notebook with a startup switch. For more information about startup switches, see Startup switches for Quattro Pro in the Reference Information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

To open a password-protected file 1 Click File, Open. 2 Select a filename. 3 Type the password.

To open a medium-protected notebook using the startup option 1 In the Windows taskbar, click Start, Run. 2 In the Open box, type \QPW.EXE /s[password] [path]. For example, to open a file called TopSecurity.qpw that you have saved in MyFiles with the password SESAME, type QPW.EXE /sSESAME C:\MYFILES\TOPSECURITY.QPW 3 Click Window, Show to display the file. Using Workgroups and password protection

705

If the notebook contains a link to another notebook, the Hotlinks dialog box appears. Select a choice, then click OK.

If the password is incorrect, see if CAPS LOCK is on. You have to type the password in the same case that you saved the file with. If you are working on a network and the file you are trying to open has been opened by another user, Quattro Pro displays a Read-Only prompt. You can choose to open the file with read-only rights and save it under a different name, or cancel the operation. An alternate dialog box appears when you are using a document management system that is compliant with the Open Document Management API (ODMA) standard. The DMSPath string identifies the location of the file; it varies depending on the DMS you are using. The following is an description of the syntax used and an example of a pathname: Syntax: ::ODMA\\DMSPath Example: ::ODMA\SOFTSOL\311\TEST\10\1 (this example is for SoftSolutions)

Changing and disabling passwords If you choose Low, Medium, High, or Edit with Controls Only password protection, you can change your password. If you choose Low, Medium, or Edit with Controls Only password protection, you can disable your password so you are not prompted to enter it during the current session.

To change a password 1 Click Format, Notebook. 2 Click the Password Level tab. 3 Click the Change Password button. 4 Type the old password in the Old Password text box. 5 Type the new password in the New Password text box. 6 Type the new password again in the Confirm Password text box.

706


If the password level is set to High, you can click the Change Password button and set a new password. If the password level is set to Low, Medium, or Edit with Controls Only, the user is prompted for a valid password if it has not been previously disabled or supplied while using the file. If the password level is set to None, the Change Password button is disabled.

To disable a password 1 Click Format, Notebook. 2 Click the Password Level tab. 3 Click the Disable Password button. 4 Type the password in the Password text box. If the password level is set to High or None, you cannot disable a password. If the password level is set to Low or Edit with Controls Only, the user is prompted for a valid password when the Disable Password button is clicked. When a password is set, the password is disabled for the current session until the file is closed.


707

WORKING WITH THE INTERNET

23

Quattro Pro provides the power of spreadsheet functions combined with Internet connectivity. With Quattro Pro, you can publish your spreadsheet information to the World Wide Web using Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). You can convert charts to images, add titles and headers, frames, and add eXtensible Markup Language (XML) tags. You can also import HTML documents from the Web into your spreadsheet. Using Web linking capabilities, you can connect a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to the spreadsheet. You can have Quattro Pro update the URL at specified intervals, such as seconds, minutes, hours, or days. You can also perform Web queries. A Web query is very similar to a Web link, except that you must input search information. For example, you can use the Web Query feature to analyze how a company’s stock price changes over the course of an hour, day, or week. You can also create hyperlinks between notebooks, and between notebooks and the Internet. For more information about hyperlinks, see “Creating notebook links” on page 682.

Publishing spreadsheet data in HTML You can automatically add Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags to your spreadsheet and save the document as an HTML file using the Publish to Internet menu option. This option lets you apply basic table tags and document information such as when the document was last updated, who Working with the Internet

709

wrote the document and their email address, and the title of the document. You can also add hidden meta text to the HTML file to allow you to specify keywords to produce “hits” when users perform searches on the Internet. You can also customize the following layout and format options: layout graphic format type color settings

Saving spreadsheet data as an HTML document You can automatically turn a spreadsheet into a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) document using the Publish to Internet option. Quattro Pro automatically assigns HTML tags to the selected spreadsheet data and saves the file as an HTML document when you select this option. You can also incorporate spreadsheet data into existing HTML document templates. When you enable the Insert Only Tables And Charts Into Existing HTML File check box, Quattro Pro searches the selected file for a specific HTML tag and, when it finds this tag, inserts the selected range of cells or charts. If Quattro Pro does not find this tag, it appends the selected range of cells to the end of the HTML file.

To save spreadsheet ranges as a new HTML document 1 Click File, Publish to Internet. 2 Enable the HTML button in the Publish As section. 3 Select a range of cells using the Pointer button in the Ranges And Charts To Convert section. 4 Click the Add button. 5 Enable one of the following export options: Table — exports HTML table formatting tags Text — exports only text, excluding HTML table formatting tags 6 Type a path and filename in the Save File text box.

To save a chart as a new HTML document 1 Click File, Publish to Internet. 2 Enable the HTML button in the Publish As section. 3 Click the Chart button in the Ranges And Charts To Convert section.

710


4 Choose a chart from the Selected Chart list box, then click OK. 5 Type a path and filename in the Save File text box.

To save tables and charts in an existing HTML file 1 Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous procedure. 2 Enable the Insert Only Tables And Charts Into Existing HTML File check box. The selected ranges of cells are inserted into the file specified in the Save File text box at the tag if the file contains an HTML table, or at the tag if the file contains an HTML chart. If the specified file does not contain the or tag, the selected ranges of cells or charts are appended to the end of the file.

To remove or reorganize cell ranges or charts 1 Choose the cell range or chart from the Ranges And Charts To Convert list. 2 Click one of the following buttons: Delete — deletes the cell range from the HTML file Move Up — moves the cell range up one item in the list of ranges Move Down — moves the cell range down one item in the list of ranges You can also access the Publish to Internet option by clicking Tools, Internet, Publish to Internet.

Adding document information and hidden text When you create a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file, you can add document information such as when the document was last updated, who wrote the document and their email address, and the title of the document. You can also add meta text, or hidden text, which appears as part of the header in the HTML source code. You can write keywords related to your document in the meta text description to help users find the document when conducting a Web search. This description also appears when the document is listed in the results of a Web search.

Working with the Internet

711

You add document information and meta text as you create and save your HTML document. For information about creating and saving HTML documents, see “Saving spreadsheet data as an HTML document” on page 710.

To add document information 1 Click File, Publish to Internet. 2 Enable the HTML button in the Publish As section. 3 Do one of the following: Type a path and filename in the Save File text box. Click the Browse button to choose an existing HTML file. 4 In the Document Info section, consider the following options: To change the date on which the Web page was last updated, type the date in the Last Updated On text box. By default, Quattro Pro automatically enters the save date according to your system’s internal date. To change the name of the person who updated the Web page, type the name in the By text box. By default, Quattro Pro automatically enters the name stored in the Login setting. To specify an email address to which Internet users can send email, type the complete email address in the Email text box. To specify a title to appear in the Title Bar of the Web page, type a title in the Title text box. To insert a horizontal line before the header on the Web page, enable the Insert A Horizontal Line Before Header check box. To insert a horizontal line before the footer on the Web page, enable the Insert A Horizontal Line Before Footer check box.

To add meta text 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the previous procedure. 2 In the Meta Text section, consider the following options: To enter a header name to appear in the heading section of the HTML source code, type the name in the Header text box. To enter keywords or a description of the document, type the keywords or description in the Description Below Header text box.

712


If you entered a subject in File, Properties, Summary, it appears in the Header text box. In the HTML source code, the Header text appears as meta text in the heading section. If you entered keywords or comments in File, Properties, Summary, it appears in the Description text box. In the HTML source code, the keywords and description appear as meta text in the heading section.

Setting page layout You can change the layout options to display spreadsheet data on a single page, on a frame-enhanced page, or on multiple pages. When you select a frame-enhanced page or multiple pages, Quattro Pro creates separate Web pages only for each spreadsheet in the notebook which contains selected data to convert to Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). A frame-enhanced page is divided into three frames. One frame contains a list of hyperlinks to each Web page created. When the user clicks a hyperlink, the corresponding Web page displays in the second frame. The third frame contains the HTML document information (e.g., email address, author, date the document was last updated). You enter this information in the Document Info section of the Publish to Internet dialog box. When you select multiple pages, Quattro Pro creates a separate index page, instead of a frame, which contains hyperlinks to each Web page created. When the user clicks a hyperlink, the corresponding Web page displays in the browser.

To set page layout 1 Click File, Publish to Internet. 2 Enable the HTML button in the Publish As section. 3 Do one of the following: Type a path and filename in the Save File text box. Click the Browse button to choose an existing HTML file. 4 Click the Options button. 5 Enable one of the following buttons in the Layout Options section: Single Page — publishes cell ranges or charts on one Web page Frame-Enhanced Page — publishes cell ranges or charts using a frame-enhanced Web page Multiple Pages — publishes cell ranges or charts on multiple Web pages Working with the Internet

713

Frame-enhanced pages can only be viewed by Web browsers that support frames.

Setting graphic type and color options You can set the graphic type when you export a chart to an HTML document. For example, you can set the graphic to appear as a Graphic Interface Format (*.GIF), or as a Joint Photographic Experts Group (*.JPG). You can change the color settings of the text, hyperlinks, and background on your Web page. By default, Quattro Pro uses the color settings associated with your Web browser. However, you can use your own color settings for text, background, and hyperlinks. You can customize colors using the color settings available in the Publish To HTML Options dialog box. You can also specify the colors for text and background in your spreadsheet. You can apply a graphic (e.g., company logo) to appear in the background of your Web page as wallpaper. Quattro Pro converts colors to their corresponding Red Green Blue (RGB) hex values in the HTML document. For information about RGB hex values, see “Color control” on page .

To set graphic type 1 Click File, Publish to Internet. 2 Enable the HTML button in the Publish As section. 3 Do one of the following: Type a path and filename in the Save File text box. Click the Browse button to choose an existing HTML file. 4 Click the Options button. 5 Enable one of the following buttons in the Graphic Type section: Graphic Interchange Format (*.GIF) Joint Photographic Experts Group (*.JPG) Portable Network Graphics (*.PNG)

To customize color settings 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure. 2 Enable the Use My Color Settings button in the Color Settings section. 3 Consider the following options:

714


To change text color, choose a color from the Text Color list box. To change link color, choose a color from the Link Color list box. To change background color, choose a color from the Background Color list box. To apply background wallpaper, click the Browse button, then choose the appropriate file. If you specified text and background colors in your spreadsheet, enable the Use My Color Settings button and do not change the Text Color, or Background Color list boxes. Quattro Pro applies the colors used in the spreadsheet to the HTML document.

Using XML with Quattro Pro Extensible Markup Language (XML) is an open international standard issued by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). XML provides a platform and application-independent environment for defining document architecture and document markup. Using Quattro Pro, you can create your own XML tags automatically generate XML tags based on existing labels and headings apply XML tags to the contents of a notebook publish XML documents to the Internet With Quattro Pro, you create well-formed XML documents. However, Quattro Pro does not validate your XML documents. XML components are included in a typical installation of Quattro Pro.

Creating XML tags Quattro Pro gives you the flexibility to create or automatically generate XML tags. Cells used to create XML tags must contain text strings. XML tags cannot be created from numeric values. You can automatically create XML tags within your spreadsheet from existing labels from row or column titles You can also create duplicate tag names for selected cells or cell ranges.


715

When you automatically create XML tags for a range of cells, Quattro Pro applies the label in each row or column to all selected cells in that row or column. If you create XML tags in more than one location, Quattro Pro creates a set of tags for each set of labels. For example, if you select A1..C4 from the figure below, and create XML tags for cell ranges located under the top row and right of the left-most column, five names are created: Jan., B2..B4; Feb., C2..C4; Housing, B2..C2; Utilities, B3..C3; and Food, B4..C4. This figure is used to create tag names for cell ranges.

If you create XML tags at cell intersections, Quattro Pro adds an additional tag to each cell by combining the two sets of labels. The following is a table of the additional XML tags for this example: Cell

Name

B2

JAN._HOUSING

B3

JAN._UTILITIES

B4

JAN._FOOD

C2

FEB._HOUSING

C3

FEB._UTILITIES

C4

FEB._FOOD

To manually create XML tags 1 Select the cell or range of cells to use to create XML tags. 2 Click Insert, XML Tags. 3 Type the name of the tag in the Tag box, then click the Add button.

To automatically create XML tags from labels 1 Select the cell or range of cells to use to create XML tags. 2 Click Insert, XML Tags. 3 Click the Labels button. 4 Enable one of the following buttons:

716


Right — creates XML tags for the cell immediately to the right of any valid cells in the selected range Left — creates XML tags for the cells immediately to the left of any valid cells in the selected range Down — creates XML tags for any cells immediately below all valid cells in the selected range Up — creates XML tags for any cells immediately above all valid cells in the selected range

To automatically create XML tags from row or column titles 1 Click Insert, XML Tags. 2 Click the Generate button then drag to select the cells to tag. Include the designated labels or headings to use to create the XML tags in the selected cell range. 3 Enable any of the following check boxes: Under Top Row — creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the top row. The XML tags created are based on the labels in the top row. Right Of Left-most Column — creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the left-most column. The XML tags created are based on the label in the left-most column. Above Bottom Row — creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the bottom row. The XML tags created are based on the labels in the bottom row. Left of Right-most Column — creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the right-most column. The XML tags created are based on the label in the right-most column. Tag Cells at Intersections — creates a compound XML tag definition for each intersecting cell that includes a row and column label. The XML tags created incorporate both the row and column labels. You can automatically create XML tags using a combination of the check boxes above.


717

Displaying XML tags You can output a list of the XML tags defined in your spreadsheet. You can only output an entire list of XML tags. XML tag lists are sorted alphabetically.

To display XML tags 1 Click Insert, XML Tags. 2 Click the Output button. 3 Drag to select a destination range to display the list of XML tags. 4 Click OK.

Publishing a spreadsheet as XML You can publish spreadsheets as XML. The entire spreadsheet is selected by default. However, you can also select sections of a spreadsheet for publication.

To publish a spreadsheet as XML 1 Click File, Publish To Internet. 2 Enable the XML button in the Publish As section. 3 Type a file path and name in the Save File text box. 4 Click OK.

Working with Web queries Use a Web query to retrieve information stored on the Internet and insert it directly into your spreadsheet without using a browser. For example, you can use a Web query to retrieve the latest stock quotes from the Internet and place them in a spreadsheet table. Web queries create an automatic link between the information you retrieve and the original source data on the Internet. You can refresh the data in your table at specific time intervals to ensure that stock quotes are current. Unlike a browser, Quattro Pro lets you edit locally, the information retrieved from the Internet. Quattro Pro uses a .IQY file to run a Web query. You can use the query files provided with Quattro Pro, or you can create your own .IQY files. Sample query files are stored in the Queries folder that is installed with WordPerfect Office 2000. You can also run other .IQY files that you find on the Internet or obtain through your Web administrator.

718


When you run a Web query you can select how Quattro Pro gets the parameter value Web query options, (e.g., import only tables from an HTML file) specific data from the Web query results to insert in your spreadsheet how Quattro Pro displays updated query data the time intervals at which query data is updated

Creating a Web query You can create your own Web query using Quattro Pro. When you create a Web query, Quattro Pro automatically saves it as a .IQY file. To create a Web query, you must know the URL of the Web document on which the query will act. For example, to create a Web query that returns stock quotes for different companies, you must know the URL of the Web site where you can get this information. When you run the query, Quattro Pro contacts the site, which in turn executes a search on a database for a specific parameter or set of parameters, in this case, stock information. You can set static or dynamic parameters for your Web query. When you create a Web query with static parameters, Quattro Pro returns the queried data without prompting the user to enter a search parameter. If you set dynamic parameters, the Web query prompts the user to type one or more search parameters when it is executed. Quattro Pro also lets you insert POST parameters when you create the Web query.

To create a Web query 1 Click Tools, Internet, Create Web Query. 2 Type the URL for the Web query in the URL text box. Include the search parameters in the text string (e.g., http://quote.pathfinder.com/money/quote/qc?symobls=[“symbols”, “Enter one or several company symbols separated by spaces:”] Type a post parameter in the Post Parameters text box if the parameter is not part of the URL. 3 Click the Browse button. 4 Choose the drive to save the file from the Look In list box. 5 Double-click the folder in which to save the file. 6 Type the filename in the File Name text box.


719

Running a Web query When you run a Web query, you can put the retrieved data in a new notebook or an existing notebook. The default Web query setting lets you preview retrieved data before inserting the entire HTML file. However, when you run the Web query, you can choose to insert only certain cells in your spreadsheet. For example, if you run a query to obtain a company’s stock quotes, you can insert only the cell containing the last sale price of the stock. For information about inserting specific cells, see “Inserting Web query data into a notebook” on page 722.

To run a Web query 1 Click Tools, Internet, Run Web Query. 2 Choose the query file, then click Open. 3 Click the Data tab, then enable one of the following buttons: New Notebook — puts the Web query results in a new notebook Existing Notebook — puts the Web query results in the current notebook. Select the cell range where you want to put the new data. If you are not sure how much area you require, type the coordinates of a single cell as a starting location. 4 Click OK. 5 If the Web query prompts you to enter a parameter value, type the value in the text box, then click OK. 6 In the Web Query Preview dialog box, verify the retrieved data, then click OK. To turn off the Web query preview, in the Run Web Query dialog box on the Data tab, disable the Preview Web Document Before Loading In The Notebook check box.

Getting parameter values Queries are designed to extract information from designated fields in a database. When you run a dynamic Web query, you are prompted to enter a specific search parameter. For example, if you run the stock quote query, you are prompted to “Enter the stock symbol for a detailed quote.” Queries can search for more than one parameter and, therefore, can include more than one parameter name.

720


You can change the way in which a parameter is obtained when you run the query. For example, if you have a list of stock symbols in your spreadsheet, you can get the parameter value from the spreadsheet instead of typing the symbols at the prompt. You can change how Quattro Pro gets the parameter value when you run the query. For information about running a Web query, see “Running a Web query” on page 720.

To change how a query gets a parameter value 1 Run the Web query. 2 Click the Parameters tab. 3 In the Get The Data For Parameter Using section, enable one of the following buttons: The Following Prompt String — displays a dialog box with the instructions you enter in the text box. The dialog box appears during the query, typically the instructions prompt the user for a particular value. The Following Value — lets you specify a value (e.g., company stock symbol) by typing it in the text box. The Value From The Following Cell — lets you type the cell address or range in the notebook where a value (e.g., company stock symbol) can be retrieved.

Setting Web query options You can set options to customize how Quattro Pro runs a Web query. For example, you can customize a Web query to import only tables from an HTML file, automatically size columns to fit the retrieved data, or update retrieved data when you open the file. You set Web query options when you run the query. For information about running a Web query, see “Running a Web query” on page 720.

To set Web query options 1 Run the Web query. 2 Click the Options button. 3 Enable any of the following check boxes: Save Web Query As Web Link — creates a link between the source data and the retrieved Web query data in your spreadsheet


721

Import Only Tables From HTML File — inserts only tables from the HTML file to your spreadsheet Automatically Size Columns To Fit Data — adjusts the column width to fit the data from the HTML document Retain HTML Formatting And Layout — applies the format and layout of the HTML document to your spreadsheet (e.g., color) Refresh Data On File Open — updates the Web query data in your spreadsheet each time the file is opened

Inserting Web query data into a notebook When you run a Web query, you can insert the entire HTML file into a notebook, or choose to insert only specific cells into a notebook. For example, if you run a query to obtain a company’s stock quotes, you can insert only the cell containing the last sale price of the stock. By default, Quattro Pro inserts the entire HTML file to your notebook. Running a Web query creates an automatic link between the retrieved data and the Internet source data. If you insert the data in an existing notebook, you can replace the data each time the link is refreshed, or you can select a range of cells and insert the refreshed data in a different cell at each refresh interval. For example, you can track a company’s stock price changes over the course of a day at hourly intervals. You can then graph this information to see the overall price trend for that day. For information about setting refresh time intervals when running a query, see “Setting time intervals to update Web Query data” on page 723.

To insert specific Web query data 1 Click Tools, Internet, Run Web Query. 2 Select a .IQY file, then click the Open button. 3 Click the Data tab, then enable the Existing Notebook button. 4 Click OK. If the Web query prompts you to enter a parameter value, type the value in the text box, then click OK. 5 Select the cells to link in the Web Query Preview dialog box (the selected cells appear in the From text box). 6 In the To text box, use the Pointer button to select the cell or range of cells in your notebook to link to the Internet source data. 7 Click the Link button. (The cells selected in the previous step appear in the Link text box.)

722


8 Enable one of the following buttons: Wrap Data To Beginning Of Range — loads the source data at the beginning of a cell or cell range and replaces existing data Insert Data At End Of Range — loads the source data at the end of the cell range and shifts the previous values up or left in the range with each subsequent refresh Insert Data At Beginning Of Range — loads the source data at the beginning of the cell range and shifts all previous values down or to the right in the range with each subsequent refresh If you enable the Wrap Data To Beginning Of Range button, when the cell range is full of refreshed data, you can clear the range before loading the next value into the first cell of the range by enabling the Clear Data On Wrap check box.

Setting time intervals to update Web query data By default, when you run a Web query, you automatically create a link between the retrieved data and the Internet source data. You can refresh this link to make sure that your data is current. Quattro Pro uses a default refresh interval setting. However, you can set the refresh interval to seconds, minutes, hours or days. For example, you can set the refresh interval to update your data every hour starting at 9 a.m. and ending at 5 p.m., from Monday to Thursday. You set the refresh intervals in the Web Query Preview dialog box when you run a Web query. For information about how to run a Web query, see “Running a Web query” on page 720.

To set refresh time intervals 1 Run the Web query. 2 In the Web Query Preview dialog box, click the Link button. 3 In the Refresh Interval section, consider changing any of the following options: In the Refresh Every check box, select a unit and time interval from the list box. In the Start Refresh At check box, type a start time and select either a.m. or p.m. from the list box. In the End Refresh At check box, type an end time and select either a.m. or p.m. from the list box.


723

In the Start Day check box, choose a start day from the list box. In the End Day check box, choose an end day from the list box.

Working with Web links When you link to information on the Internet, you need to retrieve the data from the Internet site into your notebook, find the specific information to link to, and note the cell it appears in. You can then type a link in the notebook to the Internet site and cell reference. Web links work independent of Web queries. You can set automatic refresh time intervals to update your linked data or you can manually refresh the link. You can access the Web, (http), gopher, and file transfer protocol (ftp) sites. Internet files are opened for read-only access; you cannot save files on the Internet.

Creating and updating Web links Before you can create a Web link, you must first open the HTML file from the Internet into your notebook, find the specific information to link to, and note the cell in which it appears. For example, you can open an HTML file containing a company’s stock quotes, find the last sale price of the stock, and note the cell in which the price appears. You can then create a link in the spreadsheet to the last sale price information. When you create a link, you can replace the data each time the link is refreshed, or you can select a range of cells and insert the refreshed data in a different cell at each refresh interval. For example, you can track a company’s stock price changes over the course of a day at hourly intervals. You can then graph this information to see the overall price trend for that day. For information about setting refresh time intervals when running a query, see “Setting time intervals to update Web Query data” on page 723. You can update Web links manually, or at set refresh intervals. By default, Quattro Pro prompts you to refresh the links when you open a notebook that contains a link.

To create a Web link in a notebook 1 Click File, Open, then type a URL in the Filename text box. A temporary Internet file opens in your notebook. 2 Find the cell where the information to link to appears (e.g., a stock quote). Note the spreadsheet and cell reference. 3 Select the destination cell in your notebook where you want the link to appear.

724


4 Type the following: +[URL]Sheet:Cell reference. Sheet:Cell reference is where the information appeared when you opened it in a notebook (e.g., +[http://www.corel.ca/product/prod.htm]C:B9). 5 Press ENTER. 6 In the Link To text box, type the cell where you want the information to appear. You can also select the cell using the Pointer button. 7 Click OK. Web links are saved with the notebook. Click File, Save to save the notebook.

To refresh data in a range of cells 1 Select the cell which contains the Web link. 2 Click Tools, Internet, Edit Web Link. 3 In the Link To text box, select the range of cells using the Pointer button. 4 Enable one of the following buttons: Wrap Data To Beginning Of Range — loads the source data at the beginning of a cell or cell range and replaces existing data Insert Data At End Of Range — loads the source data at the end of the cell range and shifts the previous values up or left in the range with each subsequent refresh Insert Data At Beginning Of Range — loads the source data at the beginning of the cell range and shifts all previous values down or to the right in the range with each subsequent refresh

To manually refresh Web links 1 Click Edit, Links, Refresh Links. 2 Choose the link to refresh.

To set refresh intervals 1 Select the cell which contains the Web link. 2 Click Tools, Internet, Edit Web Link.


725

3 In the Web Link Options dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes: In the Refresh Every check box, select a unit and time interval from the list box. In the Start Refresh At check box, type a start time and select either a.m. or p.m. from the list box. In the End Refresh At check box, type an end time and select either a.m. or p.m. from the list box. In the Start Day check box, choose a start day from the list box. In the End Day check box, choose an end day from the list box.

Editing and deleting Web links You can edit or delete Web links in your spreadsheet.

To edit a Web link 1 Select the cell containing the Web link. 2 Click Tools, Internet, Edit Web Link. 3 Make the appropriate changes in the Web Link Options dialog box.

To delete a Web link 1 Click Edit, Links, Delete Links. 2 Choose the link to delete in the Hotlinks list box. 3 Click OK.

Linking to Internet graphics Quattro Pro lets you link to graphics on the Internet using the Drag and Drop feature. When you drag a graphic from the Web browser to your spreadsheet, you create a link to that graphic that is similar to a hyperlink. Quattro Pro supports dragging graphics from the Internet using the Netscape Navigator browser. For information about hyperlinks, see “Inserting hyperlinks” on page 690. You can also create a live image link to dynamic graphics on the Internet. Live image links are updated automatically at set refresh intervals. For example, if you create a live image link to a dynamic weather map, Quattro Pro displays the weather map as a graphic on the spreadsheet and updates the graphic with weather changes at specified refresh intervals. Quattro Pro uses OLE control technology to create these live links.

726


You must have Microsoft Internet Explorer (to change the Internet settings) and Netscape Navigator (to use the Drag and Drop feature) on your system to be able to create a live image link. Live image links work in conjunction with the Internet settings in the Windows Control Panel of your desktop. Before creating a live image link, you must change these Internet settings.

To insert a Web graphic by dragging 1 Open Netscape Navigator and the notebook in which to put the graphic. 2 Locate the URL on the Internet where the graphic resides. 3 Drag the graphic to your spreadsheet.

To change Internet settings in the Windows Control Panel 1 Click the Start button on the Windows Taskbar. 2 Click Settings, Control Panel. 3 Double-click the Internet icon. 4 Click the General tab, then click the Settings button in the Temporary Internet files section. 5 Enable the Every Visit To The Page button in the Check For Newer Versions Of Stored Pages section. 6 Click OK. Depending on what version of Microsoft Internet Explorer you are using, the Temporary Internet files section may be located in the settings option of the Advanced tab instead of the General tab.

To create a live image link to a dynamic Web graphic 1 Open Netscape Navigator and the notebook in which to put the graphic. 2 In Netscape Navigator, go to the URL that contains a dynamic graphic (e.g., stock market graph, weather map). 3 Drag the dynamic graphic to your spreadsheet. 4 Double-click the graphic. 5 In the Refresh section of the WebImage Control Properties dialog box, consider enabling one or both of the following check boxes:


727

Refresh Every — updates the live link at regular intervals according to the unit and time interval you choose from the list box. Refresh On Open — updates the live link each time you open the notebook If Quattro Pro is minimized, drag the graphic from your browser to the Windows taskbar. Quattro Pro automatically maximizes and you can drop the graphic on the open spreadsheet.

728


Index

Index !

- (operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ! in macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 #AND# (operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 #NOT# (operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 #OR# (operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 * (operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ***** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 .BMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402, 681 .CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .CFG files (Configuration files) . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 .CGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .CLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .CPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .CSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .DBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .DIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .DLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 .EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402, 681 .EXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 .GIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402, 681 .HLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 - 636 .HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 .HTML/.HTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .JPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402, 681 .PCX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .QIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654, 657 .QPW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 - 85, 654 .QPX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 .SCK files (ShortCut Key files) . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 - 72 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 .SLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .SQZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 .SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 .TGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .TIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .TXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

i

.WB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WBS (workspace files) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 .WCM file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504, 530 .WK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WK3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WK4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .WPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .WQ1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 .WQ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .XLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 85, 654 .XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 / (operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ? in macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563, 565 @ functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 @AVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 224, 287 consolidating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 using as search criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 @FV Future Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @IRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @MIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @MULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @PMT Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @PUREAVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @PURECOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @PV Present Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @SUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 @TERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 _NBEXITMACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 _NBSTARTMACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 {} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 {ASSIGN}. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 558 - 560 {BRANCH} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 {CreateObject} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558, 560 {DELVAR} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 559 {DODIALOG}. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Index

Index {EXECAUTO} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 - 560 {GETLABEL} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 {GETNUMBER} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 {GetObject} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558, 560 {IFAUTOOBJ} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 - 560 {PAUSEMACRO} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 {QUIT} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 {RETURN} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529, 565 {SETLCID} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 = (operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 100% stacked bar charts . . . . . . . . . . 317 - 318, 320 2.5-D bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 319 2-D charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 - 318, 330, 362 combination charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 doughnut . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 359, 362 line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 359, 362 multiple column . . . . . . . . . . 322, 324 - 325, 359 multiple pie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 - 323 radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 32 bit ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 35 mm slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 3-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478, 482 floating marker charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 print selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478, 482 3-D blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 range syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 - 40 3-D charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 356 area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 356 - 357 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 356 - 358 bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 319, 321 column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 356 contour . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 338 - 339, 357 - 358 depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 doughnut . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 - 323, 325 - 326 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 362 elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 floating marker . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 315 - 316 height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 multiple column . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 324, 356 multiple pie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 - 323 perspective. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 pie . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 - 323, 325 - 326 rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 shaded surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

ii

stacked bar . step . . surface . . type . . walls . . 3-D marker . 3-D text . .

A

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 317 - 318, 320 . 317, 319, 356 - 357 . . 327, 338 - 339 . . . . . 359 . . . . . 357 . . . . . 315 . . . . 410, 412

absolute addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521, 523 cell references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521, 523 absolute addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 in formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 access keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 73 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 520 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Corel Reference Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 for dialog controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 activating charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 379 activating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 273, 421, 466, 586 bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . 398, 402 - 403, 586 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 cell background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 countries to maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 - 199 database records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 date codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Index

Index date formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 275 fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 fills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 form control labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 format conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . 379, 394, 403, 409 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 HTML document information . . . . . . . . . . . 711 legend text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 legend titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 map titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 multiple spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 notebook databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 numeric formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 rows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 scroll bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452, 466 source cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 spin controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 time codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 time formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 timer controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 XML tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 adding lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 grand total columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 total columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 209 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 row height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 - 208 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 377

iii

values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 advanced regression analysis. . . . . . . . . . . 235, 242 Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 360 - 361, 455 alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 aliases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 making. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 266, 355 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 child controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644, 646 copying controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 cross tab report fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 data across cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 data horizontally. . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 - 189 data vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 dialog controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214, 475 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214, 475 joined cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 map titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 - 442 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377, 386, 410, 419 overlapping controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355, 376 tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 - 100 special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 AM/PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 198 formatting times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 amortization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 interpreting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 - 236 analysis tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 experts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 financial . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 - 236, 238 - 239 Fourier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 frequency distribution . . . . . . . . . . . 240 - 241 linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243

Index

Index new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 OLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 regression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Solve For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 statistical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 What If? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 analytical tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353, 355 analyzing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 259 cross tab report data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 259, 281 data comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 data using cross tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 field summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 OLAP source data . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 - 265 scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 and or queries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 and queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 angle of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 angled text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 409 animating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 in charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411, 415, 418 ANOVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 one way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 two way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 two way without replication . . . . . . . . . . . 235 answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 245 appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 changing font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 text color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 text size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Application Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 519, 633 Calc-As-You-Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Label status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 QuickCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 123 QuickSum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 status indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Value status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 103

iv

application properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 528 building. . . . . . . . . . . . . 501, 504, 519, 521 copying data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 creating macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 customizing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 editing macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 macros in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501, 504, 519 recording macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 using macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 date formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 fills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 predefined formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 QuickFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 SpeedFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 time formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 193 - 194 archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 - 692 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 retrieving versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 area charts . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 349 - 350, 355 area-bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 arguments . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 523, 557, 562 - 563 arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 cell values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Formula Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 numeric values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 string values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 arithmetic operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 arranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 child controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646, 650 dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 dialog controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 drawn objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Index

Index graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394, 397 grouped graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375, 379, 386 overlapping controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355, 375, 377 text boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 144, 244 @ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 as functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 as macro arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 block arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 - 146 constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 arrows drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 405 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 transparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 art in text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 - 410 artistic words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 - 410 ascending order filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426, 447 35-mm slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380, 388, 391 floating chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 full extent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 screen slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 check box properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 control properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 612 key shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 603 asterisks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 ATM font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 bitmap to button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 child control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 596, 630, 632 controls to cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 523, 525, 533 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 531 keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526, 531 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523, 531 - 533 to buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 526, 528 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 auditing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

v

errors in formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 tracing dependents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 tracing precedents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Auditing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Auditing toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 auto filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 autoformat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 autoloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 autoloading macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 automatic formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 automating data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 information entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545, 554 OLE syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 automation objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 557, 568 OLE syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 AUTOSTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 Auto-Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 116 creating formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 auto-width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 averages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Calc-As-You-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 - 122 moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 using Quick Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 weighted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 axis properties . . . . . . . . . . . 336, 365 - 366, 374

B

background . . . changing . . . colors . . . . viewing . . . backgrounds cells . . . . balance . . . . . balloon payment . . bar charts. . . . bar formats . . . editing . . . . bar options. . . . area-bar . . . bars . . . . . formatting numbers

. . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . 382 . . . 416 343, 382 - 383 . . . 418

. . . . . 184 . . . 238 - 239 . . . 238 - 239 . 317, 319 - 320, 346 . . . . . 205 . . . . . 205 . 321, 362, 376, 382 . . . . . 341 . . . . . 205 . . . . . 205

Index

Index baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 BDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 best-case scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 bin cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 bin of ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 binary files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586, 600 Clipart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414, 416, 418 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 macro button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 BKGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 black and white printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 blank cells filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 blank charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 360 block tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 BMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 681 bold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 boolean logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 362, 429 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 adding images . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 404 around cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416, 418, 608 color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 382 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429, 438 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 362 spreadsheet controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Borland database engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 299 Box Type property . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376, 382 boxes adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 braces in macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 - 563, 565 Break Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 conditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 537 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 536 Browse By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 34 bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 - 540 building . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 306, 545, 579

vi

applications . . . . . . . . . . . 504, 521, 523, 543 automation terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 565 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 child controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630, 632 cross tab reports. . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262, 264 custom dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . 580, 628, 638, 640 dialog controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581, 583 macro subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 macro syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 - 495 macros in applications . . . . . . . . . 489, 492, 501, 504 menus in applications . . . . . . . . . . 489, 504, 528 PerfectScript macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 source data for cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . 262 building charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 built-in functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 bullet charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 360, 451 editing in slide shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 slide shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451, 460 bullet lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 571, 587 add to dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 - 587 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 524, 532, 573 adding controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 assigning properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 601, 612 attaching actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 attaching to a Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 bitmap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 changing graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 changing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 displaying graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 displaying text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 graphic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 404, 410, 524 hyperlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 hyperlinks,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 in dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 581, 636 - 637 labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 576 labeling boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 launching dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 link to web site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 - 527, 601

Index

Index macros . . . . maps . . . . modifying . . . moving . . . . program. . . . Quattro Pro macros . resizing . . . . slide shows. . . toolbar. . . . URL . . . . .

C

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calc-As-You-Go . . . . displaying . . . . . hiding . . . . . . calculating . . . . . . % difference . . . . % difference from . . . % of . . . . . . % of column . . . . % of row . . . . . % of total . . . . . annuities . . . . . average . . . . . average values . . . . averages . . . . . current value of investment current values . . . . field summaries . . . . formulas . . . . . . future value of investment . grand column totals . . grand row totals . . . grand total of totals . . higest value . . . . interest rates . . . . joined cells . . . . . loan payments . . . . lowest value . . . . maximum value . . . means . . . . . . minimum value . . . mortgage payments . . . mortgages . . . . . number of payments . . present value . . . .

vii

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . 30 . . . . 524 . . . . 527 . . . . 28 . . . . 30 . . . . 30 . . . . 28 . . . . 524 . . . . 528 . 524, 526, 532

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . 121 . . . . 122 . . . . 122 116, 224, 235, 268 . . . . 271 . . . . 271 . . . . 271 . . . . 271 . . . . 271 . . . . 271 . . . . 118 . . . . 270 . . . . 118 . . . . 118 . . . . 118 . . . . 118 . . 270 - 271 . . 254 - 255 . . . . 118 . . . . 271 . . . . 271 . . . . 271 . . . . 118 . . . . 118 . . . . 178 . . . . 118 . . . . 118 . . . . 270 . . . . 118 . . . . 270 . 118, 236, 238 . 235, 238 - 239 . . . . 118 . . . . 118

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .

.

product of cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 standard deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 sums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 270 using Consolidator tool . . . . . . . . . . . 225 - 227 using Quick Math. . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 - 120 variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 calling subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 canceling print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 candidate loans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239 CAPS LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 capture area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 - 250 categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 adding projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 copying projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 moving projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 cell addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 153, 521 3-D blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 136, 152 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 in formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 126 in other notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521, 523 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 named . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 named cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 noncontiguous cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 on other spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 range of cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 136, 152 typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 cell comments printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 cell contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 cell contents in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 cell formulas printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 cell names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 494, 497 automatic selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 creating table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 in cell addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Index

Index in formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 using adjacent labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 cell references . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 521, 565 copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 inserting in formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . 521, 523, 536 - 537 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 spreadsheet functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 148 cell values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 341, 353 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 adding borders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 adding lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 adding XML tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521, 523 aligning data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 background patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 242 centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 combining styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 custom formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 - 46 dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 editing scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 erasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 filling automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 174 frequency distribution, . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 graphic formatting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 indent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 - 253 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 inserting in formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 inserting names in formulas . . . . . . . . . . . 134 joining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

viii

names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 noncontiguous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 numeric formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 - 192 outlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 173 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 QuickFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521, 523 reformatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 regression output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 251 search and replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 search output . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 selecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 selecting from dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 selecting noncontiguous. . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 tracing cell names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 tracking results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 transposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 unjoining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 wrapping text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Center Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 205 centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 435, 480 across cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 between margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 blank columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 - 189 joined cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 435 print selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 text over cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 centimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 CGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 179, 427, 679, 697 access keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 cell backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 - 184

Index

Index cell content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 comment attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 cross tab report format . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 cross tab report locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 163 - 164, 266 delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 field names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 - 269 field positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 276 font size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 215, 475 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 215, 475 linked DDE source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 linked OLE source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 macro commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 map data . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 - 428, 438, 443 margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 474 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 print scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 print size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 project descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 property settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 style properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 - 182 text color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 text font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 text orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 time formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 values displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 603 alignment characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 number allowed . . . . . . . . . . 601, 603, 609, 662 special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 603 WordPerfect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Chart Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 359 - 361 chart buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 382, 467 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 in slide shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Chart Expert . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 313 - 314 Chart Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 359 - 361 chart series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 315

ix

chart window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307, 379 - 380 charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 305, 375, 379, 384, 421 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 - 346, 353 analytical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 analytical tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353, 355 basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 362 bullet charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 - 344 categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 chart buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 chart objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 - 387, 389 - 390 creating jumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 customizing. . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 357, 359, 362 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 - 385 enhancing . . . . . . . . . 345, 362, 379, 435, 438, 447 Exponential Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 - 353 floating . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 - 307, 313, 380 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . 360, 362, 365, 375 formatting 3-D . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 357, 359 formatting HighLow . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 - 333 formatting special . . . . . . . . . . 330, 335, 341, 344 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 327, 341, 377 Linear Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 - 350, 353 - 354 managing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384, 386 master slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Moving Average. . . . . . . . . . . . 348 - 349, 353 perspective. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 proportion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 - 380 publishing XML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380, 384 - 385, 391 slide shows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 spreadsheet functions . . . . . . . . . . 346, 354 - 355 style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 345, 359, 379 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 345, 356, 359 check box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 265 source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 spelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 child controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 adding group boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 adding rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Index

Index attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 - 631 moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 unattaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 choosing charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 analytical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348, 351 mixed types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 specialized . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 330, 334, 336 surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 361 using 1 data series . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 - 324 with bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 320 with lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313, 315 choosing fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Circular Cell Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Circular Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 cities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 433 clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 cell formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 values, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 clipart printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Clipart . . . . . . . . . . . . 380, 401, 403, 435, 439 Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 169, 171, 389 Paste Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 closing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 533 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 80, 533 print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 CLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 CMYB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 197 - 198 adding dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 adding times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 197 - 198 date formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 format dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 format times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 numeric format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 time formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 collapsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 273

x

collating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 collections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 color palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 color settings HTML document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 coloring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 cell backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 sheet tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 spreadsheet tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 382, 421 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 adding patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 changing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 data in maps . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 - 428, 443 hue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 notebook palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 - 416, 588 palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 - 383 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 - 383 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 column charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 3-D Charts, multiple pie . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 doughnut charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 adding XML tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 aligning data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 bullet charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 centering blank columns . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 changing fields positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 default width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 - 46 fill series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 - 113 filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 - 223 hiding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 210 in list controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 joining cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 - 35

Index

Index parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 QuickFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 restoring defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 restricting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 revealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 selecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 43 setting number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 showing summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 transposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 columns position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 changing fields to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 combination charts . . . . . . . . . . . 340 - 341, 362 combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 224 - 225 cell properties and styles . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 225 - 227 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 queries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 values from many locations . . . . . . . . . . 225 - 227 combining files mathematical operations . . . . . . . . . . 669 - 670 combo boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 - 572 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573, 589 assigning properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 attaching to a Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 default button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 history list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 launching dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 setting properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 text properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 Comma style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 command browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 command equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . 494, 565 commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 494, 501 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498, 504 copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498, 504 keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

xi

paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 redoing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 using menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 using mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 commas formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 467, 494, 698 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 changing attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 115 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 slide shows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Workgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 common field names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 comparing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 comparison charts . . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 345, 354 compatibility Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 660 Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro. . . . . . . . . . . 86 Quattro Pro 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Quattro Pro for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 compatibility settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 51 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 file type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 notebook size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 - 540 concealing field items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 condition arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 563 conditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 breakpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 536 - 537 conditional matches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 adding formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 creating formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 format statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 setting formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 698 in shared notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 resolving Workgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Index

Index shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 connected data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 connecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 - 618 dialog box control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 consolidating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 224 adding source cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 - 227 destination cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 - 227 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 - 227 removing source cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 source cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 values from many locations . . . . . . . . . . 225 - 227 consolidation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 - 226 performing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 reusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 227 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Consolidator tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 deleting settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 editing consolidations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 reusing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 - 631 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 adding group boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 adding rectangle controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 child controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630, 632 group boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606, 614 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 parent controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 rectangle child controls . . . . . . . . . . . 630, 632 rectangle parent controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 context-sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 contiguous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 contiguous cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 contiguous selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 contour charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 - 339

xii

Control Menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504, 524, 579 actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 617 add space between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 add to dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580, 583 adding buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 adding check boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 adding color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 adding combo boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 adding group boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 adding label controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 bitmap buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 - 629 child controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 608, 614, 632 combo box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601, 614 - 615 connecting dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641, 650 creating dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 creating macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 customize . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579, 599, 637 deselecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585, 637 dialog controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 dynamic links . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 - 618 edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 edit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603, 615 editing label text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 form controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595, 606, 630 help on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 - 635 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606, 650 labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583, 590 labeling properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 limiting access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 link to action . . . . . . . . . . . 617, 619 - 620, 622 lists in. . . . . . . . . . . . . 589, 592, 594 - 595 move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 - 613, 641 object ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 616, 637 position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641, 644

Index

Index positioning label text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 612 radio buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 set parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 specify value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 - 629 spin controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . 597, 609, 615 tab controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 understanding dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546, 552, 554 initiate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545, 552, 554, 567 Convert to Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 converting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 charts to other formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 dragging page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 formulas to values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 OLE object formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 copy commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Copy Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 172 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 387, 437, 461 absolute references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 between applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 between spreadsheets. . . . . . . . . . . . 171 - 172 cell formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 cell references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171, 173 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387, 389 - 391 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 639, 641, 645, 650 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168 - 169, 171 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637, 639 - 640 formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 138 formulas only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 matching records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 named cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

xiii

noncontiguous selections . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 notebook files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 numbers only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 project templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 - 93 referenced cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 relative references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 selectively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462, 466 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 text only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 copyright symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Corel Corporation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Technical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 7 Corel Presentations . . . . . . . . . . 399, 401, 403 - 404 Corel RealTime Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 65 Corel Reference Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Corel Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 archiving files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 comparing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 opening archived notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . 693 correlation analysis tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 COSFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 counting non blank cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 covariance analysis tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 CPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 CreateObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558, 560 creating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 467, 579 .QBE files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 analytical charts. . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 349, 352 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 - 320 bullet charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 - 526 chart buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 chart methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 - 307 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 combination charts . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 - 341 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 custom dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 - 282

Index

Index databases manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 floating objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404, 409 form controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 - 574 format conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 - 574 groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 line and area charts . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 - 315 list of favorite project templates. . . . . . . . . . . 92 macro applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 macro buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 macro command arguments . . . . . . . . . . . 563 macro subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 macro syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 macros using OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422, 424, 428 - 429 notebook databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 notebook databases, . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545, 554, 568 PerfectScript macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 pie, doughnut, and column charts . . . . . . . . . . 323 project categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 project templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 92 Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 494 sensitivity tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 - 253 source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 specialty charts. . . . . . . . . . . 329, 334, 336, 338 spreadsheet documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 spreadsheet groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 vertical side bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 Web query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 What-If tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 - 253 XML tags automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 XML tags manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 creating criteria tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 creating notebook databases . . . . . . . . . . . 283, 285 criteria tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 292, 295 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 292 forming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 292 making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 organizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 290, 292 criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 cross tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 - 260, 264 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 260, 281

xiv

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 276 changing field positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 changing location of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 connecting spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 268, 276 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 duplicating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 expanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 expunging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 268, 276 formatting OLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 modifying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 278 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 278 naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 renaming fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 278 cross tabulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 cross tabulation reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 CSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 CTRL+BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529, 536 CTRL+M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 - 520 curly braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 191, 193 Euro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 international settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Currency style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 current object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 current object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 current sheet printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 - 198 installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 numeric codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Custom filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 223 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 viewing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 custom install

Index

Index Corel Reference Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 custom labels inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 customer feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 437, 455, 542 bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410, 414 - 415 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 276 date formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 - 75 fill settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434, 437, 440 formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 193, 195 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . 398, 412, 414, 416 keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 - 72 legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 - 445 macro buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 macro syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489, 498, 542 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437, 439, 442 margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 69 new desktop features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 numeric formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 195 options for starting . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 519 parse settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 - 666 pin labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 - 435 pin symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 - 435 project templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Property Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 SpeedFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 start options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 time formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 title bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 528 cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 using Clipboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

D

D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 264, 308 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 266

xv

analyzing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 244 canceling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 coloring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 combining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 224 comparisons. . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 - 262, 271 connecting multiple spreadsheets of . . . . . . . . . 264 consolidating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 - 227 controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 169 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 - 552 filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 - 223 fluctuating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 - 349 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 link to chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 345, 355 linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 manipulating. . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 221, 264 manipulating cross tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171 multiple spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 organizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 outlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 protecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 162 refreshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 refreshing Web query . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 restricting . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 114 - 115, 162 snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 222 summarizing . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 227, 235, 267 summarizing (cross tab reports) . . . . . . . . . . 261 unprotecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 - 66 data analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 259, 264, 281 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 data block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 - 595 data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548, 551 forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550, 552, 565, 568 data fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Index

Index Data Forms tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 - 283, 287 data models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 248, 250 data position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 changing fields to. . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 276 data series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354, 376 3-D multiple charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 analytical charts, . . . . . . . . . . 345, 348 - 349, 352 bullet charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 chart tables, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 chart tables, multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 combination charts . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 - 341 High Low chartsfifth . . . . . . . . . . . . 330, 332 High Low chartsvolume . . . . . . . . . . . 330, 332 legends and titles,. . . . . . . . . . . . . 375, 377 multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 surface charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 data sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 264 data tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 295 data tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 - 284, 287 database cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Database Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 database files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 database record management . . . . . . . . . 281, 284, 286 database searches broadening . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 290 database selections importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 database table link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 database tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 295, 297 attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 importing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 302 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 joining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 password protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 reducing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 261, 281, 302 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 - 282 forming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 - 282 making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

xvi

activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 adding records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 connecting notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 creating source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 embedding notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 - 298 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 - 298 Lotus Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 multidimensional . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 - 265 navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 OLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 querying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 292, 295 querying external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 relational . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 264 - 265 retrieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 retrieving information . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 295 searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 - 218 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 283 using OLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 datamap files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Date style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 - 194, 197 adding codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 adding formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 applying formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 - 194 arguments in spreadsheet functions . . . . . . . . . 142 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 fill series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 format symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 - 194 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . 104 - 105, 193 - 194 four-digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 in footers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 in headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 input line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 international settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Index

Index long international . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 475 serial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 short international . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 spreadsheet functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 two-digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 year 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 197 - 198 DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 dBASE databases . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 297 - 298 DBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 DDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489, 672 automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 567 conversations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 editing links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 updating links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536, 540 - 542 debugger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 538 PerfectScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 - 542 debugger event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 debugging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Developer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 macro arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 macro subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 PerfectScript macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 - 542 Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 setting breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 decimals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 decrement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 480, 521 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 cell address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 margin settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 row height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 - 208 width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 page setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 slide shows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 default template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 key shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 - 182

xvii

degrees of freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 delete function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 164, 441, 462 all page breaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 cell contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 cell entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 cell formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 164 cell names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 - 46 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 - 46 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498, 504, 512 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 consolidations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 279 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 164, 168 data on multiple sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637, 640 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 link commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 matching records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 multiple spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 named settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 part of cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 project categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 - 46 scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 spreadsheet groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Index

Index Web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Depend On property . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616, 649 dependent cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 auditing formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 dependent variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 descending order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 descriptive statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 designing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572, 574 destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262 destination block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 destination cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 detail cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 - 229, 231 details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 275, 278 displaying field item . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 displaying with OLAP Data Source Explorer . . . . . . . 273 hiding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 278 removing field item . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 showing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 278 Developer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 - 520 developing dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 497, 504, 579, 637 actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 add bitmap button . . . . . . . . . . . 586, 599 - 600 add buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 580 - 581, 595, 599 add controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581, 599 add link commands . . . . . . . . . . . 619 - 620, 635 add space between controls . . . . . . . . . . . 644 adding controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583, 585 adding edit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 align controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 637 assigning properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 assigning shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 attaching controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Cancel button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 center controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 child controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 close with Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 connecting controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 - 618 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 - 640 copying controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

xviii

Index

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . 497, 579 - 580, 640 creating properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 - 75 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 developing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 disabling controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626, 628 drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 - 640 edit field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 603, 615 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 editing controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Enter key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 file controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592, 599, 614 grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637, 644 grouping controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 help on controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 hiding controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 identifying properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . 626, 628 - 629 labeling controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 launching from a button . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 limiting, access to controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 linking controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 macro syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 moving boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 moving controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 - 639 name control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Object ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 object link . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 - 620, 622 OK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 open file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 overlapping controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 616, 637 position controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 radio buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 595, 599, 608, 614 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 resizing controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580, 605 scroll bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594, 599, 606

Index select cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 selecting cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 tab controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 - 599 tab order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 - 648 terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 timer controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 unattaching controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 understanding controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 understanding link commands . . . . . . . . . . . 622 understanding link events . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 dialog box controls using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 dialog boxes using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 dialog controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 dialog designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 dialog editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 DIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 digital certificates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 directories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 private . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 536 breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 - 537 child controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630, 632 control access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 modifying controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 query preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 disk space saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Display as Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 89, 273, 371 axis properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 bar formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375, 379, 382 comment marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 copyright information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Corel RealTime Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626, 628 errors in formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 field items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 275, 278 file history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

xix

formula markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 68 grid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 input line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 license information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 logarithmic scales . . . . . . . . . . . . 366, 369 logarithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 previously used projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 program information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 QuickCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 QuickTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Review toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 scroll indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 text horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 XML tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 DLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 dollar signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 DOS graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 dots per inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 Draft View selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 386, 404, 676 delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 Quattro Pro objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 Drag and Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 273, 276 between notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 between spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 cross tab report fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 273, 276 margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Web graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Draw Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 416, 418 draw window . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 396, 404 - 405 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379, 393 arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 - 394, 404

Index

Index lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 404 - 405, 407 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 - 394 polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 text boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 410 - 411 tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379, 393, 404 drawn objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 168 drilling down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 field elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 drop-down box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 dual value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 duplicate records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 duplicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168, 277 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 276 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 Web graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Dynamic Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 dynamic links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 - 618 dynamic macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542, 544

E

EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 edit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615, 637 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 adding controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 assigning properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 edit integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591, 603 Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 edit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 163 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 359, 435, 437 backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416, 418 bar formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 bullet chart slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 163 chart items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 - 383 color data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428, 438, 443 consolidation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 cross tab report fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

xx

cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 272 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 215 form controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414, 416 grouped data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168 groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 215 legend text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 494, 498, 538 map titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 - 442 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 - 438, 442 multiple dialog controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 multiple spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 object name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 paste special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386, 390 pattern data . . . . . . . . . . . 428, 438, 443 - 444 PerfectScript macros . . . . . . . . . 504, 539, 541 - 542 protecting controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . . . . . . 494, 534, 538 scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 slide shows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 spreadsheet controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 spreadsheet groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 spreadsheet workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724, 726 editing charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 364 3-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 - 359 bullet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 legends and titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 - 316 pie and column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 - 326 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 362 x axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366, 368 y axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371, 374 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 275 filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 275 eliminating matching records . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 email address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 emailing notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386, 672 automation object . . . . . . . . . . . . 548, 558 editing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

Index

Index notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546, 550 - 551 OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672, 675 Quattro Pro objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 empty brackets in macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 empty cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 inserting custom labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Enable Inspection settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 group mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168 right-clicking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 enlarging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 435 map view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 435 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 common formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 490 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 475 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 475 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283, 285 investment functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 macro command arguments . . . . . . . . . . . 563 macro subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 macro syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 - 496, 502 numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Optimizer constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 - 212 special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 entering arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 entering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 - 283, 285 fill series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Fill Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 QuickFill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 109 - 111 QuickType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 - 108 restricting data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 simple equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 entering data manually . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 - 283 environment settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 - 543 EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

xxi

equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 123, 244, 255 simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 cell formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 128 errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529, 534, 536, 539 runtime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539, 541 - 542 event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 debugger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545, 557 link controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622, 624 linking controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 exact matches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 examining data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 264 examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 - 562 OLE automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548, 568 Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 561 Excel 97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 85 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 importing files in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . 84 menus and tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 opening files in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 opening in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 spreadsheet names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 v3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 v5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 85 v7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 85 exchanging columns and rows . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 exclamation marks in macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 executing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 - 531 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 - 531 Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 533 exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 539 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Developer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 expanding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Experts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Consolidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Index

Index Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 from menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 from toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 What-If . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 explanatory reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 261 exploding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 explorer window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 exploring hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 exponential fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351, 354 exponential smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386, 391, 446, 654 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 graphic formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 - 402 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 - 447 text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 expunging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 279 EXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Extensible Markup Language . . . . . . . . . . . 709, 715 external data sources . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 264 external database tables linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 external databases . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 295, 297 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 264 Database Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 importing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 302 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 302 opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 - 299, 302 querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 302 extract feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 extract function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 extract unique function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 extracting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

F F1

context sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238 - 239 field blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546, 548 - 549 field items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 - 271, 278 hiding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 278 summarizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

xxii

field names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548, 550 - 552 changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 - 269 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 - 269 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 - 269 field positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262, 276 changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 269, 276 column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262, 269, 276 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262, 269, 276 modifying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 276 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 269, 276 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262, 269, 276 row. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262, 269, 276 field summaries calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218, 548 - 551 changing positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . 261 - 262, 268 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 - 283, 285 file control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 file extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 .CFG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 .QPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 .SCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 - 72 .WBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 .XLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 654 .CSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .DBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .DIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .EXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 .HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 .HTML/.HTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .QIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654, 657 .QPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 654 .QPX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 .SLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .SQZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 .SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 .TXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 .WK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654, 656

Index

Index .WK3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WK4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654, 656 .WPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .WQ1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 .WQ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 .XLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 654 .XML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Multiplan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 supported by Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 447, 487, 519 archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 autoloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 533 backing up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661, 669 comparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592, 605, 614 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 datamap files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447, 487 finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 handling options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . 439, 487, 651, 661 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . 651, 661, 668 - 669 managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9 OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592, 605, 652 opening archived . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 retrieving versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 382 3-D charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 adding patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 chart items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 - 383 chart types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321, 362 gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398, 416, 418 graphic objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 412, 416, 418 patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . 339, 362, 382 - 383 style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 376, 383 textures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

xxiii

titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 wash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398, 416, 418 fill series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 adding list elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 - 113 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 deleting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 exponentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 formula series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 iteration number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 list series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 previous value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 QuickFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 - 113 seed values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 serial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 step values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 - 222 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Custom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 simple filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Top 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 221, 225, 275 A to Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 alphabetically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 ascending order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 blank cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 customize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 - 223 database tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 descending order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 non blank cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 numeric values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 numerically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Index

Index options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 QuickFilter tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 - 223 setting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 single value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 final value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 financial analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 amortization tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 mortgage refinancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 - 160 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 - 160 database records. . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 - 285 hidden files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Fit-As-You-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 fixed fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Fixed style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 fixed-width text parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 flipping text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 floating charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386, 388 recalculating formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 floating maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 435, 437 floating marker charts . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 316 floating objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 447, 639 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 fluctuating data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 - 349 folders notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 font face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 font properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 font size changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 reducing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 369, 375, 440 appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440, 443 in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410, 412, 416 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 on slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 footer codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214, 475

xxiv

adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214, 475 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 215 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 261 form controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 adding labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 attaching to a Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 border properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 destination block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 displaying dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 object name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 source block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 specifying data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 unprotecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 adding numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 autoformat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Center Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 197 - 198 customizing dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 erasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Left Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Right Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 SpeedFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 174, 268, 272, 461 aligning data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 - 189 bullet chart slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 174, 191 column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 commas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 cross tab report fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 cross tab reports. . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 268, 272 currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 191, 193 custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Index

Index data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 - 194, 197 days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 197 decimals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 - 710, 721 imported text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 197 multiple sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 numbers as bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 - 192 numeric formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 persistent SpeedFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 row height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 scientific notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 slide text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 spreadsheet groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 179 times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 - 194 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 197 forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 497, 526 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . 497, 524, 526, 573 unprotecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Formula Composer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 changing views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 creating formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 editing expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 entering spreadsheet functions . . . . . . . . . . . 143 keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 99, 123 alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 133 array constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 block arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 built-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 cell addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 126 characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 collapsing outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 common tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

xxv

concatenation operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 138 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 131 debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 expanding in outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Formula Composer. . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 133 goal seeking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 inserting cell names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 inserting cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 inserting spreadsheet functions . . . . . . . . . . 134 investment formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 joined cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 linear problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 logical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 - 137 multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 nonlinear problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 OLE automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557, 559 operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 recalculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 recalculation interation . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 recalculation order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 referenced cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 search formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 spreadsheet functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 string values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 text formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 tracing errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 tracing through cells . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 - 149 true or false . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 using Auto-Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 using Quick Math. . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 - 120 using QuickCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 What-If tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 - 253 Fourier analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 191 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Index

Index frequency distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 FRMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 F-test tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 full page maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 435, 437 Function Tip-As-You-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 139 arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 creating formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Formula Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 - 134 Function Tip-As-You-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Quattro Pro for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 statistical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 toolbar functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 future value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239

G

geographical data . . . . . . . . . . 421 - 422, 427 - 428 GetObject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558, 560 GIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681, 713 Go To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 34, 37 cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 extending selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 formula errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 named cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 named spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 new edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 goal seeking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 gradient values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 grand totals lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 graphic formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 .BMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .CGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .CLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .CPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

xxvi

.EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .GIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .JPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .PCX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .TGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .TIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .WMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 .WPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 - 681 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 - 681 Graphic Interchange Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 393, 421 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 405 aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 charts as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Clipart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 color values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 - 415 cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 405, 407 - 408 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399, 402, 447 fancy text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439, 447 fill and color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399, 401 - 402 freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 407 - 408 grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399, 401, 403 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . 394, 401, 403, 410 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 405 managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 408 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482, 484 - 485 properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416, 418 protecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 401 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 setting type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 - 410 tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 gray scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Index

Index grid dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 grid lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 365 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 gross savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239 group box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 - 572, 596, 614 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 adding buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 attaching to a Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 group mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 168 group name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 227, 485 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 229 graphic objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 418 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 585 adding controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 adding rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 entering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

H

hard page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 - 212 converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 header codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 headers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214, 475 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214, 475 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 215 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 Heading 1 style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 Heading 2 style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 locked titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 4 About Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

xxvii

Ask the PerfectExpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 context-sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 Corel Reference Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 5 Corel Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Help topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 link dialog box to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 link Help button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3 online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 4 - 6 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Quattro Pro FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 QuickTips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 5 What’s This? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Help files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 634 - 636 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 - 636 link to control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 - 636 tips for controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Help Line property . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633, 635 Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 hex values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 RGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 227, 435, 650 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 column letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 210 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 275, 278 field items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 group in outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 outline panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 231 Outlining Tools toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 231 pin labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 pin symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 QuickCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 210 screen components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 67 scroll bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 spreadsheet tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Index

Index zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 hierarchies exploring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 highlighting matching records . . . . . . . . . . . 293 high-low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331, 340 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 330 - 331, 372 High-Low specialty charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 context-sensitive help . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 in Application Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 horizontal alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 horizontal scroll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594, 606 horizontal text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 hotlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386, 726 hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 198 HSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 709 - 710 adding document information . . . . . . . . . . . 711 adding document title . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 - 710, 721 graphic type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 inserting cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 inserting horizontal line . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713, 721 modifying file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 naming file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 saving charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 saving document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 saving tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 setting background color . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 setting file extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 setting link color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 settings, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 text color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 updating document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 HTML/.HTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 hyperlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 hyperlinks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 to bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 to cell addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 to Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

xxviii

to other files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 Hypertext Markup Language . . . . . . . . . . . . 709

I

icons displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 identical records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 identify controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 IF..Then . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 import options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 380, 653 character limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 graphic formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380, 401, 420 HTML tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Microsoft Excel files in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . 83 OLAP cross tab reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Paste Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 tab-delimited text files. . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 - 662 in macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 increasing column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 indent cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 independent variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 information management . . . . . . . . . . 281 - 282, 284 initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626, 628 - 629 INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 input line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Insert menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 insert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 163 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 447, 501, 586 bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 chart attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 custom labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Index

Index databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 - 669 files into notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 hard page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 - 214 HTML cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 HTML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 HTML horizontal line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 multiple spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 - 212 PerfectScript commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Quattro Pro objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 rows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Web graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 Web query data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 inspect objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 Install As You Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 installation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 custom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 integer length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 interact with users . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 - 634 interest rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238 - 239 interim solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 internal databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 292 adding records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 international settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 currency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 LICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 punctuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 532, 709 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 launching a browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 linking to notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 linking to notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

xxix

opening files in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . 655 publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 publishing XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715, 718 Quattro Pro features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 refreshing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 - 723 running query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 update data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 - 723 Web query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 interval in units property . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 inverting matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 - 245 investment formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 italics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 iterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

J

joined data . . . . . . joining . . . . . . . aligning cells . . . . . cells . . . . . . . centering cells . . . . . database tables . . . . formula cells . . . . . styles . . . . . . . Joint Photographic Experts Group . JPG . . . . . . . . jumps creating in slide shows . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 298 . 178, 300 . . 178 . . 178 . . 178 . . 300 . . 178 . . 182 . . 713 . 681, 713

. . . . . . . . . . 467

K

keeping query definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 - 283 key shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 keyboard conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526, 531 keyboard layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 loading .SCK files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 keyboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 71, 526, 531

Index

Index customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

L

LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 368 labeling charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 373 chart tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 charts, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 375 numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 series, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 99, 268, 571 - 572 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 adding controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583, 590 alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 attaching to a Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 cell alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 changing from values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 583, 590, 642 - 643 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 differentiating from values . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 edit text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 form controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571, 576 identfying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 in cell names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 input line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 overlapping cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 text reformat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Lagrange Multipliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 landscape printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 language international settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422, 431 launching a browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 launching dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 launching to a Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

xxx

layout . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 325, 341, 359, 380 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262, 269, 276 leading zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Left Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 205 left heading printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 375, 421 adding titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 - 436, 442 map colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 letters artistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 - 410, 412 level by level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 drilling down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 rolling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 499 - 500 LICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Light Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360, 449 creating slide shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 editing slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 previewing slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 resizing slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 line charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 315 - 316 line style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 333, 335, 362 linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243, 245 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 relationships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 linear analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 linear fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350, 354 linear models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 linear relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 line-bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 332, 340 - 341 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 243 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 - 405 grand totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 of best fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 regression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 link connecting links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

Index

Index link commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 conditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 playing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 linking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 386, 545, 651 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 - 528 changing DDE source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 changing OLE source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615, 617 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 data to charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 database tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 dialog box to Help . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 - 636 dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 dynamic links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 editing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 - 620, 622 external databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 Internet data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 Internet graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 link commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 llink events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 - 500, 523, 531 OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672, 674 Quattro Pro objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 updating DDE links . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 updating OLE links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 updating OLE links automatically . . . . . . . . . . 678 links changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 changing OLE object to icon . . . . . . . . . . . 680 closed notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 612, 617, 619 - 620 connecting links . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617, 619 converting OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 - 680 DDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626, 689 hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 moving and copying notebook . . . . . . . . . . . 684

xxxi

naming notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682, 685 - 686 OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 - 673 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 pasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 pointing to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686 refreshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 resizing OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 to other notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . 523, 542 typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542, 689 updating DDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 updating OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 wildcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 list box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 - 573, 594 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 attaching to a Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 setting selected text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 listing XML tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592, 594 assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592, 594, 605 selected text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594, 607 system lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592, 594, 605 live buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 loading default print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 loan payment formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 loans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238 - 239 candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 payback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239 local ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 locate feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 locate function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 locating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 arguments in macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 563, 565 location arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Index

Index locations . . . in maps. . . locked titles creating . . . logarithmic display logical conditions . logical formulas . longitude. . . Lotus Notes . . databases . . forms . . . views . . .

M

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 431 . . . . . . . . . . 427, 431, 433, 435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . 43 366, 369, 372 - 373 . . . . 563 . . . . 127 . . . 422, 431 . . . . 546 . 546, 549 - 551 . 546, 550 - 552 . 546, 551 - 552

macro macro command browser . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 recording indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 macro command browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 macro commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 macro compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 macro debugger . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 536 - 537 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 21, 468, 489, 521, 574 add commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 alter while playing . . . . . . . . . . . . 542, 544 applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562, 565, 628 arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 assigning properties. . . . . . . . . . . 612 - 613, 615 attach to button . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 526, 528 attach to keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . 526, 531 attach to notebook . . . . . . . . . . . 499 - 500, 524 attach to toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 - 529 basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 - 490, 492, 494 breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . 536 - 537, 541 - 542 cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 - 530 chart buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 commands. . . . . . . . . . . . 563, 565, 567 - 568 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 495, 502, 521 creating jumps in slide shows . . . . . . . . . . . 467 creating objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 creation tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 534, 539 displaying dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542, 544

xxxii

editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494, 498, 504, 538 errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 536 - 537, 539 examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 - 563, 565 executing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489, 529, 531 in new applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . 526, 531 libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 - 500, 523 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523, 526, 532, 542 macros, executing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 557 naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497, 526, 528 native . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490, 492, 499 new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 OLE automation . . . . . . . . . . . 545, 559 - 561 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490, 542 pausing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 PerfectScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501, 504, 539 planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 play automatically . . . . . . . . . . . 500, 531 - 533 play from button . . . . . . . . . . . 525 - 526, 532 play when closing a notebook . . . . . . . . . . . 533 play when opening notebook . . . . . . . . 500, 524, 533 playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489, 529 portability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 product commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . . . . . 521, 529, 531, 534 recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 494, 502, 521 retyping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498, 538 running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 - 531 self-modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542, 544 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 532, 542 - 543 spreadsheet controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 574, 577 storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490, 499, 501, 530 subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490, 492, 557, 562 toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490, 504, 536, 539 trace cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 536 - 538 tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 - 563, 565 type links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 496, 501 - 502 Visual Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496, 502, 562 maintaining information . . . . . . . . . . . 281 - 282 maintaining records . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283, 285 making copies of cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Index

Index static copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 managing charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384, 386, 390 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 manipulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 264, 276 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 259, 264, 276 manual database creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 manually refreshing links . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Map Expert. . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 431, 433, 441 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421, 424, 427, 446 adding countries to . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 - 430 adding locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 422, 431, 433 adding points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 433 aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 426 background properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 - 438 box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 - 438 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 changing data . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 - 429, 438 cities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 433, 435 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 - 447 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422, 424, 431 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423, 428, 438, 444 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . 430, 435, 442, 445 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 - 447 extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 - 430 graphic formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 - 447 grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 highlight region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 inserting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 - 447 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 - 435, 443 legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435, 442 - 443 legend colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 - 443 location labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 434 - 435 location symbols . . . . . . . . . . 427, 431, 434 - 435 map objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 - 436, 442 map properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 - 439 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 435 - 436 multiple map objects . . . . . . . . . . . 435 - 436 multiple regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 430 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 - 437 overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 - 431 pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 433 - 434

xxxiii

points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 434 - 435 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 - 439 redrawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 438 region names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422, 427 regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 - 430, 438 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 427, 436 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 - 447 setting up data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422, 425 slide shows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 434 - 435 titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435, 437, 441 - 442 updating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 updating maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 430 margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 216, 474 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 474 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 474 page setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 zero-inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 marker shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 markers High-Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 334 Master Slide Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 master slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361, 455 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Master Slide Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 using existing charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 matching records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Quick Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 - 120 simple equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 simple paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 mathematical operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 consolidating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 - 245 inversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 - 245 multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Index

Index operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 singularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 matrix multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 matrix operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 maximum values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 270 calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 menu items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 rearranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15, 69, 489 access keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 adding items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15 changing access keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 69 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 in new applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Quattro Pro 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 17 Quattro Pro 9 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Quattro Pro 9 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Quattro Pro 9 Insert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Quattro Pro 9 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Quattro Pro 9 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 renaming items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 using Microsoft Excel in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . 86 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 values from many locations . . . . . . . . . . 225 - 227 meta text Web search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 metric measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 660 Excel 97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 85 file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 menus and tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 naming spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

xxxiv

opening in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 sheet naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 spreadsheet names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 tab names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 v3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 v5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 85 v7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 85 minimizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 minimum values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 270 calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 minus sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 198 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 536 debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536, 538 - 540 edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 163 group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 - 168 insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 163 overtype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 163 Model Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Copy Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 330, 362, 457 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 field items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 270 fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 - 270 master slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 monochrome palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 197 mortgage fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238 - 239 mortgage loans . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238 - 239 mortgage payment formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 mortgage refinancing tables. . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239 mortgages . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 - 236, 238 - 239 calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239 refinancing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 mouse drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 169, 276, 462 Application Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171 child controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

Index

Index cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 278 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 dialog controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641, 645 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 - 137 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 413, 419 legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 map titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 multiple map objects . . . . . . . . . . 435 - 436, 445 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 overlapping controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 reference cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 referenced cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 - 49 to Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 171, 173 toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 moving average . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 348 - 349, 354 multidimensional . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 - 265 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 - 265 multidimensional databases . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 362 bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 319, 321 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 data points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 data series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353, 356 data series, chart tables . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 353 - 354 multiple copies printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 multiple spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264, 278 expanding report data on . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 multiplication formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Multipliers Lagrange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 multiplying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

N

Name property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 named cells

xxxv

copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 266, 495, 580 consolidations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 583, 612, 641 - 642 cross tab report fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580, 638, 640 field blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 - 400, 412 groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 HTML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526, 528 Microsoft Excel conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613, 641, 643 print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 spreadsheet groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 - 50 tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 naming cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 guidelines for cell names . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 using adjacent labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 narrowing database searches . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 290 NASDAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 navigating Browse By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Go To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 35 Objects sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 - 35 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 navigational tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 420 net savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239 Netscape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 524 new dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 new dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

Index

Index new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 OLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 summarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 summarizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 new records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 non blank cells filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 noncontiguous cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 noncontiguous selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 noncontiguous selections copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478, 482 nonlinear problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Normal style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 notebook databases . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 281 - 282 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 282 - 283 criteria tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 organizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 - 284 querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 retrieving information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 advantages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 closed notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 Internet links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 opening linked files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 pasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 pointing to link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

xxxvi

primary notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 supporting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 switching links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 typing link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682, 689 using wildcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 notebook locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 notebook queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 97, 276, 697 archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 changing size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 80, 533 comparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 copy styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 dragging cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 emailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550, 552 folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 159 hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 35 new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 new views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 opening archived . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 opening existing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 653, 660 retrieving versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 reviewing shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 79 sending electronically . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 - 698 startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 77 summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 updating shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Notes/FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546, 549, 552 NUM LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 of arguments in macros . . . . . . . . . . 557, 563, 565 number arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 565 numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 195

Index

Index adjusting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 - 189 bar formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 changing display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 displaying bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 103 fill series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 format codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 - 192, 199 formatting as bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 justifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 rules for entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 totaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 numeric cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 199 numeric formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 372, 374 numeric formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 - 192, 195 numeric scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

O

object ID controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 Object ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 object link dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 - 620 object name . . . . . . . . . . . . 577, 613, 639, 641 assigning properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 renaming controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 object properties limit access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 580, 585 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412, 419 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580, 585 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 macro commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 413 unprotecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Objects sheet . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 386, 449, 638, 640 navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 slide shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 - 450 Objects View

xxxvii

selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 OLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 259, 264, 272 OLAP data source explorer navigating reports with . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 275 OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651, 672 changing icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 converting object activation effect . . . . . . . . . . 680 converting object formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Display as Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 displaying icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 dragging objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 editing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672, 675 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394, 402 linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 linking objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 Quattro Pro objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 resizing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 source files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 viewing objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 OLE automation . . . . . . . . . . . 546, 550, 554, 561 arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 565 automation expressions . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 557 examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561, 563 expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 557, 560 methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 557 named variables . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 560 - 561 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 568 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 560, 567 - 568 syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557, 560, 563, 565 values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 one variable What-If . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 one way analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 online analytical processing . . . . . . . . . 264 - 265, 272 online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 open database connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 299 open-close charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 - 331 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652, 705 database files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 delimited text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

Index

Index existing notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 Internet files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 linked notebook files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 Microsoft Excel files in Quattro Pro. . . . . . . . . 83 - 84 Microsoft Excel in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . 84 network files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 password protected files . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 project templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 start options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 precedents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 - 255 constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 reusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 - 257 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 - 257 optimum solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 254 options Web query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 or queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 order controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630, 632 Order menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 ordering objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 419 organizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 - 218, 221 orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 aligning data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 - 190 original sort order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 - 228, 231 collapse group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 collapse outline level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 creating automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 creating manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 detail cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 231 expand group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 expand outline level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 group cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 hide group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 hide outline panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

xxxviii

levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Outlining Tools toolbar . . . . . . . . 228 - 229, 231 - 232 positioning summary cells . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 remove groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 show group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 summary cells . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 - 229, 231 ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Outline tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 232 toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 - 229, 231 outlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 227 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 227 - 228 output cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 292 forming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 organizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 292 overlapping controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630, 632 overlapping labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 overlapping objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397, 419 overlaying slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 overlays map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 429 - 430 overtype mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 163 overwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 cell content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

P

page breaks . . . . . deleting . . . . . dragging . . . . . finding . . . . . . inserting . . . . . printing . . . . . searching . . . . . viewing. . . . . . Page Breaks View selecting . . . . . page layout setting . . . . . . page numbers . . . . . page orientation . . . . page setup . . . . . centering print selections .

Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

211, 478 . 212 . 212 . 211 . 212 . 478 . 211 . 211

. . . . . . . . . . . 60 . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . 713 213 - 214, 475 . . . 475 . . . 473 . . . 480

Index default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 named print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 page orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 saving settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Page View selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 pages printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 pages position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 changing fields to. . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 276 palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 notebook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 - 415 panel PerfectExpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 364 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 splitting notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 synchronizing scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 unsynchronizing scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Paradox databases . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 295, 297 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606, 719 dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 - 720 getting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 static. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 - 720 Web query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 parent controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 - 632 parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 delimited text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 fixed-width text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 loading settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 saving settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

xxxix

pass count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 536 - 537 password protection . . . . . . . . . 302, 499 - 500, 526, 616 dialog controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302, 697, 703 opening files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 inserting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 saving notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 paste commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 402 Paste Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 using Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171, 173 between applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 173 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 173 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638, 640 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 multiple selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 Quattro Pro objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 using Clipboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 path names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 pattern data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421, 427 - 428 patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 cell backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 pausing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495, 536 - 537 payback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238 - 239 payments mortgage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238 - 239 PCL files printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 PCX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 percent formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Percent style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 percentage

Index

Index difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 of column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 of row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 of total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 percentage fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239 percentile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Perfect Expert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 PerfectExpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 89, 235 Ask the PerfectExpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 5 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 95 projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 95 Simple Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 PerfectScript debugger . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 - 542 run to cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 skip to cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 step into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 step out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 PerfectScript macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 501 command equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 creating applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 DDE commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 object commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 playing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 performing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 consolidations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 field comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 performing goal seeking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 - 358 photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Clipart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 pick list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589, 614, 638 pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394, 401, 404 moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 pie charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309, 322 PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 - 435 map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 434 - 435 pivot tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 - 260

xl

building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 creating source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 placeholder characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 292 planning macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 playing dynamic macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542, 544 macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 slide shows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 playing macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 532 - 533 from button. . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 531 - 532 from other notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 from toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 - 529 keystroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 PerfectScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 when closing notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 when opening notebook . . . . . . . . . . . 500, 524 while debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 539, 542 PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 PM/AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 393, 408 polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 portability macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521, 524 Portable Network Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 portrait printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262, 276 column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603, 632, 644 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Position Adjust control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 375 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377, 386 outline summary cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 post parameters Web query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 PostScript files printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 pound symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 precedent cells tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Index

Index predefined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 - 182 prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 preparing search queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 preserving data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 453, 473 font face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 - 473 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Web query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239 print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 canceling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 - 473 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 print preview shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 print scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 by number of pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 by percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 - 474 black and white . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 named . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 print wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471, 482, 577 2-D selections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478, 482 3-D selections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478, 482 adding printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 adding space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 adjusting readability . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 adjusting speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 binary files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 black and white . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 cell addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 cell blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

xli

cell comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 cell formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 cell ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 centering selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 changing print size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 - 485 charts from slide show . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 choosing printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 clipart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 collating print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 column numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 column titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 contiguous cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 continuous pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 current spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 deleting named settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 enlarge print selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 entire notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 475 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482, 484 - 486 grid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 group print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 475 headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Help manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 hiding footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 hiding headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 ignore soft page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 landscape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 left heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 locked titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 memory buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 multiple charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 multiple copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 multiple maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 multiple pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 naming print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 new page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 noncontiguous selections . . . . . . . . . . . 478, 482

Index

Index notebooks . . . . . . . . objects. . . . . . . . . . online Help . . . . . . . . outline . . . . . . . . . . page breaks . . . . . . . . page orientation . . . . . . . page ranges . . . . . . . . pages . . . . . . . . . . paper size . . . . . . . . . PCL files . . . . . . . . . percentage . . . . . . . . . portrait . . . . . . . . . PostScript files . . . . . . . . preview options . . . . . . . preview print job. . . . . . . print preview . . . . . . . print preview toolbar . . . . . . printer settings . . . . . . . printer status . . . . . . . . quality . . . . . . . . . redirect output to file . . . . . . restoring default settings . . . . . row letters . . . . . . . . . row titles . . . . . . . . . scaling . . . . . . . . . . selected charts . . . . . . . . selected graphics . . . . . . . selected maps . . . . . . . . selection on new page . . . . . . set number of pages . . . . . . settings . . . . . . . . . shapes . . . . . . . . . . sheet on new page . . . . . . . show grid lines . . . . . . . . shrink print selection . . . . . . size . . . . . . . . . . slide shows. . . . . . . . . slides . . . . . . . . . . soft page breaks . . . . . . . sort copies . . . . . . . . . sort pages . . . . . . . . . space between noncontiguous selections . space between printouts . . . . . space between selections . . . . . space between sheets . . . . . . specifying printer . . . . . . . speed . . . . . . . . . . spreadsheet controls . . . . . .

xlii

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

483, 487 . 484 . . 4 . 232 211, 478 . 475 . 483 476, 483 . 475 . 487 . 476 . 475 . 487 . 473 472 - 473 472 - 473 . 473 . 472 . 486 471 - 472 . 487 . 480 . 477 . 477 . 476 . 484 . 485 . 484 . 478 . 476 473, 480 . 485 . 478 . 477 . 476 . 476 . 484 . 484 . 478 . 485 . 485 . 478 . 478 . 478 . 478 . 472 . 486 . 577

spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471, 483 stop printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 text black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 to files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 top heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 updating named settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 using named settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 white background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 zoom level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 private directories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 problem limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 problem-solving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 - 257 producing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Optimizer reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 programming commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502, 504 using time and date methods . . . . . . . . . . . 515 using VBA methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 project categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 project templates creating notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 89 categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 displaying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 favorite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 PerfectExpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 95 previously used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 QuickTemplate Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 using templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572, 575, 585 access to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 613 - 614 default column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 default row height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585, 599, 613 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 form controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 - 577 interval in units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Index

Index OLE automation . . . . . . . . . . . . 554, 560, 568 pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 spreadsheet controls . . . . . . . . . . 574, 576 - 577 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 units in milliseconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 Property Bar customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 property settings accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 577 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 162 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 162 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 401 spreadsheet controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 162 publishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709, 715 spreadsheet as XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 XML charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 punctuation international settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Q

QBE files creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 QBE syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 QIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 QPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 - 85, 654 default file extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Quattro Pro concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 creating VBA macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 creating VBA macros to add an inventory table. . . . . . . 512 importing Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 opening Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 playing VBA macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 starting with options . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 532 Quattro Pro databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Quattro Pro for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 editing keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

xliii

Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 489, 492 DDE commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 object commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 PerfectScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 562 toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 trace cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 295 AND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 AND OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 by example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 forming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 notebook databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 query. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709, 718 disabling preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 - 719 querying databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 292 querying dbase databases . . . . . . . . . . . 295 - 296 querying external databases . . . . . . . . . . 295 - 296 querying Paradox databases . . . . . . . . . . 295 - 296 question marks in macros . . . . . . . . . . . 563, 565 Quick Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 averaging numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 calculating 2 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 calculating 2 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 calculating single items . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 calculating single rows or columns . . . . . . . . . . 118 totaling numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 using 2 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 QuickButton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 QuickCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Application Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 viewing formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 QuickChart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 341 QuickColumns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 importing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 importing text files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 QuickCorrect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 161 adding words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Index

Index using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 QuickFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 adding list elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 changing a series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 creating a series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 deleting a series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 entering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 fill series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 - 110 filling cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 filling columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 filling rows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 filling spreadsheet tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 formula series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 list series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 renaming a series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 seed values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 110 QuickFilter turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 QuickFilter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 - 223 QuickFilter tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 - 223 QuickFit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 - 209 increasing column width . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 QuickFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 QuickFunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 QuickLinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 690 QuickSort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 - 218 QuickSort button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 QuickSum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 adding 3-D cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 adding 3-D rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . 121 adding cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 adding columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 adding rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 grand totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 QuickTemplate Builder projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 QuickTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 QuickType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 repeating functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 repeating labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 quitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 - 520, 539 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 539 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529, 531

R

radar charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 - 335

xliv

radio buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 571, 583, 595, 608 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 attaching to a Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 launching dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 random numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 bin of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 - 241 of values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 rank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 readability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 READY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 readying search queries . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288 realigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377, 386 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 376 rearranging slides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 recalculating formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 setting iterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 setting order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 record backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 record forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 - 495, 502, 521 records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 - 285 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 - 285, 302 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286, 294 duplicating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286 finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286, 295 highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290, 293 - 294 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 recalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286, 293 retrieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 290 searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 290, 295 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 - 218, 285 rectangle controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 rectangular array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Red Green Blue hex values. . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 red question mark icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Index

Index redoing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 redrawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 438 reducing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 435 font size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 427, 435 Reference Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 refinancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 238 mortgages . . . . . . . . . . . 235 - 236, 238 - 239 reflex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 reformatting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 refreshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Internet data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 Web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 Web query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Web query data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 regression analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 242 - 243 regression charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 regression coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 regression lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 regression output . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 relative addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 152, 521 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 relative cell references . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 521, 523 remaining term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 239 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 224, 429, 537 access keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 cell entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 color data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 consolidation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 275 outline groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 pattern data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 source cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 trace cells and breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . 536 - 537 Web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 266, 466, 577 cross tab report fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 project categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

xlv

scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 slide shows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 spreadsheet controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Reorder From First. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 - 648 repeat characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 - 160 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 - 160 replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 259 building cross tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 cross tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 264, 281 cross tab source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 cross tabulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 251 scenario summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 requesting information . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 290 resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 row heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Resize to Same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639, 645, 650 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 207, 386, 435, 454 Application Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641, 643 dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 401, 413 multiple map objects . . . . . . . . . . . 435 - 436 notebooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 653, 660 OLE objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 - 454 toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 208, 542 - 543 Application Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 color palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Index

Index default column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 default row height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 deletions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 input line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 original sort order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 previous entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 - 520 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 - 543 title bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 restricting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 114, 162 date data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 dates only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 general data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 label data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 rows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 time data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 retrieving versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 reusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 consolidation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 sort settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 revealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 210 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 screen components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 reversing actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 reviewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 shared notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 RGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 hex values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 ribbon charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 314 Right Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 205 Right Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 riser style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 rolling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 field elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 - 274 rotated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 2.5-D bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 319 2-5-D bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 3-D bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 319, 356 area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 319 - 320 line charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 - 313

xlvi

rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 text vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 358 row letters printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 row summaries calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 row titles printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 266, 353 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 adding XML tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 adjusting height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 265 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 - 283 default height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 - 46 fill series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 - 113 height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 hiding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 210 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 joining cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 - 35 parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 QuickFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 resetting heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 restoring defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 restricting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 revealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 selecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 43 setting number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 showing summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 transposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 rows position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 changing fields to. . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 276 running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 dynamic macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542, 544 Internet query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 - 531, 533 macro automatically . . . . . . . . . . 524, 531 - 533 macro from button . . . . . . . . . . 524, 526, 528, 532 macro from other notebook . . . . . . . . . . 523, 532 macro when closing notebook . . . . . . . . . . . 533 macro when opening notebook . . . . . . . . 524, 532 - 533 macro while debugging. . . . . . . . . 534, 536, 539, 542

Index

Index to cursor . Web query . running total calculating . runtime errors

S

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539, 541

sample data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 sample files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 77, 279, 447 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 - 386 consolidation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 227 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 database files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 delimited text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399, 402 HTML document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 HTML tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 keyboard layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499, 502, 504 maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Microsoft Excel files in Quattro Pro. . . . . . . . . 84 - 85 named settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 79 Optimizer model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 page setup settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 sort order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Web query as link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 savings gross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332, 337, 366, 372 scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 scatter charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309, 328, 330 scatter plots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 scenario baseline changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 scenario groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 251 scenario manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 - 246, 248 scenario summary reports . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 251 scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 - 246

xlvii

active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 adding, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 best case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 - 250 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 changing names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 diplaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 - 250 erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 formulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 - 250 worst case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 schedules amortization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 scientific notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 209 Scrapbook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 scripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489, 492, 498, 504 scroll bars. . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 571 - 573, 594, 606 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573, 594 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 SDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 search conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290, 293 search criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 292 search formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 290, 295 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 devising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 search output cells . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 292, 295 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 wildcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 search query . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 290 search tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 290, 292 searching data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Index

Index page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 searching databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 292 searching for records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 searching internal databases querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 secondary y-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372, 374 series, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 seconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 198 security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 seed values QuickFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 110 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 264, 308, 543 3-D blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 active cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 521, 543, 603 cells from dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 356, 359, 386 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 43 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 336, 341, 356 fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 359, 369, 375 item in dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 noncontiguous cells . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 - 40 OLAP data sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 OLAP source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 43, 521 SpeedSelect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 selective copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 selector setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 self-modifying macros . . . . . . . . . . . . 542, 544 sensitivity tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 separating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 joined cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 separators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 3-D floating marker floating marker charts . . . . . . . 315 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 - 346 axis properties legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 bar rotated, bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 chart tables linking, cells in charts. . . . . . . . . . 355 Exponential Fit trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Exponential Fitcharts, Exponential Fit . . . . . . . . . 352 High-Low high-low, bar . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

xlviii

High-Low marker shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 labeling series, properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Linear Fit linear fit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Linear Fit regression, charts . . . . . . . . . . . 350 multiple regression, charts. . . . . . . . . . . . 354 properties . . . . . . . . . . . 354 - 355, 366 - 367 selecting charts, basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 selecting series, properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 surface fill, chart types. . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 XY y-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Set New dialog box control . . . . . . . . . . . 647 - 648 setting breakpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 536 - 537 column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 condition statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 control order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 616, 628 - 629, 649 default column widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 default row heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 graphic type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 HTML background color . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 HTML file extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 HTML link color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . 626, 628 - 629 live image links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 474 page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 - 472 refresh intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 style properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 - 182 Web query options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 534 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 51, 53 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 file options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 international . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 shading centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405, 407 - 408, 414 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Index

Index sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386, 391, 698 notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 526, 531, 615 conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Formula Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 resetting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 shortcut names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 showing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 227 cross tab column summaries . . . . . . . . . . . 267 cross tab row summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 275, 278 field items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 278 outline groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 outline panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 231 Outlining Tools toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 229 shrinking print selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 significant digits . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 - 192, 199 sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Web query columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 skip to cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 slack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 slide shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410, 447, 449 adding slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 advancing slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 bullet charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451, 460 cancelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 chart buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 - 468 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 - 450, 452 creating jumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 editing bullet charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

il

hiding pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 jumping to slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Light Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Objects sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 - 450 playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 rearranging slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 showing pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 skipping slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 transition effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 - 459 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360, 449 35 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 changing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 chart buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462, 466 creating master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 editing bullet charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 formatting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Master Slide Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 master slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454, 457 moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 overlaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 - 454 skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 transition effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 SLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 smooth data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 soft page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 - 212, 478 converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 software developer’s kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Index

Index solution cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 final . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 interim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Solve For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 solving problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 sort keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 - 218 spreadsheet data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 sort order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 221 preserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 sort settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 reusing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Sort tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 - 218 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 221, 227 alphabetical order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 ascending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 blank cells last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Custom sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 descending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 left to right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 numbers last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 original sort order. . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 221 outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 using QuickFilter tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 source block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 - 574 form controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 source cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 - 225 source data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262, 298 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 277 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 - 262 cross tab report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 cross tab reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 refreshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 selecting OLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 419, 478 between noncontiguous selections . . . . . . . . . . 478 between spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

l

headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 603 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 copyright symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 iconic symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 phonetic characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 repeat characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 WordPerfect characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 specialty charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 bullet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 - 342 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 High-Low volume data series . . . . . . . . . . . 330 radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 XY charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 control order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 control value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 - 629 printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 specifying conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 SpeedFormat customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 SpeedSelect selecting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Spell Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 161 spelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 161 spin controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 assigning properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 default button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 spreadsheet controls . . . . . . . . . . . 571, 574 - 575 attaching macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 destination block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 displaying dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 object name properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 source block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 specifying data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 spreadsheet databases . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 - 283 spreadsheet functions . . . . . . . . . 21, 123, 139, 287, 290

Index

Index arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 assigning properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 - 613 built-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 consolidating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 creating formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Formula Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 - 134 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 statistical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 spreadsheet groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 entering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 spreadsheet location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 278 spreadsheet tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 coloring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 using Microsoft Excel in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . 86 spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 97, 261, 278 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 dragging cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 entering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 - 167 moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 - 49 naming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 - 50 naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 - 35 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . 471, 482 - 483, 577 protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 162, 577 publishing as XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 selecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 43 setting number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 space between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 SQL queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

li

stacked bar charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 320 standard breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 536 standard deviation calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 population . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 standard error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 536 Quattro Pro with options . . . . . . . . . 519, 532 - 533 starting value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 531 - 533 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504, 531 - 533 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519, 532 startup switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 static copies making. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 static parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 statistical analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 statistical charts analytical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 statistical trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 descriptive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 step charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 step into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 step out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 step values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 - 113 stepping through macros . . . . . . . . . . 536 - 538, 542 stock prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330, 332 stop values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529, 541 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 539, 541 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529, 536 - 537, 541 storing macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 storing macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 strikeout text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 string arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 563 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563, 565 structured query language . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181, 331 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 - 182 combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 combining cell properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Comma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182

Index

Index Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 - 182 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 Heading 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 Heading 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 high-low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331, 333 joining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 Percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 - 182 preset properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 setting properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 182 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 subelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 subscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 summaries column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 summarizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 data . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 221, 235, 245, 267, 271 data using QuickFilter. . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 223 new features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 summary cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 - 229, 231 position in outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 summary options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 sums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Calc-As-You-Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 QuickSum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 superscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 surface charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 338 - 339 suspending macros. . . . . . . . . . . . 536 - 537, 541 switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 columns and rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

lii

symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 copyright symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 WordPerfect characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 101 syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560, 562 - 563, 565 syntax errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496, 539 system lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592, 594 system notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 - 500

T

TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 tab controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598, 610 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598, 610 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 table link feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 table link function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 281 amortization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 - 236 analytical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353, 355 criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 - 288, 290, 292 frequency distribution . . . . . . . . . . . 240 - 241 mortgage refinancing . . . . . . . . . . 235, 238 - 239 password protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 - 260, 262 sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 - 253 What-If . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 - 253 tabs coloring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 setting number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 using Microsoft Excel in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . 86 tabs (dialog box). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610, 647 control order . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 - 648 order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641, 647 - 648 tab stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641, 647 - 648 tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 - 710 XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 target value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 - 255 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 template notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 343 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 - 361, 390 choosing project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 89 - 90

Index

Index selecting project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 temporary answers location . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Terminate Dialog property. . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 548, 554 amortization tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 mortgage refinancing tables . . . . . . . . . . . 238 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 409 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 - 189 angled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366, 372 bold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 bottom of cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 centering cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 changing color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 displaying horizontally. . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 edit label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369, 375, 603 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 horizontal orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 italics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 justifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 375, 378 middle of cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 190 strikeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 - 376, 378 subscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 superscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 top of cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 underlining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 vertical orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 text boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 409 - 410 box type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 375, 378 titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 - 376 text color changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487, 661 adjusting column format . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 adjusting column width . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 adjusting row format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 delimited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

liii

exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 - 662, 664 parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 - 662 Paste Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 QuickColumns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 text font changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 text orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Text Reformat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 text: style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 TextArt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 TGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 tick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 332 style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 - 367, 372 TIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 time formats international settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Timer alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 timer controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 611 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 adding format codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 AM/PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 applying formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 - 194 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 fill series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 format symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 - 194 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . 104 - 105, 193 - 194 headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 in footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 in headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 setting refresh intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 Tip-As-You-Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 macros in new applications . . . . . . . . 492, 501, 519, 523 title bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 title bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 519 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 showing full paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 375, 437 across cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 - 376

Index

Index changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 376 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435, 437, 441 - 442 on floating toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 toolbar buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 28 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 changing graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 changing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 74 displaying graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 displaying text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 QuickTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 rearranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 379, 702 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 74 default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 floating toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 macro buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 print preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 separators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 spreadsheet functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 490 analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Consolidator tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 correlation analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 covariance analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 cross tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 - 261 data forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 - 283 debugging macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

liv

Developer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Fit-As-You-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 f-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490, 492, 501 navigational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 - 257 Outline tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 pivot tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 QuickFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 - 223 QuickFit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 - 209 QuickFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 QuickSort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 - 218 Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Solve For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Sort tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 - 218 SpeedFormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Spell Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 t-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 variance analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Top 10 filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 top heading printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Toronto Stock Exchange (TSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 total of totals calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Total style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 181 - 182 totaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3-D cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 3-D rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 using Quick Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 totals adding lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 - 538 trace dependents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 trace errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 trace precedents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 tracing dependents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 formula cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 precedents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Index

Index tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 - 249 versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 - 249 tracking stock prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330, 332 trademark symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 transforming data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 278 transition effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 slide overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 slide shows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 - 459 transparent graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 transposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 columns and rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345, 348 analyzing statistical trends . . . . . . . . . . 349, 351 cyclical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 - 349 general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 353 predicting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 351 - 352 projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345, 348, 351 relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 seasonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 - 349 stock market volume data series . . . . . . . . . . 332 triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620, 622 troubleshooting OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 TrueType font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 trusted sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 TSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 t-test tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 turn off Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539, 541 two-way analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 TXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 typical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 dynamic macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 macro links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 496, 502, 565

U

unattaching controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 - 632 underlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

lv

text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 understanding dialog controls. . . . . . . . . . . . 581 undo move operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 restoring deletions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 222 action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 column filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396, 418, 420 Uniform Resource Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 units in milliseconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 unjoining cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 unprotecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 577 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 spreadsheet controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 updating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 276 - 277, 298 data on open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 HTML document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 Internet data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682, 689 OLE links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 OLE links automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 Web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 Web query data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 532, 709, 719 User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 5 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 user settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 As the PerfectExpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ask the PerfectExpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Contents tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 context-sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Copy Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Corel Reference Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 dialog box controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 edit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Find tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Index tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Index

Index online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5, 7 QuickCorrect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

V

VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 values . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 99, 203, 257, 268, 445 adjusting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 calculating maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 calculating minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 changing display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 changing to labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 displaying bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 final . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Fit-As-You-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 in formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 range of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 - 242 cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 - 255, 257 dependent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 independent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 - 243 matrix operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 one. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Solve For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 calculating population . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 calculating sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 variance analysis tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 variance charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 - 337, 373 VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490, 504 macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 VBA macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507, 510, 512 creating application objects . . . . . . . . . . . 517 debugging VBA macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 displaying the VBA toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

lvi

editing VBA macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 playing VBA macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 programming macros in Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . 508 starting VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 using the PerfectScript class to change a Quattro Pro document . . 512 using VBA methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 version control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 versions tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 vertical alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 - 189 vertical scroll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Draft View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Page Breaks View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Page View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 453, 676 custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 OLE objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 page breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 viewing charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 views changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 new views of notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 virus protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Visual Basic for Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 490, 504 volume data series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

W

WB1 . . . . . WB2 . . . . . Web . . . . . links . . . . query. . . . searching meta text Web browser

Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 654 . 654 574, 709 . 724 718 - 719 . 711

Index color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Web graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Web links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 dragging graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724, 726 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 linking graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 linking to notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 manually updating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 refreshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 refreshing automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 Web Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Web query. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 getting parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 inserting cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720, 722 inserting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 post parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 refreshing data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 saving as link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 search parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 setting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 setting refresh intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 sizing columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 turn off preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 updating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 526 weekday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 197 What’s This? Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 What-If tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 - 253 width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 wildcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 292 notebook links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 window charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364, 380 windows arranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 64

lvii

displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 64 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 62 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 splitting notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 wizard adding printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 WK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 WK3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 WK4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 WKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 WMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 word wrap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 WordPerfect characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 101 WordPerfect macro command browser . . . . . . . . . 502 WordPerfect Office 2000 . . . . . . . . . . 501, 539 - 540 words spelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Workgroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 697 cell comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698, 701 comparing notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 displaying cell comments . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 hiding cell comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 resolving conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 reviewing shared notebooks . . . . . . . . . . 697, 702 sharing notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 updating shared notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . 698 working directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 worst case scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 worst-case scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 WPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 WPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 WQ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 dynamic macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 macro arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 macro links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 macro subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Index

Index macro syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492, 502 WWW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524, 526, 574 www.corel.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 7 visiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

X

x-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 - 324, 365, 377 arranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 352, 366, 368, 377 logarithmic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 - 329 properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 zero line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 X-axis properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 XLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 654 XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 709, 715 publishing spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 using with Quattro Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 XML tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 creating automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 creating manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 XY charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 328 - 330

Y

y value . . y-axis . . . High-Low . labels . . secondary . variance . y-axis properties year . . . year 2000 . . y-intercept .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

zeros . . . . displaying . . hiding . . . zoom level. . . zooming . . . data . . . maps . . . print preview . z-test tools . .

. . . 628 309, 329, 365 . . . 332 . 373 - 374 . . . 374 . . . 336 . 372 - 374 . . . 197 . . . 105 . . . 243

Z

z-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356, 359 zero deviation chart . . . . . . . . . . . 336 - 337, 373 zero line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 - 337, 373

lviii

Index

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 192 . 192 . 192 . 473 59, 427 65 - 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427, 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Quattro Pro 9 Manual

Recommend Documents